THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


- 


fcl,  U. 


Copyright.  1893,  by  the  Author. 

HAVEN'S  COMPLETE  MANUAL 


PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


ADAPTED  TO  SELF-INSTRUCTION  AND  THE  USE  OF 
SCHOOLS  AND  COLLEGES. 


NO  OTHER  SHORT-HAND  BOOK  NEEDED. 


The  only  Treatise  on  the  Art  embracing  the  Secrets  of  the  Profession,  together  with  al! 
New  Discoveries  of  Value  up  to  date  of  Publication.    Presenting  within  its  pages  the 
Author's  "  300-Words-a-Minute  Short-Hand  Lessons,"    and  his  complete 
original  Routine  for  qualifying  Students  for  Office  Short- Hand  Positions 
within   three  months  from  date  of  first  lesson,  Court  and 
Convention  Reporting  in   six  to  nine    months,  making 
NO  failures  where  directions  are  followed. 


BY  CURTIS  HAVEN, 

EXPERT   LAW   AND   CONVENTION   RFPORTER,   JOURNALIST ,    AUTHOR,    AND   TEACHER 
OF   OVER   TWENTY   YKARS1    KXPKRIhNCK. 


PHILADELPHIA,  PA. 

PUBLISHED  BY  THE  AUTHOR. 

1902 


TO   HER 


AT  WHOSE  KNEE  MY   FIRST    CHILDISH  ATTEMPTS   AT  UNRAVELING  THE    MYSTERIES 
OF  THE  ROMAN  ALPHABET  \YERE    MADE;   WHO  SO   PRACTICALLY   DIRECTED 
MY    SCHOOL-BOY    STUDIES;    WHO  ASSISTED    ME   OVER    THE    ROUGH 
PLACES    OF    MY  EARLY   PHONOGRAPHIC    EFFORTS;   AND  BY 
WHOSE  PRACTICAL  GOOD-SENSE  AND  WISE  TEACH- 
INGS   I  SHALL  ALWAYS    BE    PROFITED  AND 
NEVER   FORGET:     • 


THIS  BOOK 

IS  MOST  RESPECTFULLY  AND    AFFECTIONATELY  DEDICATED 

BY 

THE  AUTHOR 


NOTE— The  above  dedication  was  written  by  the  author,  Curtis  Haven,  and  was  printed  in  his  first 

edition  of  this  book,  since  which  date  the  publisher  of  a  garbled  shorthand  work,  has 

had  the  audacity  to  copy  above  wording  in  his  own  book,  as  if  it  were 

original  with  him.    Even  a  dedication  is  not  sacred 

with  some  people. 


CONTENTS. 


PART  I. 

EXPLANATORY. 

PAGE. 

NECESSITIES  TO  A  PRACTICAL  SYSTEM  OF  PHONOGRAPHY 5 

PHONOGRAPHERS  vs.  STENOGRAPHERS 6 

SHORTHAND  HISTORY 7 

ABOUT  SHORTHAND  SKILL  IN  THREE  MONTHS 10 

THAT  WORD  "SYSTEM" 20 

PRELIMINARY  INFORMATION  FOR  THE  STUDENT 20 

300-WORDS-A-MINUTE 22 

F»ART  II. 

I  THE    INSTRUCTOR. 

>- 

LESSON  I.— DEFINITION 23 

PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY 23 

SPELLING  BY  POSITION 25 

LESSON  II.— TIMELY  SUGGESTIONS 28 

5                                SMALL  VISIBLE  LETTERS 28 

PEN  OR  PENCIL 31 

LESSON  III. — FINAL  LIST  OF  VISIBLE  LETTERS 32 

THE  COMPLETE  VISIBLE  ALPHABET 33 

THE  CIRCLES  S  AND  Z 35 

C,  X  and  Q 37 

taj                                HOLDING  THE  PENCIL 38 

E      LESSON  IV.— ADDITIONAL  USE  OF  THE  VISIBLE  VOWELS 39 

p                                COALESCING  VISIBLE  VOWELS 40 

VISIBLE  VOWEL  JUNCTURES — 41 

THE  INVISIBLE  ALPHABET 41 

IMPORTANCE  OF  SPELLING  BY  SOUND 43 

POSITION  VOCALIZATION 44 

LESSON  V.— THE  BEGINNING  HOOKS 4/ 

LESSON  VI.— FINAL  HOOKS 54 

THE  ST  AND  STR  LOOPS 58 

LESSON  VII.— THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE 61 

CONSONANTS  OF  DOUBLE  AND  TRIPLE  SIZE 61 

INVISIBLE  INDICATION  OF  PRECEDING  VOWELS 62 

LESSON  VIII.— THE  WORD-SIGNS 65 

POINTS  TO  REMEMBER 73 

(Hi) 


449514 


IV  CONTENTS. 

LESSON  IX.— COMMON  ABBREVIATIONS 74 

LESSON  X. — HOOKED  ABBREVIATIONS 81 

WORDS  INDICATED  BY  HOOKS 82 

SOUND  SYLLABLES 83 

Ns  VERSUS  S 84 

RESPECTING  PRACTICE  . 85 

LESSON  XI. — COMPOUND  ABBREVIATIONS 88 

PHRASE  POSITIONS go 

WORDS  COMMENCING  WITH  X  AND  Q go 

EXPEDIENCES 92 

LESSON  XII. — HALF-LENGTH  ABBREVIATIONS , 98 

THE  NUMERALS 99 

PROPER  NAMES  AND  INITIALS 103 

SYLLABLE  ABBREVIATION 105 

PREFIXES 106 

AFFIXES 107 

THE  USE  OF  THE  PREFIXES  AND  AFFIXES 107 

PHRASE  COMBINATIONS 109 

OMITTED  WORDS no 

PUNCTUATION 1 1 1 

REPEATED  WORDS n  i 

REVIEW  EXERCISES 1 16 

PART  III. 

THE  READER. 

GENERAL  DIRECTIONS 139 

BUSINESS  LETTER  PRACTICE 140 

ACTUAL  COURT  CASES 160 

THE  REPORTING 161 

THE  TRANSCRIPTION : 166 

CONVENTION  REPORTING 226 

EXPLANATORY  NOTES 260 

SPEECH  REPORTING : 271 

A  LECTURE  BY  FRANCIS  MURPHY 272 

SHORTHAND  SYSTEMS  ILLUSTRATED 2^0 

PART   IV. 

THE   VOCABULARY. 

TO  THE  STUDENT 282 

ALPHABETICAL  LIST  OF  WORDS  AND    PHRASES..  .   282 


PART  L 

EXPLANATORY. 


NECESSITIES    TO     A    PRACTICAL    SYSTEM   OF   PHONOG- 

RAPHY. 

Aside  from  the  ordinary  facilities  requisite  for  learning  or  teaching 
the  art,  there  are  three  absolute  necessities  to  a  practical  system  of 
short-handwriting.  They  are:  speed,  legibility,  and  an  almost  entire 
absence  of  arbitrary  rules  and  characters. 

Without  the  latter,  years — long  years — of  hard  study  and  harder 
practice,  combined  with  an  exceedingly  retentive  memory,  is  the  price 
the  learner  pays  for  his  skill.  Hence,  it  is  simply  fallacious  to  acquire 
stenography,  an  art  that  is  wholly  arbitrary  in  its  character,  and  even 
though  it  may  be  arranged  by  a  modern  author,  is  as  antiquated  as 
many  Indian  relics,  and  bears  the  same  relation  to  phonography  that 
the  olden  time  scythe  bears  to  the  latest  improved  mowing  machine. 

Without  speed,  vebatim  reporting  is,  of  course,  impossible;  therefore 
it  is  equally  a  waste  of  time  to  learn  any  old-style  phonography,  which 
though  easily  read  when  written,  makes  very  few  rapid  writers  and 
only  of  those  students  who  are  willing  to  give  many  years  to  the  closest 
practice. 

Without  legibility,  however,  even  speed  is  of  no  avail.  The  student 
should,  therefore,  be  on  his  guard  against  a  phonography  which  gives 
enough  speed  to  keep  pace  with  the  whirlwind,  but  which,  to  obtain 
this  speed,  uses  such  an  extended  array  of  contractions,  necessitating 
special  dictionaries  and  phrase  books,  that  ease  in  reading  one's  notes 
becomes  a  secondary  consideration.  Better,  far  better,  be  able  to  re- 

(5) 


6  HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 

port  little,  and  correctly  transcribe  that  little,  than  to  jot  down  with 
electrical  rapidity,  the  utterances  of  the  swiftest  speaker,  and  after- 
wards to  be  uncertain  of  the  accuracy  of  one's  transcription. 

The  author  is  not  cognizant  of  the  existence  of  a  method  of  shorthand 
writing,  previous  to  the  publication  of  this  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY, 
that  is  not  deficient  in  one  or  more  of  the  above  mentioned  respects. 
Here,  it  may  be  asked,— How  is  it,  then,  that  before  the  advent  of 
PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY,  there  were  professional  short-hand  writers, 
who  were  and  are  both  accurate  and  rapid?  To  this,  it  must  be  said, 
with  truth,  that,  as  with  members  of  other  professions,  these  talented 
and  skilled  ones  are  not  at  all  numerous,  and  it  is  questionable  if  any  of 
them  write  other  than  an  adulterated  phonography,  founded,  doubtless, 
upon  one  system,  but  interpolated  afterwards  with  scraps  of  other  pho- 
nographies and  the  phonographer's  own  particular  contractions  for 
particular  kinds  of  work.  This  ultimatum  has  been  a  necessity,  here- 
tofore, among  those  who  would  become  experts,  without  wasting  the 
best  portion  of  their  time  for  years,  in  dull,  monotonous  practice. 
It  was  to  bring  order  out  of  that  phonographic  chaos,  which  brought 
PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY  into  being;  and  the  author  has  every  reason 
to  believe  that  he  has  succeeded  in  accomplishing  his  purpose.  PRAC- 
TICAL PHONOGRAPHY  is  more  free  from  arbitrary  characters  than  any 
other  known  system  of  phonography,  contains  the  elements  of  greater 
speed*  with  less  practice,  and  is  as  easily  rea'd  as  the  most  legible: 
thereby  combining  the  necessary  virtues  of  all  its  predecessors  without 
being  shackled  with  any  of  their  bad  qualities. 

PHONOGRAPHERS  VS.  STENOGRAPHERS. 
To  classical  students  and  scholars,  these  two  names  imply  their  indi- 
vidual and  distinctive  meanings.  But,  it  is  a  singular  fact  that  educat- 
ed people  in  general,  among  whom  are  actually  included  some  short- 
hand writers,  do  not  know,  or  are  careless  of,  the  difference  existing 
between  these  two  classes  of  individuals;  in  fact,  do  not  know  that  any 
difference  exists.  Their  avocation,  if  not  the  result  of  their  labors,  is 
the  same,  and  people  generally  conclude  them  to  be  identical.  From 
this  error  arises  the  mistake,  common  even  among  those  who  know 
better,  of  universally  applying  the  name  "  stenographer  "  to  all  short- 
hand writers.  For  instance,  there  is  probably  not  a  single  case  wherein 
a  stenographer  is  employed  in  a  professional  capacity  in  any  of  ©ur  city, 

*  NOTE.— The  author  reported  the  speech  of  Mr.  Francis  Murphy  (See  Part  III.)  on  the  evening  of 
Us  delivery,  inexactly  six  minutes  by  the  watch,  making  an  average  of  over  268  words  per  minute 
while,  upon  special  occasions,  he  has  written  at  a  rate  of  over  300  words  a  minute. 


HAVEN  S   PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY.  7 

state  or  national  courts.  On  the  other  hand,  there  is  scarcely  any  court 
of  any  importance  that  does  not  employ  at  times  one  or  more  phono- 
graphers;  and  yet,  in  addressing  them,  the  learned  judge  and  counsel 
use  the  misnomer  of  "Mr.  Stenographer."  This  constant  acceptation  of  a 
wrong  term,  gives  many  persons  who  are  about  to  study  shorthand 
writing,  an  idea  that  stenography,  not  phonography,  is  the  art  to  learn; 
''For,"  they  ask,  "are  there  not  stenographers  employed  in  our  courts?" 
an  idea,  which,  as  above  explained,  is  a  dangerously  mistaken  one. 
In  many  instances,  phonographers  themselves  employ  the  word  steno- 
grapher in  advertising  their  business,  on  their  sign  or  card;  but  that 
does  not  alter  the  fact  of  their  being  phonographers,  however  much  it 
may  mislead  searchers  after  the  true  art.  Let  them  misuse  these  terms 
as  they  may,  however,  a  phonographer,  under  whatever  guise,  still  re- 
mains one  who  writes  by  means  of  signs  used  to  represent  the  elementary 
sounds  of  the  human  voice,  which  sounds  are  the  basis  of  all  spoken 
language;  while  a  stenographer  is  merely  one  who  writes  by  means  of 
a  horrid  conglomeration  of  arbitrary  written  characters  representing  the 
Roman  alphabet,  words  and  phrases,  and  who,  when  a  word  seldom 
used  and  which  he  has  never  before  heard  (and  consequently  never 
memorized)  is  spoken,  will  either  have  to  invent  a  sign  which  may  or 
may  not  conflict  with  some  other  sign  in  his  vocabulary,  or  run  the  risk  of 
losing  the  thread  of  the  discourse  while  he  writes  the  word  in  full. 

SHORTHAND  HISTORY. 

The  true  origin  of  rapid  shorthand  writing  is  involved  in  doubt.  It 
has  been  attributed  to  the  ancient  Hebrews,  the  Egyptians,  the  Chinese^ 
the  Greeks,  the  Romans,  and  the  ancient  people  of  Slavonia,  by  as 
many  different  historians;  the  claim  in  favor  of  the  Romans  being,  how- 
ever, much  stronger  and  more  fully  verified  than  those  of  other  nations. 

The  first  shorthand  writer  among  the  Romans  was  Marcus  Tullius 
Tiro,  a  freedman  of  Cicero's,  who  is  said  to  have  compiled  a  system 
and  used  it  successfully  B.  C.  63.  Tiro  taught  his  system  to  the  govern- 
ment scribes  of  that  day,  and  by  them  it  was,  in  turn,  imparted  to  their 
successors.  After  the  conquest  of  England  by  the  Romans,  it  was 
transplanted  to  British  soil,  undergoing  but  few  modifications  up  to  the 
seventeenth  century,  when  J.  Willis,  1602,  the  first  modern  shorthand 
writer  of  eminence,  made  considerable  alterations  in  the  alphabet  and 
in  the  application  of  its  junctures.  Mr.  Willis  was  followed  by  numer- 
ous authors,  many  of  whom,  however,  dropped  some  of  their  immediate 
predecessors'  and  substituted  Tiro's  original  characters;  so  that,  in 


8  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

looking  over  the  alphabets  of  modern  writers,  we  find  many  who  make 
use  of  several  of  the  original  Tironian  characters.  Carstairs,  in  1829, 
employs  a  Tironian  T,  and  even  as  late  as  1871,  Scovil  holds  to  the 
original  Tironian  C,  more  than  eighteen  hundred  years  since  Cicero's 
noted  secretary  invented  it. 

All  systems  of  shorthand  were,  however,  until  the  present  century, 
merely  stenographies,  (as  Scovil's,  Cross'  and  some  others  are  today;, 
and  being  stenographies,  therefore  devoid  of  many  advantages  of  speed 
and  legibility  peculiar  to  the  phonographic  systems,  all  stenographies 
being,  in  addition,  very  difficult  to  learn,  most  of  them  requiring 
from  five  to  ten  years  to  master  their  many  word- signs,  with  which 
all  systems  of  stenography,  ancient  or  modern,  are  encumbered. 

The  first  complete  shorthand  system,  having  a  phonographic  basis, 
was  invented  by  Mr.  Phineas  Bailey,  of  Chelsea,  Vermont,  1819,  who.it 
is  said,  upon  communicating  his  discovery  to  the  English  Parliamentary 
reporters,  produced  such  a  sensation  respecting  the  feasibility  of  phono- 
graphic writing,  that  several  of  those  gentlemen  gave  much  of  their 
spare  time  to  experimenting  on  Mr.  Bailey's  scheme,  such  experiments 
and  exchange  of  ideas  eventually  leading  to  the  formation  of  a  short- 
hand improvement  club,  the  forerunner  of  the  first  phonographic  asso- 
ciation of  England,  of  which  association  Mr,  Isaac  Pitman,  then  a  tutor 
in  a  private  academy  at  Wooten-under-Edge,  Gloucestershire,  became 
a  member,  because  of  his  interest  in  stenographic  matters. 

Mr.  Bailey  called  his  system  of  phonetic  shorthand  "  A  Pronounc- 
ing Stenography,"  and  it  is  to  that  little  work,  which  its  author  ex- 
plains in  its  title,  to  be  "  a  complete  system  of  shorthand  writing,  gov- 
erned by  the  knowledge  of  sounds,"  that  all  present  systems  of  phono- 
graphy owe  their  origin. 

The  members  of  the  first  phonographic  association  of  England, 
thinking  it  wise  to  publish  their  phonographic  conclusions,  Mr.  Isaac 
Pitman,  having  intimate  business  relations  with  Samuel  Baxter  &  Sons, 
the  noted  Bible  publishers,  became  their  spokesman,  or  editor,  and  ar- 
ranged with  Baxter  &  Sons  to  publish  the  suggestions  of  the  association, 
which  suggestions,  under  Mr.  Pitman's  editorship,  were  first  published 
in  the  form  of  a  diminutive  pamphlet,  entitled  "  Stenographic  Sound- 
hand."  The  name  "  Phonography "  was  not  given  to  Mr.  Pitman's 
publication  until  a  later  edition,  the  name  being,  most  probably,  taken 
from  the  publication  of  a  French  author,  who,  after  Bailey's  publica- 
tion, and  before  Pitman's,  issued,  in  France,  a  work  which  he  entitled 
"Phonographic,"  and  which  was,  as  far  as  investigations  have  gone, 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY.  9 

a  sort  of  a  combination  of  the  phonetic  and  the  stenographic  principles. 

Thus,  by  the  above  facts,  it  will  be  seen  that  Isaac  Pitman,  (whom 
so  many  supposed  to  be  the  "  father  ot  phonography")  in  reality  not 
only  did  not  invent  phonetic  shorthand,  but  was  not  even  the  first  to 
use  the  word  "  phonography"  (or  "phonographic")  as  a  term  for  the 
art.  Much  credit,  however,  is  due  him  for  his  labors  in  the  phono- 
graphic field,  which  have  been  by  no  means  slight;  though,  while  we 
acknowledge  his  labors,  we  must  not  forget  the  real  inventor,  Mr. 
Phineas  Bailey,  nor  those  from  whom  Mr.  Pitman  procured  the  material 
for  his  first  publication — the  members  of  England's  first  phonographic 
association;  nor,  in  later  days,  Mr.  Pitman's  numerous  associates  in 
business,  who  are  said  to  have  suggested  to  him  most  of  the  principles 
of  abbreviation  which  form  what  has  been  known  as  his  system  fot 
many  years. 

Accuracy  of  statement  is  o-ne  of  the  requisites  of  historical  record, 
and  such  accuracy  gives  to  Marcus  Tullius  Tiro,  a  Roman,  the  right  ot 
title  as  :'the  father  of  shorthand  writing;"  Mr.  Phineas  Bailey,  an 
American,  the  right  of  title  as  the  "  inventor  of  sound-writing/'  (i.  e., 
phonograph}-)  and  first  publisher  of  the  art;  Mr.  Isaac' Pitman,  the 
first  English  publisher  of  the  latter  art,  and  the  spokesman  through 
whom  the  public  obtained  a  knowledge  of  the  improvements  made  in 
the  art  by  Isaac  Pitman  and  his  co-laborers  up  to  1855.  Even  at  this 
latter  date,  however,  much  ot  the  stenographic  material  of  the  early 
writers  is  made  use  of  in  all  systems  of  phonography,  although  such 
stenographic  material  is  used  phonetically,  and,  being  used  phonetically, 
has  thereby  shortened  the  method  of  writing,  and  done  away  with 
numerous  arbitrary  word-forms. 

So  popular,  since  its  invention  by  Mr.  Phineas  Bailey,  in  1819,  has 
phonography  become,  that  many  authors  of  phonographic  works  have 
succeeded  the  inventor,  though  up  to  the  publication  of  this  volume, 
most  of  the  objections  to  the  Pitman  scheme  are  retained  in  other 
works;  many  authors  seeming  to  care  more  for  reproducing  old  ideas, 
than  for  printing  new  discoveries. 

Finding  the  old  scheme,  even  as  presented  by  other  modern  authors 
still  defective  in  many  ways,  the  members  of  the  profession  were,  be- 
fore the  publication  of  this  volume,  compelled  to  make  many  changes 
in  the  use  of  the  art  in  their  own  work,  and  such  of  those  changes 
(hitherto  secrets  of  the  profession)  that  really  further  speed  as  well  as 
legibility,  the  author  publishes  in  this  work,  in  addition  to  the  author's 
own  copyrighted  improvements,  which  are  not  to  be  found  in  the  pub- 
lication of  any  other  writer. 


io  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

ABOUT  SHORTHAND  SKILL  IN  THREE  MONTHS 

It  was  in  1875,  tnat  a  young  man  came  to  the  author  and  made  the 
astonishing  request  that  he  be  taught  the  art  of  shorthand  sufficiently 
for  office  use  within  the  space  of  four  weeks,  if  possible.  As  it  had 
taken  the  author  four  to  five  years  to  be  able  to  write  much  over  one 
hundred  words  a  minute,  with  two  hours  daily  speed  practice  during 
most  of  that  time,  he  was  very  much  astonished  at  this  request,  and 
whilsthe  looked  in  amazement  at  his  visitor,  the  latter  explained  that  a 
position  was  waiting  for  him  in  the  Pennsylvania  railroad  office  at 
Philadelphia,  if  he  could  master  the  art  and  gain  skill  in  the  time  men- 
tioned— about  a  month. 

The  author  frankly  told  this  caller  that  he  was  asking  an  impossi- 
bility, the  author  stating  his  reasons,  based  upon  his  own  experience. 
At  the  same  time,  the  author  was  also  (being  then  young)  conceited 
enough  to  add  that  he  thought  he  could  teach  the  art  in  as  short  a  time 
as  anybody  could,  and  he  would  be  glad  to  do  the  best  possible  under 
the  circumstances. 

At  that  time  there  were  no  organized  schools  of  shorthand,  and 
when  the  would-be  student  explained  that  he  was  willing  to  give  four- 
teen hours  a  day  or  longer  if  necessary,  to  the  study,  the  author  thought 
he  saw  some  opportunity  of,  at  any  rate,  considerably  shortening  the 
average  time,  and  he  told  the  caller  he  would  give  him  his  answer  the 
next  day. 

At  that  time  the  author  was  writing  a  sort  of  mixed  system,  with 
many  original  improvements,  having  found  the  conditions  of  none  of 
the  systems  suitable  to  the  very  difficult  work  he  had  to  do;  so,  that 
night,  the  author  hastily  looked  through  all  the  books  he  had  collected 
onshorthand  as  presented  by  different  authors,  and,  in  a  rough  way,  hur- 
riedly planned  twenty-four  lessons  to  contain  the  information  to  be  found 
in  Benn  Pitman's,  Isaac  Pitman's,  Graham's  and  Munson's  and  other 
systems  as  used  by  him  in  actual  work,  making  brief  notes  of  them  as  well 
as  memoranda  of  his  own  changes  not  to  be  found  in  those  books. 

This  result  the  author  explained  to  the  would-be  pupil  on  the  next 
day-  as  necessary  to  be  learned  in  order  to  insure  success,  and  between 
the  conceit  of  both  youthful  teacher  and  student,  the  task  first  asked 
for  by  the  pupil  was  actually  attempted,  and  the  young  student,  being 
extraordinarily  bright  and  giving  all  his  days  and  most  of  his  dreams  to 
shorthand,  seeing  phonographic  outlines  in  every  object — the  angles  ot 
houses,  trees  and  all  other  objects  meeting  his  vision — he  actually  mas- 


HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY.  II 

tered  all  the  crude  lessons  given  him  and  gained  sufficient  speed  within 
the  four  weeks  to  hold  a  very  easy  office  shorthand  position,  and,  as  the 
official  who  engaged  him  was  a  relative  and  disposed  to  be  lenient,  he 
took  the  position,  which  he  continued  to  hold  for  years,  arriving  by 
successive  promotions  at  a  very  important  and  remunerative  official 
position  with  the  same  railroad  corporation. 

After  taking  this  position,  the  young  man  in  question  had  a  great 
desire  to  obtain  skill  in  higher  work,  such  as  court  and  convention  re 
porting,  and  frequently  accompanied  the  author  when  the  latter  reported 
court  cases,  meetings,  political  speeches,  etc.,  for  the  newspapers  with 
which  he  was  connected.  In  such  cases  the  beginner  always  com- 
pared afterward  his  notes  with  those  of  the  author,  who  loaned  them 
to  him  for  that  purpose;  and  in  such  comparisons  the  student  came 
upon  what  are  probably  best  termed  the  "secrets  of  the  profession"- 
that  is,  little  speed  and  legibility  devices  which,  at  that  day,  were  to  be 
found  in  no  book,  but  which  the  author  had  met  with  in  his  intercourse 
with  brother  stenographers,  and  which,  after  years  of  use,  he  had  for- 
gotten were  not  in  the  text  books,  and  which  had  hence  not  been  in- 
corporated by  him  in  the  twenty-four  hastily-made  lessons  he  had 
arranged  for  that  first  "quick-time"  student.  For  instance,  all  works  on 
phonography  teach  two  forms  for  Th — light  and  heavy — but  the  pro- 
fession never  write  the  heavy  Th,  as  a  letter,  as  it  is  not  available  for 
rapid  work  and  is  unnecessary.  Following  the  old  rule,  the  author  had 
taught  his  student  the  heavy  Th  and  when  this  student  came  to  compare 
his  notes  with  his  teacher's,  he  found  that  his  teacher  always  used  the 
light  Th,  the  heavy  only  for  Thr.  The  oversight  was  explained,  when  the 
student  inquired,  "Why  not  teach  from  the  start  the  professional  out- 
lines in  every  case?  Because,"  he  added,  "I  have  become  so  accustomed 
to  writing  that  heavy  outline  for  Th,  that  where  I  have  not  time  to 
think,  I  am  sure  to  make  it,  and  it  is  hard  to  get  out  of  the  habit.  If  I 
had  been  taught  the  correct  outlines  from  the  start,  I  would  have  no  bad 
habits  to  overcome  and  would  gain  speed  easier." 

This  set  the  author  to  thinking,  and  he,  in  consequence,  requested 
the  student  thereafter  to  call  his  attention  to  every  deviation  of  that  and 
every  other  kind  between  his  (the  author's)  notes  and  the  student's.  The 
student  was  very  vigilant  in  this  respect,  and  the  twenty-four  crude 
lessons  (a  duplicate  copy  of  which  the  author  had  retained  for  himself) 
were  soon  corrected  to  contain  professional  outlines  only.  In  the  midst 
of  this  v/ork,  a  remark  of  the  student  over  the  difficulty  of  using  dis- 
joined vowels  with  exactness,  where  necessary,  led  the  author  to  invent 


12  HAVENS    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 

his  joined  vowels,  which  aided  so  much  in  the  way  of  imparting  the  re- 
porting style  of  writing  from  the  first  lesson,  that  those  lessons  soon 
became  condensed  to  fifteen,  and  later  to  twelve  lessons,  from  which 
twelve  lessons,  containing  every  device  known  to  the  profession,  all 
superfluous  information  was  eliminated.  Having,  in  the  meantime, 
secured,  through  the  success  of  the  first  student,  a  number  of  others, 
the  writer,  by  1882,  became  convinced  that,  by  a  properly  arranged  day 
course,  he  could  impart  skill  for  an  office  shorthand  position  to  any  or- 
dinary pupil  in  three  months'  time,  providing,  of  course,  attendance- 
was  regular  and  the  studying  done  as  directed. 

This  belief  has  since  been  proven  by  the  thousands  of  students  who, 
since  1882,  have  graduated  from  the  author's  schools  in  Philadelphia, 
New  York,  Chicago  and  other  cities,  graduates  who  hold  today,  many 
of  them,  the  highest  positions  possible  to  shorthand  writers,  some  of  whom 
would  not  have  been  able  to  have  at  all  mastered  any  other  system. 
And,  in  all  the  experience  of  the  author  in  teaching,  there  has  never 
been  even  one  failure  to  master  the  art  with  skill  for  an  office  position 
in  three  months,  where  attendance  was  regular  and  directions  regarding 
study  respected — necessary  qualifications  of  prior  education  being  included. 

These  facts,  bear  in  mind,  have  been  demonstrated  in  the  cases  of  thous- 
ands of  students,  and  herewith,  within  the  covers  of  this  book,  we  have  a 
proof  of  how  this  result  may  be  achieved  by  any  teacher. 

Part  II  of  this  book  contains  all  the  lessons — twelve  in  number — 
comprising  every  important  device  that  the  profession  knows  respecting 
shorthand,  and  far  more  than  most  professionals  ever  have  occasion  to 
use,  no  matter  how  important  their  work.  These  twelve  lessons  can  be 
readily  mastered  in  a  month's  time,  and  that  is  all  that  is  necessary 
for  success  in  three  months — counting  second  month  for  Reviews  A  to  K, 
in  Part  II,  and  half  the  Business  Letter  Practice  contained  in  Part  III  of 
this  book,  with  third  month  for  the  completion  of  the  Business  Letters, 
Actual  Court  Cases  and  Convention  Reporting  of  Part  III. 

Some  bright  students  can  learn  a  lesson  a  day.  Counting  for  them,  one 
day  for  each  lesson  of  Part  II,  gives  twelve  days  for  the  twelve  lessons, 
the  entire  theory  of  the  most  advanced  reporting  style  of  phonography 
being  thereby  learned  in  twelve  days.  The  A  to  K  Reviews  of  Part  II, 
pages  118  to  137  of  this  book,  require  ten  days  more.  Then  count  the 
eighteen  days  of  the  Business  Letter  Practice  in  Part  III  of  this  book  ;  add 
to  the  sum  obtained,  the  ten  days  of  the  Actual  Court  Cases,  the  one  day 
of  Convention  Reporting  and  the  one  day  of  Lecture  Reporting  given  in 


HAVEN'S     PRACTICAL     PHONOGRAPHY.  13 

that  same  Part  III  of  this  book,  and  the  result  is  a  total  of  only  52  days  for 
the  mastery  of  this  entire  book,  as  follows  : 

Entire  Twelve  Lessons  of  Theory  (Part  II) 12  days 

Entire  Collection  of  A  to  K  Reviews  (Part  II) 10  days 

Entire  Collection  of  Business  Letters  (Part  III)    .   .   .   .  18  days 

Entire  Collection  of  Court  Cases  (Part  III) 10  days 

The  Convention  Reporting  (Part  III) i  day 

Lecture  Reporting  (Part  III) .  i  day 


Total 52  days 

Parts  I  and  IV  of  this  book  do  not  count,  because  Part  I  is  only 
introductory  (or  discursory)  and  Part  IV  is  merely  intended  for  reference, 
and  even  for  that  purpose  unnecessary — all  the  information,  study  and 
practice  being  given  in  Parts  II  and  III,  whose  combined  result  may  be 
compassed  within  52  days  of  easy  work,  by  many  students. 

It  must  not  be  supposed  that  the  practice  exercises  of  Part  III 
contain  anything  new  aside  from  the  twelve  lessons  of  Part  II,  for  such 
is  not  the  case.  The  twelve  lessons  contain  every  principle  necessary 
for  the  execution  of  the  most  difficult  shorthand  work,  and  are  alone 
sufficient  for  same,  the  exercises  of  Part  III  being  therefore  merely  in- 
tended to  show  students  how  to  utilize  the  information  of  the  lessons  — 
entirely  a  matter  of  practice  for  them. 

Our  routine  is  not  a  process  of  cramming.  On  the  contrary,  just 
as  the  lessons  in  Part  II  commence  with  the  simplest,  smallest  sort  of 
Exercises.increasing  very  gradually  to  an  ordinary  size  at  the  last,  just 
so  the  Business  Letter  Practice  and  the  Actual  Court  Cases  of  Part  III 
commence,  the  first  day's  Letters  being  of  only  three  lines  each  and 
the  first  Court  Case  only  constituting  a  single  page  of  easy  work,  the 
progress  in  each  case  being  very  gradual. 

This  easy  commencement  in  the  several  degrees  of  practice  en- 
ables the  student  to  have  abundant  time  for  speed  practice  and  con- 
stant review  of  theory. 

While  the  exercises  of  Part  III  commence  with  exceedingly  brief 
examples  and  advance  but  gradually,  they  are  none  the  less  thorough. 
The  Business  Letters  represent  selections  from  over  forty  different 
leading  businesses,  familiarizing  the  student  with  most  every  sort  of 
commercial  term  or  phrase  he  or  she  is  apt  to  meet  with  in  any  busi- 
ness, presenting  the  best  shorthand  outlines  for  same;  and,  in  the 


14  HAVEN'S   PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 

same  manner,  the  Court  Cases  and  the  chapters  on  Convention  Report- 
ing treat  work  of  their  character,  together  with  copious  explanations 
in  print  descriptive  of  the  best  manner  of  doing  such  work,  with  com- 
plete particulars,  so  that  the  veriest  greenhorn  who  has  carefully  read 
same  and  the  contents  of  the  shorthand  plates  and  has  the  necessary 
speed  from  practice,  can  transact  the  work  required  in  all  branches  of 
the  business  of  shorthand  writing,  however  difficult,  with  as  certain 
accuracy  as  the  most  skillful  experienced  reporter,  from  the  taking  of 
the  first  word  in  shorthand  to  the  finished  transcription. 

This  has  been  the  aim  of  the  author  in  compiling  this  work,  the 
labor  of  many  days  and  sleepless  nights  for  a  period  of  over  twenty 
years,  backed  by  extended  professional  experience  in  every  branch  of 
shorthand  work,  and  as  a  teacher  of  many  teachers  as  well  as  many 
thousands  of  students  of  all  degrees  of  intelligence  and  education,  or 
the  lack  of  the  same. 

The  day  of  experiment  has  passed  respecting  the  result  of  a  course 
covering  three  months  upon  the  plan  of  teaching  demonstrated  in  this 
book.  There  are  alleged  three  month's  teachers  who  make  only  failures 
of  their  pupils.  But  they  are  those  who  attempt  to  accomplish  with 
other  text  books  the  results  only  possible  by  the  use  of  this.  With  the 
directions  of  this  book  strictly  followed,  failures  are  impossible,  providing, 
of  course,  the  student  has  the  necessary  common  school  education. 

To  illustrate  to  teachers  and  home  students,  the  plan  observed  by  the 
author  in  his  teaching,  to  insure  three  months'  graduations  for  office 
positions,  in  the  cases  of  all  ordinary  students,  the  following  routine  of 
Haven  Colleges  is  given.  It  can  be  used  by  the  student  at  home,  with 
just  as  good  results,  if  one  of  the  family  or  a  friend  will  dictate  the  speed 
practice  described  herein. 

THREE   MONTHS'   ROUTINE   OF   HAVEN   COLLEGES 

Qualification  in  three  months'  day  course  in  Shorthand,  requires  that 
the  student  shall  devote  all  of  his  or  her  five  hours  of  day  sessions,  to 
Shorthand  study  and  practice,  except  that  set  apart  for  typewriting  prac- 
tice and  the  15  minutes  daily  spelling  test,  which  all  students  of  any  course 
must  take  until  proficiency  in  spelling  is  demonstrated.  If  spelling  requires 
any  study  on  the  part  of  the  student,  that  spelling  study  must  be  done  out- 
side of  school,  as  the  guarantee  particularly  states  that  the  student  must  be 
a  good  speller  beforehand,  to  qualify  in  three  months  in  Shorthand. 

FIRST  MONTH— THE  LESSONS.  The  first  step,  when  the  day 
Shorthand  student  arrives  at  93.  m.,  is  to  explain  to  him  or  her  the 
first  lesson  of  this  Complete  Manual  of  Practical  Phonography,  the  teacher 
showing  student  how  to  practice  same,  and  telling  him  that,  if  he  finds  any- 
thing in  the  lesson,  while  he  is  practicing  it,  that  he  does  not  understand,  he 
is  to  go  to  the  teacher  at  once,  no  matter  how  busy  the  teacher  may  be,  and 
ask  about  it ;  not  to  proceed  with  anv  lesson  without  well  understanding  same. 

Similarly,  as  soon  as  a  student  thinks  he  has  mastered  a  shorthand  lesson,  his 
duty  is  then  also  to,  at  once,  without  delay,  inform  teacher  of  that  fact,  no  matter  how 


HAVEN  S     PRACTICAL     PHONOGRAPHY.  1C 

busy  the  teacher  may  be,  when  the  teacher  will,  at  first  opportunity,  dictate  that  les- 
son's Exercise  to  student,  and,  if  not  more  than  three  hesitations  in  writing  same  are 
made,  the  teacher  explains  the  next  lesson.  We  do  not  pass  more  than  three  hesita- 
tions, but  as  soon  as  a  student  makes  that  many ,  direct  him  or  her  to  restudy  that 
lesson  until  absolutely  perfect.  At  same  time,  we  explain  where  the  student  is  at 
fault,  answering  questions  about  doubtful  points,  or  reexplain  the  entire  lesson,  but 
do  not  let  anyone  proceed  with  next  lesson  until  the  one  in  hand  is  well  learned. 

EACH  STUDENT  TAUGHT  SEPARATELY. 

All  explanation  and  dictation  of  lessons  is  individual,  not  in  class — each  stu- 
dent being  taught  separately  from  first  lesson  to  the  last. 

Careful  watch  is  given  to  see  that  students  thoroughly  practice  the  shorthand 
outlines  to  each  lesson,  and,  therefore,  before  the  teacher  dictates  the  Exercise  of  any 
shorthand  lesson,  the  student  is  required  to  show  his  or  her  practice  sheets  contain- 
ing the  repetition  of  at  least  50  consecutive  writings  of  each  separate  outline  in  said 
shorthand  Exercise,  in  addition  to  the  complete  writing  of  said  Exercise.  This 
gives  facility  in  forma. ion  of  the  shorthand  characters — producing  skill  of  hand, 
which  no  other  plan  will  give.  We  do  not  permit  study  without  shorthand  practice. 

We  give  a  half-hour  of  typewriting  practice  in  the  morning  session  and  20  min- 
utes in  the  afternoon,  to  each  day  shorthand  student.  Experience  has  shown  us  that 
most  students  get  wearied  with  more  than  20  minutes  to  a  half-hour's  machine  prac- 
tice and  only  waste  any  excess  of  that  time. 

Night  students  receive  20  minutes  typewriting  practice,  and  as  much  more 
time  as  absence  of  other  students  may  permit. 

Our  typewriting  lessons  are  printed  in  our  fifty  cents  book  of  Business  Corre- 
spondence ;  are  fourteen  in  number,  twelve  of  them  containing  merely  words  and 
phrases,  beginningin  first  lesson  with  words  of  two  letters,  and  ending  in  twelfth  lesson 
with  words  of  twelve  or  more  letters,  each  marked  to  show  the  proper  fingering  to  use 
for  best  work  and  speed.  The  I3th  and  I4th  lessons  contain  two  business  letters 
— one  small  one,  wide  spaced  ;  and  one  large  one,  narrow-spaced — representing  the 
two  popular  styles  used  in  general  business,  they  being  also  radically  different  in 
such  points  as  address,  wording,  etc.  These  letters  are  explained  carefully  to  the 
student  and  the  first  must  be  written  without  an  error  or  erasure  and  approved  by 
the  teacher  before  the  second  letter  is  attempted,  when  that  must  be  gone  over  as 
many  times  as  is  necessary  to  make  one  absolutely  correct  copy  without  an  error  or 
erasure.  This  being  done,  the  student  thereafter,  when  at  the  machine,  copies  the 
business  letters  and  court  and  convention  proceedings  from  five  of  our  little  ten  cent 
Speed  pamphlets,  which  we  print  for  that  purpose,  and  which  we  sell  to.  students  for 
35  cents,  the  five  pamphlets  containing  sufficient  material  for  typewriting  practice 
during  balance  of  term,  as  they  should  be  written  entirely  through  several  times. 

At  the  end  of  typewriting  period,  the  student  returns  to  desk  and  continues  the 
study  and  practice  of  shorthand  lessons.  It  is  expected  that  the  full  day  student 
will  learn  thoroughly  the  twelve  lessons  of  our  Shorthand  manual  during  first  month 
of  day  attendance,  at  an  average  of  three  lessons  each  week,  so  as  to  begin  in  speed 
class  the  first  day  of  second  month  Those  who  can  learn  four  Shorthand  lessons  the 
first  week  will  be  that  much  ahead,  and  have  so  much  more  time  at  end  of  first 
month  to  master  the  longer  Shorthand  lessons  which  are  last,  and  to  review  same. 

SECOND  MONTH— REVIEWS,  ETC.  As  soon  as  the  Shorthand 
student  has  satisfactorily  recited  the  twelfth  lesson  of  our  Complete  Manual 
of  Practical  Phonography,  he  or  she  is  directed  to  review  all  those  lessors 
by  covering  the  shorthand  of  each  lesson's  Exercise,  and  looking  at  the 
Key  alone,  writing  it  in  shorthand,  the  student  then  comparing  his  or  her 
shorthand  writing  with  the  printed  shorthand  of  the  lesson  and  practicing 
until  perfect  every  mistake  made  therein,  as  shown  by  the  above  directed 
comparison,  being  sure  to  ask  teacher  about  any  outline  which  is  not 
clearly  understood.  This  will  not  require  more  than  two  or  three  days 
of  time,  and  is  a  necessary  preparation  for  speed. 

Immediately  after  such  review  of  the  shorthand  lessons,  the  student  is  directed 
to  study  whichever  one  of  the  A  to  K  review  pages  of  the  shorthand  manual,  as  ex- 


i6 


HAVEN  S     PRACTICAL     PHONOGRAPHY. 


plained  farther  on, 
is  set  for  the  speed 
class  of  a  day,  tvo 
days  ahead  of  that, 
on  which  the  les- 
son reviewing  is 
finished,  so  as  to 
give  student 
time  to  thoroughly 
prepare  that  parti- 
cular A  to  K  Re- 
view of  manual,  as 

those  Reviews  are  only  read  in  speed  class,  and  there 
must  not  be  more  than  three  errors  in  each,  in  writing 
them,   as  explained   farther  on.       The  day  for   his 
particular  A  to  K  Review   having  arrived,  the  stu- 
dent is  placed  in  speed   class   and  said  Review  read 
to  him,  as  explained  farther  on,  in  company  with  any 
other  students  who  have  also  prepared  for  it,  and  thereafter  he 
or  she  remains  in  speed  classes  full  time,  taking  whatever  can 
be  taken  of  the  other  matter  dictated,  however  little,  the  oVject 
at  first  being  merely  to  train  the  ear,  which  years  of  experience 
has  taught  us  should  be  done  at  as  early  a  date  as  possible,  if 
speed  be  desired  quickly. 

SPEED  PRACTICE.— The  order  of  dictation  at  each  morn- 
ing shorthand  speed  class  of  one  hour,  is  as  follows  :  First,  One  of 
the  A  to  K  Reviews  of  the  Shorthand  manual  ;  :d,  Dictation  of 
Business  Letters  of  the  Shorthand  manual  for  not  more  than 
20  minutes  to  students  entitled  thereto,  as  explained  in  detail 
farther  on,  beginning  with  the  student  least  advanced  in  same  ; 
3d,  The  reading  of  two  pages  of  the  numbered  business  letters  from 
printed  ten-cent  speed  readers  not  used  in  typewriting  practice. 
4th,  Dictation  of  actual  letters  to  graduating  students;  5th,  Read- 
ing of  two  pages  of  court  testimony  from  printed  ten-cent  speed 
readers;  6th,  Two  pages  cf  convention  from  same,  if  time  permits. 

GAINING  SPEED. 

In  afternoon  speed  class  of  40  minutes,  the  order  of  dicta- 
tion is  :  -First,  Reading  Court  or  Convention  pages  from  Short- 
hand manual  arranged  for  that  day,  as  explained  farther  on  ;  id,  Dictation  for  not 
more  than  20  minutes,  of  Business  Letters  of  the  Shorthand  manual  to  those  students 
who  did  not  receive  those  due  them  at  morning  speed  class  ;  3d,  Dictation  of  actual 
letters  to  graduating  students  who  did  not  receive  same  in  the  morning  speed  class  ; 
4th,  Short  original  lecture  tostudents  or  readingof  differentletters,  court  and  conven- 
tion, two  pages  each,  from  the  ten  cent  printed  speed  readers,  as  described  for  morning 
speed  class.  We  stop  anywhere  in  these  speed  readers  when  speed  time  is  up. 

At  night,  thecne  hour  of  speed  class  begins  with  onecf  the  A  toK  Reviews  from 
Shorthand  manual,  Business  Letters  of  the  Shorthand  manual  as  needed  following; 
next,  actual  letters  to  graduating  students,  if  any  ;  then  the  pages  of  court  or  con- 
vention from  shorthand  manual  set  for  that  night,  concluding,  as  far  as  time  permits, 
with  business  letters,  court  and  convention,  two  pages  each,  from  the  ten-cent 
printed  speed  readers  not  used  for  typewriting  practice. 

In  any  speed  class  we  read  the  A  to  K  Reviews  of  the  Shorthand  manual  at 
rate  of  20  words  a  minute  ;  the  Business  Letters  of  the  manual  70  words  a  minute  ; 
the  court  and  convention  pages  of  shorthand  manual  and  the  pages  from  the  ten  cent 
speed  readers  at  100  to  120  words  per  minute. 

The  ten-cent  speed  readers  used  in  speed  class  are  27  in  number  and  are  com- 
posed of  letters,  court  or  convention  work  different  from  the  5  pamphlets  which  are 
used  for  typewriting  practice.  Each  student  is  required  to  buy  these  27  speed  class 
pamphlets  as  soon  as  speed  class  is  entered,  so  that  he  or  she  may  have  them  for 
comparison  with  notes  taken  in  speed  class,  the  price  being  but  93  cents  for  the  27. 
If  purchased  at  same  time  as  the  5  for  typewriting,  the  price  for  both  is  one  dollar. 


HAVEN'S     PRACTICAL     PHONOGRAPHY.  17 

THE  A  TO  K  REVIEWS.— These  speed  class  Reviews  are  shown  on  pages 
n8to  137  of  the  Shorthand  manual,  and  one  of  them  begins  each  morning  speed 
class  and  each  night  speed  class,  unless  there  should  happen  to  be  no  students  at 
that  stage  of  progress,  the  Reviews  being  arranged  differently  for  day  and  night.  At 
night  school  they  begin  with  the  first  school  night  of  the  year  at  Review  A,  and  so  run 
on  each  night  until  Review  K  is  reached,  the  next  school  night  again  beginning  at  A  and 
so  on  continuously  throughout  the  year,  those  occurring  on  a  legal  holiday  being  set 
for  the  next  school  night,  and  the  others  following  in  order,  so  as  not  to  skip  any 
Review  nor  place  any  two  Reviews  on  any  one  night. 

There  are  exactly  ten  of  these  A  to  K  reviews,  equalling  two  full  weeks  of  day 
school  five  reviews  each  week;  so,  at  day  school  we  begin  the  first  Monday  in  the 
year  with  Review  A  and  follow  with  Review  B  on  Tuesday,  and  so  on  to  K,  begin- 
ning every  other  Monday  at  day  school  with  Review  A.  When  a  legal  holiday 
occurs  on  a  school  day,  then  we  omit  the  Review  which  would  fall  on  that  legal 
holiday  until  same  Review  occurs  two  weeks  later,  when  it  is  then  taken  by  student, 
its  omission  on  a  legal  holiday  at  day  school,  not  being  permitted  to  interfere  with 
the  student's  progress  otherwise.  The  student  hands  to  teacher  his  writing  of  these 
A  to  K  Reviews  as  soon  as  written  for  red  ink  marking  of  mistakes  after  speed  class. 

The  shorthand  student  does  not  necessarily  begin  with  Review  A.  The  A  to 
K  Reviews  are  set  for  certain  speed  classes  and  cannot  be  changed  to  suit  student. 
We  place  a  student  in  speed  class  the  second  day  after  he  has  concluded  his  first 
review  of  the  LESSONS,  no  matter  what  school  day  it  may  be,  and  on  that  day  or 
night — Monday,  Tuesday,  or  whatever  day  or  night  it  may  be — the  student  starts 
with  the  Review  set  for  that  date,  A,  B,  J,  K,  or  whichever  it  may  be. 

THOROUGHNESS  OUR  OBJECT. 

Whenever  there  are  more  than  three  errors  made  in  any  A  to  K  Review,  that 
Review  must  be  taken  again  when  it  reoccurs  ten  day  or  night  sessions  later,  and  so 
on  as  many  times  as  necessary  to  get  each  review  accurate  within  not  more  than  three 
mistakes.  Similarly,  when  the  student  be  absent  from  any  one  of  these  A  to  K 
Reviews,  he  or  she  cannot  receive  dictation  of  that  review,  until  it  appears  in  its  turn 
ten  school  days  or  nights  later.  No  two  Reviews  will  be  given  to  any  student  on 
same  day  or  night.  Over  three  mistakes  in  any  review  or  absence  from  that  review 
thus  delays  the  student's  progress,  as  it  is  only  absences  on  legal  holidays  that  are 
not  permitted  to  interfere  with  advancement .  This  rule  is  to  insure  perfect  attendance. 

While  the  student  is  taking  the  A  to  K  Reviews' said  student  remains  full  time 
in  Speed  Class,  both  morning  and  afternoon  (or  night,  if  a  night  student)  with 
the  more  advanced  students,  merely  taking  in  shorthand  what  little  can  be  taken  by 
him  or  her,  thus  training  the  ear,  learning  to  analyze  the  sounds  of  words  as  heard. 

On  whatever  date  the  shorthand  student  finishes  correctly  his  last  A  to  K 
review,  he  is  directed  to  again  review,  outside  of  speed  class,  the  LESSONS  of  the 
Shorthand  manual  from  page  23  to  page  115  inclusive. 

BUSINESS  LETTER  DICTATION.— When  the  student  is  through  the  second 
reviewing  of  the  shorthand  lessons,  he  or  she  is  told  to  study  carefully  the  two  busi- 
ness letters  shown  at  top  of  pages  144  and  145  of  the  Shorthand  manual,  representing 
the  first  day  of  Business  Letter  practice  ot  the  manual,  practicing  the  shorthand  out 
lines  of  same  enough  times  to  write  them  absolutely  correct  when,  dictated  by  teacher 
at  proper  period  of  next  day's  speed  class.  The  student's  writing  of  those  letters  isex- 
amined  after  speed  class,  mistakes  marked  in  red  ink  and  if  more  than  three  devia- 
tions from  the  shorthand,  as  shown  in  manual,  are  made  the  student  must  take  them 
again  the  next  day  ;  also  if  they  are  not  written  as  rapidly  as  70  words  a  minute. 

Similarly  with  each  day's  letters,  as  shown  in  the  manual, — the  student  con- 
tinues to  take  them  in  speed  class  daily  until  each  day's  letters  have  been  written 
with  no  more  than  three  mistakes  for  any  day  before  taking  the  next  two  letters,  and 
so  on  throughout  the  18  days'  Business  Letters  of  Shorthand  manual. 

No  student  is  advanced  to  the  Business  Letters  of  the  Shorthand  manual  until 
the  Reviews  A  to  K  are  absolutely  mastered,  as  before  described. 

Unlike  the  A  to  K  Reviews,  no  special  day  is  set  for  any  particular  Business 
Letters  of  the  Shorthand  manual ;  so  that,  as  soon  as  the  student  is  qualified  in  the 
A  to  K  Reviews,  he  begins  next  day  with  dictation  of  the  first  day's  Business  Letters; 
and,  as  students  on  that  plan  will  start  at  very  different  times  in  those  letters,  on  the 
day  one  takes  his  first,  another  student  maybe  on  the  letters  of  the  third  day,  etc. 


i8  HAVEN'S   PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 

If  there  are  more  students  in  those  letters  than  can  be  dictated  to  during  20  min- 
utes of  morning  speed  class,  the  others  should  be  given  their  letters  at  stated  period  of 
afternoon  speed  class  ;  and,  if  the  Business  Letters  of  the  manual  due  each  student 
that  day  cannot  be  completed  within  20  minutes  of  afternoon  speed  class,  then  there 
should  be  two  or  more  speed  classes,  sufficient  to  accommodate  all. 

Only  one  day's  letters  will  be  dictated  to  any  student  upon  any  one  day. 
Bright  students  who  feel  that  they  can  thoroughly  accomplish  more  work  than 
designated  for  one  day  by  the  Shorthand  manual,  can  easily  utilize  spare  time  by 
each  day  studying  ahead  the  court  and  convention  cf  manual,  as  explained  below. 

Each  shorthand  student  in  second  month  also  receives  regular  morning  and 
afternoon  typewriting  practice,  the  same  as  during  first  month. 

THIRD  MONTH— ACTUAL  WORK.  The  Business  Letters  of  the 
Shorthand  manual  which  the  student  has  not  finished  at  the  end  of  second 
month,  he  or  she  continues  with  this  third  month,  until  the  i8th  day  of 
Business  Letters  of  page  159  of  the  Shorthand  manual  is  satisfactorily 
completed  without  more  than  three  mistakes  any  one  day,  the  student 
remaining  in  speed  class  during  full  time,  taking,  as  far  as  possible,  every- 
thing read  therein,  whether  dictated  to  other  students  or  the  class  gen- 
erally, and  getting  also  the  regular  typewriting  practice  of  half  hour 
morning  and  20  minutes  afternoon  from  his  or  her  typewriting  pamphlets. 

COURT  AND  CONVENTION  PRACTICE.— When  the  i8th  day  of  Business 
Letters  of  page  159  of  the  Shorthand  manual  is  satisfactorily  completed,  the  student 
is  directed  to  again  review  the  twelve  LESSONS  of  the  Shorthand  manual  exactly  as 
done  just  before  entering  speed  class,  after  accomplishing  which,  the  student  is 
directed  to  study  for  the  next  day  the  shorthand  pages  of  court  or  convention  which 
are  to  be  read  from  the  Shorthand  manual  on  that  next  day.  We  read  all  the  court 
and  convention  pages  of  the  Shorthand  manual  each  month  at  afternoon  speed  class, 
beginning  the  afternoon  speed  class  of  first  Monday  of  any  month  with  the  reading 
of  page  177  of  manual,  page  179  on  Tuesday;  each  afternoon  reading  one  to  three 
pages,  as  designated  in  manual,  up  to  loth  day  (second  Friday);  reading  pages  219 
and  221  on  third  Monday,  223  and  225  third  Tuesday;  page  235  of  convention  on  third 
Wednesday,  and  thereafter  each  day  reading  one  page  of  convention  from  Shorthand 
manual  until  end  of  week  immediately  preceding  first  Monday  of  following 
month,  the  last  day  reading  sufficient  pages  to  conclude  the  reading  of  page  279  in 
manual,  so  as  to  begin  again  at  page  177  on  first  Monday  afternoon  of  each  month. 

At  night  speed  classes  we  begin  with  page  177  of  manual  on  first  Monday  night 
of  each  quarter,  January,  April,  July  and  October,  reading  one  page  per  school 
night  until  end  of  quarter,  which  will  nearly  finish  the  book,  reading  the  last  night 
of  the  quarter  as  many  additional  pages  as  maybe  necessary  to  complete  page  279, 
so  as  to  begin  each  new  quarter  at  night  speed  class  at  page  177. 

All  shorthand  students  who  have  finished  the  18  days  business  letters  of  the 
Shorthand  manual  should  thus  each  day  study  ahead  the  shorthand  pages  of  court 
or  convention  that  are  to  be  read  from  shorthand  manual  at  next  day's  speed  class, 
practice  which  other  students,  not  so  far  advanced  can  also  take  to  consume  anv 
spare  time  theymayhave.  Advanced  students  should  also  utilize  spare  time  by  trans- 
cribing their  shorthand  speed  class  notes. 

THE  SPEED  PAMPHLETS. -As  before  stated,  we  conclude  all  our  speed 
classes,  when  a  lecture  does  not  intervene,  with  the  reading  of  the  business  letters, 
court  and  convention  pages  from  a  collection  of  27  of  our  little  ten-cent  printed  speed 
pamphlets.  These  27  little  pamphlets  contain  j  100  business  letters,  80,000  words 
court  testimony  and  80,000  words  convention,,  making  99  printed  pages  of  letters,  103 
pages  of  court  and  loo  pages  of  convention — 302  pages  in  all.  We  have  the  pages  of 
those  speed  readeis  arranged  so  that  certain  pages  are  set  for  certain  sessions. 

Thus,  beginning  with  the  first  Monday  morning  speed  class  of  each  month,  we 
find  marked  for  that  speed  class,  the  first  two  pages  of  letters,  first  two  pages  of  court 
and  first  two  pages  of  convention.  Whether  we  finish  reading  those  first  six  pages 
or  not  at  morning  speed  class,  we  take  for  afternoon  speed  class  the  next  two  pages 
of  letters,  court  and  convention,  and  so  on.  taking  six  different  pages  each  speed 
class — 12  each  day — which  permits  us  to  read  new  matter  daily  for  a  month  of  25  day 


HAVEN'S   PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 


sessions,  if  a 
month  should  be 
that  long.  How- 
ever short  of  that 
number  we 
should  come,  we 
never  fail  to 
start  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the 
speed  readers  on 

first  Monday  of  each  month,  and  never  read 
at  any  session  any  unfinished  material  c  f  a 
previous  session,  always  beginning  at  the 
proper  pages  for  that  session.  At  night,  the 
contents  of  these  speed  readers  furnish 
enough  reading  to  last  four  months,  six 
pages  a  night,  so  we  begin  on  the  first  night 
session  of  January,  May  and  September,  with 
the  first  two  pages  of  letters,  first  two  pages 
court  and  first  two  pages  convention — six  pages — and 
thereafter  every  night  session  six  other  pages,  similarly 
treated. 

When  third  month  students  become  perfect  in  the 
18  days  Business  Letters  of  the  Shorthand  manual,  then 
it  is  their  duty  to  try  to  take  the  speed  reader  letters 
verbatim   as  fast   as   dictated  in  speed  class,  and  when 
they  succeed  in   taking   any   as   quickly  as   read,   they 
should  read  them  back  at  once  to  the  teacher  in  speed 
class.     In  reading  back  these  speed  reader  business  letters  in  speed 
class,  no  letter  must  be  read  which  does  not  contain  60  to  70  words. 
There  are  all  sizes  of  letters  in  those  speed  readers — some  containing 
only  20  or  25  words,  others  200,  though  the  majority  average  from  60 
to  1 20  words,  and  it  is  only  those  of  6}  and  over  which  will  be 
accepted  in   reading  back  letters  in  speed  class.     The  teacher  must 
be  informed  by  the   student  that  he  or  she  is  ready  to  read  just   as 
soon  as  the  teacher  has  read  the  last  word  of  a  letter  and  before 
teacher  has  begun  to  read  the  next  letter,  for  the  student  must  have 
written  the  last  word  immediately  after  the  teacher  pronounces  it. 

TEST  FOR  GRADUATION.  -As  soon  as  a  student  has  ac- 
quired sufficient  facility  to  read  back  promptly  two  or  three  letters 
at  several  speed  classes  without  a  mistake  or  hesitancy,  then  the 
teacher  dictates  three  actual  letters,  or  at  least  three  test  letters  not  printed  any- 
where nor  ever  read  before  in  the  presence  of  any  student  present.  These  actual 
test  letters  are  dictated  in  morniug  speed  class  at  a  natural  speed,  about  100  to  120 
words  a  minute,  and  the  student  is  not  permitted  to  ask  questions  respecting  what 
was  said  or  misunderstood  while  such  dictation  is  going  on,  nor  afterwards.  The 
student  under  the  test,  must  hear  every  word  and  get  it  correctly  in  shorthand 
without  any  interruption  or  question,  the  taking  of  those  three  test  letters  occupy- 
ing about  three  minutes  of  speed  class,  at  either  morning,  afternoon  or  night  sessions, 
the  student's  shorthand  notes  being  at  once  handed  to  the  teacher,  who  retains 
them  until  that  student's  turn  for  typewriting  machine  arrives,  when  the  student 
has  the  notes  handed  back  by  teacher,  together  with  three  letter  sheets,  and  the 
student  is  to  write  those  three  letters  in  typewriting  at  rate  of  30  to  40  words  a  minute 
without  a  mistake  of  any  kitid,  either  in  wording,  punctuation,  spelling,  etc 

If  student  be  not  thus  successful  at  first  attempt,  three  new  letters  will  be 
similarly  dictated  to  student  on  succeedingschool  days  or  nights,  at  morning,  afternoon 
or  night  sessions,  and  as  soon  as  the  requirements  are  all  fulfilled,  but  not  before,  the 
student  has  earned  diploma,  and  will  be  given  same  upon  payment  of  fee.  The  ordi- 
nary student  can  accomplish  this  by  the  end  of  the  .third  month. 

Students  by  mail  may  take  this  test  at  home,  if  certified  before  Notary  Public. 

Above  test  is  for  office  positions.  To  gain  speed  for  court  and  convention  reporting,  it  is  merely 
necessary  to  continue  same  speed  class  practice  daily  until  required  speed  is  attained — a  few  more  months. 


20  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

THAT  WORD  "SYSTEM." 

The  public  sometimes  use  the  word  "system"  as  though  each  book 
on  phonography  had  nothing  in  common  with  the  others, when  the  fact 
is  that  they  are  all  built  from  the  same  parent  stem  and  each  simply 
represents  the  art  in  its  best  form  at  the  time  the  author  of  each  book 
first  introduced  his  work  to  the  public.  For  instance,  when  Isaac  Pit- 
man, in  1837,  printed  his  first  manual,  it  represented  the  art  as  it  was 
written  by  the  best  writers  then,  and  that  author  has  noL  greatly  im- 
proved his  books  since.  In  1855,  Ben  Pitman  printed  his  book  repre- 
senting the  art  nearly  as  it  was  written  in  that  day;  though  Graham, 
three  years  later,  more  thoroughly  illustrated  the  art  as  used  by  the 
swiftest  writers  at  that  period,  the  art  having  wonderfully  improved 
among  the  profession  since  Isaac  Pitman's  first  work.  Next,  Munson 
and  Marsh,  in  1868,  published  works  showing  improvements  made  by 
the  profession  up  to  that  date.  Since  the  books  of  those  authors 
appeared,  however,  the  art  has  progressed  in  a  greater  ratio  still,  yet 
those  books,  though  in  their  new  editions  bearing  the  date  of  each 
year  since,  have  not  kept  pace  with  the  improvements  made  by  the 
profession.because  it  would  necessitate  great  expense  in  changing  their 
book  plates;  so  they  have  printed  year  in  and  year  out  mostly  from  the 
same  old  plates,  or  duplicates  of  them,  that  their  first  editions  con- 
tained, and  thus,  though  new  editions  are  published  each  year,  yet  said 
editions  only  represent  the  art  in  the  days  when  those  authors  first 
printed  their  books,  so  that  those  authors  each  represent  phonography 
as  it  was  written  professionally  when  they  first  essayed  authorship,  but 
the  profession  has  long  ago  left  them  behind.  And,  as  many  other  mod- 
ern authors  who  were  not  reporters,  but  mere  theorists,  have  simply 
copied  the  old  editions  of  the  above  named  authors  or  their  contempo- 
raries, this  book  is  therefore  the  only  one  representing  the  professional 
outlines  as  used  by  the  best  professional  writers  of  all  "systems"  at  the 
present  day.  It  is  not  a  new  "system,"  but  the  latest  professional 
representation  of  the  art  as  used  by  the  best  writers. 

PRELIMINARY  INFORMATION  FOR  THE  STUDENT. 

It  is  necessary  that  the  student  be  impressed  with  the  fact  that  he 
is  to  write  only  by  sound.  It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  phon- 
ographic signs  given  in  the  lessons  are  not  substitutes  for  the  letters  of 
the  Roman  alphabet,  but  are  simply  signs  used  to  represent  the  differ- 
ent elementary  sounds  of  the  human  voice.  Hence,  the  difference  be- 
tween the  names  of  the  phonographic  Visible  Alphabet  and  the  usual 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  21 

A,B,C,or  Roman  Alphabet.  For  this  reason, when  the  student  desires  to 
spell  the  words  mew,  sigh,  etc.,phonographically,he  must  not  expect  to 
spell  them  in  accordance  with  the  English  and  American  dictionaries. 
He  must  govern  himself  entirely  by  the  elementary  sounds  contained 
in  each  word.  He  will  then  correctly  spell  them;  m-u,  mew,  s-i,  sigh. 

In  explaining  this  to  an  early  student,  the  author  was  asked: 

"If,  in  shorthand,  we  spell  by  sound  entirely,  then  I  suppose  there 
are  some  words  which  may  be  spelled  by  the  use  of  only  one  letter,like, 
for  instance,  spelling  the  word  be  by  the  use  of  the  letter  B  alone." 

To  which  the  author  replied:  "Certainly,  the  shorthand  letter  B 
spells  the  word  be  quite  as  correctly  as  it  represents  the  letter  B.  In 
fact  it  spells  bee  equally  well. 

STUDENT — (in  dismay.)  Then,  suppose,  in  the  future,  I  desired, 
or  was  required,  to  read  some  other  phonographer's  writing,  or  even 
my  own  that  had  lain  by  for  some  time  and  perhaps  become  almost  or 
quite  forgotten,  and  that  in  those  notes  occurred  the  shorthand  sign 
for  B,  how  could  I  be  certain  as  to  whether  it  was  written  for  the  words 
be.  bee,  or  was  simply  a  letter? 

AUTHOR — Yours  is  a  very  natural  question.  Allow  me  to  answer 
it  by  asking  one.  The  sounds  of  those  two  words  and  the  letter  being 
precisely  the  same,  .how  would  you  know  which  was  meant  should  you 
hear  them  spoken  by  some  one  addressing  you? 

STUDENT. — The  subject  of  conversation  or  the  meaning  of  the  sen- 
tence in  which  they  occurred  would  inform  me. 

AUTHOR. — Exactly.  Besides,  neither  of  them  can  be  employed  in 
the  same  sense.  But  suppose,  for  illustration,  either  word  (be  or  bee) 
or  the  letter,  were  spoken  alone,  without  any  attendant  conversation, 
would  you  understand  which  was  meant? 

STUDENT. — Possibly  not. 

AUTHOR. — Then  you  must  not  expect  more  of  phonography  than  of 
spoken  language,  than  which  nothing  is  more  universally  useful.  It  is 
the  province  of  the  former  simply  to  photograph  the  latter.  One 
thought  more:  The  subject  of  conversation  was  mentioned. as  being  a 
guide  to  the  meaning  of  spoken  words;  or, in  other  words,the  context  is 
the  key.  This  is  often,  though  not  always,  the  case  in  phonography. 
Words  preceding  or  following  a  doubtful  word  will  invariably  deter- 
mine its  meaning.  To  be  sure,  in  this  particular  instance,  the  words 
may  be  isolated  and  have  no  connection  with  each  other,  as  in  regular 
sentences.  But,  let'us  take  a  sentence.  Just  for  sake  of  illustration, 
suppose,  instead  of  declaring  to  your  sister — "Katie,!  envy  you," — you 


J2  HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 

merely  repeat  to  her  the  six  letters/  'K-T,  I  N-V  U," — is  it  not  possible 
that  Katie  would  comprehend  your  meaning  quite  as  well  ?  Undoubtedly 
she  would,  because  the  sound  is  the  same  in  both  instances,  and  there, 
fore  the  meaning  is  the  same.  People  do  not  spell  words  when  they 
speak.  Custom  has  determined  that,  in  correct  long-hand  writing,  the 
dictionaries  must  be  regarded  as  containing  the  standard  rules  for 
spelling;  but  the  student  is  reminded,  that, in  photographing  the  utter- 
ances of  a  speaker,  the  two  phonographic  signs  V  and  U  spell  view 
quite  as  well  as  Webster's  unabridged  dictionary  can,  even  with  the 
help  of  four  letters. 

The  foregoing  illustration  of  spelling  by  sound,  commencing  on  preceding  page,  was  written  by 
the  author,  Curtis  Haven,  and  was  printed  by  him  in  the  first  edition  of  this  book,  but  it  has  since  then 
been  copied,  without  permission,  by  the  publisher  of  a  garbled  shorthand  book,  and  printed  in  his  book 
as  if  original  with  him,  together  with  other  portions  of  this  book,  original  only  with  the  author,  Curtis 
Haven.  This  notice  is  given  here,  so  that  persons  who  should  see  both  books,  will  understand  this  one 
alone  deserves  the  credit  for  originality.  Every  sentence  in  this  book  is  strictly  original  with  the 
author,  Curtis  Haven,  and  if  any  portion  of  same  should  be  found  in  any  other  book,  the  reader  will 
know  that  it  is  copied  from  this  book. 

300-WORDS-A-MINUTE 

The  lessons  of  this  book  were  originally  known  as  "Haven's  300- 
Words-a-Minute  Shorthand  Lessons",  and  the  author  has  been  severely 
criticised  for  using  that  title,  his  critics  claiming  that  the  public  might 
imagine  that  the  title  meant  that  the  lessons  would  give  that  speed  to  any 
student  in  three  months.  To  this  the  author  begs  to  say  he  does  not  agree 
to  give  a  speed  of  3OO-words-a-minute  in  three  months,  nor  in  any  set  time. 
Very  few  professionals  have  it  or  require  it,  many  speakers  not  using  over  1 20 
or  1 50  words  a  minute.  For  office  work  70  to  1 20  words  a  minute  is  the  mini- 
mum and  maximum.  It  is  this  speed  that  can  be  given  ordinary  students  in 
three  months,  and  the  volumes  of  praise  which  business  men  have  given  re- 
specting the  superiority  of  work  of  Haven  quick-time  graduates  over  the 
long-time  ones  of  other  schools,  prove  the  value  of  this  plan  of  teaching. 

These  lessons  are  known  as  '  '300- Words-a- Minute  Shorthand  Lessons  " 
because  they  contain  abbreviating  material,  sufficient,  with  proper  practice, 
to  give  that  great  speed  to  those  few  persons  who  have  a  natural  aptitude 
for  the  art,  whose  brains  and  hands  act  very  quickly  by  nature,  and  who 
are  well  educated.  Once  in  a  while  a  shorthand  reporter  meets  with  a 
speaker  who  talks  at  the  rate  of  180  to  200  words  a  minute,  sometimes  250 
a  minute,  and  there  have  been  a  few  public  speakers  like  Philip  Brooks, 
whom  reporters  writing  the  Pitman  and  other  systems  could  not  report 
verbatim,  because  the  speaker  uttered  300  or  more  words  a  minute  at  times, 
the  system  of  shorthand  written  by  the  reporter  not  being  capable  of  that 
speed — for  most  systems  fail  at  anything  over  150  words  a  minute.  But 
Haven's  Practical  Phonography  contains  the  speed  elements  of  fully  300 
words  a  minute,  as  the  author  and  numbers  of  his  brightest  pupils  have  re- 
peatedly written  at  that  rate  and  over,  at  many  public  tests  ;  but,  it  cannot 
be  done  by  other  systems,  and,  as  before  stated,  is  seldom  necessary.  The 
point  that  all  would-be  students  should  remember,  is  that  any  speed  desired 
is  much  easier  obtained  from  lessons  containing  the  possibility  of  300  words 
a  minute  as  a  maximum,  than  from  those  old  lessons  used  by  most  teachers, 
which,  at  their  best,  have  only  the  elements  of  150  words  a  minute. 


PART  IL 

THE     INSTRUCTOR. 


LESSON  I. 

DEFINITION. 

Shorthand  writing  is  of  two  kinds — stenography  and  phonography. 

Stenography  was  the  shorthand  of  the  ancients,  and  is  not  much  in  use 
today.  It  involves  the  learning  of  hundreds  of  arbitrary  signs  for  words, 
and  is  very  difficult  to  master. 

Phonography  is  the  shorthand  of  the  present,  and  is  the  one  employed 
by  nine  of  every  ten  shorthand  reporters,  although  all  shorthand  writers 
are  called  stenographers,  because  the  old  name  still  clings  to  them.  Phonog- 
raphy is  the  only  scientific  shorthand,  and  is  quite  easily  learned,  if  the 
instructions  contained  in  these  lessons  are  followed. 

The  name  phonography  is  a  union  of  two  Greek  words, /&?#<?  and  graphe, 
the  former  meaning  sound  (or  voice),  and  the  latter  a  writing,  thus  making 
the  actual  definition  of  phonography  to  be  sound  writing  or  voice  writing, 
that  is,  to  write  the  sounds  of  the  voice.  The  science  was  given  that  name 
because,  in  writing  phonography,  spelling  is  done  by  actual  sound,  not 
according  to  the  usual  way  of  spelling.  For  instance,  the  dictionaries 
would  spell  the  word  nigh  this  way — n-i-g-h — using  four  letters.  But  in 
phonography  we  would  spell  nigh  according  to  its  sound,  thus,  n-i.  And  all 
other  words  on  the  same  plan,  thus,  n-a,  nay,  n-u,  knew,  etc.,  etc.,  etc.  Hence 
it  will  be  seen  that  phonography  is  to  the  human  voice  what  photography  is 
to  the  features — one  places  on  paper  a  likeness  of  our  form,  the  other  a  like- 
ness of  our  speech.  Spelling,  as  taught  in  school,  does  not  do  this;  neither 
does  stenography.  Therefore,  they  are  deficient  in  speed.  But  phonog- 
raphy, by  saving  time  in  spelling,  gives  speed  in  two  ways:  i.  e.,  both  in 
the  use  of  less  letters,  and  in  briefer  signs. 

PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

The  elements  of  Haven's  Practical  Phonography  are  two  alphabets,  one 
visible  and  the  other  invisible — a  portion  of  the  visible  alphabet  being  pre- 

(23) 


24  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

sented  in  the  following  sixteen  signs: 


\ 

p 

^_   r 

\ 

B 

"^    V 

1 

T 

/        rp-,    pronounced  ITH  orTM 
1  n  [_^5  in  Mitti  or  These. 

1 

P 

)        5 

,*,   [Pronounced   TCHAY\ 
OH  [as  jti  Watch  or  CJi&irJ 

,      CM    [Pronounced  ISHorZffJZ 
-/     O-"  L*25  in  -?V5A  or  Azure. 

/ 

J 

r  L 

K 

^   M 

— 

*    [Pronounced.  GrAY\ 
«    Las  --2'71  Gain,     j 

v   N 

The  first  column  of  shorthand  letters  in  above  list  is  composed  of  simple 
straight  lines  written  alternately  light  and  heavy  and  slanting  in  pairs  at  four 
different  angles.  The  other  column  of  shorthand  letters  are  all  lightly 
written  curves,  each  one  of  them  being  a  quarter  of  a  circle,  as  the  following 
diagrams  containing  all  the  letters  above  given  will  show: 


M 

L 

V 

Th   (Q)    S 

S 

K 

F 

3h 

By  the  above,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  straight  letters  are  each  one-quarter 
of  a  complete  square,  just  as  the  curved  letters  are  each  a  quarter  of  a 
complete  circle;  though  it  will  also  be  seen  that  the  two  circles  and  squares, 
in  above  diagram,  are  each  divided  into  different  quarters  from  the  other. 
This  is  illustrated  still  further  by  the  diagram  below: 


M 

T 

Th  (>?)     S 

K    Gy    Gay 

N 

D 

The  straight  characters  are  readily  enough  distinguished  as  to  slant,  but 
sometimes  beginners  are  apt  to  make  mistakes  in  relation  to  the  slant  of  the 
curves,  and  in  order  to  impress  the  direction  of  the  curves  well  upon  the 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  2-r 

beginner's  mind,  the  following  diagrams,  showing  the  exact  slant  of  each  curve 
in  comparison  with  the  straight  letters,  is  given: 


T 
Thd)    5 


From  above,  the  student  will  observe  that  the  points  of  the  curved 
letters  F  and  V  begin  and  end  at  the  same  position,  regarding  the  line,  as 
the  straight  letter  P  would;  that  the  curves  Th  and  S  begin  and  end  in 
similar  positions  to  T,  L  and  Sh  to  Chay,  and  M  and  N  to  K. 

Pronounce  the  double  letters  Ch,  Th,  and  Sh,  as  indicated  in  the  list: 
Chay,  Ith,  and  Ish— never  C-h,  T-h,and  S-h.  The  sound  for  G  should  also 
be  always  pronounced  Gay.  These  four  signs  require  special  pronunciation, 
for  reasons  which  will  be  better  appreciated  by  students  as  they  progress. 

Always  write  the  signs  for  K,  Gay,  M,  and  N  from  left  to  right. 

Write  L  upward. 

The  other  signs  in  foregoing  list  are  written  downward. 

Other  letters  of  the  visible  alphabet  will  be  given  in  subsequent  lessons. 

SPELLING   BY   POSITION. 

The  invisible  alphabet  also  need  not  necessarily  be  altogether  presented 
in  this  first  lesson,  but  its  use  and  three  of  its  letters  are  best  given.  The 
invisible  alphabet  is  really  a  method  of  spelling  by  position.  That  is,  writing 
a  visible  letter  (any  one  of  those  in  foregoing  list,  for  instance)  in  a  certain 
position  in  accordance  with  the  ruled  line  of  the  paper  you  are  writing  upon, 
and  by  that  position  indicating  after  the  written  letter  the  presence  of  some 
other  letter  not  written.  The  letters  written  to  indicate  invisible  letters 
are  called  consonants;  the  sounds  indicated  without  being  written  are  called 
vowels.  Three  of  the  vowel  sounds,  which  are  thus  indicated  invisibly,  are 
I,  A,  and  U,  the  mode  of  indicating  them  being  to  write  a  consonant  above 
the  ruled  line  of  your  writing  paper  when  you  desire  to  indicate  I;  write  the 
consonant  resting  on  the  line  to  indicate  A;  and  strike  the  consonant 
through  or  place  beneath  the  line  to  indicate  U. 

For  instance,  suppose  you  desired  to  write  the  word  nigh  in  shorthand: 
That  word  in  shorthand  would  be  spelled  with  only  the  two  letters  n  and  i, 
thus,  n-i,  nigh.  Now,  N  is  a  visible  consonant,  as  will  be  seen  by  referring 
to  your  list  of  letters  at  the  beginning  of  this  lesson.  And  we  have  just 
said  that  the  sound  of  I  may  be  indicated  after  a  written  letter  without 
writing  I,  by  placing  any  visible  consonant  above  the  line  of  the  paper  you 
are  writing  upon.  So,  by  simply  placing  our  shorthand  letter  N  above  the 


20  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

line,  we  indicate  the  sound  of  I  after  it,  and  thereby  spell  n-i,  nigh,  as  with 
sign  i  in  Exercise. 

Then,  in  accordance  with  the  rule  for  indicating  the  sound  of  the  letter 
A,  without  writing  it,  we  have  only  to  place  our  letter  N  on  the  line,  and  we 
invisibly  indicate  after  N,  the  sound  of  A,  thus  spelling  n-a,  nay,  as  with 
sign  2  in  Exercise. 

Finally,  by  writing  N  under  the  line  of  our  paper,  we  indicate  after  N 
the  sound  of  U,  and  thus  spell  n-u,  knew,  as  with  sign  3  in  Exercise. 

By  the  above  description,  the  student  sees  that  it  is  ihe  position  of  the 
written  consonant  that  indicates  the  sound  of  the  /^visible  letter;  and,  there- 
fore, any  consonant  of  the  visible  alphabet  may  thus  /^visibly  indicate  the 
sound  of  I  after  it,  if  such  written  letter  be  placed  above  the  line  of  writing; 
A,  if  placed  on  the  line;  and  U,  if  struck  through  or  placed  below  the  line. 

The  horizontal  letters  K,  Gay,  M,  and  N  can  not  be  written  through 
the  line,  which  is  why  they  are  written  under  the  line  to  indicate  U  after 
them,  the  other  letters  being  easily  struck  through  the  line,  as  in  signs  6,  7, 
15,  17,  etc.,  in  Exercise. 

The  dotted  lines  in  our  Exercise  represent  the  ruled  lines  of  ordinary 
writing  paper. 

If  the  student  has  carefully  read  all  of  Part  I,  of  this  book,  especially 
noted  the  explanation  under  heading  of  "  Preliminary  Information,"  on 
pages  20  to  22,  and  also  memorized  the  sixteen  letters  so  far  given  of  the 
Visible  Alphabet,  commencing  this  lesson,  he  or  she  is  now  ready  to  pro- 
ceed with  the  study  of  Exercise  I,  at  end  of  this  lesson,  which  should  be 
done  in  accordance  with  the  following  plan: 

1.  Read  carefully  the  entire  Exercise,  tracing  over  with  a  dry  pen  each 
shorthand  letter,  as  you  read  it.     The  tracing  helps  to  train  your  hand  to 
a  familiarity  with  the  correct  formation  of  the  shorthand  letters. 

2.  Write  with  pencil  each  separate  word  or  combination  of  Exercise  at 
least  twelve  consecutive  times  on  your  practicing  paper. 

3.  Transcribe  the  entire  Exercise  into  long  hand,  afterward  comparing 
your  interpretation  with  the  Key  below  Exercise.     Repeat  until  perfect. 

4.  Looking  only  at  the   Key,  write  it  into  shorthand,  afterward  com- 
paring your  shorthand  writing  with  the  shorthand  of  the  printed  Exercise, 
repeating  this  wholesome  practice  until  satisfactory,  but  without  attempting 
to   write  faster  than  you  can  write  well.     Speed  will   come    with   careful 
practice. 

These  rules  are  alike  applicable  to  every  lesson  of  this  course.  And,  in 
addition,  in  private  study,  the  name  of  each  sign  should  be  repeated  aloud 
as  it  is  written,  a  proceeding  which  will  train  the  ear  to  recognize  the  proper 
tound,  and,  at  the  same  time,  train  the  hand  to  form  the  sign  upon  the  writer 
hearing  the  sound  represented. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  27 

Use  a  soft  pencil  for  practicing,  holding  it  between  the  first  and  second 
finger,  keeping  it  in  place  by  the  thumb.  This  position  enables  the  student 
to  write  with  more  ease  than  by  holding  the  pencil  between  the  thumb  and 
first  finger,  besides  insuring  quicker  writing  generally,  and  more  perfectly 
formed  shorthand. 

The  best  pencil  for  shorthand  practice  or  professional  use  is  a  soft 
medium  pencil,  called  by  different  manufacturers  No.  2,  or  SM;  and  the 
best  paper  is  ordinary  ruled  foolscap,  providing  it  does  not  have  too  smooth 
a  surface,  as  pencil  writing  can  not  be  done  well  on  highly  calendered  paper. 
The  more  common  the  foolscap,  therefore,  the  better,  the  finest  qualities 
being  only  suitable  for  pen  and  ink,  with  which  shorthand  practice  should 
never  be  attempted. 


EXERCISE      I. 


V 

y.  .........  %....! 


-^  .....  yff..)  .....  4&..1  .....  zoS  .....  M..Z., 

25  \  ......  ££...  ........  ^....C  .....  )  ...... 


KEY  I. 

i,  Nigh;  2,  nay;  3,  knew;  4,  pie;  5,  pay;  6,  chew;  7,  Jew;  8,  jay;  9,  cue; 
10,  gay;  n,  bay;  12,  by;  13,  tie;  14,  fie;  15,  few;  16,  vie;  17,  view;  18,  sue; 
19,  sigh;  20,  thy;  21,  shy;  22,  lie;  23,  lay;  24,  die;  25,  day;  26,  due; 
27,  They  say  May  knew  my  shoe. 

NOTE  i — The  figures  accompanying  each  word  or  outline  in  the  above 
Exercise  and  Key,  and  others  of  this  course,  are  inserted  for  the  student's 
convenience  in  referring  from  the  one  to  the  other.  They  are  not  to  be 
considered  as  any  part  of  the  phonographic  signs.  The  same  is  true  of 
all  subsequent  lessons  as  well. 

NOTE  2 — Home  students  should  learn  every  lesson  of  this  course  per- 
fectly enough  to  write  each  sign  correctly  when  the  key  is  slowly  read  aloud 
to  them.  This  practice  of  writing  from  dictation  should  be  done  with  every 
Exercise,  and  done  well,  before  commencing  another  lesson.  The  lessons 
may  be  learned  without  such  aid,  but  speed  comes  more  quickly  with  it. 

NOTE  3 — Students  of  these  lessons,  desirous  of  having  their  written 
exercises  criticised,  or  desiring  to  ask  any  questions  whatever,  in  regard  to 
the  lessons,  or  relative  matters,  can  address  the  author,  CURTIS  HAVEN, 
P.  O.  Lock  Box  1162,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


28  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

LESSON   II. 
TIMELY  SUGGESTIONS. 

Become  perfectly  familiar  with  one  lesson  before  another  is 
attempted. 

A  careful  revision  each  day  of  the  exercises  written  on  the  previous 
one  will  prove  an  invaluable  aid  to  the  memory. 

It  is  only  by  repetition  that  you  will  obtain  a  complete  familiarity 
with  new  exercises,  therefore  do  not  fail  to  write  every  new  word  or 
sign  at  least  a  dozen  times  before  writing  the  exercise  as  a  whole. 

For  every  hour  spent  in  writing  phonography  spend  a  similar  one 
in  reading  and  rereading.  This  time  will  be  well  spent,  while  a  non- 
compliance  with  this  suggestion  may  cause  infinite  trouble  in  the  stu- 
dent's early  attempts  at  reporting. 

While  practicing  the  exercises  of  any  lesson,  students  should  form 
the  outlines  both  carefully  and  slowly,  paying  particular  attention  to  the 
proper  formation  of  shorthand  characters,  both  regarding  length  and 
curvature.  Careful  practicing  while  learning  will  bring  speed  far  more 
quickly  than  carelessly  written  exercises,  besides  bringing  with  such 
speed  that  without  which  speed  is  useless — legibility. 

SMALL  VISIBLE  LETTERS. 


[Pronounced! 
[_as  in  oil.J 


A 
0 


( 


/     H    [PronoiiTiccol 
^     Orv[ProTiounced  as  in  owl. 
_     87   [Or  Ai  df  in  ai^ 
Oo  [Pronounced  <SLS  in  tool 


<.     i  [Short- i  as  in  it. 


in. 


3 


j    e  [Short- e  AS 


r 


o    Yay  [Or  short-ii  a*  in.  i-ofc 


By  the  foregoing  list  of  small  signs,  students  are  introduced  to  six- 
teen more  letters  of  the  Visible  Alphabet,  the  three  consonants  (Hay, 
Way  and  Whay),  and  thirteen  visible  vowels — each  pair  of  letters  slant- 
ing or  curving  in  the  same  directions  and  occurring  in  same  order  as 
their  larger  prototypes  in  Lesson  I.  And,  that  their  distinctions  of  out- 
line may  be  the  better  memorized,  the  new  list  is  reproduced  in  com- 
parative form  in  the  diagram  at  top  of  opposite  page. 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


Ai 
H    '    I 

/       x 

A    '           i  0 
Oi  %  .    Ow 
Oo 

XL 

W  c  r    ^D  Wh 

.     t-       •> 

i    w    e 
U 

The  letters  Hay,  Way  and  Whay,  like  the  letters  of  first  lesson,  are 
used  to  spell  words  by  position,  above,  on  or  beneath  the  line,  signs 
i  to  7,  inclusive,  indicating  invisibly  I  by  position  above  the  line,  A  on 
the  line,  and  U  beneath. 

Do  not  imagine,  because  some  signs  of  above  list  have  capital  let- 
ters near  them  and  others  small  letters,  that  such  distinction  is  repre- 
sented by  them.  There  is  no  occasion  for  capital  letters  in  Phonogra- 
phy, any  more  than  in  speech,  and  the  use  of  a  small  Roman  letter  op- 
posite a  sign  is  simply  to  help  the  student  to  remember  that  that  sign 
has  a  short  sound;  and,  upon  the  same  principle,  a  Roman  capital 
letter  near  a  shorthand  sign  in  the  shorthand  alphabet  simply  means 
that  such  shorthand  sign  possesses  a  long  or  ordinary  sound. 

Write  the  shorthand  letters  of  the  present  list  in  the  following 
directions:  E  and  short  e,  either  upwards  or  downwards,  according  to 
convenience;  Ai,  Oo,  Yay  and  U,  from  left  to  right.  The  other  signs 
in  above  list  write  downwards. 

The  signs  representing  the  sounds  of  H,  W  and  Wh,  must  always 
be  called  and  referred  to  as  Hay,  Way  and  Whay;  the  signs  opposite 
the  small  letters  i,  a  and  e  should  be  called  short-i,  short-a  and 
short-e;  and  the  other  signs  in  accordance  with  the  letters  opposite 
them,  &  or  Ai  being  either  pronounced  and,  or  the  same  as  A,  excepting 
perhaps  a  trifle  more  prolonged,  like  the  two  a's  in  the  word  Baal,  though 
even  if  A  and  Ai  be  pronounced  exactly  as  one  sound,  no  difficulty 
would  arise  in  their  use,  as  will  be  seen  by  future  lessons. 

The  signs  represented  by  the  small  letters  i,  a,  e  and  u  require  par- 
ticular attention,  and,  explanatory  of  their  use,  it  is  necessary  to  say 
that  to  spell  by  sound  (which  is  the  only  way  spelling  is  done  in  pho- 
nography), there  must  be,  when  writing  them,  a  separate  sign  for  each 
and  every  distinct  sound;  and,  as  I,  A,  E  and  U  have  each  more  than  one 
sound,  we,  therefore,  in  phonography,  when  writing  each  sound,  repre- 
sent it  by  a  separate  and  distinct  letter,  the  long  sound  of  I,  as  heard 
in  the  word  bite,  being  represented  by  the  first  sign  in  the  list  heading 
this  lesson;  the  short  sound  of  i,  as  heard  in  the  word  bit.  being  indicated 
by  the  ninth  sign  in  same  list;  the  ordinary  sound  of  A,  as  heard  in  the 
word  Jate,  by  the  third  sign  in  the  list;  the  long  sound  of  Ai,  rs  indi- 


30  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

cated  in  pronouncing  the  word  fail,  by  the  seventh  sign  in  the  list;  the 
long  sound  of  E,  as  heard  in  the  word  feet,  by  the  fourteenth  sign  in 
the  list;  the  short  sound  of  e,  as  in  met,  by  the  thirteenth  sign;  long 
sound  of  U,  as  heard  in  the  word /«/•<?,  by  the  sixteenth  sign,  and  short-u? 
as  heard  in  butt,  by  the  fifteenth  sign  in  the  list.  Examples  showing 
how  these  signs  are  used  to  the  consonants  are  given  in  this  Exercise. 

By  this  lesson  the  student  will  observe  that  the  vowel  sounds  of  I, 
A  and  U  are  not  only  represented  invisibly,  as  described  in  the  last 
lesson,  but  also  that  those  sounds  have  visible  letters.  The  reason  for 
the  existence  of  two  ways  of  representing  the  same  vowel  sounds — visi- 
bly and  invisibly — arises  from  the  fact  that  both  are  equally  useful  and 
necessary.  The  invisible  means  of  representation,  as  described  in 
Lesson  I,  is  most  frequently  used — always,  when,  in  ordinary  words, 
either  of  their  sounds  occur  after  a  consonant,  wherein  it  is  possible  to 
place  the  consonant  in  position  to  indicate  the  presence  of  a  vowel 
without  writing  such  vowel.  But,  vowel  sounds  often  happen  to  be  com- 
plete words  of  themselves,  and  therefore  unaccompanied  by  a  conso- 
nant, as  with  the  personal  pronoun  I,  or  the  article  A;  or,  when  a  vowel 
sound  would  spell  a  word  of  itself,  as  the  vowel  signs  O  and  U  do  in 
the  last  part  of  the  Exercise  to  this  lesson,  wherein  the  first  four  words 
of  the  sentence  "I  owe  you  a  new  tie"  are  represented  simply  by  the 
visible  vowels  I,  O,  U  and  A.  Then,  again,  such  sounds  are  sometimes 
initials  of  personal  names,  as  I  for  Isaac,  A  for  Adam,  etc. — in  which 
cases  invisible  representation  could  not  be  employed.  Sometimes,  too, 
though  not  frequently,  personal  names  are  best  written  with  them,  and 
generally  foreign  terms.  Again,  the  vowel  sounds  of  I,  A  and  U  were, 
in  last  lesson,  represented  invisibly  after  a  consonant,  not  before  one; 
and,  as  there  often  occurs  instances  in  which  the  vowel  sounds  are  the 
commencing  letters  of  words  and  therefore  precede  the  first  consonant  of 
such  words,  it  sometimes  becomes  necessary  to  write  them  as  in  the 
Exercise  to  this  lesson,  signs  8  to  34  inclusive. 

In  those  signs,  8  to  34,  it  will  also  be  seen  that  such  outlines  in- 
variably rest  upon  the  line,  that  position  being  the  proper  one  for  all 
letters  of  the  alphabet  when  not  indicating  invisible  vowels,  as  well  as 
when  indicating  the  second  place  invisible  vowels.  It  is  only  when  a 
first  or  third  position  vowel  is  to  be  indicated  /^visibly  that  written 
characters  are  placed  above,  through  or  beneath  the  line. 

Be  sure  to  learn  every  Exercise  strictly  in  accordance  with  the  four 
rules  preceding  the  Exercise  of  Lesson  I. 

Further  use  of  the  visible  vowels  will  be  explained  in  next  lesson,  in 
which  is  given  the  concluding  letters  of  the  Visible  Alphabet. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  31 

PEN  OR  PENCIL. 

Before  closing  this  lesson,  there  is  one  subject,  the  importance  of 
which  the  author  desires  to  properly  impress  upon  the  minds  of  his 
students:  It  is  the  necessity  of  an  immediate  choice  between  pen  and 
pencil,  in  regard  to  which  shall  be  made  use  of  in  the  student's  phono- 
graphic writing  practice.  Student  are,  of  course,  at  liberty  to  use 
both  if  they  choose,  and  alternate  their  use  as  frequently  as  they  wish, 
but  such  inconstant  use,  the  student  is  informed,  will  greatly  delay  her 
or  his  acquisition  of  speed.  Each  instrument  differs  from  the  other  in 
facility  of  execution,  and  whichever  the  hand  becomes  most  accustomed 
to,  it  writes  much  quicker  and  better  with.  The  author  prefers  a  pencil 
because  it  can  be  used  under  most  any  or  all  circumstances,  while  a  pen 
cannot  be  employed  except  under  certain  favorable  conditions.  The 
pencil  will  glide  over  the  paper  much  more  quickly,  and  thus  affords 
greater  rapidity  of  execution  than  the  pen,  while  rapid  pencil  writing  is 
easier  to  read  than  rapidly-made  penmarks,  for  the  reason  that  the  use 
of  the  pencil  avoids  the  little  meaningless  ticks  and  dashes  which  the 
pen  is  almost  always  certain  to  leave  attached  to  rapid  shorthand  writing. 
It  is,  however,  even  better  to  make  constant  use  of  a  pen  than  to  be 
continually  changing  from  one  to  the  other,  for  the  reasons  given. 


EXERCISE      II. 


.9  .<T.  ...  /0\    .  a  *S  ...iz../  ......  /AJ  .....  ^..u_  .....  *&.-\ 


AS 


KEY  II. 

i,  High;  2,  hay;  3,  hue;  4,  weigh;  5,  whew;  6,  why;  7,  whey;  8,  Ike; 
9,  oil;  10,  ape;  n,  Abe;  12,  age;  13,  ace;  14,  ache;  15,  oath;  16,  oak;  17, 
owl ;  1 8,  ate  ;  19,  aid  ;  20,  aim  ;  21,  ail ;  22,  itch  ;  23,  ill ;  24,  inn  ;  25,  Ann  ;  26, 
Al;  27,  ash;  28,  ebb;  29,  etch;  30,  edge;  31,  egg;  32,  Ed;  33,  eel;  34, 
youth;  35,  I  owe  you  a  new  tie. 


3-' 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

LESSON  III. 
FINAL  LIST  OF  VISIBLE  LETTERS. 


>      Z-  r  ,n 

•VX-L       -K/r  [Pronounced  v 
y*s    Mb  orMpyrjjfS  or£MP\ 

i  i^  -~* 

Nd"  [Pronounced 


o  [Short  -o  as  in  orj 
oo[Short-oo  <as  in -footj 

Ah 

ah  [Short -ah  as  in  a,skj 
Aw 


In  above  final  list  are  presented  ten  signs — the  concluding  letters 
of  the  Visible  Alphabet  of  Haven's  Practical  Phonography — the  last 
five — short-o,  short-oo,  Ah,  short-ah  and  Aw — being  vowels;  the  others, 
consonants.  The  three  letters  requiring  particular  pronunciation  are 
Rm,  Mb  or  Mp  and  Ng,  which  must  always  be  learned  and  referred  to 
as  Arm,  Emb  or  Emp  and  Ing,  the  signs  represented  by  the  small 
letters  o,  oo  and  ah,  being  called  short-o,  short-oo  and  shqrt-ah. 

R  and  Arm  are  always  written  upwards  and  at  a  slant  just  midway 
between  Chay  and  K;  Emb  is  a  thickened  M;  Ing  a  thickened  N;  Z,  like 
a  thickened  S;  short-o  is  the  O  of  last  lesson  bowed,  or  like  a  shaded 
Whay;  short-oo  is  the  Oo  of  last  lesson  bowed,  or  like  a  shaded  U; 
Ah  is  a  waved  line  resembling  the  juncture  of  the  letters  Whay  and 
Way  in  that  order,  while  short-ah  and  Aw  are  waved  lines  similarly 
resembling  the  juncture  of  Way  and  Whay,  Aw  being  shaded  in  center. 

R,  Arm,  Z,  Emb  and  Ing  are  written  the  same  size  as  the  letters 
illustrated  in  Lesson  I;  the  other  letters  of  this  list  are  written  the  size 
»f  the  small  letters  of  Lesson  II,  that  is,  one-eighth  the  size  of  the  large 
ones.  The  letter  R  is,  of  course,  placed  above,  on  or  through  the  line 
of  writing  to  represent  I,  A  or  U  invisibly,  as  in  signs  i,  2,  3,  in  Exercise. 
To  clearly  illustrate  the  exact  slant  of  R  and  Arm,  the  author  presents 
those  letters  below  grouped  with  Chay,  K,  etc. 


Gay 


By  always  writing  R  and  Arm  upwards  and  Chay  and  J  downwards, 
the  difference  in  slant  between  those  letters  is  easily  maintained. 

To  better  exhibit  the  similarity  to  each  other,  as  well  as  the 
individual  differences  between  the  outline  of  each  character  given  in 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 
preceding  alphabetical  lists,  the  author  herewith  appends: 


3.5 


THE    COMTLETE   VISIBLE  ALPHABET. 

\     P 

X             I 

\     B 

*     Oi 

1       T 
1       D 

,     A 
.     0 

/     Tchay 
/     J 

,    Hay                          j 
/     Ow 

>    R 

-     Ai   or  fat 

^    Arm  or  Ivem. 

.      Oo 

__    R 

v.     /Short  -i 

^  r 

c     Way 

(       Ith  or  Thee 

y     3Kort  -  o 

)       S 

j     /Short  -  e 

)    z> 

r       E 

J     Ish  or  Zhee 

r   L 

n     Yaj  or   3hort-u 

V              U 

^    M 

w     3Kort-oo 

./•v    Emb  or  Emp 

^    N 

a      Ah 

\ 

s     3hort  -  ah 

w     Ing 

5      Aw 

The  above  Complete  Visible  Alphabet  ot  Practical  Phonography  is 
composed  of  twenty-one  large  letters,  about  three-sixteenths  of  an  inch 
in  length,  and  twenty-one  small  characters,  made  about  one-eight  the 
size  of  the  large  ones.  Twenty-four  of  these  letters  are  called  con- 
sonants and  eighteen  vowels.  All  the  large  letters  and  the  small  ones 
Hay,  Way  and  Whay  are  the  consonant  letters,  the  remainder  of  the 
small  letters  being  the  vowels. 


34 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


Now,  for  further  successful  progress  in  these  lessons,  it  is  especially 
necessary  that  every  sign  of  the  Visible  Alphabet  be  so  thoroughly 
familiar  to  the  eye  of  the  student  that  any  of  those  signs  be  known 
when  not  presented  in  the  ordinary  order  of  their  arrangement,  and 
hence,  for  memorizing,  they  are  illustrated  in  comparative  form  below: 


CONSONANTS. 

VOWEL2. 

\ 
1 

\          v_        -^ 

1           C          c        ,            )              ) 

*                   \                    V.              ^> 

1                 •                > 

/ 

j       r 

*                  r                 j 

--          ^* 

ass 

— 

^                w 

—                        no 

Students  should  practice  memorizing  the  alphabet  until  the  letters 
in  foregoing  schedule  can  be  read  with  considerable  facility,  both  from 
left  to  right  and  right  to  left,  before  attempting  to  learn  further  exer- 
cises. Such  memorizing  will  not  only  give  a  thorough  acquaintance 
with  the  names  of  the  signs  of  the  Visible  Alphabet,  but  the  separation 
of  the  vowels  and  consonants,  as  in  the  schedule,  will  also  serve  to  im- 
press upon  the  mind  which  signs  are  consonants  and  which  visible  vowels. 

The  use  of  the  vowel  signs  in  spelling  personal  names  is  shown  in 
signs  4  to  20  in  Exercise,  though  all  spelling,  even  in  personal  names, 
should  be  done  phonetically,  viz:  R,  long- 1  and  T,  as  in  sign  4  in 
Exercise,  spells  the  personal  name  of  Wright,  etc. ,  etc.,  because  even 
in  writing  personal  names,  all  that  is  necessary  is  to  write  sounds,  for,  in 
speaking  Mr.  Wright's  name,  we  would  simply  utter  the  sounds  of  R, 
long-I  and  T,  and  hence  we  need  no  more  representation  in  phonography, 
but  we  generally  write  the  vowel  sign  in  personal  names  instead  of  in- 
dicating it  invisibly,  for  reasons  which  will  be  explained  in  a  future 
lesson,  though  in  spelling  the  common  words,  right  or  write,  we  would 
have  indicated  the  vowel  sound  by  position. 

The  numeral  eight  is  spelled  ai-t,  as  in  sentence  in  sign  45. 

The  proper  place  for  all  outlines  which  do  not  indicate  invisible 
vowels  is  on  the  line  of  writing,  hence,  all  the  proper  names  of  signs  4 
tc  20  in  the  Exercise  are  commenced  or  rest  on  the  line.  It  is  only  when 
vowels  are  indicated  /^visibly  that  outlines  are  commenced  above, 


HAVEN  S   PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 


35 


through  or  beneath  the  line,  and  even  then  it  is  only  the  first  consonant 
which  takes  position,  other  consonants  taking  whatever  position  is  con- 
venient at  the  time,  as  with  signs  27  and  33  in  Exercise,  wherein  the 
second  wnitten  letter  is  written  out  of  position  simply  because  the  first 
consonant  must  have  position,  and  both  cannot. 

It  will  doubtless  be  no  little  satisfaction  to  the  beginner,  however 
he  or  she  may  love  study,  to  know  that  with  this  lesson  terminates  all 
visible  alphabetical  memorizing,  enough  means  having  now  been  pre- 
sented to  represent,  phonographically,  any  sound  of  the  English  lan- 
guage. The  elements  of  phonography  being  now  within  the  grasp  of 
the  learner,  future  lessons  will  be  entirely  taken  up  with  interesting 
contractions  and  practical  application  of  the  system. 

THE  CIRCLES  S  AND  Z. 

Rapidity  in  writing  shorthand  frequently  necessitates,  for  the 
representation  of  the  oft-recurring  sounds  of  S  and  Z,  a  much  shorter 
method  than  that  found  in  our  Visible  Alphabet. 

A  small  light  circle  is  therefore  often  used  to  represent  the  hissing 
sound  of  S,  and  a  shaded  small  circle  to  indicate  Z  under  similar  cir- 
cumstances. These  circles  are  joined  to  other  consonants  by  writing 
them  on  the  most  convenient  side  of  curved  letters,  and  on  the  right  or 
upper  side  of  straight  ones,  though  they  may  be  placed  at  either  end  of 
any  letter,  as  in  following  diagrams,  the  circle  being  read  where  written: 


St 


3k 


SI 


33 


Ps 

L$ 
RS 


Ls 


The  superiority  ot  these  circles  in  point  of  speed,  over  the  long 
signs  for  S  or  Z,  is  a  fact  which  will  be  more  or  less  appreciated  and 
taken  advantage  of  by  the  student.  But,  lest  there  be  a  disposition  to 
do  away  entirely  with  the  original  signs  representing  these  sounds  in 
the  Visible  Alphabet,  it  is  necessary  to  state  that  there  are  instances 
wherein  the  signs  for  S  and  Z,  as  written  in  the  Visible  Alphabet,  must 
be  employed.  They  are: 


36  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

First.  When  either  the  sound  of  S  or  Z  constitute  the  only  con- 
sonant of  a  word,  as  in  sign  21  of  this  Exercise. 

Second.  When  either  of  the  sounds  of  S  or  Z  is  the  first  con- 
sonant in  a  word,  and  is  preceded  by  an  invisible  vowel,  as  in  sign  22. 

Third.  When  an  invisible  vowel  sound  terminates  a  word  in  which 
either  S  or  Z  happen  to  be  the  last  consonant.  Signs  26,  27,  33,  35  and  36. 

Under  the  above  three  rules,  the  long  S  or  Z  of  the  Visible 
Alphabet  must  be  used,  and  in  the  second  and  third  rules,  the  student, 
when  reading,  has  an  infallible  guide  whereby  to  determine  when  an  in- 
visible vowel  precedes  or  follows  either  S  or  Z  in  a  consonant  combina- 
tion. In  other  words,  when  he  sees  the  S  or  Z  of  the  Visible  Alphabet, 
beginning  such  a  combination,  he  knows  an  invisible  vowel  must  be  read 
before  and  in  conjunction  with  it,  and  that,  when  either  of  those  long 
letters  ends  such  a  combination,  there  is  an  invisible  vowel  following  it, 
as  part  of  the  word. 

Under  all  circumstances  not  covered  by  above  three  rules,  use  the 
circle  S  or  Z  wherever  possible.  For  instance,  when  either  the  sound 
of  S  or  Z  begin  a  combination,  with  no  vowel  before  it,  use  the  circle  as 
in  signs  23,  29,  30,  37,  38  and  40  in  Exercise.  When  the  sounds  of  S 
or  Z  end  any  combination,  with  no  vowel  sound  after,  use  the  circles,  as 
in  signs  24,  25,  28,  32,  34,  39  and  41  in  Exercise. 

Compare  sign  22,  indicating  a  preceding  vowel,  and  sign  23,  with 
no  vowel  before  the  S.  Also  compare  sign  25,  indicating  no  final  vowel 
sound,  with  sign  26,  indicating  the  final  vowel  E  sound  of  Y. 

Also  compare  sign  34,  maz,  spelled  in  shorthand  with  no  final  vowel 
sound,  and  sign  35,  ma-zy,  showing  the  final  E  sound  of  Y  by  full  sized  Z. 

Just  here  the  student  may  ask  how  it  is  known  that  the  vowel  sound 
is  E  following  long-S  in  signs  26  and  27,  or  following  Z  in  signs  33,  35 
and  36.  The  answer  to  this  is,  that  in  English  the  final  sound  of  such 
words  ending  in  Y  is  always  pronounced  nearly  like  the  vowel  E,  and 
therefore  all  that  is  necessary  is  to  remember  that  when  a  vowel  sound 
ends  a  word  whose  last  visible  letter  is  S  or  Z,  the  shorthander  is  to 
write  the  long  S  or  Z,  as  in  the  instances  -just  named,  and  when  he  or 
she  reads  those  letters,  to  pronounce  after  them  the  vowel  sound  of  E, 
when  the  key  to  the  outline  will  be  at  once  evident. 

The  E  in  case,  (sign  24),  race  (sign  25),  sire  (sign  30),  maze  (sign  34), 
etc.,  is  of  course  silent  and  not  considered  in  shorthand  spelling. 

A  double-sized  light  circle,  written  alone  or  joined  to  other  letters 
in  accordance  with  the  rule  governing  the  small  circles,  represents  the 
sounds  srs,  sez,  size,  zes,  zez,  etc..  See  signs  42,  43  and  44  in  Exercise. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  ,7 

This  double-sized  circle  must  not  be  mistaken  for  double-s  (ss)  in  the 
English  spelling  of  the  word  /ass,  etc.  In  phonography  no  letters  are 
wasted  and  lass  and  kindred  words  terminating  with  double-s,  are  spelled 
quite  as  legibly,  and  much  more  economically,  thus:  1-a-s,  lass. 

These  small  and  large  circles  are  joined  to  the  letters  R  and  Arm  in 
the  same  manner  and  upon  the  same  sides  as  those  circles  are  joined  to 
K  or  Gay.  See  signs  24,  25  and  30.  This  is  no  more  than  proper,  for 
R  and  Arm  are  written  from  left  to  right,  as  K  and  Gay  are,  and  should, 
therefore,  be  treated  similarly  in  this  respect. 

This  rule  the  student  will  have  frequent  cause  for  recalling  in  future 
lessons  and  he  or  she  should  bear  it  well  in  mind  and  on  all  occasions 
where  junctions  are  made  with,  or  circles  added  to,  the  letters  R  and 
Arm,  such  junctures  and  additions  must  be  made  to  R  and  Arm  in 
precisely  the  same  manner  that  they  would  be  added  to  K  or  Gay. 

When  joining  shaded  circle-Z  to  letters,  shade  most  convenient  way. 

C,  Q  AND  X. 

There  are  three  letters  which  students  who  have  had  but  little 
experience  in  spelling  by  sound  will  look  in  vain  for  among  the  letters 
of  our  Visible  Alphabet,  viz. :  the  Roman  letters  C,  Q  and  X.  The 
Roman  C  is  not  contained  therein,  because,  in  spelling  by  sound, 
phonographers  do  not  need  the  help  of  that  letter,  the  soft  sound  of  C, 
as  heard  in  the  word  city,  being  represented  in  phonography  by  the 
phonographic  S,  that  word  being  spelled  sit-e,  as  in  sign  29  in  Exercise; 
while  the  hard  sound  of  C,  as  heard  in  case,  is  represented  by  K,  and 
that  word  spelled  k-a-s,  as  in  sign  24  in  Exercise. 

The  soft  and  hard  sounds  of  the  Roman  letter  G  are  similarly  dealt 
with  in  phonography,  J  being  used  to  spell  such  words  as  gypsy  and  sagt 
(thusjip-se)gy/sfy;  s-a.-j,sage~)  as  in  signs  27  and  31  in  Exercise;  the  hard 
sound  of  the  Roman  letter  G,  as  heard  in  the  word  game,  being  in- 
dicated phonographically  by  the  letter  Gay  of  our  Visible  Alphabet,  aa 
seen  in  sign  28  in  Exercise. 

The  letters  Q  and  X  are  not  incorporated  in  our  Visible  Alphabet, 
because  those  letters  are  not  needed  in  spelling  by  sound,  and  are  neve*- 
so  used,  they  being  themselves  composed  of  more  than  OAC  simple 
sound  and  therefore  made  by  the  union  of  other  letters  and  really 
spelled  thus:  K-u,  Q;  short-e,  K  and  circle-S,  X;  as  in  sentence  45  in 
Exercise,  in  which  sentence  is  also  shown  how  to  represent  the 
letter  C  as  the  initial  of  a  person's  name  (by  spelling  it  thus:  s-e,  C) 
which  is  the  plan  upon  which  all  initials  are  represented  in  shorthand 
writing,  as  is  fully  explained  in  the  last  lesson  of  this  course. 

449514 


38  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

HOLDING  THE  PENCIL. 

In  Lesson  I  the  student  is  requested,  when  writing  phonography, 
to  hold  the  pen  or  pencil  between  the  first  and  second  fingers,  merely 
keeping  it  in  place  with  the  thumb.  Most  phonographers  employ  this 
method,  though  there  are  a  few  who  profess  to  prefer  the  ordinary  pen- 
manship style,  saying  that  a  special  method  for  shorthand  writing  is  sim- 
ply affectation.  This  is  a  mistake.  The  philosophy  of  the  matter  is,  that 
in  ordinary  penmanship  the  letters  all  slant  in  one  direction,  and  are 
written  always  either  downward  from  the  right  or  upward  from  the  left, 
and  hence  the  regular  penmanship  manner  of  holding  the  pen  is  de- 
cidedly preferable  in  ordinary  writing;  but  in  writing  phonographically 
the  shorthand  characters  are  formed  in  such  a  variety  of  directions, 
downward  from  the  right,  perpendicularly,  horizontally,  etc.,  etc.,  that 
a  special  position  of  the  hand,  if  one  would  make  the  characters  easily 
and  rapidly,  is  a  requisite  which  is  best  secured  by  holding  the  pen  or 
pencil  between  the  first  and  second  fingers,  by  which  plan  the  hand  is 
less  liable  to  become  cramped  from  excess  of  work. 


« 

. ..2  9. ...... So S±  f.. 


KEY  III. 

i,  rye;  2,  ray;  3,  rue;  4,  Wright;  5,  Coyle;  6,  Gale;  7,  Coke;  8,  Power; 
9,  Bain;  10,  Roote;  n,  Rich;  12,  Mack;  13,  Dodd;  14,  Wren;  15,  Peel;  16, 
Kurr;  17,  Cuba;  18,  Foote;  19,  Shah;  20,  Pawn;  21,  say;  22, ask;  23, sack; 
24,  case;  25,  race;  26,  racy;  27,  Gypsey;  28,  gas;  29,  city;  30,  sire;  31, 
sage;  32,  dies;  33,  dizzy;  34,  maze;  35,  mazy;  36,  lazy;  37,  same;  38,  save; 
39,  vice;  40,  safe;  41,  face;  42,  faces;  43,  paces;  44,  races;  45,  Miss  C  Q 
X.  Cook  buys  eight  laces  a  day. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  39 

LESSON  IV. 

ADDITIONAL  USE  OF  THE  VISIBLE  VOWELS. 
In  words  wherein  visible  vowels  are  necessary,  and  where  the  junc- 
ture of  a  visible  vowel  with  the  required  consonant  or  consonants  would 
be  difficult  or  impossible  to  accomplish,  a  sign  representing  another 
sound  of  the  same  Roman  vowel  is  substituted.  For  instance,  it  would 
be  impossible  to  recognize  the  straight  sign  for  long  I,  when  joined  to 
the  letter  P,  and  yet  to  properly  read  the  word  Pine,  when  it  is  a 
person's  name,  it  is  necessary  to  visibly  represent  the  vowel  sound.  To 
do  this  we  join  the  sign  for  short-i,  and,  in  order  to  show  that  we  in- 
tend the  sound  meant  to  be  long-I,  we  thicken  short-i,  as  it  is  shown  in 
sign  26  in  Exercise,  which  thickening  tells  us  that  it  is  substituted  for 
long-I.  Similarly,  as  shown  in  other  signs  in  this  book,  other  light  vowels 
may  be  substituted  to  represent  the  long  ones  by  thickening,  excepting 
the  sign  for  short-a,  which  is  not  needed  to  be  substituted  for  long,  ordi- 
nary A,  because  the  sound  for  Ai  can  be  better  employed,  as  in  sign  24 
in  Exercise,  though  as  A  and  Ai  represent  sounds  so  very  similar  that 
most  people  make  no  difference  in  their  pronunciation,  it  is  not  neces- 
sary to  thicken  either  A  or  Ai  when  substituted  for  each  other,  either 
sign  being  used  for  the  other  without  particular  indication.  In  instances 
where  the  long  sounds  of  O  and  Oo  need  to  be  shown,  but  will  not 
join,  the  signs  for  their  short  sounds  are  used,  and  bowed  in  the  oppo- 
site direction  to  show  substitution,  short-o  being  turned  around  in  the 
form  of  a  heavy  letter  Way,  and  short-oo,  like  a  heavy  short-u,  as  in 
signs  27  and  28  in  Exercise.  Short-oo,  when  made  in  the  shape  of  a 
short-u,  will  not  be  mistaken  for  that  letter;  because,  when  the  sign  for 
long-U  is  substituted  for  the  short  one  it  is  only  shaded  at  one  end  of 
the  curve,  while  short-oo  is  thick  all  over.  The  latter  is  shown  in 
sign  28  in  Exercise.  For  a  similar  reason  short-u,  when  shaded  to 
indicate  the  sound  of  long-U,  will  not  be  mistaken  for  the  substituted 
short-oo. 

When  Oi  is  required  to  be  added  to  B  and  similar  shaped  charac- 
ters, it  may  be  bowed  in  the  shape  of  short-a,  as  in  sign  31  in  Exercise, 
and  being  written  heavy  will  not  be  mistaken  for  short-a,  as  short-a  is 
never  thickened  when  substituted  for  any  other  sound  of  A. 

To  accommodate  the  downward  stroke  of  Ow,  the  letter  Hay  is 
written  upward,  as  in  sign  25  in  Exercise,  but  as  Hay  should  generally 
be  written  downward,  Ow  would  have  to  be  written  upward  upon  such 
other  occasions. 

Ah  may  be  used  for  Aw  by  thickening  beginning  stroke.     Sign  29. 


40  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

Ah  and  short-ah  may  be  substituted  for  each  other  without  thicken- 
ing. 

The  sign  for  Ah  or  short-ah  may  be  substituted  for  A  or  short-a  in 
instances  where  the  regular  sign  for  A  or  short-a  would  not  join,  as  in 
illustrations  iuriher  on. 

This  substitution  of  the  vowel  signs  for  one  another,  as  shown  in 
signs  24  to  31  in  our  Exercise,  as  above  described,  illustrate  instances 
which  will,  however,  very  seldom  occur,  and  need  not  cause  any  fear  of 
connection  on  the  part  of  the  student.  The  vowel  signs  will,  in  general, 
join  easily  when  required,  as  they  do  in  last  lesson,  without  substitutes. 

If  students  prefer,  they  need  not  join  the  vowels.    Signs  31  and  32. 

COALESCING  VISIBLE  VOWELS. 

Besides  the  preceding  described  uses  for  the  visible  vowels,  they 
are  also  employed  in  instances  where  two  vowel  sounds  together  ter- 
minate a  word,  as  with  the  vowel  sounds  of  a  and  e  pronounced  ter- 
minating the  word  payee.  Sign  18  in  Exercise.  In  such  case  and 
others  illustrated  in  the  Exercise,  it  would  be  impossible  to  invisibly 
represent  two  sounds  by  one  preceding  consonant  sign,  and  a  visible 
•vowel  cannot  indicate  an  invisible  one,  nor  a  consonant  indicate 
one  invisible  and  one  visible  vowel  at  the  same  time.  Hence,  the 
necessity  and  wisdom  in  writing  both  vowel  sounds  when  they  together 
terminate  a  word. 

In  some  instances,  however,  as  in  such  words  as  Uriah,  Noah,  etc., 
the  final  Roman  ah  possesses  a  sort  of  neutral  sound,  in  which  the 
aspirate  sound  of  H  seems  to  take  so  important  a  part,  the  sound  being 
eh,  that,  in  such  cases,  especially  if  the  sign  for  short-e  would  not 
make  a  perfect  juncture,  the  sign  for  Hay  may  be  joined  terminating 
the  outline,  providing  Hay  be  written  upwards  when  so  joined,  as  in 
signs  21  and  22,  etc.  in  Exercise.  This  use  of  the  letter  Hay  will  not 
cause  it  to  clash  with  its  ordinary  use  as  a  consonant,  because,  as  a 
consonant,  it  would  not  occur  following  a  visible  vowel,  and  also  because 
of  the  fact  that  it  is  written  downwards  as  a  consonant,  while,  in  the 
representation  of  i-ah  and  o-ah,  it  is  written  upwards.  I-ah  and  O-ah 
are  written  the  same  when  they  occur  preceding  a  word,  as  in  O^ccn, 
where  the  sound  is  O-eh-n.  If  Owen  were  to  be  written  simply  O-n,  as 
some  suppose,  it  might  be  read  as  Own.  Therefore,  indicate  the  eh 
sound,  as  in  sign  23. 

It  will  be  noticed  in  writing  the  names  Uriah,  Noah,  etc.,  that  no 
provision  is  made  in  phonography  to  indicate  capital  letters.  In 
other  words,  the  capital  letter  N  in  Noah  (sign  22),  is  represented  by 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  4r 

the  same  sign  which  is  used  to  indicate  the  small  letter  n  in  knew,  sign  3 
in  Lesson  I.  This  principle  is  founded  upon  the  fact  that,  as  people  do 
not  indicate  capital  letters  when  they  speak,  it  is,  therefore,  equally 
unnecessary  to  represent  them  in  phonography,  and  as  phonographers 
write  from  sound  entirely,  no  confusion  can  arise  in  reading  one's  short- 
hand notes  even  without  capital  letter  indication. 

VISIBLE  VOWEL  JUNCTURES. 

As  it  is  in  only  a  very  few  words  of  our  language  wherein  it  is 
necessary  to  write  vowels,  the  student  will  seldom  be  required  to  write 
such  cumbrous  outlines  as  predominate  this  lesson,  vowels  in  general 
being  indicated  invisibly,  as  in  Exercise  of  tirst  and  succeeding  lessons. 

The  principal  object  of  this  lesson  is  to  show  students  how  to  join 
vowels  when  necessary,  in  personal  names  and  initials,  and  though,  in 
writing  the  latter,  the  vowel  signs  should  always  be  employed  for  reasons 
which  studeiits  will  understand  better  as  they  progress,  yet,  even  in 
personal  names,  if  students  are  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  personality 
they  are  writing  about,  they  need  not  insert  vowels  unless  they  so 
desire,  bu:-  simply  write  the  consonant  outline  in  position  to  indicate 
the  vowel,  just  as  common  words  are  written  phonographically. 

THE  INVISIBLE  ALPHABET. 

In  Lesson  I  was  explained  the  application  of  the  main  principle  of 
the  Invisible  Alphabet  of  Haven's  Practical  Phonography,  in  indicating 
the  vowel  sounds  of  I,  A  and  U  invisibly  by  writing  a  consonant,  after 
which  one  of  those  vowel  sounds  occurred,  either  above,  on,  through  or 
beneath  the  line  of  writing,  according  to  whichever  vowel  was  intended 
at  the  time,  and  such  principle  has  been  used  throughout  the  Exercise 
of  each  lesson  preceding  this,  but  the  positions  of  the  consonants  were 
given  no  technical  names.  The  student  now  being  prepared  for  further 
explanation  concerning  the  entire  Invisible  Alphabet,  it  becomes  neces- 
sary to  state  that  those  three  positions — above,  on,  through  or  beneath 
the  line  of  writing — are  known  respectively  as  the  first,  second  and  third 
positions,  and  the  vowels  represented  by  such  positions  are  known  as 
first-place  vowels,  second-place  vowels  or  third-place  vowels,  the  sound 
of  I,  therefore,  when  represented  invisibly,  being  a  first-place  vowel;  A., 
a  second-place  vowel,  and  U,  a  third-place  vowel. 

But  those  three  vowels  are  not  the  only  ones  so  represented  and  so 
named.  On  the  contrary,  the  entire  .eighteen  vowel  sounds  of  the 
English  language  are  divided  into  those  three  classes — first-place, 
second-place,  and  third-place  vowels — and  are  represented  invisibly  by 
those  three  positions  only,in  accordance  with  the  table  at  top  of  next  page: 


42 

Fl  RST 

PLACE 

VOWELS 

SECOND 

PLACE 

VO\VELS 

TPIIRD 

PLACE 

VOWELS 


01 


A 


O 


U 

i  OO 

ow 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

j  Long  sound,  as  heard  in  b^<?t, 
]  Short  sound,  as  heard  in  b<?t. 

(  Long  or  dual  sound,  as  heard  in  bite, 
|  Short  sound  as  heard  in  bit. 

The  diphthongal  sound,  heard  in 
the  words  boil  and  oyster. 

C  Long  English  sounds,  heard  in  pate  or  pair, 
j  Sounds  of  AH,  heard  in  p.z  and  ask. 

Broad  sound  of  AW,  heard  in  pall, 

Short  sound,  as  heard  in  Pat. 

Long  sound,  as  heard  in  p^le, 
Short  sound,  as  heard  in  P<?lly. 

Long  sound,  as  heard  in  p«re, 
Short  sound,  as  heard  in  p«tty. 

Long  sound,  as  heard  in  ioiA, 
Short  sound,  as  heard  in  ioot. 

Diphthongal  sound,  as  heard 
in  the  words  iow\  and  all<?ze/. 


1  To  indicate 
these  sounds, 
write  the  con- 
sonants of  a 
word  in  the 

FIRST 
POSITION, 
j  above  the  line 

To    indicate 
these    sounds, 

consonants 
should  occupy 

SECOND 
POSITION, 

resting  on  the 
line. 

For  these, 
place  con- 
sonants in 

THIRD 
POSITION 

through  or  be- 
neath the  line. 

Read  the  above  table  over  until  well  understood,  but  it  is  not 
necessary  to  memorize  it  entire.  Simply  to  memorize  the  main  letters 
E,  I,  Oi;  A,  O;  U,  Oo  and  Ow;  and  their  positions,  is  sufficient  to  im- 
press the  positions  of  the  other  sounds  upon  the  mind,  because  the 
other  sounds  are  merely  variations  of  those  eight. 

Nor  need  students  fear  that  the  use  of  only  three  positions  for  the 
representation  of  eighteen  different  vowel  sounds  will  serve  to  perplex 
them,  when  reading  their  own  notes,  if  correctly  written.  All  profes- 
sional shorthand  writers  omit  those  eighteen  sounds,  representing  their 
omission  by  three  positions  only,  and  to  illustrate  how  comparatively 
easy  it  is  to  read  by  position,  even  with  such  a  number  of  invisible  vowel 
sounds  to  choose  between,  let  us  analyze  the  first  word  in  our  Exercise. 
The  first  sign  in  our  Exercise  happens  to  be  an  F  above  the  line,  which 
position,  we  are  told  by  above  schedule,  represents  the  indication  of 
either  of  the  three  sounds  E,  I  or  Oi  after  the  letter  F;  therefore,  such 
sign  reads,  according  to  the  rule,  either  f-e,  fee;  f-i,  fit;  or  f-oi,  foi. 
But,  as  foi  is  no  word  at  all,  we  have  but  two  words  to  choose  between, 
fee  or  fie.  In  this  instance  the  word  intended  is  fee,  because  the  Key 
to  the  Exercise  says  so.  But  should  there  have  been  no  Key  it  would 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  43 

not  have  mattered  which  word  the  pupil  transcribed  it  as,  because 
the  words  in  this  Exercise  are  in  no  wise  dependent  on  each  other. 
Indeed,  in  this  and  some  subsequent  lessons,  wherein  the  words  of  the 
Exercise  are  isolated,  pupils  may  frequently,  though  working  according 
to  rule,  interpret  words  differently  from  the  Key,  as  they  might  have 
done  with  fee,  in  this  Exercise.  This  must  not,  however,  lead  them  to 
suppose  that  this  will  always  be  their  experience.  On  the  contrary, 
should  this  letter  F  have  occured  (in  the  position  it  occupies  in  this  in- 
stance) within  a  sentence,  no  doubt  about  its  meaning  would  have 
arisen,  because  other  words  preceding  or  following  this  particular  word 
in  the  same  sentence  would  have  designated  its  meaning  at  once.  A 
person  would  not  be  apt  to  say  "A  lawyer's^,"  or  "fee,  fee,  for  shame!" 

In  sign  2  in  Exercise  the  position  adds  either  A  or  O  to  F,  making 
either  fay  or  foe,  but  as  the  Key  says  foe,  read  it  so,  especially  as  there 
is  no  such  modern  word  as  fay. 

Sign  3  would  read  as  either  f-u  few;  f-oo,  foo;  or  f-ow,  fow;  but  as 
foo  and  fow  are  no  words,  we  read  the  outline  as  few;  so  that,  as  a 
general  trule,  only  one  word  could  be  made  out  of  such  outlines  anyway, 
and  where  more  than  one,  the  context  shows  which  one.  Where  such 
would  not  be  the  case  the  visible  vowel  would  be  written  as  in  signs  12  to 
14  in  Exercise.  Sometimes  a  preceding  vowel  is  written,  and  the  final 
vowel  indicated  by  position,  as  in  signs  15  to  17 — the  preceding  vowel 
a  in  allow  being  written  and  the  L  placed  through  the  line  to  indicate 
ow  after  the  L,  spelling  a-l-ow,  allow,  etc.,  etc. 

IMPORTANCE  OF  SPELLING  BY  SOUND. 

The  main  thing  is  not  to  forget  that  phonography  means  writing  by 
sound.  No  attention  should  be  paid  to  ordinary  spelling.  Keep  in 
mind  the  fact  that  the  invisible  vowel  Ow  does  not  mean  the  letters  O 
and  W,  and  can  not  be  used  to  spell  the  word  know.  The  Invisible 
Alphabet  Ow  is  the  sound  of  Ow,  as  heard  in  such  words  as  bough,  which 
word  is  spelled  phonetically  b-ow,  bough,  as  in  sign  6  in  Exercise.  The 
word  know  is  spelled  n-o,  know;  shows,  sh-o-s,  as  in  signs  8  and  36. 

Again,  do  not  seek  to  indicate  the  silent  letter  e  occurring  at  the 
end  of  such  English-spelled  words  as  foe,  chase,  sale,  etc.,  signs  2,  33  and 
34.  in  Exercise.  F  and  o  spell  foe  phonographically  and  chay-s,  chase, 
or  S,  long-A  and  1,  sale,  just  as  correctly  as  speech  can  utter  them. 

Do  not,  for  an  instant,  forget  that  it  is  the  phonographic  reporter's 
duty  simply  to  write  the  sounds  which  drop  from  the  speaker's  lips,  not 
to  spell  words.  For,  if  all  the  sounds  of  a  speaker's  utterance  are  cor- 
rectly placed  on  paper,  the  speech  has  actually  been  placed  there,  and 


^  HAVEN'S   PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 

simply  by  pronouncing  the  sounds  thereon,  in  their  order,  the  speech  is 
heard  again,  and  can  easily  be  transcribed  into  ordinary  spelling  for  the 
use  of  those  who  do  not  know  the  shorthand.  Once  get  the  sound  cor- 
rect and  the  sense  is  there  also,  for  it  is  only  sounds  we  hear  when  we 
speak  to  one  another,  and  what  is  more  useful  or  more  used  than 
speech?  People  do  not  spell  nor  indicate  silent  or  capital  letters  when 
speaking,  which  fact  is  the  prime  reason  why  it  is  not  necessary  to  do 
either  in  phonography.  The  simple  presentation  of  the  seven  small 
letters,  i  c  u  x-1  f-e,  when  addressing  a  lady  or  child,  would  be  under- 
stood quite  as  readily  as  if  you  had  written  the  words  which  those 
sounds  represent,  and  had  spelled  and  capitalized  them  into  thel^argain. 
The  full  sentence,  "I  see  you  excel,  Erne,"  may  be  better  English  spell- 
ing, but  it  means  no  more  than  the  seven  letters  above  printed. 

Spelling   by  sound   always  saves  time,  and  though   it   may   seem 
strange  to   the   beginner  that   it   makes  our  shorthand  Visible  Alphabet 
longer  than   the  ordinary  A,  B,  C,  or  Roman  alphabet,  yet  such  devia 
tion  in  length  is  really  only  a  seeming   one,  as,  in  the  Roman  alphabet, 
several  letters  have  more  than  one  sound. 

The  reason  our  shorthand  alphabet  commences  with  P,  B,  T  and  D, 
instead  of  A,  B,  C,  is  because  the  phonographic  alphabet  is  arranged  tc 
suit  the  order  of  the  signs,  instead  of  their  name. 

POSITION  VOCALIZATION. 

As  in  this  lesson  are  represented  words  having  two  joined  conso- 
nants, it  is  necessary  to  state  that,  in  general,  the  invisible  vowel  sound 
is  indicated  by  the  first  consonant  of  a  word,  no  matter  what  position 
the  other  consonants  may  happen  to  be  in,  as  in  sign  41,  the  invisible 
vowel  O  in  ropes  being  indicated  by  the  position  of  the  first  consonant  R. 
and  not  by  the  second  consonant.  This  is  the  rule.  But  like  most  rules 
in  life  it,  of  necessity,  has  an  exception,  but  only  one:  That  exception 
existing  in  instances  where  the  small  consonants,  Hay,  Way  and  Whay, 
or  the  horizontal  consonants,  K,  Gay,  M  and  N,  are  followed  by  a  de- 
scending letter,  as  in  signs  42  to  47,  inclusive,  in  which  case  the  invisible 
vowel  is  determined  by  the  position  of  the  second  consonant,  instead  of 
the  first.  But  it  is  only  when  the  second  consonant  is  a  descending  one 
that  the  exception  applies,  as  otherwise  the  regular  rule  governs  Way, 
K,  Gay,  etc.,  as  well  as  other  consonants. 

In  words  of  two  syllables,  such  as  berry  and/unny  (signs  49  and  50), 
the  concluding  letter  Y  is  pronounced  somewhat  like  the  short- i  in  bit, 
or  like  an  E.  Those  words,  then,  in  spelling  by  sound,  must  be  spelled 
ber-e,  berry;  fun-e,  funny;  and,  being  spelled  phonographically  with 
those  sound  letters,  they  must  be  written  accordingly;  hence  the  final 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  4r 

letter  Y  in  those  and  similarly  constructed  words  is  written  with  the  E 
sound  of  Y  indicated  invisibly,  but  not  by  position,  because  not  necessary. 

It  is  impossible,  in  writing  words  of  two  or  more  syllables,  always 
to  give  each  syllable  the  proper  position  required  by  its  particular 
vowel.  As  a  general  rule,  only  one  syllable  in  a  word  can  be  accommo- 
dated in  this  respect,  and  the  syllable  thus  honored  should  be  either  the 
first,  as  in  sign  50,  or  the  syllable  containing  the  most  conspicuous 
vowel,  which  is  generally  the  accented  one.  There  are  instances,  how- 
ever, in  which  it  is  not  necessary  to  apply  this  rule.  Those  instances  are 
found  in  words,  the  phonetic  outlines  of  which  are  so  extended  that 
their  meaning  is  sufficiently  distinct  without  recourse  to  any  especially 
significant  position,  and  which  are,  therefore,  written  in  the  second  po- 
sition, the  easiest  position  in  which  to  write.  Sign  52  in  Exercise. 

It  may  be  asked  what  rule  will  determine  whether  sign  50  in  Exer- 
cise spells  fun  or  funny,  since  both  words  contain  the  same  consonants, 
F  and  N.  To  this  the  author  replies  that  each  alphabetical  conso- 
nant may  indicate  an  invisible  vowel  after  it,  and  there  being  two  full- 
sized  consonants  (F  and  N)  in  funny,  there  may  also  be  two  vowels  indi- 
cated, one  after  each  consonant,  as  there  happens  to  be  (f  u  and  n-e), 
which,  vowels  and  consonants,  spell  funny.  Fun  would  have  been  written 
with  only  one  full  sized  consonant  (an  F),  the  N  in  fun  being  indicated 
in  another  manner,  the  explanation  of  which  is  reserved  for  future  lessons. 

It  would  be  unprofitable  to  students  were  the  author  to  take  up 
space  in  the  descriptive  part  of  a  lesson  to  presuppose  instances  ahead 
of  the  principles  already  described  in  the  lesson.  And,  furthermore, 
such  a  method,  in  addition  to  being  a  waste  of  time,  would  have  no 
other  effect  than  to  confuse. 

It  is,  therefore,  best  for  students  not  to  worry  themselves  about  future 
possibilities — wondering  whether  such  a  manner  of  writing  a  word  will 
or  will  not  cause  confliction  with  other  words  not  in  the  lessons,  etc., 
etc.  Better  learn  the  lessons  just  as  they  are,  reading  the  Exercise  as 
the  Key  says,  and  writing  words  in  the  Key  as  the  Exercise  directs,  and 
the  student  will  be  sure  not  to  go  astray.  Remember  that  everything 
cannot  be  explained  in  one  lesson,  and  that  if  students  will  be  satisfied 
to  take  instruction  as  it  comes,  they  will  find  all  their  questions  answered 
and  all  their  conundrums  solved  by  the  time  the  last  lesson  is  reached, 
while  most  questions  will  solve  themselves  as  one  progresses. 

Students  must  expect,  at  first,  a  little  difficulty  in  reading  purely 
consonant  outlines,  but  this  difficulty  will  diminish  with  each  lesson,  and 
entirely  disappear  with  practice  in  reading. 


4b  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

In  sign  39  in  Exercise,  the  big  circle-Ses  is  written  above  the  line 
for  the  word  cease,  and  in  sign  40,  the  small  circle-s  is  also  added  inside 
the  large  circle  to  make  ceases. 

Additional  practice  in  joining  the  circle-S  and  Ses  is  given  in 
signs  33  to  38,  inclusive.  The  word  necessity,  sign  51,  is  spelled  ne-scs-te, 
as  it  is  easy  to  read  it  in  that  shape,  while  such  outline  is  easily  written. 

Accustom  yourself  to  holding  your  pencil  between  the  first  and 
second  fingers,  and  not  between  the  thumb  and  first  finger.  The  latter 
may  be  correct  for  ordinary  penmanship,  where  the  letters  all  slant  in 
the  same  direction,  but  in  shorthand  the  letters  slant  in  so  many  ways, 
many  of  them  backward  and  perpendicular,  that  to  accurately  write 
such  shorthand  characters  it  is  necessary  to  hold  the  pencil  as  advised. 


EXERCISE     IT 


.....r.  .........  33.     .  ..... 


.....  oS.  ........  .. 


...34;  .....  6.,....3S-.....  .......  36  .....  oS.  ........  ..jj,.  ............  3$.....  ......  39.  ........ 


...40.  .....  &i..S\  .....  4Z......x  .....  43.......44........4i-....  .....  .46".  .....  ..  ...... 


^  ......  „... 


KEY  IV. 

i,  Fee;  2,  foe;  3,  few;  4,  joy;  5,  dough;  6,  bough;  7,  knee;  8,  know;  9, 
thou;  10,  key;  u,co\v;  12,  caw;  13,  low;  14,  law;  15,  allow;  16,  ago;  17, 
ague;  18,  payee;  19,  snowy;  20,  Louis;  21,  Uriah;  22,  Noah;  23,  Owen; 
24,  Dale;  25,  Howe;  26,  Pme  ;  27,  Doe;  28,  Hook;  29,  Shaw;  30,  Beu- 
lah;  31,  Boyle;  32,  Katie;  33,  chase;  34,  sale  ;  35,  sash;  36,  shows;  37, 
size  ;  38,  sizes  ;  39,  cease;  40,  ceases  ;  41,  ropes  ;  42,  wooed  ;  43,  hit  ;  44, 
hate  ;  45,  hut ;  46,  myth  ;  47,  mouth  ;  48,  ferry;  49,  berry  ;  50,  funny  ;  51, 
necessity;  52,  customary;  53,  Ripe  peaches  are  wholesome. 


HAVEN'S   PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY.  ^j 

LESSON   V. 

THE  BEGINNING  HOOKS. 

While  the  letter  Way  is  quite  correctly  joined  to  Ing,  as  in  sign  2 
in  Exercise,  there  is  also,  in  some  instances,  a  much  easier  and  more 
rapid  manner  of  joining  Way  or  Whay  to  N  and  to  some  other  letters. 
This  is  by  running  the  letter  Way  into  the  letter  to  which  it  is  joined, 
without  showing  point  of  juncture,  as  in  signs  i,  7,  8,  etc.  in  Exercise, 
forming  what  is  known  as  the  Way  or  Whay  hook,  it  indicating  the 
sound  of  Whay  as  well.  The  hook,  it  will  be  noticed,  is  always  shaded 
upon  the  commencing  stroke  and  accommodates  itself  to  the  shape 
of  the  main  letter  to  which' it  is  joined,  being,  therefore,  joined  to 
the  full-sized  letters  L,  M,  etc,  in  the  most  convenient  manner,  which 
though  in  the  case  of  L.  (sign  9),  makes  the  hook  somewhat  resemble 
U,  yet  it  will  never  be  mistaken  to  be  any  other  character  than  what  it 
is,  for  the  reason  that  U  would  not  be  written  backwards,  as  the  Way 
and  Whay  hook  is  in  these  cases.  The  letter  Whay  can  also  be  sub- 
stituted for  Way,  to  facilitate  junctures,  as  in  sign,  3  to  5  in  Exercise. 

This  Way  or  Whay  hook  is  what  is  known  as  a  beginning  hook,  be- 
cause it  is  placed  at  the  beginning  of  .  outlines.  There  are  other 
beginning  hooks  of  still  more  value  as  abbreviating  principles,  but 
which,  for  special  reasons,  are  best  classed  as  double,  triple  and  quad- 
ruple consonants.  Below  we  explain  the 

DOUBLE  CONSONANTS, — A  small  beginning  hook,  written  on  the  left 
side  of  the  upright  and  slanting  straight  characters,  P,  B,  T,  D,  etc.,  and 
on  the  under  side  of  the  horizontal  ones,  K,  Gay,  etc.,  indicates  the 
addition  of  R  to  the  full-sized  consonants  to  which  it  is  joined.  See 
signs  n,  13,  15,  17,  19,  21  and  50  in  Exercise.  A  similar  hook,  also  be- 
ginning outlines,  but  written  on  the  upper  side  of  horizontal  and  nglu 
side  of  upright  straight  characters,  adds  L  to  the  full-sized  consonants 
to  which  it  is  joined.  See  signs  numbered  12,  14,  16,  18,  2o  and  49  in 
Exercise.  Although,  in  writing  these  combinations,  which  are  denomi- 
nated the  Per  and  Pel  series  of  Double  Consonants,  the.  signs  are  com- 
menced at  the  hooks,  yet,  in  reading  them,  the  L  or  R  hook,  as  the  case 
may  be,  is  read  after  the  consonant  to  which  it  is  joined.  These  com- 
binations must  not  be  called  p-r,  p-1,  etc.,  but  as  one  sound,  Per,  Pel,  etc. 

While  these  L  and  R  hooks  are  comparatively  easily  added  to 
straight  letters,  such  is  not  entirely  the  case  with  the  curved  consonants. 
For  instance,  though  the  L  hook  may  readily  be  added  to  Ith,  as  in  sign 
38  in  Exercise,  yet  it  would  be  very  awkward  to  add  an  R  hook  to  Ith. 
Similarly  with  other  curves.  We  can  add  an  L  hook  to  an  F,  as  in  sign 


48  HAVEN'S   PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 

34.  but  not  an  R  hook  conveniently.  We  can  add  an  R  hook  to  V,  sign 
36;  to  long  S,  sign  40;  or  to  Ish,  sign  42;  but  we  cannot  conveniently  add 
an  L  hook  to  V,  long  S  or  Ish.  We  therefore  employ  this  rule:  Add 
the  beginning  hooks  to  curved  letters  the  same  way  as  to  the  straight 
letters,  when  convenient;  when  not  convenient,  shade  the  curved  letters 
to  indicate  the  hook  instead  of  writing  tha  hook.  This  shading  would 
indicate  the  addition  of  R  to  F,  Ith  and  L,  signs  35,  39  and  44;  and  would 
add  L  to  V  or  Ish,  signs  37  and  43.  That  is,  the  shading  indicates  the 
hook  letter  that  cannot  be  easily  attached. 

The  L  hook  is  not  added  to  L,  and  it  cannot  be  added  to  long-Z, 
nor  should  long-S  be  thickened  to  indicate  L,  because  thickening  long-S 
would  make  it  look  like  a  long-Z. 

It  will  be  seen,  by  reference  to  signs  52,  53  and  54,  that  the  L  is 
indicated  to  Ish  in  two  ways,  due  to  the  fact  that  the  sign  Ish  may  be 
written  either  upwards  or  downwards  in  junctures  with  other  full 
sized  characters,  though,  when  alone,  it  is  only  written  downward.  On 
one  plan,  signs  52  and  53,  the  hook,  being  a  beginning  one,  is,  of  course, 
joined  at  the  bottom  of  the  letter,  Ish  therein  being  written  upwards 
and  begun  at  the  lower  end,  the  hook  being  attached  the  same  as  to  K 
in  sign  51.  In  the  outlines  in  signs  52  and  53,  is  also  another  full-sized 
letter — Ing  in  52  and  F  in  53 — which  show  the  direction  in  which 
the  Ish  is  written,  but,  where  the  only  full  sized  letter  written  is 
Ish,  then  it  would  be  impossible  to  tell  in  which  direction  Ish  is  written 
unless  we  adhere  to  the  rule  to  write  Ish  downwards  always  when  it  is 
written  alone,  and  in  such  case  we  must  shade  Ish  to  indicate  the  addi- 
tion of  L,  as  in  sign  43;  also  whenever  Ish  is  written  downwards,  no 
matter  how  many  letters  we  attach  to  it,  as  in  shellac,  sign  54. 

The  R  hook  is  added  to  M  and  the  L,  hook  to  N  on  the  most  con- 
venient side  of  those  two  letters,  which  would  be  the  same  sides  as  they 
would  be  added  to  straight  letters.  Compare  sign  45  with  sign  13  in 
Exercise  and  sign  47  with  sign  51.  To  add  L  to  M  and  R  to  X,  we 
thicken  M  or  N  and  retain  the  same  hooks,  as  in  signs  46  and  48  in 
Exercise.  This  is  done  because,  if  we  did  not  retain  the  hooks,  the 
thickening  of  M  and  N  would  cause  them  to  be  mistaken  for  Mb  or  Mp 
and  Ing.  Therefore,  the  student  need  entertain  no  fear  that  sign  46 
will  ever  be  mistaken  for  Mbr,  Mpr,  Mbl,  or  sign  48  for  Ingr,  or  Ingl, 
for  the  hooks  R  or  L  are  never  added  to  Ing,  nor  Emp,  nor  are  they  in- 
tended to  be  added  to  any  of  the  small  characters  of  the  Visible  Alphabet. 

Signs  47,  48,  49,  51,  etc.,  need  not  be,  by  the  careful  pupil,  con- 
fused with  Way-n,  Way- ing,  Way-r,  etc.,  as  the  latter  are  written 
as  in  signs  i,  2,  7,  4, etc.,  with  either  a  shaded  hook  or  letter  Way  or  \Vhay. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


49 


Rarer,  sign  33,  is  simply  the  word  rare,  with  another  R  added  to  it. 

Although  the  Per  and  Pel  series  of  double  consonants  should  be 
ordinarily  pronounced  as  though  the  invisible  vowel  E  existed  between 
the  P  and  L  or  P  and  R,  etc.,  yet  this  is  done  merely  for  the  sake  of 
appreciating  the  double  character  of  their  consonants,  for  any  other 
vowel  may,  at  times,  occur  between  the  P-l  and  P-r,  etc.,  as  with  chair, 
sign  19.  Furthermore,  these  double  consonants,  Per,  Pel,  etc.,  may 
not  possess  any  vowel  sound  between  them,  but  indicate  it  after  them, 
as  with  sign  21,  in  which  the  invisible  vowel  sound  Oo  follows  the 
double  consonant  Dr.  When,  however,  there  are  two  separate  vowel 
sounds  in  a  word,  as  in  the  two-syllabled  word  dowry  (spelled  phono- 
graphically  d-ow-re),  the  hook  R  should  not  be  employed,  the  conson- 
ants of  the  word  being  -written  out  in  full,  as  in  sign  22,  in  order  to 
clearly  indicate  the  presence  of  two  vowel  sounds. 

The  student  should  particularly  bear  in  mind  that,  although,  in 
writing  these  Per  and  Pel  series  of  double  consonants,  they  are  com- 
menced at  the  hooks,  yet,  in  reading  them,  the  R  or  L  hook,  as  the  case 
may  be,  is  read  after  the  main  consonant;  therefore,  in  reading  Shel, 
the  second  syllable  in  facial,  sign  53,  the  full  sized  consonant  Ish  is 
read  before  the  hook  L,  and  the  hook  L  last;  thus,  fa-shel;  not  fa-lish. 

Below  is  given  a  table  of  the  double  consonants: 


Eer 

S 

£s^ 

B-el 

R-mer 

t* 

^^r 

Rm.el 

• 

Ker 

c— 

c_ 

Kel 

Mer      ^     ^v 

Mel 

Gier 

<r- 

^_ 

Grel 

Ner      w     ^-^ 

Nel 

Per 

\ 

\ 

Pel 

Ter      ^     ^_ 

lei 

3er 

\ 

\ 

Bel 

Ver       ^      ^> 

Vel, 

Ter 

1 

r 

Tel 

TKer    (        C 

TKel 

Der 

1 

\ 

Del 

E$er     5         JN 

Cher 

/ 

r 

CThel 

3her    J)    i     ... 

Jer 

/ 

f 

Jel 

Ler       r 

TRIPLE  AJJD  QUADRUPLE  CONSONANTS. —  The  time-saving  principle  of 
double  consonants  has  just  been  explained;  but  there  are  two  still 
greater  consonant  combinations,  known  as  triple  and  quadruple  series. 

The  triple  series  is  of  two  kinds — the  Pier  and  Prel  series  and  the 
Sper  and  Spel  series,  both  of  which  are  illustrated  at  top  of  next  page: 


HAVEN  S   PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 


Rle 


Krel 


e/     Srel 
^     Srmel 


Sker 
3ger 
Sper 
3ber 
3ter 

3c_Ker 

3jer 

3fer 


Stiv 


er 


S^el 


The  above  Pier  and  Prel  series  of  triple  consonants  are  made  by  en- 
larging the  hooks  of  the  Per  and  Pel  series  of  double  consonants.  See 
signs  23  to  32  inclusive  in  Exercise.  This  is  merely  the  adding  of  both 
beginning  hooks  R  and  L,  on  same  side  of  the  letter  at  one  time.  The 
written  hook  itself  remains  the  R  hook  or  L,  hook  according  to  which 
side  it  is  on,  the  other  hook  being  read  between  the  the  full  sized  letter 
and  the  hook,  the  fact  that  the  written  hook  is  far  away  from  the  full 
sized  letter,  indicating  the  insertion  of  the  invisible  hook.  Pronounce 
the  full  sized  letter  first,  invisible  consonant  next,  and  written  hook  last. 

The  Sper  and  Spel  series  of  triple  consonants  in  foregoing  plate  is 
formed  by  converting  into  a  circle  the  R  hook  of  the  straight  letters  of 
the  Per  and  Pel  series  of  double  consonants  (signs  55,  58  and  59  in- 
clusive); by  writing  the  S  circle  inside  the  L,  hook  of  the  straight  letters 
of  the  Per  and  Pel  aeries  of  double  consonants  (signs  56,  57  and  60)  and 
inside  both  the  L,  and  R  hooks  of  the  curved  letters,  Signs  63,  65  and 
66  inclusive.  Where  curved  letters  are  only  shaded  to  add  L  or  R,  the 
circle  S  is  added  naturally,  as  in  signs  61,  62  and  64. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  51 

Sper,  Sjer,  Sker,  etc.,  (signs  55,  58  and  59),  will  not  clash  with 
dp,  Sj,  Sk,  etc. ;  because  in  Sper,  Sjer,  Sker,  etc.,  the  circle  is 
written  on  the  left  and  lower  sides  of  the  main  consonant  to  add  R, 
while  in  the  latter,  the  circle  S  is  on  its  natural  side.  Compare  signs 
55,  58  and  59  of  this  lesson  with  29,  31  and  23  of  Exercise  to  Lesson  III. 

The  quadruple  series  of  consonants,  like  the  'triple,  are  of  two 
kinds,  the  Spier  and  Sprel  series  and  the  Sesper  series. 

The  Spier  and  Sprel  series  are  formed  by  adding  a  circle  S  inside 
the  hook  of  the  Pier  and  Prel  series  of  double  consonants.  See  signs 
67  to  71  inclusive  and  the  following  diagram: 


Srraler 

Skier 

Sgler 

Spier 

SHer 


iSrrel 

Srmrel 

Skrel 


Sdler 

ScKler 

Sjler 


N     Sbrel 
P      Sdrel 


5jrel 


$mler   <5^  5N  Smrel 

Snler    ^  <L/  Sn.rel 

^fler     ^  C_  Sfrel 

Svler    ^  ^  Svrel 

-  C  (?  StKrel 


SsKIer 


In  the  cut  below  we -illustrate  the   beginning  hooks   from  double 
to  quadruple  series,  so  that  the  student  may  intelligently  compare  them: 


Ter 


Tier 


$rer 


Srler 


Tel 


Trel 


Rel 


The  Sesper  series  of  quadruple  consonants  are  formed  by  convert- 
ing into  a  large  sized  circle  the  R  hook  of  the  straight  letters  of  the  Per 
series  of  double  consonants.  The  circle  is  written  twice  the  size  of  the 


52  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

circle   S,  and  is  really  the  Ses  circle  written  upon  the  R  hook  side  of 
the  double  consonants,  as  per  diagram  below: 


3e$-ter 
Ses-, 

Ses-ger 


Ses-rmer 


The  Sesper  circle  cannot  be  added  to  the  curved  letters  F,  V,  etc  , 
and  therefore,  when  used,  will  never  be  mistaken  for  Ses-p,  Ses-t,  etc., 
because,  as  with  the  preceding  explanation  of  the  difference  between 
Sper  and  Sp,  the  double  consonants  Sesper,  Sester,  etc.,  are  written  on 
the  reverse  side  of  the  P,  T,  etc.,  to  that  occupied  by  Sesp,  etc.  Sign  77. 

In  writing  these  triple  and  quadruple  consonants,  they  are  always 
commenced  at  the  circle,  when  it  accompanies  them,  and  at  the  hook 
when  the  combinations  have  no  commencing  circle.  In  reading  the 
latter  class  (the  Pier  and  Prel  series)  the  main  consonant  is  read  first, 
ler  or  rel  last,  as  with  the  R  and  L  hooks  in  the  Per  and  Pel  series  of 
double  consonants;  but,  in  reading  all  combinations  beginning  with 
a  circle  (the  Sper  and  Spel,  Spier  and  Sprel  series)  the  circle  S  or  Ses  is 
read  first,  the  main  consonants  P,  B,  etc.,  next,  and  the  hook  or  other 
letter  of  the  combination  last.  This  explanation  refers  only  to  consonants*. 
Invisible  vowels  may  intervene  between  any  consonants,  as  in  settle 
(sign  57),  wherein  an  invisible  vowel  is  indicated  between  the  S  and  T 
of  Stel,  in  which  case  S  is  read  first,  invisible  vowel  E  next  and  Tel  last. 
No  invisible  vowel,  however,  can  be  indicated  preceding  the  circle  S  or 
Ses,  because,  as  explained  in  Lesson  III  ,  the  long  sign  for  S,  as  in  the 
Visible  Alphabet,  is  written  when  it  is  desired  to  indicate  an  invisible 
vowel  preceding  S  or  Z,  when  S  or  Z  begin  outlines. 

In  further  explanation  of  the  use  of  these  triple  and  quadruple  conso- 
nants, it  is  necessary  to  state  that  not  only  may  an  invisible  vowel  exist 
between  any  two  consonants  of  these  combinations,  as  with  settle  above 
i  istanced,  but  any  vowel  may  be  indicated,  as  in  sprawl  (sign  68),  and, 
furthermore,  as  many  invisible  vowels  may  exist  between  the  conso- 
nants as  there  are  consonants  to  read  them  between,  as  instance  the 
case  of  quadruple  consonant  Skier,  which,  in  the  position  represented  in 
the  Exercise  (sign  71)  spells  secular,  thereby  indicating  an  invisible 
vowel  between  the  S  and  K,  one  between  K  and  L,  and  one  between 
L  and  R.  It  is  best  not  to  bother  about  vowels  in  this  lesson.  Learn  the 
words  without  question,  as  shown  in  the  Key,  so  long  as  the  consonant 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  ,-., 

combinations   are  well   understood.     The  vowel  sounds  will  be  found  to 
take  care  of  themselves  as  you  progress. 

There  are  instances,  as  in  signs  86  and  87,  straggler  and  stickler, 
where  the  full  form  of  hooks  cannot  be  written,  but  signs  thus  slighted 
will  be  quite  easily  read  by  the  student  alter  becoming  somewhat 
acquainted  with  them.  Do  not  suppose,  however,  that  sign  84  is  simi- 
larly slighted,  for  the  word  descry  is  perfectly  formed,  thus:  d-skr-i,  desry. 


V. 


.^..46l.S.^ 
.&^£ 


J.  .63.  $\  .JS4f>..6S 

d  f/i?" 


S  ..sra.c-^..$'i\.,8fzt?\  foClkfe^J^fef^^ 


KEY  V. 

i,  Win;  2,  wing;  3,  wave;  4,  week;  5,  wag;  6,  warm;  7,  wire;  8,  windy; 
9,  whale;  10,  whistle;  n,rare;  12,  rule;  13,  cry;  14,  goal;  15,  pry;  16,  blow; 
17,  try;  18,  deal;  19,  chair;  20,  jail;  21,  drew;  22,  dowry;  23,  roller;  24, 
rural;  25,  collar;  26,  girl;  27,  pillar;  28,  barrel;  29,  dealer;  30,  trial;  31, 
jailer;  32,  Charles;  33,  rarer;  34,  fall;  35,  fare;  36,  veer;  37,  vale;  38, 
Ethel;  39,  their;  40,  icer;  41,  user;  42,  share;  43,  shawl;  44,  lore;  45, 
more;  46,  mill;  47,  nail;  48,  near;  49,  rail;  50,  armor;  51,  kill;  52,  shilling; 
53,  facial;  54,  shellac;  55,  spree;  56,  sable;  57,  settle;  58,  sieger;  59,  soaker; 
60,  saggle;  61,  safer;  62,  civil;  63,  savor;  64,  slur;  65,  sinner;  66,  small; 
67,  sabler;  68,  sprawl;  69,  settler;  70,  sidereal;  71,  secular;  72,  buckler;  73, 
tunnel;  74,  tippler;  75,  treacle;  76,  strainer;  77,  sisterly;  78,  cobbler;  79, 
corporal;  80,  grammar;  81,  viper;  82,  labor;  83,  leers;  84,  descry;  85,  straggle; 
86,  straggler;  87,  stickler;  88,  George  tore  May's  silk  dress. 


fjf  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

LESSON  VI. 

FINAL  HOOKS. 

A  small  final  hook,  written  on  the  right-hand  side  of  upright  and 
slanting  straight  characters,  and  on  the  upper  side  of  horizontal  ones, 
represents  the  addition  of  either  F  or  V.  Signs  i,  3,  5,  7  and  9,  in 
Exercise.  S  or  Z  may  be  added  to  this  hook  by  writing  the  circle 
within  the  hook.  Signs  13,  15,  17,  etc.  This  F  or  V  hook  is  not  in- 
tended to  be  added  to  the  curved  letters  F,  V,  etc.,  although  some 
writers  use  a  small  shaded  final  hook  on  curves  to  represent  F  or  V,  as 
in  signs  41  and  46. 

A  similarly  sized  final  hook,  written  on  the  left-hand  side  of  upright 
and  slanting  straight  letters,  on  the  lower  side  of  horizontal  ones,  and 
added  in  the  most  convenient  manner  to  curved  letters,  represents  the 
addition  of  N.  Signs  2,  4,  6,  8  and  37  in  Exercise.  The  S  or  Z  circle  is 
added  to  this  hook,  on  curved  letters,  by  writing  the  circle  within 
the  hook  (signs  40,  43  and  50);  and  to  the  straight  consonants, 
by  converting  the  N  hook  into  a  complete  circle  (signs  14,  16,  18,  20 
and  22),  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  by  which  S  is  added  to  Per 
in  Lesson  V.  This  conversion  of  the  N  hook  into  a  circle,  forms  what 
is  called  the  Ns  circle,  which  need  not  be  mistaken  for  the  plain  circle 
S,  because  the  original  circle  S  is  written  en  the  right  hand  side 
of  straight,  upright,  and  the  upper  side  of  horizontal  characters.  The 
following  cut  illustrates  these  hooks  exactly  and  also  the  manner  in  which 
the  S  and  Ns  circles  are  added  to  them. 


H-n 

^ 

^^G 

R-n$ 

^'v 

>•  ^  R-vS 

fWn-n. 

^, 

^^^& 

Rm-n$ 

£ 

^    ^    RttL-Jl 

R-n 

3 

—o 

K-TI5 

Mv 

K-£s 
__j>    _^    rv  vs 

Gray-n 

—9 

-75 

(iay-n$ 

Gay-* 

_TI?       g>    Gay- 

P-n 

\ 

\ 

P-n.$ 

P-f 

^   ^   p-vi 

B-n 

N 

% 

B-nS 

B4 

\        \9      B-^| 

T-n 

J 

J 

T-n$ 

T7 

1       IP      T-& 

D-n. 

J 

J 

D-ns 

1           1          T>    fS 
t         w        l/~  v£ 

Ch-n 

y 

/ 

Ch-nS 

Ch4 

/        /       CK-$4 

J-n 

/ 

J 

J-nS 

£j 

/       /       J-£S 

(o         v    yg 

The  Ns  circle  may  be  enlarged  to  represent  the  sounds  of  Nses  or 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  55 

Nzes,  signs  51,  53,  etc,  the  Nses  circle  really  being  a  Ses  circle  written 
on  the  N  hook  side.  Neither  the  Ns  circle  nor  the  Nses  circle  are  ever 
added  to  curved  letters. 

A  large  sized  final  hook,  written  on  the  same  side  of  full  sized  con- 
sonants as  that  to  which  the  F  or  V  hook  is  added,  represents  the  ad- 
dition of  the  sounds  Vive,  Viv  or  Tiv.  Signs  26,  28  and  30  in  Exercise. 
The  Tiv  hook,  like  the  V  hook,  is  not  intended  to  be  added  to  curved 
letters,  but  some  writers  use  a  large  shaded  final  hook  on  curves  to  in- 
dicate Tiv,  as  in  sign  48.  The  objection  to  these  shaded  final  hooks  is 
that  generally  they  have  to  be  written  backwards  and  as  it  is  often  hard 
to  form  them,  it  is  quite  as  easy  to  write  the  V  or  Tiv  in  full. 

A  large  final  hook,  written  on  the  same  side  of  full  sized  consonants 
as  that  on  which  the  N  hook  is  written,  represents  the  addition  of  the 
sound  Shun,  as  heard  in  the  words  represented  by  signs  25,  27,  29  and 
31  in  Exercise.  By  consulting  below  diagrams,  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
Shun  hook  is  an  enlarged  N  hook,  the  letter  N  being  the  last  sound  in 
Shun.  Similarly,  the  Tiv  hook  is  an  enlarged  V  hook,  the  sound  of  V 
being  the  terminating  sound  of  Tiv. 


Vt/ 


SKun 


orV  ^  Tiv 


Some  phonographers  write  the  Shun  and  Tiv  hooks  transposed,  but 
this  is  very  inadvisable,  for  many  reasons.  For  instance,  by  writing  the 
Shun  hook  on  the  under  side  of  K,  the  word  affectionate  (sign  104)  is 
very  easily  written,  but  write  the  Shun  hook  on  the  reverse  side  and  the 
student  will  find  that  he  can  write  as  far  as  the  sound  Shun  in  the  word, 
but  when  he  attempts  to  add  the  final  syllable  ate,  his  Shun  will  be 
spoiled  entirely.  This  will  never  happen  in  writing  the  syllables  Shun 
or  Tiv  in  the  positions  prescribed  in  these  lessons.  The  only  syllables 
which  are  most  likely  to  follow  Tiv  are  ly  or  ness,  the  latter  being  easily 
added  in  either  case  and  the  former  (7y)  being  easily  added  to  Tiv  only 
when  Tiv  is  written  upon  the  side  prescribed  in  this  lesson.  See  sign 
102  in  Exercise.  Then  again,  it  is  much  more  reasonable  to  suppose 
that  Tiv,  containing  a  V  sound,  should  be  written  on  the  same  side  as 
the  V  hook,  and  the  syllable  Shun,  containing  an  N  sound,  should  be 
written  on  the  same  side  as  an  N  hook,  an  arrangement  which  is  also  a 
great  aid  to  the  memory. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


The  circle  S  or  Z  is  added  to  both  the  Shun  and  Tiv  hooks,  by 
enclosing  the  circle  S  or  Z  within  the  hooks  in  the  manner  illustrated  by 
signs  24  and  44  in  Exercise.  In  adding  the  circle  to  these  large  hooks, 
care  should  be  taken  that  this  addition  does  not  crowd  those  large 
hooks  into  a  resemblance  to  the  smaller  F  or  V  or  N  hooks.  This  is 
easily  avoided  by  making  the  large  hooks  somewhat  larger,  when  adding 
the  circle,  than  ordinary.  The  following  schedule,  which  shows  how 
the  Shun  and  Tiv  hooks  are  added  to  straight  letters,  gives  the  proper 
sizes  for  the  hooks,  with  or  without  the  circle  S. 


R-ghun   ^o 

^>  R  -  shuns 

R-tiv       *? 

O        T) 

x^    J>-tlV5 

Rrm-shun  ^o 

XQRm-  shuns 

Rra-tiv  ^ 

^   Rtn-tiv^ 

K-shun    —  D 

~~^>  R-  shuns 

K.-tiv      _? 

__S)  K-tivs 

Gay-  shun  """5 

"•^5  Gay-  shuns 

Gay-tiv   _j 

«S  Gay-  tivs 

P-shun      o 

e>    P-  shunS 

P-tiv       V> 

\9    ?-tivs 

B-shun     3 

O  B-shujiS 

B-tiv      V 

V    B-tiv5 

T-shun    J 

J    T-  shuns 

T-tir      L 

Is      T-tivs 

D-shun     iJ 

<J    D-5hun3 

D-tiv      L 

U      D-tivs 

Ch-shun  <J 

e/  Ch-  shuns 

CK-tiv    ^ 

(9      Ch-tivs 

J-  shun    (J 

£/  J-  shuns 

J-tiv      / 

6       J-tivs 

Below  we  give  a  table  showing  how  the  hooks  are  added  to  curved 
letters: 


F-n 

V-n 

Th-n 

Sh-n 

L-n 

M-n 


c 

J 
r 


U      F-nS  . 

"^         V-XL* 

C       Th.-ns 


M-n 
Ng-a 


M-ns 
M^-n 
N-ns 


F-shun  *o 
V-  shun  ^) 

3h-  shun  <J 
L-shun  P 
M-shun  x-. 


D  V-  shuns 
6    Th- 


L- shuns 
M- shuns 


N-shun 
Ng-shun 


N-  shuns 


In  sign  49  of  this  Exercise,  the  N  hook  of  the  word  shown  is  appar- 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  «.- 

ently  written  identically  the  same  as  the  L  hook  in  the  word  facial,  sign 
53  in  Lesson  V.  This  resemblance,  however,  is  only  a  seeming  one. 
The  L  hook,  when  added  to  Ish,  should  never  be  mistaken  for  an  N 
hook,  for  the  following  reasons:  First,  when  L  and  Ish  are  the  only 
consonants  in  a  word,  the  L  hook  is  not  made  use  of,  Ish  being  shaded 
to  represent  the  L  in  words  of  one  syllable,  as  in  sign  43  in  Lesson  V, 
or  written  full  sized  in  words  of  two  syllables.  Second,  the  Ish  in  signs 
52  and  53,  Lesson  V,  is  written  upwards,  and,  therefore,  the  hook  at- 
tached to  it  must  be  a  beginning  hook,  for,  were  it  a  final  hook,  the  Ish 
being  written  upwards,  the  hook  would  be  written  on  the  upper  end. 
Third,  the  hook  in  signs  52  and  53,  Lesson  V,  being  a  beginning  hook,  it 
could  not  be  N,  for  N  is  a  final  hook.  Fourth,  the  L  hook  never  being 
added  to  Ish,  unless  some  other  consonant  is  contained  in  the  combina- 
tion, and  the  R  hook  being  added  to  Ish  only  as  in  sign  42,  Lesson  V, 
therefore,  the  hook  in  sign  49,  this  Exercise,  must  be  a  final  hook,  and 
being  a  small  final  hook  must  be  N,  for  F  and  V  hooks  are  seldom  added 
to  curved  letters,  and  are  then  shaded,  which  is  not  the  case  with  the 
hook  in  sign  49,  this  Exercise. 

In  Lesson  IV,  promise  was  made  that  a  rule  would  be  given  which 
would  determine  the  difference  between  the  words  fun  and  funny,  and 
other  similar  words  in  which  N  is  the  final  consonant.  The  instruction 
now  presented  has  prepared  the  student  for  this  explanation,  the  second 
paragraph  of  this  lesson  directly  providing  for  the  distinction.  In  other 
words,  fun  and  words  terminating  with  the  letter  N,  are  written  with 
the  use  of  the  hook  N  (sign  34),  while  words  ending  with  the  syllable 
ny  are  written  with  the  Visible  Alphabet  sign  for  N,  the  final  vowel 
sound  thus,  by  this  distinction  in  outline,  being  indicated  invisibly,  as  in 
sign  65  of  Lesson  IV.  Compare  also,  in  this  lesson's  Exercise,  signs  5 
and  8  with  n  and  12.  In  sign  23,  the  concluding  vowel  sound  is 
written,  because  China  is  a  proper  name. 

Just  as  the  beginning  hook  in  the  word  stickler,  sign  87  of  last 
lesson,  was  slighted  to  make  a  juncture,  so  can  the  final  Tiv  or  Shun 
hooks  be  slighted  when  necessary,  as  in  sign  33  in  Exercise  to  this 
lesson. 

The  sounds  of  Sesshun  or  Sisshun,  as  heard  in  the  words  possession, 
decision,  etc.,  are  nicely  represented  by  continuing  the  circle  S,  when 
added  to  full  sized  consonants,  into  a  hook,  as  in  signs  55  and  56.  The 
Ns  circle,  continued  into  the  same  kind  of  a  hook,  may  similarly  rep- 
resent the  sound  of  Ensisshun,  as  heard  in  the  word  transition,  sign  57. 
An  additional  circle  S  is  added  to  these  hooks,  as  in  sign  58.  The  Ns 
circle  may  occasionally  be  continued  over  to  add  a  final  sound  of  N, 


53  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

as  in  signs  60  and  61,  where  the  circle  and  hook  read  as  N-sn,  without 
clashing  with  the  Ensisshun  hook. 

THE  ST  AND  STR  LOOPS. 

A  narrow  loop,  half  the  length  of  a  full  sized  consonant  and  written 
on  the  same  side  of  consonant  as  the  circle  S  or  Z  is  written  upon,  rep- 
resents the  addition  of  St  or  Sd  to  the  main  consonant.  Signs  62  to  70. 

A  larger  loop  adds  Str.     Signs  71,  72,  75,  76,  84,  etc. 

When  these  loops  are  added  on  the  R  hook  side  of  P,  B,  etc.,  the 
P  or  B  become  double  consonants,  just  as  though  the  R  hook  was 
actually  there,  the  P  or  B  being  pronounced  Per,  Ber,  etc.,  as  the  case 
may  be,  the  St  or  Str  loop  being  read  first,  as  in  signs  83  and  85  (St-per, 
Str-per)  stopper,  stropper.  A  comparison  of  sign  82  with  sign  83  and 
sign  84  with  sign  85  will  show  their  difference  of  outline  and  individual 
significance.  See  also  below  diagram: 


P   T  CK          ft,  *  ScH  ** 


K 

#T  2r°"  5tr  3trr 

Tr  Str  3ttr  Strtr 


3Kr 

3rr  3trr  3trrr 


Young  students  in  this  art  of  winged  words  sometimes  are  at  a  loss 
to  understand  why  phonographers  indicate  the  addition  of  R  to  St,  by 
writing  St  on  the  R  side  of  P,  B,  etc.,  when,  as  they  think,  that  unneces- 
sary trouble  might  be  obviated  by  the  use  of  the  Str  loop,  which  contains 
R  without  special  assignment  of  position.  The  reason  this  question  is 
very  generally  asked  is  because  a  student  does  not  always  immediately 
grasp  the  particular  use  of,  and  difference  between  those  combinations. 
Let  us  look  carefully  at  the  two  signs  83  and  84.  Truly  the  loop  of  both 
signs  indicate  the  same  consonants.  But  let  us  investigate  farther. 
Let  us  take  the  entire  word  of  each  sign.  The  first  is  stopper,  the  other 
strop.  Now  analyze  them  phonographically,  leaving  out  vowels  and 
repeated  consonants,  and  we  find  their  outlines  to  be — sign  83,  st-pr; 
sign  84,  str-p.  Looking  at  these  analyses,  we  discover  that  the  R  in 
sign  84  precedes  the  letter  P,  while  in  sign  83  it  follows  the  P.  This, 
then,  is  the  sole  secret  of  their  difference  in  outline.  You  could  not 
spell  stopper  by  writing  an  Str  loop  on  the  right  hand  side  of  letter  P, 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  59 

because  loops  on  that  side  are  read  before  the  letter  to  which  they  are 
joined,  and  you  could  not  spell  strop  by  writing  the  St  loop  on  the  R 
hook  side  of  P,  because  in  such  instance  where  an  R  is  indicated  only 
in  that  manner,  the  R  is  read  after  the  P.  The  diagram  on  opposite 
page  illustrates  these  differences  very  clearly: 

When  the  St  or  Str  loops  terminate  a  word,  the  letter  N  may  be 
indicated  in  a  manner  similar  to  the  foregoing  indication  of  the  letter  R. 
It  is  done  by  writing  the  St  or  Str  loop,  as  the  case  m-ay  be,  on  the  N 
hook  side  of  a  letter,  thereby  clearly  indicating  N  without  writing  it. 
Compare  signs  86  with  87  and  88  with  89.  This  is  on  the  same  princi- 
ple as  the  Ns  circle,  which  sort  of  terminations  are  illustrated  below: 


St 


Str 


u/ 

1ST  ~^N$  -3>  Ifet 


As  will  be  seen  in  Exercise,  the  St  and  Str  loops  are  added  either 
beginning  or  ending  a  word,  and  in  some  combinations  may  easily  be 
employed  in  the  middle  of  a  word.  See  sign  100. 

When  the  circle  S  is  the  last  consonant  of  a  word,  and  is  imme- 
diately preceded  by  the  loop  St,  Sd  or  Str,  the  circle  S  may  be  added  to 
those  letters,  as  in  signs  91  and  92.  The  St  and  Str  loops  are  added  to 
the  curved  letters  on  the  most  convenient  side,  in  the  same  manner  as 
the  circle  S  is  added.  Signs  72,  77,  93,  etc. 

The  word  lesson  is  written  downwards  in  sign  106,  where  the  words 
a  single  lesson,  are  joined  together.  This  joining  is  called  phrasing  and 
is  fully  explained  in  other  lessons.  When  lesson  is  written  alone,  it  must 
be  written  upwards,  because  L  is  written  upwards  when  alone. 

The  word  ten  in  sign  106  is  written  on  the  line,  because  it  is  a  fre- 
quently occurring  word  and  ma}'  be  easily  read  in  that  position,  which  is 
the  fastest  position  in  which  to  write. 

This  ignoring  of  position-vocalization  to  place  words  in  the  posi- 
tion in  which  they  may  be  most  easily  read  is  a  principle  which  students 
had  best  not  apply  to  words  not  explained  in  these  lessons. 


60  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


EXIBCISX   VI. 


^^ 


^^J.jM.^M£ 


KEY  VI. 

i,  roof;  2,  remain;  3,  cave;  4,  gain;  5,  puff ;  6,  bone;  7,  tough;  8,  down; 
9,  chaff;  10,  June;  n,  puffy^  12,  downy;  13,  roofs;  14,  remains;  15,  cave?-; 
16,  gains;  17,  puffs;  18,  bones;  19,  staffs;  20,  downs;  21,  chiefs;  22,  Junes;  23. 
China;  24,  revives;  25,  ration;  26,  active;  27,  caution;  28,  po-tive;  29,  potion; 
30,  dative;  31,  tuition;  32,  stations;  33,  stationary;  34,  fun;  35,  frown;  36, 
fashion;  37,  vine;  38,  evasion;  39,  loan;  40,  loans;  41,  love;  42,  man;  43, 
man's;  44,  missions;  45,  known;  46,  knife;  47,  nation;  48,  native;  49,  shown; 
50,  shines;  51,  dances;  52,  prances;  53,  tenses;  54,  bounces;  55,  possession; 
56,  decision;  57,  transition;  58,  transitions;  59,  translation;  60,  Johnson;  .61, 
Wisconsin;  62,  post;  63,  praised;  64,  blest;  65,  trust;  66,  staid;  67,  roast; 
68,  storm;  69,  stick;  70,  stag;  71,  streak;  72,  stream;  73,  test;  74,  toast; 
75,  toaster;  76,  stride;  77,  fast;  78;  list;  79,  steel;  80,  stiff;  Si,  mist;  82,  stop; 
83,  stopper;  84,  strop;  85,  stropper;  86,  chaste;  87,  chanced;  88,  poster; 
89,  punster;  90,  coast;  91,  coasters;  92,  spinsters;  93,  fluster;  94,  bolster; 
95,  faster;  96,  strife;  97,  strive;  98,  string;  99,  strangle;  100,  justify;  101,  affect- 
ive; 102,  affectively;  103,  affection;  104,  affectionate;  105,  affectionately; 
106,  A  single  lesson  well  gotten  surpasses,  ten  merely  glanced  through. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  6r 

LESSON    VII. 

THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE. 

T  and  D  occur  so  frequently  in  words  of  daily  use,  and  the  repre- 
sentation of  those  letters,  by  writing  their  full  phonographic  outlines,  is 
often  so  cumbrous,  that  a  shorter  way  of  expressing  their  sounds  was 
devised  early  in  the  history  of  phonography.  It  is  done  by  halving  the 
consonant  which  immediately  precedes  T  or  D,  and  is  termed  the  Halv- 
ing Principle.  Therefore,  all  full-sized  consonants,  whether  simple 
or  compound,  excepting  Ing  and  Emb  or  Emp,  when  halved,  express 
the  addition  of  either  T  or  D.  Signs  i  to  41  in  Exercise. 

Ing  nor  Emb  and  Emp,  not  being  halved,  when  the  sound  D  is  re- 
quired to  be  added  to  the  light  strokes  of  M  and  N,  those  letters  should 
also  be  made  heavy,  besides  being  halved.  Signs  9  and  10.  When  the 
sound  of  the  letter  T  is  required  to  be  added,  the  signs  should  remain 
slight.  Signs  8  and  n. 

Always  write  the  light  stroke  L-t  (sign  6)  upwards,  and  the  heavy 
stroke  L-r-d  (sign  7)  downwards. 

A  halved  S  is  sometimes  more  conveniently  stricken  upwards  than 
downwards,  as  in  sign  59. 

In  making  use  of  the  half-length  consonants,  care  should  be  taken 
that  such  use  does  not  become  an  abuse.  For  instance,  while  the  word 
might  may  be  rightly  written  as  in  sign  II  in  Exercise,  mighty  must  be 
written  as  in  sign  12,  because,  though  both  words  possess  the  same 
phonographic  consonants  (M  and  T),  yet  there  is  a  concluding  vowel 
sound  in  mighty  which  renders  it  a  necessity,  for  complete  pronunciation 
and  vocalization,  that  the  extended  form  be  employed.  This  rule  ap- 
plies to  all  words  terminating  with  a  vowel  sound. 

T  or  D  are  added  after  N  or  V  hooks,  by  shortening  the  main  con- 
sonant to  which  the  hook  in  question  occurs,  as  in  signs  14,  27,  31,  32, 
43  and  57.  This  is  really  equivalent  to  shortening  the  entire  sign. 

In  signs  42  and  43  the  hook  V  is  made  in  the  most  convenient 
shape.  It  will  not,  so  made,  clash  with  any  other  hook. 

CONSONANTS  OF  DOUBLE  AND  TRIPLE  SIZE. 
To  express  the  addition  of  the  sounds  ter,  der,  cher  and  ther,  full 
sized  consonants  are  made  twice  their  .usual  length.  Signs  69  to  90  in 
Exercise.  .  This  principle  is  also  taken  advantage  of  by  experienced 
phonographers  to  represent  the  addition  of  the  words  their  and  there. 
This  doubling  principle  may  also  be  employed  to  add  the  sounds  of  ker 
and  ger  to  Ing,  and  the  sounds  of  per  and  bcr  to  M.  Signs  99  to 
103.  In  applying  this  doubling  principle  to  the  heavy  consonants  B,  D, 


62  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

etc.,  as  in  such  words  as  debtor,  be  careful,  throughout  the  entire  length 
of  the  double  letter,  to  preserve  the  heavy  stroke,  as  in  sign  70,  in  order 
that  it  may  not  be  taken  for  the  word  deity,  sign  71. 

When,  in  a  sentence,  any  of  the  syllables  ter,  der,  cher  or  ther  is 
immediately  followed  by  either  of  -the  words  their  or  there,  the  syllable 
and  word  may  be  spmetimes  together  represented  by  tripling  the  pre- 
ceding consonant,  as  in  signs  91,  93,  95,  97  and  98.  This  principle  of 
doubling  and  tripling  consonants  is,  of  course,  not  applicable  to  any  of 
the  small  letters  of  the  Visible  Alphabet,  excepting  Way  and  Whay,  it 
being  applied  to  those  last  named  letters  in  the  manner  shown  by  signs 
87  to  9 1  in  Exercise.  Consonants,  when  made  double  and  triple  size, 
indicate  the  invisible  vowel  by  the  first  half  of  their  outline,  the  vowel 
O  of  the  word  bol  der  being  shown  by  the  position  of  the  first  half  of 
sign  69,  the  position  of  the  second  half  of  that  outline  taking  no  part  in 
invisible  vowel  indication. 

INVISIBLE  INDICATION  OF  PRECEDING  VOWELS. 

In  one  of  the  paragraphs  of  Lesson  III,  the  necessity  for  economy 
in  word  outline  is  incidently  referred  to,  the  word  lass  being  used  in 
illustration.  By  reference  to  the  paragraph  in  question,  it  will  be  seen 
that  the  student  is  directed  to  spell  lass  and  kindred  words  that  end  in 
double  S,  with  a  single  S,  thus:  1-a-s,  lass.  This  exercise  of  economy  in 
the  use  of  the  consonants  is  still  more  essential  in  words  of  more  than 
one  syllable,  the  young  phonographer  having  most  need  for  caution  in 
those  words  in  which  the  same  consonants  occur  together  in  the  ordinary 
spelling,  as  //  in  illiberal,  rr  in  irregular,  etc.,  etc.  Young  phonograph- 
ers  are  very  prone  to  write  illiberal  with  two  commencing  phonographic 
L's,  when  one  commencing  L  is  sufficient —  illiberal,  irregular,  immoral 
and  kindred  words  being  divided  into  phonographic  sound  syllables, 
.thus:  short-i  and  li-brel  for  illiberal;  short- i  and  re-glar  for  irregular; 
short-i  and  mrl  for  immoral.  In  other  words,there  are  exactly  the  same 
consonant  sounds  in  immoral  and  such  words  as  there  are  in  moral,  etc. — 
that  is,  m-r-1 — the  only  difference  being  the  commencing  short-i;  there- 
fore moral  and  immoral  should  have  the  same  consonant  outline  in  short- 
hand, illiberal  the  same  consonant  outline  as  liberal,  etc.,  etc.;  the  dis- 
tinction between  them  being  made  by  placing  the  word  commencing 
with  the  short-i  abort  the  line  of  writing,  as  in  signs  105,  107  and  109  in 
Exercise,  the  words  moral,  regular  and  liberal  being  placed  on  the  line 
of  writing,  independent  of  their  vowel  sounds,  they  being  words  not 
needing  invisible  vowel  indication,  but  needing  to  be  in  easiest  position. 

This  brings  us  to  the  subject  introduced  by  the  heading  to  this  por- 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  63 

tion  of  the  lesson — the  Invisible  Indication  of  Preceding  Vowels — the 
preceding  vowel,  in  the  case  of  such  words  as  immoral,  irregular,  etc., 
being  indicated  by  placing  the  outline  in  the  first  position,  above  the 
line.  This  is  for  one  class  of  words  having  a  commencing  vowel.  An- 
other class,  whose  commencing  vowel  is  followed  by  the  so-und  of  S,  we 
indicate  that  commencing  vowel  by  writing  the  long-S,  as  in  sign  22,  in 
Lesson  III.  If  the  commencing  vowel  should  be  immediately  followed 
by  the  sound  of  L,  we  can  indicate  that  preceding  vowel  by  writing  L 
downwards,  as  in  signs  112,  114,  115,  in  this  Exercise,  as  could  also  be 
done  in  the  case  of  sign  107,  if  the  student  prefers,  though  in  sign  107 
it  is  not  necessary,  for  the  rule  for  //  applies  there.  The  writing  of  L 
downwards  to  indicate  a  vowel  preceding  it,  applies  also  to  syllables 
which  are  not  the  first  syllables  of  a  word.  For  instance,  the  syllable  el 
of  fuel,  contains  a  vowel  preceding  the  letter  L  of  el,  and  therefore  the 
Lin  that  outline  is  written  downwards.  Sign  in  in  this  Exercise. 
Wherever  a  vowel  follows  L,  write  L  upwards,  as  in  signs  no  and  113. 
A  vowel  preceding  S  is  indicated,  as  explained  in  Lesson  III,  by  writing 
the  S  of  the  Invisible  Alphabet,  as  in  the  word  ask,  sign  22  in  Lesson  III, 
above  refered  to,  and  as  in  signs  66  and  67  of  this  lesson. 

Occasionally,  a  commencing  vowel  may  be  indicated  by  what  is 
known  as  the  fourth  position — i,  e.,  writing  the  first  consonant  of  the  word 
in  question  just  under  and  touching  the  line  of  writing,  as  in  signs  119 
and  1 20.  This  position  represents  any  commencing  vowel,  it  being 
used  only  when  the  character  of  the  vowel  itself  is  not  important,  the 
writer  merely  needing  to  know  that  there  is  a  preceding  vowel  to  be  able 
to  read  the  outline.  It  is  best  not  to  use  this  plan  excepting' where  the 
word  has  also  a  conspicuous  third-place  vowel  elsewhere  in  its  sound. 
The  author  does  not  particularly  commend  this  fourth  position  plan; 
and,  in  fact,  rather  than  hesitate  between  rules,  the  author  would  remind 
students  that  they  can  always  use  visible  vowels  to  words  commencing 
with  a  vowel,  when  they  so  desire,  and  it  is  often  quite  as  convenient, 
as  in  signs  116,  117  and  118,  though  there  are  many  occasions  where  the 
consonant  outline  alone  is  so  plain  that  a  Deginning  vowel  does  not  need 
indication,  as  in  such  words  as  admission  and  attention,  signs  121  and  122. 

This  matter  of  indicating  an  invisible  beginning  vowel  is,  after  all, 
one  which  students  of  all  methods  of  phonography  must  regulate  for 
themselves.  Some  will  find  nearly  all  outlines  perfectly  legible  without 
indicating  invisible  preceding  vowels,  while  others  who  do  not  possess 
quite  as  good  a  memory  of  sight  may  need  to  make  such  indications 
frequently.  Above  rules,  however,  apply  to  all  cases. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


EXER-CISE     VII. 


[  £ AZ  .<*43  :^44^4£v£ 


N        f       ^    '^^ 
^.Sl\.faJ.ff3 ^4.. 


75,  culture;  76,  fitter;   77,  father;  78,  farther;  79,  falter;  80, 

uther;    82,  zither;    83,  meter;    84,  mother;    85,  furniture;  86, 

sweeter;  88,  water;  89,  weather;    90,  whether;    91,  whether 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  5C 

their;  92,  enter;  93,  enter  their  house;  94,  center;  95,  center  their  ideas; 
96,  further;  97,  further  their  laws;  98,  surrender  their  homes;  99,  jumper: 
100,  hamper;  101,  lumber;  102,  tinker;  103,  finger;  104,  moral;  105, 
immoral;  106,  liberal;  107,  illiberal;  108,  regular;  109,  irregular;  no. 
sickly;  in,  fuel;  112,  alum;  113,  likely;  114,  elective;  115,  elocutionist; 
116,  else;  117,  item;  118,  Edmund;  119,  answer;  120,  another;  121,  ad- 
mission; 122,  attention;  123,  ablution;  124,  intimation;  125,  intention;  126, 
indicates;  127,  indication;  128,  indicated;  129,  undivided;  130,  injunction; 
131,  No  brave  man  employs  slander. 


LESSON  VIII. 

There  are  a  small  number  of  brief  words  in  our  language,  mostly 
one-syllabled,  whose  frequent  occurrence  and  consequent  rapid  utter- 
ance precludes  the  possibility  of  writing  them,  even  phonetically,  as  fast 
as  they  can  be  spoken.  To  provide  for  such  emergencies,  all  methods 
of  shorthand  writing  employ  brief  arbitrary  characters  called  Word- 
Signs,  some  phonographies  containing  long  lists  of  them.  But,  because 
of  a  better  construction  of  principles,  Haven's  Practical  Phonography 
requires  only  fifteen  such  arbitrary  characters,  all  of  which  are  contained 
in  the  following  list: 


THE     WOTVD-SIGHS. 

...A...      O£ 

JJ    .     All 

To 

...>....     Two 
Too 

N 

.'  Or 

Already 

But 

J 

Before 

The 
....!..      On 

...'.'  .      Ought 

...,  Who 
Whom 

An 

* 

The  above  list  of ,  word-signs,  being  entirely  arbitrary,  students 
must  not  expect  to  find  in  them  any  element  of  previously  explained 
principles — that  is,  they  must  neither  expect  them  to  agree  in  position 
with  their  vowel  sounds  nor  their  outline  to  be  composed  of  any  portion 
of  the  consonants  of  the  words  they  represent,  the  instances  in  which 
previously  explained  principles  will  be  recognized  being  very  few. 


66  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

Commit  the  list  of  word-signs  thoroughly  to  memory  in  the  manner 
described  for  memorizing  the  Visible  Alphabet  and  repeatedly  test  your 
ability  to  write  the  proper  signs  without  referring  to  the  list.  In  the 
list  of  word-signs,  the  signs  are  placed  beneath,  on  or  over  dotted  lines. 
These  dotted  lines  must  not  be  mistaken  to  be  a  part  of  any  of  the  signs. 
The  dotted  lines  are  supposed  to  be  the  lines  of  the  paper  on  which  one 
is  writing,  and  are  merely  placed  there,  as  in  the  Exercises  of  these  les- 
sons, to  show  that  the  same  word-sign,  in  order  to  represent  different 
words,  is  sometimes  written  on,  above  or  under  the  line,  as  in  the  case 
of  the  indication  of  invisible  vowels.  Thus,  students  find  that,  in 
phonography,  words  are  sometimes  denoted  by  position  in  the  same 
manner  that  a  vowel  sound  of  a  word  is  generally  indicated  by  the 
position  of  a  consonant. 

No  difficulty  need  be  apprehended  in  regard  to  deciphering  such 
signs  when  met  with  in  regular  sentences.  They  will  never  be  mis- 
taken for  halved  characters,  nor  for  any  of  the  small  letters  of  the 
Visible  Alphabet,  which  they  may  seem  to  resemble,  as  their  uses  are 
entirely  different.  They  are  not  in  same  positions  when  written  alone, 
and  when  used  in  sentences  words  preceding  or  following  them  are 
always  perfect  keys  to  them.  It  is  well,  however,  to  explain  clearly 
their  particular  uses. 

In  the  list  of  word-signs  there  is  one  representing  the  article  the. 
It  is  the  fifth  one  of  the  light  outlines  presented  in  the  list.  Particular 
attention  is  called  to  that  sign  because  it  looks  like  the  letter  Hay,  and 
because,  for  that  reason,  it  must  always  be  written  in  a  particular  direc- 
tion, that  is,  upwards,  from  left  to  right.  As  the  outline  stands  alone  in 
the  list,  the  student  may  suppose  that  it  does  not  matter  in  which  direc- 
tion it  is  written,  and  if  it  were  always  written  alone  in  actual  use  it 
would  not  matter;  but  even  if  it  be  but  occasionally  joined  and  then 
joined  upwards,  as  is  the  case,  it  would  be  better  to  write  the  sign  up- 
wards even  when  written  alone,  in  order  to  form  the  habit,  for  very  rapid 
writing  is  greatly  a  matter  of  habit.  And,  as  it  is  particularly  neces- 
sary, both  for  the  purpose  of  speed  and  for  legibility,  that  this  sign  for 
the  be  written  always  joined  when  possible,  it  will  be  understood  how 
important  it  is  at  the  outset  to  form  the  habit  of  writing  the  sign  for  the 
upward. 

The  main  object,  in  fact,  of  all  the  fifteen  word-signs  in  Haven's 
Practical  Phonography,  is  to  facilitate  junctures  with  each  other,  forming 
a  principle  of  phrasing — viz,  writing  two  or  more  words  connectedly  with- 
out lifting  the  pen — a  principle  which  means  a  great  deal  in  point  of 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  67 

speed  in  writing  shorthand  and  can  be  made  an  efficient  aid  to  reading 
one's  notes  if  the  simple  directions  in  regard  to  junctures  are  carefully 
observed. 

Commencing  with  sign  i  in  Exercise,  some  three  lines  of  said 
Exercise  will  be  seen  to  be  devoted  to  illustrations  of  how  these  fifteen 
word-signs  are  joined  into  beautiful  little  phrases,  which,  by  their 
brevity,  give  much  speed,  and,  because  of  the  fact  that  they  look  nothing 
like  anything  but  what  they  mean,  are  also  an  important  aid  to  legibility. 
By  looking  carefully  at  these  first  three  lines  of  our  Exercise,  it  will  be 
noticed  that  the  word-signs  are  joined  to  other  characters.  For  in- 
stance, in  sign  i,  the  word-sign  for  of  has  the  letter  a  joined  to  it,  the 
juncture  forming  the  phrase  of  a.  In  sign  4  the  word  he  is  joined  to  the 
word-sign  for  all,  the  word  he  being  expressed  by  the  letter  Hay,  the 
combination  making  the  phrase  all  he.  In  sign  6  and  is  joined  to  all, 
the  word  and  being  expressed  by  the  &  or  Ai  of  our  Visible  Alphabet, 
the  phrase  thus  formed  representing  all  and.  In  sign  12,  the  personal 
pronoun  I  is  joined  to  the  word-sign  for  or,  making  the  phrase  or  I. 

Thus,  by  these  four  instances  just  noted,  we  have  introduced  the 
four  words,  /,  he,  a  and  and  into  the  phrases,  these  four  words  not  being 
needed  in  any  list  because  a,  I  and  and  were  given  in  the  Alphabet  in 
Lesson  II,  and  the  word  he  is,  of  course,  naturally  spelled  with  the  letter 
Hay  of  the  alphabet.  In  the  same  manner  as  the  word  he  is  spelled,  we 
we  can  also  spell  the  words  we  and  you,  the  word  we  being  spelled  with 
the  letter  Way,  and  you  by  either  of  the  signs  for  U  or  short-u  of 
the  Visible  Alphabet,  according  to  whichever  of  those  two  signs  of  U 
joins  easiest.  This  gives  us  six  words  which  we  can  join  to  these  word- 
signs,  and  a  peculiarity  of  all  six  is  that  they  are  attachable  in  any 
position,  those  six  words  when  joined  taking  the  position  occupied  by 
the  other  words  to  which  they  are  joined.  This  is  also  the  case  with 
the  word-sign  for  an  and  the  word-sign  for  the  of  our  list,  so  that  those 
eight  words,  namely,  the  conjunction  and,  the  articles  a,  an  and  the,  and 
the  four  pronouns  /,  he,  we  and  you,  should  always  when  possible  be 
joined  to  other  words  in  the  sentences  in  which  they  occur,  and  they  may 
be  joined  in  any  position,  remember. 

In  the  list  of  word-signs,  the  sign  for  the  is  placed  on  the  line,  and 
the  sign  for  an  is  placed  under  the  line,  but  those  positions  are  intended 
only  for  instances  where  it  might  be  impossible  to  make  a  juncture,  and 
where  those  words  would  have  to  be  written  alone,  in  which  seldom- 
occurring  instances,  to  read  them,  it  is  necessary  they  should  have  their 
own  positions.  They  should  always  be  joined  when  possible,  in  which 


68  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

cases  position  does  not  need  to  be  observed.  Now,  while  position  does 
not  need  to  be  observed  in  those  eight  words  above-named  when  joined 
to  other  words,  yet  there  are  three  words  whose  particular  direction  cf 
writing  must  be  observed,  and  these  simple  rules  here  given,  if  observed 
strictly,  will  make  them  always  clear  in  their  meaning,  where  a  violation 
of  the  rule  would  cause  uncertainty.  The  three  words  referred  to  are 
the,  he  and  /. 

If  the  sign  for  the  be  always  written  upwards  in  junctures  and  he 
always  written  downwards,  notwithstanding  they  are  both  the  same  sign, 
they  can  never  clash,  as  will  be  seen  by  comparing  sign  4,  all  he,  with 
sign  7,  all  the,  in  which  instances  it  will  be  noticed  that  he  is  written 
downwards  and  the  upwards.  Sometimes  students  may  suppose  that  they 
can  distinguish  the  difference  between  he  and  the  by  position  without  re- 
gard to  the  direction  in  which  the  signs  are  written,  but  if  it  is  borne  in 
mind  that  those  words  are  written  in  any  position  in  junctures,  that  they 
must  be  joined  when  possible  for  speed  purposes,  and  that  the  words  to 
which  they  are  joined  must  have  the  preference  of  position,  it  will  be 
understood  that  the  outlines  for  he  and  ///<?  may  sometimes  both  be  in  the 
same  position,  as  they  are  in  signs  4  and  7  in  Exercise,  in  which  cases 
naught  but  a  difference  in  the  direction  of  writing  will  make  them  read- 
able. Writing  the  sign  for  the  always  upwards  and  the  sign  for  he 
always  downwards,  will  thoroughly  distinguish  those  words,  and  if  that 
sign  for  the  could  always  be  used  for  that  word,  as  the  sign  Hay  is 
always  used  for  he,  there  might  be  no  danger  of  confliction  in  any  in- 
stance, but  this  joining  of  words  together  in  phrases  is  so  necessary  for 
speed  and  legibilit}-,  that  phrasing  must  be  done  as  much  as  possible, 
and  on  account  of  the  different  shape  of  some  outlines,  it  is  not  always 
possible  to  join  the  list  sign  for  the  to  every  outline. 

It  does  not  so  greatly  matter  if  the  sign  he  is  disjoined  occasionally, 
as  that  is  not  so  frequently-occurring  a  word  as  some  others,  but  the 
word  the  is  said  to  be  the  most  frequently-occurring  word  in  the  English 
language.  This  being  granted,  the  word  the  must  therefore  be  the  word 
of  all  others  which  most  needs  to  be  phrased  whenever  possible,  for  secur- 
ing speed.  For  the  words  a,  an  and  and,  which  are  next  in  frequency  of 
occurence,  we  can  easily  substitute  one  for  the  other,  where  the  proper 
one  will  not  join — the  sign  for  an,  doing  duty  also  for  either  a  or  and,  as  in 
signs  6,  17,  2i,  25  and  42  in  Exercise,  and  and  for  a,  as  in  the  phrase  but 
a,  in  sign  79,  for  those  words  wrill  not  clash,  it  being  naturally  allowable 
for  the  articles  a  and  an  to  be  substituted  for  each  other  or  even  for 
them  to  alternate  with  the  conjunction  and,  but,  if  it  be  necessary  to  do 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  69 

this  substitution  ior  a,  an  and  and,  to  gain  speed  by  facilitating  junct- 
ures, it  is  far  more  necessary  to  make  use  of  a  plan  of  substitution  for 
the  word  the,  where  the  word-sign  in  our  list  will  not  join,  and  the  best 
sign  that  can  be  selected  for  such  substitution  is  the  pronoun  /,  which 
letter  can  be  used  in  substitution  for  the  word  the,  as  in  sign  59  in 
Exercise,  without  the  least  danger  of  its  being  mistaken  for  /,  as  the 
words  /  and  the  thus  used  will  never  clash.  For  this  reason,  where  the 
sign  for  /  will  not  join,  we  can  reciprocate  by  using  the  upward  tick  of 
the  for  /,  so  that  the  signs  for  these  two  words,  being  entirely  distinct,  may 
b.3  always  substituted  for  each  other  where  their  own  sign  will  not  join, 
the  student  not  forgetting,  of  course,  that  it  is  always  best  to  join  the 
original  sign  for  any  word  when  possible,  and  to  substitute  the  other 
sign  only  when  the  original  sign  will  not  join,  but  to  be  sure  to  substi- 
tute rather  than  lose  the  opportunity  of  phrasing,  which  is  so  very 
necessary  to  be  observed  in  writing  the  eight  words  and,  a,  an,  the,  I,  he, 
we  and  you,  spoken  of  in  foregoing  paragraphs. 

We  now  come  to  the  most  particular  reason  why  the  original  sign 
for  the  should  be  always  written  upward.  It  lies  in  the  fact  of  this 
substitution  of  the  signs  for  ///<?  and  /where  we  cannot  join  the  proper 
outline.  The  words  he  and  tJie  would  seldom  clash  any  more  than  the 
words  Hie  and  /,  because  they  represent  entirely  different  parts  of 
speech,  but  the  words  he  and  /  are  of  the  same  parts  of  speech, 
both  being  pronouns,  and  it  is  words  of  the  same  parts  of  speech  that 
are  most  apt  to  clash.  The  student  can  understand  what  a  difference 
there  is  between  the  two  statements,  "he  will  pay"  and  "I  will  pay",  and 
yet  the  only  difference  lies  in  the  words  he  and  /,  which  proves  con- 
clusively that  he  and  /must  be  made  distinct  in  shorthand  writing,  but, 
if  we  use  the  sign  for  tJie,  which  is  just  like  he,  when  we  intend  it  to 
mean  /,  we  are  going  to  have  trouble,  unless  we  write  the  word-sign 
stroke  downward  when  we  -mean  he  in  junctures,  and  the  same  sign 
upward  when  it  means  the  or  /".  Then  there  is  no  difficulty  in  securing 
distinctions  between  such  combinations  as  are  presented  in  signs  63 
and  64  of  Exercise.  By  writing  the  word-sign  for  tlie  upwards,  there- 
fore, when  it  means  either  the  or  /,  we  prevent  clashing  with  he,  provid- 
ing we  always  write  he  downwards. 

These  are  the  only  particulars  of  striking  importance  that  are 
necessary  to  be  observed  in  the  writing  of  phrases  containing  word- 
signs,  excepting  the  general  injunction  that  the  word-signs  in  foregoing 
list  must  be  written  in  their  proper  positions,  joined  or  not,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  the  and  an,  which,  as  we  have  stated,  in  company  with  six 


70  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

other  words,  take  any  position  when  joined.  It  may  be  as  well  also  to 
add  that  the  word-signs,  with  the  exception  of  the  and  an,  are  joined 
commencing  phrases,  never  at  the  end  of  them,  but  that  the  and  an  and 
the  other  six  words  we  have  named,  and,  a,  I,  he,  we, you,  may  be  phrased 
with  other  words,  either  beginning,  ending  or  intermedially. 

The  signs  for  a,  an  and  tf/;^/are  shown  substituted  for  each  other  to 
make  easier  junctures,  in  signs  53  to  56  inclusive,  and  in  other  instan- 
ces throughout  the  sentences  given  in  this  Exercise,  as  in  sentences 
shown  by  signs  79,  80  and  85. 

In  joining  phonographic  word-signs  and  outlines  into  phrases,  the 
the  ordinary  rule  is  to  place  the  first  word  in  its  proper  place-position, 
and  let  the  other  words  in  the  phrase  take  care  of  themselves,  in  the 
sa*me  manner  that  the  second  vowel-sound  in  a  long  word  is  treated. 

To  avoid  connection  with  half-length  consonants,  always  write 
these  word-signs,  and  all  visible  vowels,  about  one-eighth  the  size  of  a 
full-sized  consonant;  in  other  words,  write  them  as  small  as  possible, 
the  merest  ticks  being  sufficient.  This  will  serve  as  a  perfect  method 
of  distinction  between  the  word-signs  in  the  foregoing  list  and  half- 
length  outlines. 

The  time-saving  principle  of  phrasing  is  given  considerable  practice 
upon  in  the  Exercise  to  this  lesson  and  others  which  follow;  and,  al- 
though beginners  may  find  at  first,  in  their  own  writing,  that  a  little 
extra  thought  is  sometimes  required  in  order  to  make  the  best  junctions 
possible,  and  that  it  may  therefore  at  first  appear  to  them  that  longer 
time  is  required  to  join  the  words  than  to  write  them  separately,  yet  this 
difficulty  will  diminish  with  each  Exercise,  and  become  more  and  more 
of  a  pleasure  with  each  step,  eventually  being  found  to  be  a  beautiful 
method  of  phrase  representation,  and  perfectly  easy  to  read  when  writ- 
ten, providing  care  has  been  taken  not  to  join  most  of  the  word-signs 
out  of  position. 

The  circle-S  can  be  added  to  the  sign  for  who  in  order  to  make  the 
word  whose,  as  in  sign  51.  Other  junctures  may  be  made  for  compound 
words,  like  the  adding  of  the  word  hand  to  the  word  before,  spelling 
before-hand,  as  in  sign  52. 

Throughout  these  sentences,  concluding  our  Exercises,  there  will  be 
found  outlines  which  are  rather  ahead  of  the  lesson,  but  which,  for  the 
purpose  of  showing  how  sentences  are  written,  it  was  thought  best 
to  include  herewith.  The  word  should  is  hardly  one  of  these,  but  it 
might  as  well  b3  described  at  this  stage.  That  word  is  a  halved-letter 
Ish,  written  under  the  line,  when  written  alone,  to  indicate  its  vowel- 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  71 

sound,  as  in  sign  67.  When  joined  it  may  occasionally  be  written  on 
the  line. 

The  phrase  "I  told  you  so,"  in  sign  73,  shows  how  common  words 
may  be  joined  together,  and  sometimes  a  common  word,  like  so,  written 
out  of  position.  In  sign  80,  the  L  sound  in  the  syllable  ly  is  indicated 
by  an  L  hook  on  the  letter  N.  This  is  done  to  secure  an  easier  juncture. 
In  the  sentence  in  sign  82,  the  syllable  less  of  the  word  motionless  is 
written  downwards  for  the  same  purpose — to  facilitate  junctures.  In 
sign  85  the  word  one  is  represented  by  the  addition  of  an  N  hook  to  the 
letter  Way.  This  makes  that  character  resemble  short-ah,  but  as  the 
sign  for  short-ah  is  not  used  alone  it  will  not  clash.  To  represent  Ah, 
as  an  exclamation,  the  sign  for  the  ordinary  Ah  is  used,  which  is  writ- 
ten in  an  opposite  direction.  When  one  is  used  for  a  figure  the  letter 
Way  is  sufficient,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  list  given  in  the  next  lesson,  but 
in  a  sentence  where  there  are  no  other  figures  it  might  be  mistaken  for 
Way,  and  therefore  the  hook  N  is  used  in  such  cases.  When  we  want 
to  write  ones,  or  one's  own,  the  hook  N  is  not  absolutely  necessary,  as  will 
be  seen  further  on  in  these  same  sentences.  Signs  85  and  87.  Junct- 
ures of  common  words  which  follow  easily  in  position,  such  as  the  con- 
cluding phrase  in  sign  85,  "by  a  microscope,  "and  that  beginning 
sign  86,  "presents  the  best,"  should  be  taken  advantage  of  whenever 
possible,  as  such  junctures  are  a  great  aid  to  both  speed  and  legibility. 

In  the  word  energy  (sign  86)  long-E  may  be  substituted  for  short-e, 
and  there  are  other  instances  in  these  Exercises  where  this  sort  of  sub- 
stitution is  done,  it  being  in  accordance  with  the  rule  for  vowel  substi- 
tution set  forth  in  Lesson  IV. 

Many  other  apparent  digressions  may  be  discovered  in  these  ad- 
vanced lessons  by  the  careful  student;  but,  as  it  would  require  too  much 
unnecessary  space  and  time  to  explain  these  singly  as  they  occur 
throughout  this  book,  the  student  will  please  without  demur  accept  all 
such  slight  digressions  as  being  perfectly  correct.  They  bear,  ail  of 
them,  the  result  of  years  of  practice,  such  practice  having  determined 
their  present  form  and  position  to  be  the  best  for  purposes  of  speed,  and 
that  without  destroying  their  legibility  in  the  least.  It  should,  there- 
fore, be  the  duty  of  students  to  memorize  these  somewhat  peculiar  out- 
lines, and  make  use  of  them  whenever  possible  in  their  own  notes,  and 
the  result  will  be  that  the  eye  will  become  so  accustomed  to  these  out- 
lines that  they  will  recognize  them  unconsciously,  without  regard  to 
philosophy  of  outline  or  position.  Such  is  always  the  case  with  a  pro- 
fessional shorthand  reporter  and  his  notes.  He  reads  them  from 


72  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

without  stopping  to  think  of  the  elements  composing  them,  just  as  you, 
the  reader  of  this  explanation,  are  now  doing  with  these  printed  words, 
'iou  are  not  spelling  these  words  as  you  read  them.  Neither  are  you 
noticing  the  separate  letters.  You  unconsciously  read  these  words  as 
words,  and  you  would  read  them  aright  even  if  a  letter  or  two  were  in 
error  omitted  from  the  word,  because  you  read  each  word  at  a  glance,  and, 
in  the  case  of  a  trivial  mistake  such  as  the  omission  of  an  unimportant 
letter,  the  other  words  of  the  sentence  would  prove  a  perfect  key  to  it. 

Never  slight  the  joined  words.     The  skilled  reporter  executes  these 
combinations  in  half  the  time  requisite  to  write  each  word  separately. 


.....  z  .....  A...4r...^r.....e.....v...........ia...^....^.._t3...jc..^5...^6.......4s.. 


..^_J7..J&,  J..*0...4    7  42-, 

f      ^     f-      f" 


*...^.^.o..*..C..^..i'.<\..^ 


............. 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY.  -, 

POINTS  TO  REMEMBER. 

Devote  as  much  time  to  reading  as  to  writing  phonography. 

Write  the  Exercises  contained  within  these  lessons,  over  and  over 
again,  even  after  you  have  become  perfectly  familiar  with  them.  The)' 
contain  words  and  phrases  which  have  been  selected  for  all-time  practice. 

Remember  that  time  is  wasted  by  attempting  to  write  rapidly  be- 
fore one  can  write  well;  that  the  difficulty  of  reading  poorly  written 
phonography  will  be  far  more  regretted  than  a  lack  of  speed  while  learn- 
ing; and  that  speed  is  certain  to  follow  where  a  neat  and  accurate  style 
is  the  student's  aim. 

KEY  VIII. 

i,  of  a;  2,  of  an;  3,  of  the;  4,  all  he;  5,  all  a;  6,  all  an-d;  7,  all  the;  8,  to 
a;  9,  to  an;  10,  to  the;  n,  or  he;  12,  or  I;  .13,  or  an;  14,  or  the;  15,  already 
he;  1 6,  already  I;  17,  already  a-n;  1 8,  already  the;  19,  but  he;  20,  but  I;  21, 
but  a-n;  22,  but  the;  23,  before  he;  24,  before  I;  25,  before  a-n;  26,  before 
the;  27,  ought  a;  28,  ought  I;  29,  ought  an;  30,  ought  the;  31,  the  eye;  32, 
who  a;  33,  who  an;  34,  who  the;  35,  whom  a;  36,  whom  I;  37,  whom  an; 
38,  whom  the;  39,  on  a;  40,  on  the;  41,  and  he;  42,  and  a-n;  43,  and  I;  44, 
and  the;  45,  and  that;  46,  should  he;  47,  should  a;  48,  should  I;  49,  should 
an;  50,  should  the;  51,  whose;  52,  beforehand;  53,  know  a;  54,  rule  a;  55, 
send  an;  56,  just  a;  57,  that  a;  58,  a  man;  59,  the  man;  60,  the  most;  61, 
sign  the;  62,  catch  the;  63,  I  may  64,  he  may;  65,  I  mean  the  man;  66,  I 
know  he  caught  the  name;  67,  To  whom  should  we  write?  68,  Already  suc- 
cess seems  near;  69,  All  joys  are  but  fleeting;  70,  Who  lighted  the  lamp? 
71,  He  and  I  read  one  or  two  daily;  72,  On  some  occasions  two  or  more 
sang;  73>  ^  e  are  too  apt  to  say  "  I  told  you  so;"  74,  He  showed  great  sense 
by  the  selection;  75,  Before  he  saw  the  city  he  loved  the  farm;  76,  The  muscles 
move  only  by  the  law  of  the  brain;  77,  Why  should  you  go  on  that  journey 
that  early?  78,  None  of  the  men  seemed  disposed  to  step  aside;  79,  The  king 
may  rule  the  nation,  but  a  midget  may  rule  the  king;  80,  A  slovenly  boy 
gains  no  deference — a  slovenly  girl  still  less;  81,  No  two  scientists  hold  like 
views  on  the  departments  of  the  art  they  follow;  82,  The  rain  poured  down 
steadily,  but  the  soldiers  remained  erect  and  motionless  through  all;  83, 
Solomon  gave  attention  to  the  wants  of  the  nation  he  ruled  and  thus  bene- 
fitted  posterity;  84,  Benefactions  multiplied  may  create  a  growler,  while  a 
scarcity  may  cause  an  opposite  effect;  85,  To  see  a  friend's  faults  one  needs 
no  spectacles,  but  one's  own  we  fail  to  see  even  aided  by  a  microscope; 
86,  Youth  presents  the  best  occasion  to  gain  mind-capital — old  age  weakens 
the  energy,  subdues  one's  ardor — "too  late"  thus  happens  across  one  un- 
awares; 87,  One's  desires  alternate  with  one's  necessities. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 
LESSON  IX. 


COMMON  ABBREVIATIONS. 

...\  ..Up  ,  party  ,  patent 
..N^.Hope 
..\.  Be,  been,  object 
•V.To  be 
Time,  what 
v  ..  .It,  take 
;.  ...  At,  out,tooTc   • 
.../..Dollar 
...'...Do 
....I.  ..Had,  today,  to  do 
./...Each 

S-  If,  off 

Important-ce 

....V_  For,4,4th,fortn 
...X^-.Far.fact 
....V-  From 
...^.Form 
.1.  Ever 
...7^\  Have,  five 
...TV.  However 
...TV.  Value 
7  Think 

..  x*N..Improve-d-ment 
In,  any,  never 

Thing,  long 

..  >*•/..  Language 
Young 

,  '...With 

....  c  ....Were,  1 
.Would 

c 

....  3  ..  Where 

...\  ...Them 
.../..  ..Though,  thank 

if 

.......Either,  author 
(.  ..  Other 

When 

0 

_  Year 

...  I  .Which,  change 
..../..Much,  charge 
../..Jesus 
../..Advantage 
.../.Large 

n...YOU 

Beyond 

J  w.gh 

"...Yet 

\..  Shall,  usual-ly 
i  Issue 

Yes 

u 

Yes  sir 

•^.Qur  ,hour 
.TTTT.Kingdom,  common 
Can,  came 
-Country,  come 
Give-n 
_  Together" 

....Y...Us,use^eaning 
....V...Use  fpronounced 

of  use)..?.Is,his 
uz£\..o..As,has»  the  cipher 
.  .Was 

^~x 

o 
........  Is  it 

..XTTTN..  Him,  make 
Home 

...<^  First,  as  it,  has  it 
...Was  it 

<? 

HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  __ 

In  the  list  of  Common  Abbreviations  on  opposite  page,  the  student 
is  introduced  to  the  representation  of  entire  words  by  writing  only  a 
portion  of  their  outline,  the  words  in  the  foregoing  list  being  repre- 
sented mostly  by  only  one  shorthand  letter — in  some  cases  the  first,  as 
T  for  take;  in  other  cases  the  last,  as  Ch  for  which;  and,  in  still  other 
cases,  an  intermediate  letter,  as  Gay  for  together. 

This  method  of  abbreviation  is  quite  as  important  to  the  rapid 
writer  as  the  list  of  Word-Signs  given  in  a  preceding  lesson,  besides 
being  more  easily  committed  to  memory,  because  of  the  fact  that  a  part 
of  each  word  is  actually  written,  and  not  represented  by  arbitrary  char- 
acters peculiar  to  the  Word  Signs.  These  Common  Abbreviations  are 
easily  read,  because  frequently  met  with  in  sentences,  and  also  because 
these  simple  word-abbreviations  conduce  greatly  to  easy  and  legible 
phrasing. 

The  sign  for  was,  the  student  must  bear  in  mind,  can  only  be  joined 
to  other  words  in  its  proper  position,  under  the  line  of  writing,  a  rule 
equally  applicable  to  the  signs  for  to  be,  to  do,  and  any  third  place  or  first 
place  word-abbreviation.  It  is  only  a  few  of  the  second  place  word- 
abbreviations  which  can,  when  phrased,  be  written  out  of  position,  and 
when  not  phrased  even  those  must  have  proper  position.  The  words  in 
this  list  with  which  this  liberty  may  be  taken  are  up,  be  or  been,  it,  do, 
which,  for,  from,  have,  them,  shall,  will  and  you,  and  even  these  only 
where  shown  in  the  Exercises. 

The  circle  S  or  Z  can  ba  added  to  any  of  the  abbreviations  of  the 
foregoing  list,  in  the  manner  indicated  in  signs  2,  4  and  6  in  Exercise. 

There  is  only  one  point  in  which  the  above  word-abbreviations  do  not 
agree  with  previously  described  principles — /.  e.,  in  their  place  positions. 
They  are  not  all  placed  in  position  in  accordance  with  their  visible  vowel 
elements.  This  is  because  some  of  them  take  their  positions  in  accord- 
ance with  the  importance  of  the  words  they  represent,  those  words 
which  are  apt  to  occur  most  frequently  being  placed  on  the  line  simply 
because  it  is  the  easiest  position  in  which  to  write,  and  hence  enables  the 
phonographer  to  write  them  much  more  quickly  than  would  be  possible 
were  they  placed  in  the  position  which  their  vowel  sounds  would  have 
placed  them.  Words  so  placed  out  of  position  are,  however,  only  those 
which  the  student  will  find  no  difficulty  in  recognizing  in  their  new  po- 
sitions, after  once  memorizing  them,  as  with  the  word-signs.  Where  an 
abbreviation  in  the  foregoing,  or  any  list  of  word-abbreviations,  has 
laced  opposite  it  two  or  more  words,  each  word  separated  by  a  comma 
(as  with  the  first  and  third  abbreviations  in  the  foregoing  list),  the 


76  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

abbreviation  in  question  may  separately  represent  either  word,  but  only 
one  of  the  words  at  a  time.  Where  two  or  more  words,  placed  opposite 
a  phonographic  abbreviation,  are  not  separated  by  a  comma  (as  with 
the  fourth  abbreviation  in  the  foregoing  list),  the  abbreviation  in  ques- 
tion represents  all  words  opposite  it  at  one  and  the  same  time.  Finally, 
when,  opposite  a  phonographic  abbreviation,  three  or  more  words  ap- 
pear, the  words  being  separated  by  commas  in  some  instances  and  not  in 
others  (as  with  the  abbreviation  for  first,  near  the  end  of  preceding 
list),  then  the  abbreviation  is  intended  to  represent,  at  one  and  the  same 
time,  any  group  of  words  not  so  separated,  but  not  more  at  a  time. 

There  are  occasions  when  the  words  is,  his  and  similar  words  repre- 
sented by  the  circle  S,  may  be  indicated  by  enlarging  the  S-circle  of  a 
preceding  word,  as  in  signs  57  and  101  in  Exercise.  Similarly  the  circle 
S,  which,  in  this  word-abbreviation  list,  represents  either  is  or  his,  would 
represent  both  words  if  made  into  a  large  Sez-circle,  as  in  sign  69.  As 
has  and  was  as  would  be  formed  on  the  same  plan,  as  per  signs  71  and  73. 

As  the  letter  T  is  used  as  a  word-abbreviation  for  take  in  the  fore- 
going list,  it  is  therefore  allowable  to  represent  taken  by  the  addition  of 
the  hook  N  to  the  letter  T,  as  in  signs  39  and  40  in  Exercise.  This 
brings  us  to  a  very  important  principle  in  rapid  writing,  respecting  the 
extension  of  the  use  of  the  word-abbreviations.  In  our  list  is  presented 
only  the  root  word,  it  being  expected  that  the  student  will,  from  those 
word- abbreviations  as  a  base,  build  other  abbreviations  by  simply  adding 
the  different  terminations  which  distinguish  the  same  family  of  words. 
For  instance,  just  as  the  letter  Chay  in  sign  8  represents  the  word  charge, 
so  it  is  allowable  and  expected  that  the  word  charges  (sign  9)  be  formed 
by  adding  a  circle  to  the  sign  for  charge,  and  the  syllable  dis  be  added  to 
the  sign  for  charge  when  the  word  discharge  is  desired  to  be  written,  as 
in  sign  10.  On  the  same  principle  the  words  larger  and  largest  are  built 
from  large,  signs  u,  12  and  13;  hourly  is  built  from  our,  signs  23  and  25; 
objects,  objector,  objection  and  objective  from  object,  signs  34  to  38,  inclusive; 
and  hundreds  of  other  word-abbreviations  arrived  at  in  a  manner  which 
gives  the  student  the  keynote  to  the  thousands  of  word  signs  which 
other  authors  put  in  their  dictionaries  in  a  way  which  requires  years  to 
memorize  them,  but  which,  on  this  plan,  without  any  dictionary,  enables 
the  student  to  write  them  on  sight  as  soon  as  he  or  she  becomes  familiar 
with  our  lessons.  Authority,  sign  109,  is  thus  formed  from  author,  etc. 

Signs  58  and  59,  in  Exercise,  show  how  the  word-abbreviations  help 
to  distinguish  between  letters  that  are  attached  to  them,  those  two  out- 
lines, although  one  begins  with  a  letter  of  the  alphabet,  the  letter  I,  and 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  77 

the  other  commences  with  the  word  sign  for  of,  forming  characters 
nearly  alike,  are  rendered  perfectly  distinct  by  the  fact  that  the  word- 
abbreviations  give  them  different  positions,  these  word-abbreviations 
equally  well  distinguishing  between  halved  characters  and  word-signs, 
even  when  there  are  no  other  means  of  distinction — which  there  generally 
are — halved  outlines  never  clashing  with  a  vowel  character  or  a  word- 
sign,  as  they  are  used  for  different  purposes.  - 

The  word  whereas,  as  will  be  seen  by  sign  63,  is  formed  by  the  junct- 
ure of  the  word-abbreviations  for  where  and  as.  In  the  next  compound 
word,  shown  by  sign  64,  elsewhere,  the  word  where  is  out  of  position, 
but,  being  joined,  is  perfectly  legible  in  that  case.  This  leads  us  to  state 
that  the  words  else  and  less  will  sometimes  clash  unless  the  E  of  else  is 
written,  or  some  other  means  of  indicating  that  beginning  vowel  is  taken 
advantage  of — for  instance,  in  junctures  where  the  vowel  cannot  be  writ- 
ten, write  less  upward  and  else  downward.  This  can  only  be  shown  in 
junctures.  When  else  is  written  alone,  else  must  have  its  vowel  written. 

In  signs  77  to  80  inclusive,  the  circle-S  is  added  within  loops  to 
indicate  the  addition  of  is,  as  or  was. 

The  word  seldom,  on  third  line  from  the  end  of  Exercise,  is  abbrevi- 
ated by  omitting  the  M.  It  is  perfectly  legible  thus  curtailed. 

To  signs  87  to  98  inclusive,  the  student  should  give  special  atten- 
tion. In  Lesson  III,  describing  the  use  of  the  circle-S,  which,  in  this 
lesson,  represents  is,  his,  as,  has,  or  was,  according  to  position,  the  stu- 
dent was  instructed  to  always  write  such  circle  on  the  right-hand  side  of 
upright  or  slanting  straight  characters,  and  on  the  upper  side  of  horizontal 
ones.  In  that  same  lesson  the  student  was  enjoined,  when  the  circle-S 
was  added  to  R  or  Arm,  to  consider  those  letters  the  same  as  the  hori- 
zontal ones  K  and  Gay,  because  they  are  written  in  the  same  direction — 
from  left  to  right — the  circle  being  thus  attachable  upon  the  upper  sides 
of  R  or  Arm,  precisely  as  to  K  and  Gay.  This  same  rule  will  apply 
to  the  word-sign  for  the  when  the  circle  is  joined  to  it,  because  the 
stroke  the  is  written  towards  from  left  to  right,  the  same  as  K  and  R, 
and  therefore  takes  all  circles  added  to  it  on  the  upper  side  of  the  stroke, 
as  in  signs  87  to  89  and  96  to  98  inclusive.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
stroke  he,  being  written  downwards,  the  circle-S  is  attachable  to  it  on  the 
same  side  as  to  the  letter  Chay,  the  circle  being,  therefore,  according  to 
rule  before  quoted,  attachable  on  to  the  right-hand  side  of  Chay  or  the 
stroke  he,  whether  such  circles  begin,  as  in  signs  90  to  92,  or  terminate 
he.  as  in  signs  93  to  95.  This  arrangement — writing  the  stroke  always 
downward  for  he  and  upward  for  the,  and  placing  the  circles  on  the 


78  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

upper  left-hand  side  of  the  and  right-hand  side  of  he,  will  serve  as  a  sure 
means  of  distinction  between  such  outlines,  both  in  reading  and  writing. 
The  circle-S,  representing  is,  as  or  -was,  may  be  written  double 
length  to  add  the  v/ord  there  or  their,  as  in  signs  74  to  76.  These  forms 
will  not  clash  with  is  it,  as  it  and  was  it,  in  word-abbreviation  list,  for  those 
word-abbreviations  are  slanted,  whereas  signs  74  to  76  are  horizontal. 


EXERCISE  IX, 


^ 

l*^^l*fM{4t]pk 

n     *8       tf        o     O  c*  0  -o 

\..y$..W.,ys.c*y6...yycB78...y9.d.8'o...&t...8rZj>te.. 
o    o  *=*  0  -° 

»  x  O>  a/         Q/ 

.9$...96...9y.O'..9Sr....99....400. 

6  <y 


..f  . 

| 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  -^ 

The  word  shall,  in  sign  in,  \vill  be  noticed  to  have  been  written  up- 
wards. This  is  allowable  where  junctures  are  to  be  facilitated  with  letters 
or  words,  but  when  Ish  has  only  hooks  attached,  and  no  other  character 
added,  Ish  must  be  written  downwards,  as  in  sign  42  of  Lesson  V,  and  sign 
49  of  Lesson  VI,  to  show  on  which  end  the  circle  or  hook  is  to  be  read. 

KEY  IX. 

i,  It;  2,  its;  3,  come;  4,  comes;  5,  do;  6,  does;  7,  and  do  you;  8, 
charge;  9,  charges;  10,  discharge;  n,  large;  12,  larger;  13,  largest;  14,  ad- 
vantage; 15,  advantages;  16,  advantageous;  17,  disadvantage;  18,  Jesus; 
19,  Jesus  Christ;  20,  yours;  21,  are;  22,  are  there;  23,  our;  24,  ours;  25, 
hourly;  26,  give;  27,  gives;  28,  give  them;  29,  common;  30,  commonly;  31, 
commonest;  32,  to  be  sure;  33,  is  to  be;  34,  object;  35,  objects;  36,  object- 
or; 37,  objection;  38,  objective;  39,  taken;  40,  taken  up;  41,  to-day;  42, 
to-day's;  43,  Yours  of  to-day's  mail  received;  44,  out;  45,  outward;  46,  out- 
side; 47,  outwit;  48,  off;  49,  often;  50,  office;  51,  facts;  52,  wish;  53. 
wisher;  54,  wish  their;  55,  think;  56,  thinks;  57,  and  thinks  his  a;  58,  I 
think;  59,  of  them;  60,  improve;  61,  improves;  62,  where;  63,  whereas;  64, 
elsewhere;  65,  year;  66,  years;  67,  yearly;  68,  is;  69,  is  his;  70,  as;  71,  as 
has;  72,  was;  73,  was  as;  74,  is  there;  75,  as  there;  76,  was  there;  77,  as 
there  has;  78,  is  it  as;  79,  as  it  has;  80,  was  it  as;  81,  and  is;  82,  and  as; 
83,  and  was;  84,  is  an;  85,  as  an;  86,  was  an;  87,  is  the;  88,  as  the;  89, 
was  the;  90,  is  he;  91,  as  he;  92,  was  he;  93,  he  is;  94,  he  has;  95,  he  was; 
96,  his  is  the;  97,  as  has  the;  98,  was  as  the;  99,  is  not;  100,  is  sent;  101, 
is  seen;  102,  is  that;  103,  that  is;  104,  has  been;  105,  as  has  been;  106, 
why  there  have;  107,  whether  there  have;  108,  His  time  is  limited;  109,  Has  it 
your  full  authority?  no,  The  patent  is  my  invention;  in,  At  what  hourshali 
I  be  on  board  ?  112,  That  issue  as  given  forth  came  out  Tuesday  last; 
113,  A  select  party  of  us  will  make  the  trip  up-country;  114,  Where  is  it  the 
charges  are  to  be  found?  115,  I  am  far  from  liking  the  form  of  his  order; 
116,  Which  offer  was  it  the  author  first  made  you?  117,  The  value  the  thing 
brought  was  small — one  dollar  in  a  thousand;  118,  If  our  plan  ever  matures 
as  it  should,  we  will  owe  many  thanks  to  the  little  kingdom;  119,  How  long 
were  you  there  with  young  Brown  ?  One  year.  Can  he  appreciate  the  impor- 
tance of  a  use  of  that  language  ?  Yes,  I  think  he  does.  Does  he  use  it 
often  ?  Yes,  sir.  Yet  the  others  say  they  never  heard  him?  They  were 
seldom  with  him;  we  were  usually  together  daily.  He  improved  each  day 
beyond  my  calculations.  Any  change,  however  hard,  took  but  little  time 
for  him  to  master.  To-day  he  will  read  four  chapters,  though  to  do  from 
one  to  five  an  hour  would  take  but  little  effort  when  he  either  wished  to  or 
has  had  much  rest  at  home.  I  hope  for  still  more  important  improvement. 


8o  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

LESSON  X. 

A  list  of  word-abbreviations  containing  either  beginning  or  final 
hooks  is  presented  in  table  on  opposite  page.  Learn  them  as  directed 
for  the  Word-Signs  of  Lesson  VIII,  and  the  Common  Abbreviations  of 
last  lesson.  They  will  be  found  upon  better  acquaintance  to  be  ex- 
ceedingly handy,  not  only  containing  important  speed  elements,  but 
being  also  thoroughly  legible  when  well  memorized. 

Si^ns  113  to  141  in  Exercise,  illustrate  the  adaptability  of  the 
abbreviations  in  this  list  being  extended  by  adding  terminating  differ- 
ences, the  word  remembrance,  sign  114,  being  simply  remember,  sign  113, 
with  an  Ns  circle  added;  equalled,  sign  118,  being  formed  by  halving  the 
word  equal,  sign  117;  over  their,  sign  131,  being  a  lengthened  over,  sign 
130;  and  a  number  of  words,  as  in  signs  137  to  141,  being  formed  from 
the  word-abbreviation  for  organ,  illustrating  clearly  the  apparent  inex- 
haustibility of  word-abbreviation  formation,  aside  from  the  instances 
given  in  the  lesson. 

In  memorizing  word-abbreviation  lists,  the  student  should  bear  in 
mind,  as  explained  in  connection  with  the  Common  Abbreviations  in 
Lesson  IX,  that  it  must  not  be  expected  of  word-abbreviations  that 
they  should  in  every  case  agree  'in  position  with  their  vowel  sounds. 
Sometimes  the  greater  conspicuousness  of  a  vowel  in  one  word-abbrev- 
iation will  compel  another  word-abbreviation  with  less  conspicuous 
vowel  sound,  to  occupy  a  position  which,  reasoning  by  place  position 
rule,  would  properly  not  belong  to  it.  The  word-abbreviations  in  the 
foregoing  list  of  the  Common  Abbreviations  is  evidence  of  this. 
Furthermore,  it  is  not  always  the  case  that  conflictions  with  another 
word-abbreviation  causes  it  to  be  written  in  a  position  out  of  accordance 
with  its  vowel  elements.  Sometimes  a  word-abbreviation  is  given  an 
apparently  wrong  position  because  the  outline  of  some  ordinary  word, 
not  a  word-abbreviation,  would  conflict  with  it.  Again,  words  with  first 
or  third-place  vowels  are  sometimes  represented  by  signs  written  in  the 
second  position,  on  the  line,  simply  because  that  is  the  easiest  position 
in  which  to  write;  though  this  is  done  only  in  cases  wherein  the  word- 
abbreviations  would  be  perfectly  familiar  in  any  position  and  at  the 
same  time  would  not  clash  with  common  or  other  words  of  similar 
outline. 

A  student's  practice  in  the  art  of  rapid,  and,  at  the  same  time,  leg- 
ible writing,  depends  very  greatly  upon  the  frequency  and  length  of 
time  given  to  practising  the  art.  Students  who  practice  most  frequently 
anc?  for  the  longest  period  at  a  time  master  the  art  first. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


81 


HOOKED   ABBREVIATIONS. 

People,  appeal 

ST.  Awful 

.J...  Addition 
J..  Providential 

..^  Apply 

Over 

...\.Principle-al-ly 
.../..Appear 
..7  Belong 

!7Y:  Very,  every 

» 
....  .Jehovah 

^..Moreover 

f 

>  .Witha-1 

../..Juvenile 
...^.Religion 

,.\  Able,  belief  .believe. 

\ 

....\Liberty 

...\Re-member 
,.!Y.  Brother,  number 

._>f..Pleasuf  e,  sure 
..J}..  Measure,  as  sure 
(T..Well 
Mr  .  ,  remark-ed-able- 

..</..General-ly 
.../..Imagine 
(^/..Generation 
y.TT—  sQuestion 
_  ^Govern-ment 
Begin 

.  [...Till,  tell 

Hymor 

..p..  .Until 

.  ..  Honor,  nor 

....1.  -Truth 
...L.J)eliver 

Manner 

TTs  Again,  organ,  began 

AJ.  .Poverty 

..  ..Begun 

1 

......Doctor 

..^..Upon' 

.^..Phonography 
.  N>J.  .Ph  i  1  anthr  opy 
.„...  .Within 

..,!..  Dear 
./..  Angel 

\...Punish-ment 
\j..Above 

/  Danger 

\j  .  .Twelve-fth 

..\>....Then 
/....Than 
i.....  Alone  ,  eleven,  learn 

!TTT7.Call,  equal-ly 
niffir.ulf-.-y 

0 
.J...Internal-ly 

3 

.....Eternal-ity 

Christian 

..  Divine,  defendant 

(.....Revelation 

f_Gl  ^ry-if  y-f  i  ed 

.L...Differ-ent-ence 

/?.  Revolution 
Human 

Agree,  degree 
.xWork 

1  Advance 

J 

.  Denominate 

Opinion 

.^...Workmen 
jX?.  Workman 

..  J  Done 

Union 

Ll  Condition 

82  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

WORDS  INDICATED  BY  HOOKS. 

As  Emb  is  frequently  employed  in  professional  work  to  represent 
the  words  may  be,  sign  3  in  Exercise,  Way-Emb  may  be  quite  as  readily 
employed  for  the  phrase  we  may  be,  sign  3  in  Exercise.  This  is  on  the 
principle  that,  as  the  letter  Way  represents  we,  the  letter  M,  may,  and  B 
the  verb  be:  therefore,  Way-Emb,  which  really  contains  the  consonant 
elements  of  all  three  words,  can  quite  consistently  be  written  for  them 
altogether.  Reasoning  from  this  point  of  view,  as  Ith  on  the  line  spells 
they  and  the  letter  R  will  do  for  are,  the  combination  Thr  will  answer 
for  the  phrase  they  are,  as  in  sign  i  in  Exercise.  Upon  the  same  plan, 
as  the  word  w/7/is  represented  as  a  word-abbreviation  by  the  letter  L, 
we  may  occasionally  use  the  hook  L  for  the  word  will  or  even  all,  as  in 
signs  6  to  17  in  Exercise,  and  the  N  hook  for  the  words  own,  been,  than 
or  one,  as  in  signs  18  to  26  in  Exercise.  As  sign  26  represents  at  one, 
sign  27  would,  of  course,  by  making  the  N  hook  into  a  circle, 
represent  the  words  at  once.  To  the  word-signs  or,  biit,  etc.,  and  to 
any  halved  characters,  such  as  did,  the  N  hook  can  be  used  for  the 
word  not,  as  in  signs  40,  41  and  42.  To  full  sized  characters,  however, 
such  as  do,  had,  be,  have,  etc.,  the  word  not  must  be  spelled  by 
writing  an  N  hook  and  halving  the  words  do,  had,  etc.,  to  add  the 
T  of  not,  as  in  signs  44  to  53  inclusive.  We  will  not,  sign  49,  is  a  case 
in  point.  In  that  outline,  analyzed,  we  find  the  beginning  hook-Way 
represents  we,  the  letter  L,  will,  and  the  final  N  hook,  together  with  the 
shortening  of  the  entire  combination  to  add  T,  indicates  not.  Result: 
We  will  not.  May  not,  sign  53,  and  other  similar  abbreviations,  are  sub- 
ject to  the  same  manner  of  analysis,  the  letter  T  being  quite  correctly 
added  after  a  final  hook  by  shortening  the  main  consonant  to  which  the 
hook  is  attached.  Signs  57  and  58  illustrate  instances  where  not  must 
be  written  with  a  halved  N  to  distinguish  might  and  meant,  to  which  not 
is  there  attached.  Continuing  the  above  plan,  the  words  are  and  our 
may  be  represented  by  the  hook  R  (signs  29  to  34  and  36  to  39)  and  off, 
forth,  of,  {/or  have  by  the  V  hook  (signs  59  to  76).  Signs  35  and  36  show 
how  your  and  our  are  distinguished  in  such  combinations. 

The  circle-S  may  be  quite  legibly  employed  to  represent  the  pronoun 
us,  when  joined  to  some  words.  Signs  79  to  81  in  Exercise.  In  many 
words  possessing  the  same  consonants,  a  difference  of  outline  is  taken 
advantage  of,  in  order  to  aid  legibility.  The  words  last,  lost  and  lowest 
possess  the  same  consonant  sounds  (L-S-T)  and  have  some  position 
vowels,  but  should  be  distinguished  by  indicating  the  consonants  in  the 
three.,  different  ways  shown  by  signs  90  to  92  in  Exercise,  the  most 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  83 

frequently  occurring  word  being  given  the  shortest  and  easiesi  made 
outline.  Other  instances  of  distinction  are  illustrated  in  signs  93  to  102. 

Without  regard  to  size,  when  there  is  a  choice,  make  use  of  such 
outlines  for  word  representation,  as  are  easiest  made  and  afterwards 
interpreted.  Thus,  though  both  the  outlines  of  sign  103  are  proper 
ones  for  the  word  murder,  yet  the  largest  sign  is  best,  because  the  crook 
in  the  shorter  sign,  caused  by  the  juncture  of  R,  necessitates  the  ex- 
penditure of  more  time  than  is  required  for  making  an  uninterrupted 
outline  such  as  the  large  outline  for  murder  presents. 

As  illustrated  in  Lesson  IV,  by  the  word  customary  (sign  67  in  Ex- 
ercise to  that  lesson)  many  words  are  perfectly  familiar  by  their  con- 
sonant outline  alone,  and  hence  are  written  in  the  second  position,  that 
position  being  the  easiest  in  which  to  write.  Some  of  the  word-ab- 
breviations are  of  that  character,  and  so  are  the  outlines  for  the  words 
saith  and  said  (pronounced  seth  and  sed^)  and  also  survey  and  circle,  signs 
105  to  109  in  this  lesson. 

In  sign  5  in  Exercise,  the  word  certain  is  written  cert,  the  letter  N 
being  omitted.  This  is  one  of  a  number  of  easily  remembered  contrac- 
tions which  the  student  will  meet  with  in  these  concluding  lessons  and 
which  are  to  be  accepted  unconditionally  as  being  the  best  forms  for 
those  words.  Many  of  such  contractions  are  really  word-abbreviations, 
which  it  was  thought  best,  for  the  purpose  of  memorizing,  to  give 
the  pupils  in  their  Exercises  rather  than  arranged  in  the  list-forms. 
The  words  in  the  sentences  of  this  Exercise  are  also  words  of  this 
character. 

In  fact,  there  is  no  precise  limit  at  which  one  need  stop  in  this 
matter  of  abbreviations,  providing  the  student  keeps  within  the  bounds  of 
legibility,  the  latter  being  a  matter  upon  which  every  phonographer  must 
bring  individual  judgment  to  bear — those  whose  memory  is  more  retentive 
than  their  fingers  are  agile,  being  able  to  abbreviate  with  more  safety 
than  persons  whose  quickness  of  hand  exceeds  their  capacity  for  mem- 
orizing— the  latter  class  not  needing  as  much  abbreviation  as  the  former. 
But  do  not  permit  the  thirst  for  abbreviations  to  interfere  with  the  rep- 
resentation of 

SOUND  SYLLABLES, 

in  words  of  not  very  frequent  occurrence.  A  proper  appreciation  of  the 
sound  syllables  of  language  is  a  great  aid  to  students  in  building  cut- 
lines  for  infrequently  occurring  words,  and  it  is,  therefore,  an  aid  that 
should  be  cultivated  as  much  as  possible.  A  good  way  to  attain  this 
result  is  to  write  words  in  as  few  syllables  as  possible,  consistent  with 


84  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

legibility.  '  For  instance,  do  not  divide  the  word  vagrancy  thus:  va-ga- 
ran-see,  sign  112;  nor  yet  omit  the  final  vowel  sound  as  in  va-grans,  sign 
in.  The  shape  of  sign  112  forms  too  extended  an  outline  for  speed? 
and  that  of  sign  1 1 1  is  too  brief  for  legibility,  while,  by  the  use  of  the 
Ns  circle  as  a  termination,  sign  in  fails  to  provide  for  the  final  invisible 
vowel,  which  is  always  entitled  to  representation  by  writing  the  last 
consonant  in  full.  Vagrancy  should  be  divided  into  sound  syllables  as 
in  sign  no — va-gran-cy — thus  giving  its  final  vowel  full  representation 
by  the  use  of  the  full-sized  letter  S,  and  at  the  same  time  rendering  the 
word  outline  sufficiently  brief  for  rapid  writing. 

NS  VERSUS  S. 

The  small  circle  S,  when  occurring  in  such  junctures  as  task  (sign 
83  in  Exercise)  is  frequently  misunderstood,  until  its  formation  is 
properly  explained,  to  be  an  Ns  circle.  While  its  shape  is  exactly  that 
of  the  Ns  circle,  yet  its  right  to  be  written  in  the  same  manner,  is  very 
conclusive.  This  can  be  best  illustrated  by  clo  ely  observing  the  com- 
binations of  the  consonant  sounds  of  t-k,  t-s-k,  t-n-s-k,  as  they  are  shown 
in  the  words  talk,  task  and  transaction  in  signs  82,  83  and  84  of  Exercise. 
The  letter  T  of  sign  82,  it  will  be  observed,  is  written  directly  on  and 
touching  the  dotted  line.  To  add  Ns  to  that  letter  one  must  necessarily 
first  turn  the  end  of  the  T,  which  rests  .on  the  line,  into  an  N  hook  and 
then  bring  it  round  into  a  circle,  after  which,  if  we  want  to  add  K,  the  K 
will  appear  somewhat  above  the  line  on  which  the  T  rests,  as  in  sign  84. 
When,  however,  only  S-K  is  to  be  added  to  T,  the  S  is  written  under  the 
dotted  line,  at  the  lower  end  of  the  T,  thus  bringing  the  final  letter  K  on 
the  line  (sign  83)  as  perfectly  as  T-K  is  written  without  the  S  in  sign  82. 
This  arrangement  clearly  isolates  the  circle  S  (sign  83)  from  any  col- 
lusion with  the  letters  T  or  K,  excepting  as  a  joined  letter,  and  clearly 
indicates  that  it  is  not  written  on  the  left-hand  side  of  T,  as  might  be 
supposed,  but  rather  on  the  under  side,  which  as  perfectly  declares  its 
individuality  as  though  it  were  written  upon  the  right-hand  side,  an 
arrangement  which,  in  this  sort  of  a  combination,  would  be  quite  awk- 
ward; and,  as  this  similarity  between  the  S  and  Ns  circles  will  never, 
under  any  circumstances,  cause  them  to  be  mistaken,  the  one  for  the 
other,  is  a  needless  one.  Convenience  in  writing  is  as  necessary  to  rapid 
writing  as  brevity  is,  and  clearly  formed  angles  are  as  necessary  to 
speed.  The  manner  in  which  the  circle  S  in  sign  83  is  added,  is  the 
most  convenient  way  it  can  be  added,  prevents  the  K  from  degenerating 
into  the  shape  of  an  N,  as  it  would  if  the  circle  were  written  on  the  right 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  85 

hand  side  of  T,  and  therefore  preserves  the  shape  of  all  the  letters  in 
the  combination,  and  the  circle  S  in  such  outlines  never  clashes  with  the 
Ns  circle.  Always  place  the  circle  on  the  proper  side,  when  possible, 
but  sometimes,  as  in  instances  above  noted  and  in  signs  5  and  85  to 
88,  the  S  circle  has  to  be  joined  in  the  most  convenient  way  for  the 
reasons  first  given. 

The  juncture  of  the  word  has,  in  signs  77  and  78  of  Exercise,  in 
which  case  it  is  apparently  turned  upon  the  left  side  of  the  word  //,  is 
also  in  accordance  with  the  placing  of  the  circle  S  in  the  word  task. 

RESPECTING  PRACTICE. 

A  plan  of  practice  in  writing  which  will  much  accelerate  the  student's 
proficiency,  is  that  of  practicing  in  precisely  the  same  manner  a  regular 
phonographic  reporter  works.  To  accomplish  this  object,  procure  a 
reporter's  note  book,  either  by  purchase  or  making  it  yourself.  These 
books  are  about  the  size  and  shape  of  a  common  pass-book,  and  nearly 
half  an  inch  thick,  to  admit  of  lengthy  reports  being  taken;  but,  unlike 
most  other  note  books,  they  open  at  the  bottom  instead  of  at  the 
side,  and  when  in  use,  only  one  side  of  the  paper  is  written  on — that 
which  is  nearest — and,  afterwards,  when  those  pages  are  all  written  upon, 
the  book  is  turned  and  the  other  sides  are  ready  for  use.  This  method 
always  secures  a  good  foundation  for  the  phonographic  writing,  and  pre- 
vents in  a  great  measure  awkward  illegibility. 

Some  teachers  claim  that  a  good  plan  of  study  for  the  purpose  of 
gaining  familiarity  with  a  large  number  of  words,  is  for  the  student  to 
get  a  common  spelling-book  and  practice  on  all  the  hard  words  therein. 
Practice  of  this  sort,  it  is  claimed  by  such  teachers,  will  go  a  great  way 
toward  making  easy  the  path  which  leads  to  rapid  writing.  This  is  in  a 
measure  true,  though  only  of  the  student  who  has  thoroughly  memor- 
ised all  the  Exercises  of  the  lessons — for  others  it  will  simply  delay  pro- 
gress. In  fact,  any  attempt  of  the  student,  until  he  has  finished  the 
lessons,  to  write  words  not  in  the  lessons  as  far  as  he  has  learned,  is  to  be 
deprecated,  for  the  reason  that,  until  all  the  principles  of  the  art  have 
been  learned,  he  is  sure  to  make  imperfect  outlines  for  words  containing 
principles  at  v/hich  he  has  not  arrived,  and  his  eyes  are  unfortunately  too 
apt  to  make  mental  pictures  of  such  wrong  outlines,  and  when  he  comes 
to  practice  for  speed,  after  the  lessons  are  finished,  he  will  find  difficulty 
in  avoiding  those  bad  outlines.  Every  lesson  should  be  well  learned  be- 
fore the  student  makes  any  attempt  at  writing  words  not  in  the  lessons 
he  has  learned.  Then,  when  all  are  learned,  he  will,  by  having  in  mind 
all  the  principles,  be  enabled  to  more  readily  form  words  not  in  the  lessons. 


36 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


EXERCISE    X. 


'        I  <\ 

<S  tn 

"so... 

J 

u 
;w$4U^fl/4r<L.yi:«~^.>Kyj..,^V^^^ 

i/  _       '  _"        v_  \       »        j 

^|..W./O..9d!..^.3 

<:r^409.oS*..  4ia\rr?.4£d^rr*:il^i~s3^ ... . 

/JtZ/^M^Titf^^ 
j>        y  V 


^ 


L,  ..... 


./-I. 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY.  gy 

KEY    X. 

i,  they  are;  2,  may  be;  3,  we  may  be;  4,  they  may  be  likely;  5,  you  may 
be  certain;  6,  it  will;  7,  which  will;  8,  much  will;  9,  at  all;  10,  for  all;  n, 
of  all;  12,  to  all;  13,  on  all;  14,  and  all  the;  15,  and  will  you;  16,  who  will; 
17,  in  all;  18,  my  own;  19,  our  own;  20,  have  been;  21,  more  than;  22, 
softer  than;  23,  no  one;  24,  none;  25,  some  one;  26,  at  one;  27,  at  once; 
28,  and  our  own;  29,  on  our;  30,  but  our;  31,  of  ours;  32,  of  our  own;  33, 
to  ours;  34,  to  our  own;  35,  by  your;  36,  by  our;  37,  who  are;  38,  each- 
are;  39,  which  are;  40,  or  not;  41,  but  not;  42,  did;  43,  I  did  not;  44,  I  GO 
not;  45,  I  had  not;  46,  be  not;  47,  have  not;  48,  I  will  not;  49,  we  will 
not;  50,  we  are  not;  51,  I  think  not;  52,  am  not;  53,  may  not;  54,  we 
mean;  55,  we  meant;  56,  we  may  not;  57,  we  meant  not;  58,  we  might 
not;  59,  clear  off;  60,  set  off;  61,  set  forth;  62,  call  forth;  63,  we  are  of; 
64,  which  are  of;  65,  out  of;  66,  or  if;  67,  but  if;  68,  and  of;  $9^  v/nich 
have;  70,  all  have;  71,  who  have;  72,  I  have;  73,  to  have;  74,  Ihay~  been; 
75,  I  have  to  be;  76,  to  have  been;  77,  it  has  been;  78,  such  has  been  taken; 
79,  let  us;  80,  sent  us;  81,  send  us;  82,  talk;  83,  task;  84,  transaction;  85, 
desire;  86,  dissection;  87,  destroy;  88,  desolate;  89,  dissolute;  90,  last;  91, 
lost;  92,  lowest;  93,  wheat;  94,  white;  95,  stock;  96,  stack;  97,  marked; 
98,  market;  99,  greatly;  100,  gradually;  101,  read;  102,  re(a)d;  103,  murder; 
104,  days;  105,  saith;  106,  said;  107,  survey;  108,  circle;  109,  circular;  no, 
vagrancy;  n  i,  va-grans;  112,  va-ga-ran-cy;  113,  member;  114,  remembrance; 
115,  brother;  116,  brethren;  117,  equal;  118,  equaled;  119,  imaginary;  120, 
imagination;  121,  govern;  122,  governor;  123,  again;  124,  against;  125, 
angel;  126,  angelic;  127,  Dear  Doctor;  128,  measured;  129,  measure 
their;  130,  over;  131,  over  their;  132,  overthrow;  133,  overcome;  134, 
every;  135,  everyone;  136,  everything;  137,  organs;  138,  organize;  139, 
organic;  140,  organism;  141,  organization;  142,  Tell  the  difference;  143, 
The  truth  of  a  question;  144,  Liberty  is  the  best  government;  145,  Till 
you  agree  to  call;  146,  The  organ,  then,  belongs  to  Mr.  White;  147,  To 
the  Christian,  eternity  means  union;  148,  Delivered  from  an  awful  internal 
danger;  149,  Many  people  appear  to  be  more  able  than  lucky;  150,  Mercy 
and  Truth  are  attributes  of  Jehovah;  151,  The  very  measure  I  began  to 
fear  is  on  appeal;  152,  Learn  to  humor  the  aged,  but  kindly  govern  the 
child;  153,  Denominate  alone  a  degree  of  juvenile  philanthropy;  154, 
A  providential  revelation  was  the  defendant's  testimony;  155,  Poverty 
often  applies  the  lash  which  leads  to  ultimate  honor;  156,  We  base  our 
opinions  upon  information  often  second-handed  and  withal  faulty;  157, 
Above  all  things  remember  that  principles  need  not  be  prejudices;  158, 
Until  you  assure  me  to  whom  they  belong,  you  shall  retain  them;  159, 
Punishment  is  the  pleasure  of  the  cruel,  the  manner  of  a  darkened  mind; 
160,  Phonography  has  had  its  revolution  here  and  most  of  its  difficulties 
have  vanished;  161,  This  generation  can  only  imagine  the  remarkable  glory 
which  awaits  the  human  race  of  the  future;  162,  True  religion  is  from  within, 
and  is  that  divine  belief  which  sees  a  brother  or  sister  in  every  human 
countenance;  163,  Generally  the  work  which  is  well  begun  is  nearly  done; 
moreover,  it  is  equally  sure  that  the  conditions  will  be  less  wearisome;  164, 
Your  next  lesson  is  number  eleven.  When  through  with  it  and  the  twelfth, 
begin  all  the  lessons  again  and  review  each  one  thoroughly  until  your 
advance  in  the  art  has  brought  speed  and  ease  in  reading. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 
LESSON    XI. 


COMPOUND  ABBREVIATIONS. 

....  ...Speak,  speech 

J...  Audience 

..../  .  Especial-ly 

.....Y.S'pecial-ly 

J...  Providence 

..?  Secession 
.„$  Cessation 

...A..Spiritual-ly 
.  \>..Person 

"—  Dignity 

...(^....Justification 

...^....Association 
..J....  Yesterday 
...ST...  Salvation 
../^...Manufacture 
Minimum 

.  .  .Peculiar 

...^...Jurisdiction 
...(fo..  Jerusalem 
.-cX...  Juxtaposition 
..^....  Archangel 
..^\\.  Represent 

....  ..Business 

...\..  Subject 
........Strength 

xr^vrrrx  Memoranda 
Memorandum 

1  .External-ly 

..s?\-.  Reform 
..s?\.  Respect-ful-ly 

,...fj  Construct 

/r^>__D  Maximum 
Imoossible 

....P..  .Satisfy 

.  .  ..  Because 

f 
..  ..System 

Scripture,  describe.     Somebody 

..!..  Extreme-ity 

Inscribe  -d. 

Stenography 

t  .  J..  Strange 

Signify,  signature 

»  —  9 
Influence 

....!K..Instruct-ed 

....[...Utilize 

lb 

..!..  ..Advert  is^nisni 

...<  —  P..  No  sir 
Nacessary 

T^  ..Universe-al-ity 

«/ 
....vo..  This 

..s»_P..  United  states 
./..  Knowledge 

,..c....  Advert  ise-ments 

...(T...  Thbse 

The  above  list  of  compound  abbreviations  is  of  equal  importance 
with  those  which  have  preceded  it,  should  be  as  thoroughly  memorized, 
and  is  as  adaptable  to  the  formation  of  derivative  abbreviations  as  the 
other  lists,  illustrations  of  which  are  given  in  signs  153  to  255,  subjection, 
sign  154,  being  formed  by  adding  a  Shun  hook  to  subject,  sign  153;  sub- 
jective, sign  155,  by  the  addition  of  a  Tiv  hook,  etc.,  etc.,  etc.,  through- 
out the  lesson. 

The  beginning  hook  preceding  the  circle-S  in  the  word-abbreviations 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  89 

for  instruct  and  inscribe  in  foregoing  list,  is  used  to  express  the  sound  of 
in,  en  or  un  before  the  S-circle  only  where  the  long  N  will  not  readily  join. 

If  students  will  note  carefully  how  the  particular  sort  of  word- 
abbreviations  in  this  list  are  often  made  up  of  short-cuts  of  speech,  such 
as  bis  or  biz  for  business  (the  seventh  abbreviation  in  the  list),  ad  for 
advertisement,  dig  for  dignity,  sig  for  signify,  etc.,  they  will  be  able  to  make 
many  similar  short-cuts  for  themselves,  in  words  which  would  be  other- 
wise cumbrous,  and  will  understand  why  such  outlines  as  pnsl,  sign  162 
in  Exercise,  does  for  Pennsylvania;  bach,  sign  170,  for  bachelor;  cab,  sign 
171,  for  capable;  kath  for  Catholic,  sign  172;  pop,  sign  188,  for  popular; 
pub,  sign  189,  {or  public  or  publish,  and  the  reasons  for  many  other  simi- 
lar abbreviations  in  this  lesson.  Then  of  course,  if  pub  does  iot  publish, 
add  an  R  to  it  and  we  have  publisher,  as  in  sign  190;  add  a  Shun  to  pub, 
as  in  sign  191,  and  we  have  publication;  begin  pub  with  an  R  and  we  have 
rcpub,  as  in  sign  193,  meaning  republic;  put  an  N  hook  to  that  and  we 
get  republican,  sign  192,  etc.,  etc.  On  the  same  plan,  kath  being  Catholic, 
put  an  R  in  front  of  it  and  we  have  R-katli,  which  will  naturally  be  read 
for  Roman- Catholic,  as  in  sign  173.  This  use  of  the  letter  R  for  a  whole 
word  as  in  Roman  in  this  instance,  we  may  extend  to  other  words  or 
collection  of  words,  representing  each  word  of  that  collection  by  one 
letter,  as  p-r-r  for  Pennsylvania  Railroad,  sign  163  in  Exercise;  1-j-k  for 
Lord  Jesus  Christ,  sign  167,  etc.,  etc.  All  these  methods  of  abbreviation 
are  done  in  words  and  phrases,  names,  etc.,  which  are  familiar  to  the 
writer,  and  whereof  he  needs  only  a  suggestion  in  order  to  read  them. 
With  words  or  phrases  which  are  not  familiar,  this  shortening  should 
not  be  attempted,  but  all  that  are  given  in  these  lessons  can  and  should 
be  used,  familiar  or  not,  as  they  are  necessary  to  speed.  The  student 
should,  therefore,  practice  them  until  they  become  familiar,  and  employ 
these  principles  of  abbreviation  on  all  possible  occasions  not  illustrated 
in  the  lessons  where  similar  words  and  phrases  are  familiar.  Practice 
in  such  invention  will  soon  make  it  easy  and  as  spontaneous  in  actual 
rapid  work  on  words  never  attempted  before,  as  if  it  was  being  done  at 
ease,  giving  the  writer  possibilities  which  no  dictionary  or  phrase-book 
can  give,  so  long  as  it  is  borne  in  mind  to  write  all  words  and  phrases 
in  these  lessons  exactly  as  the  author  gives  them. 

In  such  words  as  are  represented  by  signs  24  to  38,  the  letter  Way 
may  often  be  entirely  omitted  without  destroying  legibility. 

In  phrase  numbered  51  in  Exercise,  the  word  -well  is  represented 
pimply  by  writing  the  letter  L.  It  will  not  be  found  to  conflict  with  the 
word-abbreviation  for  will,  even  though  written  in  the  same  position. 


90  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

This  dropping  of  the  Way  hook  in  well  should  not,  however,  be  attempted 
when  well  is  written  alone.  It  is  used  only  in  junctures  with  other  words. 
It  is  sometimes  expedient  to  slight  the  formation  of  some  words  in 
order  to  accomplish  phrase-writing;  but  such  means  will  not  interfere 
with  the  correct  reading  of  the  words  so  slighted.  Note  the  formation 
of  must  in  signs  79  and  80,  and  postpone  and  postage,  signs  74  and  75,  etc. 

PHRASE  POSITIONS. 

The  general  rule  with  most  phonographers,  when  joining  words,  is 
to  write  the  first  word  in  its  proper  place-position,  and  let  the  other  words 
in  the  phrase  accommodate  themselves  to  the  position  of  the  first. 

There  are  times,  however,  when  this  rule  will  not  apply.  For  in. 
stance,  when  some  other  word  in  the  phrase  requires,  in  order  to  be 
read  correctly  and  with  ease,  that  it  shall  be  given  its  proper  position 
in  preference  to  commencing  word. 

For  the  above  reason,  there  are  phrases,  as  well  as  words,  that 
should  occupy  the  second  and  third  positions,  even  though  the  com- 
mencing word  be  a  first-place  word.  Hence  there  are  first-place,  second- 
place  and  third-place  phrases. 

A  first-place  phrase  is  one  in  which  there  occurs  a  word  (either  ini- 
tial, intermediate  or  final)  which,  in  order  to  be  read  as  joined,  necessi- 
tates the  placing  of  the  entire  phrase  in  the  first  position,  above  the  line  of 
writing.  A  few  such  phrases  are  illustrated  by  signs  41  to  48  in  Exercise. 

A  second-place  phrase  is  one  in  which  the  necessity  of  reading  a 
certain  word  within  it  causes  the  entire  phrase  to  be  placed  in  the  second 
position,  on  the  line,  as  illustrated  by  signs  49  to  56  in  Exercise. 

A  third-place  phrase  is  one  in  which  the  important  word  happens 
to  be  a  third-place  word  and  thus  gives  third  position  to  the  entire  out- 
line, as  illustrated  by  signs  57  to  64  in  Exercise. 

Signs  65  to  73,  inclusive,  illustrate  these  three  sorts  of  phrases 
comparatively,  and  by  attentive  notice  of  how  a  difference  of  position 
changes  the  meaning  of  the  same  phrase  outline,  students  will  find  a 
rule  for  the  proper  placement  of  other  phrases  which  they  will  come  in 
contact  with  when  engaged  in  actual  work.  No  principle  in  phono- 
graphy is  so  unimportant  that  it  may  be  only  casually  acquired,  and 
memorizing  these  phrases  will  especially  repay  for  the  time  consumed. 

WORDS  COMMENCING  WITH  X  AND  Q. 

The   compound   sounds  of  the   English  letters   X  and  Q-prove  the 

most  difficult  for  the  student  to  analyse  when  writing  English  words  in 

which  those  sounds  occur,  or  writing  English  words  spelled  with  those 

letters.      The  purpose,  therefore,  of  the  first  part  of  the  Exercise  to  this 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  91 

lesson  is  to  make  this  matter  an  easy  one  for  the  student,  commencing 
with  the  presentation  of  an  easy  form  for  the  sound  of  X,  which  is  com- 
posed of  the  sounds  short-e,  K  and  S.  Where  that  sound  commences 
a  word,  the  student  need  not  spell  it  out  in  full,  but  -can,  instead,  write 
a  shaded  circle  like  the  circle  Z,  as  in  signs  i  to  16  in  Exercise. 

This  shaded  circle  readily  does  for  the  sound  of  X,  beginning  words, 
and  in  each  instance  will  not  be  mistaken  for  the  Z  circle,  for  the  circle 
Z  always  ends  words.  Use,  therefore,  a  heavy  circle  for  the  sound  of  X 
beginning  words,  attaching  to  it  the  balance  of  the  word,  just  as  a  halved 
R  is  added  to  that  circle  in  sign  i  in  Exercise,  the  whole  outline  being 
therein  placed  above  the  line,  for  the  vowel  in  the  last  syllable  ert  in  that 
outline  for  exert,  is  entitled  to  the  position,  the  circle  X  taking  any  posi- 
tion, it  only  being  necessary  to  indicate  the  principal  vowel  of  the 
balance  of  the  word.  This  X  circle,  being  merely  a  shaded  circle  S,  is 
added  to  all  other  characters  on  the  same  side  as  the  circle  S,  the  right 
or  upper  side  of  straight  characters,  and  like  the  circle  S,  may  denote 
the  indication  of  R  to  the  main  consonant,  by  putting  the  X.  circle 
on  the  R  side  of  straight  consonants,  just  as  the  X  circle  is  placed  to 
the  letter  P  in  such  words  as  experience,  sign  9  in  Exercise,  the  shaded 
circle  being  read  first,  then  the  full  consonant  and  next  invisible  R. 

Signs  185  to  187  illustrate  words  containing  the  sound  of  X  inter- 
medially,  as  in  the  words  next,  mixed  and  fixed.  Phonetically,  these 
words  are  spelled  n-e-k-s-t,  next,  m-i-k-s-d,  mixed,  f-i-k-s-d,  fixed;  but  the 
student  may  omit  the  K  sound  of  X  from  them,  spelling  such  words  as 
though  they  were  nest,  fist and  mist;  and  if  there  is  fear  that  they  will  clash 
with  those  words,  the  loop  may  be  shaded  to  indicate  the  K  sound  of  X. 

The  sound  of  Q  and  the  letter  Q  are  apt  to  give  more  trouble  than 
the  sound  of  X.  All  words  in  English  which  are  begun  with  the  letter 
Q,  have  the  sound  of  K  and  Way,  the  word  queer,  sign  17  in  Exercise, 
being  properly  spelled  phonetically  K,  Way,  long-E  and  R,  so  that  all 
words  beginning  with  the  English  letter  Q,  are  easily  analyzed  if  we  simply 
write  their  sounds,  as  will  be  seen  in  signs  17  to  23,  wherein  the  Way 
hook  follows  the  letter  K  in  giving  the  exact  sound  of  Kway,  which  the 
letter  Q  always  has  when  it  commences  a  word. 

Sometimes  there  are  words  which,  in  English  spelling,  do  not  con- 
tain the  English  Q,  but,  in  their  pronunciation  do,  such  words  being 
cute  and  curiosity,  which  are  pronounced  as  if  begun  with  a  letter  Q. 
This  is  because  the  primary  sound  of  Q  is  a  K,  as  K-u,  Q,  and,  as  the 
English  letter  C  in  such  words  has  also  the  K  sound  followed  by  U,  the 
phoneticion  hears  the  equivalent  of  the  English  letter  Q  only,  such 


92  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

words  being  therefore  treated  just  as  if  they  were  spelled  with  the  let- 
ters K  and  U  beginning  them,  the  K  being  written  and  the  sound  of  U 
indicated  by  position,  as  in  signs  39  and  40  in  Exercise. 

EXPEDIENCIES. 

The  word  it  may  often  be  readily  expressed  by  halving  the  last  full- 
length  consonant  of  a  preceding  word,  as  in  signs  132  and  133.  Many 
word-signs  may  also  be  halved  to  represent  the  addition  of  /'/,  without 
writing  /'/.  See  signs  134  to  136.  A  halved-V  is  often  used  to  rep- 
resent the  phrase  of  it,  providing  it  is  written  above  the  line,  as  in  sign 
137.  This  spells  vit,  which  is  very  near  the  sound  of  of  it.  In  this,  V 
has  been  used  for  of.  A  double  length  V,  upon  a  similar  plan,  may  be 
used  to  represent  of  their,  as  in  signs  138  and  139. 

The  halving  principle  can  also  be  used  to  add  the  words  ought  and 
would  or  had  on  the  same  plan  that  halving  adds  //  in  the  phrase  take 
it,  sign  135.  In  that  instance,  the  word  rests  on  the  line  when  adding  //, 
while  in  signs  140  and  146  and  150,  the  words  //.,  which  and  suck  are 
placed  above  the  line  and  halved  to  add  ought.  It  must  be  observed 
that  the  halved  outline  must  be  above  the  line  to  add  ought,  as  in  above 
instances,  and  must  be  below  the  line  to  add  would  or  had,  just  as  sign 
141  adds  would  or:  had  to  the  word  it,  reading  //  would  or  //  had.  But  it  is 
only  such  common  second-place  word-abbreviations  as  //  or  which  that 
may  be  taken  out  of  position  to  add  the  words  ought  and  would  or  had  by 
halving.  First  or  third-place  abbreviations  must  keep  their  positions. 

By  adding  the  V-hook  meaning  have,  the  N  hook  for  not,  or  the  L 
hook  for  will,  more  extended  phrases  may  be  made  from  these  small 
outlines,  as  illustrated  by  signs  143  to  145  and  148,  149,  151  and  152, 
and,  in  some  instances  the  word  to  may  be  also  implied,  though  not 
indicated,  as  in  sign  142,  in  which  instance  the  halving  of  the  character 
is  done  to  add  the  word  ought,  to  being  merely  understood  in  that  phrase. 

In  sign  157,  the  circle-S  is  added  on  the  most  convenient  side. 

Signs  159  and  161,  165  and  166,  show  what  sort  of  derivatives 
may  be  formed  from  the  signs  immediately  preceding  them,  while  signs 
174  to  184  illustrate  how  portions  of  words  may  be  used  legibly  for 
entire  words.  Signs  168  and  169  are  partly  of  this  character. 

Signs  194  to  201  represent  the  best  derivative  forms  for  those  words. 
Difference  of  position  is  chosen  to  indicate  the  difference  of  meaning  be- 
tween words  having  same  outline,  signs  194,  195, 196  and  197,  256  and  257. 

Signs  258  to  260  are  phrase-abbreviations  for  those  words. 

The  beginning  letter  O  is  omitted  from  the  word  oblige,  in  sign  261, 
because  unnecessary,  blige  being  just  as  legible. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  93 

All  these  differences  in  outline,  shading,  position,  direction  of  writ- 
ing, size,  etc.,  should  be  noted  well  by  the  student,  and  carefully 
heeded,  whether  they  occur  in  separated  words  or  in  the  sentences 
terminating  the  Exercises  to  the  concluding  lesson  of  this  course.  Such 
words  and  phrases  are  incorporated  in  these  lessons  for  the  particular  bene- 
fit of  students,  and  they  can  depend  upon  it  that  there  is  a  reason  for  both 
the  position  and  outline  of  every  one  of  them.  For  instance,  the  con- 
text will  seldom  tell  the  difference  between  write  and  read;  therefore, 
write  is  an  R  halved  to  indicate  the  T,  and  read  is  written  with  the  K 
and  D  in  full.  For  a  similar  reason,  a  distinction  is  made  between  read 
(pronounced  reed)  when  meaning  to  read,  and  read  (pronounced  red)  when 
meaning  have  read,  although  spelled  the  same  in  English;  thus,  put  read 
(pronounced  reed)  above  the  line  when  it  means  to  read,  because  of  its 
more  distinct  vowel  E,  and  write  read  (pronounced  red)  when  meaning 
have  read  on  the  line,  as  in  sentences  in  this  lesson.  Other  necessary  dis- 
tinctions are  particularly  shown  in  the  sentences  represented  by  sign  266 
of  Exercise,  wherein  are  illustrated  differences  between  six  words  sounded 
much  alike,  viz:  ceasing,  season,  session,  secession,  cessation  and  association. 

The  word  of  can  occasionally  be  expressed  by  the  V  hook,  as  in  the 
phrase /a/-/  of  tJie  in  the  sentence  represented  by  sign  266  in  Exercise. 

The  N-hook  may  occasionally  do  duty  for  the  sound  of  Ng,  as  in 
sign  8i,b-ang-k,  bank,  but  this  should  only  be  when  no  other  letter  follows 
Ng  in  same  word,  for  Ng,  when  final,  is  written  long,  as  in  sign  go. 

Signs  82  and  83  are  instances  of  brevity  in  formation  only  to  be 
followed  when  it  can  be  safely  done.  The  consonant  sounds  are  all 
there,  but  syllable  indication  is  not  observed. 

Sign  84  is  the  best  outline  for  the  word  eye,  as  the  pronunciation 
of  that  word  is  the  same  as  the  letter  I.  And,  when  any  one  pronounces 
the  word  aye  the  same  as  the  letter  I,  the  letter  I  will  do  for  that  word 
also,  but  when  aye  is  pronounced  like  the  letter  A  of  the  alphabet,  then 
it  should  be  written  as  in  sign  85.  The  interrogative  Eh  is  sometimes 
pronounced  like  the  letter  A  of  the  alphabet,  in  which  case  that  letter 
should  be  written  for  it,  as  in  sign  85;  but  when  it  is  properly  pro- 
nounced, it  sounds  like  short-e,  and  that  letter  then  should  be  employed 
for  it,  as  in  sign  86.  For  the  sound  of  the  interjection  Ah,  the  alpha- 
betical letter  for  that  sound  should  be  used,  as  in  sign  87. 

The  word  now  is  best  spelied  in  full,  n-ow,  as  in  sign  88.  The  word 
once  should  be  written  as  in  sigvt  89. 

In  junctures  of  the  letter  Ha>  with  N  or  Ing,  the  Hay  may  be 
written  upwards,  as  in  sign  go. 


94  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

The  sound  of  P  is  omitted  from  the  word  impugned,  sign  91,  wherein 
it  is  written  with  a  letter  M  halved  and  thickened  to  add  D,  and  at  the 
same  time  placed  under  the  line  to  indicate  the  very  prominent  sound 
of  U,  with  its  preceding  vowel  sound  unprovided  for,  because  unneces- 
sary. 

Signs  92  to  125  contain  outlines  for  words  and  phrases,  the  former 
mostly  compound,  for  which  the  student  needs  special  outlines  for  dis- 
tinction sake,  or  to  provide  easy  forms  for  words  difficult  to  write 
according  to  rule,  the  latter  sort  being  mainly  and  meanwhile,  signs  92 
and  93,  and  the  distinctive  outlines  being  such  as  the  provision  for  the 
difference  existing  between  the  words  />//»>,  unto  and  onto,  signs  94,  95 
and  96,  also  adopt  and  adapt,  signs  100  and  101.  The  termination  crs 
and  fries,  occurring  in  such  words  as  distillers,  distilleries,  and  similar 
words,  need  to  be  clearly  indicated,  ers  being  indicated  in  hook  and 
circle  form  as  in  sign  98,  and  cries  by  the  full  sized  R  and  circle  as  in  sign 


EXERCISE    XI. 


c^o^  _    \         ^  (K  (*  D  ff 

. J.. ^ 2,.  . .. 


.ly....4S l&.r7r^.20.—cS.Z±-rrr>i?.22rrrts3.£3.-r7*~—24 2f. 26 

*~\     c— i     — p    — ^    I    — i  — i     V~  L_     r   s^~/^ 

.Zy..^ZS...\.l9...\..$0 ...3±.*.3Z..J.33..\.3*..tt.^~.i36.\J.3f...38...d9.  ..4057f 

•  ^  /  —  | 

...4-1 42^T..4:3 , lt.44r 45" 46 4y .-^S". 

i  t  r 

£*tu                     4*  ft"      i               ^O                         /JO                              £•/                         ^?9                        ^*^l                         /^*4_ 
,.v   7. .  ,».,..v  O....I ..  »»,.O  C>  ••  »*..»...V  V4  ...C.....*JD  jL......,..O  /v. ..  .«.*.*O  t'*  •  •.  .x*^      V  ^£" 

•^.jy±^:.f£^~.  yz^^^s^ye^C.yi^ys.  c^y  9.^^. 


_     96 
.P^./r/..9A...d4-.-.'W...I 


^*^ 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  g^ 

99.  These  differences  and  many  others  which  the  student  should  care- 
fully note,  are  plainly  shown  in  this  Exercise. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  in  sign  119  the  preposition  to  is  omitted  in 
the  word  tomorrow,  the  outline  for  morrow  being  written  in  the  third 
position  to  indicate  the  to  in  tomorrow,  just  as  it  is  indicated  in  the 
phrase  to  be  and  to  do,  in  list  of  Common  Abbreviations  in  Lesson  IX. 
This  preposition  to  is  often  understood  at  the  end  of  a  phrase,  without 
being  written,  as  in  signs  121  to  125.  When  a  hyphen  separates  to  from 
other  words  in  the  key,  it  implies  that  the  outline  represents  the  ad- 
dition of  the  to,  on  some  occasions,  and  not  on  others,  according  to  cir- 
cumstances. Signs  121  and  123  are  allowable  instances  of  abbreviation 
in  the  case  of  frequently  occurring  phrases,  the  former,  in  order  or  in  order 
to  being  simply  an  N  with  an  R  hook,  halved  to  add  D,  spelling  Nerd, 
which  is  sufficient  for  that  phrase,  while  sign  123  is  an  N,  with  Rel  and 
Shun  hooks,  forming  Inrehhun,  which  nearly  spells  in  relation-to.  Both 
these  outlines  are  placed  in  position  for  in. 

Sometimes  the  word  to  is  indicated  by  halving  an  outline,  as  in  sign 
130,  wherein  the  word  able,  of  sign  129,  is  halved  to  indicate  able  to,  as 
in  sign  130. 

KEY  XL 

i,  exert;  2,  exercise;  3,  exercisist;  4,  exact;  5,  exactly;  6,  expect;  7, 
except;  8,  accept;  9,  experience;  10,. experienced;  n,  extend;  12,  excel; 
13,  excellent;  14,  examine;  15,  examined;  16,  examination;  17,  queer;  18, 
query;  19,  quaint;  20,  quart;  21,  quartz;  22,  quarto;  23,  quake;  24,  quick; 
25,  quicken;  26,  quadrant;  27,  qualify;  28,  quality;  29,  quantity;  30, 
quinine;  31,  quiet;  32,  quote;  33,  quota;  34,  twill;  35,  twig;  36,  twelve; 
37,  require;  38,  request;  39,  cute;  40, 'curiosity;  41,  I  am;  42,  I  am  glad; 
43,  I  am  inclined;  44,  if  you;  45,  if  it  is;  46,  if  it  is  not;  47,  of  course;  48, 
in  all  cases;  49,  I  may;  50,  take  you;  51,  it  may  as  well;  52,  for  you;  53, 
for  it  is;  54,  for  it  is  known;  55,  till  you  can;  56,  the  same  cases;  57,  put 
you;  58,  took  you;  59,  to  whom;  60,  has  had  it;  61,  used  some;  62,  was 
not;  63,  whom  you  will;  64,  some  cases;  65,  in  each;  66,  in  which;  67, 
in  much;  68,  give  these;  69,  give  this;  70,  give  thus  (those);  71,  and  if;  72, 
and  for;  73,  and  few;  74,  postpone;  75,  postage;  76,  postal;  77,  postal 
card;  78,  you  must;  79,  you  must  be;  80,  you  must  have;  81,  bank;  82, 
surprise;  83,  surprised;  84,  eye;  85,  aye;  86,  eh;  87,  ah;  88,  now;  89,  once; 
90,  hang;  91,  impugned;  92,  mainly;  93,  meanwhile;  94,  onto;  95,  into;  96, 
unto;  97,  distiller;  98,  distillers;  99,  distilleries;  100,  adopt;  101,  adapt;  102,. 
adoption;  103,  adaption;  104,  nevertheless;  105,  notwithstanding;  106,  here- 
after; 107,  herein;  108,  hereinafter;  109,  hereinbefore;  no,  hereinto;  in, 
hereunto;  112,  hereon;  113,  hereof;  114,  heretofore;  115,  hope  to  have; 
116,  I  beg  to  say;  117,  morrow;  118,  the  morrow;  119,  to-morrow;  120,  in 
order  that;  121,  in  order-to;  122,  in  reply-to;  123,  in  relation-to;  124,  in 
reference-to;  125,  with  reference-to;  126,  reference;  127,  reform;  128,  per- 
form; 129,  able;  130,  able  to;  131,  to  be  able  to;  132,  read  it;  133,  shave  it; 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


\  r~ 


<\ 


6  V  V  -       \J)  \J2/ 

lSS^.tS6:?..iS7.°...JS&  .....  4f9.... 


W 


v/ 


...... 

o          C 


---^-^:-e- 

\    ) 


P 
......  «*- 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  cj 

134,,  make  it;  135,  take  it;  136,  have  it;  137,  of  it;  138,  of  their;  139,  of  their 
own;  140,  it  ought;  141,  it  would-had;  142,  it  ought  to  have;  143,  it  would 
have;  144,  it  ought  not;  145,  it  would-had  not;  146,  which  ought;  147,  which 
it;  148,  which  would  have;  149,  which  will  it;  150,  such  ought;  151,  such  would 
not;  152,  such  will  have  had;  153,  subject;  154,  subjection;  155,  subjective; 
156,  business;  157,  businesslike;  158,  necessary;  159,  necessarily;  160, 
United  States;  161,  Constitution  of  the  United  States;  162,  Pennsyl- 
vania; 163,  Pennsylvania  railroad;  164,  university;  165,  University  of 
Pennsylvania;  166,  Universalism;  167,  Lord  Jesus  Christ;  168,  character; 
169,  children;  170,  bachelor;  171,  capable;  172,  Catholic;  173,  Roman 
Catholic;  174,  Savior;  175,  several;  176,  visible;  177,  technical;  178, 
dignity;  179,  dogmatic;  180,  discover;  181,  England-ish;  182,  possible; 
183,  positive-ly;  184,  system;  185,  next;  186,  mixed;  187,  fixed;  188,  popular; 
189,  public-ish;  190,  publisher;  191,  publication;  192,  Republican;  193, 
republish;  194,  workman;  195,  workmen;  196,  workingman;  197,  working- 
men;  198,  manufacture;  199,  manufacturer;  200,  manufactures;  201,  manu- 
facturers; 202,  advertisement;  203,  advertisements;  204,  advertising;  205, 
advertiser;  206,  advertised;  2o7,especial-ly;  208,  external-ly;  209,  impossible; 
210,  impossibility;  21  r,  justification;  212,  justification  by  faith;  213,  repre- 
sent; 214,  representation;  215,  representative;  216,  represented;  217,  mis- 
represent; 218,  misrepresentation;  219,  misrepresented;  220,  peculiar;  221, 
peculiar  case;  222.,  peculiarly;  223,  peculiarity;  224,  respect-ful-ly;  225, 
salvation;  226,  salvation  of  thesoul;  227,  satisfy-fied;  228,  satisfactory;  229, 
satisfaction;  230,  scripture;  231,  scriptural;  232,  signify-fied;  233,  significance; 
234,  significancy;  235,  significant;  236,  signification;  237,  significative;  238, 
similar-ly;  239,  similarity;  240,  simple-y-fi-ed;  241,  single-singular-ly;  242, 
singularity;  243,  somebody;  244,  special;  245,  speak;  246,  spoke;  247, 
spoken;  248,  spinal  column;  249,  spiritual;  250,  spiritualism;  251,  spirit- 
ualist; 252,  spirituality;  253,  stenography;  254,  stenographer;  255,  stenogra- 
phic; 256,  sometime;  257,  somewhat;  258,  substantial  identity;  259,  Supreme 
Being;  260,  temperance  society;  261,  Oblige  me,  and  while  I  write,  you  read 
those  memoranda  which  you  read  before;  262,  No  sir,  you  can  never  construct 
a  minimum  or  maximum  jurisdiction;  263,  The  universe  grows,  as  our 
knowledge*  of  it  expands;  264,  Strange  was  the  idea  of  the  manufacturer 
who  hoped  to  succeed  with  no  advertising;  265,  A  special  business  needs 
the  audience  which  is  best  secured  by  a  satisfactory  advertisement;  266, 
This  memorandum  of  secession  of  part  of  the  association  last  season  was 
read,  without  ceasing,  before  the  cessation  of  yesterday's  session;  267,  A 
desire  to  be  somebody,  though  mere  pride,  is  far  more  creditable  than  to 
be  satisfied  with  being  nobody;  268,  Because  his  answer  was  not  inscribed 
in  juxtaposition  with  signatures  on  the  opposite  page  of  the  book,  the  man- 
ager was  dissatisfied;  269,  The  city  of  Jerusalem  of  old  has  been  used  to 
describe  a  state  of  future  existence  for  the  just — in  old  pictures  an  arch- 
angel is  seen  guarding  it  while  its  inhabitants  sleep;  270,  Providence  deals 
not  in  the  impossible,  but  seems  always  willing  to  influence  knowledge  to 
perform  wonders  for  the  person  who  utilizes  extremity  as  a  justification  for 
reform  in  business  methods;  271,  I  speak  especially  of  the  respect  which 
should  be  shown  to  Scripture  as  representing  a  peculiar  spiritual  revelation 
which  must  instruct  by  its  acknowledged  external  strength  even  to  those 
who  may  not  see  in  it  a  necessarily  saving  significance. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 
LESSON  XII. 


HALF- 

-LENGTH  ABBREVIATIONS. 

Between 
.A  Body 
Beauty,  about 
Quit-e 

.""".God 

X.After 

C 
Thought 

Without 
C 
Throughout 

c< 

On  either  hand 

On  the  other  hand 
C 

.:...Establish-ed-ment 
..).  ..  Ast  oni  sh-ed-ment 

...,>..  Met 

/•s 

Immediate-ly 

</ 

..Gentlemen 

-ing-ly 
;ord 

acc'fc 

...y...  Gentleman 
....  Agent 

..  w  Not 

Tonight 

t/ 

.World 

...CJ>...On  the  one  hand 
...W-.  Hundred,  hand 
,.  Under 

..<x...  Certain 
Creature  ,  ace 

Accurate-ly 

<\ 
Particular-ly 

Cannot 

..A  ....Opportunity 

...7-3.  .Account,  on 
Consequent 

<: 
...:...  Plaintiff 

^ 

Behind 

.  Foundation 

..S....  Subsequent 

<0 

Movement 

/^> 

With  the  above  list,  all  the  abbreviating  word-forms  have  been  given 
necessary,  with  the  derivative  abbreviations  which  may  be  made  from 
them,  for  a  speed  of  over  300  words  a  minute,  if  well  memorised  and  used 
in  connection  with  the  other  instruction  given  in  these  lessons,  the  pres- 
ent list  being  the  shortest,  and,  in  realit)'-,  also  the  easiest  memorized, 
because  most  of  the  Half-length  Word-abbreviations  contain  nearly  the 
entire  consonant  elements  of  the  words  they  represent.  These  abbrevia- 
tions are  subject  to  the  same  plan  of  derivative  word-building  as  the  other 
list.  Thus,  the  circle-S  may  be  added  to  any  sign,  making  thoughts  of 
thought;  ing  may  be  added  to  form  establishing  from  establish;  and  combi- 
nations such  as  joining  the  signs  for  behind  and  hand  may  be  made,  as  in 
sign  269,  forming  the  phrase  behindhand,  etc.,  etc. 

Other  short-hand  authors  have  taken  the  trouble  to  compile  cum- 
brous phonographic  dictionaries,  containing  brief  forms  for  many  thou- 
sands of  English  words,  thus  conveying  to  learners  the  false  impression 
that  it  was  necessary  for  them  to  learn  innumerable  word-signs  'before 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

they  could  become  adept  at  the  art  of  'the  shorthand  writer.  The  author 
of  this  work,  therefore,  desires  to  assure  all  who  may  labor  under  such 
an  impression,  that  it  is  an  erroneous  one,  the  most  skilled  phonogra- 
phers  of  the  day  not  using  more  than  are  contained  in  these  lessons. 
And,  in  fact,  such  phonographic  dictionaries  do  not  contain  more,  their 
ten  or  twenty  thousand  outlines  being  nothing  more  than  variations  of 
the  ones  these  lessons  contain,  but  arranged  so  that  they  seem  more, 
and,  so  arranged,  require  years  to  learn,  even  by  the  few  that  can  mem- 
orize them  at  all.  In  these  lessons  we  give  all  the  root  abbreviations 
from  which  are  formed  all  the  other  words  those  useless  shorthand  dic- 
tionaries contain,  and  our  explanation  enables  the  student  to  make  them 
better  than  a  dictionary  can  show  him,  while  in  addition  he  will  have  the 
principle  at  his  fingers'  ends. 

Another  equally  useless  work  is  the  phrase  book  issued  by  other 
authors,  and  made  only  to  sell.  It  requires  years  to  memorize  phrases 
thoroughly  in  that  shape.  We  give,  in  Lessons  VIII  and  IX,  the 
simple  rules  which  govern  them  all,  and  in  those  and  Lessons  X  to  XII 
sufficient  examples  to  enable  students,  for  themselves,  to  properly  make 
any  others. 

The  Half-length  Abbreviations  would  not  conflict  with  the  word- 
signs,  even  if  both  were  made  about  the  same  size,  but  it  is  best  to  distin- 
guish them  by  writing  the  word-signs  much  smaller  than  the  half-length 
abbreviations,  as  directed  in  previous  lesson. 


THE 


J.-io.. 
.Liz. 


.o..The  cipher 

.C...A.  ........ 


__..6 

±jf.I 


...-,..16 


.L..20 

/..  30 

^...40..... 

-..60 

..i..rA... 


.O..40O.... 


-D..600.. 


.L.iooo 

..*..2OOO. 

cx.300O. 

.^4000 

— x\ 


T. 


...9000. 


.£.4,000,000 


^.3,000,000 


~-C0,000,000 


The  adoption  of  shorthand  signs  for  the  Arabic  numerals  has  been 
attempted   by  writers  on  shorthand  before  the  compilation  of  these  les- 


ioo  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

sons,  but  such  attempts  have  been  of  the  crudest  character  imaginable, 
one  author  employing  as  many  as  three  different  signs  to  represent  each 
Arabic  numeral,  all  of  which  certainly  tends  to  confuse  rather  than  en- 
lighten the  pupil,  or  save  time  for  him.  Again,  they  have  been  ob- 
jectionable from  another  reason,  that  of  being  entirely  arbitrary  in  their^ 
character,  not  a  single  symbol  being  used  which  would  phonetically  afford 
any  clew  whatever  to  its  meaning. 

In  the  list  presented  on  foregoing  page,  however,  the  author  believes, 
will  be  found  that  unity  of  character  which  is  so  important  in  a  matter 
of  this  kind. 

By  looking  carefully  over  the  numeral  list,  the  student  cannot  fail  to 
recognize  the  simplicity  of  its  arrangement  and  its  entire  legibility. 
The  figure  i  is  represented  by  its  word-abbreviation,  and  2  by  the  word- 
sign  for  its  common  name.  The  other  figures  are  each  represented  by  a 
conspicuous  consonant  element  of  their  several  names,  the  figure  3  be- 
ing a  letter  R,  4  a  letter  F,  5  a  letter  V,  6  a  letter  K,  7  a  letter  S,  8  is 
spelled  in  full,  and  9  is  a  letter  N;  10  is  spelled  in  full,  n  and  12  partly 
so,  while  the  "teens"  are  represented  as  in  13,  14,  etc.,  by  halving  the 
original  sign  to  add  the  sound  of  T,  and  concluding  with  an  N  hook;  20 
is  practically  spelled  in  full,  30  is  indicated  by  simply  halving  the  pri- 
mary letter  representing  the  numeral  3,  and  similarly  with  40,  50,  etc. 
A  small  circle-S  is  used  for  the  cypher,  because  it  n':ost  resembles  the 
unit,  and  from  this  principle  the  word  hundred  is  properly  represented  by 
a  large  Ses  circle;  thousand  is  well  represented  by  the  phonographic  con- 
sonant Ith,  and  the  letter  L  does  for  million. 

The  adding  of  the  "teens"  in  which  the  hook  is  read  after  the  halv- 
ing principle,  can  of  course,  only  be  applied  to  our  figures.  In  regular 
spelling  the  phonographer  must  read  the  hook  before  the  halving 
principle. 

At  first  students  will  be  disposed  to  fear  that  these  phonographic 
numerals  will  conflict  seriously  with  their  word-abbreviations.  But,  if 
they  persevere  in  the  use  of  them,  they  will  find  this  to  be  anything  but 
the  case,  especially  if  they  have  much  figure  work  in  which  to  make  use 
of  these  signs. 

In  writing  some  ordinal  numbers,  such  as  second,  twenty-first,  etc., 
a  full  phonographic  outline  is  preferable,  as  in  signs  6,  4,  etc.,  in  Exer- 
cise, but  where  the  name  of  the  number  ends  with  tk,  that  part  of  an 
ordinal  must  be  omitted,  or  it  will  conflict  with  the  sign  for  thoitsand. 
Compare  signs  42  and  43  in  Exercise.  Sixteenth,  written  without  the  ///, 
as  in  sign  42,  would  never  be  mistaken  for  sixteen  when  met  with  in  a 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  IOI 

sentence.  Signs  25,  34,  41,  etc.,  representing  fourth,  fifth,  sixth,  etc., 
will  be  seen  to  be  the  same  signs  as  four,  Jive,  six,  etc.,  in  the  table  of 
numerals. 

In  joining  these  phonographic  numerals  where  the  word  thousand  or 
million  are  intended,  though  omitted,  it  is  best  to  join  the  signs  in  groups, 
separating  such  groups  at  the  point  wherein  the  words  thousand  or  million 
would  have  occurred  had  they  been  spoken,  as  in  sign  74  of  Exercise. 
In  the  same  manner,  the  words  dollars,  pounds  (sterling)  and  shillings 
should  be  indicated  when  omitted,  as  in  signs  75  and  76.  But  it  is  best 
not  to  omit  those  words  in  sentences  where  the  context  would  not  indi- 
cate them.  In  book-keeping  no  numeral  junctures  whatever  are  allow- 
able, excepting  in  dates  or  prices,  as  the  columns  of  amounts  require 
the  figures  to  be  written  separately  in  order  to  add  them.  For  that 
reason,  calculations  by  multiplication,  subtraction  or  division  must  all  be 
made  by  separated  figures,  as  in  examples  77  to  80  of  Exercise. 

Other  than  the  above  exceptions,  the  more  figures  joined  the  better. 
Where  the  sign  for  thousand  would  be  difficult  of  juncture  to  a 
hooked  figure,  such  hook  is  run  into  a  circle,  as  in  signs  24  and  29,  pro- 
viding the  circle  of  straight  letters  is  placed  on  the  N-hook  side.  Such 
transformation  of  the  hook  on  curved  letters,  which  makes  them  into  a 
circle,  as  in  sign  29,  will  not  be  mistaken  for  a  cipher,  because  the  cipher 
is  only  used  separately — never  joined.  It  is  only  the  large  circle  for 
hundred  that  is  ever  joined.  The  hundred  circle  can  be  joined  upon  the 
most  convenient  side  of  either  straight  or  curved  characters,  as  in  signs 
69  to  73  in  Exercise. 

In  instances  where  the  large  circle  for  hundred  will  not  readily  join, 
that  word  can  be  represented  by  a  shaded  halved  N  of  the  Half-length 
Abbreviations,  shown  in  sign  32  in  Exercise. 

Signs  i  and  2,  3  and  4,  5  and  6,  7  and  8,  9  to  n,  etc.,  etc.,  etc.,  in 
Exercise,  are  placed  near  each  other  for  the  purpose  of  showing  the  stu- 
dent their  contrasting  outlines. 

Lest  there  should  be  any  misunderstanding  in  regard  to  the  use  of 
the  shorthand  numerals,  a  considerable  part  of  the  Exercise  of  this  lesson 
is  devoted  to  their  illustration. 

Signs  9,  10  and  n  illustrate  how  to  distinguish  between  3,  third, 
and  30.  The  first  and  last  named  are  not  apt  to  give  trouble  by  clashing, 
provided  the  halving  principle  is  carefully  observed,  but  as  some  students 
are  apt  to  wrongly  halve  the  R  of  three  to  indicate  third,  this  last  word  is 
snown  as  in  sign  10.  When  possible,  the  word  the  should  be  indicated 
by  the  letter  I,  in  junctures  with  numerals,  when  there  can  be  no  conflic. 


102  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

lion  with  a  halved  R  of  thirty,  in  instances  where  the  proper  sign  must  be 
joined.  If  joined  at  all  to  numerals,  the  should  therefore  appear  as  in  the 
phrase  the  first,  sign  13  in  Exercise,  seldom  as  in  phrase  the  second,  sign 
15,  though,  as  a  rule,  it  is  best  not  to  join  the  or  any  word  to  numerals. 

In  junctures  with  other  numerals,  the  student  should  remember  that 
30,  40,  etc.,  are  not  always  halved,  being  distinguished  from  3,  4,  etc.,  by 
sort  of  junctures  shown  in  signs  19,  20,  46,  etc.,  just  as  with  the  ordinary 
Arabic  numerals  used  in  print.  For  instance,  in  writing  the  Arabic 
numerals,  34,  75,  etc.,  one  does  not  show  the  cipher  of  the  30  or  70 
which  compose  them,  the  added  figures  4  and  5  of  34  and  75  taking 
the  place  of  the  cipher  which  would  otherwise  be  there,  and  hence,  in 
shorthand,  3  and  4  make  34,  and  7  and  5  make  75,  just  as  they  do  in  our 
common  Arabic  numbers.  To  write  a  halved  3  for  30,  and  then  add  a  5 
to  it  in  shorthand  would  be  as  misleading  and  wrong  as  to  add  the  Arabic 
figures  30  and  4,  as  they  would  make  304  instead  of  34.  So  the  student 
should  remember  that  the  numerals  3,  4,  etc.,  are  only  halved  to  indicate 
the  cipher  of  30,  40,  etc.,  and  therefore  this  should  only  be  done  when 
they  are  either  written  alone,  as  in  signs  n,  30,  etc.,  or  appear  at  the 
end  of  an  outline,  as  in  sign  72  in  Exercise.  Therefore,  remember  that 
when  the  shorthand  numerals  are  joined  together,  3  and  4  make  34,  7 
and  5  make  75,  etc.,  etc.,  none  of  the  letters  being  halved.  This  ex- 
plains the  letter  R  for  3,  of  signs  12  and  14  of  Exercise,  the  R  for  30 
being  made  full  length  because  it  has  another  letter  after  it  to  show  that 
the  R  means  30.  For  the  same  reason,  when  we  write  33,  we  should  write 
two  full-sized  letters  R,  joined  together  as  in  sign  16,  which  really  forms 
a  double-length  R.  Of  course,  when  we  want  to  write  30,000,  etc.,  the 
R  is  "plainly  shown  to  be  halved,  for  the  reason  that  it  is  there  necessary; 
but  if  it  were  34,000,  the  R  should  be  written  full-sized. 

The  lower  end  of  the  letter  S  for  7,  had  better  be  slanted  a  little  to 
the  left,  almost  like  an  Ish,  which'  will  plainly  distinguish  the  S  of  7  from 
the  V  of  5,  even  in  the  most  rapid  writing.  Care  should  be  exercised  in 
these  numerals,  as  well  as  in  any  principle  of  phonography,  but  not 
more  so,  and  if  the  halving  principle  is  observed  strictly  and  the  other' 
hints  herein  given,  the  shorthand  numerals  will  be  found  to  be  as  legible 
as  the  ordinary  figures,  and  far  more  rapid,  being,  in  fact,  the  only  plan 
by  which  a  number  of  figures  can  be  taken  verbatim  when  read  at  a 
convention,  or  occurring  in  court  cases. 

The  numeral  9  and  its  derivatives,  90  and  19,  particularly  the  two 
latter,  should  have  the  right  end  written  a  little  higher  than  the  left  end. 
as  in  sign  61.  This  will  prevent  junctures  with  other  characters  causing 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  I03 

it  to  conflict  with  the  figure  4  and  its  derivatives.  In  all  junctures 
where  you  intend  a  full-sized  figure,  be  sure  to  make  it  full-size,  and 
your  halved  characters  less  than  halved,  if  possible,  a  rule  which  is 
equally  applicable  to  any  shorthand  outline. 

The  figure  eight,  in  the  list  of  shorthand  numerals,  is  spelled  in 
full.  This  should  ajways  be  done  when  it  is  written  alone,  as  in  signs  53 
to  55,  and  if  it  is  the  first  numeral  in  a  juncture  with  other  characters, 
as  in  sign  70;  but,  when  it  is  the  second  character,  or  in  any  instance 
where  it  is  preceded  by  another  figure,  the  vowel  A  is  omitted  from  it 
and  only  the  letter  T  used  for  8.  This  adding  of  the  letter  A  to  8  and 
its  derivatives,  So  and  18,  when  written  alone,  furnishes  a  complete  plan 
of  distinction  between  the  shorthand  80  and  the  letter  A  of  our  Alpha- 
bet. Note  the  difference  between  the  outlines  in  signs  89  and  90. 

Fractions  are  sometimes  spelled  in  full,  as  in  signs  81  and  83,  but 
may  be  written,  and  should  be  ordinarily,  as  in  signs  82  and  84  to  87; 
that  is,  just  as  one  would  unite  the  common  Arabic  fractions,  omitting 
the  lines  which  separate  denominator  and  numerator  in  ordinary  English- 
Arabic  fractions,  as  such  line  is  unnecessary. 

Just  as  one  when  a  word-numeral,  occurring  alone  in  a  sentence,  is 
spelled  in  full,  as  in  sign  85  of  Lesson  VIII,  so  should  any  numeral  be 
when  alone  in  a  sentence,  nine  being  spelled  with  a  letter  N  and  hook-N 
above  the  line,  etc.,  in  such  instances. 

PROPER  NAMES  AND  INITIALS. 

The  writing  in  shorthand  of  proper  names  and  initials  being  a 
necessary  element  to  speed  in  shorthand,  since  no  person  can  write  a 
proper  name  in  long-hand  quickly  enough  to  do  verbatim  reporting,  par- 
ticular directions  are  necessary  respecting  this  important  subject  before 
concluding  the  instructions  in  these  lessons.  We,  therefore,  devote 
several  lines  of  our  Exercise  to  this,  beginning  with  sign  91.  The  list 
of  initials  pretty  thoroughly  treats  of  that  branch,  and  the  writing  of 
proper  names  was  somewhat  explained  in  an  earlier  lesson,  but  there  is 
one  point  in  particular  that  was  not  dealt  upon — viz:  the  writing  of 
vowels  disjoined  in  those  few  instances  where  it  may  be  advisable,  such 
as  in  the  name  of  Pike,  sign  91;  Peck,  sign  92;  Boyd,  sign  94,  and  in 
other  instances  shown  herein.  The  rules  which  have  been  given  for 
making  vowel  junctures  are  sufficient  for  most  purposes,  excepting  where 
the  phonetic  outline  has  been  written  without  the  visible  vowel,  in  in- 
stances where  the  writer  thought  it  unnecessary  at  the  time,  but  wherein 
the  writing  of  subsequent  word  outlines  caused  the  reporter  to  fear  they 


n\j.  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

might  clash  with  others  before  written,  and  he,  therefore,  has  thought 
it  advisable  to  turn  back  and  insert  the  vowel.  Where  this  is  desired, 
the  vowel  can  be  inserted,  as  in  the  instances  above  illustrated,  so  long 
as  it  is  placed  between  the  consonants  to  which  it  is  to  be  read,  or  at 
least  directly  after  the  consonant  which  immediately  precedes  it,  as  in 
signs  91,  92  and  94,  so  that  it  will  be  read  immediately  following  the 
proper  consonant.  In  those  instances  it  is  comparatively  easy  to  do  this, 
as  it  also  is  in  the  word  Price  in  sign  97,  but  where  the  proper  name 
written  has  been  partially  formed  by  a  hook,  and  the  vowel  is  to  be  read 
between  the  main  consonant  and  the  hook,  then  the  vowel  should  be 
struck  through  the  main  consonant,  which  will  indicate  that  it  must  be 
read  immediately  after  the  main  consonant,  and  before  the  hook,  just  as 
the  vowel  E,  struck  through  the  letter  P  in  outline  for  the  word  Pierce,  in 
sign  96,  is  read  after  the  P  and  before  the  heok  R. 

This  will  show  the  distinction  between  the  word  Price  in  sign  96,  and 
the  word  Pierce  in  sign  97,  aside  from  the  difference  in  the  vowel  sound. 

The  vowel  Ow  may  be  written  upward,  when  it  is  desired  to  write 
Hay  downwards,  but  when  Ow  is  written  downwards,  it  is  necessary  to 
write  Hay  upward.  This  is  illustrated  in  signs  106  and  107.  Many  other 
peculiarities  are  also  illustrated  in  this  Exercise  respecting  the  writing 
of  proper  names. 

A  distinction  should  be  made  in  some  titles.  For  instance,  Miss  is 
of  course  written  with  the  letter  M  and  circle  S  above  the  line,  as  in 
sign  98,  and  Mrs.  should  be  written  as  in  sign  100,  that  is,  with  a  Sez 
circle  attached  to  the  letter  M,  as  this  is  the  exact  sound  of  that  word, 
but  for  the  word  Misses,  the  plural  of  Miss,  as  it  occurs  very  seldom, 
there  should  be  a  distinct  form,  and  it  is  therefore  written  with  two 
small  circles-S  attached  to  the  letter  M,  as  in  sign  99.  This  will  clearly 
distinguish  Mrs.  from  Misses,  which  are  both  pronounced  the  same,  and 
to  which  the  context  generally  furnishes  no  key. 

The  word  Katie  is  written  several  ways  in  this  Exercise,  sign  99 
showing  it  with  a  vowel  ah  substituted  for  a  to  make  a  juncture. 

Some  easily  read  words,  names  and  titles  are  not  vocalized  either 
with  visible  vowel  or  position.  See  sign  93,  etc.,  cf  Exercise. 

All  the  substitutions  of  visible  vowels  for  each  other,  as  shown  in 
this  Exercise,  are  in  accordance  with  the  explanations  regarding  same, 
given  in  Lesson  IV,  to  which  the  student  is  referred. 

The  principle  of  spelling  the  sounds  of  a  letter  by  the  union  of 
visible  characters,  as  described  in  Lesson  III  in  regard  to  X  and  Q, 
extends  also  to  the  representation  of  all  consonants  when  it  is  desired 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


105 


to  represent  the  initials  of  people's  names,  but  not  to  the  vowels.  The 
Roman  vowels  A,  E,  I,  O  or  U,  when  such  vowels  are  used  as  the 
initials  of  personal  names,  are  represented  by  our  phonographic  visible 
vowels,  as  in  signs  98  and  104  in  Exercise.  But  the  names  of  the  Roman 
consonants,  when  pronounced,  always  possess  a  broader  sound,  and 
therefore,  when  representing  initials,  should  be  actually  spelled  with 
visible  signs,  as:  b-e,  B;  c-e,  C;  etc.,  etc.,  as  in  Exercise. 

This  spelling  of  the  sound  of  letters  when  they  arc  initials  rep- 
resenting personal  names,  gives  them  a  distinctive  appearance  and 
enables  a  reporter  always  to  recognize  an  initial  at  a  glance.  Other- 
wise, a  plain  initial  might  be  mistaken  in  hurriedly  written  phonography 
for  a  word.  The  following  is  the  complete  list: 


INITIALS. 

, 

7 

i 

"V 

V 

^ 

V 

I 

]- 

^ 

*-* 

r 

r 

0 

^ 

\- 

>-*. 

\r 

} 

4 

^ 

u 

SYLLABLE  ABBREVIATION. 

An  efficient  means  of  avoiding  some  very  cumbrous  written  forms 
is  that  of  abbreviating  the  phonographic  outlines  of  a  number  of  the 
prefixes  and  affixes  of  our  language.  And,  as  this  method  of  syllable- 
abbreviation  can  be  affected  without  the  least  sacrifice  to  legibility,  it 
becomes  a  very  important  factor  in  rapid  writing. 

All  works  on  phonography  present  this  principle,  but  as  most  of  the 
abbreviations  recommended  by  their  authors  cannot  be  joined  to  the 
rest  of  the  words  of  which  they  are  a  part,  they  therefore  fail  to  give 
any  extra  speed  in  writing.  The  time  saved  by  their  abbreviation  of 
form  is  lost  by  the  time  consumed  in  lifting  the  pen  or  pencil  from  the 
paper,  in  disjoining,  it  being  a  much  slower  method  to  write  two  dis- 
joined characters  than  even  a  half  dozen  joined  ones.  The  method 
taught  herein,  by  being  both  abbreviated  in  form  and  easy  of  juncture. 
gives  extra  speed  from  two  sources,  besides  relieving  writers  of  the  pos 


106  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

sibility,  common  to  those  old  methods,  of  mistaking  the  disjoined  por- 
tions of  a  word  for  separate  words. 

There  are,  of  course,  many  more  prefixes  and  affixes  in  use  in  our 
language  than  presented  in  the  lists  herein  explained,  but  those  not 
found  here  are  either  of  very  infrequent  occurrence,  or  are  ones  not  in 
need  of  abbreviation,  such  as  the  affixes  ly,  ness,  etc., -whose  ordinary 
phonographic  outlines  are  sufficiently  brief  in  themselves. 

PREFIXES. 

Con,  Com  or  Cog.  These  short  prefixes  (as  one  is  not  at  all  likely 
ever  to  clash  with  either  of  the  others)  are  represented  by  the  same  sign 
— the  consonant  outline  K,  which  is  joined  as  in  signs  1 1 1  to  1 18  in  Ex- 
ercise. This  use  of  the  phonographic  K  to  express  the  sounds  of  con  or 
torn,  etc.,  when  prefixes,  is  in  accord  with  the  construction  of  the  word- 
abbreviation  for  the  words  can  or  come,  which  words  the  student  will  re- 
member are  also  represented  by  the  letter  K.  When  the  syllables  con 
com  or  cog  are  not  prefixes,  but  occur  between  other  syllables  of  a  word, 
they  may  still  be  represented  as  though  prefixes,  as  in  signs  123  to  125. 
In  words  in  which  con  and  com  occur  together,  it  is  best  to  write  con  in 
full  as  in  sign  122  in  Exercise.  Accom  is  formed  by  adding  a  short-a  to 
the  letter  K,  of  the  prefix  com,  as  in  signs  119  to  121. 

Contra,  Contri,  Contro  or  Counter  are  represented  by  a  halved  K  in 
most  cases.  Signs  141  to  144.  Exceptional  instances  are  junctures 
with  the  letters  K  or  Gay  wherein  the  N  hook  is  added  to  the  prefix  as 
in  sign  145.  In  this  instance  the  part  of  the  prefix  count  is  spelled,  the 
prefix  taking  position  of  Ow. 

Circum  or  Self  are  represented  by  the  circle  S,  as  in  signs  148  and 
153.  When  the  circle  S  also  begins  the  next  syllable,  as  it  does  in  stance,, 
in  the  word  circumstance,  enlarge  the  S  circle  of  stance  to  indicate  the 
addition  of  circum,  as  in  sign  149;  write  it  within  an  initial  hook,  as  in 
sign  147. 

For  and  Fore  are  represented  the  same  as  the  word  for  is  expressed 
in  list  of  Common  Abbreviations  in  Lesson  IX — i.e.,  by  the  phono- 
graphic letter  F.  Signs  155  and  156,  this  Exercise. 

In  and  Un,  when  joined  preceding  the  circle  S,  may  be  very  con- 
veniently expressed  by  a  backward  beginning  hook,  as  in  signs  157  to  166. 
///,  as  a  word,  may  also  be  similarly  indicated.  Phrase  161  in  Exercise. 

Intel,  Inter,  Enter,  Intro  or  Under  are  represented  by  a  halved  N 
joined  as  in  signs  167  to  173. 

Magne,  Magna  and  Magni  may  be   expressed   in  a   few  words,  such 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  IQJ 

a.Sf Magnify,  magnitude,  etc.,  by  the  phonographic  consonant  M,  as  in  sign 
174  to  177. 

AFFIXES. 

Bl  ,Bly  or  Bility  are  represented  by  the  phonographic  stroke  B,  as 
in  signs  180  to  183.  Bleness,  by  joining  a  letter  N  and  circle  S  to  the 
letter  B,  as  in  sign  182. 

for  or  Pore  as  affixes,  and  Ful,  are  indicated  by  the  same  sign  as 
when  prefixes.  See  signs  186,  187  and  194  in  Exercise. 

Ful  or  Full  may  be  indicated  by  an  F  hook  to  some  words,  as  in  sign 
1 88.  N  and  a  circle  S  can  be  added  to  this  book  to  represent  fulness, 
as  in  sign  189. 

Ing,  as  an  affix,  is  represented  by  the  phonographic  letter  N,  as  in 
sign  196.  Ings  and  Ingly  are  therefore  properly  written  as  in  signs  200 
and  201.  To  some  halved  characters,  where  the  letter  N  nor  Ng  does 
not  join  well,  it  is  preferable  to  attach  a  small  horizontal  curved  line 
similar  to  the  juncture  of  short-u  and  U,  as  in  sign  203  in  Exercise.  The 
circle  S  can  be  attached  to  this  hook  when  necessary,  as  in  sign  204. 

Mental  or  Mentality  are  each  expressed  by  a  halved  M,  terminating 
with  an  N  hook,  as  in  signs  209  and  210.  Ment  is,  of  course,  written 
the  same.  See  sign  208. 

Self  and  Sameness^  as  affixes,  are  represented  by  the  same  sign  used 
for  the  prefix  self — the  circle  S.  Signs  211  to  215. 

Selves  and  Lessncss  are  represented  by  the  Ses  circle,  as  in  signs  216 
to  222  in  Exercise. 

Ship,  as  an  affix,  is  represented  by  the  phonographic  letter  Ish,  as  in 
sign  223,  etc. 

Soever  is  expressed  by  a  joined  circle  S  and  an  R.  Signs  225  to  227 
in  Exercise. 

Ted,  as  a  concluding  phonographic  syllable,  in  instances  wherein  a 
halved  letter  T  cannot  well  be  joined,  can  be  represented  by  the  double 
tick  shown  in  sign  230  in  Exercise,  such  double  tick  somewhat  resem- 
bling a  juncture  of  two  letters  Hay,  the  first  written  upwards,  and  the 
second  downward.  Ded  is  indicated  by  shading  the  downward  stroke 
of  this  tick,  as  in  sign  231.  When  ted  or  ded  can  be  spelled  out,  it  is 
done  as  in  sign  232. 

THE  USE  OF  THE  PREFIXES  AND  AFFIXES. 

In  making  use  of  the  phonographic  prefixes  and  affixes  students  are 
probably  more  apt  to  lose  sight  of  the  two  grand  principles  of  phono- 


io8  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

graphic  writing — sound-spelling  and  outline-brevity— than  in  any  other 
range  of  practice.  Hence  the  necessity  for  extra  caution.  Remember, 
the  prefix  for  com,  con  or  cog  represents  the  sounds  of  those  prefixes,  not 
simply  the  letters;  and  therefore  the  sign  for  those  prefixes  may  also 
represent  the  sounds  for  conn  or  comm,  as  in  the  word  commend,  which  is 
therefore  correctly  written,  as  in  sign  112  in  Exercise,  that  word  being 
phonographically  spelled  kom-end,  according  to  the  rule  of  brevity  in 
word-outline. 

Frequently  the  prefixes  com  or  con,  or  the  affix  ing,  may  be  alto- 
gether omitted  from  some  words,  the  context  being  generally  a  sure  in- 
dication of  their  omission.  See  signs  126  to  140  and  others  in  Exercise. 

Where  one  sign  is  used  to  express  different  prefixes  or  affixes  (as  K 
for  com,  con  or  cog,  and  B  for  ble,  bly  or  bility)  the  groups  are  those  in 
which  there  is  no  danger  of  mistaking  which  word  the  sign  is  intended 
for  at  the  time. 

The  instances  are  very  rare  wherein  words  containing  abbreviated 
prefixes  or  affixes  can  be  phrased  with  other  words;  and,  when  done,  the 
word  containing  the  affix  or  prefix  must  occupy  its  proper  place  position, 
no  matter  in  what  position  the  other  words  of  the  phrase  are  thus  com- 
pelled to  be  placed.  Furthermore,  whether  written  alone  or  in  phrases, 
all  words  containing  abbreviated  prefixes  or  affixes  take  position  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  principal  vowel  sound  contained  in  the  main  portion 
of  the  word,  not  the  vowel-sound  of  the  prefix  or  affix.  Prefixes  or 
affixes  are  only  secondary  to  the  rest  of  the  words  to  which  they  may  be 
attached,  and  are  therefore  subject  to  no  particular  position,  occupying 
simply  whatever  position  the  rest  of  the  word  may  give  them  by  their 
own  position.  For  instance,  contradict,  sign  141  in  Exercise,  is  written 
in  the  first  position  to  indicate  the  vowel  sound  of  the  syllable  diet,  thus 
compelling  contra  to  be  written  above  the  line,  even  though  the  vowel 
sounds  of  contra  are  second-place  ones.  In  brief,  the  prefixes  and 
affixes  are  to  be  treated  precisely  as  though  they  contained  no  vowel 
element  whatever.  Compare  signs  in  and  112. 

The  prefixes  in  our  language  which  are  not  given  in  abbreviated 
form  in  these  lessons  are  spelled  in  full,  and  mostly  they  are  such  simple 
ones  as  that  of  re  in  regret,  regard,  etc.,  and  these  prefixes,  like  the  others 
illustrated,  must  not  be  purposely  given  their  vowel  position,  for  the 
balance  of  the  word  is  entitled  to  the  position.  For  instance,  in  regard, 
the  main  portion  of  the  word,  the  syllable  gard,  must  have  the  position, 
as  in  sign  178,  while  gret  takes  position  as  in  sign  179.  This  dis- 
tinguishes clearly  between  those  words,  and  the  rule  must  be  observed 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  IOQ 

in  all  dealings  with  prefixes,  which  never  take  their  vowel-position  ex- 
cept by  accident,  the  rest  of  the  word  being  entitled  to  the  position. 
Were  it  not  for  this  rule,  one  could  never  distinguish  regret  from  regard, 
a  very  important  matter. 

In  some  words  it  may  be  somewhat  difficult  for  the  student  to  de- 
cide which  prefix  belongs  to  a  word — for  instance,  whether  the  prefix 
con  or  contri  should  be  written  to  the  word  contribute.  In  that  word  the 
difficulty  is  caused  by  the  last  vowel  of  contri  not  being  very  conspicu- 
ous, and  also  by  the  fact  that  tribute  being  a  word  of  itself  the  student 
is  therefore  apt  to  think  the  prefix  in  this  case  should  be  con.  This 
would  be  an  erroneous  impression,  however,  contri  being  the  proper 
prefix.  The  rule  is  to  use  the  briefest  form  consistent  with  legibility. 

PHRASE  COMBINATIONS. 

Beginning  with  signs  205,  206,  207  and  240  in  this  Exercise,  and 
ending  with  sign  307,  are  given  a  number  of  phrase  combinations,  some- 
times made  up  of  word-abbreviations,  joined  often  with  unimportant 
words  omitted,  and  sometimes  abbreviated  in  an  apparently  arbi- 
trary manner,  the  object  being  to  gain  an  outline  the  most  service- 
able for  speed  with  legibility,  they  representing,  as  a  rule,  phrases 
which  are  uttered  very  rapidly,  and  whose  outlines  in  any  other  shape 
could  not  be  written  rapidly.  They  cover  the  entire  field  of  political 
orations,  sermons,  legal  arguments,  and  work  where  the  utmost  rapid- 
ity is  absolutely  essential,  and,  as  they  represent  also  the  most  read- 
able forms,  their  position  and  outlines  are  strictly  observed  by  all  pro- 
fessional writers  of  importance,  and  should  be  learned  as  thoroughly 
and  religiously  as  any  principle  in  these  lessons,  or  the  word-abbrevia- 
tions. Be  sure,  however,  to  make  that  portion  of  them  halved  which  is 
shown  as  halved,  keeping  full-sized  portions  full-size  where  herein  shown* 
observing  carefully  their  position,  as  well  as  the  size  of  their  hooks, 
circles  and  loops.  They  are  the  best  outlines  for  these  combinations  of 
words,  look  like  nothing  else  than  what  they  are,  if  correctly  written,  and 
thus  furnish  exact  distinctions  between  each  other,  and  between  outlines 
which  are  not  illustrated  in  any  lessons,  but  which  may  happen  unawares 
in  actual  work.  They  are  of  vast  importance,  both  to  speed  and  legibility. 

Lest  students  should  imagine  that  it  is  necessary  for  professional 
phonographers  to  allow  a  speaker  to  be  a  few  words  in  advance  of  them> 
in  order  to  write  in  their  proper  position  the  kind  of  phrases  referred  to 
in  the  preceding  paragraphs  on  phrasing,  the  author  would  state  that 
such  a  condition  is  not  necessary.  With  a  rapid  speaker,  such  is  natur. 


IIO  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

ally  the  case,  and  then,  it  is  by  means  of  these  beautiful  phrase  methods 
and  abbreviations  that  a  lagging  shorthand  writer  is  enabled  to  catch 
up  with  a  speaker  momentarily  excited. 

To  further  illustrate  the  explanation  in  last  lesson  respecting  how, 
for  purposes  of  phrasing,  joined  words  are  often  written  out  of  position, 
the  student  is  referred  to  the  phrase  /  am  glad,  sign  42  in  Exercise 
to  last  lesson,  wherein  the  word  glad,  although  properly,  according  to  its 
vowel,  belonging  on  the  line,  is  written,  in  such  combination,  above  the 
line,  because  its  position  when  joined  is  not  important,  and  the  word  am 
must  have  the  first  position  or  it  will  clash  with  may,  in  most  instances. 
This  will  explain  why  the  word  course,  in  the  phrase  of  course,  is  written 
above  the  line  in  sign  47  in  the  Exercise  to  last  lesson,  it  being  neces- 
sary for  the  word  of  to  have  proper  position.  Signs  48,  56  and  64  of 
Exercise  to  last  lesson,  and  which  occur  immediately  under  each  other 
in  that  Exercise,  illustrate  this  rule  still  more  plainly.  In  each  of  those 
phrases  the  word  cases  occurs,  and  each  time  in  a  different  position. 
In  the  first  instance,  cases  is  written  above  the  line,  because  the  word 
in,  of  that  phrase  in  all  cases,  must  have  first  position.  In  the  third  in- 
stance, sign  64  of  the  Exercise  to  last  lesson,  cases  is  in  the  third  position 
because  the  word  some  of  that  phrase  in  some  cases,  must  be  written 
under  the  line  or  it  will  clash  with  same,  sign  56,  Exercise  to  last  lesson. 

Similar  instances  will  be  found  in  this  lesson,  as  in  sign  244,  Exer- 
cise to  this  lesson,  wherein,  in  the  phrase  Son  of  God,  the  word  God  which 
when  alone  is  written  in  first  position,  is,  in  sign  244  of  this  lesson,  writ- 
ten in  the  third  position  under  the  line,  because  the  word  Son,  to  be 
read,  must  have  that  position. 

OMITTED    WORDS. 

One  of  the  most  frequently  occurring  words  in  the  English  language 
is  the  word  to,  and,  as  it  requires  almost  as  much  time  to  write  as  a 
much  longer  word,  the  author,  early  in  his  professional  experience, 
adopted  a  method  by  which  to  may  frequently  be  indicated  without  be- 
ing written.  This  is  done  by  writing  a  succeeding  word  near  the  lower 
portion  of  the  word  immediately  preceding  to  in  a  phrase.  See  signs  235 
to  237  in  Exercise. 

When  the  word  to  begins  a  sentence,  above  plan  does  not,  of  course, 
apply,  the  word  to,  as  the  initiatory  word  of  any  sentence,  being  written 
as  in  the  List  of  Word-Signs. 

The  oft  recurring  word  of  may  be  similarly  indicated  by  writing  the 
succeeding  word  near,  but  towards  the  upper  portion  of  the  preceding 
outline,  as  with  signs  238  and  239. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  in 

Neither  to  nor  <?/,  however,  should  ever  be  invisibly  indicated  this 
way,  save  where  the  words  between  which  they  occur  can  occupy  their 
proper  position,  with  regard  to  the  Jine  of  writing. 

In  some  instances,  as  in  such  phrases  as  are  represented  by  signs 
240  to  251  of  this  Exercise,  the  indication  of  of  or  of  the  need  not  be 
considered,  the  other  words  of  the  phrase  being  written  joined  as  if 
there  were  no  #/or  of  the  in  the  phrase. 

In  phrases  represented  by  signs  253  to  271  and  277  to  282,  etc., 
[etc.,  other  words  can  be  omitted  without  indication  or  without  des- 
troying legibility,  their  outlines  being  distinctive  of  themselves  and  not 
clashing  with  any  others.  Such  outlines  are  really  phrase-abbrevia- 
tions and  should  be  accepted  as  such. 

PUNCTUATION. 

Professional  shorthand  writers  punctuate  by  leaving  spaces.  Others 
more  precise,  make  use,  in  particular  work,  of  signs  which  cannot  clash 
with  their  phonographic  symbols.  The  vowel  indication  of  other 
methods  of  shorthand  writing  make  a  substitution  of  extraordinary 
punctuational  signs  a  necessity  when  punctuation  is  desired,  but  the  uni- 
formity of  the  word-building  of  Haven's  Practical  Phonography  permits 
the  use  of  all  ordinary  punctuation  marks  except  the  dash,  the  marks  of 
parenthesis  and  the  hyphen.  The  dash  is,  therefore,  represented  by  a 
short  waved  line,  the  parenthesis  by  brackets  and  the  hyphen  by  two 
small  parallel  lines.  See  sentence  of  sign  314  in  Exercise. 

The  foregoing  remarks  apply  solely  to  work  done  at  leisure  (busi- 
ness memoranda,  etc.),  there  being,  of  course,  no  time  in  actual  report- 
ing for  any  punctuation  marks  whatever.  Punctuation  at  time  of  re- 
porting is  done  entirely  by  spacing,  a  space  of  about  an  inch-and-a-half 
serving  for  a  period,  a  space  of  somewhat  less  than  an  inch  doing  duty 
for  all  the  other  ordinary  marks,  the  hyphen  not  being  indicated  at  all. 
All  new  paragraphs  are  commenced  one  inch  from  the  left  hand  margin 
of  the  paper  written  upon,  questions  commencing  one-and-one-half 
inches  from  same  margin,  the  other  lines  of  writing  all  commencing 
very  near  left-hand  margin. 

REPEATED  WORDS. 

When  a  speaker  repeats  the  same  phrase  several  times  in  a  sentence, 
the  phonographer  may  make  use  of  an  extra  long  waved  line  to  denote 
the  repeated  words  in  their  re-occurrence  instead  of  re-writing  the 
words.  See  sentence  shown  by  sign  318  in  Exercise. 


H2 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


XII. 


£.b.  J0. 

J.To. 


•%^_ 

f  7T 

)  lx 


r. 


4y,  £&?.  .49.^,  JZ).  J.  .  JZJ 


%  o  Q  _~^  c 

^  -  ~  —  " 


So 


c    I 


^^jie. 


{.^.ios^ 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  Ir 

KEY  XII. 

i,  one;  2,  first;  3,  twenty-one;  4,  twenty- first;  5,  two;  6,  second;  7, 
twenty-two;  8,  twenty-second;  9,  three;  10,  third;  n,  thirtieth;  12,  thirty- 
first;  13,  the  first;  14,  thirty-second;  15,  the  second;  16,  thirty-three;  17, 
thirty-third;  18,  the  third;  19,  thirty-fourth;  20,  thirty-fifth;  21,  thirty 
thousand;  22,  thirty  hundred;  23,  thirteenth;  24,  thirteen  thousand;  25, 
fourth;  26,  four  thousand;  27,  four  hundred;  28,  fourteenth;  29,  fourteen 
thousand;  30,  fortieth ;  31,  forty  thousand;  32,  forty  hundred;  33,  forty 
hundred  thousand;  34,  fifth;  35,  five  hundred;  36,  five  thousand;  37, 
fifteenth;  38,  fifteen  hundred;  39,  fiftieth;  40,  fifty  thousand;  41,  sixth;  42, 
sixteenth;  43,  sixteen  thousand;  44,  sixtieth;  45,  seventh;  46,  seventy-five; 
47,  fifty-five;  48,  seventeenth;  49,  seventeen  hundred;  50,  seventieth;  51, 
seventy  thousand;  52,  seven  thousand;  53,  eighth;  54,  eightieth;  55, 
eighteenth;  56,  ninth;  57,  908;  58,  980;  59,  918;  60,  919;  61,  nineteenth; 
62,  19,000;  63,  nine  hundred;  64,  ninetieth;  65,  tenth;  66,  eleventh;  67, 
twelfth;  68,  hundredth;  69,  hundred  thousand;  70,  805;  71,  508;  72,  430; 
73,  403;  74,  34,569;  75,  84.59;  76,  £9.  3s.  6d.;  77,  684)5,917,320(8,651  1-19 

5,472 

80,     79,685  4,453 

1,423  4,104 
78,     246         79,     29,468 

359                  15,379                     239,055  3,492 

178                                              1,593,70  3,420 

14,089  31,864,0  

783                                          79,685  720 

no  i 

DO* 

113,381,755 

36       1 
36)— 

684      19 

Si,  half;  82,  1-2;  83,  quarter;  84,  1-4;  85,  3-4;  86,  7-8;'  87,'  5-18;  88,  Box 
18;  89,  Box  80;  90,  Drawer  A;  91,  H.  V.  Pike;  92,  Charles  G.  R.  Peck;  93, 
Sir  Robert  Beale;  94,  J.  George  Boyd,  Esq.;  95,  Mr.  Henry  X.  Train;  96, 
Alexander  S.  Pierce;  97,  Messrs.  B.  &  F.  Z.  Price;  98,  Miss  Katie  I. 
Coombs;  99,  Misses  Sarah  and  Katie  Y.  Marr;  100,  Mrs.  Louisa  N.  Tott; 
101,  Anthony  T.  W.  Shirley;  102,  Island  of  Cuba;  103,  Commodore  Coots; 
104,  Ada  O.  L.  Dawn;  105,  Teresa  M.  Q.  Chawter;  106,  Maria  E.  C.  Howe; 
107,  Sophia  P.  Howe;  108,  Isaac  D.  Hugg;  109,  Frank  K.  Stowe;  no,  Ger- 
trude U.  Hoover;  in,  command;  112,  commend;  113,  compassion;  114, 
concurrent;  115,  confession;  116,  confuse;  117,  confusion;  118,  cognate; 
1 1 o.  accommodate;  120,  accommodation;  121,  accompany;  122,  concomi- 
tant; 123,  decompose;  124,  misconstrue;  125,  unaccompanied:  126,  com- 
mence; 127,  commenced;  128,  commences;  129,  complete;  130,  comple- 
tion; 131,  consider;  132,  consideration;  133,  considerate;  134,  constituent; 
135,  constitute;  136,  constitution;  137,  recognize;  138,  recognition; 
139,  recommend;  140,  recommendation;  141,  contradict;  142,  contribute; 
143,  contribution;  144,  controvert;  145,  counteract;  146,  counterfeit; 
147,  circumflex;  148,  circumjacent;  149,  circumstance;  150,  circum- 
stances; 151,  self-evident;  152,  self-esteem;  153,  selfish;  154,  forfeit; 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


y..  160..... 461 ytf/e-zrx-S.  *6 

k>       /jf 

j£Q  ^~4    fyfi 

..^l/W.™*  ry 

""^t 

6^J 

23<i?.??V-'234X.e. 
J?.*43..4s*^4 

\o  f 

.^5J.rr^— t.Z66. Z6r.\s*>  26f. 269.^, 

ww  <5~^_ 

C^-s-*-?0--^-^*  &•*£*•£•• 

V>'          'i/    <0"f^*  °    'Ui  <h 

v  <      ~^ ""^- 

.t?21..x ^.-..^  -31Z \tX .6, 

c          n>    ~]  ^^VA^.  I  °3  p 

~  b  \ 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY.  U^ 

155,  forswear;  150,  forewarned;  157,  in  (the)  experience;  158,  inexperienced; 
159,  instrumental;  160,  insult;  161,  in  seeming;  162,  in  as  many  as  possible; 
163,  unseemly;  164,  unselfish;  165,  unstrung;  166,  unscrew;  167,  entertain; 
168,  interest;  169,  introduce;  170,  intelligent;  171,  intellectual;  172,  under- 
stand; 173,  understood;  174,  magnesia;  175,  magnify;  176,  magnificence; 
177,  magnanimous;  178,  regard;  179,  regret;  180,  nobly;  181,  feeble;  182, 
feebleness;  183,  unstability;  184,  whatever;  185,  whoever;  186,  therefor-e; 
187,  wherefore;  188,  careful;  189,  carefulness;  190,  doubtful;  191,  faithful- 
ness; 192,  powerful;  193,  truthful-ly;  194,  useful;  195,  usefulness;  196, 
beginning;  197,  doing;  198,  seeing;  199,  racings;  200,  musings;  201,  know- 
ingly; 202,  owing;  203,  building;  204,  spreadings;  205,  everlasting;  206, 
everlasting  life;  207,  everlasting  love;  208,  supplement;  -209,  fundamental; 
210,  instrumentality;  211,  himself;  212,  myself;  213,  itself;  214,  yourself; 
215,  gladsomeness;  216,  yourselves;  217,  themselves;  218,  of  ourselves;  219, 
to  ourselves;  220,  by  ourselves;  221,  carelessness;  222,  thoughtlessness;  223, 
courtship;  224,  friendship;  225,  wheresoever;  226,  whensoever;  227,  whoso- 
ever; 228,  whosesoever;  229,  fellowship;  230,  dated;  231,  dreaded;  232, 
freighted;  233,  voted;  234,  plentitude;  235,  not  to  call;  236,  right  to  the 
last;  237,  sensitive  to  the  touch;  238,  habits  of  birds;  239,  efforts  of 
the  press;  240,  Kingdom  of  Heaven;  241,  Kingdom  of  Christ;  242,  Church 
of  Christ;  243,  Throne  ot  Grace;  -244,  Son  of  God;  245,  Word  of  God;  246, 
Works  of  God;  247,  choice  of  the  people;  248,  member  of  the  press;  249, 
members  of  the  Legislature;  250,  members  of  Congress;  251,  members  of 
Parliament;  252,  not  to  be;  253,  not  to  have  been;  254,  little  by  little; 
255,  insult  upon  insult;  256,  in  the  world;  257,  on  account  of  the  fact;  258,  on 
the  one  hand;  259,  on  the  other  hand;  260,  on  either  hand;  261,  on  the 
contrary;  262,  more  or  less;  263,  every  one  of  us;  264,  off  and  on;  265, 
again  and  again;  266,  around  and  around;  267,  hand  in  hand;  268,  under- 
hand; 269,  behind-hand;  270,  some  one  or  other;  271,  somehow  or  other; 
272,  as  well  as;  273,  as  good  as;  274,  as  great  as;  275,  as  soon  as;  276,  as 
soon  as  possible;  277,  as  a  matter  of  course;  278,  as  a  matter  of  fact;  279, 
the  best  and  worst;  280,  the  first  and  second;  281,  the  first  and  last;  282,  the 
first  and  least;  283,  the  first  thing;  284,  the  first  subject;  285,  the  first  position; 
286,  in  the  first  place;  287,  in  the  second  place;  288,  in  the  third  place; 
289,  in  the  next  place;  290,  in  the  last  place;  291,  in  the  least  place;  292, 
at  least;  293,  at  last;  294,  utilized;  295,  has  met;  296,  at  first;  297,  at 
length;  298,  at  the  rate  of;  299,  at  any  rate;  300,  at  all  times;  301,  at  all 
events;  302vat  the  same  time;  303,  at  the  present  time;  304,  between  them; 
305,  although;  306,  could  not;  307,  A  creature  of  God;  308,  Gentlemen 
throughout;  309,  To-night  the  beauty  of  that  heavenly  body  will  be 
particularly  noticeable;  310,  According  to  custom  the  world  means  the 
people;  311,  The  establishment  is  not  in  the  nature  of  a  corporation;  312, 
An  accurate  use  of  words  is  indispensable  to  the  orator;  313,  Begin  no  new 
movement  without  quite  a  good  deal  of  proper  thought;  314,  The  foundation 
(the  stone-work)  under  the  house  was  poor — its  consequent  fall  was  about 
certain;  315,  Opportunities  must  be  seized  immediately,  if  at  all— after  they 
pass,  it  is  too  late;  316,  The  plaintiff  gave  subsequent  testimony  which  aston- 
ished the  hundred  opposing  witnesses;  317,  The  agent  is  certainly  a  gentle- 
man— I  cannot  account  for  his  action  toward  you  to-night;  318,  They  were 
once  the  conquerors  of  the  East — they  were  once  the  keepers  of  the  Shekinah. 


n6  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

REVIEW  EXERCISES. 

Twenty  pages,  (commencing  with  page  nS  and  ending  with  pr.ge 
137)  are  herein  devoted  to  reviews  of  the  principles  contained  in 
the  preceding  lessons,  by  means  of  words  and  phrases  for  the  most  part 
different  from  any  found  in  the  lessons  themselves.  No  new  principles 
are  introduced,  as  the  whole  art  is  clearly  and  thoroughly  set  forth  in 
the  lessons,  but  as  students  sometimes  learn  an  outline  by  sight  alone, 
with  no  regard  to  the  principles  contained  in  same,  the  new  words  and 
phrases  given  in  these  Review  Exercises  will  show  the  student  his  or 
her  weak  points,  particularly  if  they  are  used  as  follows: 

Before  looking  at  the  shorthand  outlines  on  any  review  page,  look 
only  at  the  printed  key  on  page  opposite  the  review  shorthand  plate, 
and  write  the  printed  words  and  phrases  in  your  own  way.  Then,  when 
you  have  written  a  full  page,  compare  your  shorthand  with  the  plate 
and  your  weak  points  will  appear. 

If  you  have  a  companion  or  teacher  to  read  them  to  you,  so  much 
the  better,  but  do  not  omit  writing  any  word  given  you,  no  matter  if 
you  think  you  do  not  know  how  to  write  it.  Write  some  outline,  if  it 
is  only  done  by  spelling  the  word  or  phrase  phonetically  by  the  aid  of 
the  shorthand  alphabet.  If  you  know  the  shorthand  alphabet,  you 
can  make  some  kind  of  an  outline  with  which  to  make  a  comparison. 

The  Review  Exercises  will  not  enable  the  student  to  neglect  the 

o 

reviewing  of  the  lessons  on  preceding  pages.  Not  at  all.  The  lesson 
exercises  must  be  gone  over  and  over  again,  until  every  word  in  those 
lessons  can  be  correctly  written  and  without  hesitation,  from  dicta- 
tion, the  correctness  being  provable  only  by  comparison  with  the  les- 
son key  in  each  case.  In  fact,  absolute  perfection  in  the  lessons  is-the 
surest  way  to  get  these  Review  Exercises  correctly,  for  the  Review 
Exercises  are  merely  tests  of  the  student's  knowledge  of  the  preceding 
lessons.  Lesson  and  Review  Exercises  help  each  other,  but  neither 
can  be  used  instead  of  both,  and  perfection  in  both  is  very  necessary. 
The  Review  Exercises,  plates  and  keys,  are  lettered  consecutively 
from  A  to  K,  (excluding  I),  and  the  words  and  phrases  number  from  I 
to  200  on  each  plate.  In  addition,  down  the  centre  of  each  plate  will 
be  seen  heavy  black  figures  1  to  25.  Those  black  figures  show  the 
number  of  lines  on  each  plate,  but  that  is  not  their  object.  Primarily* 
they  are  for  the  assistance  of  teachers  in  reviewing  students.  For  in- 
stance, sometimes  students  are  apt  to  memorize  review  words  and 
phrases  in  the  order  given  in  the  Exercises,  and  a  teacher  might  wish 
to  ascertain  this.  In  such  a  case,  instead  of  reading  line  for  line  across 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


117 


the  printed  page,  the  teacher  could  take  only  the  first 
word  of  each  line  of  the  printed  key  from  top  to  bot- 
tom of  pa.ge;  then  the  second  word  of  each  line  of 
printed  key,  same  way;  next  the  third  word  of  each 
printed  line;  lastly,  the  fourth  word  vof  each  line — 
which  would  finish  a  printed  key  page,  there  being 
just  four  words  in  each  line  of  printed  page,  fifty  lines 
to  the  page,  or  twice  as  many  lines  on  printed  page 
as  on  shorthand  page  plate.  When  the  first  word  on 
each  line  of  printed  key  page  is  used,  the  teacher  will 
find,  as  shown  in  the  little  illustration  opposite,  that 
he  or  she  has  read  one  word  on  each  side  of  the 
black  figures  in  centre  of  the  shorthand  review  plates, 
and  is  thus  provided  with  a  perfect  check  upon  a 
student's  knowledge,  the  two  sorts  of  numbering  of 
the  lines  making  possible  the  creation  of  a  variety  of  ways  of  dictation. 
A  very  important  principle,  which  is  illustrated  in  signs  103  and  104 
on  page  127  of  our  Review  Exercises,  is  made  by  employing  the  princi. 
pie  of  substituting  short-i  where  long  I  will  not  join,  even  when  the 
I  is  the  pronoun  and  not  a  letter  of  a  word. 

In  Lesson  IV  of  Part  II  of  this  book,  there  are  shown  illustrations 
of  how  this  is  done  in  such  proper  names  as  Pine,  wherein  the  short-i  is 
shaded  to  indicate  the  substitution  of  that  letter  for  the  sign  for  long  I 
where  that  will  not  join  and  where  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  have  the 
long  sound  indicated.  It  is  even  more  necessary  in  phrasing,  to  join 
the  pronoun  I  to  other  words,  because  it  is  so  natural  for  the  speaker 
to  run  those  words  together  in  pronouncing  such  phrases.  Therefore, 
in  such  sentences  as  I  saw,  I  asked,  etc.,  the  student  can  join  the  short 
sign  for  i,  shaded  to  indicate  the  pronoun  I. 

It  is  the  desire  of  the  author  to  have  students  possess  a  self-reliance 
which  will  enable  them  to  put  down  outlines  without  stopping  to  criti- 
cise whether  or  not  they  are  the  best.  There  are  words  which  are  illus- 
trated in  the  lessons,  such  3&.read,  write,  etc.,  which  must  always  have  a 
certain  form  or  position,  but  aside  from  such  instances,  students  should 
feel  unhampered  in  the  writing  of  words,  so  long  as  they  write  strictly 
by  sound.  Students  may  find,  in  some  of  the  plates  of  this  book,  that 
the  same  word  is  written  in  two  or  more  different  ways.  This  is  due  to  a 
difference  in  treatment  made  necessary  by  the  occasion — that  is,  words 
are  treated  differently  in  some  phrases  than  in  others,  or  than  they 
would  be  when  not  phrased.  If  a  writer,  when  taking  notes,  fears  that 
a  certain  word  will  not  be  legible  abbreviated,  and  has  time  to  vocalize 
it,  this  is  best  done;  but  when  the  utmost  rapidity  is  necessary,  words 
should  be  written  as  briefly  as  possible,  consistent  with  legibility.  Of 
course,  the  greatest  speed  is  obtained  by  using  ths  briefest  outlines. 


Ii8  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

REVIEW  EXERCISE  A. 

I,  ought;  2,  galley;  3,  women;  4,  In  the  United  States  District  Couit; 
5,  United  States;  6,  attains;  7,  plaintiff's  machine;  8,  noses; 
9,  twelve;  10,  which  ought  to  have;  n,  yell;  12,  would  a; 

13,  dreaded;  14,  appealed;  15,  shadow;  16,  to  be  there; 

17,. learn;  18,  stepped;  19,  for  it  is       known;  20,  block; 

21,  memorandum;  22,  neighborhood;  23,  pussy;  24,  languish; 

25,  missions;  26,  entirely;  27,  check;  28,  testamentary; 

29,  archangel;  30,  jointed;  31,  tooth;  32,  in  (the)  experience; 

33,  long;  34,  fantasm;  35,  maxims  of  the  age;  36,  also; 

37,  union;  38,  such  will  have  it;  39,  bloom;  40,  explain; 

41,  somebody;  42,  vicious;  43,  cheer;  44,  president's  message; 

45,  twentieth;  46,  attained;  47,  Terry;  48,  denominations; 

49,  juvenile;  50,  averted;  51,  money;  52,  contraband; 

53,  over;  54,  strict;  55,  wound;  56,  we  might  not  have  been; 

57,  able;  58,  putative;  59,  you  must  have;  60,  legacy; 

61,  intelligent;  62,  your  favor  of  recent  date  received;  63,  wasp;  64, 

65,  nail;  66,  we  were;  67,  void;  68,  delinquent;  [double; 

69,  came;  70,  sprinkle;  71,  secret;  72,  Trinitarianism; 

73,  been;  74,  and  then;  75,  drive;  76,  I  think  we  would; 

77,  on  either  hand;  78,  mortuary;  79,  such  are  to  have;  80,  gloss; 

81,  G  (the  initial);  82,  by  ourselves;  83,  cured;  84,  fixture; 

85,  &  (and);  86,  prancing;  87,  lashed;  88,  it  may  require; 

89,  it;  90,  impugned;  91,  refer;  92,  gubernatorial; 

93,  doctor;  94,  much  are;  95,  for  he  was  the;  96,  minute; 

97,  self-evident;  98,  New  Jerusalem;  99,  ended;  100,  leisure; 
101,  our;  102,  taught;   103,  as  is;  104,  ventilate; 
105,  liberty;  106,  anybody;  107,  broke;  108,  chronology; 
109,  safer;  no,  swooned;  in,  psalm;  112,  paralytic; 
113,  short-oo;  1 14,  emigrate;  115,  charm;  116,  inconsiderate; 
117,  give;  118,  service;  119,  doubt;  120,  temptation; 
121,  has;  122,  holiest;  123,  conquered;  124,  yore; 
125,  Oi;  126,  sitter;   127,  eyes;    128,  paragraph; 
129,  justification;  130,  madder;   131,  soon;   132,  defective; 
133,  assure;  134,  noisiest;  135,  great  extent;  136,  group; 
137,  until;   138,  does  a;   139,  lady;   140,  microcosm; 
141,  cannot;   142,  we  will;  143,  essay;   144,  as  much  as; 
145,  lore;  146,  tosses;  147,  flow;    148,  brilliant; 
149,  Mr.;   150,  anything;  151,  magnanimously;  152,  guilt; 
153,  much;  154,  you  will;  155,  twain;   156,  influential; 
157,  principal;  158,  altitudes;  159,  been  able  to;  160,  legal; 
161,  specially;   162,  ambition;  163,  cases;  164,  you  must  not; 
165,  through;  166,  tell  of  jt;  167,  empty;  168,  mannered; 
169,  truth;  170,  save  us;  171,  words;    172,  compulsion; 
173,  you;  174,  whereby;  175,  ought  to  have  been;   176,  mounds, 
177,  would;  178,  tickle;   179,  are;   180,  structure; 
iSi.well;  182,  mocker;    183,  snow;   1.84,  direction; 
185,  Jesus;   186,  whereat;   187,  and  will  they;   188,  inside; 
189,  stickler;  190,  occurred;  191,  favor;  192,  watchfulness; 
193,  strength;  194,  one  or  the  other;  195,  wan;  196,  paraphrase; 
IQ7,  A;   198,  and  have;   199,  Sarah;  200,  discriminate. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


up 

—I 


REVIEW    EXERCISI  A. 


.^ 2..—J 3.. 4. 

.?.[..  ..10 J.. U..C... 


;*£./...  JV....X...4*  .....  : 


.. 

i 

* 


•105.. 


\        N~^      *\ 

..  »,  10&..:...lQ..\  _ 


../. 

. 
1 

..  f  .../- 


3 
4 
5 

6 

7 
81 
9 
YO 


16 

11 
IS 
19 
ZO 
21 
ZZ 


24 
23 


.1* 


1 

* 


.....  y. 


.  ......  ^..^...«».\.    .  ...4.0 

sT>  V-p 

L  .....  4-6..  3  .....  4#K  ;.* 


..(,9 
..77.  ..... 


..93..  ....94-..  7..  ...^^.. 


.  7.. 


.C 

»... 
\ 


.I9f. 


-^Lc-N.  .  M^  ^53\  ..64..  I.. 
°V  o-        T        N. 

e 


..96  .....  .  [.. 


.*^. 


.  ./*. 


92      ^_9 
'^ 


i?o  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

REVIEW  EXERCISE  B. 

1.  was  it;  2;  hunger-ry;  3,  at  the  present  moment;  4,  felt; 
5,  signature;  6,  how;  7,  get;  8,  lam  in  receipt  of  your  favor  of  the  I3tb 
9,  Rem;  10,  internal  revenue;  11,  earn;  12,  tirade;  [instant; 

13,  of;  14,  mitred;  15,  such  had  not;  16,  such  ought  not; 

17,  danger;   18,  lustrous;  19,  blood;  20,  suppression; 

21,  without;  22,  signed;  23,  combine;  24,  combination; 

25,  moral;  26,  peopled;  27,  truly  yours;  28,  listen; 

29,  usual;  30,  trainer;  31,  yielded;  32,  corruption; 

33,  scripture;   34,  yoke;  35,  it  will  have;  36,  it  will  have  had; 

37,  this;  38, complied;  39,  scrawl;  40,  deflective; 

41,  three  thousand;  42,  up  the;  43,  sinner;  44,  profitable-y; 

45,  immediately;  46,  bankrupt;  47,  suffer;  48,  considerable-y; 

49,  difficult;  50,  defiance;  51,  whilst;    52,  such  will  have; 

53,  generation;  54,  thinks  his  the;  55,  all  of;  56,  trounces; 

57,  punishment;  58,  welfare;  59,  knelt;  60,  peroration; 

61,  for-four-th;  62,  continue;  63,  masses;  64,  Jewish  Church; 

65,  wire;  66,  golden;  67,  weep;  68,  fugitives; 

69,  strange;  70,  versify;  71,  versification;  72,  versificative; 

73,  author;  74,  I  think  not  in;  75,  hopes;  76,  attended; 

77,  gentleman;  78,  plenary;  79,  winter;  80,  preliminary; 

81,  yes  sir;  82,  treasure;  83,  slender  enough;  84,  to  our; 

85,  X  (the  initial);  85,  can  the;  87,  I  must;  88,  rather  than; 

89,  dollar;  90,  tell  it;  91,  switch;  92,  membership; 

93,  philanthropy;  94,  smoother;  95,  you  do;  96,  description; 

97,  races;  98,  cabinet;  99,  hasten;  100,  philanthropic; 
101,  him;  102,  perfect;  103,  perfected;  104.  perfection; 
105,  quit;  106,  lads;  107,  something  else;  108,  something  less; 
109,  stopper;  no,  expert;  ill,  ninny;   112,  you  can  be; 
113,  particularly;  114,  accession;  115,  accusation;  116,  acquisitions; 
117,  wing;  1 18,  contract;  119,  lifter;  120,  promulgation; 
121,  acknowledge;  122,  cistern;   123,  mounts;  124,  disability; 
125,  influence;  126,  for  the;  127,  fault;  128,  which  were; 
129,  Mack  (proper  name);  130,  area;  131,  tinner;  132,  subscribe; 
133,  organ;  134,  dangers;  135,  creep;  136,  redemption; 
137,  eternity;  138,  consistency;  139,  consisted;  140,  consistent; 
141,   themselves;  142,  explore;  143,  ladies;  144,  partnership; 
145,  man's;  146,  strain;  147,  airs;  148,  such  have; 
149,  have;  150,  hoof;  151,  recollect;  152,  recollection; 
153,  about;  154,  sources;  155,  convenient;  156,  taste; 
157,  accurately;  158,  captives;  159,  we  may;  160,  reflective; 
161,    short-i;  162,  polled;  163,  exaggerate;  164,  exaggerative; 
165,  M  (the  initial);   166,  definite;   167,  attune;  168,  physiology; 
169,  different;  I/O,  coasts;  i/i,  is  in;  172,  not  to  do; 
173,  established;   174,  emphatic;  175,  leaper;  176,  embarrassing; 
177,  spreadings;  178,  take  a;  179,  usury;  180,  have  them; 
181,  then;  182,  consist;  183,  writer;  184,  Christianity; 
185,  important;  186,  fairy;  187,  suppressed;  188,  neglect; 
189,  poster;  190,  give  the;  191, Viewed;  192,  there  can  no; 
193,  behind;  194,  connive;  195,  I  fear  you;  196,  accuse; 

197,  use  (the  use);  198,  here;  199,  astronomy;  200,  astronomical; 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


121 


REVIEW    EXERCISE   B. 


...........  IS  .......  16 


Zi  .....  ££....23...  ..£4.  .T 


1.^..  *6^S  -  /^..  4.......  48:. 


.X...43  ........ 


.3L  ......  #.£  .....  .52  /  ....... 


^  ____  6-^....^/..^3/r^)... 


..70\V   O  ......  .^,..  ../.. 


. . . .  .to 61. .  fc  i.  o  J 


O 

~7 

./  ..1ZZ,.»..... 


Q.  I 

_../sr.  L   .1 


122  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

REVIEW  EXERCISE  C. 

I,  racings;  2,  open;  3,  may  it  please  your  honor;   4,  exstacy;' 
5,  who;  6,  candle;  7,  clay;  8,  in  the  popular  acceptation  of  the  term, 
9,  will;  10,  learned;  n,  woman;  12,  unseasoned; 

13,  chanced;   14,  cannot  have  been;  15,  for  a;  16,  homeless; 

17,  on  the  one  hand;  18,  stands;  19,  thee;  20,  yours  of  thegth  instant 

21,  glory;  22,  solution;  23,  store;  24,  commission;  [at  hand; 

25,  body;  26,  parapet;  27,  I  shall  not  know;  28,  Walter; 

29,  minimum;  30,  distinct;  31,  any  one;  32,  we  may  not  be; 

33,  eleven;  34,  is  in  their;  35,  offer;  36,  portrait; 

37,  addition;  38,  compiled;  39,  we  met;  40,  wonder  who  can; 

41,  government;  42,  Gertrude;  43,  you  have  been;  44,  reader; 

45,  short-a;  46,  I  cannot  do  that;  47,  tried;  48,  Prussia; 

49,  home;  50,  dinner;  51,  amuse;  52,  there  would  (had)  not; 

53,  far;  54,  causes;  55,  precedent;  56,  president; 

57,  withal;  58,  Kentucky;  59,  to  our;  60,  objectionable; 

OI,  utilize;  62,  welcome;  63,  watch;  64,  defendant's  machine; 

65,  cessation;  66,  Atkinson;  67,  judge;  68,  churchyard; 

69,  accord;  70,  you  shall  have;  71,  school;  72,  delivery; 

73,  began;  74,  purity;  75,  Annie;  76,  I  think  you  must  have; 

77,  forewarned;  78,  governed;  79,  latter;  80,  transitorial; 

81,  belong;  82,  ends;  83, "denominated;  84,  denomination; 

85,  I;  86,  reproved;  87,  which  will  not;  88,  virtue; 

89,  mill;  90,  lad;  91,  irregularly;  92,  irregularity; 

93,  advantage;  94,  fled;  95,  proportion;  96,  preparation; 

97,  up;  98,  properly;  99,  proper;  100,  prepare; 
101,  movement;  102,  stout;  103,  stated;  104,  constituted; 
105.  member;  106,  wealthy;  107,  sways;   108,  corruptive; 
109,  spree;  no,  no  thing;  in,  apart;  112,  said  to  have; 
113,  your;  114,  .in  this;  115,  fully;  116,  procession; 
117,  other;  118,  have  it;  119,  stove;  120,  may  there; 
121,  yes;  122,  compel;  123,  recollected;   124,  swine; 
125,  (Q)  the  initial;  126,  phonographic;  127,  renew  it;  128,  locker; 
129,  contribute;  130,  clew;  131,  appliance;  132,  compliance; 
133,  external;  134,  arise;  135,  evangelic;  136,  evangelize; 
137,  business;  138,  subtle;  139,  favorable;  140,  feud; 
141,  can;  142,  concern;  143,  concerning;  144,  concerned; 
145,  out;  146,  polish;  147,  owned;  148,  everywhere; 
149,  advertisements;  150,  hose;  151,  driven;  152,  undertaken; 
I-J3,  natured;   154,  humanely;  155,  naval;  156,  credibility; 
157,  remarked;  158,  such  are;  159,  philanthropist;  160,  let  us; 
161,  D  (the  initial);  162,  support;  163,  separate;  164,  separation; 
165,  treble;  166,  over  it;  167,  swore;  168,  collect; 
169,  equally;  170,  rendered;  171,  mourns;   172,  I  beg  to  say; 
173,  was;   174,  teller;  175,  jury;  176,  externity; 
177,  measure;  178,  collected;  179,  collection:   180,  collective; 
181,  establish;  182,  portion;  183,  normal;   184,  philosophy; 
185,  friendship;  186,  if  there;  187,  earned;   188,  I  shall  have; 
189,  an;  190,  stable;  191,  through  one;  192,  gem; 
193,  revolution;  194,  purpose;  195,  around;  196,  which  have  it; 
197,  whether  there;  198,  define;  199,  meet;  200,  posterior. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


123 


124          HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

REVIEW  EXERCISE  D. 

i,  seventh;  2,  we  will  not  have  been;  3,  armed;  4,  please; 
5,  has  it;  6,  going;  7,  hiss;  8,  in  the  United  States  Patent  Office; 
9,  H  (the  initial);  10,  Dunlap;   u,  which  had  (would)  not;   12,  whip; 

13,  sabler;  14,  clothe;   15,  extra;  16,  extraordinary; 

17,  today;  18,  attempt;  19,  occur;  20,  but  for-have-of-if; 

21,  too;  22,  sustains;  23,  which  are  of;  24,  loafer; 

25,  workmen;  26,  generals;  27,  generalize;  28,  generalization; 

29,  respectful;  30,  darkness;  31,  wintry;  32,  generalized; 

33,  given;  34,  spaces;  35,  holy;  36,  there  may  be  little; 

37,  Ai  (long-a);  38,  renew  an;  39,  follow  their;  40,  seemly; 

41,  peculiar;  42,  suspense;  43,  suspended;  44,  suspension; 

45,  special;  46,  suspend;  47,  suspicion;  48,  I  fear  you  may; 

49,  under;  50,  forsooth;  51,  pretensions^  52,  clamor; 

53,  ever;  54,  notion;  55,  dissever;  56,  disseminate; 

57,  quite;  58,  applied;  59,  unless;  60,  thenceforth; 

DI,  generally;  62,  cumber;  63,  walk;  64,  I  will  not  have  you; 

65,  word;  66,  power  of  the  court;  67,  acted;  68,  misrule; 

69,  principle;  70,  during;  71,  did  I  not  understand  you  to  say;  72,  lieu; 

73,  year;  74,  pastoral;  75,  August;  76,  I  think  that; 

77,  rural;  78,  graves;  79,  held;  80,  disbelief; 

81,  internally;  82,  womanly;  83,  evil;  84,  it  could  have  been; 

85,  S  (the  initial);  86,  tells  us;  87,  we  will  not  be;  88,  in  our; 

89,  strop;  90,  sensitive  to  the  last;  91,  anger-y;  92,  sermon; 

93,  improve;  94,  pleader;  95,  artist;  96,  slaughtered; 

97,  defendant;  98,  gentile;  99,  frosty;  100,  blushingly; 
IOI,  change;  102,  miner-or;  103,  sentimental:  IOJ,  train; 
105,  inscribe;  106,  tell  us;  107,  amount;  108,  with  their; 
109,  every;  lio,  guilty;  in,  you  may  have;  1 12,  opened; 
113,  short-o;  114,  perceive;  115,  wash;   116,  ambiguous; 
117,  providence;  118,  homely;   119,  ruin;  120,  plaintiffs; 
121,  same;  122,  rubber;  123,  it  is  the;  124,  dawn; 
125,  phonography;  126,  deceased;  127,  holier;  128,  Connecticut; 
129,  done;  130,  calm;  131,  prefixed;   132,  develope; 
133,  active;  134,  twin;  135,  rational;  136,  rationally; 
132,  usually;  138,  rather;  139,  babe;  140,  such  would  (had); 
141,  any;  142,  expanse;  143,  expansive;  144,  expensive; 
145,  deliver;  146,  expense;  147,  cramp;  148,  forefinger; 
149,  manufacture;  150,    deft ;    151,  circulation;  152,  origin; 
153,  Coke  (proper  name);  154,  had  not;  155,  humbug;  156,  not  to  come; 
157,  system;  158,  ruined;  159,  poor;  160,  versatile; 
161,  what;  162,  gaiter;  163,  bountiful;  164,  beau; 
165,  fundamental;  166,  crawl;  167,  no  other;  168,  another  one; 
169,  honor;  170,  gibe;  171,  characters;  172,  characterize; 
173,  were;  174,  duty;  175,  depths;  176,  furnished; 
177,  Y  (the  initial);  178,  appeals;  179,  anchor;  180,  considered; 
181,  met;  182,  joyful;  183,  therefore;  184,  coil; 
185,  universal;  186,  reactive;  187,  entire;  188,  irksomeness; 
189,  instruct;  190,  partial;  191,  allows;  192,  I  shall  not  be; 
193,  jurisdiction;  193,  desert;  195,  express;  196,  expression; 
197,  punish;  198,  cayenne;  199,  swayed;  200,  occasioned.  u 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


125 


.  8i 


..]....« 


REVIEW    EXERCISE  D. 


<..L.*.?^ A.~r. A... 


/ 


..X)  ..... 


*..J3.1...J 


o 

106..  b. 


.  tO?  ......... 


.  146    *.. 


•k 


.    /6J...     ^64- 


\ 


9 

10 
11 
12 
13 
14 
U 
16 

it 
IS 
19 
20 


iss^ 


.187 

yQ  <•     ^O    1' 


21 

22 

,.1..^5 
24 


P 


./7J.. 


,    1      K 

I  /3".' 


^-/ 


..96b...  .1.... 


n 


x- 

.?» 


.W.l.,-0*.^.., 

f'.^-v. 


126  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

REVIEW  EXERCISE  E. . 

i,  Jehovah;  2,  stood;  3,  industry  of  the  times;  4,  turn; 
5,  doing;  6,  German;  7,  balm;  8, 1  have  no  doubt  of  it; 
9,  caution;  10,  it  had  (would)  not;  11,  dark;  12,  meeting; 

13,  the  cipher;  14,  Louisa;   15,  oppose;  16,  opposition; 

17,  speech;  18,  boldness;  19,  it  is  entirely;  20,  anyway; 

21,  improvement;  22,  junction;  23,  wampum;  24,  construction; 

25,  accordingly;  26,  easy;  27,  mankind;  28,  transubstantiation: 

29,  issue;  30,  forget;  31,  irreconcilable;  32,  sob; 

33,  near;  34,  revive;  35,  toss;  36,  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations; 

37,  J  (the  initial);  38,  punished;  39,  there  may  be;  40,  option; 

41,  believe;  42,  literary;  43,  literature;  44,  baby; 

45,  in  seeming;  46,  constant;  47,  higher;  48,  we  may  not  do; 

49,  Oo;  50,  such  ought  to  have;  51,  self;  52,  humored; 

53,  charge;  54,  spread;  55,  joint  stock  company;  56,  trim; 

57,  party;  58,  fickle;  59,  cube;  60,  something; 

6l,  establishment;  62,  jealous;  63,  dime;  64,  in  the  discretion  of  the 

65,  in;  66,  as  made;  67,'this  has  not  taken;  68,  owns;  [court; 

69,  satisfy;  71,  I  fear  you  will  be;  71,  grow;  72,  nothing; 

73,  brother;  ^4,  surmount;  75,  swivel;  76,  wonderful-ly; 

77,  Hay  (the  letter);  78,  verify;  79,  clump;  80,  I  think  not  in  any; 

81,  concomitant;  82,  libation;  83,  in  all  its;  84,  tired; 

85,  very;  86,  theirs  to  deserve;  87,  wedge;  88,  nowhere; 

89,  W  (the  initial);  90,  mistrust;  91,  clause;  92,  individual; 

93,  kingdom;  94,  northern;  95,  northeast;  96,  northwest; 

97,  tell;  98,  rush;  99,  north;  ioo,you  shall; 
IOT,  armor;  102,  secure;  103,  I  saw;  104,  I  asked  him; 
105,  again;  106,  raised;  107,  worn;  108,  would  you; 
109,  especially;  no,  acts;  ill,  abbreviation;  112,  cosy; 
113,  Zhee  (the  letter);  114,  familiar;  115,  operation;  116,  oppression; 
117,  than;  11 8,  September;  119,  such;  120,  forgot; 
121,  object;  122,  in  life;   123,  deviation;  124,  robe; 
125,  hundred;  126,  suppose;   127,  can  I;  128,  to  be  able; 
129,  vale;  130,  prominent;  131,  permanent;  132,  preeminent; 
133,  together;   134,  journal;  135,  screw;  136,  such  a  one; 
137,  call;  138,  worked;    139,  jute;  140,  reception; 
141,  thirteenth;   142,  diseased;  143,  nondescript;  144,  paper; 
145,  performj   146,  may  be  not;  147,  scrub;  148,  empyric; 
149,  or;  150,  pyramid;  151,  bound;  152,  inscription; 
153,  with;  154,  greed-t;   155,  fine;  156,  a\vfulness; 
157,  unstability;   158,  diction;   159,  frequently;  160,  could; 
161,  E;  162,  southern;   163,  southeast;  164,  southwest; 
165,  humor;  166,  delay;   167,  south;   1 68,  I  will  try; 
169,  took;  I/O,  pickle;  171,  love  their;  172,  envy; 
173,  sprawl;  174,  sold;  175,  additional;  176,  additionally; 
177,  throughout;  178,  hurrah;    179,  momentum;  180,  momentary; 
181,  if;  182,  dutiful;  183,  peril;  184,  you  will  be; 
185,  salvation;  186,  coaster;  187,  gloom;  iSS,  avaricious; 
189,  immediate;  190,  reach;  191,  and  thinks  his;  192,   display; 
193,  advertise;    194,  dispel;   195,  displace;   196,  displeasure; 
197,  C  (the  initial);  198,  possess;   199,  possessed;  200,  possesses. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


127 


REVIEW    EXERCISE    E. 


...... J.'irs5...- 


49- 


4-2./ 43.C. 44-V..... 

<?     rL    J* 

f-s      ^*~"        r*j? 

<r> 


..±yo.  .r^r.^. 


172  .. 


.         -. 

1 

b.    *94-<^ 


3 
4 
S 
6 

r 

8 
9 
iO 
il 


^^ 

^-2 

«4| 
25 


77-  /... 
<?jC^...^C«r..  6*7.. 

.3J  .....  54  .S^-?....  9,5" 


.^, 


3  ).. 


/         ^—^          P 

41J..L...U.X.  .......  M.3.J. 


...  10Z    .../..  103   ...i 

^ 

.109.        ..l  1.0-1-*...  .Hi.  -^\.UZ. 


\ 


...    13& 


J 


^ 
..  1       f 

.....  466  V...  i  ej-.f3.  ../6S  vT  I. 


190 


.18 


/\ 


/28  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

REVIEW  EXERCISE  F. 

i,  glorified;  2,  in  that;  3,  claim;  4,  I  think  you  must; 
5,  however;  6,  of  its;  7,  Yours  of  today's  mail  received;  8,  hazy; 
9,  dealer;  10,  it  is  very  necessary;  n,  song;   12,  sprain; 

13,  imagine;   14,  endless;   15,  Ada;  1 6,  we  are  off; 

17,  as  it;  18,  sounded;  19,  I  am  in  receipt  of;  20,  lily; 

21,  Yay;  22,  for  he  was;  23,  thine;  24,  correct; 

25,  respectfully;  26,  vail  (veil);  27,  moon;  28,  literal  sense  of  prophesy; 

29,  had;  30,  magazine;  31,  we  may  be  able;  32,  clear; 

33,  above;  34,  in  the  house;  35,  lasses;  36,  democrat; 

37,  agree;  38,  persons;  39,  dukes;  40,  I  have  seen  it; 

41,  opportunity;  42,  evening;  43,  you  will  have  been;  44,  plow; 

45,  foundation;  46,  defense;  47,  noway;  48,  populace  (ous); 

49,  Aw;  50,  gratitude;  51,  gratuitous;  52,  gratuitously; 

53,  language;  54,  we  will  not  have;  55,  atom;  56,  has  not; 

57,  sage;  58,  scholar;  59,  freak;  60,  enter  the  house; 

6l,  inscribed;  62,  complains;  63,  complaints;  64,  complaint-ed; 

65,  account;  66,  lovingly;  67,  some  other  one;  68,  awoke; 

69,  person;  70,  grandeur;  71,  plead;  72,  duration; 

73,  differ;  74,  driving;  75,  Roman;  76,  distensions; 

77,  thoughtlessness;  78,  vocation;  79,  vacation;  80,  populace ; 

81,  yet;  82,  practice;  83,  practiced;  84,  practically; 

85,  information;  86,  journey;  87,  true;  88,  I  will  not  have  you  make; 

89,  form;  90,  thinner;  91,  I  have  seen  them;  92,  owner; 

93,  extreme;  94,  has  gone;  95,  pluck;  96,  as  (has)  known; 

97,  denominate;  98,  humble;  99,  laws;  100,  pulmonary; 
"lOi,  his;  102,  prison;   103,  cautioned;   104,  kind; 
105,  think;  106,  relatively;  107,  throb;  108,  thyself;. 
109,  appear;  no,  by  its;  in,  dire;   112,  converted; 
113,  Bower;  114,  sustain;  115,  negligence;  116,  plump; 
117,  their;  118,  defined;  119,  quaff;   120,  instruction; 
121,  two;  122,  required;  123,  below;  124,  wrathfulness; 
125,  L  (the  initial);  126,  corrected;   127,  corrective;  128,  correction: 
129,  chiefs;  130,  garment;  131,  excursion;  132,  game; 
133,  upon;  134,  darkens;   135,  testy;   136,  thereafter; 
137,  use  (to  use);  138,  notary;  139,  carefully;  140,  balm; 
141,  sisterly;  142,  gallery;   143,  seed;  144,  hateful-ly; 
145,  Jerusalem;  146,  Michael;  147,  habit;  148,  avoid  that; 
149  secession;  150,  overcame;  151,  tremenduous;  152,  plans: 
153  yourself;  154,  gambler;  155,  can  a;  156,  I  think  we; 
157,  before;  158,  migrate;  159,  dozen;  160,  immaterial; 
161,  seventeenth;  162,  fusion;  163,  rosy;  164,  effective; 
165,  alone;  166,  conceive;  167,  reconciliation;  168,  gasses  ; 
169,  am;  170,  enemies;  171,  dash;  172,  you  think; 
173,  spinsters;  174,  you  may;  175,  has  there;  176,  pity; 
177,  agent;  178,  and  thinks;  179,  joys;  180,  auction; 
181,  I  (the  figure);  182,  counsel;  183,  ready;  184,  dereliction; 
185,  apply;  186,  croaker;  187,  approval;  188,  frail; 
189,  astonish;  190,  approve;  191,  approved;  192,  phonographer; 
193,  careful;  194,  synonym;  195,  waif;  196,  equatorial; 
<Q7,  remarkably;  198,  tenant;  199,  fond-t;  200,  I  will  do. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


129 


REVIEW    EXERCISE    P. 


JP 


2'""""" 

65...-^>.  .< 

7e?.l.... 




. 50 


.    ^..  U.4.J.. 


.129..*?. 


.. 

^ 


-i  OX* 


£43  (T^...  . 


144  ........... 


'4ff.A. 


........  ijo 


</ 

V 


1C  ^ 


a 

4 
6 

7 

9 
40 

to 

4<3 


2. 1...  ,3o ^..->^V.  3-2 


.  6t ^...\....6J..!l 64-. .V 

.69 


•\     TRff^TfiS 
6       -x        -N    ' 


:.....8-6..9. ?7...|..<ir/r.r 


...  .HO tft....M& 7.. 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 

REVIEW  EXERCISE  G. 

I,  where;  2,  valley;  3,  real;  4,  such  (would)  have  had; 
5,  advertisement;  6,  vain;  7,  it  is  entirely  your  own;  8,  retail; 
9,  govern;  10,  importer;  n,  imposter;  12,  ornamental; 

13,  whatever;  14,  I  have  seen  that;  15,  fling;  16,  imposed; 

17,  nation;  1 8,  appeared;  19,  slowly;  2O,  distinction; 

21,  O;  22,  forever;  23,  aware;  24,  we  did  not  think; 

25,  difference;  26,  renowned;  27,  spirit;  28,  magnificent; 

29,  certain;  30,  edition;  31,  I  fear  you  must  be;  32,  vest; 

33,  memoranda;  34,  skipped;  35,  heart;  36,  vegetable  kingdom; 

37,  audience;  38,  infusion;  39,  batch;  40,  deliverance; 

41,  tenth;  42,  this  is;  43,  frame;  44,  I  shall  not  have; 

45,  whom;  46,  give  it;  47,  conversion  ;  48,  annoy; 

49,  remember;  50,  however  there  (they  are);  51,  hood;  52,  radientj 

53,  understand;  54,  carmine;  55,  score;  56,  lower  extremities; 

57,  begun;  58,  is  each;  59,  raised  from  the  dead;  60,  away; 

61,  either;  62,  plan-t-ned;  63,  planter;  64,  planetary; 

65,  hope;  66,  process;  67,  touch;  68,  about  whom; 

69,  after;  70,  chapter;  71,  ravel;  72,  shortened-(shorthand); 

73,  universe;  74,  in  some  instances;  75,  from;  76,  scarlet; 

77,  are;  78,  rule  the;  79,  now  and  then;  80,  study; 

81,  angel;  82,  pounces;  83,  no  one;  84,  render  unto; 

85,  spiritual;  86,  parliamentary;  87,  parliament;  88,  parliamentarian; 

89,  circumstance;  90,  Commissioner  of  Patents;  91,  sore;  92,  satchel; 

93,  sure;  94,  bottom;  95,  I  fear  you  will  have;  96,  clip; 

97,  be;  98,  yon;  99,  possessor;  100,  possessive; 
101,  sinner;  102,  justice;  103,  root;  104,  it  may  be; 
105,  fare;.io6,  efforts;  107,  cultivate;  108,  cultivated; 
109,  come;  no,  lass;  in,  grandchild;  112,  grandchildren; 
113,  the;  114,  renewed;  115,  slovv;  116,  there  ought; 
117,  reform;  118,  care  of;  119,  cars;  I2o,  human  soul; 
I2i,  T  (the  initial);   122,  furrow;  123,  flew;  124,  as  is  the; 
125,  Way;  126,  where  the;  127,  whereto;  128,  whereunto; 
129,  make;  130,  starving;  131,  space;  132,  assure  their; 
133,  supplement;  134,  company;  135,  camel;  136,  instructive; 
137,  facial;  138,  illegal;  139,  execrative;   140,  execration; 
141,  to  do;  142,  Persia;  143,  hair;  144,  companion; 
145,  take;  146,  vocatives;  147,  countenance;  148,  spoil; 
149,  thought;  150,  builded;  151,  twice;  152,  postmortem; 
153,  difficulty;  154,  not  to  have;  155,  chaos;  156,  embezzle; 
157,  beyond;  158,  uncommon;  159,  birds;  160,  calculable; 
161,  awful;  162,  services;  163,  shave;  164,  same  cases; 
165,  general;  166,  whereof-ever;  167,  whereon;  168,  whereupon; 
169,  first;  170,  wherein;  171,  depth;  172,  shall  there; 
173,  describe;   174,  volatile;  175,  influenced;  176,  line; 
177,  them;  178,  camp;  179,  territory;  180,  territorial; 
181,  settler;  182,  writing:  183,  pots;  184,  blessings; 
185,  God;   186,  saves  us;  187,  probable-y;  188,  mend; 
189,  fact;  190,  inclined;  191,  as  a;  192,  exsiccated; 
193,  snowy;  194,  it  can  only;  195,  cigar;  196,  railroad; 
197,  manner;  198,  suction;  199,  sting;  200,  never  shall. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


REVIEW    EXERCISE    G. 


132  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

REVIEW  EXERCISE  H. 

I,  F  (the  initial);  2,  from  it;  3,  asked;  4,  gradual-ly; 
5,  twelfth;  6,  Berlin;  7,  weep;  8,  we  may  not  know  them; 
9,  workman;  10,  herself;  II,  whichever  (have);   12,  sizes; 

13,  necessary;    14,  numbered;  15,  numbers  of  them;   16,  to  go; 

17,  nineteenth;  18,  I  shall;  19,  later;  20,  should  have; 

21,  remark;  22,  but  are;  23,  or  he;  24,  inconsiderable-y; 

25,  thing;  26,  is  their  own;  27,  sprig;  28,  punsters; 

29,  astonished;  30,  charity;  31,  human  character;  32,  towns; 

33,  represent;  34,  drainer;  35,  blunt;  36,  writing  letters; 

37,  gains;  38,  indicate;  39,  housed;  40,  liquidation; 

41,  Charles;  42,  each  will;  43,  quell;  44,  property; 

45,  two  millions;  46,  refined;  47,  the  name  is  mine;  48,  dough; 

49,  eternal;  50,  takes  us;  51,  worn;  52,  characteristic; 

53,  fashion;  54,  peeled;  55,  pains;  56,  you  may  as  well  have; 

57,  whale;  58,  oration;  59,  lover;  60,  which  had  (would); 

6l,  importance;  62,  are  not;  63,  I  think  you  may;  64,  muddy; 

65,  value;  66,  service;  67,  in  his;  68,  corrects; 

69,  gentlemen;  70,  glorious;  71,  glories;  72,  glorification; 

73,  signify;  74,  why  there  can  be;  75,  size;  76,  utterly; 

77,  externally;  78,  failure;  79,  Frank;  80,  I  cannot  be; 

81,  short-ah;  82,  sole;  83,  legislator;  84,  legislature; 

85,  to;  86,  gave  it;  87,  mule;  88,  conclusion; 

89,  particular;  90,  perhaps;  91,  Alexandria;  92,  rain  ; 

93,  revelation;  94,  you  can;  95,  deep;  96,  that  their; 

97,  collar;  98,  kitchen;  99,  if  it;  100,  we  may  not  know; 
101,  stropper;  102,  ration;  103,  visit;  104,  hesitation; 
105,  not;  106,  best;  107,  secretive;  108,  secretion; 
109,  as;  no,  from  him;  in,  noted;  112,  I  think  you; 
113,  dear;  114,  priest;  115,  subjected;  116,  beck; 
117,  no  sir;   118,  upon  it;   1 19,  crest;  120,  will  you  be; 
121,  when;  122,  positions;  123,  pack;  124,  fellow; 
125,  within;  126,  raciest;  127,  style;  128,  testament; 
129,  condition;  130,  paused;  131,  partially;  132,  tons; 
133,  voted;   134,  and  all;   135,  cups;  136,  organized; 
137,  each;  138,  following;  139,  lusty;  140,  thereon; 
141,  shown;  142,  weepest;  143,  bays;  144,  improbable-ility; 
145,  those;  146,  by  all;   147,  prejudice;  148,  care; 
149,  hand;  150,  acquire;  151,  dock;  152,  human  life; 
153,  yesterday;   154, happened;  155,  happiest;  156,  attenuation; 
157,  short-u;  158,  forcible;  159,  thick;  160,  dangerous; 
161,  appeal;  162,  offering;  163,  abase;  164,  misdemeanor; 
165,  instructed;  166,  tattler;   167,  hater;  168,  I  will  have; 
^69,  world;  170,  as  may  be;  171,  failed;  172,  hitherto; 
173,  human;  174,  prove  (proof);  175,  oyster;  176,  concluded; 
177,  shall;  178,  aware  of;  179,  continues;  180,  palm; 
18 1,  chaste;  182,  mistress;  183,  mysteries;  184,  mysterious; 
185,  vice;  186,  indicted;  187, indebted;  188,  undoubted; 
189,  between;  190,  schooled;  191,  I  can;  192,  afternoon; 
193,  Z  (the  initial);  194,  resumed;  195,  steal;  196,  order  any; 
197,  knowledge;  iq8,  swagger;  199,  temperate;  200,  wood. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


REVIEW    EXERCISE    H. 


^ 
...  46  .......  ^/v^^<r?tfr^..  4? 


706——  .....  /•*«—  •*»•••  7^ 


134  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

REVIEW  EXERCISE  J. 

I,  number;  2,  bought;  3,  desk;  4,  i  shall  not  have  you; 
5,  fourteenth;  6,  creative;  7,  you  will  do;  8,  filial; 
9,  universality;  10,  they  would;  n,  place;   12,  thorough; 

13,  consequent;  14,  heartily;   15,  hardly;   16,  physician; 

17,  association;  18,  estimate;  19,  motion;  20,  such  has  been* 

21,  magnify;  22,  and  are;  23,  misfortune;  24,  Dave; 

25,  question;  26,  which  are  not;  27,  brief;  28,  shall  it; 

29,  remain;  30,  I  cannot;  31,  piled;  32,  synonyms-ous; 

33,  eighth;  34,  conclude;  35,  if  there  were;  36,  strew; 

37,  interest;  38,  multiform;  39,  multiply;  40,  multiplicity; 

41,  belief;  42,  tension;  43,  Snyder;  44,  which  ought  not; 

45,  K  (the  initial);  46,  precisely;  47,  idle;  48,  vulgar; 

49,  patent;  50,  worthy;  51,  may  it  please  the  court;  52,  game; 

53,  astonishment;  54,  stoves;  55,  says;  56,  whoever  they  are  (there); 

57,  because;  58,  there  may  be  some;  59,  wield;  60,  thirsty; 

61,  subject;  62,  drowned;  63,  inconsideration;  64,  expel; 

65,  is  it;  66,  seizure;  67,  flame;  68,  I  cannot  be  there; 

69,  Ah;  70,  I  think  you  are;  71,  canal;  72,  as  much; 

73,  commend;  74,  average;  75,  the  only  manner  in  which  the;  76,  posy; 

77,  work;  78,  rapidly;  79,  deeps;  80,  I  will  not  have; 

81,  B  (the  initial);  82,  nibble;  83,  whether  there  have  been;  84,  Ezra; 

85,  weather;  86,  sections;  87,  habits;  88,  explosive; 

89,  on  the  other  hand;  90,  you  must  not  be;  91,  guess;  92,  testify; 

93,  sable;  94,  immortal;  95,  frogs;  96,  abstained; 

97,  to  be;  98,  immorality;  99,  mortality;   loo,  immortality; 
101,  juxtaposition;  102,  hardened;   103,  physiological;   104,  plied; 
105,  Ovv;  106,  vision;   107,  that  you;   108,  embracing; 
109,  moreover;  no,  we  are;  in,  I  do;  112,  countries; 
113,  tell;  114,  impose;  1 15,  telegraph;  116,  show; 
117,  already;   118,  eastern;   119,  astern;   120,  judiciary; 
I2T,  shawl;  122,  treated;  123,  merry;   124,  descriptive; 
125,  common;  126,  enough;  127,  ailment;  128,  magnitude; 
129,  on;  130,  such  it;   131,  rapid;  132,  calculate; 

133,  tonight;  134,  consequence;  135,  consequently;  136,  consequential; 
137,  us;  138,  unscored;  139,  angels;  140,  already  the; 
141,  off;  142,  written;  143,  harlequin;  144,  folio; 
145,  speak;  146,  is  said;  147,  in  it;  148,  but  are  not; 
149,  at;  150,  machine;  151,  machinist;  152,  machinery; 
153,  equal;  154,  she  had;   155,  late  (lot);  156,  the  other; 
157,  pleasure;  158,  I  will  be;   159,  vague;  160,  quarrel; 
161,  time;  162,  putty;  163,  fanaticism;  164,  fantastic; 
165,  five  hundred;  166,  assuage;  167,  among;  168,  astounded; 
169,  beauty;  170,  thereto;  171,  I  find;  172,  thenceforward; 
173,  large;  174,  needed;  175,  where  has  he  gone;  176,  committee; 
177,  which;  178,  assured;  179,  sells;  180,  formation; 
181,  respect;  182,  trample;  183,  Aurora;  184,  they  will; 
185,  young;  186,  clown;  187,  passion;  188,  I  cannot  do; 
189,  remarkable;  190  raffle;  191,  melancholy;  192,  hail; 
193,  glorify;    194,  pure;   195,  situated;   196,  situation; 
197,  country;  198,  hook;  199,  bouquet;  200,  buildings. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


'35 


PvEVIEW    EXERCISE    J 


J- 


\ 

.y..... 

?« 

- 


49. 


G 

60. 


A 


v 


.. I 


_     , . 


r* 

;<T: 


j 


3 
4 
5 

6 
7 
$ 
9 
10 


13 


16 
17 
IS 
±9 
£01 


23 
24 


•/I 


Zi    .. 


45 


....JO 
.. .  J8-. 

-,...*€ 


<v.. 

c 
J9.. 

...4rJ. 


.....4o....r.... 


?.  ......  8-6 

» 

.\.  ...94 


^ 

:.  .V 

' 


-. 

....  u&J. 


.....  134-  .....  .. 


136... 


J   . 


136  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

REVIEW  EXERCISE  K. 

I,  spiritually;  2,  under  the  circumstances;  3,  glee;  4,  nebula; 
5,  N  (the  initial);  6,  we;  7,  sip;  8,  Your  letter  bearing  date  of  the 
9,  do;  10,  as  such;  II,  I  shall  not;   12,  class;      [i5th  instant  at  hand; 

13,  plaintiff;   14,  paralyse;  15,  happy;  16,  such  will  not; 

17,  sixtieth;   18,  I  have  your  favor;  19,  I  did;  20,  contain; 

21,  wish;  22,  has  had;  23,  you  must  not  have;  24,  sport; 

25,  degree;  26,  we  might  not  have;  27,  shall  I;  28,  shipped; 

29,  people;  30,  insecure;  31,  you  can  have;  32,  likes; 

33,  nor;  34,  needless;'35,  hither;  36,  thereunto; 

37,  short-e;  38,  labored;  39,  homes;  40,  he  may  be  certain; 

41,  wag;  42,  shall  be;  43,  I  fear  you  must;  44,  misty; 

45,  improved;  46,  seclude;  47,  secluded;  48,  seclusion; 

49,  sire;  50,  student;  51,  earth;  52,  will  have; 

53,  creature;  54,  borrow;  55,  cash;  56,  why  there  have  been; 

57,  poverty;  58,  I  have  seen;  59,  yonder;  60,  shelling; 

61,  construct;  62,  think  it;  63,  almost;  64,  landscape; 

65,  soaker;  66,  creation;  67,  the  game;  68,  complain; 

69,  advance;  70,  you  must  be;  71,  short;  72,  easterly; 

73,  Whay;  74,  alphabet;  75,  I  fear;  76,  abundant; 

77,  begin;  78,  client;  79,  surely;  80,  alternating; 

81,  thank;  82,  murder-ed;  83,  thrice;  84,  financial; 

85,  is;  86,  evidence;  87,  stung;  88,  township; 

89,  subsequent;  90,  anywhere;  91,  I  will;  92,  human  mind; 

93,  never;  94,  followed;  95,  ladder;  96,  parallel; 

97,  principally;  98,  spine;  99,  imbecile;  100,  we  were  not; 
101,  maximum;  IO2,  you  must;  103,  adjoin;  104,  kindness; 
105,  Rich  (proper  name);  106,  delighted;  107,  delight;  108,  ways; 
109,  providential;  1 10,  ribbon;  ill,  Rome;  II 2,  tolerable; 
113,  internal;  114,  splashed;  115,  thereof;  116,  Congress; 
117,  all;  118,  smell;  119,  laughed;  120,  latitudes; 
I2i,  R  (the  initial);  122,  thence;   123,  casual;  124,  casually; 
125,  instrumentality;  126,  traitor;  127,  press;  128,  transmit; 
129,  either;  130,  reclaim;   131,  utter;  132,  write  it;  ' 
133,  on  account;  134,  phrase;  135,  such  will;  136,  feel; 
137,  especial;  138,  and  are  not;  139,  Isaac;  140,  saddler; 
141,  extremity;  142,  explicit;  143,  avert;  144,  artlessness; 
145,  divine;  146,  you  have;  147,  saying;  148,  expected; 
149,  U;  150,  deride;  151,  derided;  152,  derision; 
153,  building;  154,  or  a;  155,  derive;  156,  rapturous; 
157,  opinion;  158,  aversion;  159,  forgotten;  160,  signer; 
161,  but;  162,  west;  163,  she  is;  164,  gigantic; 
165,  whensoever;  166,  subdue;  167,  telephone;  168,  spry; 
169,  gladsomeness;  170,  lenient;  171,  music;  172,  corporal; 
173,  from;  174,  anchored;  175,  strong;   176,  may  not  be; 
177,  secular;  178,  westerly;  179,  western;  180,  taciturn; 
181,  impossible;   182,  clergy;  183,  judgment;  184,  Anna; 
185,  stop;  186,  mortgage;  187,  soever;  188,  spacious; 
189,  V  (the  initial);  190,  bureau;  191,  element;  192,  afterward: 
193,  religion;  194,  whole;  195,  will  you;  196,  blushing; 
197,  Christian;  198,  choice;  199,  compared;  200,  cooperate. 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 


137 


REVIEW     EXERCISE    K. 


.A.  ....-z  d 3, 

I  /- 

31 JOJO.     .Jl^J. n.. 

ly  _    ...  /£   ^.  Wy -*0 20.. ..J..    -. 

r ^.. 


\       ^         ^              A-^ 
.  «5"7 .\j...«r? ........ <T9  *A^__^.  ..60^.. 

.6^..orrr....66 ^/— ^^N..6^..\.. 

V  A  fu  tt     r    \  *v  .*»    ^^^        <vX    — 


-.S.,..  90  ..........  .94.SI...9Z  .......... 


\^,r~  S 

K^j.  .......  99.!^....^a. 


Jr 

C 


.^i 

I 


.  ......  ^SS\.. 

t       J 

'  ° 


>5^r«B..», .. 


/ftp  A ... 


138  HAVEN'S   PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 

ABOUT  PEOPLE  WHO  GIVE  YOU  SHORTHAND  ADVICE 

Any  professional  writer  of  any  system,  providing  that  writer  has  done  court  aud  convention  re- 
porting, is  competent  to  give  good  advice  respecting  study  and  practice  ;  but,  as  far  as  best  outlines  are 
concerned,  no  one  can  give  you  any  good  advice  who  is  not  a  writer  of  the  system  you  are  studying  ; 
because  rules  that  would  be  good  for  one  system,  might  seriously  conflict  in  another.  It  is  even  dan- 
gerous to  accept  the  advice  of  professional  writers  of  the  system  you  are  studying,  unless  the  adviser  is, 
or  has  been,  a  professional  court  and  conveutiou  reporter  of  experience.  A  mere  office  stenographer 
may  never  have  had  any  difficult  work  in  his  or  her  position,  even  if  it  has  been  held  lor  years 

Some  office  positions  are  only  a  detriment  to  the  stenographer  on  account  of  but  little  shorthand 
work;  easy  letters;  no  variety  of  language  ;  aud  an  employer  who  is  ignorant,  or  who  does  not  care  how 
his  work  is  done.  All  the  little  law  firms  and  business  agencies,  with  offices  in  big  buildings,  even  if 
they  have  only  two  letters  a  day  to  write,  want  those  letters  done  in  typewriting,  because  it  looks  more 
businesslike  than  penmanship,  aud  hence  employ  a  stenographer  to  writethose  letters,  the  stenographer 
occupying  the  balance  of  the  time  by  merely  keeping  the  office  open  and  taking  the  names  of  customet  s 
or  clients,  while  the  employer  is  out  drumming  up  trade.  Any  clerk  could  hold  such  a  position  with- 
out shorthand,  for,  as  a  rule,  such  an  employer  does  not  dictate  at  all,  but  often  writes  the  letters  himself  in 
lead  pencil,  aud  has  the  stenographer  typewrite  them.  As  it  is  necessary  that  a  shorthand  writer  have 
not  less  than  one  to  two  hours  daily  shorthand  dictation  and  two  to  four  hours  typewriting  practice  daily 
to  retain  speed,  it  will  readily  be  seen  that  such  positions  are  a  detriment  to  any  shorthand  writer,  in  a 
loss  of  both  speed  aud  knowledge,  and  such  stenographers  are  certainly  not  competent  to  give  advice  to 
anyone,  even  it  they  had  fifty  years  of  such  experience. 

by  above,  it  will  be  seen  that  not  all  who  call  themselves  stenographers  are  really  so.  The  ci.lv 
office  stenographers  who  are  competent  to  give  advice  to  a  student  who  has  well  learned  all  exercises  anil 
reviews  up  to  this  page,  are  those  who  have  fully  fifty  letters  a  day  dictated  to  them.  They  are  real  stenog- 
raphers, and  they  will  not  tell  you  to  write  proper  names,  addresses,  etc.,  in  long  band.  Tt'ey  are  too 
hurried  in  their  work  to  do  anything  of  the  kind.  Just  as  soon  asaperson  whom  you  havesupposed  to  be 
an  office  stenographer  of  experience  (because  you  know  him  or  her  to  have  held  a  position  for  several 
years)  tells  you  that  he  or  she  never  writes  proper  names,  addresses,  etc.,  in  shorthand,  then  you  may 
know  that  that  person  holds  a  position  of  no  importance  whatever,  so  far  as  shorthand  is  concerned,  or  he 
or  she  would  have  no  time  to  write  any  longhand  during  dictation.  Imagine  a  shorthand  reporter  trying 
to  take  a  speech  by  writing  the  technical  terms  and  names  of  cities  and  heroes  in  longhand  with  the 
speaker  going  at  the  rate  of  150  or  more  words  a  minute  ;  or  the  court  reporter  at  a  trial  every  time  a 
witness  mentions  the  defendant  or  plaintiff  or  names  of  places,  numbers  of  streets,  etc.,  writing  same  in 
longhand  ! 

Do  you  imagine  it  could  be  done?  Not  a  bit  of  it.  And  it  is  just  so,  in  the  kind  of  office  positions 
where  theie  are  hundreds  ot  letters  to  answer  daily  and  the  dictation  has  to  be  taken  at  the  rate  of 
loo  to  120  words  a  minute  to  get  each  (.ay's  work  done.  There  is  no  more  time  to  write  in  longhand  the 
proper  names,  technical  terms,  etc.,  occurring  in  the  body  of  a  letter  in  the  dictation  of  suth  offices,  than 
there  is  in  speech  reporting.  Of  course,  where,  in  letter  dictation,  the  original  letters  received  are 
numbered  so  that  the  stenographer  may  get  from  them  the  proper  names  and  addresses  of  firms  written 
to,  there  is  no  necessity  to  dictate  such  names  and  addresses  at  beginning  of  letters,  and  when  an  oddly 
srelled  name  occurs  for  the  first  time  even  in  the  body  of  a  letter,  its  spelling  is  then  given  to  the 
stenographer,  but  after  that  one  time,  he  or  she  is  expected  to  remember  its  spelling  and  to  write  it  there- 
after as  rapidly  as  any  other  word,  which  can  only  be  done  by  writing  it  in  -  horthand. 

Even  were  it  possible  to  write  in  longhand  all  proper  names,  technical  terms,  etc.  in  rapid  short- 
hand work,  it  would  still  be  better  for  the  student,  in  his  or  her  siudy,to  write  them  in  shorthand,  be- 
cause of  the  ability  it  gives  the  student  to  correctly  and  quickly  form  any  shorthand  combination  of 
sounds,  a  facility  which  every  student  must  acquire  before  rapidity  in  shorthand  work  can  be  attained. 
Therefore,  the  shorthand  plates  of  the  actual  business  letters  of  pages  145  to  159,  as  well  as  the  court  and 
convention  pages  throughout  this  book,  contain  the  shorthand  forms  for  all  proper  names,  addresses, 
technical  terms,  etc.,  and  numerals  as  well.  Any  teacher  who  ad  vises  the  longhand  writing  of  any  words 
or  numerals  does  a  great  injustice  to  pupils. 

The  dictators  in  a  busy  business  house  would  be  decidedly  hampered  and  delayed,  if  they  had  to  wait 
while  their  stenographers  wrote  in  longhand  all  the  names  of  goods,  towns,  and  firms  and  persons 
referred  to  in  the  body  of  their  letters.  And,  furthermore,  it  would  be  ridiculous  for  any  stenographer 
worthy  the  name,  to  seek  to  write  such  easy  proper  names  as  Smith,  Boston,  etc.,  in  long1  and,  nor  are 
such  things  ever  done  by  skilled  stenographers.  The  most  difficult  kinds  of  words  must  be  written  in 
rapid  shorthand  office  dictation  when  they  occur  in  the  body  of  a  letter,  just  as  certainly  as  the  most 
difficult  medical  or  botanical  phrase,  architectural  or  engineering  term,  in  a  court  trial,  convention  or 
lecture.  Any  persons  claiming  to  be  stenographers,  who  te'l.you  differently,  and  say  it  is  never  done  in 
business  offices,  just  because  they  or  their  stenographic  friends  have  never  done  it,  are  assuredly  holding 
positions  which  do  not  require  anv  real  skill,  no  matter  how  many  years  they  have  been  in  the  profession 
or  how  many  positions  they  have  held,  or  how  nice  they  may  be  personally. 

Teachers  who  have  had  no  professional  experience,  or  of  merelv  the  above  kind,  are  also  not 
competent  to  give  any  advice  in  opposition  to  directions  in  book  you  study.  They  may  mean  well,  but 
ate  utterly  incapable  of  judging  or  of  giving  advice  on  shorthand  outlines  or  professional  requirements 
to  others,  no  matter  what  their  teaching  experience  may  be.  As  the  author  of  this  book  has  had  over 
twenty  years  of  the  most  difficult  sort  of  shorthand  reporting  and  teaching  experience,  it  is  a  safe  rule 
not  to  accept  any  advice  from  others  in  reference  to  either  shorthand  outlines  or  methods  of  practice 
where  the  advice  does  not  agree  with  the  directions  of  this  book.  Particularly  beware  of  changes,  or 
so-called  "improvements"  by  any  teacher  who  has  not  had  as  much  professional  experience  as  the  author 
of  this  book.  Every  improvement  m^dehy  Mr.  Haven,  was  first  proven  to  be  practical  by  actual  use  lor 
a  number  of  years  in  his  professional  shorthand  reporting  before  being  printed  or  taught  by  him.  Changes 
by  other  teachers  without  such  test  are  both  valueless  and  dangerous.  Any  teacher,  even  though  only 
a  beginner,  with  no  teaching  or  professional  experience  whatever,  can  produce  as  skillful  graduates  as 
the  best,  so  long  as  all  the  directions  of  this  book  are  strictly  followed,  but  the  best  teacher  living  will 
fai',  if  our  directions  are  violated  in  any  way. 


PART    III. 

T  H  E    R  BAD  E  R 


GENERAL  DIRECTIONS. 

This  portion  of  the  book  is  intended  for  both  reading  and  writing 
practice,  the  printed  pages  being  the  key  to  the  shorthand  engraving 
opposite  them.  Students  should,  therefore,  not  cease  studying  these 
pages  until  they  can  both  read  the  shorthand  engraving  as  rapidly  as 
print  and  write  the  printed  pages  from  dictation  into  as  precise  short- 
hand as  they  are  herein  written  by  the  author. 

Before  the  student  begins  practicing  the  exercises  found  within 
this  portion  of  the  book,  the  author  furthermore  desires  to  state  that, 
while  this  part  is  in  a  great  degree  intended  to  perfect  students  in  the 
proper  use  of  every  principle  illustrated  in  the  lessons  of  Part  II,  yet  its 
primary  object  is  also  to  give  them  a  concise  idea  of  the  manner  of  IN- 
VENTING EXTEMPORANEOUSLY  THE  SPECIAL  ABBREVI- 
ATIONS explained  in  first  paragraph  of  Page  89  of  Part  II,  while  en- 
gaged in  reporting  lectures,  sermons,  etc.  To  obtain  a  complete  idea 
of  rapid  phrasing  and  the  manner  in  which  this  is  accomplished.it  will 
be  necessary  for  the  student  to  observe  the  following  rules  in  making 
use  of  this  Reader: 

ist. — Carefully  read  and  note  in  the  shorthand  pages  herein,  every 
digression  from  the  long  way  of  writing  words  and  phrases,  for  which 
word  or  phrase  signs  or  abbreviations  have  not  been  already  learned. 

2nd. — Write  all  the  exercises  from  dictation,  afterward  comparing 
your  shorthand  writing  with  the  original,  as  stated  more  fully  else- 
where. Rewrite  and  re-rewrite  from  dictation  until  your  shorthand 
writing  compares  precisely  with  that  in  this  Reader. 

3rd. — Transcribe  all  your  shorthand  writing  before  comparing  it 
with  the  shorthand  plates,  always  comparing  your  transcription  with  the 
printed  key.  By  this  means,  many  slight  but  important  contractions 
may  be  discovered,  which  otherwise  might  be  overlooked. 

(139) 


140  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

BUSINESS      LETTER    PRACTICE. 

The  letters,  given  on  pages  144  to  159  in  this  portion  of  the  book, 
numbering  36  in  all,  two  each  day  for  18  days,  have  been  graded,  the 
smallest  ones  first,  for  the  purpose  of  enabling  students  to  learn  the 
forms  in  each  one,  before  the  next  is  attempted,  the  letters  increasing  in 
size  with  each  day,  because  many  words  and  phrases  in  preceding  ones 
will  be  found  to  be  duplicated,  in  addition  to  the  introduction  of  new 
words  and  forms,  so  that  the  last  day's  letters,  which  occupy  a  whole 
page,  are  almost  as  easy  to  the  student  when  that  stage  of  progress  has 
been  reached,  as  the  first  two  small  letters  were  to  the  one  who  had 
just  finished  the  lessons. 

These  letters  are  selected  from  a  large  number  of  different  busi- 
nesses, representing  nearly  all  the  lines  of  trade  in  which  a  stenographer 
would  be  most  likely  to  be  employed,  the  entire  set  containing  prac- 
tically all  the  commercial  phrases  used  in  any  business,  together  with 
their  best  shorthand  forms,  including  those  of  each  day  of  the 
week  except  Sunday,  as  well  as  the  names  of  the  months  and  all  sorts 
of  dates,  all  personal  initials,  the  name  of  nearly  every  state  and  im- 
portant city  in  the  Union,  every  style  of  names  of  firms,  and  street  or 
post  office  addresses,  home  or  foreign.  This  list  of  mock  letters,  there- 
fore, gives  students  more  information  in  regard  to  correct  shorthand  out- 
lines than  the  mere  title  or  their  appearance  suggests,  and,  on  this  ac- 
count, indispensable  to  the  would-be  amanuensis. 

It  is  not  necessary  for  the  first  two  letters  to  be  commenced  on 
Monday,  although  that  is  the  day  named  above  the  first  set,  on 
page  144,  nor  is  it  necessary  that  any  of  those  days  be  set  apart  for 
those  certain  occasions,  the  letters  being  commenced  as  soon  as  the 
student  is  through  the  lessons  of  the  theory,  and  has  thoroughly 
reviewed  them;  the  words  Monday,  Tuesday,  etc.,  like  the  different 
months  and  other  particulars  of  names  and  dates,  being  used  herein 
merely  to  give  the  shorthand  student  practice  on  those  words. 

The  best  plan  upon  which  to  get  the  most  good  in  the  shortest 
time  from  these  business  letters,  is  for  students  to  have  some  one  dic- 
tate to  them  only  two  letters  at  a  time,  the  student  at  once  comparing 
his  or  her  shorthand  writing  with  the  printed  shorthand,  noting  every 
deviation  therefrom,  respecting  shading,  slant  or  curvature  of  charac- 
ters, size,  position,  phrasing,  etc.,  and  practicing  at  least  twelve  times 
the  proper  form  for  each  deviation.  After  this  has  been  done  with  all 
the  characters  of  one  day's  letters,  the  two  letters  of  the  next  should  be 
similarly  taken  from  dictation,  compared  and  practiced,  and  so  on 
throughout  the  entire  course. 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY.  1^1 

Two  letters  a  day  are  sufficient,  with  other  practice,  and  the/ 
should  not  be  studied  beforehand  by  the  student,  as  it  is  advisable  to 
ascertain  the  weak  points  of  the  student's  writing,  which  are  best  dis- 
covered by  the  mistakes  made  in  writing  from  their  own  unaided  knowl- 
edge. If  they  do  not  know  how  to  write  a  word  correctly  by  prin- 
ciple, they  can  spell  it  with  the  letters  of  the  shorthand  alphabet,  which 
is  a  much  better  way  to  do  than  to  study  the  business  letters  beforehand, 
for,  if  they  do  the  latter,  they  will  be  writing  from  memory  of  sight, 
which  is  not  the  proper  way  to  learn  and  will  not  designate  a  student's 
weak  points. 

As  soon  as  any  day's  letters  have  bee  i  written  from  dictation,  as 
well  as  the  student  can  do  it  without  much  hesitation,  then  the  student 
should  compare  his  or  her  shorthand  notes  on  plan  above  stated,  prac- 
ticing strictly  as  directed. 

When  the  entire  set  is  finished,  continual  review  should  be  prac- 
ticed upon  them  until  they  all  can  be  written  without  a  mistake  or  differ- 
ent junctures,  unless  it  be  some  minor  point  of  phrasing.  It  is  just  as 
important  to  thus  continually  review  these  business  letters  as  it  is  the 
lessons  of  the  theory,  but  the  review  need  not  interfere  with  your 
progress.  Continue  with  the  Actual  Court  Cases  as  soon  as  through 
the  last  day's  letters  herein,  and  review  the  letters  between  times,  but  be 
sure  to  so  review  them. 

The  student  will  note  that  at  the  end  of  every  day  of  these  letter  ex- 
ercises there  is  drawn  a  double  line.  This  is  done  the  next  morning 
when  commencing  a  new  day's  work,  to  show  that  the  letters  coming 
after  it  belong  to  another  day,  which  is  additionally  shown  by  a  date 
separated  from  the  letters  below  it  by  a  single  line,  just  as  each  letter 

is  separated  from  others  by  a  single  line. 

In  these  lettters  we  have  given  the  names  of  the  persons  to  whom 
they  are  addressed,  as  well  as  the  town,  state,  etc.,  all  written  in  short- 
hand, because  we  desire  the  student  to  have  practice  in  all  kinds  of  out- 
lines.but  this  is  not  always  done  in  business  houses,  as  in  some  of  them  the 
stenographer  is  supposed  to  know  the  customers'  names  and  the 
names  of  most  of  the  correspondents  of  the  firm.  The  employer" gen- 
erally prefaces  a  dictation  by  saying:  "  Take  a  letter  to  Mr.  Smith,  St. 
Louis,"  in  which  case  the  stenographer  simply  writes,  "  Smith,  St. 
Louis,  "  in 'his  notebook  beginning  his  letter.  Sometimes,  even  the 
address  is  not  given  by  an  employer,  as  some  of  the  letters  are  to 
firms  well  known,  and  the  employer  may  simply  say:  "  Take  a  letter 
to  Fuller  &  Fuller,"  in  which  case  just  those  names  are  written  by  the 
stenographer  in  the  note -book  preceding  the  dictation;  and,  if  he  or 
she  remembers  the  address  in  full  from  previous  knowledge,  it  is  after- 
wards written  out  in  full  on  the  letter  without  further  looking  up, 


1^2  HAVENS    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 

but,  if  the  address  is  not  known  or  remembered,  the  stenographer 
consults  possibly  the  books  of  the  firm,  or,  later  on,  if  he  is  wise,  he 
makes  himself  a  little  book  which  contains  the  names  and  addresses  of 
correspondents,  as  they  were  given  him. 

Often,  however,  no  names  whatever  are  given,  but  the  letters 
which  the  firm  has  received,  are  numbered  by  the  employer  or  sterfo- 
grapher  to  accord  with  a  number  in  the  book  of  the  stenographer,  and 
then  the  stenographer,  referring  to  the  letter  to  which  reply  is  made, 
gets  the  name  and  address  to  type-write  on  his  letter  sheet,  with 
his  transcribed  letter.  This  latter  is  the  general  plan  when  a  letter  is 
to  be  answered,  but  when  a  firm  is  writing  an  original  letter  which  is 
not  a  reply  to  any  received,  then  the  name  and  address  is  given,  except 
in  first  named  instances. 

The  printed  keys  to  the  letters  in  this  part  of  the  book  are  not  ar- 
ranged in  the  manner  in  which  those  letters  are  intended  to  be  written 
on  a  typewriting  machine.  In  this  book,  the  arrangement  of  the  type 
is  a  matter  of  convenience  respecting  the  size  of  our  pages,  the  name 
and  the  address  each  being  on  a  line  by  itself,  and  "Gentlemen"  or 
"Dear  Sir"  written  in  even  with  the  first  line  of  the  letter.  In  actual 
typewriter  work  the  stenographer  should  write  the  name  of  the  party 
addressed  on  one  line,  the  party's  address  on  next  one  or  on  two  lines, 
while  "Dear  Sir"  or  "Gentlemen"  should  be  on  a  line  by  itself,  in  any  or- 
dinary sized  letter,  and  only  placed  on  the  same  line  with  first  line  of  letter 
when  the  letter  is  anextralong  one,  and  it  is  advisable  to  save  a  line.  The 
illustration  on  opposite  page  shows  how  the  first  letter  on  pages  1 54 
and  155  would  be  typewritten  properly. 

The  names  of  the  days  of  the  week,  Monday,  Tuesday,  etc.,  are  not 
placed  upon  a  transcript,  as  they  are  only  put  in  the  shorthand  note- 
book as  a  matter  of  memoranda,  but  the  name  of  the  town  from  which 
the  letter  is  sent  is  placed  on  the  finished  letter,  though  not  shown  in 
the  note-book.  Compare  carefully  every  detail  of  letter  in  typewriting 
on  opposite  page  with  the  same  letter  on  pages  154  and  155. 

Thestudent  will  notice  throughoutthe  shorthand  plates  of  this  book, 
that  where  a  sentence  ends  at  or  near  the  right-hand  end  of  the  line  of 
writing,  the  next  sentence  is  commenced  about  one-half  inch  from  the 
lefthand  margin  of  the  next  line,  as  on  last  line  of  second  day's  letters 
of  page  145,  instead  of  a  greater  distance,  as  otherwise  necessary  when 
it  is  desired  to  show  a  period  within  the  line  of  writing.  This  is  done 
to  distinguish  between  the  end  of  a  paragraph  and  the  beginning  of  a 
new  paragraph  or  interrogatory  sentence,  either  of  which  would  be  im- 
plied were  the  space  rule  for  indicating  a  period,  given  on  page  in, 
applied  to  such  instances — i.  e.,  where  a  sentence  terminated  at  or  near 
the  righthand  end  of  the  line  of  writing. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  143 

A.     B.     SMITH  ^^   i    1  C>  D    r-k  R-     M-     BROWN 


Dealers  in 


QENERAL  MERCHANDISE 


—  — 
Offices  ir?  all  principal  Qti^s. 


Chicago,  October  22d,  1884. 
Mr.  X.  Idler, 

Hortonsville,  Wis. 
Dear  Sir: 

I  received  a  letter  this  morning  inclosing  a  remittance  with  the 
above  name  signed  and  the  town  of  Hortonsville,  but  no  State  named,  and 
the  envelope  was  marked  so  poorly  by  the  postmaster,  from  whose  of- 
fice the  letter  was  sent,  that  I  could  not  get  the  State  name  from  that 
source. 

I  findj  however,  there  is  a  town  named  Hortonsville  in  Wisconsin, 
and  I  therefore  send  to  that  town  the  article  desired.   If  It  should 
happen  to  reach  you,  please  remember  In  the  future  not  only  to  write 
your  name  plainly  to  every  communication  you  send  out,  but  be  sure  al- 
ways to  give  your  address  in  full.  Including  State  and  county,  espec- 
ially wnen  you  send  money.   This  precaution  will  save  you  and  others 
consiaeraoie  inconvenience. 

Respectful ly. 


I44  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

(ist  day.)  MONDAY,  JANUARY  2d,  1870. 

Messrs.  Wilson  Bros.,  Burksville,  Ala, 

GENTLEMEN: — Please  send  the  statement  of  unpaid  bills  which  you 
have  against  us  up  to  date,  and  greatly  oblige.  • 

Respectfully  yours. 

Messrs.  Dennison  &*  Lawrence,  Doi'epark,  Clark  Co.,  Ark. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  return  bill  dated  February  28,  amount  $8.75. 

We  presume  that  these  goods  were  bought  by  the  Wiley  Mercantile 
Co.;  they  were  never  ordered  by  us. 

(2nd  day.)  TUESDAY,  FEBRUARY  ist,  1871. 

Mr.  J.  B.  Black,  410  S.  15 th  St.,  Oakland,  Cal. 

DEAR  SIR: — We  have  received  bill  of  $24.00  for  advertising  in  Oakland 
Telegraph,  and  presuming  it  to  be  all  right,  have  paid  it. 

Please  let  me  know  by  return  mail,  if  it  be  correct. 

St.  Joseph's  Savings  Bank,  Denver,  Colo. 

GENTLEMEN: — The  enclosed  bank  book  and  documents  were  picked  up 
in  our  store  to-day.  Will  you  please  see  that  they  are  returned  to  the 
owners,  as  we  do  not  know  where  to  address  them? 

Very  truly  yours. 

(3rd  day.)  WEDNESDAY,  MARCH  3rd,  1872. 

Messrs.  T.  Lewis  6°  Son,  Box  1213,  New  Haven,  Conn. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  enclose  letter  from  party  in  New  Sharon.  We  have 
sent  him  catalogue  and  referred  him  to  you  for  prices  and  terms. 

Hoping  that  you  may  be  able  to  secure  his  custom,  we  remain, 

Yours  truly. 

Mrs.  Christine  Martin,  Rockland,  Del. 

DEAR  MADAM: — We  are  in  receipt  of  notice  from  the  American 
Express  Co.,  stating  that  the  package  sent  you  of  laces  and  embroideries  is 
at  their  office  in  your  town  unclaimed. 

Please  oblige  us  by  calling  on  them  for  same. 

(4th  day.)  THURSDAY,  MARCH  4th,  1873. 

Messrs.  Wilson  Bedloe  6°  Son,  Frceport,  Fla. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  received  several  orders  from  local  customers 
for  you.  -  What  are  your  best  discounts? 

Please  notify  us  and  we  may  give  you  a  trial  order  and  perhaps  do 
considerable  business  with  you  if  prices  are  right. 

The  H.  B.  Howe  Co.,  Savannah,  Ga. 

GENTLEMEN: — Goods  ordered  on  the  first  instant  have  been  received, 
and  must  say  that  we  are  very  much  surprised  and  disappointed  in  them. 
The  stock  and  finish  is  very  poor  and  we  cannot  use  them  at  any  price. 
They  are  nothing  like  samples  shown  us.  What  shall  we  do  with  them? 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


.rr 


</  _ 

....   t  ^\/   «1 

(o                        v     V^"                                            X     s — '        ^Xj      \> 
P...VJV.     e?     0    

£jk; 
c  u 

^         l  ....r .^..n  ^f..C^T..Tl^   V^ 

P  <\ 

^.    A.      l%V*v^x>-/' 

•^/ •••-- 

o  v_A 

^-f              -f^»           ^^"'x^              ' 
••A    .L_ 1  <\ \     \     |   


146  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

(5th  day.)  FRIDAY,  APRIL  5th,  1874. 

Messrs.  Bissett  6°  Co.,  25  Nattan  St.,  Chicago,  III. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  your  letter  of  the  3d  instant,  and  note  con- 
tents. We  sent  the  seventeen  cases  of  goods  to  the  Indianapolis  parties  as 
directed,  and  forwarded  them  also  the  bill  of  lading. 

They  have  undoubtedly  received  them  before  this. 

Mr.  A.  R.  Johnson,  Memphis,  Ind. 

DEAR  SIR: — We  have  your  favor  of  the  4th  instant,  ordering  shade 
rollers,  and  have  shipped  same  to-day. 

We  cannot  send  with  them  the  full  assortment  of  brackets  named,  as 
some  of  the  sizes  are  out  of  stock,  but  we  will  have  them  in  a  few  days,  and 
will  forward  them  to  you  then.  Yours  truly. 

(6th  day.)  SATURDAY,  APRIL  6th,  1875. 

Messrs.  Hanford  6°  Sons,  Limited,  Waverly,  Iowa. 

GENTLEMEN: — Your  favor  of  f'.e  5th  instant,  and  also  sample  brush  at 
hand.  The  brush  apparently  is  well  made,  and  -we  shall  be  pleased  to  try 
sdme.  While  your  price  is  above  what  we  are  paying,  yet  it  is  possible  the 
goods  are  a  little  better.  If  we  so  conclude,  we  may  at  an  early  date  try  a 
sample  gross  of  your  goods. 

Martin  H.  Green,  Esq.,  Garnett,  Kas. 

DEAR  SIR: — Your  note  for  $100,  due  March  26th,  has  been  sent  to  the 
First  National  Bank  for  collection,  and  returned  endorsed,  "  No  funds." 
We  regret  this  very  much  as  we  need  the  money,  and  shall  be  pleased  to 
have  some  explanation  of  the  reason  you  have  in  not  paying  this  note.  We 
shall  expect  remittance  by  return  mail.  Respectfully. 

(7th  day.)  MONDAY,  MAY  loth,  1876. 

Messrs.  Planchett  6°  Nephew,  4221  2$f/i  Sf.,  Louisville,  Ky. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  received  your  letter  in  which  you  state  that 
hereafter  all  of  our  bills  will  be  post-dated  sixty  days.  We  were  not  in- 
formed of  this  fact  by  our  buyer  until  yesterday,  after  we  had  sent  you 
settlement. 

We  are  obliged  to  you  for  calling  our  attention  to  this  fact,  and  here- 
after shall  make  our  settlements  accordingly. 

The  Farwell-Parsons  Co.,  P.  O.  Drawer  391,  New  Orleans,  La. 

GENTLEMEN: — Answering  your  favor  of  the  Qth  instant,  we  beg  to 
reassert  that  the  goods  sent  us  were  not  up  to  the  standard,  and  we  cannot 
use  them.  We  do  not  wish  a  discount  on  price,  for  the  goods  are  not 
what  we  want.  We  want  the  goods  we  ordered  and  none  others.  As  you 
gave  us  no  instruction  what  to  do  with  these,  we  have  returned  them  by 
freight  yesterday.  Very  truly. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL.  PHONOGRAPHY. 


X^V-i-y^ —   "^ 

:.  -o  .v.?v?....\.  e  1-,  .^  .n  .^ 
i  -»*<c..oj : tfT i  ..TrTXc^-^j)  *-<^?7T.  -^  c-^....  j 

.<C^,  /;  dV....«\y -V 

^    '  *A^    y   J         xr^ 

...d^-r° 
1_  ^ 

0   ^  ^.^  y     I 

K ^r..^>  ^_  O......J  s-yi  L—  « 

t,.^..^^.  _  -A—-. 

^^•••••r^ 

i<.         « 

^^\ 

«/ 

^ °  ^^.T...!iA...-^..c>..c) -y 


148  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

(8th  day.)  TUESDAY,  MAY  nth,   1877. 


Messrs.  Lewis  Carson  6°  Co.,  89  Franklin  St.,  St.  Paul,  Minn. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  your  letter  of  the  loth  instant  returning  our 
statement  and  check,  and  stating  that  your  terms  are  strictly  7-10  or  6-30. 

In  reply  we  beg  to  say  that  we  bought  these  goods  of  your  agent  here 
upon  the  following  terms:  "  7-10,  60  days  dating."  The  extra  i  per  cent, 
is  for  the  sixty  days'  interest. 

We  therefore  return  the  check  herewith.     Respectfully. 

Mr.  Samuel  Hanson,  Saco,  Me. 

DEAR  SIR: — On  weighing  the  feed  billed  to  us  on  your  invoice  of  the 
8th  instant,  we  make  it  4,125  Ibs.,  which  is  25  Ibs.  less  than  your  invoice 
above  referred  to  makes  it. 

We  do  not  know  whose  scales  are  correct,  but  hereafter,  to  save  trouble, 
please  have  weigher's  certificate  attached  to  all  the  feed  you  supply  us  with, 
and  greatly  oblige.  Respectfully. 

(9th  day.)  WEDNESDAY,  JUNE  i2th,  1878. 

Mr.  James  Lane,  Box  9403,  Boston,  Mass. 

DEAR  SIR: — Replying  to  your  letter  of  the  loth  instant,  we  have 
looked  through  our  books  to  find  some  record  of  the  purchase  to  which  you 
refer,  but  find  nothing  of  the  kind. 

From  this  we  presume  it  was  a  cash  purchase,  in  which  case,  in  accord- 
ance with  our  custom,  the  sales  slip  was  inclosed  with  the  goods,  and  it 
would  be  necessary  for  you  to  send  us  the  slip  to  locate  the  purchase. 

Mr.  William  A.  Hopkins,  East  Saginaw,  Mich. 

DEAR  SIR: — I  send  you  herewith  a  blank  form  of  report,  which  I  wish 
made  out  by  you  in  full  and  sent  to  the  superintendent's  office  daily.  You 
will  note  the  word  "time"  at  the  bottom  of  the  page,  and  a  place  to  mark  the 
time  when  you  send  this  to  the  superintendent's  office.  Also  the  time  it  is 
received  there.  This  is  done  to  insure  prompt  delivery.  We  have  had 
several  complaints  of  late  of  cars  not  getting  around  on  time,  and  hope  in 
this  way  to  avoid  it  in  future. 


(loth  day.)  THURSDAY,  JUNE  i3th,  1879. 

Miss  Dora  Weir,  5918  Hanlon  St.,  Baltimore,  Md. 

DEAR  Miss: — In  further  reply  to  yours  of  the  3oth  ultimo,  in  reference 
to  the  third  installment,  we  have  written  to  Mr.  Evans,  and  he  acknowledges 
that  you  paid  him.  The  contract  which  we  hold  from  you  makes  the 
installments  payable  at  this  office,  and  we  do  not  want  you  to  make  any 
further  payments  to  anyone  outside  of  this  office,  as  we  will  not  be 
responsible  for  remittances  made  to  other  parties  than  ourselves.  Hoping 
there  will  be  no  future  misunderstanding,  we  are,  Yours  truly. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


149 


..[.....  ^^ 

q      QV     ""^>  /  </  au     ^/       v    I   ^oX 

.^L. .  tc..d*  ^...V:...)  j...i._  ^ .^..^...s....^. 

\    l/^--'    r~4       )    I  I    • 

y  .--•,.*.,,,.      s    \J       —    v   f\t    •«. 

"^      "^          ^t^C*T*^^4'    ^ 

...v£,  X^ A 

f  ^ 

-^  t*i^.P 

i 

" V  "      

^        -7  ,  1 

0>...  _   ...6...(n     \^>    L 


\~?      .     r    *^o 

-* r 


i5o  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

The  George  J.  Grimm  Co.,  Glendale,  Miss. 

GENTLEMEN: — Replying  to  your  favor  of  recent  date,  we  beg  to  say 
that  we  do  not  object  to  signing  the  contract  sent  us,  provided  you  will 
except  the  clause  which  states  that:  "We  have  not  sold/'  etc.,  as  we  are  free 
to  admit  that  during  the  present  year  we  have  in  numerous  instances  given 
our  best  discounts  to  parties  buying  in  smaller  quantities  than  one  gross. 
Hence,  it  will,  in  this  case,  be  necessary  to  apply  the  old  adage,  "  Let 
bygones,"  etc.  Very  respectfully. 

(nth  day.)  FRIDAY,  JULY  i4th,   1880. 


Drs.  Q.  6°  E.  Venner,  59  Paternoster  Row,  London,  E.  C.,  England. 

DEAR  SIRS: — I  have  sent  you  by  to-day's  mail  an  electrotype  of  the 
inclosed  copy  of  advertisement,  which  please  insert  in  your  paper  for  one 
month  as  per  your  quotations  of  recent  date,  for  which  I  inclose  check. 

Please,  by  return  mail,  give  me  rates  of  one  year's  insertion  of  this  cut, 
upon  receipt  of  which,  if  satisfactory,  I  will  send  you  contract  for  one  year's 
insertion  instead  of  one  month. 

Awaiting  your  reply,  we  are,  Most  faithfully  yours. 

M.  Zab risky  6-  Co.,  Dallas,  N.  C. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  your  note  of  the  i3th  inst. 

Our  experience  in  sending  out  goods  by  express  without  prepayment. 
has  been  unfortunate.  In  so  many  instances  they  are  returned  to  us  and 
we  are  compelled  to  pay  express  charges  both  ways  that  it  makes  the 
business  as  a  whole  unprofitable,  and  we  have  abandoned  it.  If  goods  are 
not  as  represented  by  us,  we  are  always  willing  to  exchange  them  and  make 
them  right,  but  we  must  insist  on  payment  in  advance,  particularly  where 
these  goods  are  to  be  taken  from  a  piece  and  the  value  of  them  very  much 
diminished  by  doing  so.  Respectfully  yours. 

(i2thday.)  SATURDAY,  JULY  i5th,  1881. 

The  Patent  Ramrod  Mfg.  Co.,  Montgomery  City,  Mo. 

GENTLEMEN: — Absence  in  Philadelphia  has  prevented  an  earlier  reply 
to  your  favor  of  the  first  of  May,  received  at  Chicago  a  few  days  after  I 
had  started  for  Philadelphia. 

I  shall  be  pleased  to  form  the  Acquaintance  of  your  manager  when  he 
arrives  in  Chicago,  and  to  discuss  arrangements  and  hear  what  you  may 
have  to  say  additional  on  the  subject  stated  in  my  former  letter. 

Whether  I  can  make  any  arrangements  in  reference  to  your  ramrod 
machinery  or  not,  you  are  at  liberty  to  use  any  portion  of  my  letter  as  a 
testimonial  that  you  may  care  to. 


Messrs.  W.&  V  O.  Tcttler,  Jacksonville,  Or. 

GENTLEMEN: — Yours  of  the  i3th  inst.  received  and  noted.     \Vc;  ~:ave 
made  all  entries  to  bring  our  ledger  to  conform  to  yours.     In  regard  to  the 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


I 


\ 


r    V, 


I    A 


...TC^'.N  .°^o  .../...  \  6  c 


152  HAVENS   PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 

two  accounts  of  Johnson  &  Co.  and  F.  C.  Duvall  we  are  not  quite  clear. 
The  Johnson  &  Co.  error  must  have  occurred  in  April,  and  was  carried 
forward  into  next  month's  balance  sheet. 

As  it  appears  to  be  an  error  in  posting,  we  yet  fail  to  see  how  you  could 
fetch  the  May  balance.  Please  itemize  these  errors  and  the  counter  errors 
of  14  cents. 

Your  early  attention  will  oblige. 

(i3th  day.)  MONDAY,  AUGUST  soth,  1882. 

Mr.  F.  Cecil,  Maysville,  Grant  Co.,  W.  Va. 

DEAR  SIR; — I  gave  Haas  &  Co.  an  order  to-day  for  linen  as  per  inclosed 
list.  You  will  also  perceive  I  bought  sheeting  from  them.  We  compared 
samples  with  those  you  sent,  and  thought  their's  the  better.  If  you  know  of 
any  lower  prices  at  which  any  of  these  numbers  have  been  sold,  try  and 
get  ours  just  as  low. 

Stir  Bernard  Ulman  people  up  about  our  goods.  We  need  everything 
ordered  badly.  Ship  by  express. 

Let  me  know  Berner's  price  for  plaid  cottons,  29  to  30  inch  widths. 
I  buy  here  at  8^.  I  want  a  case  of  one  style  they  have  if  I  can  secure  it. 

Messrs.  P.  Elverson  6°  Nephew,  Lock  Box  R,  Montreal,  Canada. 

GENTLEMEN: — Acknowledging  your  favor  of  the  i6th,  which  nas  just 
come  to  hand  on  account  of  its  having  been  directed  to  Chattanooga,  would 
say  that  we  would  be  pleased  to  quote  you  on  sash-weights  in  5,000  or 
10,000  pound  lots  at  $19.50  per  ton,  F.  O.  B.  here;  in  carload  lots  'of  15,000 
pounds,  $19,  F.  O.  B.  here. 

We  make  a  large  variety  of  weights  in  sizes,  and  those  with  a  handsome 
and  perfect  eye.      We  have  sold  quite  a  good  many  in  your  territory,  and 
would  be  pleased  to  fill  your  orders  for  such  a  quantity  as  you  may  desire. 
.  Hoping  to  hear  favorably  from  you  at  an  early  date,  we  remain, 

Respectfully. 

(i4th  day.)  TUESDAY,  SEPTEMBER  2ist,  1883. 

C.  Naylor,  Esq.,  Box  49,  Salt  Lake  City,  Utah. 

DEAR  SIR: — Yours  at  hand.  Early,  in  the  week  values  of  pig  lead 
here  were  weaker,  and  sales  were  made  at  3.75.  Latterly  there  is  a  firmer 
feeling;  3.80  is  freely  bid,  with  3.85,  3.87^,  3.90  asked. 

The  amount  of  lead  offering  is  very  small,  and  it  would  not  surprise  us 
to  see  higher  values  rather  than  lower. 

Lead  at  London  still  continues  strong,  and  since  our  last  circular  a  rise 
of  ;£i  per  ton  is  recorded.  There  is  no  question  now  but  what  lead  is  in 
strong  hands  and  £\$  will  be  reached  before  a  halt  takes  place.  The 
general  impression  is  that  lead,  with  other  metals,  is  good  property. 

Messrs.  L.  Ulberman  6°  Sons,  Oil  City,  Penn. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  your  letter  of  the  igth  in  which  you  state  that 
you  can  not  allow  8  per  cent,  discount,  and  ask  us  to  remit  what  you  call 
a  balance  of  three  dollars  and  nine  cents  ($3.09)  on  our  bills  of 
August  igth  and  2ist,  duplicates  of  which  you  have  sent  us. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


'53 


%  -o/7\^  _~\-  )•  I  .Zr.        of  ~> 

T 

• '•-**  H 

,  \ 

""(""C"i>' 

C  —^    j\^        <. 

k 

i  

I  r\  *-^ 

v^  x      k*1-^^  I      V-?0*^V 


154  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

The  terms  of  the  above  bills  are  written  thereon — seven  off,  ten,  sixty 
days  dating.  The  extra  i  per  cent,  charges  in  your  statement  is  for  the 
sixty  days'  interest  for  prepayment.  If  you  are  not  willing  to  allow  interest 
at  the  rate  of  6  per  cent,  per  annum  for  prepayment  of  post  dated  bills,  please 
advise  us,  and  hereafter  we  will  not  remit  until  maturity  of  bill. 

(i5th  day.)  WEDNESDAY,  OCTOBER  22d,  1884. 

Mr.  X.  Idler,  Hortonsville,   Wis. 

DEAR  SIR: — I  received  a  letter  this  morning  inclosing  a  remittance  with 
the  above  name  signed  and  the  town  of  Hortonsville,  but  no  State  named, 
and  the  envelope  was  marked  so  poorly  by  the  postmaster,  from  whose 
office  the  letter  was  sent,  that  I  could  not  get  the  State  name  from  that  source. 

I  find,  however,  there  is  a  town  named  Hortonsville  in  Wisconsin,  and  I 
therefore  send  to  that  town  the  article  desired.  If  it  should  happen  to  reach 
you,  please  remember  in  the  future  not  only  to  write  your  name  plainly  to  every 
communication  you  send  out,  but  be  sure  always  to  give  your  address  in  full, 
including  State  and  county,  especially  when  you  send  money.  This  precau- 
tion will  save  you  and  others  considerable  inconvenience. 

JV.  Smith,  Esq.,  Fargo,  Dak. 

DEAR  SIR: — The  popularity  of  our  Impervious  Packages  has  induced 
others  to  offer  for  sale  packages  represented  to  be  the  same  as  ours.  All 
Impervious  Packages  made  by  us  are  fully  protected  by  U.  S  patents,  of 
which  we  are  sole  owners,  and  are  the  only  Wood  Packages  that  can  be  so 
prepared  as  to  be  impervious  to  oil  without  infringing  on  our  patents. 

In  all  cases  of  infringements,  dealers,  users,  and  manufacturers  are 
alike  liable  under  the  law.  Therefore,  for  your  own  protection,  we  respect- 
fully caution  you  against  all  Impervious  Packages  represented  to  be  the 
same  as  ours;  also  against  infringements  on  any  of  our  patents. 

See  that  all  Impervious  Packages  offered  you  are  made  by  the  Impervious 
Package  Co.,  and  bear  their  name.  All  others  are  imitations  or  infringe- 
ments. 

(i6th  day.)  THURSDAY,  NOVEMBER  23d,  1885. 

Messrs  Z.  I .  Gypson  6°  Co.,  Box  S,  Melbourne,  Australia. 

GENTLEMEN: — We  have  your  letter  dated  November  iQth  acknowledging 
•)ur  remittance  of  $32.87  in  settlement  of  bill  of  September  2d,  signed 
•'  Z.  I.  Gypson  &  Co.,  per  Snyder,"  and  in  Snyder's  hand-writing  the 
following  : 

"Gentlemen: — You  took  off  more  discount  than  we  allow  for  extra 
dating.  After  this  please  take  off  at  the  rate  of  6  per  cent,  per  annum." 

The  terms  of  payment  endorsed  upon  the  above  bill  are  as  follows: 
•' 7  off  10  after  Nov.  ist."  This  made  the  bill  due  Nov.  nth.  You  had 
the  money  in  your  hands  on  the  23d  of  September. 

Deduct  Sept.  23  from  Nov.  n  leaves  49  days.  The  face  of  the 
invoice  is  $35.63.  Seven  per  cent,  discount  from  $35.63  leaves  $33.13^. 
The  interest  on  $33.13^  for  49  days  at  6  per  cent,  per  annum  is  a  fraction 
over  25  cents.  We  remitted  you  $32.87.  Respectfully. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


'35 


V  t  ,      V"  * 

...v> r • — - 


156  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

Rev.  D.  E.  Yorick,  El  Paso,  Texas. 

DEAR  SIR: — Inclosed  you  will  find  a  postal-card  which  I  have  received 
and  sent  circulars  to.  At  the  same  time  I  wrote  to  the  party  giving  your 
name  as  my  Texas  agent.  It  would  probably  be  best  for  you  to  write  to, 
or  call  upon  him  and  see  if  you  cannot  obtain  his  order.  He  should  at  least 
have  a  set  of  your  circulars. 

Have  you  got  the  copy  ready  yet  for  the  special  circular  you  were  think- 
ing of  getting  out?  You  may  have  it  printed  in  your  town,  but  be  sure 
to  send  us  a  few  copies  of  it,  that  we  may  keep  track  of  what  is  being  done 
in  Texas,  and  place  same  on  file. 

We  think  you  are  making  a  mistake  in  making  special  use  of  the  No.  o 
circular  in  preference  to  the  No.  453,  but  as  you  are  on  the  ground  and  get 
a  better  chance  to  feel  the  pulse  of  the  business  portion  of  your  State  than 
we  do,  we  suppose  you  are  in  a  position  to  know  best. 

Let  us  have  your  weekly  reports  promptly,  and  oblige. 

(iyth  day.)  FRIDAY,  DECEMBER  3oth,  1886. 

Misses  K.  <5j°  L.  Armour,  Marion  C.  H.y  S.  C. 

MESDAMES: — We  have  the  inclosed  statement  in  which  you  request 
us  to  "  kindly  note  terms  on  invoice." 

You  will  observe  by  the  duplicate  invoice  which  we  inclose  that  these 
goods  were  bought  2  off  10,  as  of  Oct.  15,  making  the  bill  due  Oct.  25.  We 
remitted  for  the  goods  Sept.  23,  deducting  the  2  per  cent,  commission, 
and  a  ^  of  i  per  cent,  for  interest  for  the  thirty  days. 

Would  it  not  be  a  better  plan  for  you  to  note  on  the  page  of  your  ledger 
on  which  our  account  is  inscribed  the  terms  upon  which  you  sell  us  our 
respective  bills,  and  thereby  save  us  the  trouble  and  annoyance  of  looking 
up  these  matters,  only  to  find  that  they  are  settled  correctly  ? 

In  looking  up  this  bill,  however,  we  find  that  there  was  a  charge  of 
$1.80  for  packing-cases  which  was  overlooked  by  us  and  not  deducted 
from  the  bill.  This  amount  we  charge  back  to  you  and  will  deduct  from 
the  next  purchase.  Respectfully  yours. 

G.  U.  Kline,  Esq.,  Mt.  Holly,  N.  J. 

DEAR  SIR: — We  have  your  letter  of  the  29th,  and  note  contents.  We 
regret  the  occurrence  as  much  as  you  do.  We  wanted  the  goods  as  ordered 
because  they  were  cheap,  and  our  trade  needs  them  at  the  present  time. 

It  is,  however,  one  of  the  invariable  rules  of  the  house,  from  which  we 
never  depart  under  any  circumstance  whatever,  to  reject  every  shipment  of 
goods  that  is  not  fairly  within  the  order,  and  particularly  where  there  is  any 
attempt  to  force  upon  us  a  greater  quantity  of  goods  than  we  ordered. 

In  this  case  there  were  nearly  twice  as  many  goods  sent  us  as  we 
ordered  from  your  Mr.  Bach,  and  a  line  of  goods  which  under  no  circum- 
stances do  we  want. 

We  do  not  know  where  the  fault  lies,  whether  it  was  in  Mr.  Bach  pre- 
suming that  if  you  sent  the  goods  we  would  keep  them,  or  not. 

Next  time  you  have  any  dealings  with  us  you  will  understand  better, 
and  know  that  it  is  no  use  to  send  us  goods  we  do  not  order.  In  fcct  it  is 
worse  than  useless,  as  it  defeats  the  sale  of  the  goods  we  did  order,  which 
we  return  with  the  others  on  principle.  Respectfully. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


1S7 


f,Vr_> 

""* f"\'         «...-•••  '"j"' 

^|    "    i       9        C~"  C^<-M  %  ^^ 

>-^    \    o<. . ..  n  c   I ivTTv  ..[ I.. 

'  J  I 

\          W  V      ~>  \     TO     V  I    O     ^  ~    \_  \fS  ^~O~~     "^-s 

'^'; V'"  "1" 

S"       3- 

•-••L. 
^.^ .V^^x.r 

7  O     d     *       *^*\      /** 

jv 

W '"         """  >.    £*•••  |  •-.    -*••(, 


158  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

(i8th  day.)  SATURDAY,  DECEMBER  3ist,  1890. 


Mr.  Y.  Otter  ly,  Jr.,  9314  Broadway    'Veiv  York  City. 

DEAR  SIR  :  —  We  have  your  letter  of  the  28th  and  note  contents.  It 
would  be  a  useless  bother  ""  i  trouble  for  us  to  keep  a  bank  account  in  New 
York.  If  New  York  mercrutits  would  rather  have  checks  on  New  York  in 
payment  of  our  bills,  it  would  be  much  easier  for  us  to  send  them  the 
drafts  of  our  bank  here  on  New  York  for  payment  of  their  bills. 

We  send  our  own  check  as  a  matter  of  convenience,  and  it  is  all  nonsense 
for  people  in  New  York  to  claim  that  our  checks  on  our  bank  here  are  not 
current  in  New  York,  or  that  they  have  to  wait  until  payment  of  those 
checks  before  the  amounts  are  passed  to  their  credit. 

There  has  not  been  an  hour  since  the  firm  of  Jones,  Doyle  &  Co.  com- 
menced business  that  exchange  on  New  York  has  not  been  from  ten  to  fifty 
cents  on  the  thousand  dollars  discount  at  our  banks  here  in  Chicago,  and 
when  the  merchants  with  whom  we  deal  tell  you  that  a  bank  in  New  York 
will  refuse  to  take  a  check  from  Chicago  on  deposit,  which  is  worth  from 
one-tenth  to  one-half  per  cent,  premium  in  New  York  funds,  it  is  simply 
absurd. 

When  you  take  into  consideration  that  every  bill  of  this  firm  is  settled 
every  Monday  morning,  averaging  less  than  four  days  from  the  time  the 
goods  are  received,  it  ought  to  be  a  satisfactory  method  of  dealing  to  the 
merchants  in  New  York,  and  if  not,  we  can  manage  to  buy  in  Chicago. 

Mr.  S.  Quarterman,  Montpelier,  Vt. 

DEAR  SIR  :  —  Your  favor  of  the  z6th  instant  at  hand;  also  the  news- 
paper. The  article  is  partially  correct.  This  company  has  increased  its- 
capital  stock  to  $725,000,  and  bought  out  the  Salt  Lake  City  and  San  Fran- 
cisco owners  of  the  mine. 

The  writer's  interest  was  merged  into  the  present  company,  who  now 
own  and  control  the  mine. 

The  company  is  composed  of  St.  Louis,  Akron  and  Hamburg,  Ger- 
many, stockholders.  Up  to  the  time  of  purchase,  this  company  was  simply 
the  selling  agent.  Col.  Conger,  Thomas  Welch,  Judge  Grant,  and  C.  P. 
Cobbs  are  of  the  members  of  this  company  at  Akron.  We  have  no  idea  of 
forming  a  trust,  but  expect  to  run  our  business  independently  from  any 
other  similar  concern. 

We  have  been  doing  considerable  exporting,  but  expect  to  push  it  still 
more.  Egyptian  Asphaltum,  here  as  well  as  abroad,  has  declined  in  conse- 
quence to  six  and  one-half  cents  per  pound,  and  in  isolated  cases,  even  a 
trifle  lower.  We  have  also  made  practical  tests  lately  in  the  way  of  paving, 
which  have,  so  far,  in  all  cases  proved  a  glorious  success. 

The  price  of  the  mine  is  $111,000;  the  size  of  the  fissure  as  stated  is 
substantially  correct. 

It  is  five  and  one-half  feet  wide,  but  tapers  gently  at  both  ends.  It 
can  be  worked  for  eleven  thousand  feet,  for  it  has  been  opened  at  that 
distance.  The  deposit  is  in  a  true  fissure-vein,  consequently  it  will  prob- 
ably not  be  known  in  our  life-time  how  deep  it  runs.  So  far  the  fissure  is 
vertical,  without  any  indications  of  the  dip.  Very  truly. 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 


'59 


v_x  L_ 

)x.       e/vv^V          ^  ~       /  \ 

\r      "^® 

^ ir..v. 

\.         • 
—S 

^J-^ -•"••• 

ip 


160  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

ACTUAL  COURT  CASES. 

A  great  many  young  shorthand  writers  hesitate  to  enter  the  field 
of  law  reporting,  and  even  to  accept  an  occasional  case  when  offered 
them,  for  fear  their  lack  of  knowledge  of  law  forms  will  prevent  them 
from  producing  a  transcription  satisfactory  in  form,  and  they  also  some- 
times hesitate  because  they  fear  they  will  not  know  how  to  proceed  up- 
on entering  the  court  room. 

The  ranks  of  the  court  reporters  are,  therefore,  because  of  this  fear, 
mostly  made  up  of  young  people  who  first  assist  an  experienced  law 
reporter,  or  they  come  from  the  army  of  young  clerks  who  are  em- 
ployed in  law  offices  as  amanuenses  or  law  students.  This  latter  class 
become  familiar  with  court  proceedings  through  their  office  connec- 
tions, and  what  is  simple  to  them  in  legal  proceedings  is  often  a  matter 
of  a  great  deal  of  mystery  to  the  ordinary  aspirant  for  legal  phonogra- 
phic honors. 

As  the  author  of  this  work  had  to  struggle  against  this  fear,  he  has 
thought  it  worth  while  to  explain  away  in  this  book  all  the  supposed 
difficulties,  so  that  a  student  of  this  book  will  know  exactly,  in  his  very 
first  case,  how  to  correctly  proceed  without  ever  having  seen  a  court 
room  or  a  legal  form. 

Prefatorily  speaking,  these  things  are  all  a  matter  of  common 
sense — scarcely  more — and  there  is  just  as  much  difference  of  opinion 
among  lawyers  in  regard  to  style  in  transcription,  and  just  as  many  de- 
grees of  ignorance  among  them  as  in  any  other  vocation,  from  brick- 
laying up.  Therefore,  when  an  inexperienced  stenographer  is  asked  if 
he  will  report  a  case.the  re  is  no  need  of  his  refusing,  if  he  has  the  speed 
and  the  time  at  his  disposal.  If  he  can  write  120  words  a  minute  from 
new  miscellaneous  matter,  he  can  report  in  full  ninety-nine  cases  out  of 
a  hundred  occuring  in  any  court.  The  difficulties  of  court  reporting 
are  greatly  magnified.  It  is  very  often  easier  than  some  office  short- 
hand work. 

With  this  necessary  preparation,  therefore,  he  can  confidently 
accept  the  case,  and,  having  ascertained  date,  hour  and  place  where  the 
trial  is  to  be  held,  and  the  name  of  the  case,  he  needs  no  more  informa 
tion  until  the  day  set  for  the  trial  or  hearing.  On  that  date,  unless  he 
is  to  accompany  the  lawyer  from  the  latter's  office,  he  should  be  on 
hand  a  few  minutes  before  the  time  set  for  calling  the  case.  The  court 
and  counsel  are  seldom  on  time  themselves,  but  the  new  reporter  had 
better  be,  and  the  later  the  others  are,  the  more  time  the  new  reporter 
will  have  to  become  accustomed  to  his  surroundings. 


HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY.  lt>I 

THE  REPORTING. 

Having  entered  on  time,  the  reporter  should,  if  the  trial  is  to  be  lei ' 
in  a  court  room,  take  his  place  at  one  of  the  tables  within  the  enclo- 
ure,  as  near  in  front  of  the  judge's  desk  as  possible,  just  under  it  in  facf 
unless  that  is  reserved  for  some  officer  or  clerk,  etc.,  and,  as  soon  as  th'- 
lawyer  who  has  hired  him,  enters,  he  should  ascertain  from  that  lawyer 
if  possible,  the  names  of  the  different  counsel  who  are  to  be  employed 
on  that  case,  as  well  as  the  exact  and  full  title  of  that  case.  Such  a  re- 
quest is  no  evidence  of  a  lack  of  knowledge  of  law  proceedings,  but  wil< 
rather  be  considered  by  the  lawyer  as  an  evidence  of  your  desire  to 
please  him  by  wording  the  title  after  his  preferred  style,  if  he  has  any, 
and  by  it  you  will  learn  a  proper  legal  form,  which  will  enable  you  to, 
although  ignorant  of  all  legal  forms,  gain  that  much  knowledge. 

We  present  such  a  form  on  page  174,  of  which  we  will  speak  later. 

Do  not  hesitate  to  ask  any  questions  of  this  kind,  putting  them,  if 
you  prefer,  in  a  way  that  will  convey  the  impression  that  you  simply 
want  to  please,  not  that  you  need  the  information,  although,  as  a  matter 
of  fact,  a  wise  man  never  fears  to  ask  for  information. 

You  should  be  sure  to  obtain  the  name  of  the  judge,  the  name  of 
the  court,  the  number  cf  the  case,  the"  term  of  court,  the  names  of 
plaintiff  or  plaintiffs,  defendant  or  defendants,  parties  which  -have  at 
times  different  titles.  For  instance:  The  plaintiff  may  be  the  Common 
wealth  or  may  be  called  The  People,  or,  in  probate  cases,  the 
contestant  or  contestants;  while,  incases  of  appeal,  the  party  appealing 
is  called  the  complainant  or  appellant,  in  which  latter  case,  the  other 
side  would  represent  the  appellee.  These  are  terms  which  will  be 
more  readily  understood  at  the  time  of  a  trial,  than  here.  In  criminal 
cases,  you  must  also  get  the  name  and  address  of  every  juror,  as  they 
must  necessarily  be  given  in  the  title  to  your  transcription. 

All  this  information  should  be  obtained,  if  possible,  before  the  case 
is  on,  though  some  of  it  may  be  gotten  at  intervals,  or  directly  after  the 
case,  but  it  must  be  had  before  a  correct  transcription  can  be  made,  and 
the  name  of  the  counsel,  or  any  person  taking  part  in  the  case,  must  be 
known  before  they  speak  in  the  case,  else  you  will  not  be  able  to  write 
their  names  in  your  note  book  properly  before  their  remarks,  which 
must  be  done.  Your  lawyer  can  best  give  you  the  information,  ex- 
cepting the  names  of  the  jurors,  which  you  should  get  as  they  are  chosen 
in  your  presence  or  afterwards  of  the  clerk  or  from  the  court  records 

Having  obtained  as  much  information  regarding  title  of  case,  etc.. 
as  can  be  obtained  before  the  case  comes  up;  then,  by  sitting  no  tarther 


162  HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHS. 

removed  from  your  lawyer  than  possible,  you  can  ask  him  to  point  out 
those  different  individuals  whom  he  knows  about  to  take  part,  at  least 
the  lawyers  engaged  in  the  case,  and  then  you  should  observe  them 
closely,  note  their  different  intonation  of  voice,  their  location  at  the 
tables,  and  anything  else  that  will  serve  to  fix  their  voices  and  person- 
alities in  your  memory,  so  that,  when  one  asks  or  says  anything,  during 
the  progress  of  the  case,  even  though  you  may  be  looking  at  your  notes, 
you  will  know  who  is  speaking,  and  get  his  name  properly  before  his 
remarks  in  your  note  book,  for  you  cannot  depend  upon  your  memory 
to  put  a  name  down  afterwards,  and  there  are  sometimes  a  great  many 
interruptions  in  a  case,  one  lawyer  often  interfering  during  the  examina- 
tion of  a  witness  by  another,  and  you  will  have  to  know  in  an  instant 
who  is  speaking,  so  that  the  transcription  will  present  it  properly. 

When  the  witness  takes  the  stand,  you  must  be  sure  to  catch  his 
name  properly,  and  the  spelling  of  it  as  well,  bearing  in  mind  that  you 
have  some  rights  in  that  court  room  as  well  as  other  people:  that  you 
are  there  for  business  and  your  business  is  to  make  a  correct  report,  to 
which  end  the  judge,  counsel,  and  witnesses  must  lend  their  aid.  There- 
fore, no  matter  if  everybody  else  understands  who  the  witness  is,  that 
does  not  preclude  you  from  asking  for  information,  if  you  do  not  your- 
self understand  whom  he  or  she  is,  and  you  must  ask  the  witness  either  to 
speak  louder  in  pronouncing  his  or  her  name  or  to  spell  it  for  you,  or 
both,  as  may  be  -necessary.  You  have  a  right  to  know  these  things, 
and  should  not  permit  any  false  modesty  to  keep  you  from  obtaining 
the  information,  when  needed,  though,  as  a  rule,  what  the  lawyers  hear 
you  can. 

When  a  witness  is  called,  his  name  is  generally  spoken  by  the 
counsel  or  crier,  but  after  he  is  sworn,  he  is  also  asked  his  name,  so, 
while  you  may  not  get  it  when  he  is  b3ing  first  called,  you  will  hav^ 
this  second  opportunity  (when  he  takes  the  stand)  to  get  his  name,  but 
you  must  get  it  then  in  full,  and  perfectly,  as  well  as  any  other  answer 
of  his  which  is  given  during  the  course  of  the  trial.  You  must  hear  all 
evidence,  and  if  you  do  not  hear  it  distinctly,  any  portion  of  it,  either 
question  or  answer,  you  have  a  right  to  ask  for  its  repetition,  and  if  you 
are  going  to  do  justice  to  the  person  who  employes  you,  it"  is  your  duty 
to  do  this.  It  does  not  matter  how  many  official  stenographers  are 
present,  they  will  not  help  you,  and,  sometimes  they  may  take  pleasure 
in  doing  just  the  reverse.  Many  of  them  cannot  make  a  verbatim  re- 
port— holding  their  places  by  political  influence  solely,  and  possibly 
could  not  help  you,  as  many  cases  the  court  does  not  require  to  be 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  163 

transcribed,  even  though  your  employer  may  desire  a  transcription. 
In  any  case,  you  should  conduct  yourself  as  if  it  all  depended  on  you. 
No  matter  how  unskillful  other  reporters  may  be,  you  should  aim  to 
make  an  absolutely  verbatim  report. 

Just  here  it  is  well  to  state,  though  perhaps  rather  disappointing  for 
those  aspirants  to  know  who  have  a  high  idea  of  the  profession,  that 
there  are  very  few  strictly  verbatim  shorthand  reporters  in  the  world, 
either  in  courts,  conventions  or  legislative  assemblies,  notwithstanding 
the  large  number  that  are  supposed  to  be  so.  The  author  has,  in 
courts,  conventions,  and  legislative  assemblies,  sat  beside  many 
experienced  shorthand  writers,  with  world-wide  reputations,  writing 
all  the  popular  systems,  and,  following  their  pencils  with  his  eyes,  has 
never  yet  seen  one  of  them  make  a  verbatim  report  where  great  speed 
was  necessary,  while  he  has  seen  them  omit  words  frequently  and 
sometimes  entire  sentences,  which  they  could  not  get,  they  depending 
on  the  impossibility  of  any  one  detecting  the  omissions  in  their  tran- 
scription; because  even  a  writer,  much  less  a  speaker,  can  not  re- 
member ail  the  words  he  or  she  uses,  and  hence  would  seldom  discover 
in  omission.  Those  professionals  themselves  laughed  at  these  things, 
when  the  author  pointed  out  the  discrepancies  in  their  notes,  for  it  is 
such  a  common  matter,  and  systems  are  generally  so  faulty,  that 
many  members  of  the  profession  have  lost  all  faith  in  a  sufficiently 
rapid  system  of  shorthand  to  meet  all  emergencies. 

This  was,  however,  always  a  matter  of  serious  concern  to  the  au- 
thor, and  it  is  to  these  known  deficiencies  in  all  other  systems,  even  in 
the  hands  of  the  greatest  stenographers  of  the  age,  that  HAVEN'S 
PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY,  with  its  possible  speed  of  over  300  words  a 
minute,  greater  than  any  ordinary  rapidity  of  human  utterance,  owes  its 
existence,  presenting  the  only  system  of  shorthand  available  for  every 
purpose  and  every  occasion,  and  with  the  legibility  of  print  if  correctly 
written. 

As  an  illustration  of  how  defective  are  all  other  systems  of  short- 
hand, and  how  impotent  many  of  the  supposed-to-be  best  reporters  of 
the  country  are,  where  great  speed  is  required,  there  happened,  in  a  cer- 
tain important  case,  in  a  certain  city,  to  be  employed  three  long  experi- 
enced reporters,  whose  reputations  were  national  in  character,  the 
supposition  being  that  they  had  no  superiors  whatever  in  their  profes- 
sion. Their  experience  extended  over  thirty  years  in  each  case;  two 
of  them  had  been  legislative  reporters  for  much  of  that  time,  one  in 
Congress  and  another  as  orHciai  reporter  for  a  certain  state  legislature; 


i<54  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

while  each  were  long  practiced  in  courts  and  had  possibly  covered 
every  field  of  work  in  their  time.  They  presented  in  themselves  the 
highest  possibilities  of  the  Pitman,  Munson  and  Graham  systems,  and 
each  happened  to  be  hired  by  different  parties  to  the  suit  in  ques- 
tion. One  was,  and  had  been  for  years,  the  official  shorthand  reporter 
of  the  court  in  which  the  case  in  point  was  tried,  and  of  course  was  re- 
porting for  the  court  at  the  time.  The  other  two  were  respectively  en- 
gaged by  the  plaintiff  and  defendant,  neither  of  whom  cared  to  rely 
on  any  stenographer  not  solely  employed  for  that  occasion  by  them- 
selves, so  important  was  the  case.  None  of  the  lawyers  doubted  the 
skill  of  either  of  the  stenographers,  for  there  were  no  better  known,  but 
they  each  desired  to  run  no  chances  of  treachery — they  preferred  to 
possess  their  own  transcription. 

Unfortunately  for  those  stenographers  whose  weak  points  were 
thus  discovered,  the  lawyers  of  one  side  were  not  satisfied  with  the  de- 
cision of  the  court,  the  case  was  appealed,  and  the  testimony  there- 
fore ordered  written  up,  it  being  done  in  this  case  separately  by  each. 
So  much  was  at  stake  in  this  case  that  the  lawyers  studied  their  tran- 
scriptions very  carefully,  and  each  side,  in  their  briefs,  quoted  from 
their  separate  transcriptions  such  entirely  conflicting  statements  of 
witnesses,  that  the  judge  ordered  a  comparison  of  the  three  separate 
reports  to  be  made,  resulting  in  the  discovery  that  no  two  of  them  were 
alike  in  every  particular;  each  had  made  many  omissions  of  a  different 
nature,  and  in  some  instances  what  should  have  been  the  same  para- 
graphs were  astonishingly  varying.  The  three  separate  transcriptions 
of  the  noted  and  expensive  stenographers  could  not  even  be  dove- 
tailed to  make  a  complete  report,  and  the  case  had  to  be  re-tried. 

This  is  no  exaggeration,  but  an  unfortunately  true  illustration  of  the 
condition  of  nine-tenths  of  the  most  skillful  members  of  the  steno- 
graphic profession  today,  a  condition  which  only  the  universal  adoption 
of  this  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY  can  change.  In  other  words, 
there  are  very  few  verbatim  reports  made  with  the  crude  systems  of 
shorthand  that  are  in  use.  The  ordinary  official  court  stenographer 
depends  too  much  on  the  fact  that  the  testimony  is  generally  too  bulky 
for  anybody  to  wade  through  it  sufficiently  closely  to  discover  omis- 
sions, and  that  most  witnesses  cannot  remember  all  they  have  said. 
Furthermore,  that  it  often  does  not  make  any  difference  unless  the 
case  is  appealed,  for  otherwise  the  evidence  is  not  written  out.  But 
this  course  will  not  do  for  the  stenographer  with  a  reputation  to  make, 
and  though  others  have  shortcomings,  the  ambitious  should  not  indulge 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  l6$ 

in  such  false  security,  but  should  be  pains-taking  and  see  that  an  exactly 
verbatim  report  is  made. 

Questions  and  answers  should  be  clearly  shown  in  the  reporter's 
notes,  the  names  of  the  questioners  being  written  outside  the  perpen- 
dicular marginal  lines  of  the  note-book  paper  written  on,  as  shown 
in  our  shorthand  court  pages;  the  question  following  it,  and  the  an- 
swer commenced  a  good  distance  from  the  question,  the  writer  not 
permitting  any  answer  to  run  back  over  one-half  the  distance  of  the 
paper,  no  matter  how  many  lines  it  would  require.  When  a  lawyer's 
name  is  written  once  to  a  question  it  need  not  be  written  again,  while 
he  is  questioning,  but  when  another  person  interrupts  him,  then  the 
name  of  the  party  interrupting,  whether  court  or  counse1,  should  be 
shown  in  the  margin,  and  then  before  every  interruption  made  or  when- 
ever a  new  person  speaks,  that  person's  name  must  be  written  before 
his  remarks,  but  need  not  be  written  again  unless  an  interruption  occurs 

If  you  write  the  name  of  the  case  and  other  particulars  in  short- 
hand on  your  book  or  paper,  before  commencement  of  the  case,  you 
can  write  it  almost  anywhere  commencing  with  the  margin  as  shown  in 
our  shorthand  plates,  but  when  such  information  is  written  out  in  trans- 
cribed form,  observe  the  forms  shown  in  our  type  pages  opposite  our 
shorthand  plates. 

Objections  can  be  taken  in  full  or  not,  as  you  prefer,  and  should  be 
written  so  that  they  will  not  interfere  with  testimony;  only  remem- 
ber it  is  not  necessary  to  transcribe  such  matter,  literally  for  simply 
the  words  "Objected  to"  and  'Objection  overruled"  or  "Objection  sus- 
tained" as  the  case  may  be,  are  generally  sufficient. 

The  first  witness  put  on  the  stand,  in  any  case,  is  always  the  wit- 
ness for  the  plaintiff,  and  that  witness  belongs  to  the  lawyer  or  lawyers 
conducting  the  plaintiff's  side,  or  the  prosecution,  as  the  case  may  be; 
hence,  the  questions  asked  by  that  lawyer  of  that  witness,  are  known  as 
Direct  Examination  or  Examination-in-Chief  and  so  with  any  witness, 
whether  for  one  side  of  the  case  or  the  other,  the  lawyer  who  placed 
the  witness  on  the  stand  is  the  one  who  conducts  the  "Direct  Examina- 
tion." In  other  words,  the  Direct  Examination  or  the  Examination-in- 
Chief  of  any  witness  is  always  those  questions  asked  by  the  lawyer  who 
places  him  on  the  stand,  and  for  the  side  he  is  testifying;  so  that,  in  any 
transcription,  the  Direct  Examination  comes  first  after  any  witness' 
name.  It  is  the  opposing  lawyer  always  who  conducts  the  Cross-Ex- 
amination,  and  if  the  lawyer  takes  his  own  witness  again  and  asks  fur- 
ther questions,  then  that  is  Re-Direct-Examination;  and  when  the 


166  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

opposing  counsel  after  this  asks  other  questions,  that  is  Re-Cross-Ex- 
amination.  Further  questions  by  the  lawyer  whose  witness  is  on  the 
stand,  would  be  "Re-Re-Direct,"  and  in  the  same  way  further  questions 
by  the  opposing  counsel  would  be  "Re-Re-Cross-Examination,  but  it  is 
very  seldom  that  any  witness  goes  beyond  Re-Direct  or  Re-Cross-Ex- 
ami-nation.. 

When  a  lawyer  simply  makes  an  interruption,  of  one  or  two  ques- 
tions, they  are  not  put  under  a  separate  head  in  the  examination,  but 
are  simply  shown  where  they  occur,  as  on  pages  183  and  185  in  this 
book. 

The  case  of  the  plaintiff  is  generally  headed  Testimony  for  the 
Plaintiff,  or  for  the  State,  or  for  the  Prosecution,  or  for  the  Appellant, 
or  for  the  Contestant,  according  to  the  sort  of  case.  When  that  side 
of  the  case  is  all  presented,  the  lawyer  for  the  plaintiff  either  states 
that  their  evidence  is  closed,  or  else,  which  is  more  likely,  they  say, 
"We  rest,"  in  which  case  the  plaintiff  implies  that  their  case  is  done 
for  the  present.  The  evidence  for  the  other  side — the  defense — then 
begins,  and  at  the  end  of  their  case  they  may  state  that  they  rest  their 
case.  If  the  lawyer  for  the  plaintiff  thinks  they  have  made  a  good 
case,  or,  have  no  more  witnesses,  it  generally  ends  there,  and  the 
arguments  begin;  but,  if  a  plaintiff  desires  to  present  additional  testi- 
mony, then  that  part  of  the  case  is  called  the  Rebuttal  and  must  be  so 
headed;  and,  if  the  other  side  then  desires  to  combat  this  Rebuttal 
evidence  by  further  testimony,  that  testimony  in  defense  is  called  Sur 
Rebuttal. 

When  the  evidence  is  all  in,  the  words  "Case  Closed,"  should  be 
written  at  the  end  of  the  report.  In  that  case  the  arguments  of  counsel 
begin,  which  need  not  be  reported  unless  the  counsel  agree  to  pay  you 
for  same,  because  argument  is  not  evidence  and  it  is  only  evidence  and 
the  decision  of  the  court  that  counts  in  a  case  at  law. 

The  judge's  charge,  however,  if  he  has  not  got  it  written  out,  should 
be  taken  verbatim,  or,  if  having  it  written,  he  makes  any  verbal  remarks 
in  connection  with  it,  they  must  be  taken  verbatim,  but  any  portion  he 
reads  from  manuscript,  either  part  or  all,  need  not  be  taken. 

THE  TRANSCRIPTION. 

The  first  thing  to  be  done  in  making  a  transcription  of  evidence,  is  to 
make  a  heading  of  the  form  of  those  shown  in  the  printed  pages  through- 
out the  court  cases  in  this  department  of  the  book,  the  parties  to  the  suit 
being  stated  at  the  upper  left  hand  corner  of  the  first  sheet,  but  not  too 
near  top — say  at  a  distance  of  about  two  inches  from  the  top  of  the 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  167 

legal  cap  sheet,  commencing  the  name  of  the  court  opposite  it,  be- 
ginning in  the  middle  of  the  line;  on  the  next  line,  the  judge's  name 
and  the  case  number;  then,  just  as  you  would  commence  a  letter,  write 
the  name  of  town,  state  and  date  on  the  next  line.  Near  the  beginning 
of  the  left  hand  side  of  the  sheet,  name  the  appearances,  (that  is,  the 
l;i\vvers  of  each  side  of  the  case)  on  separate  lines;  then  you  should 
make  in  the  center  of  a  line  the  words  "Testimony  for  Plaintiff"  as  on 
page  175,  or  "for  Commonwealth,"  according  to  the  sort  of  case,  and 
next  line  to  that,  flush  with  left-hand  side  of  page,  state  the  first  wit- 
ness' name,  with  the  customary  words  "being  duly  sworn,  testified  as 
follows"  or  words  to  that  effect,  as  shown  in  the  different  instances  of 
these  court  cases;  then,  on  the  next  line,  centre  a  heading  entitled 
Direct  Examination  or  Examination-in-Chief,  and  on  next  line  flush, 
the  name  of  the  lawyer  conducting  that  examination,  and  on  the  next 
and  other  lines  after  that,  commence  questions  and  answers  a  little  in 
from  the  left-hand  end  of  the  lines,  each  question  and  answer  on  a  separ- 
ate paragraph,  as  in  our  printed  pages,  176  to  220;  or  the  answers  in  the 
same  paragraph  as  the  question,  as  on  page  1/5,  if  you  so  prefer.  But 
you  will  find  there  is  more  money  in  making  separate  paragraphs,  for 
both  questions  and  answers,  and,  if  the  transcription  is  made  in  type- 
writing, which  should  be  the  case,  make  the  lines  wide  spaced,  if  pos- 
sible, for  when  done  by  the  folio,  a  legal  cap  sheet,  whether  wide  or 
narrow  spaced,  is  counted  as  2}^  folios,  each  folio  being  supposed  to 
contain  a  hundred  words,  the  page  itself  being  counted  as  250  words, 
whether  wide  or  narrow  spaced,  so  there  is  no  need  of  writing  it  narrow. 

The  laws  of  different  states  vary  in  regard  to  the  legal  rate  for  law 
reporting,  and  some  states  have  no  law  at  all  on  this  subject.  The 
general  price,  however,  is  twenty  to  twenty-five  cents  a  folio  for  a  com- 
plete ordinary  transcription,  which  would  be  from  fifty  to  sixty-two 
cents  a  page.  In  such  instances,  a  reporter  is  not  expected  to  charge 
anything  for  attendance  in  court,  except  at  a  session  where  there  is  no 
evidence  taken  at  all,  or  nothing  to  write  out,  in  which  case  a  good  re- 
porter charges  ten  dollars  a  day  for  such  attendance,  or  five  dollars  for 
half  day,  unless  the  rate  is  set  by  law.  Sometimes  a  contract  is  made 
with  separate  provision  for  time  and  transcription — that  is,  five  to  ten 
dollars  per  diem  for  attendance  and  ten  cents  a  hundred  words,  or 
twenty-five  cents  a  legal  cap  page,  for  transcription;  the  net  payment 
being  about  the  same  as  25  cents  a  folio  with  no  charge  for  attendance. 

This  is  where  one  copy  only  is  furnished.  Where  additional  copies 
oi  the  testimony  are  desired,  and  the  request  for  them  is  made  to  the 


168  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

reporter  before  he  commences  to  write  out  tha  case,  he  is  expected  to 
charge  five  cents  a  page  for  each  carbon  duplicate  copy  made  at  the 
same  time  that  he  makes  the  original  copy;  but,  if  an  order  is  given 
after,  and  an  original  duplicate  is  requested,  the  price  for  an  original 
duplicate  is  generally  ten  cents  a  legal  cap  page.  The  regular  price 
used  to  be  ten  and  five  cents  per  folio  for  duplicates;  but,  at  present, 
owing  to  the  existence  of  numerous  typewriting  copying  offices,  carbon 
duplicates  have  been  reduced  to  that  price  per  page. 

In  making  your  first  page  of  transcription.be  sure  to  skip  a  line  be- 
fore the  date,  also  between  the  date  and  the  appearances,  between  the 
appearances  and  the  heading  Testimony  for  Plaintiff,  between  that 
heading  and  the  first  witness'  name,  and  between  the  latter  and  the 
words  Direct  Examination,  as  shown  in  the  type-written  example  on 
page  175,  and,  if  you  are  writing  on  legal  cap  paper  that  has  a  double 
line  at  the  left  hand  margin,  such  as  is  seen  in  our  court  shorthand  plates, 
let  all  your  writing  be  placed  to  the  right  of  that  double  line;  but,  if  you 
are  writing  on  a  paper  with  no  such  ruled  margin,  you  can  write  the 
regular  width  of  the  machine,  starting  all  questions  or  other  new  para- 
graphs five  typewriter  spaces  (about  half  an  inch)  to  the  right. 

Always  leave,  on  all  pages,  a  space  about  two  inches  from  the  top 
of  the  sheet,  so  that  when  the  pages  are  bound  at  the  top,  which  is  the 
case  with  legal  cap  paper,  no  writing  will  be  covered.  This  will  also 
give  you  an  opportunity  to  render  a  bill  for  a  larger  number  of  pages 
than  would  otherwise  be  the  case.  Number  every  page  at  bottom. 

Whenever  there  is  a  break  in  the  testimony,  such  as  shovvn  by  the 
interruption  in  illustration  on  page  176,  skip  a  line,  whether  it  be  to  state 
an  objection  or  to  show  an  interruption  of  any  kind.  Place  "Objected 
to"  and  similar  descriptive  words,  on  lines  by  themselves,  preceded  and 
followed  by  spacing,  in  the  same  way  as  the  instances  shown  through- 
out the  cases  in  this  book.  Always  skip  a  line  before  a  new  heading, 
such  as  "Cross  Examination,"  etc. 

On  the  second  or  subsequent  day  of  a  trial,  it  is  not  necessary  to 
write  a  new -heading  on  first  page  of  the  case.  See  page  200. 

It  is  best  to  skip  two  or  three  lines  preceding  the  introduction  of 
the  testimony  of  a  new  witness,  if  it  is  put  on  same  page  as  another's,  and 
so  with  such  portions  of  the  case  as  "Rebuttal"  or  "Sur-Rebuttal;"  but,  if 
these  would  occur  below  the  center  of  the  page,  it  is  best  to  commence 
them  on  a  new  page.  The  opening  of  the  defense  should  always  be 
commenced  on  a  new  page  and  generally,  though  not  always,  the 
Charge  of  the  Court. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  169 

After  all  this  testimony  is  transcribed,  then  you  want  to  prepare  a 
full  title  page,  an  index  of  the  evidence,  if  there  are  several  witnesses, 
and  make  a  backer  for  the  case,  or  for  each  different  day  of  the  case,  if 
it  be  a  long  one.  There  are  illustrated  such  a  title  page  and  index  to 
evidence,  as  well  as  a  couple  of  backers,  on  pages  172  to  174,  of  this 
portion  of  the  book.  The  title  and  index  are  sometimes  placed  on  one 
sheet,  but  if  the  index  be  very  long,  the  title  may  be  put  alone  on  a 
page  and  the  index  on  the  next  or  as  many  other  pages  as  may  be 
necessary,  though  such  index  should  be  on  the  same  kind  of  paper  as  the 
testimony;  the  name  of  the  court,  date  and  term  being  at  the  top,  when 
the  title  and  index  are  on  the  same  page.  Put  the  date  at  the  bottom 
of  the  page,  when  the  title  is  alone  on  the  page,  the  name  of  the  case 
being  in  brackets  at  the  left  hand  center  near  top  and,  under  that,  the 
appearances,  or  not,  as  the  case  may  be;  and  when  the  title  is  thus 
alone  on  a  page,  other  little  particulars  may  be  added  at  option,  and,  if 
it  is  a  criminal  case,  the  names  of  the  jurors. 

The  index,  whether  it  is  placed  on  the  title  page  or  not,  follows  the 

title  and  contains  columns  for  the  witnesses'  names,  and  for  the  placing 

of  the  page  number  whereon  will  be  found  the  Direct  Examination, 

Cross  Examination,  Re-direct  Examination,  and  Re-Cross  Examination, 

in  case  the  testimony  should  go  that  far),  of  each  witness. 

Where  there  is  a  Rebuttal,  the  Rebuttal  follows  further  down  on 
the  regular  index,  and  if  the  same  witness  shall  have  testified  both  in 
the  general  case  and  in  the  Rebuttal,  that  witness'  name  would  appear 
in  both  places,  and  in  Sur-Rebuttal,  still  further  down,  if  he  should  be 
there  called.  See  illustration  on  page  174. 

To  keep  the  transcript  of  evidence  clean  and  intact,  heavy  stiff 
board  backers,  generally  colored,  are  used,  which  may  be  obtained  of 
any  stationer  or  of  a  type-vyriter  agency,  for  cases  which  are  so  large 
that  they  cannot  be  folded,  in  which  case  the  title  page  which  we  have 
described  must  be  duplicated  on  that  front  board  cover,  and  sometimes 
where  the  index  to  the  testimony  is  short,  that  is  also  included  on  that 
cover.  This  may  be  written  with  a  type-writer  or  engrossed  with  a  pen 
but  some  reporters  with  a  great  deal  of  work  have  blanks  printed  which 
they  fill  out  to  suit  the  case.  This,  however,  is  not  necessary. 

When  the  case  is  small  enough  to  allow  the  testimony  to  be  folded 
and  filed  away  like  deeds  and  other  legal  documents,  then  the  backing  is 
made  on  heavy  colored  paper,  and  a  brief  description  of  the  title  only 
given,  as  in  Figure  2  of  the  two  backers  shown  on  page  172.  When  the 
title  page  is  thus  abbreviated  it  must  only  be  when  the  full  title  page  is 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 

written  on  the  first  white  sheet  within  the  cover,  according  to  preceding 
general  directions  and  illustration  on  pages  173  and  174. 

Hearings  in  chambers  or  before  Masters  in  Chancery,  depositions, 
etc.,  should  be  treated,  as  far  as  evidence  is  concerned,  precisely  as  a 
case  in  court,  with  the  exception  of  the  omissions  of  Plaintiff  and 
Defendant  headings,  as  here  such  testimony  is  ex  parte,  and,  therefore 
we  do  not  need  any  such  words  as  Testimony  for  Plaintiff  to  be  shown 
on  the  transcription,  the  deposition  or  evidence  simply  starting  with  the 
witness'  name,  if  there  be  more  than  one  witness,  and,  if  only  one,  then 
simply  starting  off  something  as  follows:  "In  answer  to  interrogatories) 
the  witness  deposed  and  stated  as  follows;"  then,  on  next  line  "Direct 

Examination,"  and  on  line  after  that  "By  Mr.  ,"  after  which 

follows  the  questions  and  answers,  as  in  a  regular  case;  and,  when  any 
papers  are  introduced  as  evidence,  either  in  these  cases  or  in  court,  such 
papers  are  marked  for  identification,  either  by  the  judge,  one  of  the 
lawyers,  or  the  court  reporter— such  marks  being  "Exhibit  i"  or  "2"  or 
"3,'*  as  the  case  may  be,  sometimes  naming  the  lawyer  who  introduced 
them,  as  "Exhibit  I,  Eastman,"  meaning  the  first  exhibit  of  Mr.  East- 
man. Often,  instead  of  figures,  letters  are  used,  such  as  "Exhibit  A" 
or  "Exhibit  B,"  etc.  When  such  documents  are  handed  to  the  reporter 
for  marking,  the  reporter  should  mark  across  the  back  of  them,  some- 
what like  this:  "Exhibit  i"  or  "2,"  "A"  or  <;B"  Eastman,  then  the  date 
in  figures  like:  "I,  19,  92,"  followed  by  the  reporter's  own  name,  and 
sometimes,  the  case  name  in  brief,  like:  N.  Y.  C.  R.  R.  Co.  vs.  Patrick 
Henry. 

As  soon  as  a  witness  has  made  such  a  deposition  in  chambers,  the 
reporter  should  hand  his  note  book  to  the  witness,  and  get  the  witness 
to  sign  that  testimony,  which  act  signifies  the  termination  of  it,  and  is 
an  endorsement  to  the  evidence  given.  This  is  not  done  in  court. 

By  attentive  notice  of  the  variations  in  the  Actual  Court  Cases 
and  illustrations  of  them,  presented  in  this  part  of  our  book,  any  in- 
telligent phonographer  can  make  a  correct  transcription,  title  page, 
and  backer,  for  any  case  that  can  occur  any  where;  for  he  or  she  should 
bear  in  mind  that  while  the  particulars  named  are  necessary  to  be  in- 
cluded in  such  transcript,  still  it  is  a  fact  that  there  are  a  great  many 
differences  of  opinion  and  preferences  regarding  style  among  lawyers. 
and  even  if  you  should  arrange  these  matters  somewhat  differently 
from  what  the  lawyer  you  are  working  for,  would  arrange  them,  re- 
member you  are  just  as  apt  to  do  it  better  than  he  can  by  giving  your 
own  ideas  of  originality  a  chance,  and  are  more  apt  to  produce  this 


HAVEN'S   PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY.  irr 

sfifect,  than  you  are  to  displease  mm  for,  as  a  rule,  lawyers  know  more 
about  points  of  law  than  they  do  tnese  little  particulars  just  mentioned, 
which  they  generally  leave  to  their  clerks  and  take  very  little  notice 
of,  as  long  as  it  gives  the  information,  and  unless  it  be  better  done  than 
they  ever  saw  it  done  before,  which  is -most  likely  to  be  the  case,  if  you 
will  follow  the  directions  given  in  this  book,  improving  on  them  where 
you  can,  for  most  reporters  and  law  clerks  are  sadly  deficient  in  these 
respects,  a  fact  which  was  particularly  shown  at  the  time  of  the  first 
introduction  of  the  type-writing  machine,  which  opened  up  a  field  for 
the  making  of  neat  transcripts  unthought  of  before. 

These  title  pages,  both  inner  and  outer,  and  the  index,  may  be 
ornamented  with  double  lines  and  red  ink  ruling,  if  the  reporter  has 
an  eye  for  ornament,  although  these  matters  are  more  adapted  to  the 
make-up  of  deeds,  mortgages,  and  other  legal  documents  for  which  a 
big  price  is  paid  and  a  little  extra  time  expended  upon. 

While  we  are  about  it,  we  might  as  well  add  that  many  lawyers  are 
as  poorly  posted  on  the  making  of  legal  forms  as  they  are  on  proper 
sort  of  transcriptions,  and  if  they  have  a  well  posted  clerk,  rely  on 
him  for  this  minutia,  or  else  consult  Corbin's  Book  of  Forms,  which 
contains  all  legal  farms  and  is  as  necessary  to  a  lawyer  as  a  dictionary 
is  to  an  editor,  and  can  be  bought  by  -any  one,  so  that  the  shorthand 
writer  who  desires  to  post  himself  on  legal  forms,  can  purchase  and 
possess  in  that  book  an  unimpeachable  authority.  When  he  purchases 
that  book,  which  can  be  done  from  any  publisher  of  law  books,  he  will 
have,  in  one  publication,  more  and  better  information  than  any  lawyer 
has  time  to  or  can  give  him. 

Some  reporters  profess  to  beneve  in  the  advisability  of  editing 
their  court  transcripts.  To  this  :  he  author  would  say,  that  such  a 
mode  of  treating  court  notes  is  not  only  inadvisable  but  highly  im- 
proper, and  excusable  only  in  a  reporter  who  is  notable  to  take  all  the 
testimony.  It  matters  not  how  ungrammatical  either  witnesses,  lawyers 
or  judges,  talk,  the  stenographer  has  no  right  to  change  the  wording; 
neither  has  he  a  right  to  omit  unimportant  or  superfluous  words,  such 
as  the  words  "well,"  "now,"  or  other  words  with  which  some  lawyers 
begin  their  questions. 

It  does  not  matter  how  bad  the  English  is,  the  duty  of  the  reporter 
who  uses  shorthand  is  to  make  a  verbatim  report,  and  if  he  omits  those 
unimportant  words,  the  fact  of  the  omission  casts  suspicion  on  the  en- 
tire transcription,  while  the  attempt  to  edit  in  any  other  way,  may 
have  the  effect  of  interfering  with  the  course  of  iustice,  and,  in  a  crim- 


172 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


inal  case,  a  man's  life  may  hang  on  the  turn  of  a  word,  while,  in  all 
cases  of  appeal,  where  the  decision  for  a  new  trial  rests  on  the  trans- 
cription, the  change  in  wording  may  work  a  great  injustice  to  either 
party.  The  shorthand  writer,  therefore,  in  the  opinion  of  the  author,  has 
no  right  to  play  the  editor  with  his  transcripts,  as  it  is  his  business 
solely  to  furnish  a  complete  record  of  the  proceedings,  in  the  exact 
language  used  in  evidence,  irrespective  of  grammar  or  rhetoric. 

The  attorney  will  dictate  the  title  page  that  he  desires  for  these  hear- 
ings, so  that  should  be  taken  verbatim,  but  in  case  the  attorney  forgets 
to  start  a  hearing  in  chambers  in  this  way,  the  reporter  should  ask  for 
the  title,  before  the  witness  is  examined,  take  it  down,  and  produce  it 
verbatim,  as  shown  on  page  173. 

Abbreviation  for  a  title  of  a  folded  backer  of  a  deposition  is  shown 
by  Figure  I  below.  Figure  2  is  an  abbreviated  form  for  title  on  folded 
backer  of  a  regular  case.  Change  to  suit  the  case. 


FIGURE  I. 

IN  CHANCERY. 
CIRCUIT  COURT, COOK  CO. 

—  "_"  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  —  •  —  —  —  •.  —  ,••.  _  ^  _  _  _  _  , 

THE   CRANDALLE  COMPANY 

vs. 

THE  WEST  LEXINGTON  RAILWAY  CO. 

THE  WEST  PULLMAN  CITY  RY.  CO. 

Et  al. 

BILL  AND  SUPPLEMENTAL  BILL. 

oo 

SUPPLEMENTAL  BILL. 
Deposit    Ion 

of 

RANDALL  S.  PARKINS,  ESQ., 
April  6,  1883. 


FIGURE    2. 

STATE   OF    ILLINOIS. 
COUNTY   OF   COOK. 


UNITED  STATES 

vs. 
MILLMANN,    ET   AL. 

In  the 
UNITED  STATES  DISTRICT  COURT 

for   the 
NORTHERN  DISTRICT  OF  ILLINOIS. 

oo 

December  3d,  1874. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


173 


IN        CHANCERY. 


THE  CRANDALLE   COMPANY 
vs. 

THE      WEST      LEXINGTON 
RAILWAY   CO., 

THE   WEST   PULLMAN   CITY 
RAILWAY   CO. 

Et  al. 


CIRCUIT  COURT, 
GOOK  COUNTY,  ILL, 


BILL  AND  SUPPLEMENTAL  BILL 

of  the 
CRANDALLE  COMPANY  vs.  THE  WEST  PULLMAN  CITY'  RAILWAY  CO.  ET  AL. 

oo 

SUPPLEMENTAL  BILL. 
DEPOSITION 

of 

RANDAL  S.  PARKINS,  a  witness  produced,  sworn  and  examined  in 
behalf  of  the  Complainant  in  the  Supplemental  Bill,  in 
pursuance  of  a  notice  hereunto  attached,  said  deposition 
to  be  used  upon  the  trial  of  said  cause  and  supplemental 
cause.   Said  deposition  taken  at  the  office  of  said 
witness,  73  Jack  st., Chicago,  April  6, 1883, at  11.20  a.m. 

PRESENT : 

James  Ironwork,  Esq.,  Solicitor  for  the  Complainant. 
W.  A.  March,  Esq..  Counsel  for  Defendants. 


174 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


IN  THE  DISTRICT  COURT  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  FOR  THE  NORTHERN  DIS- 

TRICT  OF  ILLINOIS. 
December  Term,  A.  D.,  1874. 


UNITED   STATES 

vs. 
MILLMANN,  ET  AL. 


Before  Judge  Plancnett. 

Jury  Waived. 
Chicago,  December  3,  1874. 


APPEARANCE?. 

For  the  peopler-U.  S.  Attorney  N.  Wing. 
For  defendant  Abram  Marshall—,!.  White,  Esq. 
"    H      C.  F.  Norton—Wills  &  English. 
"    "       L.  E.  Winters?-"    "   " 
Defendant  W.  A.  Smith  unrepresented  by  counsel. 
Defendant  P.  M.  Green  excused  because  of  a  mistake  in 
the  spelling  of  his  name  in  the  indictment. 


I  K  D  £  X. 


WITNESSES. 

Direct 

Exam. 

Cross 
Exam. 

Re-Direct 
Exam.  ' 

Re-Cross 
Exam. 

FOR  COMMONWEALTH. 

Edward  E.  Charles   - 

1 

17 

19 

William  Butler 

26 

28 

FOR  DEFENDANTS. 

Walter  Hyde  ------ 

31 

40 

51 

52 

R  E  B  U  T  T  A  L. 

/ 

Edward  E.  Charles   -   - 

68 

71 

71 

HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  175 

CHARLES  ROONY        :  COURT  OF  APPEALS. 

vs.       :  Before  Judge  M.  f.  Fondler. 

J.  B.  MOORE  &  CO.   :  Case  No.  2611. 


Camden,  N.  J.,  February  14,  1877  „ 

For  the  Appellant  appear 

Messrs.  Frederick  Love  and  Arthur  T.  Arman. 
For  the  Appellee  appears 

Hon.  Marcus  D.  Werrill. 

TESTIMONY  FOR  PLAINTIFF. 

CHARLES  ROONY,  the  appellant,  being  duly  sworn,  testified  as  fol- 
lows: 

DIRECT  EXAMINATION. 
By  Mr.  Love: 

Q.   What  is  your  name?   A.   Charles  Roonv. 

Q.   Where  do  you  reside?   A.   411  Birch  street,  Camden,  New 
Jersey* 

Q.   What  is  your  occupation?   A.   Am. a  J ourneyman  glass-blow 
er. 

Q.   Have  you  ever  worked  for  any  glass  manufacturer  in  this 
city?   A.   Yes,  sir:  for  Mr.  J.  B.  Moore  &  Co. 

Q.   What  person  hired  you?   A.   Mr.  J.  B.  Moore. 

Q.   What  wages  was  that  firm  paying  its  glass  blowers  at  the 
time  you  were  hired  Dy  Mr.  Moore? 

Objected  to 
as  incompetent  testimony,  the  witness  not  having  qualified. 

Objection  sustained. 

i 

Q.   What  amount  of  pay  per  month  were  you  to  receive  for  your 

labor?   A.   1  was  to  be  paid  ninety  dollars  a  month. 


176  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PIIC:;O'.:R  \PHY. 

FIRST  DAY. 

JOHN  WILLIAMS 


vs.  [•  COURT  OF  COMMON  PLEAS. 

DAILY  NEWS  CO.  )    BEFORE  JUDGE  ALFRED  MARSHALL.    CASE  No.  49. 

TRENTON,  N.  J.,  May  3,  1856. 

For  the  plaintiff  appears  Hon.  J.  L.  Simons. 

For  the  defendant  appear  Messrs.  Black  and  Strong. 

JOHN  WILLIAMS,  the  plaintiff,  sworn  in  his  own  behalf. 

DIRECT  EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Simons: 

Q.     Mr.  Williams,  you  are  the  plaintiff  in  this  suit,  are  you  not? 

A.     I  am. 

Q.     What  public  position  do  you  hold? 

A.     I  am  Sheriff  of  this  count}-. 

Q.  The  article  which  caused  the  present  suit — in  what  newspaper  did 
it  appear? 

A.     In  the  Daily  News,  of  this  city,  date  of  February  roth. 

Q.     Of  what  year? 

A.     This  year. 

To  defendant's  attorneys: 

Do  you  admit  publication;  or,  shall  I  further  prove  it? 
Mr.  Black: 

We  admit  publishing  the  article  in  question. 

To  witness: 

Q.     You  know  the  defendants  well,  do  you  not? 

A.     I  do. 

Q.     Have  you  had  much  intercourse  with  them,  as  a  public  officer? 

A.     I  have  had  up  to  the  first  of  January  of  this  year. 

Q.     Of  what  did  that  intercourse  consist? 

A.  Giving  to  their  paper  the  advertisements  of  the  county  sales  of  'his 
:ounty  for  publication. 

Q.     When  did  you  last  authorize  them  to  print  such  sales' 

A.     Some  time  in  December  of  last  year. 

Q.  Then  you  have  given  then  no  public  printing  on,  nor  since,  the  first 
of  January,  of  this  year? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Had  you  no  advertisements  to  give? 

A.     Yes,  sir.     I  had  quite  a  number  since  last  December. 

Q.  Why  did  you  not  give  such  advertisements  this  year,  as  well  r\s  last 
to  the  Daily  News? 

Objected  to.     Objection  overruled.     Exception  for  defendant. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


177 


=v 

o    <\ 

V 

/..£?„  i 

<To> 

^ 

.\_JJ...L.r 

v— A  *r\ 

-^^...^ i.V-J 

1  "  c  " 

iH~iAw 

l~V>-" : 

In  I    tt  Cm 

,    **-? *.*...         lA^-^\          UP  ...    W     .,..,.      K-/ 

./...-  r.....\ 

"*~*     '  — t  v  1  v  1 

.• V      xv  ...  b \ 

T: s- 

..t..vl  /!,  C. 

~~r        \ 
\ 

\- 

h 
*    I     A 


178  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

SECOND  DAY. 

WILLIAM  JONES  )       COURT  OF  COMMON  PLEAS, 

vs.  -  BEFORE  JUDGE  JAMES  PARSONS. 

STATE  INSURANCE  ASS'N.  J  CASE  No.  506. 

CAMDEN,  N.  J.,  January  5,  1821. 

For  the  plaintiff  appears  Samuel  R.  Taylor,  Esq. 

For  the  defendant  appear  Messrs.  Walters  and  Harvey. 

WILLIAM  JONES,  the  plaintiff,  sworn. 

EXAMINATION-IN-CHIEF. 

By  Mr.  Taylor: 

Q.  What  is  your  name  ? 

A.  William  Jones. 

Q.  Are  you  the  plaintiff  in  this  suit  ? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Where  do  you  reside  ? 

A.  Nineteenth  and  Federal  streets,  this  city. 

Q.  That  is  just  beyond  Cooper's  Creek  Bridge,  is  it  not,  Mr.  Jones? 

A.  Yes,  sir,  in  the  open  country. 

Q.  On  what  is  known  as  the  Moorestown  pike  ? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Do  you  own  property  out  there  ? 

A.  Yes,  sir;  a  farm  of  about-  fifty  acres. 

Q.  On  what  side  of  the  road  is  it,  Mr.  Jones  ? 

A.  On  the  right-hand  side,  coming  out  of  Camden;  that  is,  going  east. 

Mr.  Harvey: 

If  it  please  the  Court,  I  would  like  to  make  a  preliminary  request  that  no 
more  time  be  wasted  on  this  case  than  is  necessary.  General  Wharton,  the 
Vice-President  of  the  State  Insurance  Association,  here  present,  desires  to 
leave  the  town  as  soon  as  possible  on  important  business,  to  be  transacted 
to-day,  at  the  office  of  the  Company,  Newark,  N.  J.,  and  desires  me  to  say 
that  the  location  of  Mr.  Jones'  property  is  not  a  matter  of  defense  with  us, 
and  it  is  furthermore  admitted  by  us  that  the  barn  owned  by  Mr.  Jones,  and 
which  was  burned  on  the  night  of  August  14,  1820,  was  located  on  his  prop- 
erty, wherever  that  may  be,  and  was  the  one  insured  by  us  under  Policy  No. 
7501.  We  simply  differ  in  regard  to  the  valuation  of  the  property  de- 
stroyed, and  hope  questions  will  be  confined  to  that  fact. 

The  Court: 

This  being  understood  by  the  plaintiff,  I  have  no  doubt  he  will  be  glad 
to  take  advantage  of  this  opportunity  of  saving  both  himself  and  the  Court 
valuable  time. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


179 


.  c-v. /...A..VP 

V-k  ^- — •* 


/• 


-\  S>     x-o 

...V 

s_»  o'    c~b  ..  T. 

J  «» 

if  '     i  "  N 

;  K  f  7 .".rr...f.        _^....4  _ 

'^'Te 
I   ' 

•>    i       c^\_     X 
—  I  ,. . TT.. .  vy^  V 

1 

I      /      ^        <^ 
£-....     vo -i....\i^|     ^  x. i     A....\o...<\  o  >     ^~a 


i8o  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

THIRD  DAY. 

FRANKLIN  B.  MILLS  J  COURT  OF  COMMON  PLEAS. 

vs.  [•      BEFORE  JUDGE  WM.  C.  ALBRIGHT. 

JOHN  B.  HENRY.      )  CASE  No.  2506. 

PHILADELPHIA,  Nov.  29,  1831. 

APPEARANCES: 

G.  H.  Lewis,  Esq.,  for  plaintiff. 
Henry  Darcy,  Esq.,  for  defendant. 

FRANKLIN  B.  MILLS,  the  plaintiff,  being  duly  sworn,  testified: 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Lewis: 

Q.     What  is  your  name  in  full,  Mr.  Mills? 

A.     Franklin  B.  Mills. 

Q.     Are  you  the  plaintiff  in  this  case? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     State  your  business,  please? 

A.     I  am  in  the  installment  business. 

Q.     That  is,  you  sell  goods  on  installments  or  periodic  payments? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     All  kinds  of  goods? 

A.     Most  all  household  goods. 

Q.     Where  is  your  place  of  business? 

A.     Nine-hundred-and-five,  and  nine-hundred-and-seven  Lincoln  Ave. 

Q.     Do  you  know  the  defendant,  John  B.  Henry? 

A.     I  do. 

Q.     Have  you  had  business  transactions  with  him? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  several. 

Q.     What  sort? 

A.     He  has  bought  household  goods  of  me  on  the  installment  plan. 

Q.     Did  he  always  pay  for  such  purchases? 

A.     Always,  except  on  the  last  occasion. 

Q.     When  was  that? 

A.  January  i4th,  of  last  year,  he  bought  a  set  of  furniture  of  me  for 
which  he  has  not  paid. 

Q.     Has  he  made  any  payment  on  account? 

A.  I  sold  him  the  set  for  sixty  dollars,  payable  ten  dollars  down  and 
two-dollars-and-fifty-cents  per  week  until  paid.  He  made  the  first  pay- 
ment of  ten  dollars  and  his  first  weekly  installment  of  two-dollars-and-fifty- 
cents,  and  since  then  he  has  paid  me  no  more  money. 

Q.     Did  Mr.  Henry  state  any  reason  for  discontinuing  payments? 

A.     He  gave  me  a  reason;  but  it  is  a  reason  which  I  consider  none. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


181 


0> 

..(J...W V....T , ^-"No 

I 

r V:" 

Vf^ 


V.     £^ 

0 

0 

\ 
/^3    ....  ..,..    _£•   

vjp...C... 

.L,..L..../.V.!^. 1 

— > 

I 

*  "V     i       \  S^-^ 

x-r-^ 

3          O 

I  ° 

, ^'..^^....Va  ... 

»     I      * 

......  ......  ...\  ...  —  "^ 


<*^r        , 


182  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

FOURTH    DAY. 

UNITED  STATES  )  U.  S.   DISTRICT  COURT,  FOR  THE  NORTH- 

vs.  ERN  DISTRICT  OF  ILLINOIS. 

MURPHY  ET  AL.    )  BEFORE  JUDGE  BEE.     [No  JURY.]     CASE  No.  6754. 

CHICAGO,  June  20,  1880. 

SECOND  DAY — MORNING  SESSION. 

MR.  KOST  continuing  his  testimony  of  the  afternoon  before: 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Sling: 

Q.     I  gave  you  numbers  of  cars  yesterday — can  you  tell  me  where  the 
grain  in  those  cars  came  from? 

A.     The  numbers  are  mixed  up  on  my  memorandum  here.     I   have  got 
six  of  them. 

Q.     Shall  I  call  the  number  of  the  car? 

A.     I  think  the  last  three  you  called  are  on  that  slip  there,  from  St.  Toe 
elevator. 
The  Court: 

Give  us  the  numbers  of  those  cars. 
Witness: 

4399,  18263,  JS646.     Those  are  Pink  Line  cars  from  Continental  ele- 
vator, billed  October  26.     If  you  will  give  me  some  of  the  other  numbers,  I 
can  tell  better. 
Mr.  Sling: 

Q.     What  numbers  have  you  there? 

A.     4399,  18263,  15646. 
Mr.  Wallace: 

Does  he  say  those  cars  were  inspected  out  of  the  Pink  Line? 
Mr.  Sling: 

Yes;  will  you  give  the  dates? 

A.     Inspected  October  26. 

Q.     Inspected  October? 

A.     Inspected  out  into  Pink  Line  cars. 

Q.     State  respecting  car  number  35404. 

A.     That  was  inspected  October  27,  from  the  Continental  elevator. 
The  Court: 

Q.     When? 

A.     October  26,  Continental  Fast  Line  cars. 

Q.     12877? 

A.     Just  the  same. 

Q.     8545? 

A.     That  was  the  same. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


183 


.../..v .o.^,.... 


/ 


r 


<r^_, 


A 


,.^..  _(. 

A    i 


.!L 


.L 


.^...^. 


•V 


•X 


.^,.X 


?_/-. 


..^. 


184  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

Mr.  Sling: 

Q.     They  were  all  Continental  Fast  Line  cars,  were  they? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  of  Continental  Fast  Line  cars. 
The  Court: 

Q.     What  is  the  next  number? 
Mr.  Sling: 

Q.     I  am  asking  the  witness  now  about  cars  in  bill  of  lading  number 
20,779. 

A.     Continental  Fast  Line  car  number  9784. 
Mr.  Wallace: 

Q.     Is  that  paper  in  evidence  from  which  you  are  reading? 
Mr.  Sling: 

A.     I  am  reading  from  a  bill   of  lading  that  I  before  inquired  of  the 
witness  respecting  the  numbers  of  the  cars. 
Mr.  Wallace: 

Q.     Then  the  paper  you  are  reading  from  is  not  in  evidence? 
Mr.  Sling: 

A.     It  is  not  necessary  for  me  to  have  it  in  evidence. 

Objected  to.     Court  ruled  that  prosecutor  could  ask  a  question  about  it. 

Mr.  Sling:  [To  witness.] 

Q.     I  ask  you  to  look  at  Continental  Fast  Line  car  number  9784,  and  state 
where  it  was  loaded  from. 

A.     Continental  Fast  Line  car  number  9784  was  inspected  out  of  Con- 
tinental elevator  November  13. 

Q.     Bill  of  lading  number  22389 — now,  if  you  please,  I   inquire   about 
Pink  Line  car  number  2613,  and  ask  you  to  state  where  it  is  from. 

A.     I  have  it  Erie  Line  car  number  2613. 
The  Court: 

Q.     Erie  Line? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     What  was  the  weight  in  car? 

A.     I  can  not  tell  you  the  weight  of  an  individual  car;  can  only  give  you 
weight  of  the  shipment — seven  cars  there  were. 
Mr.  Sling: 

Q.     If  Your  Honor  will  just  leave  that  blank,  I  will  read  it  again  later. 
What  other  numbers  comprise  that  shipment? 

A.     12563,  for  one. 
The  Court: 

Q.     Erie  Line  cars? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  all  Erie  Line  cars;  12563  is  the  first  number. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


185 


T 


O 


IL.V: 

!/A~ ). 


^ K^- 

£3-^  • 


186  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

FIFTH   DAY. 
MALCOM  JACKSON  )  COURT  OF  COMMON  PLEAS. 

vs.  V      BEFORE  JUDGE  D.  D.  SEVERNS. 

DANIEL  C.  KAIN.    )  CASE  No.  61.     JANUARY  TERM,  1874. 

PITTSBURG,  PENN.,  April  2,  1874. 

For  the  plaintiff  appear  Messrs.  Kelly  and  Leach. 
For  the  defendant  appears  Mr.  Bernard  Baker. 

TESTIMONY  FOR  PLAINTIFF. 
MALCOM  JACKSON,  the  plaintiff,  sworn,  testifies  as  follows: 

DIRECT     EXAMINATION. 

Mr.  Kelly: 

Q.     What  is  your  business,  Mr.  Jackson? 

A.     I  am  superintendent  of  a  glass  factory. 

Q.     Are  you  employed  at  present? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  with  James  Whalen  &  Company. 

Q.     Where  were  you  employed  in  1871? 

A.  I  was  employed  from  April,  '71,  to  March,  '73,  by  Mr.  Daniel  C. 
Kain,  trading  under  the  firm  name  of  D.  C.  Kain  &  Company,  Glass 
Manufacturers. 

Q.     What  were  your  duties? 

A.     I  was  general  superintendent  of  their  pot-house. 

Q.     What  were  you  to  get  for  your  services? 

A.  Fifteen  hundred  dollars  per  year.  One  hundred  dollars  per  month, 
as  regular  salary.  The  other  three  hundred  dollars  per  year  were  payable  to 
me  at  the  end  of  the  year,  providing  my  services  were  satisfactory. 

Q.     And  in  case  they  were  not,  how  was  that  to  be  determined? 

A.  Mr.  Kain  was  to  decide  that  himself,  and  if  such  was  his  opinion, 
our  contract  was  to  be  terminated  at  such  date. 

Q.     How  long  was  the  contract  made  for? 

A.     For  one  year,  subject  to  renewal,  on  same  terms. 

Q.  Did  you  get  your  fifteen  hundred  dollars  at  the  end  of  the  first 
year,  that  is,  your  regular  salary  of  one  hundred  dollars  per  month,  and 
the  three  hundred  bonus? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     Did  you  continue  in  service  on  the  same  terms  the  second  year? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Did  you  get  your  three  hundred  bonus,  the  second  year,  in  addi- 
tion to  your  one  hundred  dollars  per  month? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Why  not? 

Objected  to.     Objection  sustained. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


.87 


i88  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

Q.  Did  Mr.  Kain  refuse  to  pay  you  the  three  hundred  dollars  bonus  for 
the  second  year? 

A.     He  did. 

Q.     Did  he  give  any  reason  for  withholding  it? 

A.     Not  to  me. 

Q.     Did  he  say  he  was  dissatisfied  with  your  services  for  the  year? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Did  he  give  you  no  reason  for  terminating  contract? 

A.     No,  sir.     He  did  not  terminate  the  contract. 

Q.     Who  terminated  it? 

A.     I  did. 

Q.     For  what  reason? 

A.     I  had  an  opportunity  for  getting  better  pay  than  my  present  position. 

Q.  Then,  as  far  as  you  know,  Mr.  Kain  was  perfectly  satisried  with 
your  services  for  the  last  year  you  were  with  him? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  you  do  not  know  why  he  refused  to  pay  you  the  three  hundred 
dollars  bonus  due  you  for  the  second  year's  salary? 

A.     Not  unless  he  was  angry  on  account  of  my  leaving  his  employ. 

Answer  objected  to,  and  motion  made  to  strike  from  the  record. 
Objection  sustained.  Motion  taken  under  consideration. 

Q.  Did  you  ever  have  any  conversation  with  Mr.  Kain  in  which  he 
Stated  that  he  would  send  you  a  check  for  the  second  three  hundred  dollars? 

A.     I  had  such  a  conversation. 

Q.     When  was  that  and  where  was  it? 

A.  It  was  in  the  office  of  Mr.  Kain,  at  Chambersburg,  a  few  days  after 
my  second  year. 

Q.     Did  he  say  that  he  would  send  the  money  to  you? 

A.     He  stated  he  would  send  a  check  for  the  amount. 

Q.     Who  was  present  at  that  time? 

A.     I  think  his  son,  John  Kain,  Jr.,  was  present. 

Q.     Do  you  know  how  he  came  to  be  in  the  office  at  the  time? 

A.     He  was  bookkeeper  for  his  father,  at  the  Chambersburg  factory. 

Q.     Who  is  the  bookkeeper  now,  John  Kain,  Jr.? 

A.  Yes,  sir;  he  is  bookkeeper  for  his  father,  John  C.  Kain,  trading  as 
John  C.  Kain  &  Co. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

Mr.  Baker: 

Q.     When  was  this  contract  entered  into  between  you  and  Mr.  Kain? 

A.     Late  in  March,  1871. 

Q.     AVhere  was  it  made? 

A.     In  Mr.  Kain's  office,  at  Chambersburg. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


189 


.rr*-,      ..        -W..XT.     ^    ^  '  "  f 

-^     ^      k^I 

(j 

n 

1  ....:.  .. 
^?: 5^ o-J 

b  I : ~ i-./rrrsv v 

e      ^  o  v-  ^ 

n 

^...l \--A-W |.-Ar^v 

T  6V^\_  1-          \ 

t..\..       .^V..(/rrr?.  y ^...y_^.^../.XT^> 

3 "6"  "  "     "7"" 


19°  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

SIXTH    DAY. 

IN  THE    MATTER    OF   THE    PROBATE   O 


A  PAPER  PROPOUNDED  AS  A  CODI- 
CIL TO  THE  LAST  WILL  AND  TESTA- 
MENT 

OF 


SURROGATE'S  COURT, 

County  of  Camden,  State  of  N.  J. 

BEFORE  HON.  H.  M.  FINTER, 

SURROGATE 
CHARLES  CARTER,  Deceased. 

CAMDEN,  N.  J.,  May  15,  1852. 

For  the  proponent  appears  Mr.  Peter  Day. 

For  the  contestants  appear  Messrs.  Wide  and  Wake. 

DR.  JAMES    LELAND,  a  witness  on  behalf  of  the  proponent,  being  duly 
sworn,  testified: 

DIRECT  EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Day: 

Q.  Dr.  Leland,  did  you  ever  attend  the  testator,  Mr.  Charles  Carter 
professionally  ? 

A.  Yes;  I  was  his  family  physician  for  twenty  years  prior  to  his  death. 

Q.  Where  did  he  reside  during  his  last  illness  ? 

A.  At  1405  Walnut  Street. 

Q.  You  attended  him  until  the  day  of  his  death  ? 

A.  Yes. 

Q.  I  have  a  paper  here  which  I  wish  you  would  look  at  carefully,  and 
tell  me  if  you  ever  saw  it  before  ?  [Hands  paper  to  witness.] 

A.  Yes.   [Examining  paper.]    This  is  a  codicil  to  Mr.  Carter's  will. 

Q.  Is  that  your  signature  ?     [Pointing  to  the  paper.] 

A.  Yes. 

Q.  Did  you  sign  this  document  in  the  presence  of  the  other  witnesses, 

whose  names  are  thereunto  attached  ? 

A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  did  they  sign  in  your  presence  on  the  same  occasion  ? 

A.  Yes;  we  all  signed  our  names  in  the  order  shown  on  the  document, 
one  signing  immediately  after  the  other. 

Q.  Did  Mr.  Carter  sign  first  or  last  ? 

A.  First. 

Q.  In  the  presence  of  those  witnesses  ? 

A.  Yes;  that  is,  he  made  his  mark,  he  was  too  weak  to  write. 

Q.  Was  the  codicil  read  over  to  him  before  he  signed  it  ? 

A.  It  was. 

Q.  The  entire  document  ? 

A.  Yes;  every  word  of  it. 

Q.  In  the  presence  of  yourself  and  the  other  witnesses  ? 

A.  Yes. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


3aCC.i.AA^4 

^.c-.^..^ 


-Q 


c. 


•*-3 


C/.1JU 


I/!!. 


^|. 


,5   x 


cr>.  ^ 

..!..</... 


iQ2  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPH*. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION 

By  Mr.  Wake. 

Q.     You  were  Mr.  Carter's  family  physician  for  how  long  ,' 

A.     About  twenty  years. 

Q.     What  was  the  nature  of  his  last  illness  ? 

A.     Paralysis — cerebral  hemorrhage. 

Q.     Had  he  any  previous  attacks  of  this  malady  ? 

A.     Yes;  several. 

Q.  How  long  was  he  sick  with  this  last  attack — the  one  from  which  he 
died  ? 

A.     About  five  weeks. 

Q.     Was  he  not  unconscious  when  this  codicil  was  signed  ? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     He  had  been  unconscious  a  few  days  before,  had  he  not  ? 

A.     Not  for  ten  days  before. 

Q.  The  first  time  you  saw  him  after  his  last  attack  of  paralysis,  he  was 
unconscious,  was  he  not  ? 

A.     Certainly;  it  was  but  a  few  hours  after  the  attack. 

Q.     Did  he  not  remain  unconscious  for  several  days  ? 

A.  Not  entirely  unconscious;  his  consciousness  gradually  returned 
after  the  day  of  attack. 

Q.  Do  you  recollect  the  date  and  circumstances  attending  the  signing 
of  this  codicil  ? 

A.     Perfectly  well;  the  date  was  the  4th  of  June,  1849. 

Q.     Who  asked  you  to  subscribe  to  this  paper  ? 

A.     Mr.  Carter. 

Q.     How  ? 

A.  I  supposed  he  wished  me  to  sign  the  paper,  and  I  asked  him  the 
qi  2stion  and  he  nodded. 

Q.  Was  Mr.  Carter  able  to  articulate  at  any  time  after  his  last  paralytic 
stroke  ? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Then  you  volunteered  to  act  as  witness  to  the  will  ? 

A.     I  did. 

Q.  Had  you  any  particular  reason  for  supposing  that  you  would  be 
desired  as  witness  ? 

A.  I  was  present  when  the  paper  was  brought  into  the  room  by  Mr. 
Strong,  and  I  think  the  time  for  signing  the  codicil  was  arranged  so 
that  it  should  be  done  when  I  was  present,  in  order  to  have  my  opinion 
about  Mr.  Carter's  mental  ability  at  the  time  of  signing,  and  also  that  I 
might  act  as  witness.  I  am  not  sure  that  anybody  asked  me  to  be  a  witness 
to  it,  but  I  received  the  impression  somehow  that  I  was  to  be  one. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


.c.w^x  ;..!*:...          ...I.?. 


•r-J k 


T-* "•i-i—y- 


•\ 


VH 


194  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

SEVENTH   DAY. 

COMMONWEALTH         )  COURT  OF  OVER  AND    TERMIXER. 

vs.  >    COUNTY  OF  PHILADELPHIA,  PENN. 

GEORGE  BECKETT  ET  AL.  )  SAMUEL  CAMPBELL,  P.  J. 

PHILADELPHIA,  PENN.,  October  u,  1855. 

Prosecutor  William  Matlack  for  the  Commonwealth. 
A.  Carpenter  and  R.  L.  Kerr,  Esqs.,  for  prisoners. 

FIRST    DAY— AFTERNOON  SESSION. 
AUGUST' SCULL,  being  duly  sworn,  testified  as  follows: 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Matlack: 

Q.  What  is  your  name? 

A.  August  Scull. 

Q.  What  is  your  business? 

A.  My  business  is  brass  finishing. 

Q.  Where  do  you  live? 

A.  At  No.  277  South  Street. 

Q.  Did  you  know  Mr.  Charles  Hill  in  his  lifetime? 

A.  I  knew  him  well,  sir. 

Q.  How  well,  or  intimately,  did  you  know  him? 

A.  As  intimately  as  a  man  could  by  having  six  or  seven  years  knowl- 
edge. 

Q.  Where  were  you  in  the  habit  of  meeting  him? 

A.  Up  in  his  office. 

Q.  How  frequently  did  you  see  him  there? 

A.  Well,  for  the  last  year,  I  saw  him  twice  a  week. 

Q.  Where  else  were  you  in  the  habit  of  meeting  him?  Did  you  ever 
meet  him  at  his  place  of  residence? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  About  how  frequently? 

A.  Every  Sunday  for  a  year. 

Q.  That  was  at  Watts',  was  it? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  On  South  Street? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Did  you  ever  meet  him  on  the  street? 

A.  Very  seldom,  except  by  appointment. 

Q.  About  how  often  were  you  in  the  habit  of  meeting  him,  putting  all 
your  meetings  together? 

A.  Two  or  three  times  a  week. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


r. 


•x 


i^ 


\o 


,...to 

r»  £""^      »/*• 


.C.. 


.c..!. 


.c. 


-Vi 


\      ' 


!g6  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

Q.     And  for  how  long  a  period  of  time? 

A.     For  the  last  year. 

Q.     You  knew  him  intimately  and  well,  did  you  not? 

A.     Yes;  and  for  six  years  previous,  but  the  last  year  was  most  intimate. 

Q.     Did  yo,u  see  the  body  lying  at  the  morgue  in  the  month  of  May? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Was  that  on  the  same  day  of  the  discovery,  or  was  it  the  day  fol- 
lowing? 

A.     It  was  the  day  following. 

Q.     At  what  time  of  the  day? 

A.     At  eleven  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

Q.     With  whom  did  you  go? 

A.     With  Samuel  Garrison. 

Q.     Did  you  see  more  than  one  body  lying  there? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Whose  body  was  it  you  saw  lying  there? 

A.     Mr.  Charles  Hill's. 

Q.     What  satisfied  you  that  it  was  his? 

A.  Its  general  appearance  and  contour  and  outline;  I  was  satisfied  it 
was  his  beyond  all  question,  the  moment  I  saw  it;  I  could  not  be  mistaken. 

Q.     What  did  you  know  it  by — specify  what  it  was? 

A.  I  saw  the  small  imperial  under  his  lip,  which  I  knew  he  always 
wore  while  alive;  but  the  body  was  his,  and  I  was  so  satisfied  with  the  gen- 
eral appearance  that  I  had  no  doubt  it  was  the  remains  of  Charles  Hill,  my 
friend. 

Q.     Were  there  any  other  peculiarities  which  you  noticed? 

A.  Well,  he  had  a  peculiarity,  while  living,  a  broken  finger  on  his  right 
hand.  I  noticed  his  hand  lying  across  his  stomach — his  right  hand  was 
lying  across  his  stomach — and  I  noticed  his  finger. 

Q.     How  about  his  hair? 

A.     The  hair  was  a  dark  brown,  and  I  was  satisfied  it  was  Hill's  hair. 

Q.     And  as  to  the  shape  of  the  forehead? 

A.  The  shape  of  the  forehead  was  his.  It  was  unquestionably  the  body 
of  Charles  Hill. 

CROSS  EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Kerr: 

Q.     Have  you  taken  an  active  part  in  the  prosecution  of  the  case? 

A.     Well,  I  believed  I  should  do  so. 

Q.     You  have,  have  you? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  I  have. 

Q.     You  have  given  money  for  this  prosecution? 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


197 


igS  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

A*     No,  sir. 

Q.     You  have  simply  given  your  time  and  attention? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     What  was  the  size  of  the  body  you  saw? 

A.     The  size  of  the  body? 

Q.     Yes,  sir. 

A.     His  height? 

Q.     The  size;  that  calls  for  more  than  the  height. 

A.     He  was  a  large  man. 
The  Court: 

You  misunderstood  the  question;  he  is  talking  about  the  body  as  seen 
in  the  morgue.  Describe  that  body. 

A.     It  was  a  large  body;  it  seemed  to  be  about  6  feet  long. 
By  Mr.  Kerr: 

Q.  I  will  get  at  it  in  this  way.  What  was  the  size  of  Mr.  Hill  in  his 
lifetime — how  high  was  he? 

A.     About  5  feet  n. 

Q.     How  broad  shouldered;  how  was  his  chest,  etc.? 

A.     I  couldn't  give  you  his  width. 

Q.     What  was  his  weight? 

A.     He  weighed  about  180  pounds. 

Q.     About  5  feet  n  in  height? 

A.     Yes;  he  would  weigh  about  180  or  185. 

Q.     What  was  the  size  of  the  body  at  the  morgue? 

A.     Well,  I  should  say  it  was  a  body  of  about  that  size. 

Q.  Do  you  think  you  can  approximate  the  height  of  a  man  by  the 
body  when  it  is  reclining? 

A.     I  think  so. 

Q.     That  is  all. 

The  Court  [addressing  the  State's  Attorney]:  Is  this  your  last  witness? 

Mr.  Matlack:  It  is  the  last  in  order  to-night,  and  it  is  the  hour  of 
adjournment. 

Mr.  Kerr:  May  I  ask  the  prosecution  what  branch  of  the  case  they  will 
be  likely  to  take  up  to-morrow? 

Mr.  Matlack:  I  can  not  tell  yet.  There  will,  however,  be  more  on  this 
line. 

Mr.  Kerr:  I  put  the  question  because  there  are  things  we  want  here 
when  certain  witnesses  are  cross  examined,  and  we  do  not  want  to  keep 
them  here. 

The  Court:  They  will  keep  on  this  line  for  some  time,  and  undoubtedly 
give  you  notice  when  they  get  through.  We  will  now  take  a  recess  until 
ten  o'clock  to-morrow  morning. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


199 


.S-P 

X    V          •*  j     v 

\.J .......  \ 

<x 

...:.!.. 

'io*** 

C  . . . . Js£""b ...,.7../C7i 

6     I  9-^-^.  o — 

-f-~ /v;TH-' L-v..A.rN.x> c^— c.x  .. 

...1 /A <k.V.      -^ 

a  /  \   \ 

x*  "*     *-f          I       /^^  /^"  d^-i  ' 

•..1.....R.... 

,     ; "^t^T 

**3T 

\ 
.6.. 


200  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

EIGHTH   DAY. 

PHILADELPHIA,  Oct.  12,  1855. 

SECOND   DAY— MORNING   SESSION. 
MR.  GEORGE  E.  KROUSE  sworn. 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Matlack: 

State  your  residence  and  business,  Mr.  Krouse. 

A.     I  live  at  474  North  Street,  and  am  a  wholesale  wine  and  liquor  mer- 
chant at  No.  319  Division  Street. 

Mr.  Kerr:  Did  we  receive  the  name  of  this  witness  in  the  list  that  was 
given  us? 

Mr.  Matlack:  Yes,  sir;  I  think  so. 

Mr.  Kerr:  I  think  not. 

Mr.  Matlack:  I  understand  so.     I  think  the  name  is  there,  though  I  am 
not  sure. 

The  Court:  On  what  line  is  he  to  testify? 

Mr.  Matlack:  On  identification. 

The  Court:  Then,  I  will  let  him  testify. 

Mr.  Kerr:  We  have  no  objection  if  it  is  on  that  line. 
Mr.  Matlack: 

Q.     Did  you  know  Charles  Hill  in  his  lifetime? 

A.     I  did. 

Q.     For  how  many  years  did  you  know  him? 

A.     For  about  five  years. 

Q.     Intimately,  or  otherwise? 

A.     Very  intimately. 

Q.     In  what  connection  did  you  know  him? 

Mr.  Kerr  [interrupting] :  I  object.     It  is  not  material. 

Mr.  Matlack:  Did  you  know  him  in  a  business  way,  or  socially,  or  how? 

A.     Socially;  in  society. 

Q.     How  often  did  you  see  him  during  that  time? 

A.     Very  often;  a  couple  times  a  week  in  society  and  meetings. 

Q.     Did  you  see  him  elsewhere? 

A.     Yes,   sir;    entertainments,   and  one  thing  and    another.     We   were 
intimate  friends. 

Q.     In  the  month  of  May,  of  this  year,  did  you  see  the  body  of  a  dead 
man  in  the  city  morgue? 

A.     I  did. 

Q.     Do  you  remember  the  day  of  the  month? 

A.     No,  sir;  it  was  the  day  after  the  body  was  fou«d. 

Q.     What  time  of  the  day? 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


201 


k> ^. L^L..*..:.:.^ .ij^juxi^e 

y^~  a?  L  i 

T   /^ 

o  f 
> 

i 

t, 

k i 

^..~rA.<. .:..*/!:., X.....^. 

-V-v_ 

L*i 


202  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

A.  Just  previous  to  the  post-mortem  examination.  It  was  in  the 
morning. 

Q.     Were  you  alone? 

A.     No;  there  were  five  or  six  of  us  together. 

Q.     Who? 

A.  James  Smith,  Doctor  Forrest,  and  several  of  the  other  doctors; 
and  I  think  you,  Mr.  State's  Attorney,  came  at  the  same  time. 

Q.     Did  you  see  more  than  one  body? 

A.     No,  sir;  that  was  all. 

Q.     In  what  condition  was  that  body? 

A.  The  body  was  in  a  condition  that  as  soon  as  I  looked  at  it  I 
recognized  it  to  be  Mr.  Charles  Hill. 

Q.     Did  you  observe  any  peculiarities  that  attracted  your  attention? 

A.  The  shape  of  his  forehead  and  general  features  and  general  appear- 
ance, because  I  was  so  frequently  with  the  man  and  knew  him  so  well  that  I 
identified  him  as  soon  as  I  looked  upon  him. 

Q.     That  is  all. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Kerr: 

Q.  How  much  hair  was  there  on  his  head? 

A.  Very  little. 

Q.  Indicate  to  the  jury  in  some  way  how  much. 

A.  I  can  not  tell. 

Q.  What  part  of  the  head  was  covered  with  hair? 

A.  Part  of  the  forehead,  I  think;  but  I  didn't  take  much  notice. 

Q.  Generally,  the  head  was  stripped  of  hair,  was  it  not? 

A.  Pretty  much. 

Q.  You  didn't  notice  whether  there  was  any  or  not? 

A.  Yes;  you  could  see  a  few  hairs  remaining. 

Q.  How  about  the  mustache? 

A.  There  was  a  little  part  of  it  on  one  side  yet. 

Q.  How  about  the  eyes? 

A.  You  could  identify  the  eyes. 

Q.  Could  you  see  the  color  of  his  eyes — were  the  eyes  open? 

A.  I  could  not  tell  that  now. 

Q.  Did  you  identify  the  color  of  his  eyes? 

A.  No;  I  did  not. 

Q.  How  about  the  ears? 

A.  I  don't  know,  as  I  didn't  much  notice  his  ears. 

Q.  How  about  the  neck? 

A.  By  his  general  appearance  I  recognized  the  body,  as  I  said  before. 

Q.  What  was  the  condition  of  the  neck,  please? 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


203 


.  Vv-0           |      —  ^ 

r            ^  <  v    - 

^I^V  U~e 

°    ^>                                   vJ>     C      X 

0 

e                    °                 ^  \          N 

^?(ilcw 

\ 
.6          

c- 

../..^..^  rvC  

...^  ./  !r..r  

y  f   lC           ^    " 

H  =  ^'J^           ^  W-^ 

f                     _           f      " 

/       ^-                                                                                                  Q- 

L 

^      V 

)        *                V                 r 

\>  ...  »    c  ..  vx>*.%  ^  »»..»•**•.«»»•••»•  **1  ,.v^w  ..*».....%.».. 

J"          i.  ,j  n  °  ^ 

'      V                                                                                            ' 
„  «/.  i\  ..O..I  

,      v                                                                                                         • 
I          j~-     %, 

0- 

204  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

A.  Pretty  sloped  down,  and  pretty  well  used  up,  the  same  as  the  body. 

Q.  You  looked  at  the  body  closely? 

A.  I  did;  I  walked  around  it. 

Q.  You  looked  at  it  very  closely? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  You  base  your  testimony  on  that  kind  of  a  view? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  That  is  all. 

FRANK  WATTS,  being  duly  sworn,  testified  as  follows: 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Matlack: 

Q.  What  is  your  name? 

A.  Frank  Watts. 

Q.  Where  do  you  live? 

A.  At  present  I  live  at  237  Park  Street. 

Q.  Where  did  you  live  before  you  moved  to  your  present  residence? 

A.  No.  470  North  Street. 

Q.  On  which  side  of  North  Street  was  that  place? 

A.  On  the  east  side. 

Q.  Did  you  know  Charles  Hill  in.  his  lifetime? 

A.  Yes;  intimately. 

Q.  For  how  many  years? 

A.  Between  ten  and  eleven  years. 

Q.  Where  did  you  know  him? 

A.  He  was  a  member  of  my  family  during  that  entire  time. 

Q.  In  what  place? 

A.  In  St.  Louis,  and  afterward  here. 

Q.  You  may  state  whether  or  not  he  was  a  member  of  your  family  in 
the  month  of  May  of  the  present  year. 

A.  He  was. 

Q.  State  whether  or  not  in  that  month  you  saw  the  body  of  a  dead  man 
in  the  city  morgue. 

A.  I  did. 

Q.  When? 

A.  Between  seven  and  eight  o'clock  on  the  22d  of  May. 

Q.  Do  you  remember  the  day  of  the  week? 

A.  On  Wednesday. 

Q.  Who  was  present  when  you  saw  that  body? 

A.  James  Smith,  Dr.  Forrest,  I  think,  and  a  number  of  others,  among 
them  John  Hill,  Charles  Hill's  brother. 

Q.  State  whether  or  not  you  recognized  that  body. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


205 


if 


a. 


206  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

NINTH    DAY. 

GEORGE  BINDER   )  COMMON  PLEAS  COURT. 

vs.  v  BEFORE  JUDGE  JAMES  ATKINSON.     CASE  No.  30? 

HENRY  T.   NAGLE.  )  NEW  YORK,  N.  Y.,  Nov.  6,  1845^ 

Samuel  S.  Stover,  for  plaintiff. 

Charles  Willard  and  Marcus  Tooler,  for  defendant. 

TESTIMONY  FOR  PLAINTIFF. 
GEORGE  BINDER,  the  plaintiff,  being  duly  sworn,  testified  as  follows 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Stover: 

Q.     What  is  your  business,  Mr.  Binder? 

A.     Wholesale  dealer  in  telegraphic  outfits. 

Q.     Did  Henry  T.  Nagle,  the  defendant,  ever  purchase  goods  of  you? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  for  many  years  prior  to  January  29,  1843. 

Q.     Why  did  he  stop  buying  of  you  at  that  date? 

Objected  to.     Objection  sustained. 

Q.     He  stopped  buying  of  you  at  that  date,  did  he? 

A.     He  did. 

Q.     Was  his  account  square  with  you  then? 

A.  It  was  not.  He  then  owed  me  a  balance  of  two  hundred  and  ninety- 
eight  dollars  and  fifty-seven  cents. 

Q.     How  was  this  balance  settled? 

A.     By  a  note  drawn  for  that  amount,  payable  thirty  days  from  date. 

Q.     Is  this  the  note,  Mr.  Binder? 

A.     It  is. 

Q.     Was  it  ever  paid? 

A.  It  was  not,  or  the  protest  would  not  be  written  on  the  pack  01  it, 
and  I  would  not  now  be  in  possession  of  it. 

Q.     Was  no  amount  whatever  paid  on  account  of  that  note  after  protest? 

A.     There  was  not. 

CROSS  EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Willard: 

Q.  Mr.  Binder,  what  does  this  amount,  two  hundred  and  ninety-eight 
dollars  and  fifty-seven  cents,  represent,  and  how  far  back  does  it  date? 

A.  It  dates  back  about  two  years,  or  a  little  over,  and  it  lepresents 
what  Mr.  Nagle  owes  me. 

Q.  I  understand  that  the  last  bill  was  bought  a  few  weeks  previous  to 
the  making  of  this  note — is  that  so? 

A.     Possibly  it  was. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


207 


,  'h 

/}/" 


*\0  i^-fc          I       —        l_j X 

I 
.,±..L.^..O 

•>> .., 

°  -=  <^-,/  c  /,  C          \       'C  F 

O  Q*/ 

'V*  o**"  "  *^ """^> 

\.^>.:... 

...^ LA..^^.X.!\ (.. 

O  -^  J 

^"^     V'"'        I    i  oP  i 

.--TO ?....:  !1..A1 .\2^.>..^_/\  _...^.V-  I 

x>  y  I 

V 

.  ..b  .. 


(- 


2o8  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

Q.  And  that  the  goods  were  delivered  on  the  day  that  the  note  was 
mc.de? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  I  think  they  were. 

Q.     Has  there  been  no  payment  made  on  account  of  this  note? 

A.     I  have  no  recollection  of  any. 

Q.  Do  you  not  recollect  of  one  day  in  January,  of  this  year,  receiving 
twenty-five  dollars  from  Mr.  Nagle  on  account  of  this  note? 

A.     I  do  not. 

Q.     Nor  twenty  dollars? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     And  you  called  for  the  money  several  times,  did  you  not? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  I  did. 

Q.  Did  not  Mr.  Nagle,  on  a  certain  day  in  January,  of  this  year, 
promise  to  pay  twenty-five  dollars  on  account  of  this  note? 

A.  Ma^be  so.  He  used  to  make  about  six  promises  a  week  of  a  similar 
kind. 

Q.  Did  he  not  meet  you  at  Desbrosses  Street  Ferry,  one  day  in'  that 
month,  of  that  year,  and  pay  you  twenty-five  dollars  on  account  of  this 
note? 

A.  I  remember  meeting  him  several  times  at  that  ferry,  but  I  never 
received  any  money  from  him  at  any  time  on  account  of  this  note. 

O  You  are  positive  that  you  do  not  remember  receiving  any  money 
from  Mr.  Nagle  on  account  of  this  note? 

A.     I  know  I  never  did. 

Q  I  believe  you  said  in  your  direct  examination  that  the  note  was  for 
thirty  days? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     This  is  the  note,  I  believe? 

A      It  is. 

Q.     This*note  reads  "  one  month  from  date  " — which  is  correct? 

A.     The  note,  of  course. 

Q.     Then  you  admit  that,  in  this  instance,  your  memory  was  at  fault? 

A.     Well,  as  to  the  thirty  days,  yes. 

Q.  But  not  as  to  having  received  payment  on  account  of  this  note  from 
Mr.  Nagle? 

A.     No;  as  to  that,  I  am  positive. 

O      Of  what? 

A.     Of  never  having  received  any  me  ney  on  that  note. 

Q.  Now,  Mr.  Binder,  do  you  not  remember,  upon  another  occasion, 
in  January  of  this  year,  when  you  called  upon  Mr.  Nagle,  as  he  was  about 
leaving  his  office  upon  an  important  business  engagement,  on  which  occasion 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


209 


o 
•cx..*w^..Va..  ^  ..r»ti/ \ 

'"Co" 

t 

..\\  ir-v —> 

^      I  {^ 

"'(}  "       '*    k 

/v<^Vi..J.--A \^  — jCa/ A_X 

^        P     v 

..G^.A I , 

o*     I  V  u 

v_x...  o.^.C-.^.-N. 

, rvx  ..  .\  .  ..^..  ...^      -.  »  ...,  <^v  \o ..    A  ....O. 

^*'\ 


210  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

he  paid  you  money  on  account  of  this  note? 

A.     I  do  not. 

Q.  What  sort  of  telegraphic  instruments  was  this  last  bill  for — this  bill 
for  goods  delivered  on  the  day  the  note  was  made — what  sort  of  instru- 
ments? 

A.  There  were  some  relays  and  sounders,  and  some  small  articles  which 
I  do  not  now  remember. 

Q.  How  many  of  the  articles  included  in  that  bill  were  returned  to  you 
by  the  defendant? 

A.     None  of  them. 

Q.  Did  not  Mr.  Nagle  come  to  you  on  that  day,  after  the  note  was  given 
you,  and  notify  you  that  the  goods  you  sent  him  were  not  as  represented  and 
that  he  intended  to  return  them  or  some  of  them  to  you  the  next  day? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Did  he  not  return  them  to  you? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  to  say  you  never  received  back  from  Mr.  Nagle  any 
portion  of  the  goods  sent  him  by  you  on  the  day  this  note  was  signed? 

A.  I  most  emphatically  mean  to  say  I  did  not  receive  any  of  my  goods 
back  from  Mr.  Nagle,  after  the  signing  of  that  note. 

Q.     And  never  received  any  complaint  about  them? 

A.     No,  sir;  not  that  I  remember. 

Q.  Ah,  not  that  you  remember.  But  it  might  have  happened,  you 
think? 

A.     No,  sir;  I  do  not  think  so. 

RE-DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Stover: 

Q.  Mr.  Binder,  are  you  positive  that  you  never  received  any  payment 
on  account  of  this  note? 

A.     I  am  very  positive  that  I  did  not. 

Q.  Do  your  books  or  any  memoranda  of  yours  contain  any  such 
entries,  affecting  this  note? 

A.     No,  sir. 

Q.     Would  they,  if  such  payment  had  been  made? 

A.     They  certainly  would. 

RE-CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Willard: 

Q.  Are  you  positive  that  Mr.  Nagle  never  complained  about  your  last 
sale  to  him? 

A.     I  am  very  positive  that  he  never  did,  and  he  never  returned  any  of 

these  goods  to  me. 

PLAINTIFF    RESTS. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


X_>  .  .  ,-3\i/  .. J 

fc..£ 

r®  <TN  '  JV^     *-fT^ 

•*—  *      -^  UJ^ 

..._.~i_n.      |         v^..      .....  "  V^,' 

^..C...1..^. 

„     ^    A 

fc.  ^.^.^.^:...~.^.^. 

~\ 

^e 


2I2  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

TENTH  DAY. 

SECOND  DAY. 

NEW  YORK,  N.  Y.,  Nov.  6,  1845. 
TESTIMONY  FOR  THE  DEFENSE. 
HENRY  T.  NAGLE,  the  defendant,  sworn  in  his  own  behalf. 

DIRECT    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Willard: 

Q.  This  promissory  note,  for  two  hundred  and  ninety-eight  dollars 
and  fifty-seven  cents,  which  you  gave  Mr.  George  Binder,  for  goods  pur- 
chased, did  you  pay  it  when  it  became  due  ? 

A.     I  did  not. 

Q.     Why  not  ? 

A.  Because  I  found  out,  after  giving  the  note,  that  Mr.  Binder  had  not 
sent  me  the  kind  of  goods  ordered,  and  the  goods  were  inferior  to  the 
ones  I  had  previously  bought  at  same  price. 

Q.     Did  you  ever  speak  to  Mr.  Binder  of  this  ? 

A.  Yes,  sir,  repeatedly,  and  sent  the  goods  back  to  him,  but  he  would 
not  receive  them. 

Q.     Did  he  give  you  any  reason  for  not  taking  the  goods  back  ? 

A.     Only  that  he  would  not  receive  them. 

Q.     You  are  positive  that  he  never  gave  any  reason  ? 

A.     I  am  positive  he  never  did  to  me. 

Q.  When  did  you  first  complain  personally  to  Mr.  Binder,  in  relation  to 
the  goods  bought  of  him,  January  29,  1843  ? 

A.  It  was  either  the  first  or  second  or  third  day  of  February,  1843.  I 
received  the  goods  a  day  or  two  after  the  note  was  given,  and  I  called  on 
Mr.  Binder  the  very  day  I  received  the  goods,  but  he  was  out,  so  I  left 
word  for  him  to  call  on  me,  which  he  did  on  either  the  first,  second,  or  third 
of  February,  1843,  and  I  then  complained  personally  about  them.  He  then 
said  he  would  not  receive  them  back. 

Q.     You  asked  him  to  take  them  back,  did  you  ? 

A.     I  did. 

Q.     And  he  positively  refused,  you  say  ? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  positively. 

Q.     Giving  what  reason  ? 

A.     No  reason,  only  that  he  would  not  take  them  back. 

Q.  And  you  say,  because  the  goods  were  not  as  represented  you  refused 
to  pay  this  note  of  two  hundred  and  ninety-eight  dollars  and  fifty-seven 
cents  ? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Did  you  ever  offer  to  pay  Mr.  Binder  what  you  claim  you  rightly 
owed  him  ? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  if  he  would,  from  the  amount  of  the  note,  deduct  twenty 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


213 


1. 


•fcx 


.l.'..v 


V- 


aj,-.^-v_ 


.1. 


214  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

dollars,  the  price  of  the  instruments  I  desired  to  return,  I  was  willing  to 
pay  the  balance. 

Q.  Did  you  offer  this  money  personally  to  Mr.  Binder  on  or  before  the 
day  the  note  became  due? 

A.  I  offered  it  several  times  before,  and  on  the  day  the  note  became 
due,  also. 

Q.     Dtf  he  accept? 

A.     He  did  not;  he  positively  refused  to  accept  the  money. 

Q.     Giving  you  no  reason? 

A.     None  whatever. 

Q.  Did  you  offer  him  the  money  at  any  time  after  the  note  was 
protested? 

A.  I  offered  him,  some  days  after  the  note  was  protested,  the  same 
amount  as  I  had  offered  him  before,  but  I  refused  to  pay  tne  protest  on  the 
note,  and  also  refused  to  pay  for  the  goods  I  didn't  want. 

Q.     And  you  tried  to  return  the  goods? 

A.  I  did,  several  times,  before  and  afterward,  and  am  willing  to  return 
them  yet,  as  I  have  them  in  the  same  condition  as  when  bought. 

Q.  Has  Mr.  Binder,  at  any'  time,  received  any  money  from  you  on 
account  of  your  indebtedness  to  him? 

A.  Twice  on  account;  and  he  was  willing  to  receive  the  amount  I 
offered  him  before  the  note  was  due,  but  he  would  only  receive  that  money 
as  an  account  payment.  He  declined  to  receive  it  with  the  instruments,  as 
a  full  payment. 

Q.     You  say  you  offered  to  pay  that  note  after  it  was  protested? 

A.  I  offered,  after  the  note  was  protested,  to  pay  Mr.  Binder  two 
hundred  and  seventy-eight  dollars  and  fifty-seven  cents  cash,  and  return  the 
goods  not  ordered,  if  he  would  give  me  the  note.  But  I  would  not  pay  the 
protest,  and,  of  course,  I  refused  to  pay  for  goods  that  were  not  the  ones 
ordered.  I  made  this  offer  before  the  note  came  due,  and  the  day  the 
note  was  due,  but  only  once  after  it  was  due. 

Q.     Was  your  offer  accepted? 

A.     It  was  not. 

Q.     Did  you  ever  pay  Mr.  Binder  any  money  on  account  of  this  note? 

A.     I  did. 

Q.     When? 

A.  On  one  occasion — it  was  January  of  this  year — I  paid  him — Mr. 
Binder  —  twenty-five  dollars,  and  again,  on  the  23d  of  same  month,  I 
paid  him  twenty  dollars,  both  amounts  on  account  of  the  bill. 

Q.     Was  that  all? 

A.     That  was  all  that  I  paid  him  on  account  of  the  bill. 

Q.     Did  you  get  receipts  for  these  amounts? 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


215 


t  A, 

".:..'... uv_ 

r^~s  f 

«.,^  I    M 

I     _    ..I     A-- 

I 

>  e\ 

....  -O \/ '  ...<t,~'V^  vJ  O....X 

-o ^^.^'.^^.^  -^..M^p/^.-. .<?..-*  y..fc£i£.x 

"'*'    •*•"/*«       ~"^;^O       Va  "*fe' 

^         I 

'     C                                   \C 
VN  ......   j...pv^...|  ...<*_>  6  \_  ..-.I  ... 

'...L.A.        ..I.. 

Q^ 

J  "          "o"  ...j...         -y 

i 
................  ....  ..*. .  J   C/iTTvTN^..fVT7\  O  .. . 

\  *  t 


2i6  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

A.     I  did  not.     He  promised  to  send  me  receipts,  but  never  did. 

Q.  Why  did  you  not  get  receipts  at  the  time  these  two  payments  were 
made? 

A.  Because  they  were  made  under  circumstances  which  made  it 
impossible  to  get  them. 

Q      How  was  that? 

A,  The  first  amount  of  twenty-five  dollars  was  paid  in  Desbrosses 
Street  Ferry,  upon  my  meeting  him  there,  and  the  second  amount  just  out- 
side of  my  office  door,  when  I  was  starting  out  to  fulfill  an  important  engage- 
ment, and  had  only  just  time  to  catch  the  train. 

Q.     What  makes  you  so  positive  about  paying  these  amounts? 

A.  Well,  I  remember  the  transactions  distinctly,  and  the  entries  are  in 
my  cash-book  for  those  days. 

Q.     Is  this  the  cash-book  you  refer  to?  [Showing  book.] 

A.     It  is. 

Q.     Can  you  point  out  the  entries  you  refer  to? 

A.  Yes,  sir;  there  they  are.  [Indicating.]  This  is  the  first  entry. 
[Reading.]  January  13,  1845,  P3-^  to  George  Binder,  on  account,  twenty- 
five  dollars.  And  here  is  the  other,  in  same  words,  under  date  of  23d, 
same  month  and  year,  twenty  dollars. 

Q.     In  whose  handwriting  are  those  entries? 

A.     They  are  in  my  own  handwriting. 

Q.     You  kept  your  own  books  at  that  time,  did  you? 

A.     I  did — yes,  sir;  have  always  kept  them  and  do  now. 

Cash-book  offered  in  evidence  and  marked  Exhibit  A. 

Q.  Have  you  no  other  corroboration  of  your  memory,  excepting  this 
book? 

A.     Yes,  sir;  a  salesman  of  mine,    Mr.  Long,  witnessed  both  payments. 

Q.     How  was  that? 

A.  He  was  with  me  at  Desbrosses  Street  Ferry  when  twenty-five  dol- 
lars were  paid  to  Mr.  Binder,  and  he  stood  at  the  window  of  my  place  of 
business  when  I  handed  twenty  dollars  to  Mr.  Binder  on  the  23d  of  January. 

Q.     Did  he  see  both  payments? 

A.     He  says  so — yes. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Stover: 

Q.  Mr.  Nagle,  you  admit  signing  this  note  for  two  hundred  and  ninety- 
eight  dollars  and  fifty-seven  cents? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  ,  And  by  that  act  you  really  admitted  at  the  time  that  you  owed  Mr. 
Binder  the  sum  of  two  hundred  and  ninety-eight  dollars  and  fifty-seven 
tents,  did  you  not? 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


217 


^"^        I  \   \3>    c    />  TT^x  rT    X 


I.7.J. 


218  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

A.  I  thought  that  amount  was  correct,  then,  because  I  presumed  the 
goods  were  all  right. 

Q.     Did  you  not  know  they  were  all  right,  Mr.  Nagle? 

A.     No,  sir;  I  did  not. 

Q.     Then  why  did  you  sign  the  note? 

A.     Because  I  thought  the  goods  were  all  right. 

Q.  Now,  do  you  mean  to  say,  Mr.  Nagle,  that  you  would  have  signed 
that  note,  if  you  had  not  had  positive  evidence  that  the  goods  were  all  right? 

A.  I  mean  to  say  that  I  did  sign  that  note  without  such  positive 
knowledge. 

Q.     Do  you  go  about  signing  notes  in  that  way,  Mr.  Nagle? 

A.     No,  sir;  not  generally.     Especially  not  since  then. 

DEFENSE    RESTS. 

REBUTTAL. 

JAMES  WILSON,  a  witness  for  the  plaintiff,  being  duly  sworn,  testified  : 
By  Mr.  Stover  : 

Q.     James,  where  do  you  reside  ? 

A.     1132  Franklin  Street,  this  city. 

Q.     In  whose  employ  are  you  ? 

A.     Messrs.  Bridge  &  Close. 

Q.     In  whose  employ  were  you  in  January,  1843  ? 

A.     I  was  in  Mr.  George  Binder's  employ. 

Q.     In  what  capacity? 

A.     I  was  delivery  clerk  for  Mr.  Binder. 

Q.     Do  you  remember  this  last  order  of  Mr.  Nagle's? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     Did  you  attend  to  its  delivery? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.     In  what  way  ? 

A.  I  packed  the  goods  and  gave  them  to  the  drayman  to  deliver  to 
Mr.  Nagle. 

Q.  Did  Mr.  Nagle  ever  complain  about  receiving  the  wrong  goods 
on  this  occasion  ? 

A.     Not  that  I  know  of. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Willard  : 

Q.     What  is  your  age  ? 

A.     Nineteen. 

Q.     Then  you  were  about  sixteen  when  this  transaction  occurred  ? 

A.     Yes,  sir. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


219 


—  ? 


L_ 


i 


.>. 


.v 


V  X 


.C...,.....-,..;..C..^ 


22O  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

Q.  You  would  not  have  known  if  Mr.  Nagle  had  complained  about 
his  goods,  would  you  ? 

A.     Not  unless  I  heard  him  complain. 

Q.     Such  complaints  were  not  usually  brought  to  you,  were  they? 

A.     No,  sir. 

SURREBUTTAL. 

HENRY  T.  NAGLE,  the  defendant,  recalled  : 

By  Mr.  Willard-: 

Q.  You  have  said,  in  your  examination-in-chief,  that  you  complained 
frequently  to  Mr.  Binder  about  sending  you  the  wrong  telegraph  instru- 
ments—  were  these  complaints  made  verbally,  or  in  writing? 

A.     Both. 

Q.     On  what  occasions  were  they  made  in  writing  ? 

A.  On  the  day  I  received  the  wrong  goods.  I  stopped  in  to  see 
Mr.  Binder  ;  and,  as  he  was  not  in,  I  left  a  note  on  his  desk  in  reference 
to  the  matter. 

CROSS    EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Stover  : 

r 
Q.     Who  was  present  when  you  left  that  note  ? 

A.  I  -think  James  Wilson  was. 

Q.  You  think  !     Are  you  positive  ? 

A.  I  am  not  positive  ;  it  might  have  been  someone  else. 

Q.  Did  you  call  anyone's  attention  to  it  ? 

A.  I  think  not. 

EVIDENCE.  CLOSED. 

CHARGE  OF  THE  COURT. 

GENTLEMEN  OF  THE  JURY — This  is  an  action  of  Assumpsit,  brought  by 
George  Binder,  the  plaintiff,  against  Henry  T.  Nagle,  the  defendant.  The 
plaintiff  seeks  in  this  action  to  recover  from  the  defendant  a  sum  of  money 
which,  the  plaintiff  claims,  is  due  him  and  owing  him  from  the  defendant  for 
merchandise  delivered  by  the  plaintiff  to  the  defendant  on  the  defendant's 
order.  The  principal  contention  between  the  parties  in  the  present  suit  is 
as  to  the  amount  actually  due  by  the  defendant  to  the  plaintiff,  for  the  order 
and  delivery  are  admitted  by  each. 

The  only  witnesses  in  this  case,  with  the  exception  of  James  Wilson, 
rvliose  testimony  is  unimportant,  are  the  parties,  the  plaintiff  and  the  defend- 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


221 


"I"    S'%-     ?"c- 
•^ 


t~~ 


.flA 


J- 


4- 


222  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

iiit,  themselves.  So  far  as  this  evidence  shows,  there  have  been  no  other 
•vitnesses  brought  forward  corroborative  of  their  testimony.  The  law  makes 
•die  parties  to  the  suit  competent  witnesses.  You  are  the  judges  of  their 
credibility,  and  where  they  differ  in  their  statements,  you  may  determine 
which  of  them  is  correct. 

The  plaintiff  contends  that  he  delivered  the  goods  ordered,  that  settle- 
ment was  made  by  a  promissory  note  on  which  no  money  was  paid  when 
due  at  the  bank  nor  since.  The  defendant,  on  the  other  hand,  swears  that 
che  goods  received  were  not  those  ordered,  that  he  endeavored  to  return 
Miem,  and  that  he  paid  forty-five  dollars  on  the  note,  for  which  he  has 
received  no  credit. 

Gentlemen  of  the  Jury,  here  you  have  these  statements  of  these  two 
parties,  and  it  is  for  you  to  determine  which  is  correct.  The  burden  rests 
upon  the  plaintiff  to  show  you,  by  the  weight  of  evidence,  that  his  statements 
are  true  in  every  particular,  and  he  must  satisfy  you,  by  the  evidence,  that 
they  are  so  before  he  can  recover  the  amount  claimed. 

The  dispute,  therefore,  of  the  plaintiff's  claims,  is  limited  to  the  validity 
of  the  order  and  the  possibility  of  the  payments  which  the  defendant  says 
he  made  the  plaintiff. 

The  defendant  claims  that  he  settled  with  the  plaintiff  by  means  of  this 
promissory  note  before  he  had  examined  all  the  goods  for  which  the  note 
was  given  in  settlement,  and  that  he  afterward  paid  twenty  dollars  and 
iwenty-five  dollars,  respectively,  on  account  of  that  note.  In  relation  to  this 
note,  we  have  to  say  that,  in  the  absence  of  any  evidence — that  is,  if  there 
was  no  other  evidence  in  this  case — relating  to  the  settlement  by  this  note, 
then  it  would  be  conclusive  upon  this  plaintiff. 

The  presumption  is,  that  at  the  time  the  note  was  given  they  had  a  just 
settlement  of  their  matters,  and  that  the  note  was  given  for  the  true  balance 
known  to  be  due  on  such  settlement  by  both  parties. 

The  defendant,  however,  contending  that  the  note,  in  point  of  fact,  was 
not  in  true  settlement  of  the  amount  he  really  owed  the  plaintiff — that  it  was 
made  before  the  goods  concerned  were  examined — the  said  plaintiff  has  a 
right  to  dispute  the  amount  of  said  note,  and,  therefore,  we  have  to  say  to 
you,  as  a  matter  of  law,  that  while  such  a  note,  like  a  receipt  in  full,  is 
generally  conclusive,  yet,  if  it  may  be  shown  that,  at  the  settlement  made 
When  such  note  was  given,  a  mistake  was  made — that  there  was  an  error  in 
the  account — then  the  amount  on  the  note  would  not  be  conclusive, 'but  it  is 
incu'mbent  upon  the  party  claiming  error,  to  show  that  there  was  an  error 
and  mistake  and  to  show  that  error  by  satisfactory  and  unmistakable 
evidence.  This  note  was  given  to  and  accepted  by  the  plaintiff  as  a  settle- 
ment, and,  therefore,  the  defendant  is  bound  by  that  note  unless  he  can 
prove  error.  But,  as  we  have  already  said  to  you,  the  plaintiff  may  explain 


HAVEN  S   PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 


223 


V 


•> 


.Cl. 


..VN 


..rs 


-  ^  ••£  ...  x 

o  o/o. 


224  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

the  note,  and,  if  he,  by  clear  and  satisfactory  evidence,  has  satisfied  you 
that  there  was  a  mistake  made  at  the  time,  or  that  he  made  it  under  a  mis- 
apprehension, then  this  paper  does  not  bind  him. 

Gentlemen  of  the  Jury,  I  do  not  know  that  it  is  necessary  for  me  to  say 
anything  further  in  my  general  charge.  The  only  items  of  dispute  between 
these  parties  are  the  two  alleged  payments,  on  account  of  the  note  given, 
and  the  value  of  the  goods  which,  it  is  claimed  by  the  defendant,  he  never 
ordered,  tried  to  return,  and  has  no  use  for,  facts  for  your  judgments  alone 
to  decide. 

Now,  Gentlemen  of  the  Jury,  something  has  been  said  during  the  trial 
of  this  case,  in  relation  to  the  pecuniary  ability  of  the  plaintiff  and  the 
defendant.  I  simply  have  to  say,  that  whatever  may  be  their  standing  and 
their  pecuniary  ability,  it  can  not  effect  the  rights  of  the  one  or  the  other  in 
this  case.  • 

You  will  take  this  case,  Gentlemen  of  the  Jury,  apply  to  the  evidence 
the  rules  of  the  law,  as  I  have  stated  them,  and  render  such  a  verdict,  under 
your  oaths,  according  to  the  evidence  of  the  case,  as  your  consciences  will 
approve. 

AUTHOR'S  NOTE. — The  above  concludes  our  exercises  in  Court  Reporting, 
and  if  the  student  has  practiced  each  of  the  cages  contained  in  the  entire  series  in 
accordance  with  the  rules  for  such  practice,  given  elsewhere  in  these  pages,  he  or 
she,  as  the  case  may  be,  will  have  gained  a  certain  amount  of  facility  in  writing 
not  possessed  before,  and,  in  addition,  will  have  learned  more  respecting  the  natural 
plan  of  phrasing,  which  best  comes  with  practicing  such  exercises  as  these  Court 
Cases  and  the  Business  Letters.  At  first  the  student  may  find  it  more  difficult  to 
phrase  than  to  write  words  separately,  and  may  think,  because  the  same  words  are 
round  phrased  on  some  occasions,  and  not  in  others,  that  there  is  no  set  rule  or 
necessity.  The  explanation  of  the  variation  in  phrasing  is,  that  words  should  be 
phrased  as  they  are  sounded,  that  is,  when  words  are  run  together  by  the  voice, 
write  them  together,  providing  the  simple  rules  for  phrasing,  given  in  our  lessons, 
are  not  violated;  ana,  where  there  is  hesitation  between  uttered  words,  then  do  not 
phrase,  as  it  is  advisable,  if  possible,  that  phonography  represent  what  is  known  as 
voice  punctuation,  on  which  is  really  based  type  punctuation,  both  of  which  often 
j'urmsh  the  e*act  meaning  of  written  words. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


225 


\ 


^   \  c—  _p     ->         p       ,        f-*— 
'.H«"-«r      • 


.../  ...t 


c,    - 


r 


V     d 


• 


eJ> 


226  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

CONVENTION     REPORTING. 

Amanuensis  work  and  court  reporting,  have  been  illustrated  and 
explained  to  some  extent  by  other  authors;  not,  however,  nearly  so 
thoroughly  as  in  this  work,  and  convention  reporting  has  never,  to  the 
best  of  the  author's  knowledge  and  belief,  even  been  treated.  Many 
shorthand  students  are  ambitious  to  become  newspaper  and  conven- 
tion reporters — to  know  what  to  report  at  a  meeting,  what  portions  of 
it  to  incorporate  in  their  printed  reports,  and  what  portions  of  the  pro- 
ceedings are  best  omitted.  To  give  this  information  in  a  manner  which 
may  be  understood  by  all  interested  in  the  subject,  and  to  cover  the 
entire  ground,  is  the  object  of  this  present  chapter. 

Convention  reports  or  reports  of  meetings,  are  of  three  kinds: 

First,  and  least  important,  are  the  small  paragraphs  or  incomplete 
descriptions  which  one  often  finds  in  the  large  dailies. 

Second,  the  more  elaborate  and  almost  full  report,  which  the  trade 
newspapers,  interested  in  the  business  represented  at  the  convention, 
would  think  it  advisable  to  publish. 

Third,  the  absolutely  verbatim  report,  which  the  association  hold- 
ing the  convention  or  meeting  has  printed  in  pamphlet  form  for  use  of 
its  members. 

Below  we  give  illustrations  of  how  a  daily  newspaper  frequently 
condenses  such  matters,  unless  of  general  interest. 

For  instance,  one  daily  might  ,  While  another  daily  might  con- 
simply  notice  it  in  this  manner,  !  descend  to  give  the  item  a  heading 
among  other  small  items:  as  follows: 

The  Paint.  Oil  and  Varnish  Club  held  its  regu- 

M .  ,•!  i  ii-  of  Paint  Manufacturers. 

lar    monthly  meeting  last    night  at  the  Union 

Leajrue.    There  was  a  good  attendance.  The  paint,  oil  and  varnish  interests  ol  Chicago 

A         .1  j    .1  .    i   .  ,  •          •  ,        were  well  represented  at  the  meeting  of  the  local 

Another  daily  might  mention  it     Daint  club  at  th  f  the  Unjon  Leaeue , 


at  greater  length,  thus: 

Judge  Gresham  was  the  guest  of  the  Paint,  Oil 
and  Varnish  Club  at  its  regular  monthly  dinner 
and  meeting  at  the  Union  League  last  night.  The 
Judge  made  a  characteristic  speech  and  was  warm- 
ly applauded.  Other  speakers  made  brief  address- 
es in  reference  to  the  business  interests  repre- 
sented. 


paint  club  at  the  rooms  of  the  Union  League  last 
night.  George  H.  Vrooman  presided.  D.  Van 
Ness  Person,  secretary. 

Resolutions  were  adopted  requesting  the  white 
lead  trust  to  consider  the  claims  of  the  paint  grind- 
ers by  arranging  for  a  more  liberal  rebate  the 
coming  year,  and  asking  the  linseed  oil  crushers 
to  provide  similarly  for  rebates  on  that  product. 

Judge  Gresham  was  the  guest  of  the  evening, 
and  spoke  of  the  benefits  of  trade  organizations. 


And  so  on,  ad  infinitim,  according  to  the  pleasure  of  the  editor  or 
reporter,  and  the  space  at  hand. 

On  pages  261  to  270  \ve  present  the  report  of  the  same  meeting 
exactly  as  it  was  printed  in  the  trade  paper  interested  in  the  delibera- 


HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY.  227 

tions  of  the  association  holding  the  meeting;  and  on  pages  234  to  259 
we  give  the  report,  absolutely  verbatim  et  seriatim,  precisely  as  taken, 
and  as  written  out  for  publication  in  pamphlet  form  by  the  association 
concerned. 

By  a  comparison  of  the  extended  report  for  the  trade  newspaper 
with  the  verbatim  report  for  the  association,  it  will  be  noticed  that  the 
trade  paper  generally  prints  the  important  resolutions  and  speeches  in 
full,  also  all  important  discussions — at  least,  such  of  them  as  will  not 
divulge  the  secrets  of  the  trade — contenting  itself  with  a  mere  des- 
cription of  some  of  the  unimportant  resolutions  and  proceedings, 
instead  of  reporting  them  all  verbatim.  For  instance,  instead  of 
printing  the  words  which  the  president  utters  when  he  puts  a  motion 
and  announces  it  as  having  been  carried,  the  trade  paper  report  would 
read  simply  "Carried,"  or  where  a  member  makes  an  elaborate  excuse 
for  something  of  no  importance,  the  trade  papers  will  simply  state  that 
Mr.  So  and  So  made  remarks  appropriate  to  the  occasion,  etc.,  etc. 

In  the  report  which  is  furnished  to  the  association,  for  the  use  of 
its  members,  every  word,  important  or  unimportant,  is  given,  furnish- 
ing an  absolutely  verbatim  report,  which  may  or  may  not  be  garbled 
afterward  by  the  secretary  or  members  before  its  association  prints  it; 
though,  as  a  rule,  it  is  printed  exactly  as  transcribed.  This  latter  report, 
as  it  goes  in  pamphlet  form,  should  have  a  title  page,  which  title  page 
should  contain  the  name  of  the  convention,  what  annual  or  monthly 
meeting  it  is,  if  any,  where  held,  and  the  date.  This  is  for  the  cover 
page,  and  may  be  duplicated  on  the  inside  title  page  when  printed,  but 
need  not  figure  twice  in  the  reporter's  transcription,  as  such  pamphlets 
also  contain,  on  other  preceding  pages,  or  on  pages  at  the  end  of  the 
book,  according  to  the  taste  of  the  secretary,  the  names  of  the 
officers  and  committees,  with  often  a  list  of  the  entire  roster  of  mem- 
bers, but  these  matters  are  attended  to  by  .the  secretary  of  the  associa- 
tion. The  stenographer,  however,  had  better,  for  a  convention  of  two 
or  more  sessions,  furnish  an  index  to  the  subject  matter,  such  as  the 
page  on  which  the  different  sessions  commence,  the  page  on  which 
each  resolution  is  to  be  found,  and  the  same  respecting  speeches  or 
important  discussions.  This  is,  of  course,  unnecessary  for  a  meeting  of 
only  one  session.  Illustrations  of  such  title  page  and  index  are  given 
on  pages  231  and  232.  Other  than  this  preliminary  information  the 
report  generally  starts  off  as  shown  on  page  230  or  233  of  this  book. 

In  reporting  a  convention,  there  is  less  to  become  familiar  with 
than  in  a  court  trial,  but  there  is  also  more  skill  required.  In  the  heat 


228  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPH! . 

of  discussion,  a  business  man  who  may  have  had  no  experience  in  pub- 
lic speaking  is  apt  to  talk  much  faster  than  any  court  witness  does  or 
any  ordinary  speaker  could.  In  addition,  he  will  make  use  of  techni- 
cal expressions  peculiar  to  his  business,  which  are  as  familiar  to  him  as 
any  common  words  of  general  conversation,  but  which  may  be  Greek 
to  any  one  outside  his  line  of  business,  and,  as  sometimes  the  reporter 
will  have  to  wait  a  second  or  two  to  catch  a  meaning  of  the  speaker  or 
hear  what  his  mumbled  words  are,  the  convention  reporter  needs  to 
have  more  speed  to  make  up  for  those  waits. 

When  engaged  for  a  convention  or  at  the  time  he  enters  the  room 
where  it  is  held,  the  reporter  should  get  a  copy  of  the  printed  call  of 
that  convention,  which  will  give  him  all  the  necessary  information  re- 
specting its  proper  title  or  heading,  If  he  is  acquainted  with  any  of 
.he  members  he  is  well  prepared,  but,  if  not,  then  he  should  sit  next  to 
the  secretary,  treasurer  or  president,  or  some  officer  who  knows  most 
of  the  members  of  the  convention  and  can  whisper  their  names  to  him 
when  they  speak.  Having  once  heard  the  name  of  a  speaker,  he  should 
attempt  to  fix  it  well  in  his  memory,  in  case  the  speaker  fiequently  takes 
part  in  the  proceedings,  and  the  reporter  should  always  write  each 
speaker's  name  in  shorthand,  immediately  beginningthe  words  uttered 
by  such  speaker,  as  memory  will  not  always  help  the  reporter  to  after- 
ward place  the  proper  names  to  the  proper  notes.  It  is  not  necessary 
to  write  the  names  in  full.  Simply  the  last  name,  as  upon  the  different 
shorthand  pages  following.  Of  course,  when  the  president,  treasurer  or 
secretary  speaks,  their  names  need  not  be  written,  but  simply  their 
titles.  Commence  every  person's  remarks  indented  about  an  inch  from 
the  left-hand  side  of  the  line  in  note-book,  so  as  to  be  easily  found. 

If  a  resolution  or  speech  is  read,  it  is  not  necessary  to  take  it  in 
shorthand,  if  you  can  borrow  the  paper  and  make  a.  copy  of  it  after- 
ward. In  fact,  anything  that  is  read  need  not  be  written,  if  you  can 
borrow  the  paper  containing  it.  Such  reading  is  generally  at  too  great 
a  rate  of  speed  to  be  easily  taken,  and  you  might  just  as  well  save  your- 
self the  effort.  People  can  read  much  faster  than  they  can  talk  im- 
promptu. The  minutes  of  preceding  meeting  are,  of  course,  never  taken 
and  are  generally  given  in  one's  notes  as  shown  on  page  235.  Laughter, 
applause  and  other  descriptive  matter  are  treated  similarly. 

In  reporting  a  convention  of  several  days'  length,  if  the  report  is 
needed  promptly  for  a  trade  newspaper,  the  reporter  has  generally 
assistants,  and  one  of  them  writes  for  perhaps  a  half-hour,  is  then  re- 
lieved by  another,  and  he  in  turn  perhaps  by  a  third,  while  the  first  is 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY.  22Q 

writing  or  dictating  to  a  typewriter  operator  the  notes  he  has  taken,  re- 
turning to  relieve  the  last  one.  Four  to  six  sometimes  thus  alternate, 
both  in  conventions  and  court  trials,  where  daily  transcription  is  re- 
quired, such  being  also  the  practice  in  Congress  and  all  large  bodies, 
Congress  being,  by  the  way,  but  a  big  convention,  and  no  more  difficult 
to  report  than  any  trade  meeting.  At  meetings  of  only  one  session, 
or  where  there  is  no  immediate  hurry  for  transcription,  one  reporter 
is,  of  course,  sufficient. 

In  Congress  and  State  Legislatures,  each  stenographer  generally 
writes  even  less  time  at  a  sitting,  each  being  relieved  regularly  (for  a 
number  do  the  work), and,  as  statesmen  generally  ask  for,  and  obtain,  the 
transcription  containing  their  remarks  before  they  go  to  the  printer,  the 
remarks  are  frequently  so  changed  as  to  be  far  from  being  verbatim. 

A  convention  of  several  days'  length  or  a  meeting  of  one  hour  are 
each  alike  subject  to  the  same  rules,  the  only  difference  being  in  their 
length,  and  the  fact  that  the  short  one  needs  only  one  heading,  while 
the  long  one  has  a  heading  for  each  session,  but  as  remarks  respecting 
one  session  are  the  same  as  to  any  number,  the  subject  is  fully  illustrated 
in  this  book  by  the  one  hour's  session  of  the  monthly  meeting  of  the 
Chicago  Paint,  Oil  and  Varnish.  Club,  reported  verbatim  in  the  pages 
opposite  the  shorthand  of  this  portion  of  the  book,  just  as  would  have 
been  done  in  the  case  of  a  convention, where  the  work  was  arranged  for 
pamphlet  form. 

The  reason  for  the  differences  between  the  verbatim  report  on 
pages  234  to  259,  and  the  report,  nearly  verbatim,  made  lor  a  t'ade 
paper,  pages  261  to  270,  are  fully  explained  by  the  side  noi.es  on  the 
last  named  pages. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

TWENTY-SIXTH  ANNUAL  CONVENTION 

of     the 
AMERICAN        INSTITUTE        OF        ARCHITECTS. 


October  20th,   21st  and  22d, 

1892. 
AT     CHICAGO. 


FIRST        DAY. 

The  first  day's  session  of  the  American  Institute  of  Archi- 
tects was  held  on  the  evening  of  the  20th  of  October,  at  the 
Recital  Hall  of  the  Auditorium,  Chicago. 

Convention  called  to  order  at  8.15  o'clock  by  the  President, 
Edward  H.  Kendall  of  New  York:  Mr.  D.  Adler  of  Chicago,  Secretary. 

President  Kendall  addressed  the  Institute  as  follows: 
(Insert  President's  Address.) 

Minutes  of  previous  meeting  read  and  approved. 

President  Kendall. — The  next  business  before  the  convention 
will  be  the  reading  of  the  report  of  the  Board  of  Directors. 

Report  read  by  the  Secretary  as  follows: 

( Insert  0 

President  Kendall. — The  next  business  is  the  reading  of  the 
report  of  the  Treasurer.   As  the  Treasurer  is  absent,  your  Secre- 
tary will  read  the  report. 

Treasurer's  report  read  as  follows: 
i 

(Insert.) 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


000000000 


TTTTTT7T7TTTTTTTT7T7TT77-.T7TTT7T7T-V.7TTT77TTTTS  7  7  T  T  T  T  T  7  T  77  T  T  T  7  TTT  T 

ooooooocoooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo 


z  z 

z  z 

z  z 

z  z 

Z  PROCEEDINGS                                                Z 

z  z 

Z  of     the                                                                   Z 

Z  Z 

Z  NATIONAL                                                          Z 

Z  Z 

2                                  WHOLESALE        DRUGGISTS  Z 

Z  Z 

Z  ASSOCIATION,                                                 Z 

Z  Z 

Z  in                                                                     Z 

Z  Z 

2  Convention,                                                       Z 

Z  Z 

Z  at                                                                  Z 

Z  Z 

Z                               The  Arlington  Hotel,   Washington,  D.   C.  Z 

Z  .                                                            Z 

Z  —  o  ---                                                              Z 

Z  Z 

Z  September  29,   30;                                                   Z 

Z  Z 

Z  October  1,   2,   3  ,                                                 Z 

Z  Z 

Z  1890.                                                                Z 

Z  Z 

Z  Z 

Z  Z 

Z  Z 

TTT77T7TTTTTTTTTTTTTT  T  f  7  T  7  7  7  7  7  7  T  7  7  T  7  T  7  T  T  7  7  T  T  7  7  T  T  T  T  T  T  T  T  7  T  T  7  TT  T  7  T  T  TT 


000000000 

VCHW+OV 

V040V 

vov 

V 


232 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

INDEX. 


FIRST  DAY  PROCEEDINGS. — Evening  Session. 

Reception  of  Delegates  from  Kindred  Associations 

TUESDAY. — Morning  Session. 


Address  of  President  Van  Schaack 

Report  of  Membership  Committee 

Secretary1 s  Report 

Treasurer's  Report 

Report  of  Committee  on  Paints,  Oils  and  Glass- 


TUESDAY. — Afternoon  Session. 

Report  of  Committee  on  Proprietary  Goods 

Address  of  Delegate  from  Ohio  Pharmaceutical  Ass'n 

Resolutions  from  Minnesota  State  Association 

Joint  Letter  of  Minneapolis  and  Ramsey  County  Pharmaceu- 
tical Association 

Communications  from  Pharmaceutical  Associations 

Committees  on  Nominations  of  Officers  and  Location  of 

Next  Meeting 

"WEDNESDAY. — Evening  Session. 


Report  of  Committee  on  Drug  Market 

Report  of  Committee  on  Transportation 

Report  of  Committee  on  Box  and  Cartage 

Report  of  Committee  on  Commercial  Travelers- 
Report  of  committee  on  Fraternal  Relations-- 
Report of  Committee  on  Paris  Green 


Pages. 
4  to  20 


24  to 
33  to 
35  to 

38  to 

39  to 


48  to 
61  to 
65  to 


67  to 
70  to 


82  to 
93  to 
95  to 
98  to 


THURSDAY.— Morning  Session. 


32 
34 
38 
39 
46 


56 
63 
66 

70 
75 

81 


92 
95 
96 
99 


•  99  to  101 

•102  to  109 


to  117 

to  -119 

119 

to  127 


Report  of  Committee  on  Credit  and  Collections 110 

Summary  of  the  Torrey  Bankrupt  Bill 117 

Report  of  Committee  on  Nominations  of  Officers 

Report  of  Committee  on  Legislation 120 

Statement  of  Officers  of  the  Druggists  Mutual  Fire 

Association 132  to  133 

Report  of  Sub-Committee  on  Trade  Mark  Infringments  and 

Simulations 139 

Report  of  Obituary  Committee 141 

Resolutions  of  the  Propriet^y  Committee 143 

Supplemental  Resolution  by  "j.  C.  Eliel 

Supplemental  Resolution  bv  R.  W.  Powers 162  to  163 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  233 

PROCEEDINGS 

of  the 

SEVENTEENTH  ANNUAL  CONVENTION  OP  THE  NATIONAL  WHOLESALE  DRUGGISTS' 

ASSOCIATION. 

o 

Washington,  D.  C.,  Sept.  29,  30;  Oct.  1,  2,  3,  1890. 

o 

FIRST  DAY. — Evening  Session. 
Meeting  called  to  order  at  8.15  p.  m. 

President  Van  Schaack: — In  calling  the  convention  to  order,  I 
will  detain  you  but  a  moment  while  expressing  the  great  pleasure 
which  I  experience  in  meeting  with  you  once  more  face  to  face,  and 
permit  me  to  add  that  I  trust  there  will  be  a  full  and  free  discus 
sion  of  every  subject  which  comes  before  this  association  and  upon 
which  there  is  any  difference  of  opinion.   It  has  been  my  exper- 
ience, gentlemen,  as  well  as  that  of  others  who  have  occupied  this 
chair,  that  after  adjournment  some  gentleman  has  remarked  that  "he 
did  not  think  it  good  policy"  though  we  never  had  the  pleasure  of 
hearing  his  voice  during  the  discussion.   We  wish  a  free  discus- 
sion and  a  full  one  as  to  the  expediency  of  every  move  we  make. 
There  are  gentlemen  on  this  floor  who  are  able  to  teach  us  much, 
but  their  inherent  modesty  and  the  unsteadiness  of  their  legs — the 
Infirmities  which  the  speaker  himself  experiences — prevent  us  hear 
ing  from  them  as  we  should.   Let  there  be  a  reform  in  this  regard 
If  there  are  any  gentlemen  present  representing  any  of  our  sister 
associations, they  will  kindly  send  their  names  to  the  chair.   The 
first  order  of  business,  gentlemen,  is  the  roll  call, 


234  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

REGULAR  MONTHLY  MEETING 

OF    THE 

CHICAGO  PAINT,  OIL,  AND  VARNISH  CLUB 

AT  THE  ROOMS  OF  THE  UNION  LEAGUE,  CHICAGO,  ILL. 

THURSDAY,   OCTOBER    17,  1889. 

Dinner  at  6:00  p.  m.     Thirty  members  present. 

Meeting  called  to  order  at   7:30  o'clock  by  President  G.  H.  Vrooman. 

THE  PRESIDENT — The  meeting  will  please  come  to  order.  We  will 
listen  to  the  reading  of  the  minutes  of  last  meeting.  The  Secretary  will 
please  read  them.  [Minutes  read.]  You  have  heard  the  report  of  the 
Secretary  of  the  September  meeting — what  will  you  do  with  it  ?. 

MR.  COFFIN — I  move  it  be  approved  as  read. 

MR.  PETTET — I  second  the  motion. 

THE  PRESIDENT — It  is  moved  and  seconded  that  the  report  of  the 
Secretary  be  approved  as  read.  All  in  favor  will  please  signify  the  same 
by  saying  aye.  Contrary,  nay.  So  ordered.  The  report  of  our  Treas- 
urer is  next  in  order. 

TREASURER  ROSENTHAL — Mr.  President,  your  Treasurer  respectfully 
asks  to  be  excused  from  making  a  detailed  report  to-night.  I  have  only 
sent  the  bills  out  a  week  ago.  Part  of  them  have  been  paid,  but  not 
many  of  them.  Anyway,  I  can  assure  the  gentlemen  there  is  enough  to 
pay  for  to-night's  dinner,  and  by  next  meeting  I  expect  to  be  in  position 
to  make  a  regular  report. 

MR.  Cox — I  move  the  Treasurer  be  excused  from  making  a  detailed 
report. 

MR.  PETTET — I  second  the  motion. 

THE  PRESIDENT — If  there  is  no  objection,  the  Treasurer  is  excused 
from  making  a  detailed  report,  and  his  verbal  one  is  accepted.  So 
ordered.  A  special  meeting  of  the  Club  met  at  the  Sherman  House  "on 
the  aad  of  September,  for  the  election  of  officers  and  the  transaction  of 
some  unfinished  business.  The  Executive  Committee  was  there  autl^or- 
ized  to  appoint  the  committees  on  membership  and  entertainment.  The 
Committee  on  Membership  is  A.  G.  Cox,  Frank  Hayes,  and  E.  C.  Lynn. 
We  will  now  hear  the  report  of  the  Membership  Committee. 

MR.  Cox — Mr.  President,  I  believe,  so  far  as  I  am  concerned,  I  have 
not  got  down  to  active  business  yet,  and  I  would  ask  to  be  excused  from 
reporting  this  evening. 

MR.  ROSENTHAL — Mr.  President,  permit  me  to  call  your  attention  to 
the  fact  that  the  report  of  the  Membership  Committee  goes  to  the 
Executive  Committee,  and  not  to  the  Club  dinner.  There  is  no  occasion 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


235 


^"T    ^ ~\ 

s$$\. I...1 

^ r> 

.> 

•'v 

)     s          Ti^r 

-r- •• 

•°'-^-i^^ v 

.X 

A  \  vl°  ^^,0<?. 

> ^^...^ — -^-—  ^  .».^\ .s  • 

:..v.a 3..:...v..: / 

,-.j^  >.."..  -,  U ^w...C 


236  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

for  a  report  of  the  Membership  Committee  in  open  meeting. 

THE  PRESIDENT — Mr.  Rosenthal  is  correct  in  this  respect,  that  the 
Executive  Committee  acts  upon  all  applications  and  elects  members  to 
the  Club,  but  it  has  been  customary  heretofore  that  the  chairman  of  the 
Membership  Committee  report  to  this  meeting  the  names  of  such  mem- 
bers as  have  been  elected,  for  the  information  of  this  Club.  If  there  is 
no  objection,  the  Membership  Committee  will  be  excused  from  a  detailed 
report.  The  report  of  the  Entertainment  Committee  you  have  had 
before  you  for  some  time;  I  heard  no  objection  to  its  particulars,  and  I 
believe  most  of  them  have  been  placed  on  file.  [Laughter.]  At  the 
first  convention  of  the  National  Association  held  at  Cleveland,  in  Janu- 
ary last,  a  resolution  was  adopted  relating  to  credits,  the  idea  being  to 
control  the  terms  of  sale  and  the  discounts  for  cash.  This  subject 
was  taken  up  at  our  May  meeting  and  discussed,  and  referred  to  a  com- 
mittee composed  of  John  Wadsworth,  John  F.  Weare,  and  A.  G.  Cox.  Is 
that  committee  ready  to  report? 

MR.  WADSWORTH — Mr.  President,  I  was  not  here  at  the  time  I  \vas 
appointed  on  that  committee,  and  nothing  was  done  since.  I  would  like 
further  time. 

THE  PRESIDENT — The  Committee  on  Credits  asking  for  further  time,  if 
there  is  no  objection  it  is  granted.  At  the  May  meeting  there  was  a 
committee  on  Naphtha  appointed — Mr.  Mutchmore,  Mr.  Burns,  and 
myself.  The  idea  is  to  regulate  the  price  of  Naphtha  when  sold  in  small 
lots.  As  soon  as  practicable,  your  committee  came  together  and  drew 
up  an  agreement  which  was  circulated  for  signature  among  the  trade, 
obtained  twenty-three  names,  and  there  we  stuck.  I  can  not  say  that  the 
outlook  is  very  brilliant  for  an  agreement  at  the  present  time.  You  have 
heard  the  report  of  the  Committee  on  Naphtha;  what  action  will  you  take? 

MR.  HAVES — I  move  that  it  be  granted  further  time. 

MR.  WADSWORTH — I  second  the  motion. 

THE  PRESIDENT — If  there  is  no  objection,  the  request  is  granted. 
This,  I  believe,  finishes  all  the  reports  of  the  general  and  select  commit- 
tees. Miscellaneous  business  is  now  in  order. 

MR.  ROSENTHAL — If  I  am  not  mistaken,  the  meeting  of  the  National 
Association  will  take  place  in  January.  Will  it  be  in  order  fo  elect  dele- 
gates to  that  convention?  I  raise  this  question  so  early  because  it  will 
probably  be  necessary  to  instruct  our  delegates  in  certain  matters,  ana 
as  we  have  only  one  meeting  in  a  month,  we  will  have  only  two  meetings 
before  the  convention  takes  place.  I  would  move  that  the  Secretary  be 
instructed  to  lay  before  our  next  meeting  nominations  for  delegates  to 
the  National  Convention  to  be  held  in  Detroit,  and  also  such  instructions 
that  we  may  see  fit  to  give. 


HAVEN  S   PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


237 


1  c~>\  ^  . 

..£-•/•. y  ...^......  I  

$ 3.V- 


"I 


n 


n 


o 


/*>\p  v  J>        I 

1 

»-  \0 


^j 


238  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

MR.  COFFIN — I  second  the  motion. 

THE  PRESIDENT — It  is  moved  and  seconded  that  the  Executive  Commit- 
tee at  our  next  meeting  present  nominations  for  delegates  to  the  National 
Convention  to  be  held  at  Detroit,  with  such  instructions  as  is  thought  best 
to  give  them.  All  in  favor  of  the  motion  please  say  aye.  Contrary,  nay. 
It  is  carried. 

SECRETARY  PERSON — I  have  been  handed  the  following  resolution,  Mr. 
President: 

WHEREAS,  A  great  change  has  taken  place  in  the  white  lead  industry, 
caused  by  the  consolidation  of  private  firms  into  the  National  White  Lead 
Trust,  which  has  had  the  effect  of  placing  the  manufacture  of  white  lead 
upon  a  more  profitable  basis;  be  it 

Resolved,  That  it  is  the  sense  of  this  Club  that  the  rebate  now  being 
allowed  to  the  jobbing  trade  is  inadequate  and  unsatisfactory,  and  we 
respectfully  ask  the  National  White  Lead  Trust,  when  formulating  their 
plans  for  the  coming  year,  to  arrange  for  a  more  liberal  rebate  to  jobbers, 
and  also  take  into  consideration  the  claims  of  paint  grinders  for  an  equitable 
price  on  dry  lead. 

THE  PRESIDENT — You  have  heard  the  resolution  read.  What  action 
is  to  be  taken?  [Several  members  seconded  it.]  It  is  moved  and  seconded 
that  the  resolution  just  read  be  adopted.  Are  there  any  remarks? 

SECRETARY  PERSON — Before  that  motion  is  put,  Mr.  President,  I  would 
say  that  a  copy  of  this  resolution  ought  to  go  to  the  National  Wholesale 
Druggists'  Convention,  which  meets  on  the  22d  of  this  month  at  Indianapolis. 
If  it  is  the  desire  of  any  of  the  members  to  incorporate  that  in  this  resolu- 
tion, a  motion  should  be  made  to  that  effect.  I  would  suggest  that  the  reso- 
lution be  sent  to  Mr.  Whitlock  of  St.  Louis,  who  is  chairman  of  Committee 
on  Reports,  who  will  render  his  report  at  that  meeting.  If  we  send  that  to 
him,  he  will  embody  it  in  his  report,  or  he  can  simply  hand  it  in  to  the 
convention. 

THE  PRESIDENT — Will  that  be  embodied  in  the  original  motion? 

SECRETARY  PERSON — I  would  suggest  that  a  motion  be  made  to  that 
effect. 

THE  PRESIDENT — The  question  now  is  on  the  adoption  of  this  resolution. 

SECRETARY  PERSON — It  can  be  amended. 

MR.  CUTLER — I  think,  perhaps,  it  would  have  more  effect  to  have  it  go 
from  this  body  rather  than  have  it  incorporated  in  Mr.  Whitlock's  report.  I 
move  the  adoption  of  this  resolution. 

MR.  WEARE — I  would  like  to  know  if  there  are  any  members  of  this 
association  who  are  likely  to  attend  the  National  Wholesale  Druggists' 
Association  at  Indianapolis  this  week.  I  think  he  might  possibly  be 
more  respected  as  a  representative  of  this  body.  I  shall  expect  to  go 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


239 


4 


-  n 


24O  HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY 

there  myself  as  a  representative  of  the  trade,  and  I  shall  be  very  glad  to 
know  if  anybody  else  is  going,  so  as  to  present  it  in  shape  as  a  repre- 
sentative from  this  body.  I  would  be  very  glad  to  have  Mr.  Person,  or 
anybody  else  who  is  going  to  have  it  presented  by  us  as  members  of 
this  body. 

THE  PRESIDENT — The  question  is  on  the  adoption  of  the  resolution. 
Then  we  can  afterwards  appoint  our  committee.  All  who  are  in  favor 
of  the  adoption  of  this  resolution  as  read,  please  so  signify.  So  ordered. 
Now,  the  question  of  the  committee  to  present  the  resolution  to  the 
National  Druggists'  Association  will  be  taken  up. 

MR.  COFFIN — I  move  that  a  committee  of  three  be  appointed  to  repre- 
sent this  association,  and  present  the  resolution. 

MR.  HAYES — I  second  the  motion. 

THE  PRESIDENT — All  in  favor  of  the  adoption  of  this  motion,  please 
say  aye.  So  ordered.  I  appoint  as  that  committee  Messrs.  Weare, 
Cutler,  and  Person,  to  represent  us  before  the  National  Wholesale  Drug- 
gists' Asso<  Nation  in  this  matter  of  white  lead. 

MR.  COFFIN — I  move  that  the  Secretary  be  instructed  to  send  a  copy 
of  this  resolution  to  the  other  paint  clubs  in  the  United  States,  and  ask  for 
their  co-operation. 

SECRETARY  PERSON — I  second  the  motion. 

THE  PRESIDENT — All  those  in  favor  of  Mr.  Coffin's  resolution  please  say 
aye.  Carried. 

SECRETARY  PERSON — I  have  been  handed  the  following  resolution  : 

WHEREAS,  The  jobbing  trade  of  linseed  oil  at  the  prevailing  rates  is 
unprofitable  and  opposed  to  good  business,  and  believing  that  the 
manufacturers  are  desirous  of  establishing  and  having  maintained  a 
schedule  of  prices  which  will  place  this  article  on  a  proper  basis,  be  it 
therefore 

Resolved,  That  this  Club  urge  upon  the  manufacturers  of  linseed  oil 
the  importance  of  making  a  range  of  prices  for  quantities  which  shall  be 
equitable,  and  afford  a  margin  of  profit  to  the  dealers  handling  this 
product. 

Resolved,  That  this  Club  and  its  members  will  heartily  co-operate  in 
such  action,  and  maintain  the  prices  so  established. 

MR.  PETTET — I  move,  Mr.  President,  that  this  resolution  be  pre- 
sented to  the  National  Linseed  Oil  Company  by  a  committee  to  be  appointed 
by  the  chair. 

MR.  Cox — I  second  that  motion. 

THE  PRESIDENT — You  have  heard  the  resolution.  What  action  will  you 
take?  Those  in  favor  will  please  signify  the  same.  So  ordered.  I  will 
appoint  a  committee  later  in  the  evening.  This  is  a  subject  on  which  we 
would  all  be  glad  to  hear  from  Mr. .Hall,  now  with  us. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


241 


I     ^_/> 

i      1  >»"" 

.6  . 

•^P -^  ^ --••>  * l^\ e--' T 

\f  C$ 

V-^vP         \ 

b..£r7\ I- 

5 

/"»  ;      .  /^  V~\       S  (V)  3  . 

.X?.....  C..?r^.W...\..^y?..l<: /r>^>iX>X^.V-..n..^A.'^N   -  "X,  . 

»  t> 

-i /r...y.T}.../T..r!..^ (p.A,.A. 

^  6 


242  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

MR.  HALL — Mr.  President  and  Gentlemen:  In  this  connection  allow 
me  to  say  that,  of  course,  all  of  the  gentlemen  present  understand  that  the 
linseed  oil  manufacturers  will  only  be  too  happy  to  arrange  a  schedule  of 
prices  whereby  the  jobbers  can  make  a  profit  on  linseed  oil.  It  should  be 
done.  But  will  the  jobbers — I  know  you  are  laughing — will  the  jobbers  take 
the  profit  in  case  the  chance  is  allowed  them  to  make  a  profit  ? 

SEVERAL  VOICES — Yes,  sir;  every  time. 

MR.  HALL — Well,  I  doubt  it.  We  are  perfectly  willing  as  an  association 
— I  talk  advisedly — to  allow  jobbers  a  schedule  of  prices.  We  will  be  only 
too  glad  to  co-operate  and  make  all  prices  to  correspond  with  what  any  of 
the  committee  you  may  appoint  may  recommend.  We  will  give  a  schedule 
of  prices  making  a  single-barrel  price  of  at  least  2  cents  a  gallon  more 
than  the  car-load  prices.  It  seems  to  me  that  if  that  committee,  that  the 
Chair  appoints,  will  first  get  the  jobbing  trade  of  Chicago  to  agree  to  hold 
to  a  schedule  of  prices,  and  then  present  them  to  us,  I  can  assure  the  gentle- 
men present  now  that  we  will  see  to  it,  that  their  schedule  of  prices  shall  be 
met.  [Applause.] 

THE  PRESIDENT — Mr.  Secretary,  have  you  any  further  business  to 
present? 

SECRETARY  PERSON — No,  sir. 

THE  PRESIDENT — If  there  is  anything  in  the  hands  of  any  member  that 
they  desire  to  bring  before  this  Club,  it  can  be  done  at  this  time. 

MR.  PETTET — I  would  like  to  inquire  what  the  By-Laws  require  in  regard 
to  the  change  of  date  for  holding  the  meetings  of  the  Club. 

THE  PRESIDENT — As  it  stands  now,  our  meetings  should  be  held  on  the 
second  Thursday  of 'each  month. 

MR.  PETTET — I  move  that  the  By-Laws  be  changed  to  read  the  third 
Thursday  instead  of  the  second. 

MR.  COFFIN — I  second  the  motion. 

THE  PRESIDENT — The  motion  is  that  our  By-Laws  be  so  amended  that 
we  may  hold  our  meetings  on  the  third  Thursday  of  each  month  instead  of 
the  second  Thursday.  It  will  require  unanimous  consent  to  do  this.  Are 
there  any  remarks  ?  You  have  heard  the  motion.  All  those  in  favor  will 
please  say  aye.  It  is  carried.  There  is  no  further  business. 

Gentlemen — As  .this  is  my  first  appearance  in  the  chair,  some  of  you 
may  perhaps  expect  from  me  an  inaugural  address  of  two  or  three  hours, 
but  I  met  a  friend  on  the  street,  who,  in  congratulating  me  on  my  election 
to  the  presidency  of  this  Club,  gave  me  a  little  advice.  He  said,  "You  must 
be  serious;  you  must  not  talk  too  much."  And  as  he  is  a  gentleman  in 
whom  I  have  a  great  deal  of  confidence,  I  think  I  will  follow  his  advice. 
'At  the  same  time,  as  I  am  talking,  I  will  say  that  being  called  upon  to  pre- 
side over  a  representative  body  of  business  men,  such  as  I  see  before  me 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


243 


,/ 

...^JS'. ..".   V..  /^..o..  i 

_§                                r\                              ^^c — 9                               •                                y^                     f                   c  xD  x 

<t_S  ...  t.  ..TTTJ\     -TTx .TT3 /vTT\  ...  /T7V V/ 7:...  ^r^_x| .\ 

^           \  I 

-^....(...y. 

t'"^' 


244  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

to-night — men  whose  intelligence,  industry,  and  perseverance  has  placed  our 
city  in  the  front  rank  of  our  line  of  business — is  no  mean  honor.  I  thank 
you  for  this  expression  of  your  confidence  and  esteem,  and  yet  I  beg  to 
assure  you  that  I  accept,  with  much  hesitancy,  this  chair,  which  has  been 
filled  for  the  past  two  years  so  ably  and  well  by  my  esteemed  predecessor — 
John  Alston.  His  rulings  were  just,  his  conduct  kind  and  generous,  his 
stories — from  my  standpoint — good,  his  jokes,  sometimes  at  our  expense, 
agreeable.  His  quaint  Scotch  ways  have  endeared  him  to  all  of  us,  and 
though  we  have  lost  him  as  our  President,  against  our  wishes,  we  hope  to 
see  him  frequently  at  our  meetings.  He  will  always  be  welcome. 

I  desire  at  the  same  time  to  remind  you  that  without  your  cordial  sup- 
port and  assistance  your  officers  can  accomplish  nothing.  We  hope  with 
your  co-operation  to  make  the  coming  year  a  prosperous  one  in  the  history 
of  this  Club.  We  hope  to  make  a  record  that  will  encourage  the  formation 
of  other  clubs,  in  competing  cities  of  the  West,  to  enable  us  to  carry  forward 
with  greater  ease  the  reforms  which  should  be  the  object  and  aim  and  inter- 
ests of  this  Club.  We  hope  to  prosper  so  that  in  1892,  when  the  paint  trade 
of  New  York,  Washington,  and  St.  Louis  come  here  to  attend  the  World's 
Fair,  we  can  entertain  them  in  a  manner  that  will  remind  them  that  when 
Columbus  discovered  America  it  was  not  only  Manhattan  Island  and  the 
Potomac  flats  and  Shaw's  Garden  that  were  discovered,  but  the  entire  con- 
tinent, extending  from  ocean  to  ocean;  where  we  are  to  have  in  the  twentieth 
century,  according  to  Bellamy,  no  army,  no  navy,  no  merchants,  no  money, 
no  servant  girls,  no  saloons,  no  court-houses — consequently  few  lawyers  and 
judges — it  is  expected  that  the  Cronin  trial  will  be  finished  by  that  time — 
but  we  will  have  a  grand  industrial  army,  controlled  and  operated  by  a 
happy  and  contented  people,  sharing  alike  in  the  profits  of  the  industries, 
all  of  which  will  be  in  keeping  with  the  greatness  of  the  nation.  What  an 
Utopia  to  contemplate!  In  the  mean  time,  we  live  in  a  different  era — an 
era  in  which  competition  is  severe,  requiring  the  best  thought  and  patience, 
of  organizations  like  this,  to  correct  abuses  and  to  enable  us  to  make  from 
our  business  a  profit  compensating  us  for  the  capital  invested  and  the  time 
and  energy  devoted  to  its  pursuit.  In  my  opinion,  the  solution  of  our  diffi- 
culties lies  in  co-operation,  and  I  believe  the  membership  of  this  Club  is 
equal  to  the  occasion.  I  believe  that  they  will  commit  no  step  backward, 
but  that  they  will  grasp  and  solve  the  difficult  problems,  and  that  our  progress 
will  be  onward  and  upward  until  Chicago  stands  without  a  peer  in  the  man- 
ufacture and  sale  of  paints,  oils,  and  varnish.  [Applause.] 

As  a  soldier,  as  a  statesman,  as  a  jurist,  the  name  of  Gresham  is  a  part 
of  the  history  of  our  land.  [Applause.]  One  can  not  be  written  without  the 
other.  I  now  have  the  honor,  gentlemen,  of  presenting  to  you  Judge  Walter 
Q.  Gresham,  who  will  address  you.  [Enthusiastic  applause.] 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGP.APHY. 

p  ,  ~7^ 


245 


246  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

JUDGE  GRESHAM — Gentlemen:  I  fear  that  you  have  mistaken  this  intro- 
duction of  your  President  to  have  been  somewhat  sought  on  my  part.  I  am 
invited  as  your  guest,  and  not  as  one  who  is  expected  to  address  you.  I 
have  enjoyed  the  evening  very  much,  and  why  should  I  be  called  upon  to 
address  an  assemblage  of  business  men — this  body  of  men  representing  a 
particular  branch' of  trade — the  oil,  paint,  and  varnish  business? 

It  is  not  because  I  know  anything  about  it.  It  is  safe  to  say  that  I  know 
less  about  it — very  much  less — than  anyone  else  in  this  room.  What  the 
President's  good  friend  said  to  him  on  the  street,  it  would  be  well  for  me  to 
observe — not  to  talk  too  much.  That  was  good  advice.  It  would  be  well 
for  many  men  if  they  received  such  advice  and  heeded  it.  Time  was  when 
men  were  in  demand  simply  because  they  could  talk  whether  they  said  any- 
thing or  not.  The  men  who  are  in  demand  now  are  men  who  can  think 
and  act. 

Some  of  you  are  old  enough  to  remember  the  campaign  of  1858,  in 
which  Mr.  Lincoln  and  Judge  Douglass  canvassed  this  State  as  representa- 
tives of  the  two  great  parties.  It  was  a  famous  campaign.  Perhaps  such  a 
campaign  never  occurred  before.  Certainly,  there  has  not  been  such  a 
match  in  this  country  since,  in  any  State. 

Mr.  Lincoln's  friends  gave  him  a  reception  at  Bloomington,  as  Judge 
Douglass"  friends  did  also.  A  gentleman  was  selected  who  was  happy — who 
was  gifted — in  the  way  of  speech.  He  could  talk  gracefully  and  pleasantly, 
whether  he  said  much  or  not.  He  was  very  happy,  on  that  occasion, 
receiving  and  presenting  Mr.  Lincoln  to  the  people,  but  Mr.  Lincoln  was 
not  quite  so  happy  in  his  response  as  the  Judge  was  in  his  remarks — Mr. 
Lincoln's  mind  was  such  that  he  needed  some  question  to  discuss;  he 
could  not  talk  into  the  air  very  well;  his  little  speech  was  not  satisfactory  to 
him,  perhaps  not  to  his  friends.  It  was  not  his  forte.  And,  at  the  dinner 
party,  he  paid  the  gentleman  who  made  the  address  a  rather  questionable 
compliment.  Addressing  him,  he  said:  "  Judge,  you  have  one  talent  that  I 
envy  you  the  possession  of  very  much."  The  Judge  was  flattered.  Said 
he,  "  Mr.  Lincoln,  what  is  that,  if  I  may  ask?"  "  Judge,"  said  Mr.  Lincoln, 
"  it  is  the  ability  to  talk  as  you  do  and  not  say  anything." 

There  are  such  men.  But,  as  I  said,  their  occupation  is  pretty  much 
gone,  and  it  is  well  it  is  so.  I  am  glad  to  see  a  meeting  of  this  kind  to-night. 
You,  gentlemen,  are  no  doubt  engaged  in  sharp  rivalry,  but  you  meet 
around  this  social  board  in  a  friendly  way,  and  discuss  questions  affecting 
your  welfare.  What  you  see  here  is  going  on  in  other  departments  of  trade. 
It  shows  the  mental  activity  of  those  who  attend  them.  These  meetings 
stimulate  thought.  You  learn  your  own  business  better;  and,  by  the  way, 
while  I  do  not  understand  this  question  of  paint,  oil,  and  other  things,  there 
is  one  thing  that  I  can  observe  and  do  observe.  And  that  is  this:  There  is 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


247 


L   -          -^  L 

-  ..... 


•\.  /  -- 

C  .......  ••; 


/ o  ""    f'V-"*" 


r    —  «  « 

0/...<\    ..........  C   ..l-..TTO 


.^.y....  .......  ........  .4 


248  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

no  longer  the  opportunity  for  individual  enterprise  that  existed  twenty-five 
•  years  ago. 

I  am  not  going  to  enter  into  a  discussion  of  this  question.  I  am  not 
going  to  say  anything  about  who  is  right  or  who  is  wrong.  It  is  not  the 
time,  nor  is  it  the  place.  But  with  these  large  bodies  of  associated  capital, 
which  we  find  not  only  in  your  business  but  in  all  departments  of  trade, 
what  show  is  there  for  merely  individual  enterprises?  Very  little.  What  is 
going  to  be  the  outcome  of  it?  I  do  not  know.  The  time  has  come  when 
the  business  men  of  the  country  must  assert  themselves.  We  have  too 
many  mere  talkers  now  in  our  National  and  State  legislatures.  What  we 
need  is  more  men  of  practical  business  experience — men  who  understand 
the  economic  questions  which  are  forcing  themselves  to  the  front.  It  would 
be  infinitely  better  for  our  country  if  we  had  more  good  business  men  in 
Congress.  Legislation  would  be  better.  I  hope  you  give  me  credit  for 
candor,  and  not  think  that  I  am  trying  to  flatter  you,  when  I  say  that  it  is 
not  true,  as  some  people  suppose,  that  the  talent  of  this  country  is  in  the 
professions;  that  the  men  of  brains  are  found  in  the  professions.  The  men 
of  ability  in  this  country  are  largely  in  business  enterprises.  The  profes- 
sions are  amounting  to  less  and  less  all  the  time.  I  think  I  may  safely  say, 
that  in  my  profession,  the  standard  is  not  as  high  as  it  was  twenty-five  years 
ago.  That  is  to  say,  the  percentage  of  able  men  is  not  as  great  as  it  was 
then.  I  will  simply  refer  to  some  of  the  questions — one  in  particular.  You 
all  know  that  we  have  an  International  Trade  Congress  here,  to  be  in  session 
at  Washington — I  believe  it  is  mainly  on  wheels,  though  [Applause] — to 
consider  questions  affecting  the  welfare,  not  only  of  the  United  States,  but 
of  other  countries  upon  this  continent.  Suppose  we  had  had  practical  busi- 
ness men — more  practical  business  men — in  Congress  for  the  last  genera- 
tion, don't  you  think  the  business  men  of  this  country  would  have  been 
transacting  more  business,  would  have  been  exchanging  more  goods  with 
the  South  American  countries?  \Vhy  is  it  that  only  a  small  percentage  of 
the  business  done  in  the  countries  south  of  us  finds  its  way  here?  Why  is  it 
that  the  business  men  of  this  country  are  not  engaged  more  in  commerce 
with  the  countries  south  of  us?  The  conditions  should  favor  us,  and  yet 
we  are  scarcely  known  there  as  merchants  and  traders.  It  affects  you.  It 
affects  the  welfare  of  this  whole  country.  We  need  legislation  there.  We 
should  not  be  controlled  or  governed  by  mere  sentiments  or  prejudice.  It 
does  not  matter  what  our  political  ideas  are.  This  is  a  practical  question. 
There  is  a  field,  and  we  should  occupy  it.  We  can  occupy  it,  and  if  we  do 
not,  it  is  our  own  fault.  We  are  standing  in  our  own  light.  We  should 
have  more  than  50  per  cent.  Instead  of  that,  we  have  less  than  10  per 
cent,  of  it.  Then  we  need  legislation  which  will  open  the  doors  to  those 
countries.  I  do  not  care  what  it  is.  I  am  no  free  trader,  but  I  am  not 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 


249 


_^  /  «v,       ^A>     <M  „    I  j  ~  ,  <r/-  ^ 

Y^--' ^^ , N^1 -^ V- 

I  ^         1o_       V,  -       ^  jj 

^* 

13  _          7.3.XJ 

V£) 

v9 

I      fo 
...-.»  ....  <7.... 

0 

^ 

( 

r> 

V,      V9 

c 


250  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

going  to  make  a  political  speech  here.  I  do  not  think  the  conditions  under 
which  we  are  now  living  can  justify  free  trade.  We  can  not  yet  handle  the 
commerce  of  the  world.  Neither  am  I  in  favor  of  the  making  of  laws  which 
deny  to  our  business  men  the  opportunity  to  enjoy  the  trade  of  other 
countries.  Let  us  modify  our  laws. 

I  was  very  glad  to  hear  of  a  remark  made  by  Senator  Sherman  the  other 
night,  in  which  he  was  bold  enough  to  say  that  the  time  had  come  when  we 
must  enact  laws  which  would  give  our  business  men  an  opportunity  to  go 
into  those  countries  south  of  us,  on  an  equality  with  the  British  merchants. 
That  is  what  we  need,  and  that  is  what  you  should  demand.  As  I  said  be- 
fore, gentlemen,  I  am  not  here  to  make  a  speech.  I  see  a  shorthand  man 
here.  I  am  not  talking  to  newspapers.  I  have  enjoyed  the  evening  very 
much,  and  I  hope  you  will  prosper  during  the  next  year,  and  during  the* 
coming  years.  I  hope  to  see  American  commerce  extended,  and  see  the 
conditions  more  favorable  to  our  merchants.  I  am  obliged  to  you,  gentle- 
men. [Applause.] 

THE  PRESIDENT — We  have  a  gentleman  here  to-night  from  a  State  which 
has  produced  many  great  men.  [A  VOICE — Ohio!]  I  allude  to  Indiana. 
There  is  a  bond  of  sympathy  between  us,  because  he  follows  the  same  voca- 
tion as  we  do.  We  would  like  to  .hear  from  Mr.  Johnson,  of  Evansville, 
Indiana. 

MR.  JOHNSON — Mr.  President  and  Gentlemen:  I  am  no  public  speaker, 
but  I  have  enjoyed  this  evening  very  much.  It  is  true  that  I  hail  from  the 
State  of  Indiana,  but  I  have  always  considered  myself  an  Illinois  boy.  I 
have  watched  the  proceedings  of  this  Club~\vith  a  good  deal  of  interest,  and 
I  think  it  is  a  great  benefit  to  the  paint  trade  of  this  city.  I  thank  you  for 
the  compliment  of  calling  on  me.  As  far  as  remarks  are  concerned,  it  is 
not  my  forte. 

THE  PRESIDENT — We  would  be  glad  now  to  hear  from  any  member  of 
the  Club  who  cares  to  talk  to  us. 

MR.  HAYES — I  think  some  remarks  from  our  Vice- President  would  be 
in  order. 

VICE-PRESIDENT  HAINES — Mr.  President  and  Gentlemen:  I  thank  you 
for  the  honor  you  have  conferred  upon  me  by  electing  me  to  the  vice-presi- 
dency of  this  Club.  Had  I  been  present  at  the  meeting  at  which  the  elec- 
tion was  held,  I  think  I  should  have  objected.  You  all  know  I  am  a  broker, 
and  I  think  it  would  have  been  better  if  someone  else  had  been  elected  as 
Vice-President  of  this  Club.  Still,  I  assure  you,  I  understand  and  appreciate 
the  honor;  and  I  will  do  my  best  for  the  interests  of  the  Club.  In  my  regu- 
lar routine  of  business,  I  think  I  can  further  the  interests  of  this  Club  as 
regards  missionary  work.  I  have  been  acquainted  with  it  from  its  infancy, 
and  have  taken  great  interest  in  it.  I  think  our  city  can  well  support  a 


HAVEN'S   PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 


251 


r 


^ 

r>>  ..V\  .....  /rr%^ 
U    <\ 


252  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

club  to  further  the  interests  of  the  paint,  oil,  and  varnish  trade.  I  wish  tc 
again  thank  you,  gentlemen,  for  the  honor  you  have  conferred  upon  me. 
and  you  can  rest  assured  that  I  will  do  all  in  my  power  to  deserve  it. 
[Applause.]  I  would  suggest  that  our  friend,  Mr.  Cox,  now  address  the 
meeting. 

MR.  Cox — Mr.  President:  I  do  not  know  that  I  have  anything  to  say  on 
this  occasion,  except  to  express  my  satisfaction  at  the  election  of  our  present 
officers.  I  am  satisfied  that  they  have  not  only  the  desired  knowledge,  but 
also  the  willingness,  to  subserve  the  interests  of  this  Club,  which  I  hope  will 
be  a  success,  not  only  this  year,  but  in  the  years  to  come. 

VICE-PRESIDENT  HAINES — I  would  suggest  that  we  hear  from  our  valued 
friend,  Mr.  Senour. 

MR.  SENOUR — I  hope  you  will  excuse  me  this  evening.  I  did  not  come 
prepared  to  say  anything. 

MR.  HALL — r"  you  will  allow  me  to  make  a  suggestion  this  evening— 
Mr.  Kotzenburg  is  one  of  us. 

MR.  KOTZENBURG — Mr.  Chairman:  Since  our  last  meeting,  I  was  a 
citizen  of  the  Town  of  Lake,  the  great  Town  of  Lake — in  the  Stock  Yards. 
But  now  I  am  happy  to  say  that  I  am  a  citizen  of  the  good  City  of  Chicago. 
I  think  the  people  can  thank  me  for  bringing  the  Town  of  Lake  into  Chicago. 
If  it  hadn't  been  for  me,  I  guess  it  would  not  have  come  in.  But  I  run  mj 
little  politics  there.  It  came  in  with  600  majority,  because  I  said  it  should. 
If  I  had  told  the  people  not  to  come  in,  they  would  have  stayed  out.  [Laugh- 
ter.] I  must  tell  the  members  here  that  Bridgeport  is  the  greatest  place 
for  grinding  paint.  You  want  to  buy  Bridgeport  river-water,  to  mix  paint 
I  will  supply  it  to  you  for  50  cents  a  barrel.  I  hope  you  present  will  give 
me  a  little  order  right  now.  I  must  take  an  exception  to  Mr.  Vice- Presi- 
dent. He  don't  seem  to  know  that  the  brokers  are  the  glory  and  beauty  of 
our  Club. 

THE  VICE-PRESIDENT — We  would  be  very  much  pleased  to  hear  from 
our  worthy  young  friend,  Mr.  Aridrews. 

MR.  ANDREWS — Gentlemen,  I  beg  to  be  excused. 

THE  VICE-PRESIDENT — Gentlemen:  We  have  with  us  the  representative 
of  one  of  the  largest  and  oldest  houses  of  the  City  of  Chicago — Mr.  Heath. 
I  know  we  should  all  like  to  hear  from  him. 

MR.  HEATH — Mr.  President  and  Gentlemen:  Fourteen  years  ago,  when  1 
went  into  the  paint  business,  I  knew  nothing  about  it.  Thirteen  years  ago, 
I  thought  I  knew  a  great  deal  about  it.  At  the  present  time,  I  think  I  know 
a  great  deal  more  about  the  paint  business  than  I  do  about  public  speaking 

I  have  had  some  curiosity,  being  one  of  the  outsiders,  to  know  how 
the  meetings  of  the  Paint  Club  were  conducted,  and  I  am  very  much 
pleased  indeed  to  meet  the  class  of  gentlemen  who  are  here  this  evening. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


253 


•YI     vvw 
— P..s*f...fc  

••cf--V- 

/..VX^.... 

^    ^  <i_x 
V 

/"        JN.                         £~^  °  X) 

"S> J "*]   '"" 

..."^ — ._/» -A 1  _  _D._/ 

J  J  I  ' 

\  \      =r-         ,-&  ftp  QJ  . 

..<^...:../...T....c: b •/...(P..!....^_  .n  .....\ A  .N 

x       V  v  ^  V 

v  -  ^  ^**^  (  \^      S     "^\      P       /^ 

V^^i  N  — *     "\ 

d^fV  C^s^_-^  \Q  K *  ^ 

Y    ^ — —-v  "'  A "--^ 

irV\P     V 
^"y 


254  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

and  notice  the  manner  in  which  the  meeting  has  been  conducted.  There 
are  a  great  many  points  which  ought  to  be  brought  up  for  general  discus- 
sion among  the  manufacturers  and  jobbers  of  goods  in  mr  line,  particu- 
larly at  the  present  time — linseed  oil  and  white  lead.  Both  these  subjects 
have  been  discussed  to  the  point.  And,  if  it  will  not  be  going  beyond  the 
limits,  as  it  were,  and  if  you  will  permit  an  outsider  to  express  an  opinion, 
I  would  like  to  say  one  or  two  things  in  regard  to  the  system  of  rebates  to 
the  jobbers. 

I  think  you  will  all  agree  with  me  that  in  the  past,  where  there  has 
been  a  provision  made  with  a  jobber  for  a  profit,  there  has  been  more 
or  less  anxiety  on  the  part  of  some  of  the  jobbers  to  divide  that  profit,  with 
the  idea  of  increasing  sales,  and,  as  I  have  looked  upon  the  subject,  the 
manufacturers  have  never  before  been  in  the  position  where  they 
could  go  to  the  jobbing  trade  and  absolutely  enforce  their  system  of  rebates. 
We  have  all  been  called  upon  at  times  in  the  past  to  sign  agreements  to 
uphold  certain  prices  made  by  the  manufacturers,  and  we  have  all  willingly 
gone  into  such  agreements  in  good  faith;  but  something  has  come  up  whereby 
a  little  inducement  has  been  offered  and  before  a  great  time  had  elapsed,  it 
was  quite  general  on  the  part  of  the  trade  to  divide  the  rebate,  and  before 
long  it  amounted  to  nothing.-  Now,  as  I  understand  the  matter,  both  these 
industries  are  conducted  in  such  a  manner  that  the  manufacturers  are  in  a 
position  to  absolutely  enforce  a  price  and  hold  jobbers  strictly  to  the  enforce- 
ment of  that  price.  In  other  words,  jobbers  who  agree  to  maintain  the 
prices  fixed  by  the  manufacturers  under  the  penalty  of  having  supplies  cut 
off,  can  now  be  held  rigidly  to  the  enforcement  of  prices. 

I  hope  that  the  committee,  which  has  been  appointed  to-night,  will 
present  these  facts  to  these  manufacturers,  and  use  their  utmost  endeavors 
to  have  the  provisions  of  same  secured  in  such  a  way  as  to  adequately  com- 
pensate the  jobbing  trade  for  pushing  these  ideas.  (Applause) 

THE  VICE-PRESIDENT — I  think  the  members  of  the  Club  would  be  only 
too  happy  to  hear  from  our  venerable  friend,  Mr.  Coffin. 

MR.  COFFIN — Mr.  President  and  Gentlemen:  I  have  listened  to  the  re- 
marks of  our  President,  and  the  advice  that  was  given  to  him  by  some  good 
friend  not  to  talk  too  much.  Why,  it  seems  as  though  he  hit  my  case.  For 
the  past  year,  or  during  the  last  season,  it  seems  to  have  fallen  upon  me 
to  present  various  subjects  for  discussion,  and  to  do  more  or  less  talking  at 
these  Club  meetings,  and  I  feel  as  though  I  ought  to  be  excused.  I  feel 
confident  that  we  have  in  our  Club  a  number  of  gentlemen  who  are  able  to 
stand  up  here  and  present  subjects  for  discussion  much  better  than  I  have 
ever  done  in  the  past;  but  I  think  to-night  we  can  congratulate  ourselves 
upon  the  outlook  for  the  future. .  I  think  I  express  the  sentiment  of  every 
gentleman  present  when  I  say  that  we  feel  highly  honored  to-night  by  the 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


255 


.y( V, .«.. 


256  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

presence  of  Hon.  Judge  Gresham.  I  think  a  few  meetings  of  this -kind, 
with  guests  that  are  so  able,  so  competent  to  talk  to  us  upon  the  subjects  of 
the  day,  is  what  we  need  as  business  men,  and  the  social  features  of  our 
Club  meetings  can  go  right  along  with  it.  We  are  learning  together  how  to 
properly  handle  the  subjects  that  should  come  before  us.  I  can  not  say 
very  much  to-night,  Mr.  President,  after  the  eloquence  we  have  listened  to; 
but  I  will  say  this — that  I  had  fully  made  up  my  mind  to  resign  from  the 
Committee  on  Entertainment,  but  we  have  started  under  such  auspicious  cir- 
cumstances that  I  will  try  to  do  the  best  I  can.  I  think  also  I  express  the 
sentiment  of  all  the  members  when  I  say  that  we  have  listened  with  a  great 
deal  of  pleasure  to  the  remarks  of  Mr.  Heath,  that  there  are  subjects  for  us 
to  take  up  of  vital  importance,  so  that  we  can  accomplish  more  the  coming 
season  than  we  did  the  past  one.  We  surely  accomplished  something  the 
past  year,  and  we  can  accomplish  a  good  deal  more  this  year.  I  think,  as 
Mr.  Cox  said,  that  we  are  to  be  congratulated  upon  the  selection  of  ou" 
officers,  and  with  the  help  of  every  member  of  the  Club  coming  to  oui 
meetings  regularly,  it  seems  to  me  that  the  success  of  the  Paint,  Oil,  anc 
Varnish  Club  is  assured.  [Applause.] 

SEVERAL  VOICES — Wadsworth!  Wadsworth!  Let  us  hear  from  Wadsworth! 

MR.  WADSWORTH — Mr.  President:  I  have  need  to  congratulate  the  Club 
upon  the  character  of  the  new  officers  elected  and  the  way  in  which  they 
have  taken  hold  of  business.  I  know  that  this  Club  can  be  made  an  instru- 
ment of  a  great  deal  of  good  in  Chicago.  The  question  has  been  raised  as 
to  whether  the  jobbers  would  stand  by  any  agreement  that  they  made  in 
regard  to  prices  on  linseed  oil.  It  was  a  very  great  surprise  to  me,  and  I 
think  to  all  the  members  of  the  Boston  Club,  to  see  the  way  they  have  done 
it  in  Boston.  I  presume  there  has  never  been  a  case  there  where  they  had 
gone  back  upon  their  agreement,  except  through  some  misunderstanding, 
when  first  started.  I  know  something  can  be  done  here,  and  if  we  all  take 
hold  and  help  our  new  officers  we  can  make  a  success  of  this  Club,  and  it 
will  be  a  great  thing  for  us  financially  as  well  as  socially.  It  is  very  much 
more  agreeable  for  men  in  the  same  business  to  meet  socially  and  for  busi- 
ness purposes  combined.  It  makes  them  feel  more  generous.  We  get 
acquainted  with  them,  and  we  feel  like  living  and  letting  live,  and  we  can 
give  quotations  after  getting  acquainted  with  our  competitors,  that  we 
would  not  give  otherwise.  We  feel  they  are  pretty  good  fellows,  after 
all,  and  we  would  rather  take  a  good  profit  than  a  small  one.  I  hope  we 
will  have  a  very  successful  year,  that  the  Club  membership  may  increase, 
and  the  interest  be  a  benefit  to  all  of  us.  [Applause.] 

THE  VICE-PRESIDENT — We  would  now  like  to  hear  from  Mr.  Pettet. 

MR.  PETTET — I  move  we  adjourn. 

Mr.  PRESIDENT — A  motion  to  adjourn  is  always  in  order,  but  I    don't 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


257 


:..cJ 

— i 
> 

•  ••&(• 

__-4 

"/"••V.c-Ve"* fcr 

/  ^  Vfc^X      I         W-cX      XO          /  I      ex 

-oLDK-V"" ** C'-0/-     -t-->^ 


258  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

see  how  you  can  get  out  of  making  a  few  remarks.  We  know  you  can 
write  a  good  letter. 

MR.  PETTET — Mr.  President,  I  call  for  the  question. 

THE  VICE-PRESIDENT — Speak  on  the  Credit  Bureau. 

MR.  PETTET — As  I  understand  it,  the  Credit  Bureau  is  a  close  corpora- 
tion. I  hardly  think  it  would  be  proper  for  me  to  talk  about  it  before  com- 
pany. But,  Mr.  President,  before  the  motion  to  adjourn  prevails,  I  want  to 
say  a  few  words  in  reference  to  the  distinguished  General,  the  upright 
Judge,  who,  though  he  may  know  nothing  about  the  paint  business,  has 
earned  our  thanks  by  compelling  the  railroads  to  pay  something  for  their 
paint.  I  move  that  a  rising  vote  of  thanks  be  extended  to  Judge  Gresham 
for  his  attendance  here  this  evening. 

THE  PRESIDENT — All  members  in  favor  of  a  rising  vote  of  thanks  to  our 
distinguished  guest  will  please  stand.  I  am  glad  to  see  that  all  of  us  are  on 
our  feet.  We  will  now  be  seated. 

MR.  PETTET — I  move  a  vote  of  thanks  be  also  extended  to  our  Enter- 
tainment Committee. 

MR.  Cox — I  second  the  motion. 

THE  PRESIDENT — Those  favorable  to  the  motion  will  please  say  aye. 
So  ordered.  The  motion  to  adjourn  being  now  in  order,  if  there  is  no 
objection  we  stand  adjourned  until  the  third  Thursday  of  next  month. 

AUTHOR'S  NOTE. — The  student  who  has  finished  the  business  letters,  court  cases, 
and  the  foregoing  convention  report,  has  now  received  practice  virtually  in  all  styles 
of  shorthand  reporting,for  the  last  named,  convention  reporting,  contains  also  speeches 
as  well  as  debate,  thereby  including  oratory,  under  which  head  come  sermons,  ora- 
ions,  lectures  and  the  like,  all  of  which  are  only  different  names  for  the  same  class 
of  work,  known  by  the  general  term  of  speech-making.  The  student  cannot  review 
these  exercises  too  often.  They  should  be  practised  until  they  are  known  so 
thoroughly  that  all  the  phrases  may  be  made  almost  as  written  in  the  plates.  Such 
following  of  phrasing  is  not  necessary  in  general,  for  the  same  person  will  not  always 
phrase  the  same  words  in  the  same  way,  but  such  fami'iarity  will  greatly  facilitate 
the  students'  ease  in  phrasing  in  all  work. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


259 


.  v 


..^ 


c/ 


260  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

EXPLANATORY  NOTES. 

On  these  pages,  261  to  270,  we  present  an  exact  fac-simile,  as  it 
appeared  in  a  Chicago  trade-newspaper,  of  the  convention  or  meeting 
which  we  have  given  in  full  on  pages  234  to  259.  It  is  shown  on  these 
pages  261  to  270  as  edited  before  printing,  the  unnecessary  portions 
being  either  expunged  or  rewritten,  and  in  most  cases  descriptively  con- 
densed, while  occasionally  descriptions  occur  for  acts  which  were 
not  utterances  and  therefore  not  found  in  notes  commencing  page  235. 

The  verbatim  report  commencing  on  page  234,  as  will  be  seen  by 
the  shorthand  notes  opposite  those  pages,  could  only  contain  the  infor- 
mation which  the  reporter  jots  down  before  the  meeting  is  called  to 
order  and  the  actual  remarks  of  the  speakers,  commencing  with  the 
opening  words  of  the  president,  and  the  names  or  titles  of  the  speakers, 
which  the  phonographer  writes  as  the  remarks  are  being  made.  For 
this  reason,  the  heading  of  the  report  as  given  on  opposite  page,  com- 
mencing with  the  title:  "  A  Notable  Event,"  and  including  the  first 
and  second  paragraphs  as  they  appear  on  that  page,  are  necessar- 
ily merely  descriptive  and  not  verbatim. 

Even  the  words  of  the  president  in  opening  a  meeting,  are  not 
printed  in  a  general  newspaper  report,  and  they  are  therefore  not  to  be 
found  on  opposite  page. 

The  minutes  of  the  preceding  meeting  are  also  neither  printed  nor 
do  they  appear  in  the  shorthand  notes  on  page  235,  as  the  stenographer 
does  not  need  them,  the  two  lines  of  third  paragraph  of  report  on  op- 
posite page  fully  covering  the  subject  of  the  minutes,  including  Mr. 
Coffin's  motion  for  their  acceptance,  and  the  seconding  of  same  by 
Mr.  Pettet,  shown  on  page  234.  Similarly  with  the  report  of  the 
treasurer,  which,  when  no  figures  are  given,  is  sometimes  condensed  as 
shown  in  fourth  paragraph  on  opposite  page. 

By  comparing  these  paragraphs  on  opposite  page  with  the  ver- 
batim wording  of  same  commencing  on  page  234,  the  student  will  also 
observe  quite  a  considerable  omission  in  this  trade  paper  report. 
For  instance,  the  answer  of  Mr.  Cox  to  a  call  of  the  president  for  re- 
port of  Membership  Committee,  with  the  discussion  between  Mr. 
Rosenthal  and  the  president,  has  been  condensed  into  three  lines,  as 
shown  by  our  fifth  paragraph  in  report  on  opposite  page. 

The  report  of  Mr.  Wadsworth,  of  the  Committee  on  Credits,  is 
similarly  treated,  while  the  six  lines  of  last  paragraph  of  page  opposite 
are  used  in  place  of  nearly  the  entire  latter  half  of  page  236  in  our 
full  report. 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


26l 


HOW  THE  CHICAGO  PAINT,  OIL  AND  VARNISH  CLUB  COMBINES 

AN  EXCHANGE  OF  SOCIAL  COURTESY  WITH  TIMELY 

DISCUSSION  OF  THE  LIVE  TOPICS  OF  THE 

DAY,  IN  THEIR  OCTOBER  MEETING. 


Jndge    Gresham,    the   Guest   of  the    Evening. 


The  first  actual  verbatim  work  shown  in  this  trade  newspaper  re- 
port are  the  resolutions  of  page  262,  indicated  by  fourth  and  fifth  para- 
graphs of  page  238  of  the  verbatim  report. 

Thus  it  will  be  seen  that  some  two  pages  of  shorthand  have  betii 
condensed  into  the  space  of  a  few  paragraphs  in  this  trade  newspaper 
report,  which  is  supposed  to  be  a  very  full  one,  tlie  condensation,  ir  tb.v? 
case,  being  caused  both  by  entirely  ignoring  some  remarks  of  speaker: 
and  simply  describing  others.  The  words  which  members  use  in  sec 
ending  a  motion  and  the  words  of  the  President  in  putting  a  motion,  to- 
gether with  the 

words  which  he  A  KOTABIjE 

uses  in  stating 
that  the  motion 
has  passed,  or 
not,  being  never 
quoted  in  a 
newspaper  re- 
port, no  matter 
how  full  the  re- 
port is  to  be; 
such  matters  be- 
ing simply  de- 
scribed as  on 

this  and  next  page,  for 
it  will  be  seen  that  after 
the  reading  of  the  first 
resolution  on  page  262 
quite  considerable  was 
said  by  the  president 
and  secretary,  which 
appears  in  complete  re- 
port on  pages  238  and 
240,  for  which,  on  page 
262,  the  reporter  has 
contented  himself  with 
simply  writing  two 
words,  "So  ordered.'' 

Almost  the  same  sort 
of  condensation  has 
been  used  on  page  262 
with  the  two  motions  o^ 
Mr.  Coffin,  down  to  the 
presentation  by  the  sec- 
retary of  the  second 
verbatim  resolution, 
and  even  the  motion  of 
Mr.  Pettet  has  been  re- 
duced to  two  lines,  the 
call  from  the  president 


Thirty  representatives  of  the  Paint,  Oil  and  Varnish  Club  of 
this  city  attended  the  October  meeting,  at  the  rooms  of  the  Union 
League,  on  Thursday  evening  last. 

Aft^-r  a  sumptuous  spread,  the  discussion  of  which,  with 
social  intercourse,  occupied  the  early  part  of  the  evening,  the  club 
was  called  to  order  by  the  newly-elected  president,  G.  H.  Vrooman- 

Secretary'Person  read  the  minutes  of  the  previous  meeting, 
which  were  accepted  as  read. 

Report  of  Treasurer  Rosenthal  being  next  in  order,  that 
gentleman  asked  to  be  excused  on  the  ground  that  he  had  only 
sent  out  the  bills  a  week  ago,  and  had  not  had  time  to  hear  from 
more.than  a  small  part  of  them.  He  assured  the  gentlemen  present, 
however,  that  there  was  enough  in  the  treasury  to  pay  for  the 
night's  dinner,  and  by  the  next  meeting  he  expected  to  be  in  a 
position  to  give  a  regular  report. 

Mr.  Cox,  Chairman  of  Committee  on  Membership,  stated 
that  his  committee  had  as  yet  not  begun  active  business,  on 
account  of  the  little  time  that  had  elapsed  since  appointment. 

Mr.  Wad-worth,  on  behalf  of  the  Committee  on  Credits, 
asked  for  further  time  to  prepare  a  report.  Granted. 

President  Vrooman,  for  the  Committee  on  Naphtha,  appoint- 
ed to  regulate  the  price  of  Naphtha  in  small  lots,  reported  Iliat 
an  agreement  had  been  drawn  up  by  the  committee  and  circulated 
for  signatures  among  the  trade.  Twenty-three  signatures  were 
obtained,  and  it  was  the  judgment  of  the  committee  that  further 
work  was  necessary. 


262 


HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


upon  Mr.  Hall,  for  an 
expression  of  opinion, 
being  changed  from  a 
verbatim  paragraph  tc 
three  lines. 


The  first  verbatim  re 
marks  printed  in  this 
trade  newspaper  re- 
port arethose  whichMr. 
Hall  makes,  commenc- 
ing with  the  last  two 
lines  at  the  bottom  of 
this  page,  and  even  in 
those  it  will  be  noticed 
that  his  first  words  "In 
this  connection  allow 
me  to  say  that,"  which 
appear  in  the  verbatim 
report  on  page  242,  are 
omitted  from  the  para- 
graph here,  a§  well 


The  regular  business  of  the  meeting  being  at  an  end,  and 
miscellaneous  business  being  in  order,  Mr.  Rosenthal  pre- 
sented a  resolution  requesting  the  Executive  Committee  to 
lay  before  the  next  regular  meeting  of  the  Club,  nominations 
for  delegates  to  the  National  Convention  to  be  held  in  Detroit, 
with  such  suggestions  as  may  appear  necessary  at  the  time. 
Carried. 

Secretary  Person  read  the  following  resolution,  which  had 
been  handed  to  him; 

WHEREAS,  A  great  change  has  taken  place  in  the  white  lead 
industry  caused  by  the  consolidation  of  private  firms  into  the 
National  White  Lead  Trust,  which  has  had  the  effect  of  plac- 
ing the  manufacture  of  white  lead  upon  a  more  profitable 
basis;  be  it 

Resolved,  That  it  is  the  sense  of  this  Club  that  the  rebate 
now  being  allowed  to  the  jobbing  trade  is  inadequate  and  un- 
satisfactory, and  we  respectfully  ask  the  National  White  Lead 
Trust,  when  formulating  their  plans  for  the  coming  year,  to 
arrange  for  a  more  liberal  rebate  to  jobbers,  and  also  take  into 
consideration  the  claims  of  paint  grinders  for  an  equitable 
price  on  dry  lead. 

So  ordered. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Coffin,  a  committee  of  three,  consisting 
of  Messrs.  Weare,  Cutler  and  Person,  was  appointed  to  pre- 
sent this  resolution  to  the  National  Wholesale  Druggists'  con- 
vention to  be  held  at  Indianapolis  on  the  22ad  instant. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Coffin,  the  Secretary  was  instructed  to 
send  a  copy  of  the  above  resolution  fto  each  of  the  different- 
paint  clubs  ofl  the  United  States,  and  to  ask  for  their  co- 
operation. 

Secretary  Person  presented  the  following  resolution, 
handed  to  him: 

WHEREAS,  The  jobbing  trade  of  linseed  oil  at  the  prevail- 
ing rates  is  unprofitable  and  opposed  to  good  business,  and 
believing  that  the  manufacturers  are  desirous  of  establishing, 
and  having  maintained,  a  schedule  of  prices  which  will  place 
this  article  on  a  proper  basis,  be  it  therefore 

Resolved,  That  this  Club  urge  upon  the  manufacturers  of 
linseed  oil  the  importance  of  making  a  range  of  prices  for 
quantities  which  shall  be  equitable  and  afford  a  margin  of 
profit  to  the  dealers  handling  this  product. 

Resolved,  That  this  Club  and  its  members  will  heartily  co- 
operate in  such  action  and  maintain  the  prices  so  established. 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Pettet  the  Chair  was  authorized  to  appoint 
a  committee  to  present  this  to  the  National  Linseed  Oil  Co. 

Mr.  Hall,  being  called  upon  for  an  expression  of  opinion 
respecting  the  resolution  just  passed,  readily  responded  as 
follows: 

Mr.  President  and  Gentlemen:— Of  course,  all  the  gentle- 
men present  understand  that  the  linseed  oil  manufacturers 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


263 


as  the  interruption  by 
several  voices,  which 
said  "Yes  sir,  every 
time"  (on  page  242) 
and  Mr.  Hall's  answer 
"Well,  I  doubt  it," 
those  words  being 
omitted  as  irrelevant 
and  unnecessary. 


The  sentences  com- 
mencing with  fourth 
paragraph  on  page  242 
and  ending  with  next 
to  last  paragraph  on 
same  page,  have  been 
condensed  into  forr 
lines  here,  the  next 
verbatim  work  printed 
in  this  trade  newspaper 
report  being  the  speech 
of  the  president,  in  re- 
gard to  his  election, 
commencing  with  the 
words  "Gentlemen,  as 


thiv  .s  mv  nrst  appear- 
ance ."    etc-       This    is 


will  only  be  too  happy  to  arrange  a  schedule  of  prices  whereby 
the  jobbers  can  make  a  profit  on  linseed  oil.  It  should  be 
done,  but  will  the  jobber— -I  know  you  are  laughing— will  the 
jobbers  take  the  profit  in  case  the  chance  is  allowed  them  to 
make  a  profit?  We  ai-e  perfectly  willing  as  an  association — I 
talk  advisedly — to  allow  jobbers  a  schedule  of  prices.  "We  will 
be  only  too  glad  to  co-operate  and  make  all  prices  to  corres- 
pond with  what  any  of  the  committee  you  may  appoint  may 
recommend.  We  will  give  a  schedule  of  prices  making  a  sin- 
gle barrel  price  of  at  least  two  cents  a  gallon  more  than  the 
carload  prices.  It  seems  to  me  that  if  the  committee  that  the 
chair  appoints  will  first  get  the  jobbing  trade  of  Chicago  to 
agree  to  hold  to  a  schedule  of  prices  and  then  present  them 
to  us,  I  can  assure  the  gentlemen  present  now  that  we  will  see 
to  it  that  their  schedule  of  prices  shall  be  met.  (Applause.) 

On  motion  of  Mr.  Pettet,  the  By-Laws  were,  by  unanimous 
consent,  amended  to  read  that  the  regular  monthly  meeting 
be  held  on  the  third  Thursday  instead  of  the  second  Thursday 
of  each  month. 

This  concluding  the  business  of  the  meeting,  President 
Vrooman  arose  and  said: 

Gentlemen: — As  this  is  my  first  appearance  in  the  chair, 
some  of  you  may  perhaps  expect  from  me  an  inaugural  ad- 
dress of  two  or  three  hours,  but  I  met  a  friend  on  the  street, 
who,  in  congratulating  me  on  my  election  to  the  presidency 
of  this  club,  gave  me  a  little  advice.  He  said,  "y°u  must  be 
serious;  you  must  not  talk  too  much.'1  And,  as  he  is  a  gentle- 
man in  whom  I  have  a  great  deal  of  confidence,  I  think  I  will 
follow  his  advice.  At  the  same  time,  as  I  am  talking,  I  will 
say  that,  being  called  upon  to  preside  over  a  representative 
body  of  business  men,  such  as  I  see  before  me  to-night — men 
whose  intelligence,  industry  and  perseverance  has  placed  our 
city  in  the  front  rank  of  our  line  of  business — is  no  mean 
honor.  I  thank  you  for  this  expression  of  your  confidence 
and  esteem,  and  yet  I  beg  to  assure  you,  that  I  accept,  with 
much  hesitancy,  this  chair  which  has  been  filled  for  the  past 
two  years  so  ably  and  well  by  my  esteemed  predecessor — John 
Alston.  His  rulings  were  just,  his  conduct  kind  and  generous, 
his  stories,,  from  my  standpoint,  good — his  jokes,  sometimes 
at  our  expense,  agreeable.  His  quaint  Scotch  ways  have  en- 
deared him  to  all  of  us,  and  though  we  have  lost  him  as  our 
president,  against  our  wishes,  we  hope  to  see  him  frequently 
at  our  meetings.  He  will  always  be  welcome. 

I  desire,  at  the  same  time,  to  remind  you  that  without 
your  cordial  support  and  assistance,  your  officers  can  accom- 
plish nothing.  We  hope  with  your  co-operation  to  make  the 
coming  year  a  prosperous  one  in  the  history  of  this  Club. 
We  hope  to  make  a  record  that  will  encourage  the  formation 
of  other  clubs  in  competing  cities  of  the  West,  to  enable  us  to 


264 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


given  in  full,  in  both 
these  reports,  the  news- 
paper report  interpo- 


lated with  the  three 
lines  right  here  not 
shown  in  the  verbatim 
report,  these  three 
lines  being  descriptive 
and  commencing  with 
an  expression  respect 


Ing  the  applause  which 
followed  the  speech, 
preceding  the  introduc- 
tion of  Judge  Gresham. 


carry  forward  with  greater  ease  the  reforms  which  should  be 
the  object  and  aim  and  interests  of  this  Club .  We  hope  to 
prosper  so  that  in  1892,  when  the  paint  trade  of  New  York, 
Washington  and  St.  Louis  come  here  to  attend  the  World's 
Fair,  we  can  entertain  them  in  a  manner  that  will  remind 
them  that  when  Columbus  discovered  America.it  was  not  only 
Manhattan  Island  and  the  Potomac  flats  and  Shaw's  Garden 
that  was  discovered,  but  the  entire  continent  extending  from 
ocean  to  ocean,  where  we  are  to  have  in  the  twentieth  cen- 
tury, according  to  Bellamy,  no  army,  no  navy,  no  merchants, 
no  money,  no  servant  girls,  no  saloons,  no  courthouses — con- 
sequently few  lawyers  and  judges — it  is  expected  that  the 
Cronin  trial  will  be  finished  by  that  time — but  we  will  have  a 
grand  industrial  army  controlled  and  operated  by  a  happy 
and  contented  people,  sharing  alike  in  the  profits  of  the  in- 
dustries, all  of  which  will  be  in  keeping  with  the  greatness  of 
the  nation.  What  an  Utopia  to  contemplate?  In  the  mean- 
time, we  live  in  a  different  era — an  era  in  which  competition 
is  severe,  requiring  the  best  thought  and  patience,  of  organi- 
zations like  this,  to  correct  abuses  and  to  enable  us  to  make 
from  our  business  a  profit  compensating  us  for  the  capital  in- 
vested and  the  time  and  energy  devoted  to  its  pursuit.  In 
my  opinion  the  solution  of  o.ur  difficulties  lies  in  co-operation, 
and  I  believe  the  membership  of  this  Club  is  equal  to  the  oc- 
casion. I  believe  that  they  will  commit  no  step  backward, 
but  that  they  will  grasp  and  solve  the  difficult  problems  and 
that  our  progress  will  be  onward  and  upward,  until  Chicago 
stands  without  a  peer  in  the  manufacture  and  sale  of  paints, 
oils  and  varnish. 

Enthusiastic  applause  followed  these  remarks. 

President  Vrooman  then  introduced  the  distinguished 
guest  of  the  evening,  in  these  well-chosen  words: 

As  a  soldier,as  a  statesman,  as  a  jurist,  the  name  of  Gresham 
is  a  part  of  the  history  of  our  land  (Applause).  One  cannot 
be  written  without  the  other.  I  now  have  the  honor,  gentle- 
men, of  presenting  to  you  Judge  Walter  Q.  Gresham,  who 
will  address  you. 

JUDGE  GRESHAM.  —Gentlemen :  I  fear  that  you  have  mis- 
taken this  introduction  of  your  president  to  have  been  some- 
what sought  on  my  part.  I  am  invited  as  your  guest,  and  not 
as  one  who  is  expected  to  address  you.  I  have  enjoyed  the 
evening  very  much,  and  why  should  I  be  called  upon  to  ad- 
dress an  assemblage  of  business  men — this  body  of  men  rep- 
resenting a  particular  branch  of  trade — the  oil,  paint  and 
varnish  business? 

It  is  not  because  I  know  anything  about  it.  It  is  safe  to 
say  that  I  know  less  about  it — very  much  less— than  any  one 
else  in  this  room.  What  the  president's  good  friend  said  to 
him  on  the  street,  it  would  be  well  for  me  to  observe—not  to 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  265 

Judge  G  r  e  s  h  a  m '  s      talk  too  much.     That  was  good  advice.    It  would  be  well  f  01 

ipeech  is  given  verba-  .  „  ., 

many  men  if  they  received  such  advice  and  heeded  it.  Time 
was  when  men  were  in  demand  simply  because  they  could 
talk  whether  they  said  anything  or  not.  The  men  who  are  in 
demand  now  are  men  who  can  think  and  act. 

Some  of  you  are  old  enough  to  remember  the  campaign  of 
1858,  in  which  Mr.  Lincoln  and  Judge  Douglass  canvassed  this 
state  as  representatives  of  the  two  great  parties.  It  was  a 
famous  campaign.  Perhaps  such  a  campaign  never  occurred 
before.  Certainly,  there  has  not  been  such  a  match  in  this 
country  since,  in  any  state. 

Mr.  Lincoln's  friends  gave  him  a  reception  at  Bloomington, 
as  Judge  Douglass'  friends  did  also.  A  gentleman  was  selected 
who  was  happy — who  was  gifted- -in  the  way  of  speech.  He 
could  talk  gracefully  and  pleasantly,  whether  he  said  much  or 
not.  He  was  very  happy,  on  that  occasion,  receiving  and 
presenting  Mr.  Lincoln  to  the  people,  but  Mr.  Lincoln  was 
not  quite  so  happy  in  his  response  as  the  Judge  was  in  his  re- 
marks- Mr.  Lincoln's  mind  was  such  that  he  needed  some 
question  to  discuss--he  could  not  talk  into  the  air  very  well-- 
his  little  speech  was  not  satisfactory  to  him,  perhaps  not  to 
his  friends.  It  was  not  his  forte.  And,  at  the  dinner  party, 
he  paid  the  gentleman  who  made  the  address  a  rather  ques- 
tionable compliment.  Addressing  him,  he  said:  "Judge,  you 
have  one  talent  that  I  envy  you  the  possession  of  very  much." 
The  judge  was  flattered.  Said  he,  "Mr.  Lincoln,  what  is  that, 
if  I  may  ask?"  "Judge,  it  is  the  ability  to  talk  as  you  do  and 
not  say  anything." 

There  are  such  men.  But,  as  I  said,  their  occupation  is 
pretty  much  gone,  and  it  is  well  it  is  so.  I  am  glad  to  see  a 
meeting  of  this  kind  to-night.  You,  gentlemen,  are  no  doubt 
engaged  in  sharp  rivalry,  but  you  meet  around  this  social 
board  in  a  friendly  way,  and  discuss  questions  affecting  your 
welfare.  What  you  see  here  is  going  on  in  other  departments 
of  trade.  It  shows  the  mental  activity  of  those  who  attend 
them.  These  meetings  stimulate  thought.  You  learn  your 
own  business  better;  and,  by  the  way,  while  I  do  not  under- 
stand this  question  of  paint,  oil  and  other  things,  there  is 
one  thing  that  I  can  observe  and  do  observe.  And  that  is 
this:  There  is  no  longer  the  opportunity  for  individual  enter- 
prise that  existed  twenty-five  years  ago, 

I  am  not  going  to  enter  into  a  discussion  of  this  question. 
I  am  not  going  tojsay  anything  about  who  is  right  or  who  is 
wrong.  It  is  not  the  time  nor  is  it  the  place.  But,  with  these 
large  bodies  of  associated  capital,  which  we  find  not  only  in 
your  business  but  in  all  departments  of  trade,  what  show  is 
there  for  merely  individual  enterprises?  Very  little.  What 
is  going  to  be  the  outcome  of  it?  I  do  not  know.  The  time 
has  come  when  the  business  men  of  the  country  must  assert 


266  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPH" 

tim  in  both  reports,  themselves.  W<i  h&rc  TOO  many  mere  talkers  now  in  our 
and  this  is  also,  on  national  and  state  legislatures.  What  we  need  is  more  a1  en  of 
practical  business  experience— men  who  understand  the  eco- 
nomic questions  which  are  forcing  themselves  to  the  front.  It 
would  be  infinitely  better  for  our  country  if  we  had  more  good 
business  men  in  Congress.  Legislation  would  be  better.  I 
hope  you  give  me  credit  for  candor  and  not  think  that  I  am 
trying  to  flatter  you,  when  I  say  that  it  is  not  true,  as  some 
people  suppose,  that  the  talent  of  this  country  is  in  the  pro- 
fessions, that  the  men  of  brains  are  found  in  the  professions. 
The  men  of  ability  in  this  country  are  largely  in  business  en- 
terprises. The  professions  are  amounting  to  less  and  less  all 
the  time.  I  think  I  uiav  safely  say  that,  in  my  profession, 
the  standard  is  not  as  high  as  it  was  twenty-five  years  ago. 
That  is  to  say,  the  percentage  of  able  men  is  not  as  great  as 
it  was  then.  I  will  simply  refer  to  some  of  the  questions — 
one  in  particular.  You  all  know  that  we  have  an  international 
trade  congress  here,  to  be  in  session  at  Washington — I  believe 
it  is  mainly  on  wheels,  though  (Applause) — to  consider  ques- 
tions affecting  the  welfare  not  only  of  the  United  States,  but 
of  ocher  countries  upon  this  continent.  Suppose  we  had  had 
practical  business  men— more  practical  business  men — in 
Congress  for  the  last  generation,  don't  you  think  the  business 
men  of  this  country  would  have  been  transacting  more  busi- 
ness, would  have  been  exchanging  more  goods  with  the  South 
American  countries?  Why  is  it  that  only  a  small  percentage 
of  the  business  done  in  the  countries  south  of  us  finds  its 
way  here?  Why  is  it  that  the  business  men  of  this  country 
are  not  engaged  more  in  commerce  with  the  countries  south 
of  us?  The«  conditions  should  favor  us,  and  yet  we  are 
scarcely  known  there  as  merchants  and  traders.  It  affects 
you.  It  affects  the  welfare  of  the  whole  country.  We  need 
legislation  there.  We  should  not  be  controlled  or  governed 
by  mere  sentiments  or  prejudice.  It  does  not  matter  what 
our  political  ideas  are.  This  is  a  practical  question.  There 
is  a  field  and  we  should  occupy  it.  We  can  occupy  it,  and  if 
we  do  not  it  is  our  own  fault.  We  are  standing  in  our  own 
light.  We  should  have  more  than  fifty  per  cent.  Instead  of 
that  we  have  less  than  ten  per  cent,  of  it.  Then  we  need 
legislation  which  will  open  the  doors  to  those  countries.  I 
do  not  care  what  it  is.  I  am  no  free  trader,  but  I  ara  net 
going  to  make  a  political  speech  here.  I  do  not  think  the 
conditions  under  which  we  are  now  living  can  justify  free 
trade.  We  cannot  yet  handle  the  commerce  of  the  world. 
Neither  am  I  in  favor  of  the  making  of  laws  which  deny  to 
our  business  men  the  opportunity  to  enjoy  the  trade  of  other 
countries.  Let  us  modify  our  laws. 

I  was  very  glad  to  hear  of  a  remark  made  by  Senator  She*- 
man  the  other  night,  in  which  he  was  bold  enough  to  say  that 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


267 


lowed  by  three  lines 
describing  theapplause 
and  introductory  \\\>rds 
of  President  Vrooman 
in  relation  to  Mr. 
Johnson,  whom  he  no- 
ticed with  the  sentence 
commencing  "We  have 
a  gentleman  here  to- 
night, from  a  state 
which  has  produced 
many  great  men." 
Some  one  interrupted 
just  then  by  calling  cut 
"Ohio,"  which  circum- 
stance will  be  found  in 
the  verbatim  report  on 
page  250,  but  which  the 
reporter  did  not  think 
it  necessary  to  print  in 
the  trade  newspaper; 
he  also,  for  the  same 
reason,  omitting  the 
concluding  sentence  of 
Mr.  Johnson's  remarks, 
where  he  said  "As  far 
as  remarks  are  con- 
cerned, it  is  not  my 
forte.'' 

The  remarks  of  the 
president  and  Mr. 
Hayes  referring  to  the 
vice  president,  shown 
on  page  25o,are  omitted 
from  this  trade  paper 
report,  two  descriptive 
lines  being  substituted. 

Mr.  Haines'  remarks 
are  given  in  full,  ex- 
cept his  concluding 
words  found  on  page 
252,  beginning"!  would 
suggest,"  etc. 


Other  liberties  are 
taken  with  this  report 
to  make  it  applicable 
for  newspaper  use, 
such  as  the  omission  of 
Vice  President  Haines' 
suggestion  regarding 


the  time  had  come  when  we  must  enact  laws  which  would 
give  oui-  business  men  an  opportunity  to  go  into  those  coun- 
tries south  of  us,  on  an  equality  with  the  British  merchants. 
That  is  what  we  need  and  that  is  what  you  should  demand. 
As  I  said  before,  gentlemen,  I  am  not  here  to  make  a  speech. 
I  see  a  shorthand  man  here.  I  am  not  talking  to  newspapers. 
I  have  enjoyed  the  evening  very  much  and  I  hope  you  will 
prosper  during  the  next  year  and  during  the  coming  years. 
I  hope  to  see  American  commerce  extended  and  see  the  con- 
ditions more  favorable  to  our  merchants.  I  am  obliged  to 
you.  gentlemen. 

The  applause  which  followed  these  remarks  of  the  distin- 
guished guest  was  hearty  and  continued  for  several  minutes, 
after  which  President  Vrooman  arose  and  said: 

We  have  a  gentleman  here  to-night  from  a  state  which  has 
produced  many  great  men.  I  allude  to  Indiana.  There  is  a 
bond  of  sympathy  between  us,  because  he  follows  the  same 
vocation  as  we  do.  We  would  like  to  hear  from  Mr.  Johnson, 
of  Evanbville,  Indiana. 

MR.  JOHNSON.— Mr.  President  and  gentlemen;  I  am  no 
public  speaker,  but  I  have  enjoyed  this  evening  very  much. 
It  is  true  that  I  hail  from  the  state  of  Indiana,  but  I  have  al- 
ways considered  myself  an  Illinois  boy.  I  have  watched  the 
proceedings  of  this  Club  with  a  good  deal  of  interest,  and  I 
think  it  is  a  great  benefit  to  the  paint  trade  of  this  city.  I 
thank  you  for  the  compliment  of  calling  on  me. 

Mr.  Haines,  the  vice-president  of  the  Club,  being  called 
for,  spoke  as  follows: 

Mr.  President  and  gentlemen:  I  thank  you  for  the  honor 
you  have  conferred  upon  me  by  electing  me  to  the  vice-presi- 
dency of  this  Club.  Had  I  been  present  at  the  meeting  at 
which  the  election  was  held,  I  think  I  should  have  objected. 
You  all  know  I  am  a  broker,  and  I  think  it  would  have  been 
better  if  some  one  else  had  been  elected  as  vice-president  of 
this  Club.  Still,  I  assure  you  I  understand  and  appreciate 
the  honor,  and  I  will  do  my  best  for  the  interests  of  the  Club. 
In  my  regular  routine  of  business  I  think  I  can  further  the 
interests  of  this  Club  as  regards  missionary  work.  I  have 
been  acquainted  with  it  from  its  infancy  and  have  taken  great 
interest  in  it.  I  think  our  city  can  well  support  a  club  to 
further  the  interests  of  the  paint,  oil  and  varnish  trade.  I 
wish  to  again  thank  you,  gentlemen,  for  the  honor  you  have 
conferred  upon  me,  and  you  can  rest  assured  that  I  will  do  all 
in  my  power  to  deserve  it.  (Applause.) 

Mr.  Cox  was  next  called  for  and  said :  I  do  not  know  that  I 
have  anything  to  say  on  this  occasion,  except  to  express  my 
satisfaction  at  the  election  of  our  present  officers.  I  am  satis- 
fied that  they  have  not  only  the  desired  knowledge,  but  also 
the  willingness,  to  subserve  the  interests  of  this  Club,  which  I 


268 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


Mr.  Senour.  and  the 
latter's  reply,  to  which 
in  this  report  only  two 
descriptive  lines  are  de- 
voted. 

Mr.  Kotzenberg's 
remarks  are  given  in 
full,  but  not  Vice  Presi- 
dent Haines'  call  for 
Mr.  Andrews,  nor  the 
latter's  request  to  be 
excused. 


The  request  of  Vice 
President  Haines  for 
remarks  by  Mr.  Heath, 
and  Mr.  Heath's  reply 
are  given  verbatim 
with  the  exception  of 


hope  will  be  a  success,  not  only  this  year,  but  in  the  years  to 
come. 

Mr.  Senour  was  called  for,  but  asked  to  be  excused  from 
speaking,  as  he  was  quite  unprepared. 

Mr.  Kotzenberg  was  called.  He  said:  Mr.  Chairman: — Since 
our  last  meeting,  I  was  a  citizen  of  the  Town  of  Lake,  the 
great  Town  of  Lake — in  the  Stock  Yards.  But  now  I  am  happy 
to  say  that  I  am  a  citizen  of  the  good  city  of  Chicago.  I  think 
the  people  can  thank  me  for  bringing  the  Town  of  Lake  into 
Chicago.  If  it  hadn't  been  for  me  I  guess  it  would  not  have 
come  in.  But  I  run  my  little  politics  there.  It  came  in  with  600 
majority  because  I  said  it  should.  If  I  had  told  the  people  not 
to  come  in,  they  would  have  stayed  out.  (Laughter.)  I 
must  tell  the  members  here  that  Bridgeport  is  the  greatest  place 
for  grinding  paint.  You  want  to  buv  Bridgeport  river  water 
to  mix  paint.  I  will  supply  it  to  you  for  fifty  cents  a  barrel. 
I  hope  you  present  will  give  me  a  little  order  right  now.  I 
must  take  an  exception  to  Mr.  Vice-President.  He  don't  seem 
to  know  that  the  brokers  are  the  glory  and  beauty  of  our  Club. 

THE  VICE-PRESIDENT. — Gentlemen,  we  have  with  us  the 
representative  of  one  of  the  largest  and  oldest  houses  of  the 
city  of  Chicago — Mr.  Heath.  I  know  we  should  all  like  to  hear 
from  him. 

MR.  HEATH. — Mr.  President  and  gentlemen;  Fourteen  years 
ago,  when  I  went  into  the  paint  business,  I  knew  nothing 
about  it.  Thirteen  years  ago  I  thought  I  knew  a  great  deal 
about  it.  Atthe  present  time  I  think  I  know  a  great  deal  more 
about  the  paint  business  than  I  do  about  public  speaking. 

I  have  had  some  curiosity,  being  one  of  the  outsiders,  to 
know  how  the  meetings  of  the  Paint  Club  were  conducted, 
and  I  am  very  much  pleased  indeed  to  meet  the  class  of  gen- 
tlemen who  are  here  this  evening,  and  notice  the  manner  in 
which  the  meeting  has  been  conducted.  There  are  a  great 
many  points  which  ought  to  be  brought  up  for  general  dis- 
cussion among  the  manufacturers  and  jobbers  of  goods  in  our 
line,particularlyat  the  present  time- -linseed  oil  and  white  lead. 
Both  these  subjects  have  been  discussed  to  the  point;  and,  if  it 
will  not  be  going  beyond  the  limits,  as  it  were,  and  if  you  will 
permit  an  outsider  to  express  an  opinion,  I  would  like  to  say 
one  or  two  things  in  regxrd  to  the  system  of  rebates  to  the 
jobbers. 

I  think  you  will  all  agree  with  me  that  in  the  past,  where 
there  has  [been  a  provision  made  with  a  jobber  for  a  profit, 
there  has  been  more  or  less  anxiety  on  the  part  of  some  of  the 
jobbers  to  divide  that  profit,  with  the  idea  of  increasing  sales, 
and,  as  I  have  looked  upon  the  subject,  the  manufacturers 
have  never  before  been  in  the  position  where  they  could  go 
to  the  jobbing  trade  and  absolutely  enforce  their  system  of 
rebates.  We  have  all  been  called  upon  at  times  in  the  pasfc 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


269 


his      last     two     words 
"these     ideas"    which 


are  changed  to  the 
word  "sales'1  in  this 
newspaper  report  as 
better  expressive  of  the 
intended  meaning. 

Vice  President 
Haines'  call  lor  Mr. 
Coffin  has  been  reduced 
to  one  descriptive  line, 
bat  the  reply  is  given 
verbal'  m. 


to  sign  agreements  to  uphold  certain  prices,  ma  le  by  the 
manui'acturers,  an  J  we  have  all  willingly  gone  into  such  agree- 
ments in  good  faith,  but  something  has  come  up  whereby  a 
little  inducement  has  been  offered  and,  before  a  groat  time 
had  elapsed,  it  was  quite  general  on  the  part  of  the  trade  to 
divide  the  rebate,  and,  before  long,  it  amounted  to  nothing. 
Now,  as  I  understand  the  matter,  both  these  industries  are 
conducted  in  such  a  manner  that  the  manufacturers  are  in  a 
position  to  absolutely  enforce  a  price  and  hold  jobbers 
strictly  to  the  enforcement  of  that  price.  In  other  words, 
jobbers  who  agree  to  maintain  the  prices  fixed  by  the  manu- 
facturers, under  the  penalty  of  having  supplies  cut  off,  can 
now  be  held  rigidly  to  the  enforcement  of  prices. 

I  hope  that  the  committee  which  has  been  appointed  to- 
night will  present  these  facts  to  these  manufacturers  and  use 
their  utmost  endeavors  to  have  the  provisions  of  same  secured 
in  such  a  wny  as  to  adequately  compensate  the  jobbing  trade 
for  pushing  sales. 

MR.  COFFIN,  being  called  for,  responded  as  follows: 
Mr.  President  and  gentlemen:  I  have  listened  to  the  re- 
marks of  the  president,  and  the  advice  that  was  given  to  him 
by  some  good  friend  not  to  talk  too  much.  Why,  it  seems  as 
though  he  bit  my  case.  For  the  past  year,  or  during  the  last 
season,  it  seems  to  have  fallen  upon  me  to  present  various 
subjects  for  disi-ussion,  and  to  do  more  or  less  talking  at 
these  Club  meetings,  and  I  feel  as  though  I  ought  to  be  ex- 
cused. I  feel  confident  that  we  have  in  our  Club  a  number  of 
gentlemen  who  are  able  to  stand  up  here  and  present  subjects 
for  discussion  much  better  thau  I  have  ever  done  in  the  past, 
but  I  think  to-night  we  can  congratulate  ourselves  upon  the 
outlook  for  the  future.  I  think  I  express  the  sentiment  of 
every  gentleman  present  when  I  say  that  we  feel  highly  hon- 
ored tocight  by  the  presence  of  Hon.  Judge  Gresham.  I 
think  a  few  meetings  of  this  kind,  with  guests  that  are  so 
able,  so  competent  to  talk  to  us  upon  the  subjects  of  the  day, 
is  what  we  need  as  business  men,  and  the  social  feature  of  our 
Club  meetings  can  go  right  along  with  it.  We  are  learning 
together  how  to  properly  handle  the  subjects  that  should 
come  before  us.  I  cannot  say  very  much  tonight,  Mr.  Presi- 
dent, after  the  eloquence  we  have  listened  to,  but  I  will  say 
this— that  I  had  fully  made  up  my  mind  to  resign  from  the 
Committee  on  Entertainment,  but  we  have  started  under 
such  auspicious  circumstances  that  I  will  try  to  do  the  best  I 
can.  I  think,  also,  I  express  the  sentiment  of  all  the  members 
when  I  say  that  we  have  listened  with  a  great  deal  of  pleasure 
to  the  remarks  of  Mr.  Heath — that  there  are  subjects  for  us  to 
take  up  of  vital  importance — so  that  we  can  accomplish  more 
the  coming  season  than  we  did  the  past  one.  We  surely  ac- 
complished something  the  past  year,  and  we  can  accomplish 


2/0 


HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


The  call  of  several 
members  for  Mr.Wads- 
worth  has  a  descriptive 
line  substituted  for  it. 
Mr,  Wadsworth's  re- 
ply and  the  six  para- 
graphs which  follow  on 
this  page  are  the  same 
in  both  reports. 

After  this,  from  the 
wording  commencing 
with  the  request  of  the 
president  for  a  rising 
vote  of  thanks,  to  the 
words  which  decided 
the  adjournment,  the 
reporter  thought  best 
to  let  a  few  final  de- 
scriptive lines  suffice. 

These  comparisons 
explain  by  exact  illus" 
tration,  the  precise  dit 
ferences  between  a  ver- 
batim report  which  an 
association  desires  for 
its  own  use,  and  what 
is  known  as  a  news- 
paper verbatim  report. 
In  the  latter,  unneces- 
sary words  are  elimin- 
ated, sometimes  en- 
tirely ignored;  at  other 
times  have  descriptive 
paragraphs  substituted 
for  them;  while  in  still 
.  other  instances  occur 
descriptive  paragraphs 
which  do  not  relate  to 
anything  which  has 
been  said,  but  rather 
to  surrounding  circum- 
stances, such  as  the 
opening  paragraphs  of 
this  report  indicate. 

The  newspaper  re- 
port, nearly  verbatim, 
requires  some  literary 
ability— the  verbatim 
report,  none.  If  the 
stenographer  has  the 
literary  ability, he  edits 
this  himself;  if  not,  the 
editor  of  the  paper 
takes  the  verbatim 
transcription  and  cuts 
it  up  just  as  the  report 
on  pages  234  to  258  is 
shown  to  be  reduced  on 
these  pages  261  to  270. 
Different  editors  may 
have  different  ideas 
sometimes  respecting 
the  condensation  of 
certain  paragraphs, 
and  how  m  ich  verba- 
tim copy  to  use,  but  in 
the  main  the  principle 
is  the  same  the  minor 
particulars  being  mat- 
ters of  individual  judg- 
ment or  choice. 


a  good  deal  more  this  year.  I  think,  as  Mr.  Cox  said,  that  w« 
are  to  be  congratulated  upon  the  selection  of  our  officers,  and 
with  the  help  of  every  member  of  the  Club  coming  to  our 
meetings  regularly,  it  seems  to  me  that  the  success  of  the 
Paint,  Oil  and  Varnish  Club  is  assured. 

Mr.  WADSWORTH,  in  response  to  repeated  calls,  said: 

Mr.  President :  I  have  need  to  congratulate  the  Club  upon 
the  character  of  the  new  officers  elected,  and  the  way  in  which 
they  have  taken  hold  of  business.  I  know  that  this  Club  can 
be  made  an  instrument  of  a  great  deal  of  good  in  Chicago. 
The  question  has  been  raised  as  to  whether  the  jobbers  would 
stand  by  any  agreement  that  they  made  in  regard  to  prices  in 
lard  and  oil.  It  was  a  very  great  surprise  to  me,  and  I  think 
to  all  the  members  of  the  Boston  Club,  to  see  the  way  they 
have  done  it  in  Boston.  I  presume  there  has  never  been  a 
case  there  where  they  have  gone  back  upon  their  agreement, 
except  through  some  misunderstanding,  when  first  started. 
I  know  something  can  be  done  here,  and  if  we  all  take  hold 
and  help  our  new  officers  we  can  make  a  success  of  this  Club, 
and  it  will  be  a  great  thing  for  us,  financially  as  well  as  socially. 
It  is  very  much  more  agreeable  for  men  iu  the  same  business 
to  meet  socially  and  for  business  purposes  combined.  It 
makes  them  feel  more  generous.  We  get  acquainted  with 
them  and  wo  feel  like  living  and  letting  live,  and  we  can 
give  quotations,after  getting  acquainted  with  our  competitors, 
that  we  would  not  give  otherwise.  We  feel  they  are  pretty 
good  fellows,  after  all,  aud  we  would  rather  take  a  good  profit 
than  a  small  one.  I  hope  we  will  have  a  very  successful  year, 
that  the  Club  membership  may  increase,  and  the  interest  be 
a  benefit  to  all  of  us.  (Applause.) 

THE  VICE-PRESIDENT.  -We  would  now  like  to  hear  from 
Mr.  Pettet. 

MR.  PETTET.— I  move  we  adjourn. 

MR.  PRESIDENT. — A  motion  to  adjourn  is  always  in  order, 
but  I  don't  see  how  you  can  get  out  of  making  a  few  remarks. 
We  know  you  can  write  a  good  letter. 

MR.  PETTET. --Mr.  President,  I  call  for  the  question. 

THE  VICE-PRESIDENT. --Speak  on  the  Credit  Bureau. 

MR.  PETTET.-  As  I  understand  it,  the  Credit  Bureau  is  a 
close  corporation.  I  hardly  think  it  would  be  proper  for  me 
to  talk  about  it  before  company.  But,  Mr.  President,  before 
the  motion  to  adjourn  prevails,  I  want  to  say  a  few  words  in 
reference  to  the  distinguished  general,  the  upright  judge, 
who,  though  he  may  know  nothing  about  the  paint  business, 
has  earned  our  thanks  by  compelling  the  railroads  to  pay 
something  for  their  paint.  I  move  that  arising  vote  of  thanks 
be  extended  to  Judge  Gresham  for  his  attendance  here  this 
evening. 

The  response  was  general,  after  which  a  vote  of  thanks 
was  extended  to  the  Entertainment  Committee,  and  the  Club 
adjourned. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY.  271 

SPEECH  REPORTING. 

The  reporting  of  orations,  sermons,  legal  arguments,  addresses, 
etc.,  all  of  which  are  included  under  the  one  general  term  of  Speech  Re- 
porting, is  of  .a  nature  which  sometimes  taxes  the  skill  of  the  reporter 
to  the  utmost,  and  is  also  oftentimes  quite  easy.  It  depends  greatly 
upon  the  knowledge  of  both  the  speaker  and  the  reporter.  If  the 
speaker  be  not  very  well  posted,  or  is  speaking  upon  a  subject  which 
calls  for  no  technicalities  and  wherein  plain  talk  alone  is  necessary,  the 
reporter  need  not  be  learned  or  well  educated,  so  long  as  he  has  suffi- 
cient speed.  On  the  other  hand,  if  the  subject  matter  of  a  speech  be  a 
technical  one  unfamiliar  to  the  masses,  or  abounding  in  references  to 
ancient  historical  or  mythological  personages  or  places,  obsolete 
works,  etc.,  known  only  to  the  well  educated,  the  reporter  must  needs 
be  a  well  read  person,  since  no  one  can  write  with  certainty  a  word  or 
phrase  with  which  they  never  before  met. 

Fortunately,  most  speeches  are  composed  of  simple  words  and  fa- 
miliar phrases,  so  that  the  ordinary  reporter,  with  a  common  school 
education,  can  report  them,  if  the  proper  speed  is  possessed. 

In  this  latter  particular — speed — there  are  great  differences  in 
speakers.  Some  will  not  speak  much  above  *ioo  words  a  minute,  while 
others  will  speak  150  to  200  words  a  minute  quite  freely.  There  are  even 
some  few  who,  upon  themes  in  which  they  are  especially  well  posted, 
will  speak  at  the  rate  of  300  words  a  minute  for  a  while,  and  the  au- 
thor has  met  two  individualsin  his  time  (Rev.  Father  Maturin,  then  of 
St.  Clement's  Church,  Philadelphia,  and  Rev.  Dr.  Samuel  R.  Garrison, for 
years  pastor  of  St.  Paul's  Church,  Camden,  N.  J.)  who,  in  the  excite- 
ment of  a  well  rounded  period  relating  to  special  subjects,  attained  the 
wonderful  speed,  under  actual  count,  of  325  words  a  minute  for  a 
minute  or  two  at  a  time.  The  Rev.  Phillips  Brooks  is  also  credited 
with  similar  speed,  it  being  claimed  he  was  never  reported  verbatim. 

It  is  well  such  great  speed  of  utterance  is  limited  to  few  speakers 
and  to  them  only  upon  occasions.  The  best  reporter,  unless  thor- 
oughly self-possessed  and  with  a  splendid  memory,  would  naturally  lose 
such  sentences,  but,  as  the  speaker  must  stop  to  take  breath,  a  good 
memory  and  a  cool  head  enables  the  reporter  to  catch  up,  yet  he  must 
have  these  natural  abilities,  together  with  a  complete  knowledge  of 
every  abbreviating  principle  in  this  book  to  do  it.  All  presentations  of 
shorthand,  except  that  in  this  book,  have  failed  under  such  tests. 

The  average  of  speech-making,  despite  the  above  given  maximum, is 
but  1 20  to  150  words  per  minute,  and  the  speeches  (all  kinds)  are  so 
nearly,  under  all  conditions,  but  a  repetition  of  the  convention  work 
herein  and  the  following  speech  of  Mr.  Francis  Murphy,  that  the  entire 
field  is  thus  fully  covered,  aided,  of  course,  by  the  abbreviations  given 
in  our  lessons  and  review  exercises. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

A  LECTURE  BY  FRANCIS  MURPHY, 

THE  TEMPERANCE  ORATOR. 

This  portion  of  the  book  would  scarcely  be  complete  without  an  illustration  of 
the  speed  which  Practical  Phonography  is  capable  of  when  highest  speed  may  be 
needed.  To  this  end  we  give  below  a  verbatim  report  of  a  six  minutes'  speech  of 
Mr.  Francis  Murphy,  the  temperance  orator,  delivered  on  the  evening  of  May  8, 
1877,  in  the  Third  Street  M.  E.  Church,  of  Camden,  N.  J.,  on  which  occasion  the 
author  was  engaged  by  the  Dat'/y  Postoi  that  city,  in  which  paper  the  transcription  be- 
low appeared  the  next  day,  filling  two  columns  of  the  paper.  Mr.  Murphy  was  only 
one  of  the  speakers  of  the  evening,  and  the  reason  the  number  of  minutes  he  spoke 
was  known,  was  because  he  was  timed  by  the  chairman,  in  order  that  he  might  be 
sure  to  catch  the  ferry  boat  which  would  take  him  across  the  river  to  Philadelphia 
in  time  for  him  to  speak  at  two  meetings  there.  As  the  ferry  boats  then  made  trips 
only  once  every  half  hour,  it  will  be  understood  how  necessary  it  was  for  the  proper 
boat  to  be  caught  and  for  the  chairman  to  time  the  speaker. 

By  counting  the  words  in  the  speech,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  last  three  minutes  a 
rate  of  230  words  a  minute  was  made,  and  by  the  first  three  minutes  288  words  a 
minute, or  an  average  of  259  words  a  minute  for  the  six  minutes,  a  speed  of  writing 
seldom  attained  by  any  other  system  of  shorthand  than  that  represented  in  this  book. 


Mr.  Chairman  and  my  friends:  I  am  very  glad  to  do  myself  the 
honor  of  coming  to  your  city  and  speaking  a  few  words  upon  a  subject 
that  I  know  is  deeply  interesting  to  you — the  subject  of  total  abstinence 
from  intoxicating  liquor.  I  have  only  a  few  moments  to  be  with  you, 
for  I  am  going  across  the  river  to  speak  at  two  meetings  there  I  am 
obliged'  to  catch  the  quarter  of  eight  boat,  and  what  can  I  say  to  you 
in  the  few  moments  that  are  allotted  to  me?  Simply  this:  This  work 
that  we  are  now  engaged  in  is  a  work  of  malice  towards  none  and  charity 
for  all;  for  the  liquor  seller  and  for  the  liquor  drinker  especially,  If 
these  men  who  are  engaged  in  the  business,  and  those  men  who  die  in- 
temperate, were  made  to  believe  that  those  who  do  not  drink  are  their 
friends,  a  great  trouble  would  be  overcome  and  the  cause  of  total  absti- 
nence benefitted.  But  we  act  coldly,  and  many  of  that  class  of  men 
that  we  are  desirous  of  reaching  we  have  driven  away  from  us.  We 
have  so  talked  about  the  liquor  seller  that  we  could  not — did  not  say 
"come  and  be  one  of  us."  Now,  if  we  gain  success  in  this  kind  of 
work,  we  must  invite  all,  plead  with  all.  You  need  not  try  to  compel 
a  man  to  be  sober.  You  must  persuade.  Appeal  to  his  honor,  his  in- 
tegrity; to  his  home,  to  his  country,  and  to  his  God. 

Our  work,  so  far,  has  been  signally  blest  of  God — signally  blest. 
Men  who  have  been  the  victims  of  intoxicating  liquor  have  signed  the 
pledge;  men  who  have  been  engaged  in  the  sale  of  it  have  given  up 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


273 


tv- 


V 


V 


V 


a  o 


S3 


c          ,      v-v 


":V 


^  c  \        ^     |\ 

)  ->\^ 


\ 


e  o 


274  HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPHY. 

their  business,  and  are  now  within  the  ranks  of  total  abstinence.  They 
are  working  with  us  with  a  zeal,  with  a  patience,  and  with  a  cheer  that 
shows  in  themselves  the  beauty  and  grandeur  of  this  reform.  A  great 
fault  with  the  Christians  is,  we  have  allowed  the  cause  of  total  absti- 
nence to  be  established  OUT  OF  THE  CHURCH.  I  say  this  for  a  truth, 
and  there  are  many  things  that  testify  to  this  fact.  We  allow  ourselves 
to  grow  indifferent  about  it.  We  do  not  feel  deeply  about  it,  and  so 
make  no  attempt  to  do  good  in  this  direction. 

You  can  tell  a  man  anything  but  his  faults.  He  will  let  you  pat 
him  on  the  back  and  say  he  is  a  splendid  fellow.  You  may  praise  him 
to  the  highest  heaven;  but  tell  him  of  his  faults,  and  he  begins  to  feel 
a  little  different.  It  is  nice  to  be  patted  on  the  back  and  to  be  told  you 
are  a  good  fellow — a  fine  lady;  but  when  the  Holy  Spirit  asks  to 
show  you  ALL  THINGS,  he  shows  you  views  that  you  do  not  like.  The 
peace  of  God  comes  to  us  by  doing  the  will  of  God,  and  that  work  is 
accomplished  by  the  heart  yielding  obedience  to  the  truth.  Therefore, 
I  say  to  you  that  the  strangest  thing  in  the  present  age  is  that  Christian 
people  make  a  claim  of  being  exceptional,  and  yet  they  do  not  like  very 
much  to  be  told  of  their  faults.  I  confess  to  that  same  fault.  When  a 
good  brother  takes  me  by  the  arm  and  says:  "Frank,  I  don't  like  what 
you  said  a  moment  ago,"  or  "What  you  said  last  evening  should  have 
been  left  unsaid,"  I  feel  rebuked.  But  it  is  not  always  very  comfortable 
to  me.  I  declare  I  think  we  are  like  the  little  people  attending  school. 
They  like — all  of  them — to  be  pronounced  very  excellent  scholars, 
whether  they  are  so  or  not. 

I  believe,  withal,  my  friends,  that  this  country  will  be  revolutionized 
by  this  reform,  but  it  can  only  be  done  by  the  people  totally  abstaining 
from  intoxicating  liquors.  You  need  not  undertake  to  stop  those  in  the 
business  from  selling  or  buying.  Let  the  people  stop  buying  and  the 
work  is  accomplished.  The  man  who  is  in  the  business  of  selling  liquor 
will  be  unable  to  sell.  But  we  have  got  to  stop  buying.  That's  the 
thing!  Then,  you  see,  instead  of  the  man  stopping  in  a  saloon  on  the 
way  home  Saturday  evening,  and  coming  home  intoxicated,  and  the 
most  of  his  money  gone,  he  walks  right  home  to  Sallie  Ann  and  puts 
his  ten  or  fifteen  dollars  into  Sallie's  hand,  and  it  brings  joy  to  her  and 
the  little  ones.  He  is  happier  and  much  more  pleasant  to  all  than  he 
would  otherwise  have  been.  How  different  from  the  time  when  the 
husband  came  home  staggering,  and  after  coming  home  she  found  his 
money  had  been  spent  and  he  intoxicated  with  liquor  purchased  with 
the  money  that  should  have  been  brought  to  her. 

But  when  a  man  has  made  up  his  mind  to  be  a  true  and  loyal  man 
to  his  wife  and  to  his  children,  he  will  have  no  regard  for  the  intoxicat- 
ing cup.  That  man  will  walk  home — yes,  he  will — and  take  the  money 
and  pay  his  grocery  bill;  and  he  will  be  respected. 

THE  CHAIRMAN. — Mr.  Murphy,  you  have  only  three  minutes  to  catch 
the  boat 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


275 


isr  s~  c  ^ 


s 


t- 


\  f 


V      L  *x  > 


L 


x  \ 
i     \ 


C         c 


c 


1   p 


l7x 


276  HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 

Three  minutes!  Well,  I  will  have  to  come  over  to  Camderi  and  live 
here  for  a  week.  It  is  a  great  cross  to  go  away  from  this  audience,  but 
I  must  be  punctual  to  the  people  across  the  water.  Dear  people,  if  you 
have  come  here  for  the  purpose  of  hearing  me,  I  esteem  it  a  great  privi- 
lege to  be  permitted  to  speak  before  you,  and  thank  you  for  your  heart- 
felt confidence.  I  must  hold  obedience  to  duty,  but  I  wish  I  had  time 
to  tell  you  how  I  became  saved.  I  wish  I  had.  My  dear  friends,  I 
commenced  life  with  hopes  as  bright  as  any  of  you.  Had  a  good 
mother,  and  she  taught  me  that  which  was  good  and  beautiful.  I  ex- 
pected to  make  her  life  radiant  with  sunshine,  and  would  have  done  so 
but  for  the  fascination  of  the  intoxicating  bowl.  Some  people  say  there 
is  no  fascination  about  it,  but  there  is  a  great  fascination  about  it. 
Notice  the  jollity  of  the  drinking  man,  the  cheerful  expression  on  his 
countenance.  How  hearty  the  drinking  men  meet  with  each  other. 
"Here  you  are,  Bill!  Le^'s  go  in  and  take  something."  And  they  go  in 
and  set  them  up  and  down.  Do  you  "know  what  is  hurting  the  church 
to-day.  WE  ARE  so  QUIET  about  our  religion.  We  do  not  tell  anybody 
about  it.  We  are  afraid  to  pray  in  prayer  meeting.  We  are  walking 
in  the  highway  of  the  saints,  but  when  we  get  up  at  the  stile  of  His  re- 
deeming love  we  can  hardly  tell  whether  we  are  saved  or  not.  The 
people  are  not  in  love  with  our  religion.  If  everyone  were  to  be  fasci- 
nated by  their  religion,  and  would  talk  about  it,  showing  by  genial  and 
kindly  conduct  their  character,  they  would  find  peace,  and  the  people 
would  come  in  through  the  church  windows.  The  people  are  all  in  love 
with  a  religion  that  you  talk  about,  and  they  are  coming  here  to  seek 
for  it.  And  this,  I  think,  is  the  best  that  I  can  say  to  you,  my  brethren 
here  who  have  signed  the  pledge — speak  about  it.  This  is  a  personal 
responsibility.  Remember  that  God  will  hold  you  responsible;  for  you 
have  a  duty  to  perform  the  same  as  I  have,  and  let  us  all  do  our  duty. 
Trust  in  God,  and  verily  thou  shalt  be  successful.  With  the  pleasures 
that  lie  around  the  intoxicating  bowl,  I  was  led  off,  and  fell  as  low,  per- 
haps, as  it  is  possible  for  a  man  to  fall  and  live.  I  became  separated 
from  wife  and  children  and  from  everybody  that  made  life  very  dear 
and  precious  to  me.  But  God,  in  His  infinite  mercy,  sent  a  good  man 
to  speak  to  me.  And  when  he  invited  me  very  kindly  to  attend  relig- 
ious service,  I  begged  of  him  that  he  would  excuse  me;  that  I  would 
not  disturb  his  meeting.  Half  intoxicated  as  I  was,  I  asked  him  to  please 
excuse  me,  but  there  was  a  kind  expression  upon  the  man's  face,  and 
when  I  looked  into  his  countenance  I  refused  no  longer.  I  said:  "Sir, 
I  will  go."  I  did  go  with  him,  and  heard  the  blessed  gospel  of  our 
precious  religion;  and  there,  from  the  kind  words  of  my  friends,  I  there 
gave  my  heart  to  Christ.  Absolutely,  I  am  trying  to  do  what  I  can  to 
lead  other  men  from  the  haunts  of  vice  to  the  still  waters  of  eternal 
rest.  Let  me  say  to  you,  dear  people,  preach  the  love  of  God — preach 
the  love  of  God.  There  is  a  wonderful  love  for  the  bruised  heart  that 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


277 


s 


A. 


l- 


^i1 — ' 


5  r 


v 
j 


n 


V 


c    -»  y-  V> 

\      I     * 
I      9 


^ 


• 


278  HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 

he  cannot  tell  anything  about  himself,  and  we  know  not  how  much  we 
can  forgive  until  we  are  an  outcast.  I  wonder,  if  your  boy  should  ask 
your  forgiveness  of  a  great  crime  that  you  knew  him  to  be  guilty  of, 
would  you  give  it?  You  would  say:  "I  will  forgive  my  boy."  Why? 
Because  he  is  your  boy.  Therefore,  let  me  say  to  you:  keep  this 
work  going  in  this  place  with  acts  of  cheerfulness  and  love,  and  of 
kindness.  Good  night. 

Perhaps  one  of  the  most  positive  proofs  that  we  have  of  the  soul's 
independence  of  the  body,  is  our  great  need  of  love  and  of  something 
to  love.  Were  we  mere  animals,  creatures  doomed  to  perish  after  a 
few  brief  years  of  life  in  this  world,  that  which  contents  the  brute 
would  content  us.  To  eat  and  sleep  well,  to  have  an  easy  time  of  it, 
would  be  enough.  As  it  is,  we  may  have  these  things,  and  health  to 
enjoy  them  and  yet  be  utterly  wretched.  Neither  can  mental  food 
satisfy  us.  "Some  one  to  love"  is  our  heart's  cry.  When  the  atmos- 
phere of  tenderness  is  about  us,  we  rejoice;  when  people  are  harsh  and 
unkind,  we  suffer.  We  begin  life,  wishing  to  love  all  people,  and  be- 
lieving that  they  love  us.  Experience  hardens  us.  Our  dear  ones  gro\v 
fewer;  but,  as  long  as  reason  lasts,  we  must  love  some  one,  we  must  at 
least  imagine  that  some  one  loves  us.  The  parents,  sisters  and  brothers 
and  that  dearest  friend  whom  we  promised  to  love  and  cherish  until 
death,  these  come  into  our  lives  and  fill  them  up.  Afterward  come 
the  little  children,  frail,  helpless  babies,  who  need  our  care  so  much, 
and  friends  to  whom  we  are  not  kin,  yet  who  grow  dear  to  us.  Some 
have  many  loved  ones,  and  some  but  one.  Heaven  help  those  who 
have  none,  though  they  are  often  to  blame  for  their  own  empty 
heartedness;  for  kindness  will  win  love.  They  are  always  wretched, 
and  they  often  show  their  craving  for  something  to  love  by  cherishing 
some  dumb  animal,  such  as  a  dog,  a  parrot,  or  a  kitten,  on  which  they 
lavish  caresses  which,  better  spent,  would  have  bound  some  human 
hear!:  to  theirs.  Pride — morbid  sensitiveness — may  have  been  at  the 
bottom  of  their  loneliness,  and  these  pets  fill  the  aching  void  a  little. 
Some  one  to  love!  It  is  the  cry  of  the  human  soul,  the  note  to  which 
every  heart  responds;  the  bond  which  will  bind  us  all  together  in  that 
world  where  mourners  shall  be  comforted  and  love  shall  reign  forever. 

That  life  is  a  poor  one  which  is  devoid  of  ambition;  which  has  no 
object  to  work  for;  no  height  to  strive  to  reach.  A  person  may  be 
good  and  kindhearted  while  willing  to  live  in  idle  ignorance  and  let  the 
vorld  go  on  growing  in  wealth  and  wisdom  without  his  taking  an 
active  part  in  it,  but  he  is  certainly  both  very  dull  of  mind  and  slug- 
glish  of  body  who  does  so. 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


279 


\ 


\ 


c  O    ~> 
V.    ;"     & — ' 


\ 


-/ 

V 


n 


S 


t 


V  N 


°^  ^     /  § 

vv,:o 


A-    o 
C  -         S 


L 

^ 


o  v 


s 


280 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


The  upper  right-hand  quarter  of  any  circle  (see  the  Haven  V)  is  the  easiest  quarter  to  write  ;  the 
lower  left-hand  quarter  of  any  circle  (see  Pitman  V)  is  the  hardest  quarter  to  write  ;  anil  Pitman,  Gra- 
ham, Munson,  etc.,  make  it  still  harder  by  thickening  it.  V  being  a  very  frequently  occurring  sound,  it 
should  have  an  easily  written  outline.  Haven's  use  of  the  easiest  quarter  of  a  circle  for  that  sound  adds 
ten  per  cent,  extra  speed  to  such  shorthand  writing,  besides  facilitating  phrasing  and  easy  junctures. 
See  examples  in  Comparative  Outlines  above. 

There  are  many  backward  written  characters  in  Pitman,  etc.,  which  are  written  forward  in  Haven, 
meaning  greater  speed  for  the  latter.  Hooks,  initial  and  final,  are  also  on  common  sense  plan  in  Haven 
style,  whereas  in  Pitman,  etc.,  they  are  arbitrary. 

The  necessity  for  writing  a  vowel  occasionally  in  reporting  is  not  a  matter  of  system,  but  of  the 
language.  Haven  uses  them  no  more  than  others,  but  when  used  on  the  Haven  plan,  they  are  always 
distinct  and  quickly  placed.  Pitman,  Graham,  etc.,  vowels  are  uncertain,  as  it  is  hard  to  place  them 
quickly  in  proper  position  to  their  consonants.  Haven's  need  no  position,  because  joined  where  sounded. 


HAVEN'S  VRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


281 


C   >    OT3 

a*f| 

e   -o  * 
"  o '-"  .J 

cu  is 

-  c.  o 

•C  =        v. 
<u  rt  *r?  4; 

£  E  Sg. 


lea 
Pit 
ea 


ble  Vowe 
cale  requi 
owel  sou 
-third  (6) 


Haven's  I 
utes;  Pitman,  e 
only  one-fourth 
writing  ;  Haven 


«C 

»=.  .0 


1!  sr. 


O  a 

z  ££ 

*•     «> 

O  "g^ 

J~  *•  to 
r-  c  « 

-•      0> 

£!l 


<rf  «       *  w 

c  c  "  «  o  5S 
•*  t.  >rt  «•  ••»  fc 

ej     fti    L-,  ij 

+>  ««  C 

r£°* 
_    ^  J  ?  g  • 

•M  4i  A  W  O  •  r> 

t,    ,C    1?    ^     K   .2    » 

•  9  S      A  «  H 

M  U 

!?i»V*i 

SIlssH-i 

.SgrtS>* 

ax2?-ss* 

.j^m  "^'gg 


C     %»  "     V   *" 

inl^lf 

°^E*sl 

asifiiSl 
5S!«B{ 

ofilll 

IfSfiifi 

f    ?«MTJ<^ 


(O  *  C 

«§*; 

^-g 

«>  C  « 

1"! 


§«0  S 
&  ?A;  c 


MARCI 
Sten 
birt 
inve 
hand. 
Fre 


ti 
In  England 
by  Sen  Pitm 
oved  th«  ar 


"^l 

w 

I 

( 

1 

\ 

' 

i 

r 

i 

i 

V 

1 

t 

fe 

. 

r£ 

1  * 

V 

• 

1 

( 

j 

1 

• 

• 

r 

i 

• 

I 

^ 

A 

1 

• 

I 

s 

§ 

§ 

« 

TB 

fe  ^ 

V 

• 

i 

< 

i 

• 

• 

i 

• 

• 

I 

C 

1 

» 

1 

1 

^b 

^~ 

.-^i 

^ 

0 

SJ 

K 

H 

•S 

s 

4 

_ 

—  i 

s 

\ 

i 

J 

r 

c 

<•« 

f 

-v 

k 

c 

) 

f\ 

1/1 

If 

>  v 

1  — 
\ 

•H 

G 

X. 

<C 

O 

tn 

e5C 
c 

«5 

—  " 

* 
0 

^—  — 

.r- 

t 
i-C 

oj 

;-to 
H 

>     ^ 

i  -co 

—  . 

—  - 

i 

-  — 

G 
•W 

J 

tC 

. 

! 

I   to 



W 

---, 

1 

v: 
1 

f- 

. 

1  1 

0 
0 

1 

rCi 

^ 

1 
1 

J 

^ 

| 

i-5 

s  ty 

si 

—  — 

_—  —  ' 

S 

S 

<$ 


PART 

THE  VOCABULARY. 


TO  THE  STUDENT. 

Notwithstanding  that  the  best  way  to  gain  a  perfect  knowledge  of 
shorthand  is  to  learn  perfectly  every  lesson  given  in  this  book,  together 
with  the  shorthand  plates  of  the  business  letters,  court  testimony  and 
convention  report,  so  that  the  student  will  be  able  to  write  anything  m 
this  book  exactly  as  it  is  represented  in  these  plates,  without  reference 
to  any  one  of  them,  still,  for  the  satisfaction  of  those  people  who  un- 
necessarily insist  on  having  a  list  of  words  to  refer  to,  the  author  has 
arranged,  for  this  part  of  the  book,  an  alphabetical  list  of  every  word 
and  phrase  in  this  book,  so  that,  if  the  student  cannot  find  an  outline 
readily  in  the  plates,  it  can  be  found  easily  by  referring  to  this  list. 

The  arrangement  is  alphabetical,  with  numbers  opposite  each  word 
showing  page,  etc. ,  on  which  it  is  to  be  found. 

ALPHABETICAL  LIST  OF  WORDS  AND  PHRASES. 


Sho\\  ii  In  the  Shorthand  Pages  of  this  Book. 


SIGN. 
A 

abase 163 

abbreviation , HI 

Abe ii 

ability 

able 

able  to 130 

ablution 123 

ably 

about 

about  it 

about  our 

about  whom 68 

above 

above  name 

above  referred 

abroad 

absence 

absolutely 

abstained ' 96 

abstinence 

absurd 

abundant 76 

abuses 

accept 8 

accepted 

accession 114 

accommodate 119 

accommodation 120 

accompany 121 

accomplish 

accord-ing-ly 

account 


LINE.  PAGE.                                                                                           SIGN. 

33  account  payment 

21  133  accounts 

14  127  accurate-ly 

2  31  accusation 115 

6  225  accuse —     196 

6  81  ace 13 

ii  94  ache 14 

11  64  aching 

2  245  acknowledge 

3  08  acknowledged 271 

9  185  acknowledges 

6  153  acknowledging  your  favor 

9  131  a  corporation 311 

16  81  acquaintance  of  your 

4  155  acquainted 

6  149  acquire 150 

15  159  acquisition 116 

15  151  a  creature  of  God 307 

6  255  acres 

12  135  across 86 

13  273  act 

8  159  acted 67 

10  137  action 317 

15  245  active 26 

i  94  activity 

15  215  acts no 

15  121  acts  upon 

112  actual-ly 

112  Ada 15 

112  adage 

6  24;  adapt ici 

7  98  adaption 103 

ID  98  addition 


PAGE 

2I-3 

'53 
9? 

121 
121 

33i 


96 
M9 
153 
114 
151 
251 
133 

121 
H4 

179 
72 

193 
"5 
114 
60 
247 
127 
237 

221 
129 

151 
94 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


283 


SIGN.   LINE.  PAGE. 

SIGN.   LINE.  PAGE. 

additional  

175 

22 

127 

alive  

12 

197 

additionally  

176 

22 

127 

all  

r.5 

address  

18 

241 

alia  

c 

I 

72 

addressing  him  

14 

247 

all  an-d  

ft 

I 

72 

addressing  the  
address  them  

15 

IO 

199 
145 

alleged  
all  have  

70 

4 

5 

225 

86 

address   you  

20 

245 

all  he  

4 

i 

72 

a  degree  , 

153 

14 

86 

all  kinds  

9 

181 

adequately  

'3 

255 

all  of  

55 

7 

121 

a  desire  

267 

16 

96 

all  of  the  

i 

243 

adjoin  

103 

13 

137 

all  others  

13 

155 

adjourn  •.  

19 

257 

allotted  

273 

adjourned  
adjournment  

\l 

259 
199 

allow  
allowed  

•      15 

2 

6 

46 
239 

admission  

121 

10 

64 

allow  me  to  say  that  

i 

243 

admit  

2 

151 

allows  

191 

24 

12; 

adopt  

100 

9 

94 

all  right  

8 

145 

adoption  

102 

9 

94 

all  the  

7 

i 

72 

advance  

22 

81 

all  the  time  

9 

249 

advantage  

15 

74 

all  those  

ii 

241 

advantageous  

16 

I 

78 

all  together  

16 

279 

advantages  

15 

I 

78 

allude  

8 

251 

advertise  

19 

88 

all  your  

19 

195 

advertised  

206 

96 

almost  

-      63 

8 

137 

advertisement  

18 

fc 

alone  

19 

81 

advertisements  

19 

88 

along  

2 

257 

advertisements  (the)  

14 

177 

alphabet  

•       74 

IO 

137 

advertiser  

205 

7 

96 

already  

65 

advertising  

264 

96 

already  a-n  

.       17 

I 

72 

advisable  

19 

225 

already  he  

15 

I 

72 

advisedly  

5 

243 

already  I  

16 

I 

72 

affect  

7 

225 

already  the  

.      18 

I 

72 

affecting  this  note  .-  

211 

also  

•      36 

5 

119 

affection  , 

103 

9 

60 

also  against  

12 

iS5 

affectionate  

104 

9 

60 

also  refused  

7 

215 

affectionately  

105 

9 

60 

also  the  

14 

149 

affective  

101 

9 

60 

also  the  newspaper  

ii 

159 

affectively  

102 

9 

60 

alternate  

.      87 

13 

72 

afford  a  

14 

241 

alternating  

.      80 

10 

137 

afraid  

8 

277 

although  

3°5 

16 

114 

a  friend's  

85 

12 

72 

altitudes  

.    158 

20 

H9 

after  

6 

98 

altogether  (see  all  together)... 

16 

279 

afternoon  

192 

24 

133 

alum  

.      112 

10 

64 

after  the  

i5 

191 

always  

.      270 

18 

96 

after  they  

315 

19 

114 

am  

21 

74 

after  this  

17 

155 

a  man  

.      58 

4 

72 

afterward  

192 

24 

137 

ambiguous  

.     116 

15 

125 

again  

12 

81 

ambition  

.    162 

21 

H9 

again  and  again  

265 

12 

114 

amended  

16 

243 

against  

124 

10 

86 

America  

9 

245 

against  us  

2 

145 

American  

M 

M5 

age  

12 

2 

3i 

a  minimum  

.    262 

13 

qo 

aged  

152 

14 

86 

am  not  

'      I2 

4 

86 

agent  

3 

98 

among  

.    167 

21 

135 

a  gentleman  

317 

19 

114 

among  them  

19 

205 

ago  

......      16 

2 

46 

amount  

.     107 

14 

12S 

agree  

22 

81 

amounted  

9 

255 

agreeable  

4 

245 

amounts  

6 

159 

agreement  

12 

237 

amuse  

.       51 

7 

123 

agreement  (an)  

II 

237 

am  willing  (and)  

8 

215 

a  growler  

84 

II 

72 

an  

63 

ague  

17 

2 

46 

an  accurate  

•     312 

17 

114 

Ah  (the  letter)  

33 

an  archangel  

.     269 

18 

96 

ah  

87 

8 

94 

anchor  

.     179 

23 

12, 

Ai  (long-a)  

33 

anchored  

174 

22 

137 

aid  

19 

3 

and  (&)  

33 

aided  

85 

12 

72 

and  a-n  

.       42 

3 

72 

ail  

21 

3 

and  all  

•     134 

17 

•  133 

ailment  

.   ...     127 

16 

135 

and  all  the  

14 

I 

86 

aim  

20 

3 

and  also  

8 

147 

and  are  

22 

3 

135 

airs  

147 

19 

121 

and  are  not  

.       138 

XJ8 

137 

Akron  

i59 

and  are  the  

*£ 

155 

Al  
Alabama  

26 

4 

2 

3i 
145 

and  company   
and  disappointed  

2 

19 

M5 

Alexandria  

91 

12 

133 

and  documents  

9 

I45 

Alfred  

I 

177 

and  do  you  

7 

i 

78 

alike  

13 

245 

and  few  

73 

7 

94 

a'  ike  liable  

II 

155 

and  finish  

20 

145 

284 


HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN.  ] 

.INK.   1 

'AGE. 

and  for.  

72 

7 

94 

and  forwarded  them  

3 

147 

and  greatly  oblige  

2 

145 

and  have  

198 

25 

iiq 

and  he  

4i 

3 

72 

and  I  

43 

3 

72 

and  if  

7i 

7 

94 

and  is  

fci 

78 

and  is  that  

162 

18 

86 

and  it  is  

4 

159 

and  know  that  

IQ 

1^7 

and  most  

160 

17 

86 

and  motionless  

82 

10 

72 

and  must  say  that  

19 

145 

and  note  

2 

147 

and  of  

fi8 

5 

86 

and  our  own  

7.8 

2 

86 

and  perhaps  

18 

MS 

and  presuming  it  
and  referred  

8 
13 

MS 
M5 

12 

147 

and  review  

164 

19 

86 

and  son  

12 

M5 

and  terms  

13 

145 

and  that  

45 

3 

72 

and  the  

44 

3 

72 

and  then  

74 

10 

119 

and  thinks  

178 

23 

129 

and  thinks  his  

191 

24 

127 

and  thinks  his  a  

57 

4 

?ft 

and  thought  theirs  

5 

153 

and  thus  

«? 

ii 

72 

and  truth  

150 

i3 

86 

and  was  

83 

78 

and  was  the  

16 

179 

and  we  

20 

145 

and  we  shall  be  pleased  
and  when  the  

9 
7 

M7 

T59 

and  will  forward  them  to  you.. 

6 

147 

and  will  they  

187 

24 

H9 

and  will  you  

15 

i 

86 

a  necessarily  

271 

20 

96 

angel  

16 

81 

angelic  

126 

10 

86 

angels  

139 

18 

135 

anger  

9i 

12 

125 

angry  

9 

189 

an   hour  

14 

7» 

animal  

14 

279 

animals  

6 

279 

Ann  

25 

4 

31 

Anna  

184 

23 

137 

Annie  

7$ 

10 

121 

annoy  

48 

6 

131 

annoyance  

ii 

157 

annum  

2 

IK 

an  order  

4 

i=\5 

another  

120 

IO 

6+ 

another  one  

168 

21 

12; 

answer  

119 

10 

6.( 

answering  your  favor  of  the  gth 

instant  

18 

147 

Anthony  

101 

112 

anxiety  

4 

«S5 

any  

3 

74 

anybody  

106 

M 

119 

anybody  else  

2 

241 

any  change  

13 

78 

any  conversation  

II 

189 

any  further  

19 

149 

any  indications  

20 

i?9 

any  one  

3i 

4 

123 

anyone's  

12 

221 

any  other  

15 

159 

any  other  peculiarities  

14 

197 

any  payment  

16 

181 

any   portion  

18 

151 

any  previous  

3 

i93 

LINE.  PAGE 

20  l8l 
15  2tl 
19  119 

3       225 

II  243 

127 

137 
123 
2  31 

19         96 
9        M7 
i         Si 
119 
125 
81 


U 


SIGN. 

any  reason 

any  such 

anything 150 

anything  further 

anything  in  the  hands 

anyway 20 

anywhere 90 

apart m 

ape 10 

a  peculiar. .  .• 271 

apparently 9 

appeal i 

appealed 14          2 

appeals 178         23 

appear  4 

appearance 9 

appearances 3 

appeared  18          3 

appears 4  87 

appears  to  be  an 2  ^3 

applause 8  243 

appliance 131         17  123 

applications 2  237 

applied 58           8  125 

applies 155         15  86 

apply 2  81 

appoint 17  23^ 

appointed 8  237 

appointment 18  196 

appreciate 12  78 

approval 187         24  129 

approve , 190         24  129 

approved 191         24  129 

approximate 13  199 

April i  147 

a  providential 154         14  86 

archangel 8  88 

ardor 86        '13  72 

are 53          7  46 

area 130         17  121 

are  a  little 9  147 

are  as  follows 17  1-5 

are  fully  protected  10  155 

are  their  friends 17  273 

are  there 22           2  78 

are  there  any  remarks 9  239 

are  those -,        12  217 

are  to  be 13  iji 

are  to  be  found 114           9  78 

are  you    7  187 

are  you  not 5  177 

are  you  positive  that  you 14  211 

are  you  the  plaintiff  in  this  case  6  181 

are  you  the  plaintiff  in  this  suit  6  179 

arise 134         17  123 

Arkansas 4  145 

arm 8  275 

armed 3           i  125 

armor 50           5  53 

army n  245 

around 195         2?  123 

around  and  around 266         12  114 

arrange 6  239 

arranged 18  193 

arrangements 17  151 

arrives 17  i^i 

art 81          10  72 

article  (the) 6  155 

articulate 14  193 

artist , 95         12  125 

artlessness 144         18  137 

as 19  74 

as  a 191         24  131 

as  a  man 10  195 

as  a  matter  of  convenience 4  159 

as  a  matter  of  course 277         13  114 

as  a  matter  of  fact 278         13  114 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


285 


SIGN.   LINE.   PAGE. 

as  a  matter  of  law 16  223 

as  an 85          6  78 

as  a  representative 20  239 

a  scarcity 84        n  72 

a  select 113          9  78 

as  far  as  you  know 7  189 

as  good  as 273         12  114 

as  great  as 274         13  ir4 

ash 27           4  31 

as  has - 7*          5  78 

as  has  been 105          7    •    78 

ashasthe 97           6  78 

as  have  been 3  237 

as  he 91          6  78 

as  he  was 20  209 

as  he  was  not  (and) 8  221 

aside 78          8  72 

as  I  have  them 8  215 

a  single  lesson 106          9  60 

as  is 103         13  119 

as  is  the 124         16  131 

as  it  22  74 

as  it  has 79'         5  78 

as  it  were 3  255 

ask 22           3  38 

asked 3          i  133 

asked  him  the  question 13  193 

asked  you 12  193 

asking  for 9  237 

as  known 96         12  129 

asks  to  be  excused 10  235 

ask  us 19  153 

ask  you  (and) 13  185 

a  slovenly 80           9  72 

as  made 66           9  127 

as  many  goods 17  157 

as  may  be 170         22  133 

as  much 72           Q  135 

as  much  as 144         is  119 

a  special 265         14  96 

asphaltum 16  159 

as  represented 19  213 

as  representing 271          19  96 

assemblage 2  247 

assert 4  249 

assistance 6  245 

associated 3  249 

association •                4"  88 

as  soon  as 275         13  114 

as  soon  as  1 5  203 

as  soon  as  possible 276         13  114 

assort 66           5  64 

assortment 67           5  64 

assuage 166         21  135 

as  such 10           2  137 

assumpsit 14  221 

assure 7  81 

assured 178         23  135 

assure  their 132         17  131 

astern .' 119         15  *35 

asthe 88          6  78 

as  there  (their) 75           5  78 

as  there  has 77           5  78 

as  this  is 18  243 

as  though 18  255 

astonish 13  98 

astonished 13  98 

astonishment 13  98 

astounded 168         21  135 

astronomical 200         25  121 

astronomy 199         25  121 

as  well  as 272         12  114 

as  you  are 5  157 

as  you  may n  153 

at 7  74 

atall 9           i  86 

at  all  events 301         15  114 

•>*  all  times 300         15  114 


SIGN. 

at  a-n 

at  any  rate 299 

at  any  time 

at  first 396 

at  hand 

atit 

Atkinson 66 

at  last 293 

at  least 292 

at  length 297 

atmosphere 

atom 55 

at  once 27 

at  one 26 

at  our 

at  present 

at  same 

at  such 

attached 

attacks 

attained 46 

attains 6 

attempt 18 

attended 76 

attended  him 

attending  the 

attend  the 

attention 122 

attenuation 156 

at  that 

at  that  date 

at  that  time 

at  the  bottom  of  the  page 

at  the  end 

at  the  office 

at  the  present  moment 3 

at  the  present  time 303 

at  the  rate  of 298 

at  the  same  time 302 

at  the  time 

at  the  time  of 

as  this 

at  this  time 

attorney 

attorneys 

attracted 

attributes 150 

attune 167 

at  which 

auction 180 

audience 

August 75 

aurora 183 

auspicious 

Australia 

author 

authority 109 

authorized 

authorize  them 

author's 

avaricious 188 

avenue  

average 74 

averaging 

aversion 158 

avert 143 

averted 50 

avoid  that 148 

Aw 

awaiting  your  reply 

awaits 161 

aware 23 

aware  of 178 

away 60 

awful 

awfulness 156 

awoke 68 

aye 85 


LINE.  PAGE. 
10  147 
15  114 
U  193 
114 
147 


199 

114 

"i 

279 

129 

86 
86 
i§9 
187 
213 
187 
149 
193 
119 
119 
125 

121 
191 
193 

64 
133 

159 

207 

189 

149 
187 
179 

121 

114 
114 
114 

189 
193 
149 
243 
199 
177 
203 
86 

121 

153 


135 
257 
155 

74 
78 
235 
177 
225 
127 
181 
135 
159 
137 
137 
119 
129 
33 


286 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

B 33 

B  (the initial) 105 

babe 139         18  125 

baby 44          6  127 

bachelor 170          4  96 

back..... 13  157 

backward 17  245 

badly 6  153 

Bain 9           2  38 

baker 4  187 

balance i  153 

balm 7          i  127 

Baltimore 17  149 

bank  81          8  94 

bankbook g  14; 

bankrupt 46           6  121 

bam  15  179 

barrel 28           3  53 

base 156         15  86 

based 20  225 

basis 5  239 

batch 39          5  i3I 

Bawn 20          3  38 

bay ii          2  27 

bays 143         18  133 

be 3  74 

Beale 93  112 

beau 164        21  125 

beauty 3  98 

became 4  213 

because 12  88 

because  I  presumed i  219 

because  i  thought 3  219 

because  there  are  things 19  199 

because  they  were 15  157 

beck  116         15  133 

be  conclusive 18  223 

been 3  74 

been  able  to 159        20  119 

before 65 

before  a-n 25           2  72 

beforehand 52           4  72 

before  he 23          2  72 

before  1 24           2  72 

before  the 26           2  72 

began 12  81 

begin n  81 

beginning 196           5  114 

begun 13  81 

behind 12  98 

behindhand 269         12  114 

being 267         16  96 

being  done 4  157 

being  duly  sworn 4  181 

be  it 13  241 

be  it  resolved 5  239 

belief 6  81 

believe 6  81 

belong 5  81 

belongs 146         12  86 

below 123         16  129 

bemistaken ,. io  197 

be  necessary ii  149 

benefactions 84         n  72 

benefit 17  257 

benefited 83         n  72 

be  not 46          3  86 

be  presented 16  241 

Berlin 6          i  133 

berry 49          7  46 

pest 106         14  133 

be  sure 7  ug 

better 44          3  64 

between i  98 

between  the 17  221 

between  them * 304         16  114 

between  these 4  225 

between  us 9  251 


SIGN    LINE.   PAGE. 

19 

189 

Beulah  

30 

4 

3 

be  very  glad  

2 

241 

be  wasted  

12 

179 

beyond  

14 

74 

bid  

M 

153 

bill  

4 

145 

billed  

ii 

183 

billed  to  us  

5 

149 

bill  of  

7 

bill  of  lading  
bill  of  this  

3 
9 

147 

bills  

2 

I4; 

bind  

14 

I 

64 

bind  us  

16 

279 

birds  

159 

20 

Black  

7 

14; 

blame  

13 

279 

blank  

18 

185 

blessed  

18 

277 

blessings  
blest  

'8,4 
64 

236 

'36o 

block  

20 

3 

119 

blood  

19 

3 

121 

bloom  

39 

5 

119 

Bloomington  

IO 

247 

blow  

16 

2 

53 

blunt  
blushing  

::::::::::  & 

5 

2  = 

133 
137 

blushingly  

100 

J5 

IZj 

beard  

in 

>< 

78 

boat  
body  
bold  

7 

2 

3 

"3 

2;i 

bolder  

69 

5 

64 

boldness  

18 

i 

127 

bolster  

94 

1 

bo 

bond  

9 

2^1 

bone  

6 

I 

60 

bones  

18 

2 

60 

bonus  

17 

187 

book  — 

268 

17 

P 

book-keeper  

17 

189 

books  

15 

211 

borrow  

54 

7 

137 

Boston  

9 

149 

both  

ii 

IS1 

bother  

3 

159 

bottom  

94 

12 

131 

bough  

6 

I 

46 

bought  

2 

I 

13S 

bought  of  , 

IO 

213 

bounces  

54 

5 

60 

bound  

151 

19 

127 

bountiful  

163 

21 

US 

bouquet  

199 

25 

135 

box  

n 

112 

BoxiS  , 

88 

112 

Box  80  

...•  89 

112 

boy  

80 

9 

72 

Boyd  

94 

112 

Boyle  

3' 

4 

46 

brackets  

^ 

147 

brain  

76 

8 

72 

brains  

8 

249 

branch  

17 

199 

brass  

7 

195 

brave  

131 

ii 

64 

braved  •.  

31 

3 

64 

brethern  

116 

-     9 

86 

bridge  

I 

179 

brief  

27 

4 

135 

bright  

13 

I 

64 

brilliant  

148 

19 

119 

bring  (to)  

20 

151 

British  

4 

2r>i 

Broadway  

1 

159 

107 

14 

H9 

HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


287 


SIGN. 

broker 

brother 

brothers 

brought 117 

Brown iig 

bruised 

brush '.'.'..'.'. 

brute 

buckler 72 

builded 150 

building 203 

buildings 200 

burden  (the) 

bureau ,.. .     190 

Burksville 

burned 

business 

business  engagement 

business  letters 

businesslike 157 

businessmen 

but 

but  a-n 21 

but  are 22 

but  are  not 148 

but  for 20 

but  have 20 

but  he 19 

but  1 20 

but  if 67 

but  not 41 

but  of  20 

but  our 30 

but  the 22 

buying 

bavs . . . 

by- 

by  a 

by  all 

by  a  microscope 

by  calling 

by  express 

by-gones , 

by  having 

byits no 

by-laws 

by  means 

by  our 36 

by  ourselves 220 

by  return 

by  satisfactory  and  unmistak- 
able   

by  that  (and) 

by  that  note 

by  the 74 

by  the  defendant 

by  the  duplicate 

by  the  plaintiff 

by  the  way  (and) 

by  this  note 

by  United  States  patents . . . 

by  us 

by  you 

by  your 35 

C  (the  initial) 

cabinet 98 

calculable 160 

calculate 132 

calculations, 

California 

call , 

called  for  the  money 

called  to  order 

called  upon 

call  forth 62 

call  for  the  (I) 

calling 

calls  for  more  than 

call  upon  him 


45 

12 

26| 
146 


LINE.  PAGE.  SIGN.  LINE.   PAGE. 

17  2m  calm 130         17       125 

9  8 1  Camden 2       179 

2  145  came 20         74 

10  78  camel i3j>         17       131 

11  78  camp 178         23       131 

20  277  campaign 7        247 

8  147  can —                 20         74 

6  279  can  a 155         20       I29 

7  53  Canada 8       153 

19  131  canal..; 71          9       *35 

5  114  can  be "       »55 

25  135  candle 6          i       123 

7  223  candor 7       249 

24  137  can  he 12         78 

2  145  canl 127         16       12^ 

15  179  cannot 

7  88  cannot  have  been 14 

20  209  cannot  say  that  the  (I) 

15  259  can  the   86 

2  96  canvassed  

20  243  can  you 

65  capable i iTj 

2  72  capital 

3  133  captivate 68 

19  135  captives 15° 

3  125  care : 148 

3  125  careful 188 

2  72  carefully 139 

2  72  carefulness 189 

5  86  carelessness 221 

3  86  careof "8 

3  125  caresses 

2  86  carload 

2  72  carload  lots 

3  151  carmine 54 

6  38  carnumber 

2  27  carried 

15  96  carried  forward 

19  133  cars I19 

12  72  case 24 

iS  145  cases !o3 

6  153  cash 55 

4  151  cash  book 

10  195  casual 123 

14  129  casually 124 

12  243  catalogue 

10  223  catch  the °2 

3  86  Catholic i72 

7  114  caught "6 

8  145  cause °4 

caused 

19  223  causes 54 

20  217  caution 27 

20  223  cautioned IO3 

7  72  cave 3 

5  211  caves 

9  i57  caw 12 

19  179  Cayenne 

20  247  cease 

12  223  ceases 

10  155  ceasing 

,    5  145  Cecil 

13  149  centre 94 

3  86  centre  their  ideas 95 

105  cents 

13  121  century 

20  131  cerebral 

17  135  certain 

13  78  certainly 3'7 

7  145  certificate 

18  8 1  cessation 

5  209  chaff 9 

3  235  chair 19 

19  209  chairman  (the) 

4  86  chance 

2  259  chanced 87 

17  147  change 

5  199  changed 

2       157  change  of  date  (the) 


39 

4° 

266 


123 

237 

121 

247 

I 

I*. 

1t\ 

133 
114 
129 
114 

114 
131 

279 
243 

153 
i|l 
183 
241 

J53 

1Q 
38 
119 
137 
217 
137 
137 
145 
72 
96 

72 

72 
239 


129 
60 
60 
46 

125 

46 

$ 

'g 

64 

J59 
245 


60 

53 
237 
157 
60 
74 
243 
243 


288 


HAVENS    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN. 

chaos 155 

chapter 70 

chapters 

character 168 

characteristic 52 

characterize 172 

characters 171 

charge 

charge  of  the  court 

charges 9 

charity 30 

Charles 32 

charm 115 

charter 73 

chase 33 

chaste 86 

Chattanooga 

chatter 72 

Chawter 

cheap 

check 27 

checks 

cheer 43 

cheered 13 

cheerful  (the) 

cheerfulness 

cherish  (and . ) 

chest 

chew 6 

Chicago 

chiefs 21 

child 16 

children 169 

China ." 23 

choice 198 

choice  of  the  people 247 

Christ 241 

Christian 

Christianity 184 

Christians 

Christine 

chronology 108 

church  — 

Church  of  Christ 242 

churchyard 68 

cigar 195 

circle  108 

circular 109 

circulated 

circulation 151 

circumflex 147 

circumjacent 148 

circumstance 149 

circumstances 150 

cistern 122 

cities 

citizen 


, 
civil 62 

claim 3 

claimed 

claiming 

claims 

clamor 52 

Clark  

class 12 

clause 91 

clay 7 

clear 32 

clear  off 59 

clergy 182 

Cleveland 

clew 130 

client 78 

clip 96 

close 

closed 

closely 

tlothe 14 


LINE.  PAGE.  SIGN. 

20  131  clothed .' 51 

9  131  cloud 17 

14  78  clown 186 

3  96  club ' 

7  133  clump 79 

22  125  coast 90 

22  125  coaster 186 

13  74  coasters 91 

14  221  coasts 170 

i  78  cobbler 78 

4  133  codicil 

3  53  coffin 

15  119  cognate 118 

6  6i  con 184 

4  40  coke 7 

8  60  coldly 

9  1 53  collar 25 

6  64  collect 168 

105  112  collected 178 

15  157  collection 179 

4  119  collective 180 

3  159  Colonel _..  . 

6  119  color ". — 

i  64  Colorado 

6  277  Columbus 

3  279  combination 24 

n  '279  combine 23 

9  199  combined 

1  27  come 

2  147  comes 4 

2  60  come  to  hand 

1  64  comfortable 

3  96  comforted 

2  60  coming 

25  137  coming  out  of 

10  114  command in 

9  114  commence 126 

20  81  commenced 127 

23  121  commences 128 

2  275  commend 112 

14  145  commerce 

14  119  commission 24 

7  277  Commissioner  of  Patents 90 

9  114  commit 

9  123  committee 176 

2=;  131  committee  (a) 

8  86  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations   36 

8  86  committees 

n  237  committees  (the) 

19  125  Commodore 103 

112  common 

112  commonest 31 

112  commonly 30 

112  Common  Pleas  Court 

16  121  commonwealth 

7  245  communication : 

9  253  companion 144 

4  38  company 134 

6  53  compared ,..     199 

1  129  compassion 113 

8  223  compel 122 

19  223  compelled 

9  223  compensating 

7  125  competent 

4  145  competing 

2  137  competition 

12  127  competitors 

1  123  compiled 38 

4  129  complain 68 

4  86  complained 64 

23  137  complains 62 

5  237  complaint 

17  123  complaints 63 

10  137  complete 129 

12  131  completion 130 

n  219  compliance..  .' 132 

13  221  complied 38 

2  203  compliment 

2  125  composed 


LINE.   PAGE. 

4     t4 

2  64 

24  135 

I  235 

127 
60 

127 
60 

121 

53 
191 
23? 

112 


8 


23 


»3 

u 
16 
v 
9 
3 
3 
15 


~ 

273 
53 
123 
123 


203 
14? 
24= 
121 
121 

237 


275 
279 
239 
179 

112 
112 
112 
112 

112 
2JI 
123 
131 
24; 

135 
257 
127 
237 
235 
112 


207 

195 
1" 
131 
131 
137 

112 
123 
151 

24; 
223 
245 
245 
257 
123 
137 
129 
129 
211 
129 
112 
112 
123 
121 
247 
237 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


289 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

controvert  

SIGN.  L 

•    144 

INE.  PAGE. 

compulsion  

172 

22 

119 

•    155 

20 

121 

conceive  

1  66 

21 

129 

convention  

5 

2VJ 

concern  
concerned  

142 
144 

18 
18 

123 
123 

convention  report  
conversion  

47 

1 

259 
131 

concerning  

143 

18 

125 

converted  

.      112 

14 

1  2O 

conclude  

34 

5 

135 

Cook  

I 

18 

concluded  

176 

22 

133 

Coombs  

Qo 

concludes  

11 

225 

cooperate  

.      200 

25 

137 

conclusion  

88 

II 

133 

cooperation  

9 

241 

conclusive  

12 

223 

Coots  

.      103 

112 

concomitant  

122 

112 

copy  

7 

concurrent  

114 

112 

cordial  

ft 

2AC. 

condition  

25 

81 

corporal  

79 

8 

n 

conduct  

3 

245 

corporation  

17 

114 

conducted  

20 

253 

correct  

24 

3 

129 

conferred  

16 

251 

corrected  

.     126 

16 

129 

confession  

"5 

112 

correction  

.     128 

16 

I2Q 

confidence  

20 

243 

corrective  , 

,.    127 

tfi 

129 

confined  

T8 

179 

correctly  

12 

157 

conform  

20 

151 

correspond  

6 

243 

confuse  

Tlfi 

112 

corroborative  

i 

223 

confusion  

117 

112 

corruption  

•      32 

4 

121 

congratulate  ._  
congratulating  me  .  .  .'.  

19 
19 

255 
243 

corrupti  ve  
cosy  

,     108 

.      112 

14 

"3 
127 

congress  

116 

15 

137 

cottons  

7 

153 

Connecticut  

12 

145 

could  

.     160 

20 

127 

could  not  

.    306 

Tfi 

114 

connive  

194 

25 

121 

could  you  

.      68 

9 

133 

conquered  

123 

16 

119 

counsel  

.     182 

23 

129 

conquerers  

3i8 

20 

114 

countenance  

•     147 

19 

131 

consciences  

9 

225 

counter  

2 

153 

consciousness  

q 

193 

counteract  

•     145 

112 

consequence  ;  

134 

17 

135 

counterfeit  

.     146 

112 

consequent  

ii 

98 

counting  the  

9 

273 

consequential  

136 

17 

135 

countries  

.       112 

consequently  

135 

17 

135 

country  

2f 

74 

consider  

112 

county  

4 

considerable  

48 

fi 

121 

county  of  

I 

195 

considerably  

6 

couple  (a)  

Tfi 

201 

consider  again  

1  80 

23 

125 

court  

18 

2 

fil 

consideration  

132 

112 

court  houses  

12 

245 

considered-ate  

133 

112 

Court  of  Common  Pleas  

I 

177 

consist  

182 

23 

121 

Court  of  Oyer  and  Terminer.., 

I 

195 

consisted  

139 

18 

121 

court  reporting  

II 

225 

consistency  

138 

18 

121 

courtship  

.    223 

7 

114 

consistent  

140 

T8 

121 

cow  

ii 

i 

40 

consolidation  

4 

239 

Coyle  

5 

I 

38 

constant  

46 

6 

127 

cramp  

.     147 

19 

125 

constituent  

134 

112 

craving  

13 

279 

constitute  

135 

112 

crawl  

.    166 

21 

125 

constituted  

104 

13 

123 

create  , 

84 

II 

72 

constitution  

T3fi 

112 

creation  

66 

9 

137 

Constitution  of  the  United  States 

161 

3 

creative  

6 

i 

135 

construct  

ii 

88 

creature  

7 

98 

construction  

24 

3 

127 

credibility  

156 

20 

123 

contain  

20 

3 

137 

credit  

ft 

159 

contained  

12 

225 

creditable  

267 

Tfi 

ofi 

contemplate  

14 

245 

credits  

fi 

237 

contending  that  

223 

creek  

8 

179 

contends  

3 

223 

creep  

.    135 

17 

121 

contention  

17 

221 

crest  

119 

133 

contents  

2 

147 

crime  

2 

279 

contestants  

5 

191 

croaker  

,    186 

24 

129 

continent  

10 

Z$ 

cross  examination  

19 

189 

continental  

ii 

cross  examined  

19 

continue  

62 

8 

121 

cruel  

159 

16 

86 

continues  

179 

23 

133 

cry  

13 

2 

53 

continuing  his  testimony  

5 

Cuba  

.      17 

3 

38 

contour  (and)  

9 

197 

cube  

59 

8 

127 

contraband  

52 

7 

119 

cue  

9 

2 

27 

contract  

TTH 

15 

121 

cultivate  

107 

14 

131 

contradict  

141 

112 

cultivated  

108 

14 

131 

contrary  

9 

235 

culture  

75 

G 

contribute  

142 

112 

cumber.  

,      62 

8 

125 

contribution  

143 

112 

cup  

19 

275 

control  

13 

159 

cups  

135 

17 

133 

Controlled  

13 

245 

cured  

»3 

ii 

control  the  

6 

237 

curiosity  

40 

3 

94 

2QO 


HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

current 5  159 

custom 310         17  114 

customary 52           7  46 

customers 17  145 

cut 8  151 

cute 39           3  94 

D 33 

D  (the  initial) 105 

daily 71          6  72 

Dakota 9  155 

Dale 24          3  46 

Dallas 10  151 

dances 51        .5  60 

danger 17  81 

dangers 160         20  133 

dangerous 134         17  121 

Daniel i  187 

dark ii          2  127 

darkened 159         17  86 

darkens 134         17  129 

darkness 30          4  125 

dash 171         22  129 

date i           i  64 

dated 230          8  114 

date  of 8  177 

dates 15  183 

dating 4  149 

dative 30          3  60 

Dave 24          3  135 

dawn 124         10  125 

day 25          4  27 

day  of  the  month  (the) 19  201 

days 104          8  86 

dead 18  201 

deal 18          2  ^3 

dealer 29          3  53 

dealers n  155 

dealings 19  157 

deal  ofconfidence 20  243 

deals  not 270         18  96 

dear 15  81 

dearest 10  279 

dear  madam 14  145 

dear  miss 17  149 

dear  sir 7  145 

dear  sirs 6  151 

death ii  279 

debate 16  259 

debtor 70           5  64 

deceased 126         16  125 

December 7  m? 

decide  that 14  187 

decision 56           5  60 

declared) 10  275 

declined 16  159 

decompose 123  112 

deduct 18  155 

deducted 13  157 

deducting  the 10  157 

deep Q5         12  133 

deeps 79         10  135 

defeats 20  157 

defective 132         17  119 

defence 46          6  129 

defendant 20  81 

defendant's  machine 64          8  123 

defendant's  testimony 154         14  86 

deference 80          9  72 

defiance 50          7  121 

define 198         25  123 

defined 118         15  129 

definite 166         21  121 

deflective 40           5  121 

degree 22  81 

Delaware 14  145 

delay 166         21  127 

delegates 17  237 

delight 107         14  137 


SIGN.  LINE.  S AGP. 

delighted 106         14       13; 

delinquent 68           9        115 

deliver , 13         Si 

deliverance 40          5 

delivered 148         12 

delivery 72          9 

democrat 36          5 

Dennison  and 4 

denominate 23 

denominated 83         ii 

denomination 84         ii 

denominations 48          6 

Denver 9 

deny 2 

depart 15 

departments 81         10 

deposit  (the) 19 

depth 171         22 

depths 175         22 

dereliction 184         23 

deride 150         19 

derided 151         19 

derision 152         19 

derive 155         20 

derived 63           5 

describe 13 

description 96         12 

descriptive 124         16 

descry 84          8 

desert 194         25 

deserve 2 

deserved 64          5 

desire 85          6 

desired 16 

desires 87        "13 

desirous 13 

desk 3          i 

desolate 88          6 

destroy 87          6 

destroyed 17 

detailed  report 10 

determine 2 

determined 14 

Detroit 20 

develope 132         17 

deviation 123         16 

devoid 18 

devoted 16 

diction 158         20 

djd 42          3 

did  he 14 

did  he  give  any  reason 2 

did  he  give  you 4 

did  he  not 8 

did  he  say 3 

did  he  say  that  he 15 

Did  I  not  understand  you  to  say  71          9 

did  not  take n 

did  that 14 

did  you 16 

did  you  continue 18 

djd  you  ever  have ii 

did  you  ever  meet 14 

did  you  get  receipts 20 

did  you  get  your 17 

did  you  live 9 

did  you  not 

die 24          4 

dies 32          5 

diety 71           6 

differ 21 

difference 21 

different 21 

different  names 17 

differ  in  their 2 

difficult 19 

difficulties 160         17 

difficulty 19 


'S 

123 
129 
145 

81 
123 
123 
119 
145 
251 
157 

72 
1=9 
131 
125 
129 
137 
137 
137 
137 

64 

88 

121 

135 

53 
125 
253 


193 

72 

241 


86 
179 
235 
223 
187 
2"7 
125 
127 
279 
24; 
^27 

86 
181 
189 
189 
209 
189 
189 
125 
203 
177 
177 
187 
189 


187 
205 
209 


64 
81 
81 
81 
259 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


291 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

dignity 3  88 

dime 63           8  127 

diminished , 13  151 

dinner 50           7  123 

dire in          14  129 

directed 3  147 

direct  examination 5  iyj 

direction 184         23  119 

disability 124         16  121 

disadvantage 17           i  78 

disappointed 19  145 

disbelief 80         10  12=; 

discharge 10           i  78 

discontinuing  payments 20  181 

discount 19  147 

discounts 18  145 

discover 180          4  96 

discovery 4  197 

discriminate 200         25  119 

discuss 17  151 

discussed  (and) 7  237 

discussion i  255 

diseased 142         18  127 

dispel 194         25  127 

displace 195         25  127 

display 192         24  127 

displeasure 196         25  127 

disposed 78           8  72 

dispute  (the) 9  223 

dissatisfied 268          17  06 

dissection 86          6  86 

disseminate 56           7  125 

dissever 55           7  125 

dissolute • 89          6  86 

distance., 19  159 

distentions 76         10  129 

distiller 97           9  94 

distilleries .'. ..  99           9  94 

distillers 98           9  94 

distinct 30           4  123 

distinction 20           3  131 

distinctly 6  217 

distinguished 5  259 

district i  183 

disturb 16  277 

divide 5  255 

divine 20  81 

divined 150         19  125 

division 4  201 

dizzy 33          5  38 

do 9  74 

dock 151          19  133 

doctor 14  81 

doctors 6  151 

document 15  191 

documents 9  145 

Dodd 13           2  38 

Doe 27           4  46 

does 6          i  78 

does  a 138         18  no 

does  he 12  78 

does  he  say 14  183 

does  it 17  207 

does  not 2  225 

does  so 20  279 

does  this 17  207 

dogmatic 179           4  96 

doing 197           5  H4 

doing  so 13  i;i 

dollar 8  74 

dollars 7  145 

done 24  81 

do  not  now 4  211 

doomed 6  279 

Dora 17  149 

double 64          8  119 

doubt 119          5  119 

doubtful 190          4  114 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGB. 


jown  ...........................  8          i 

itowns  ..........................  20           2 

downy  ..........................  12          i 

dowry  ...........................  22          2 

do  you  ..........................  6 

do  you  know  ...................  17 

do  you  know  the  ................  n 

do  you  live  .....................  8 

do  you  mean  to  say  you  .........  9 

do  you  not  ......................  12 

do  you  not  recollect  of  ..........  3 

dozen  .........................  159         20 

drafts(the)  .....................  4 

dr  ainer  .........................  34 

drawer  .........................  18 

Drawer  A  .......................  90 

drawn  ..........................  12 

drayman  .....................  ...  16 

dread  ...........................  20          2 

dreaded  .........................  231          8 

dress  ............................  88          8 

drew  ............................  21           2 

drink  ...........................  16 

drinker  .........................  16 

drive  ............................  75         10 

driven  ............  ..............  151          19 

driving  .........................  74         10 

drowned  ........................  62           8 

due  .............................  26          4 

due  you  .........................  8 

dukes  ...........................  39          5 

dull  .............................  20 

dumb  ...........................  14 

Dunlap  .........................  10          2 

duplicates  ......................  20 

duration  ........................  72           9 

during  ..........................  70           9 

during  that  time  ................  16 

during  the  ......................  2 

dutiful  ..........................  182         23 

duty  ............................  174         22 

E  ................................ 

each  .............................  ii 

each  are  ........................  38          3 

each  month  .....................  13 

each  of  the  .....................  12 

each  one  thoroughly  ...........  164         19 

each  will  ........................  42           6 

earlier  ......................  ....  15 

early  ............................  77 

earn  ............................  n           2 

earned  .........................  187         24 

ears  .............................  18 

earth  ...........................  51           7 

ease  ..........................  ...  164         19 

easier  ...........................  4 

east  .............................  318         20 

easterly  .........................  72           9 

eastern  ..........................  118         15 

East  Saginaw  .....  •.  .............  12 

easy  .............................  26          4 

eat  ........  ......................  7 

ebb  .............................  28          4 

economic  .......................  6 

Ed  ..............................  32           5 

edge  ............................  30           4 

edition  .........................  3°           4 

Edmund  ........................  118         10 

eej  ..............................  33          5 

effect  ...........................  84         ii 

effective  .............  '.  ..........  164         21 

effort  ...........................  15 

efforts  ..........................  106         14 

efforts  of  the  press  .............  239          9 

egg  .............................  3i           4 

Egyptian  .......................  10 

En  ............  .....  .............  86          * 


60 
60 
53 
177 
189 
181 
195 

211 

177 
209 
129 
i59 
133 
147 

112 

207 
219 

64 
114 
53 
53 
273 
273 
119 

123 
129 
135 


129 
279 
279 
125 

153 
129 
125 

201 
151 
127 
125 

33 


243 


133 
151 
72 

121 
123 

203 

1 

159 
114 
137 
i35 
149 
127 
279 
3i 
249 
31 
31 

SP 

64 

3i 
72 


"4 
31 

159 
94 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

SIGN.   LINE.  PAGE. 

sight  

99 

entry  

9 

217 

eighteen  
eighteen  hundred  and  seventy, 
eighteen  hundred  and  seventy- 

i 

99 
MS 

envelope  
envy  
equal  

....    172 

5 

22 

155 

127 

81 

one  

6 

145 

equalled  

....     118 

Q 

Sft 

eighteenth  

55 

4 

112 

equally  

18 

81 

eighth  
eight  hundred  
eight  hundred  and  five  

53 
70 

4 

5 

112 

99 

112 

eguatorial  
equitable  
era  

....  196 

2; 
7 
M 

129 
239 
245 

eightieth  

54 

4 

1T2 

erect  

82 

10 

72 

99 

Erie  , 

14 

eight  thousand  
eighty  

99 
99 

error  

I 
19 

i?3 
223 

either  

13 

74 

error  in  the  

18 

223 

elapsed  

g 

255 

errors  

2 

elect  

17 

237 

especial  

I 

H 

elected  

3 

237 

especially  

I 

88 

election  

16 

235 

Esquire  

94 

112 

elective  

114 

10 

64 

essay  

143 

18 

119 

electrotype  (an)  

6 

establish  

12 

•i 

elects  (and)  

2 

237 

established  

12 

98 

element  

191 

24 

establishing  

13 

241 

elevator  

9 

183 

establishment  

12 

eleven  

99 

esteem  -  

2 

245 

eleventh  

66 

5 

112 

esteemed  

2 

245 

elocutionist  

US 

10 

64 

estimate  

18 

3 

135 

eloquence  

3 

257 

et  al  

i 

183 

ElPaso  

i 

etcetera  

2 

151 

else  

116 

10 

64 

etch  

29 

4 

31 

64 

4 

78 

eternal  

19 

81 

Elverson  

i 

153 

eternity  

19 

81 

Emb  

33 

Ethel  

38 

4 

53 

embarrassing  

176 

22 

121 

evangelic  

135 

17 

embezzle  

IS6 

20 

131 

evangelize  

136 

17 

I2T 

embodied  

13 

239 

Evans  

18 

149 

embracing  

108 

14 

135 

evasion  

38 

4 

60 

embroideries  

15 

145 

even  

....       85 

12 

72 

emigrate  

114 

119 

even  a  

17 

159 

Emp  

33 

evening  

42 

6 

129 

emphatic  

174 

22 

121 

ever  

6 

7« 

emphatically  

10 

211 

everlasting  

205 

6 

114 

employ  

131 

II 

64 

everlasting  life  

206 

6 

114 

employed  

7 

187 

everlasting  love  

207 

6 

114 

empty  

167 

21 

119 

ever  purchase  

7 

207 

empyric  

148 

19 

127 

every  

3 

81 

enameus  ,  
enact  laws  
enclosed  

7 
4 
7 

243 

251 
151 

everybody  
every  one  
every  one  of  us  

'35 
263 

14 

10 

ii 

2H 

"4 

13 

187 

everything  

136 

ii 

86 

endeared  

4 

245 

every  time  

4 

243 

endeavored  

5 

223 

everywhere  

148 

19 

123 

endeavors  

12 

255 

evidence  

86 

II 

137 

ended  

99 

13 

119 

evil  

83 

II 

125 

endless  

14 

2 

129 

exact  

4 

I 

94 

endorsed  

12 

147 

exactly  

5 

I 

94 

ends  

82 

II 

123 

exaggerate  

163 

21 

121 

enemies  

170 

22 

129 

exaggerative  

164 

21 

121 

energy  

86 

13 

72 

examination  

16 

I 

94 

6 

255 

examination-in-chief  

5 

179 

engaged  

18 

247 

examine  

14 

i 

94 

England  '.. 

181 

5 

96 

examined  

14 

i 

94 

English  

181 

5 

96 

examining  paper  

ii 

191 

engraved  

65 

5 

64 

excel  

12 

i 

94 

enjoy  

2 

251 

excellent  

13 

i 

94 

enough  

126 

16 

133 

except  

7 

i 

94 

enquire  

11 

24* 

excepting  

sj 

217 

enter  

92 

7 

6» 

exception  

20 

177 

enterprises  

4 

249 

except  the  

2 

l^i 

entertain  

167 

2 

114 

exchange  

12 

Hi 

entertainment  (and)  

17 

235 

exchanging  

14 

249 

entertainments  

17 

201 

excursion  

131 

17 

129 

enter  their  house  

93 

7 

64 

excuse  

7 

enthusiastic  

20 

245 

excused  

d 

245 

entire  

187 

24 

140 

18 

entire  document  (the)  

19 

191 

execrative  

139 

18' 

131 

entirely  

26 

4 

119 

executive  committee  

17 

23^ 

entire  time  

13 

20; 

exercise  

a 

I 

94 

entries  

20 

exercises  

II 

225 

HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


293 


SIGN.    LINE.    PAGE. 

exercisist 3           i  94 

t-xert I            i  94 

exhibit 14  217 

existed .     i  240 

existence 269          17  96 

expands 263         14  96 

expanse 142         18  125 

expansive 143         18  125 

expect 6           i  94 

expected 148         19  137 

expect  to  be  (I) 12  235 

expel 64          8  135 

expense 146         19  125 

expensive 144         18  125 

experience 9           i  94 

experienced io           i  94 

expert no         14  121 

explain 40           5  119 

explanation 13  147 

explicit 142         18  137 

explore 142         18  121 

explosive ..  88         n  135 

exporting 16  159 

express 195         25  125 

express  company 14  145 

expression ...  196         25  125 

exsiccated 192         24  131 

extend n           i  94 

extended 6  251 

extending  from io  245 

extent n           i  94 

external (.  io  88 

externally 10  88 

externity 176         22  123 

extra 15           2  125 

extraordinary 16           2  125 

extreme 1 4 

extremity 14  88 

eye 84  94 

eyes : 127         16  119 

Ezra 84         ii  135 

F 33 

F  (the  initial) 105 

face 41           6  38 

faces 42           6  38 

facial 53          5  53 

facilitate 20  259 

facility 13  225 

fact 3  74 

factory 6  187 

facts 5i           4  78 

fail 85          12  72 

failed 171         22  133 

failure 7»         10  133 

fairly 16  157 

fairy 186    24  121 

faith 7  255 

faithful-ly 9  i5i 

faithfulness 191           4  "4 

fall 34           4  53 

fallen 17  255 

falter 79           6  64 

familiar 114         15  I27 

familiarity 20  259 

family '3  205 

family  physician..  .1 

famous 8  247 

fanaticism 163         21  135 

fantasm 34            5  "9 

fantastic 164         21  135 

far 3  74 

fare 35           4  53 

farm 75           7  72 

farther 7«           6  64 

fascinated 9 

fascination 

ishion 36            4  6° 

tr-nt 77 

Jaster 95  °° 


156 
igi 
139 


fast  line 

father 

fault 

faults 

faulty 

favor 

favorable 

features 

February 

fee x 

feeble 181 

feebleness...     182 

feed 

fee).- 136 

feeling 

feel  the 

feet 

fellow. . .  j2i 

r     ,  i  **4 

fellows 

fellowship .    220 

felt 4 

ferry 4g 

fetch  the 

feud 140 

few 15 

few  days  (a) .' 

fewer 

fickle....- 58 

fie 14 

fifteen 

fifteen  hundred 38 

fifteenth vj 

fifth 34 

fiftieth 39 

fifty 

fifty  five 47 

fifty  thousand 40 

file 

filial 8 

filled 

filling 

fill  your  orders 

financial 84 

financially 

find 28 

fine 155 

finger 103 

finish  (and) 

finished  the 

finishes 

finishing 

firm 

firmer 

firms 

first 

first  day 

first  instant 

First  National  Bank  (the) 

fissure 

fitted 60 

fitter 76 

five 

five  eighteenths , 87 

five  hundred 

five  hundred  and  eighth 71 

nve  million 

five  thousand  

fixed 187 

fixture 84 

flame 67 

flats 

flattered 

fled 94 

fleeting 69 


SIGN.    LINE.    PAGE. 


Hew. 
flight... 
fling.... 
Florida. 
flow  — 


123 
25 
15 

147 


86 
119 
123 
203 
145 

46 
114 
114 
149 
137 
153 
157 
J59 
133 
257 
114 

121 
46 
153 
123 

25 

i8q 
279 
127 


in 

2  v 
135 

24S 

273 
153 
137 

257 

64 

127 

64 

145 
259 
237 
195 
159 
153 
239 

74 
195 
145 
M7 


64 
99 

112 

99 

112 

99 


119 
135 
245 

247 
123 

72 
131 

64 
131 
145 


294 


HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPH*. 


. 

fluster  ...........................  93 

F.O.  B  ......................... 

toe  .............................  2 

fogs  .............................  95 

folio  .............................  144 

follow  ..........................  81 

followed  ........................  94 

following  .......................  138 

following  resolution  ............. 

follow  their  .....................  39 


.... 

food  ............................ 

Foote  ...........................      18 

for  .............................. 

fora  ......................  .....      15 

for  all  ...........................      10 

for  a  report  ..................... 

force  upon  us  ................... 

forcible  .........................     158 

forcing  themselves  .............. 

for  collection  ................... 

forefinger  ......................     148 

foregoing  ........................ 

forehead.  ....................... 

forest  .........................  •. 

forever  ..............  ,  ...........      22 

forewarned  ......................     156 

forfeit  ...........................    r54 

forget  ...........................      30 

forgive  .......................... 

forgiveness  ..................... 

forgot  ...........................    120 

forgotten  ........................    159 

for  he  was  .......................      22 

for  he  was  the  ..................      95 

for   him  ......................... 

for  his  ..........................     317 

for  his  father  ................... 

for  it  has  been  .................. 

foritis  ..........................      53 

for  it  is  known  ..................      54 

form  ............................ 

(or  many  ........................ 

formation  .......................     180 

former  letter  .................... 

form  the  ........................ 

formulating  their  ............... 

for  payment  .................... 

!  or  prisoners  .................... 
or  proponent  ................... 

for  publication  .................. 

forsale  .......................... 

for  same  ........................ 

for  some  time  ................... 

forsooth  ........................       50 

for  such  ......................... 

for  such  a  ....................... 

for  supposing  ................... 

forswear  ........................     155 

forte  ............................ 

forth  ............................ 

for  the  ..........................     126 

for  trie  defendent  ............... 

for  their  own  .................... 

forthelast  ...................... 

for  the  northern  ................ 

for  the  plaintiff  ................. 

for  those  ........................ 

fortieth  ........................      30 

forty  ............................ 

forty-hundred  .......  :   ..........      32 

forty-hundred-thousand  .......      33 

fortv-thousand  ..................      31 

for  us  ........................... 

forwarded  them  (and)  .......... 

forward  them  to  you  ............ 

for  which  ....................... 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE.  SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

8  60  for  you 52  5  $4 

9  133  found 27  2  64 

i  46  foundation 12  98 

12  135  four 99 

18  135  four  hundred 99 

10  72  four-hundred  and  thirty — ....  72  6  112 
12  137  four-hundred  and  three 73           6  112 

18  133  four-million 99 

4  239  fourteen 99 

1  129  fourteenth 28  3  112 

fourteen-thousand 29  3  112 

fourth 25  2  112 

8  279  fourth  instant 4  147 

3  38  four-thousand 99 

2  74  fraction 20  iU 

2  123  frail 188         24  129 

i  86  frame 43          6  131 

i  237  Francis i  27? 

16  137  Frank 79         10  133 

20  133  Franklin 2  149 

6  249    •   freak 59  8  129 

12  147  free 2  131 

19  125  freely 14  153 

15  259  Freeport .-.  17  14; 

r7  197  freight 20  147 

3  203  freighted 232  8  114 

3  131  frequently 159         20  127 

i  114  Friday i  147 

112  friend 13  197 

4  127  friendly i£  247 

1  279  friends 85         12  72 

2  279  friendship 224  7  114 

15  127  fright '. 26  2  64 

20  137  from 4  74 

3  129  from  a-n 148         12  86 

12  119 

14  78  from  it 2  i  133 

20  114  from  its 20  231 

17  189  from  local 17  143 

19  159  from  making  a 13  235 

5  94  from   reporting 19  235 

5  94  fromthat 3  133 

from  the 14  14; 

5  74  from  the  amount 20  213 

7  207  from  them 5  133 

23  135  from  this  10  149 

17  151  from  which i|  137 

16  151  from  you IB  149 

6  239  front i  245 

4  159  frosty .. 99         13  125 

4  195  f  row  n 35           3  60 

4  191  fuel in           9  64 

15  177  fugitives 68  9  121 

9  155  fulfill 3  217 

15  145  full 109  7  78 

4  237  fully 115         13  123 

7  125  fun 34  3  60 

12  225  fundamental 209  6  114 

11  153  funds 12  147 

16  193  funny 50  7  46 

1  114  furnish 20  22- 

14  247  furnished 176         22  123 

2  74  furniture 85  7  64 

16  121  furrow 122         16  1^1 

4  187  further 96           8  64 

13  279  furthermore 13  179 

7  189  further  their  laws 97          8  64 

i  183  fusion 162         21  129 

3  177  future 161          18  86 

7  217  G  (the  initial) 103 

3  112  gain 4           i  60 

99  gained 13  223 

3  112  gains 16           2  60 

3  ri2  gaiter 162         21  123 

3  112  gale 6          i  38 

3  159  gallery 142         18  120 

3  147  galley 2           i  119 

o  147  gallon 7  243 

7  131  gambler 134         20  129 


HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


295 


game  

SIGN.   LINE.   PAGE. 
.      132             17           129 

gone  

SIGN.  LINK.   PAGE. 
17         017 

garden  

10 

245 

good  many  
good  night  

10 

3 

153 
279 

garment  
Garnett  

.       130 

17 
n 

129 
147 

goods  
gospel  

145 
277 

gas  

..        28 

4 

govern  

10 

8V 

gave  

8< 

10 

72 

governed  

78 

IO 

123 

Save  it  

86 

n 

133 

government..:   

10 

8i 

ay  

IO 

2 

27 

governor  

122 

9 

86 

gazes  

..    168 

21 

129 

govern  the  

152 

14 

86 

gem  
general  
generalization  

..    192 
.      28 

4 

123 

81 
125 

grace  
gracefully  
gradual  

243 

9 
n 

"4 

247 

generalize  
generalized  
generally  (see  general)  
generals  
generation  

.      27 
-      32 

26 

4 
4 
6 

125 
125 
81 
125 

81 

gradually  
grain  
grammar  
grandchild  
grandchildren  

IOO 

80 
Ill 
112 

6 
8 
14 
14 

183 
53 
131 

generous  

3 

245 

grandeur  

70 

9 

129 

genial  
Gentile  

.      98 

10 

13 

277 
125 

grant  
granted  

4 
9 

153 

237 

gentle  , 
gentleman  
gentlemen    
gentlemen  of  the  jury  

.      98 

13 

2 

I 
14 

98 

221 

gratitude  
gratuitous  
gratuitously  
graves  

50 

52 
78 

7 
7 
7 

10 

129 
129 

129 

12* 

Sjntly  

19 

159 

great  

74 

7 

72 

eorge  

..      88 

8 

53 

greater  quantity  (a)  

16 

1*7 

Georgia  

19 

145 

greatest  

12 

253 

German  
Germany  

6 

I 

13 

127 

159 

great  extent  
greatly  

135 
99 

'7 
7 

119 

86 

Gertrude  

.     no 

112 

greatly  oblige  

2 

14* 

get  

7 

I 

121 

great  many  

I 

get  out  of  

I 

259 

green  

11 

147 

get  the  
get  them  

5 

2 

155 
21? 

greet  
Grimm  

154 

20 

I 

127 
151 

getting  bettei  , 

6 

189 

grinders  

7 

239 

getting  out  , 

3 

157 

grinding  

13 

25.3 

.     170 

22 

"5 

grocery  

19 

27* 

gifted  

II 

247 

grooved  

32 

1 

64 

gigantic  

.     164 

21 

137 

gross  

10 

147 

girl  

..      26 

3 

53 

ground  

5 

157 

girls  

n 

245 

group  

136 

17 

119 

give  it  

.       46 

6 

131 

grow  

71 

9 

127 

give  me  

8 

151 

growing  

19 

279 

give  me  the  

12 

215 

growler  

84 

ii 

72 

give-r*  

22 

74 

grows  

263 

13 

96 

given  forth  

.       112 

8 

78 

guarding  

269 

96 

given  them  

17    . 

177 

guarding  it  

269 

18 

96 

given  your  time  

2 

199 

gubernatorial  

92 

12 

119 

gives  

.       27 

2 

78 

guess  

91 

12 

135 

give  the  

.      190 

24 

121 

guests  

I 

2^7 

give  them  

.         28 

2 

7» 

guilt  

152 

19 

119 

give  these  

.      68 

7 

94 

giilty  

no 

'4 

122 

give  this  

.      69 

7 

94 

ypsy  

27 

4 

38 

give  those  

.       7o 

7 

94 

H  (the  initial)  

105 

give  thus  

-      70 

7 

94 

habit  

147 

19 

129 

give  us  the  

10 

183 

habits  

87 

n 

135 

give  you  

16 

185 

habits  of  birds  

238 

9 

114 

give  you  a  

ii 

145 

had  

IO 

74 

give  your  

7 

155 

had  been  

16 

211 

giving  

2 

157 

•  had  he  

3 

193 

giving  what  reason  

18 

213 

had  not  

154 

20 

gladsomeness  

•     215 

7 

114 

had  you  

18 

177 

glanced  

.    106 

9 

60 

hail  

192 

24 

i35 

glass  (a)  

6 

187 

hair  

....     143 

18 

'31 

glee  

3 

i 

137 

hair  (the)  

r6 

197 

Glendale  

i 

hairs  

n 

203 

gloom  

.     187 

24 

127 

half  

81 

112 

glories  '.  . 

.      7i 

9 

133 

hall  

i 

243 

glorification  
glorified  

.         72 

9 

21 

Ii 

halt  :  
Hamburg  (and)  —  

17 

13 

153 
'59 

glorious  
g!ory-if  y  

.      70 

9 

21 

*$ 

hamper  
hand  

IOO 

7 

gloss  

.      80 

10 

119 

handed  

17 

217 

go  

77 

8 

72 

hand  in  hand  

267 

12 

114 

goal  .'.... 

14 

2 

53 

hand  it  

12 

239 

God  

5 

9« 

handling  

15 

241 

going  

6 

i 

125 

hands  ".  

IO 

191 

golden  

.      66 

9 

121 

handsome  

10 

15.3 

296 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN.   LINE.   PAGE. 

handwriting  

16 

155 

hang  

...      90 

8 

94 

Hanson  

5 

149 

happen  

d 

happened  

1^4 

20 

133 

happens  

...      86 

13 

72 

happier  

15 

27* 

happiest  

H5 

20 

133 

happy  
hard  

.  ..       15 

2 

14 

hardened  

.  .  .      102 

13 

135 

hardens  us  

9 

279 

hardly  

.  ..      15 

2 

135 

harlequin  

...    143 

18 

135 

harsh  

9 

279 

Harvey  

3 

179 

has  

19 

74 

has  been  

...    104 

7 

78 

has  been  said  

6 

225 

has  gone  

94 

12 

129 

has  had  

22 

3 

has  had  it  

...         60 

5 

94 

has  had  its  

.  ..     160 

17 

86 

has  he  

16 

181 

has  it  ; 

22 

74 

has  known  

...      96 

12 

129 

has  met  
has  not  

:::  1* 

15 

7 

114 
129 

has  not  been  

6 

159 

has  no  use  (and)  

5 

225 

has  now  ,  

15 

2^9 

hasten  

99 

13 

121 

has  there  

•  .  .    175 

22 

129 

hate  

/H 

6 

46 

hatef  ul-ly  

.  ..      144 

18 

129 

hater  

...      167 

21 

haunts  

19 

277 

have  

7 

74 

have  a  

3 

i» 

have  been  , 

2O 

2 

86 

have  it  

..      136 

I 

96 

have  it  go  

17 

239 

have  known  .•  

I 

221 

have  not  

47 

3 

86 

have  them  

..     181 

23 

121 

have  you  

13 

177 

have  you  got  the  
having  received  any  
having  received  payment  — 

j 

16 

269 
209 

Hay  

2 

i 

3i 

hazy  , 

,..      8 

i 

129 

he  

..    71 

6 

72 

head  

i? 

2;  9 

health  (and)  

7 

279 

he  always  , 

ii 

197 

heard  

13 

7» 

heard  no  objections  (I>  

4 

237 

heard  the  motion  

17 

243 

heard  the  resolution  read  

8 

2.39 

hear  favorably  

II 

heart  , 

35 

5 

131 

hearted  , 

279 

heartfelt  

3 

277 

hear  the  report  

iS 

heartily  

14 

2 

135 

heaven  

.  .    240 

9 

114 

heavenly  body  

•  -     3C9 

16 

"4 

he  bought  , 

15 

181 

he  caught  

...      66 

5 

72 

he  did  '. 

I 

189 

he  did  not  , 

4 

189 

he  died  

4 

193 

heeded  (and)  

247 

he  gave  

20 

1ST 

he  had  a  

14 

197 

he  had  been  

6 

193 

he  has  

94 

i 

7* 

he  has  not  

15 

iSi 

height  

4 

199 

SIGN.    LINE. 

height  (the) 13 

he  improved 13 

he  is 93          6 

held 79         10 

helpless n 

he  made 17 

he  made  the —  18 

he  may 64           5 

he  may  be  certain 40           5 

hemorrhage 

hence 3 

Henry 95 

her 17 

here 198         25 

hereafter 106          9 

he  really 15 

herein 107          9 

hereinafter 108          9 

hereinbefore 109           9 

hereinto no           9 

here  is  the  other  (and) 11 

hereof 113         10 

hereon 112         10 

here  present 13 

heretofore 114         1° 

hereunto in          10 

herewith 4 

here  you  have 6 

herself 10           2 

he  says  so iv 

hesitancy 2 

hesitation 104         13 

he  used 7 

he  was 95           6 

he  will  be  glad 19 

he  will  embody  it 12 

he  will  read 14 

he  wished  me 13 

high i           i 

higher 47           6 

highest  (the) 2 

highly 20 

highway 

hill n 

hills 8 

him 22 

himself 211           6 

him  to  you 13 

his 18 

his  death 7 

his  is  the. 96           6 

his  right  hand i? 

hiss 7           i 

history : 7 

hit 43           6 

hither 35           5 

hitherto 172         22 

hold 81          10 

holdlike 81         10 

holier 127         16 

holiest 122         16 

holy 3?          5 

home 23 

homeless 16           2 

homely 11$         15 

homes 39           5 

honor 11 

honorable .' 3 

hood 51           7 

'hoof 150         19 

hook 198         25 

Hoover no 

hope 2 

hoped 264         M 

hopes 75          10 

hope  to  have 115          1° 

hoping  that  you  may  be  able  to 

secure  .." 13 


123 
279 

IQI 

i8j 

72 
137 
193 
ISJ 

112 

275 

121 

94 
223 
94 
94 
94 
94 

217 

94 
94 
1/9 
94 
94 
149 
223 
133 
217 

245 

133 


179 


193 
31 
127 
273 

277 
197 
197 

74 
114 
M5 

74 
191 

78 
197 
125 
245 

4b 
137 
133 

72 

72 

12; 
119 
125 

74 
123 
125 


121 

135 

112 


121 

94 


HAVENS    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


297 


SIGN.  : 

hoping  there  will  be 20 

hose 150         19 

hour 18 

hourly 25           2 

hour  of  (the) 16 

house 314          18 

housed      39  5 

household 9 

houses 17 

how 6           i 

Howe 25           3 

however 

however  there 50           7 

however  they  are 50           7 

how  many 5 

how  you  could 2 

hue 3           i 

Hugg 108 

human 22 

human  character 31           4 

human  countenance 162         18 

humanely 154         20 

human  life 152         19 

human  mind 92         12 

human  race  (the) 161         18 

human  soul 120         15 

humble 98         13 

humbug 155         20 

humor 10 

humored 52           7 

humor  the , 152         14 

hundred  (the  word) , 7 

hundred  (the  numeral) 

hundredth 6*           5 

hundred  thousand 69           5 

hunger 2           i 

hungry 2           I 

hurrah 178          23 

hurt 22           2 

hurting  the 7 

husband 16 

hut 45           6 

Hway ". 

lam 115           9 

I  am  asking  the 3 

I  am  glad 42    -       4 

I  am  inclined 43           4 

I  am  in  receipt  of 19           3 

I  am  in  receipt  of  your  favor  of 

the   nth  instant 8           i 

I  am  in  the 7 

I  am  not 6 

I  am  not  positive 11 

lam  reading  from  a 6 

I  am  very  positive  that n 

I  appoint 7 

I  asked  him ..  104         13 

I  ask  the 17 

I  ask  you 10 

I  before 6 

I  began 151          13 

I  beg  to  say 116         10 

I  beg  to  say  that 172         22 

I  believed 18 

I  believe  so  far  as  I  am  concern- 
ed   19 

I  believe  you 12 

I  bought 5 

Ibuy 7 

lean 191         24 

I  can  assure  the n 

I  cannot 30           4 

I  cannot  account 317         20 

I  cannot  be 80         10 

I  cannot  be  there 68           9 

I  cannot  do 188          24 

I  cannot  do  that 46           6 

icer 40           4 


PAGE.  SIGN.   LINE,  i 

149  I  could  not 5 

123  idea 264  14 

74  idea  (the) 6 

78  idea  of  forming  a 15 

199  identification 7 

114  identify  the 15 

133  I  did 19  3 

181  I  did  not 43  3 

253  idle 47  6 

121  idler 4 

46  I  do in          14 

74  Idonot 44  3 

131  I  do  not  know  that 3 

131  I  do  not  thinkso 13 

211  I  enclose  check 7 

153  lenquire 13 

31  I  esteem 2 

112  if i 

81  if  any  body  else i 

133  Hear 75  10 

86  I  fear  you 195  25 

123  I  fear  you  may 48  6 

133  I  fear  you  must 43  6 

137  I  fear  you  must  be 31  4 

86  I  fear  you  will  be 70  9 

131  I  fear  you  will  have 9;  12 

129  if  1 7 

125  if  I  am  not 17 

81  I  find 171  22 

127  if  it 99  13 

86  ifitbe 8 

98  if  it  is 45  4 

99  if  it  is  not 46  4 

112  if  it  is  the  desire 11 

112  if  it  please  the  court 12 

121  if  possible 19 

121  if  satisfactory 

127  if  such  (and) .' 14 

64  ifsuch  payment 16 

277  ifthere 186       24 

275  if  there  are  any  members 19 

46  if  there  is  no  objection.... 15 

33  if  there  were 35         5 

33  if  we 10 

78  if  we  send  that 12 

185  if  you 44          4 

94  if  you  are  not  willing 

94  if  you  cannot 2 

129  if  your 18 

if  you  will  give  me 12 

121  I  gave 4 

181  ignorance 19 

201  I  had 16 

221  I  had  an 6 

185  I  had  not 3 

211  I  had  such  a 12 

241  I  have 72         5 

127  Ihavea  paper 10 

199  I  have  been 74         5 

185  I  have  been  handed  the 4 

185  I  have  got 7 

86  Ihavehad 13 

94  I  have  it .".  14 

123  I  have  no  doubt 19 

197  I  have  no  doubt  of  it 8           I 

I  have  no  recollection 2 

235  I  have  not  got  down 19 

209  I  have  seen 58 

153  I  have  seen  it 40         5 

153  I  have  seen  that 14         2 

133  I  have  seen  them 91        12 

235  I  have  sent  you 6 

135  I  have  to  be  75 

114  I  have  your  favor 18         3 

133  I  hope 15 

13;  Ike 8           i 

135  I  knew 9 

123  I  know 66          5 

53  1  live 3 


96 
237 
159 

201 
203 
137 

86 
135 
155 


225 

211 

151 
185 
2}7 

74 

241 
137 

121 

125 

137 
131 

127 

131 

153 
237 
135 
133 
145 

94 

94 
239 
179 
225 
Hi 
187 

211 

123 
239 

235 

135 
M7 
239 
94 
155 


i53 
279 
I5i 
189 

86 
i<9 

86 


2V) 

183 

177 
185 

179 
127 

209 

23? 

137 
129 

r3i 

129 
151 
86 


195 

72 

231 


298 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN. 

ill-.-.  ..........................      23 

illegal  ..........................     138 

illiberal  .........................     107 

Illinois  ......................... 

illness  ........................... 

illustration  ..................... 

imaginary  ......................     119 

imagination  ....................     120 

imagine  ........................ 

I  may..  .........................      63 

imbecile  .............  .  ..........      99 

I  mean  ..........................      65 

I  meant  to  say  that  ............. 

imitations  ...................... 

immaterial  .....................  ,    160 

immediate  ...................... 

immediately  ..................... 

immoral  ........................    105 

immorality  .....................      98 

immortal  ........................      94 

immortality  ....................     loo 

I  move  .......................... 

imperial  ........................ 

impervious  ..................... 

important-ce  ................... 

importer  ........................      10 

impose  .........................    114 

imposed  ........................      16 

impossibility  ...................    210 

impossible  ...................... 

imposter  ........................      n 

impression  ..................... 

improbability  ..................    144 

improbable  .....................    144 

improve  ........................ 

improved  ....................... 

improvement  ................... 

improves  ..........  .  ............      61 

impugned  ......................      91 

I  must  ..........................      87 

jn  .............................. 

in  a  ............................. 

in  accordance  ................... 

in  addition  ..................... 

inadequate  ..................... 

in  advance  ...................... 

in  all  ...........................      17 

in  all  cases  .....................     48 

in  all  its  ........................      83 

in  a  month  ..................... 

in  any  .......................... 

in  as  many  as  possible  .........     162 

in  a  thousand  ..................     117 

inaugural  (an)  .................. 

in  business  methods  ............     270 

incase  they  were  not  (and)  ..... 

inch  ............................ 

inclined  —  .  ...................     190 

inclosed  ........................ 

inclosed  you  will  find  a  postal 
card  which  I  have  received 
and  sent  circulars  .......... 

included  ..........  ,  ............. 

including  ....................... 

inconsiderable-y  ................      24 

inconsiderate  ...................    116 

in  consideration  ................      63 

inconvenience  .................. 

incorporated  ................... 

incorporate  that  ................ 

increased  ....................... 

incumbent  ..............  s  ....... 

indebted  ........  e  ...............    187 

indebtedness  ..................... 

independence  ................... 

independently  .................. 

Indiana  ......................... 

Indianapolis  .................... 

indicate  ........................      38 


LINE. 

PAGE. 

J 
9 

31 

'£ 

2 

147 

8 

191 

2 

9 

$ 

9 

86 

7 

81 

5 

72 

13 

137 

5 

72 

5 

219 

13 

i»5 

20 

129 

2 

9! 

2 

?s 

9 

64 

13 

135 

12 

135 

I36 

135 

235 

ii 

197 

9 

153 

i 

74 

2 

131 

Ij 

135 

2 

J3J 

7 

96 

12 

88 

2 

131 

17 

153 

18 

133 

18 

133 

2 

74 

2 

74 

2 

7f 

4 

7» 

8 

94 

ii 

121 

2 

74 
147 

10 

149 

J9 

187 

6 

239 

13 

2 

J86 

4 

94 

ii 

127 

18 

237 

9 

247 

i 

114 

10 

78 

18 

243 

153 
131 
151 


157 
211 
155 
133 
119 
135 
155 
239 
239 
159 
223 
133 
215 
279 
159 
147 
147 
133 


SIGN. 

indicated I2S 

indicates 126 

indicating 

indication 127 

indicted 186 

indispensable 312 

individual 92 

induced 

industrial 

industry 

industry  of  tife  times -. . . .      3 

in  each 65 

in  every 162 

in  evidence 

inexperience 32 

inexperienced 158 

in   fact 

in  favor 

inferior 

influence 

influenced 175 

influential 156 

information 

informed 

infringements 

infringing 

in  further 

infusion 38 

Ing 

inhabitants 269 

in  height 

in  his... 67 

in  his  life  time :. . 

in  his  office 

in  it 147 

injunction 130 

in  life 122 

in  much 67 

in  my 

in  my  cash  book 

in  my  general  charge 

in  my  own  hand  writing 

inn .- 24 

in  not  paying 

in  order  that 12? 

in  order-to 121 

in  order  to  have 

in  other  words 

in  our 88 

in  our  life  time 

in  payment 

in  point  of  fact 

in  posting 

in  preference 

in  question 

inquired  of  the  witness  respect- 
ing the 

in  receipt  of 

in  reference  (to) 124 

in  regard 

in  relation  to 123 

in  reply  (to) 122 

inscribe 

inscribed 

inscribed  in  juxtaposition 268 

inscription 152 

insecure , 30 

in  seeming 161 

in  sending  out 

insertion 

in  service 

in  settlement  of  bill  of 

inside 188 

insist 

in  society 

in  so  many  instances 

in  some  cases 64 

in  some  instances 74 

in  some  way 


LINE.  PAGE. 

ii  64 

ii  64 

9  217 

11  64 
24  133 
17  114 

12  127 

9  155 

ij  24; 

i  24; 

I  127 


119 


157 

235 


20  119 

2;         81 

16        147 


155 
149 


199 
133 
195 

195 

'£ 
64 

127 

94 
151 
217 

22? 
217 

3« 

M7 
94 
94 

193 

*55 

12; 

1:9 
159 
223 
153 

i?7 
177 

185 

M5 
94 

151 
94 


96 

127 


"55 

119 


a 

203 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


299 


SIGN. 

inspected 

installment 

installments 

instances 

instant 

instead  of 

instruct 

instructed t 

instruction 120 

instructions 

instructive 136 

instrumental 159 

instrumentality 210 

instruments 

in  such  action 

insult 160 

insult  upon  insult , . . . .     255 

insure(to) 

insured 

intellectual 171 

intelligence , 

intelligent 170 

intended 

intention 125 

intercourse 

interest 168 

internal-ly 

internal  revenue 10 

international.. 

in  that 2 

in  that  month 

in  the 164 

in  the  discretion  of  the  court..      64 
in  the  experience  (see  inexper- 
ience)       1^7 

in  the  first  place 286 

in  the  house 34 

in  the  impossible 270 

in  the  last  place 290 

in  the  least  place 291 

in  the  list 

in  them 

in  the  meantime 

in  the  month 

in  the  next  place 289 

in  the  popular  acceptation  of 

the  term 8 

in  the  presence 

in  the  present  suit 

in  the  prosecution 

in  (the)  same  cases 56 

in  ( the)  same  words 

in  the  second  case 287 

in  the  third  place 288 

in  the  U    S.  District  Court 4 

in  the  U.'S.  patent  office 8 

in  the  world 256 

in  this 114 

in  this  action 

in  this  case 

in  this  connection 

in  this  country 

in  this  instance 

in  this  respect 

in  this  way 

in  those 

intimate 

intimately 

intimation 124 

into 95 

into  consideration 

into  the 

intoxicating  liquor 

introduce 169 

invariable  (the) 

invention no 

invested 

jnvoice 

in  what  capacity 


66 


LINE.  PAGE.  SIGN. 

14  183       in  what  connection 

18  149        in  what  newspaper 

19  149       in  what  place 

3        151        in  what  way. 

2  149  in  which 

9  151  inwhichcase 

16  88  in  which  you 

19  237  in  which  you  request  us 

15  129  in  your 

20  237       in  your  direct  examination 

in  your  hands 

Iowa  

I  paid  him  

I  received  a  letter 

irksomeness 188 

irreconcilable 31 

irregular 109 

irregularity 92 

irregularly 91 

is 

Isaac 139 

is  above 

is  an 84 

I  saw 103 

I  saw  him 

i  saw  it 

I  say 

I  say  this 

is  each 58 

I  send  you 

i-3  far 267 

is  for  the 

is  from 162 

is  generally 

Ish  . 


LINE. 

13 

7 


114 
114 

211 
241 

ri4 
114 
149 
179 
114 
245 
114 

211 
64 

177 
"4 
81 

121 
249 
129 

2O5 

86 
127 

114 
114 


15 
15 

3 
i 

9 
15 


I  shall 18 

I  shall  be  pleased  to  form  the. . 

96  Ishallhave 188 

114  I  shall  not u 

114  I  shall  not  be 192 

201  I  shall  not  have 44 

145  I  shall  not  have  you 4 

245  I  shall  not  know 27 

197  is  he 90 

114  is  his 69 

I  simply  have  to  say  that 

123  is  in 171 

191  is  in  a  true 

221  is  indispensable 312 

197  is  in  there 34 

94  is  it 

217  is  it  as 78 

114  is  it  not ; . . 

114  island 

119  Islandof  Cuba 102 

125  is  nearly 163 

114  is  next 

123  is  not 99 

221  is  not  in  evidence 

151  is  not  in  the 311 

243  is  not  necessary  in  general 

247  is  now 

209  isolated 

237  I  sold 

199  I  speak 271 

183  is  said 146 

197  is  seen 101 

195  is  sent 100 

64  issue 

94  is  that 102 

159  is  the 87 

159  is  their  own 26 

273  is  there 74 

114  is  this 

157  is  this  the  note 

78  is  to  be 33 

2 1^  I  supposed 

137  jt  

219  it  be  aporoved 


IS 

8 

17 

4 

24 
4 
9 

12 
12 

IS 


13 

13 


PAGE. 

201 
177 
205 
219 

94 
149 
M7 
157 
145 
209 
155 
M7 
215 
155 
125 
127 

64 
123 
123 

74 
137 
147 

78 
127 
195 
197 
275 
275 
131 
149 

96 
149 

86 
223 

33 
133 
151 
123 
137 
125 
131 
135 
123 

78 

78 
225 

121 

159 
114 
121 

74 
78 

179 
245 

112 

86 


185 
114 
259 
237 
159 

181 
96 

1 

7* 

7§ 

78 

133 
78 
199 

207 
78 

193 
74 

235 


300 


HAVENS    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN. 

it  can  be  amended 

it  can  be  done 

it  can  be  worked 

it  can  only 104 

it  could  have  been 84 

item 117 

items : 

Ith 

It  had  (would) 141 

it  had  (would)  not 145 

it  has  been 77 

I  think  58 

I  think  he  does 

I  think  not 51 

I  think  not  in 74 

I  think  not  in  any 80 

I  think  so 

Ithinkthat 76 

I  think  they 

I  think  we 156 

I  think  we  would 76 

I  think  you 112 

I  think  you  are 70 

I  think  you  may 63 

I  think  you  must 4 

I  think  you  must  have 76 

I  think  you  will 

it  is 163 

it  is  a-n 

it  is  carried 

it  is  claimed 

it  is  entirely 19 

it  is  entirely  your  own 7 

it  is  fDr  you  (and) 

it  is  moved  and 

it  is  necessary 

it  is  not  material 

it  is  not  necessary 

it  is  no  use 

it  is  possible 

it  is  the 123 

it  is  very  necessary 10 

it  is  worse  than  ., 

it  may  as  well ?i 

it  may  be 104 

it  may  require 88 

it  might  have 

it  might  have  been 

it  not  be 

I  told  you  so 73 

it  ought 140 

it  ought  not , 144 

it  ought  to  be 

it  ought  to  have 142 

its 2 

it  seemed 

it  seems  to  have 

it  seems  to  me  that 

itself 213 

its  general 

it  will 6 

it  will  have 35 

it  will  have  had .' . . .      36 

it  will  probably 

it  would  be 

it  would  (had) 141 

it  would  (had)  not 14; 

it  would  have 143 

I  understand  so 

I  understand  that 

I  want  a  case 

I  was 

Iwill QI 

I  will  be i^ 

I  will  do 200 

Iwillhave i6S 

Iwill  let 

I  will  not 48 

I  will  not  have 80 


LINE.  PAGE.  SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

16  239  I  will  not  have  you 64          8       115 

ii  243  I  will  not  have  you  make 88         n        129 

19  159  I  will  read  it 18 

25  131  I  will  send  you 8       151 

11  125  I  will  try 168         21 

10  64  I  would 12 

3  225  I  write 261         12 

i  96  1  (the  initial) 

i  06  Jackson i 

5  86  Jacksonville 19 

4  78  jail 20           2 

12  78  jailer 31  3 

4  86  James 9 

10  121  January i 

10  127  jay 8          2 

13  199  jealous 62  8 

10  125  Jehovah 3 

i  209  Jerusalem 

20  129  J-isus 14 

10  119  Jesus  Christ 19          2 

14  133  Jew 7  i 

9  135  Jewish  church 64 

8  133  jobbers 7 

i  129  jobbing 6 

10  123  John i 

4  2^5  Johnson 60           6 

18  86  jointed 39  4 

20  181  joint  stock  company 55           7 

3  239  jokes 3 

4  225  jollity  (the) 6 

3  127  journal 114         17 

1  131  journey 86         n 

6  223  joy 4  i 

8  235  joyful 182         23 

3  225  joys 179         23 

14  201  judge 67           9 

8  185  judgment 183         23 

19  157  judiciary 120         15 

9  147  July 

16  125  jumper 99 

2  129  junction 22  3 

20  H7  June 10  i 

.  5  94  Junes  22           2 

13  131  junior 

11  119  jurisdiction 

13  211  jurist iQ 

11  221  jury 175         22 

10  157 

7  72  just  a 56  A 

i  96  just  as 

i  96  justice 102         13 

10  159  justification 4 

i  96  justification  by  faith 212           7 

i  78  justify 100           9 

7  199  just  the  same 19 

17  255  jute 139         18 

7  243  juvenile 4 

6  114  juxtaposition 7 

9  197  K - 

1  86  K  (the  initial) 

5  121  Kansas H 

5  121  Katie  (Katy) 32 

19  159  keep 4 

2  159  keepers 318         20 

i  96  keep  them 19 

i  96  Kentucky i? 

i  96  kept  them i.> 

6  201  key 10  i 

20  207  kill 51 

7  i;-{  kin 12 

8  i§7  kind '. 104          13 

12  137  kindly 152         14 

20  135  kindness 104         13 

25  129  king 79 

21  133  kingdom 

"»  201  kingdom  of  Christ 241           Q 

3  8b  kingdom  of  heaven — 240  v 

10  135  kitchen 98         13 


127 


33 

105 

187 

151 

53 

53 

M9 

145 

27 

127 

Si 


27 
121 

239 
239 

175 
60 
119 
127 
245 

'27 


129 
123 

135 

I-I 

64 


6c 


245 


96 
60 

127 

•- 

105 
M7 

112 

1-7 

114 

i-7 
147 


53 

279 

to 
137 

72 
74 

114 

114 
133 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


301 


SIGN.   LINE.   PAGE. 

kitten 14       279 

knee 7.1         46 

knelt 59          8       121 

knew 3           i          27 

knife 46           4         60 

know 8           i          46 

know  a 53          4 

knowest 58          5 

knowingly 201           5 

know  it ii 

knowledge 19 

known 45           4 

know  you  are  (I) 2 

Kurr 16           3 

L  (the  initial) 

labor 82           8 

labored 38           5 

laces 45          6 

lad 90         12 

ladder 95         12 

ladies 143         18 

jads 106         14 

Tidy 139         18 

lamp 70           6 

land 19 

landscape 64           8 

lane 9 

language 5 

languisn 24           3 

large 16 

larger 12           i 

largest 13           i 

lashed 86         n 

lass no         14 

lasses 35           5 

last 90          6 

late 6           i 

lately 

later 19 

latitudes 120 

latter 79 

latterly 

laughed 119 

laughter 

lavish 

law 

Lawrence 

laws... 

lawyers 

lay 

lazy 

lead 

leads 

leaper 175 

learn 19 

learned 10           2 

leaves 19 

leave  that - 18 

leaving 20 

lecture  (a) i 

lectures 17 

ledger:    , 20 

leers 83           8 

left 13 

legacy 60 

legal 160         20 

legislation 7 

legislator 83         u 

legislature 84         n 

leisure 100         13 

lenient 170         22 

less 80          9 

less  and  less '. 9 

lesson '. 106          9 

less  than 6 

let  me 6 

let  me  say  to  you 20 

let-as 79           5 


14 
99 

H 

155 


72 
64 
114 


60 


33 

105 

53 


123 
137 
127 

121 
119 

72 
245 
137 
149 

74 
119 

74 
78 
78 
119 


64 
159 
133 
137 
123 
153 
137 
237 
279 

46 
145 
129 
245 

27 

38 

' 


123 

'55 
185 
209 
273 
259 
151 

53 
213 
119 
119 
249 
133 
J33 
119 
137 

72 

249 

60 
149 
153 
277 

86 


SIGN. 

let  us  have . . 

Lewis 

liable 

libation 82 

liberal 106 

liberal    rebate 

liberty 

lie 22 

lies 

lieu, 
life. 


LINE.  PAGE. 
6  157 
12  145 


-r- 


lifter 119 

lighted 70 

like 81 

like  a  receipt 

likely 113 

likes 32 

like  this 

liking 115 

lily 20 

limited 108 

Lincoln 

line 176 

linen 

linseed  oil 

lip 

liquidation 40 

liquor  (and) 

list 78 

listen 28 

listened 

literal  sense  of  prophesy 28 

literary 42 

literature 43 

little 118 

little  by  little 254 

load 

loaded 

loafer 24 

loan 39 

loans 40 

locate 

located 

location  (the) 

lock  box 

locker 128 

London 

loneliness 

long 

look  at 

looked 

looked  upon 

looking  up 

Lord 7 

Lord  Jesus  Christ 167 


127 
64 

239 
81 

J57 
125 
277 

121 
72 

72 

223 

64 


181 
131 
153 
241 
19? 
133 
201 

60 
121 
257 
129 
127 
127 

78 
114 
i53 
185 
125 

60 

60 
149 
179 
179 
153 
123 
151 
279 

74 
185 
203 
203 
157 


lore 44  4  53 

lost 91  6  86 

lot 155  20  135 

lots .   9  153 

Louis 20  2  46 

Louisa 14  2  127 

Louisiana 18  147 

Louisville 15  M7 

love 41  4  60 

loved 57  4  64 

lover 59  8  133 

love  their 171  22  127 

lovingly 66  9  129 

low 13  2  46 

lower 13  153 

lower  extremities ; 56  7  131 

lower  prices i=j3 

lowest 92  6  86 

loya!  (and) 18  275 

lucky 149  13  86 

lumber 101  8  64 

lustrou.-s 18  3  121 

lusty 139  :»  133 

lying 3  197 


302 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN.  LINE.  PACK. 

M 33 

M  (the  initial) 105 

nVachine 150         iq  135 

machinery 152         19  135 

machinist 151          ig  135 

Mack 12           2  38 

madder 130         17  119 

made 116          10  78 

made  the 18  155 

madeyou 116         10  78 

magazine 30           4  129 

magnanimous 177           3  114 

magnanimously 151          19  119 

magnesia 174           2  114 

magnificence 176           3  114 

magnificent 28           4  131 

magnify 175           2  114 

magnitude 128         16  135 

maiden so           4  64 

mail 43          3  7» 

Maine 5  149 

mainly 92          8  94 

maintained 13  241 

maintain  the  (and) 15  241 

make 22  74 

make  a 10  15.3 

make  a  regular 12  235 

make  it 134           i  96 

makes 6  149 

makes  the 18  749 

makes  you 6  217 

make  the 113          9  78 

making  a 4  r$7 

malady 3  193 

Malcolm i  187 

malice 15  273 

man 42          4  60 

manager • 16  151 

Manhattan 10  245 

mankind 27           4  127 

manner 12  81 

mannered 168         21  119 

man's 43           4  60 

manufacture 7  88 

manufacturer 199           6  96 

manufacturers 201           6  96 

manufactures 200           6  96 

manufacturing 15  151 

many 149         13  86 

many  thanks us         n  78 

March ii  145 

margin 15  241 

Maria 106  112 

Marion 8  157 

Mark 13  149 

marked 97           7  86 

market  98           7  86 

Marr 99  112 

Marshall ' i  177 

Martin 14  145 

Maryland 17  149 

Massachusetts 9  149 

masses 63          8  121 

master 14  78 

match 9  247 

mates 30          2  64 

matter 14  179 

matters 12  157 

mattress 45          3  64 

matures no         u  78 

maturity 2  155 

maximum n  88 

maxims  of  the  age 35           5  119 

May 27           4  27 

maybe 2           i  86 

maybenot 146         19  127 

maybeshown 17  223 

may  be  so 7  209 

may  it  please  the  court 51          7  135 


SIGN. 

may  it  please  your  honor 3 

may  not 53 

maynotbe 176 

may  recommend 

May's 88 

Maysville 

may  there 120 

maze 34 

mazy 35 

me 261 


mean 65 

meaning 

means 147 

mean  to  say 

meanwhile 93 

me  a  reason 

measure  

measured 128 

measure  their 129 

meet 199 

meeting 12 

meetings 

meet  you 

melancholy 191 

Melbourne 

member 

member  of  the  press 248 

membership 92 

membership  committee  (the).. 

Members  of  Congress 2=0 

Members  of  Parliament 2*1 

members  of  the  legislature 249 

memoranda 

memorandum 

memory 

Memphis 

mend 187 

mental 

mental  ability 

mental  (the) 

mercanti  le  company 

merchandise 

merchant 

merchants 

mercy 150 

mere 267 

merely 106 

merged 

merry 123 

mesdames 

Messrs 97 

met 

metals 

method 

methods 270 

metre 83 

Michael 146 

Michigan 

microcosm 140 

microscope 85 

midget 79 

midnight 47 

might ii 

mighty 12 

migrate i;^ 

mill 46 

million  (numeral) 

mills 

mind 86 

mine 

miner 102 

minimum 

Minnesota 

minor 102 

minute 96 

minutes  (the) 

misapprehension 

miscellaneous  business 


96 

"2 
J^: 

211 
91 


"3 
127 

195 
209 

135 
155 

81 
114 

121 

23: 
114 
114 


131 
279 
193 

247 

145 
221 
201 


159 
135 


112 
98 
153 


04 
129 
149 
119 

72 

72 

64 
64 

64 
129 

53 


159 


149 
12; 
119 

235 

225 

2T.7 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


303 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

misconstrue 124  112 

misdemeanor 164         21  133 

misfortune , 23            3  135 

misrepresent 217           8  96 

misrepresentation 218           8  96 

misrepresented 210           8  96 

misrule 68           9  125 

miss 45           6  38 

misses 99  112 

mjssionary 19  251 

missions 44           4  60 

Mississippi i  mi 

Missouri 15  151 

mist 81           7  60 

mistake 4  157 

mistaken 17  237 

mistress 182         23  133 

mistrust go         12  127 

misty 44           6  137 

misunderstanding 20  149 

mitred , 14           2  121 

mixed 186           5  96 

mocker 182         23  119 

modify  our  laws 2  251 

moment  (the) 10  197 

momentary 180         23  127 

momentum 179         23  127 

Monday i  145 

money 51           7  119 

Montgomery  City 15  i;i 

month 7  151 

monthly i  235 

months i  153 

Montpelier TI  159 

Montreal 8  153 

moon 27           4  129 

moral 104           9  64 

morbid 15  279 

more 45           5  53 

more  or  less 262         n  114 

moreover 4  81 

more  respected 20  239 

more  than 21           2  86 

morgue 3  197 

morning 4  155 

morrow 117          10  94 

mortality 99          13  135 

mortgage 186         24  137 

mortuary 78         10  119 

most 9  151 

mother 84           6  64 

motion 19           3  135 

motionless  (and) 82         10  72 

mounds 176         22  119 

mount 14  157 

mounts 123         16  121 

mourners 16  279 

mourns 171         22  123 

moustache 14  203 

mouth 47           6  46 

move T 76           7  72 

moved 9  205 

movement 13  98 

Mr 9  81 

Mr.  Chairman 12  273 

Mr.  President 10  235 

Mr.  President  and  gentlemen..  i  243 

Mrs 100  112 

Mr.  Secretary 9  243 

Mt.   Holly 14  i?7 

much 13  74 

much  are 94          12  "9 

much  will 8           i  86 

mud 10           i  64 

muddy 64          8  133 

mule 87          ii  133 

multiform 38           5  135 

multiple-y 39  J35 

multiplicity 40           5  135 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

multiplied 84  u  72 

murder ' 103  7  86 

murdered 82  n  137 

muscles  (the) 76  7  72 


music 171         22 

musings 200           5 

mustbe 315          i§ 

must  have  occured i 

must  say  that  (and) 19 

my 27          4 

my  dear  friends 3 

my  letter 18 

my  own 18           2 

my  present  position 6 

myself 212           6 

my  services 13 

mysteries 183         23 

mysterious 184         23 

myth 46           6 

N 

N  (the  initial) 

nail 47           5 

name  (the) 66           5 

named 49           4 

names  (the) 3 

naptha jo 

nation 47           5 

national  association 5 

native 48           5 

natural  (the) 14 

nature-  d 4 

naval 155         20 

navy n 

nay 2           i 

near 48           5 

nearly 17 

nebula 4          i 

necessarily 159          2 

necessary 17 

necessities 87         13 

necessity 51           7 

neck 19 

need 9           i 

needed 174         22 

needless..- 34           5 

need  not  be 1^7         16 

needs 85         12 

needs  them 15 

neglect 188         24 

negligence 115          15 

neighborhood 22           3 

nephew  (and) 15 

never , 3 

never  received  any 9 

never  shall 200         25 

nevertheless 104           9 

new---, 35           5 

Newark 14 

New  Haven 12 

New  Jersey _  14 

New  Jerusalem  98         13 

New  Orleans is 

New  Sharon 12 

New  York 3 

next 185 

nibble 82         11 

nicest 59           5 

nigh i           i 

night 8            i 

nine 

nine  hundred 

nine  hundred  and  eight 57           4 

nine  hundred  and  eighteen 59 

nine  hundred  and  eighty 58 

nine  hundred  and  nineteen 60 


-37 


153 
145 
27 
277 


189- 

Ila* 

187 

133 
133 
40 
33 

105 

53 

72- 

64 

237 


157 
137 


64 

135 

137 
86 

72 

157 

121 
129 
119 

147 
74 
209 
131 
94 
3' 
179 
M5 
157 
119- 
147 
145 
'59 
96 


27 
64 
99 
99 
112 

112 
112 
112 


304 


HAVENS    PRAC1ICA       PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN.   LINE.  PAGE. 

nine  million 99 

nineteen 99 

nineteenth 61           5  in 

nineteen  thousand 62           5  112 

nine  thousand 99 

ninetieth 64           5  '112 

ninety , 99 

ninny in          14  121 

ninth 56          4  112 

no 80          9  72 

Noah 22          3  46 

nobly 180          3  111 

nobody 267         16  96 

nodded 13  193 

no  do.ubt 13  197 

noisiest 134         17  '19 

no  longer i  249 

nominations 19  237 

no  more  money 19  181 

nondescript 143         18  127 

none 78          8  72 

no  one 23          2  86 

no  other 167         21  125 

no  other  corroboration 15  217 

no  other  evidence 12  223 

nor ii  81 

no  reason 18  213 

no  reason  for 4  189 

nor  is  it  the  place 3  249 

normal 183         23  123 

nor  since 17  177 

north 99         13  127 

North  Carolina 10  151 

northeast 95          12  127 

northern 94         12  127 

northwest .-.  96         12  127 

noses 8           i  no 

no  sir 16  88 

not 3  98 

notary 138         18  129 

not  be  known 19  159 

not  be  written 14  207 

note ii  147 

note  contents  (and) 14  157 

noted in         14  133 

not  entirely 9  193 

notes 29          2  64 

notethe 13  149 

not  generally 7  219 

not  getting 14  149 

nothing 72           9  127 

nothing no         14  123 

notice n  203 

noticeable 309         16  114 

noticed 14  107 

noticed  his  (I) 14  197 

notify  you  (and) 6  211 

notion 54           7  125 

notonly 7  15, 

not  since  then 7  219 

not  that ..  12  2ii 

not  that  you 13  211 

not  to  be 2:2         10  114 

not  to  call 235          8  114 

not  to  come v. 156         20  125 

not  to  do '. 172         22  121 

not  to  have , 154         20  131 

not  to  have  been 253         10  114 

notwithstanding 105           9  94 

November 14  1^5 

now 88          8  94 

now  and  then 79         10  131 

noway 47          6  129 

nowhere 88         n  127 

number 9  81 

numbered 14           2  133 

numbers  of  them  15          2  133 


numerous. 

O 

oak 

Oakland.. 


SIGN,  LINE.  FACE. 

3       i5i 
33 

16          2         31 
7       US 


oath 15           2  31 

oaths 9  223 

obedience 7  275 

object 3  74 

objected 20  177 

objection 37           3  78 

objectionable ; oo  123 

objective 38          3  7* 

objector 36           3  7^ 

objects 35          3  78 

oblige 261         12  96 

obtain 2  157 

obtained n  237 

occasion 86         12  72 

occasioned 200         25  125 

occasions 72          6  72 

occupation i7  247 

occupy 18  249 

occur 19          3  125 

occurred 190         24  H9 

occurrence  (the) 14  i57 

ocean 10  245 

o'clock 5  197 

October 3  i55 

of 65 

of  a i           i 

of  all n           i  86 

of  an 2           i  72 

of  a  view 4  205 

of  brackets 5  147 

of  course 47          4  94 

off i  74 

off  and  on 264         ii  114 

offer 35           5  123 

offered  (I) 3  215 

offered  you 13  i55 

offering 162         21  i33 

offer  this 2  215 

office 50          4  78 

officer 13  177 

of  his 115         10  73 

of  it 137           i  96 

of  its (           i  129 

of  its  having  been 8  153 

ofourline i  245 

of  our  own 32           2 

of  ours 31           2  86 

of  ourselves 218          7  114 

of  our  treasurer 9  a3j 

'often 49           4  78 

of  that 12  ?8 

of  that  note '. 11  211 

of  the 3           i  72 

of  the  fourth  instant 4  147 

of  their 138           i  96 

of  their  matters 13  223 

of  their  own 139          i  96 

of  them 59          4  7s 

ofthis 8  isi 

of  this  city 8  177 

ofthisclub 3  237 

of  this  county 6  i77 

of  those 17  I9i 

of  unpaid 2  u5 

of  what 9  177 

Ohio 8  251 

Oi 33 

oil 9           2  31 

Oil  City 18  1^3 

old 86         13  72 

oldest 17  253 

on 

on  a 39          3  72 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


305 


SIGN.   LINE.   PAGE. 

on  account 10  98 

on  account  of  the  fact 257         n  114 

on  all 13           i  86 

on  behalf 6  191 

once 89          8  94 

on  deposit 8  159 

one  (the word) 86         13  72 

one(the  figure) 99 

one  day 3  209 

one  fourth  (see  one  quarter) 84  112 

onehalf 82  112 

oneitherhand 10  98 

one  month 14  209 

one  or  theother 194         25  119 

onequarter 83  112 

one's 86         13  72 

one's  own 85          12  72 

on  his 16  179 

on  his  desk 8  221 

only 76           7  72 

only  receive  that 10  215 

only  that  he 18  213 

on  my   7  183 

on  my  election 19  243 

on  our 29           2  86 

onourbank ,               t,  159 

onthat ,...  8  183 

on  that  day 6  211 

on  that  journey 77           8  72 

on  that  note 18  209 

on  the 40           3  72 

on  the  back  of 14  207 

on  the  contrary 261          n  114 

on  the  day I  209 

onthem 15  145 

on  the  night 15  170 

on  the  one  hand 6  90 

on  the  other  hand n  98 

on  the  page  of  your  ledger n  157 

on  the  part  of  the 8  255 

on  this  case 12  179 

on  this  occasion 17  219 

on  time 15  149 

onto 94           8  94 

onward 18  •  245 

on  what  line 7  201 

on  which n  157 

on  your  invoice 5  149 

Oo 33 

open 2           i  123 

opened 112         14  125 

operated 13  245 

operation 115         15  127 

opinion 23  81 

opinions 156         15  86 

opportunities 315         18  114 

opportunity 10  98 

oppose 15           2  127 

opposed 13  241 

opposing 316         19  114 

opposite 84         ii  72 

opposition 16           2  127 

oppression 116         15  127 

option 40           5  127 

or 6; 

or  a 154         20  137 

or  an 13           i  72 

oration 58           8  133 

orations 17  259 

orator i  273 

oratory 17  259 

order 74           6  64 

order  any 196         25  133 

ordered 5  1 45 

ordering 4  M7 

orderof 14  219 

orders 17  145 

Oregon IQ  151 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

organ 12         81 

organic 139  u         86 

organism 140  n          86 

organization 141  n         86 

organizations 15       245 

organize 138  n         86 

organized 136  17       133 

organs 137  n         86 

orhe ii  i         72 

or  1 12  i         72 

orif 66  4         86 

origin 152  19       125 

original  motion 13       239 

ornamental 12  2        131 

or  not 40  3 

or  the 14  i 

other 14 

others 20 

otherwise 12 

ought 

ought  a 27  2 

ought  an 20  2 

ought  1 28  2 

oughtthe 30  2 

ought  to  be i 

ought  to  have  been 175  22 


72 
74 
147 
201 
65 
72 
72 
72 

72 

255 
119 

74 
147 
191 


ou 

ou   attention 17 

ou    names 14 

ou    next 19  237 

ou   own 19           2  86 

ours 24           2  78 

out '....  7  74 

outcome 4  249 

outfits 6  207 

outline  (and) , 9  196 

outlook 12  237 

out  of 65           4  86 

out  of  the 14  183 

outside 46           3  78 

outside  of 19  149 

outsider 3  255 

outsiders 20  253 

out  the 12  159 

out  there 10  179 

outward 45           3  78 

outwit 47           4  78 

over 2  8 1 

overcame 150          19  129 

overcome 133         10  86 

over  it 166         21  123 

overlooked 13  J57 

overruled 20  177 

over  their 131         10  86 

overthrow 132         10  86 

Ow 33 

owe 35           5  3i 

owed ii  207 

owed  him 20  213 

Owen 23           3  40 

owes 19  207 

owing 202           5  IJ4 

owl 17           3  31 

own  and 13  J59 

owned 147         19  123 

owner 92         12  129 

owners .  10  155 

owns 68           9  127 

oyster 175         22  133 

P 33 

P  (the  initial) _. 105 

paces .". 43           6  38 

pack 123          16  133 

package  (the) 14  *45 

packages 9  I55 

packed(I) 16  219 

packing 12  i;7 

page 268         17  96 


HAVENS    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

15  181 
18  149 
8  145 

I     211 

133 


paid 

paid  him 

paid  it 

paid  you  money 

Pains 55           7 

paint i 

palm 180         23 

paper 144         fs 

paper  you  are  reading  from 7 

paragraph 128         16 

parallel 96         12 

paralyse 14          2 

paralysis 2 

paralytic 112         14 

parapet 26           4 

paraphrase 196         25 

parents  (the) 10 

Parliament 87         n 

parliamentarian 88         11 

parliamentary 86         n 

part 18 

partial 190         24 

partially 131         17 

particular 9 

particular  branch  of 2 

particularly o 

particular  reason 10 

partnership 144         18 

part  of ii 

part  of  the 266         15 

party I 

pass 315         19 

passed 6 

passion 187         24 

pastoral 74         10 

patent i 

patents 1 1 

Paternoster 6 

patience  (and) 15 

paused 130         17 

paving 17 

Pay... 5           i 

payable 19 

payee 18          2 

paying  ( we  are) 9 

payment 13 

payments 19 

pay  you  the i 

peaches 53           7 

Peck  92 

peculiar 

peculiar  case 221           8 

peculiarity 223           9 

peculiarly 222           9 

pecuniary  (the) 6 

Peel 15           2 

peeled 54          7 

peer 18 

penalty n 

Pennsylvania 162           3 

Pennsylvania  Railroad 163           3 

people i 

peopled 26          4 

per 7 

per  annum 17 

perceive 114         15 

per  cent 4 

percentage 14 

per  cent  commission 10 

per  cent  discount , 19 

per  cent  per  annum 20 

per  cent  premium 8 

perfect 102         13 

perfected 103         13 

perfection 104         13 

perfectly y 


SIGN. 

perform 

perhaps 90 

peril 183 

period  (a) 

periodic 

perish 

permanent 131 

permit  me  to  call  your  attention 

permitted •. 

per  month 

peroration 60 

perseverance 

Persia 142 

person 

personally 

persons 38 

persuade 

Philadelphia 

philanthropic 100 

philanthropist 159 

philanthropy 

philosophy 184 

phonographer 192 

phonographic 126 

phonography 

phrase 134 

phrased 

phrasing 

physician 16 

physiological 103 

physiology 160 

picked  up 

pickle 170 

pictures 269 

pie 4 

piece 

Pierce 96 

;lead... 


LINE. 

6 

12 

23 

I 

8 
6 

17 


P'gl 
Pike 


piled 31 

pillar 27 

Pine 26 

Pittsburg 

pity 176 

placed 

placing  the  manufacture 

plaid 

plainly 

plaintiff 

plaintiff  (the) 

plaintiffs 120 

plaintiff's  machine 7  I 

plan 118         ii 

planetary 64 

planned 62 

plans i§i          19 

plant 62 

planter 63 

plead 7i  9 

pleader 94         12 

pleasantly  (and) n 

please 4  I 

please  advise  us 

please  have 

please  insert 7 

please  itemize 

please  let  me 

please  notify  us if< 

please  oblige  us 1 5 

please  say 3 

please  send  the  statement 

please  take 17 

pleasure 

pledge 

plenary 7° 

plentitude 234 

pYied i°4         i3 

plow 44  6 

pluck 95         13 


133 
127 


2/9 
127 

235 
277 
187 

121 

245 


213 
129 
2/3 
15' 

121 

I23 
81 

123 
129 
123 
81 
137 
225 
225 
135 
13S 

121 
145 
127 

96 

27 

151 

112 

i=3 

112 

135 

52 

46 

187 

129 
237 
239 

153 


179 


131 

131 
129 
125 
247 

I2i 

tSS 

149 
151 
153 

M5 
MS 
145 
239 
145 

'55 

81 
277 

121 

114 
135 
129 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


307 


plump... 
pointing. 

points  — 

policy 

lish. 


SIGN. 

.     116 


LINE. 

15 


146 


PAGE. 

129 
191 
255 
179 
123 
249 
121 
125 
155 


poli 
political 

polled -. 162 

poor 159 

poorly 

populace 48 

popular  188          5  96 

population 80         10  129 

populous 48           6  129 

portion 182         23  123 

portrait 61           5  64 

positions 122         16  133 

positive 183          5  96 

positively 17  213 

positively  refused  (he) 4  215 

possess 198.       25  127 

possessed 199         25  127 

possesses 200         25  127 

possession 55          5  60 

possessive 100          13  131 

possessor 99         13  131 

possibility 9  223 

possible 182           5  96 

possibly.... 20  207 

post ' 62           6  60 

postage 75           7  94 

postal 76           7  94 

postal  card 77           7  94 

poster, 88           8  60 

posterior 200         25  123 

posterity ,' 83         n  72 

postmaster 5  155 

postmortem 152         19  131 

post  mortem  examination i  203 

postoffice 18  147 

postpone 74           7  94 

posy 76         10  135 

pot 10  187 

potion 29           3  60 

potive 28           3  60 

Potomac 10  245 

pots 183         23  131 

pounces 82         n  131 

pounds 6  149 

poured 82          10  72 

poverty. 13  81 

power 2  253 

powerful 192           4  114 

power  of  the  court 66           9  125 

practicable 10  237 

practical 17  159 

practically 84         n  129 

practice •   82         n  129 

practiced 83         n  129 

praised 63           6  60 

prances 52           5  60 

prancing 86         n  119 

pray 8  277 

prayer 8  2/7 

precaution 8  155 

precedent 55           7  123 

precisely ....  46           6  135 

predecessor 3  245 

preeminent 132         17  127 

prefixed '. 131          17  125 

prejudice 147         19  133 

prejudices 157         16  86 

preliminary 80         10  121 

preliminary  request 12  179 

preparation-. 0,6         12  123 

prepare 100         13  123 

prepared i[  155 

prepayment 11  151 

present 2  151 

present  company 13  159 


S1GN. 

present  nominations  ............ 

presents  ........................      86 

presents  the  best  ...............      86 

present  suit  (the)  .............. 

present  the  resolution  .......... 

preside  ......................... 

presidency  (the)  .............  .  .. 

President  .......................      56 

president's  message  ............      44 

presiding  judge  ................ 

press  (the)  ...........  ...........    239 

presume  that  ................... 

presuming  it  (and)  ............. 

presuming  that  ................ 

presumption  (the)  ............. 

pretentions  .....................      51 

pretty  .......................... 

prevailing  ...................... 

prevented  an  ................... 

previous  (any)  .................. 

previously  ...................... 

Price  ...........................      97 

prices  ........................... 

pride  ........................... 

priest  ...........................     114 

principal  ........................ 

principally  ...................... 

principle  ........................ 

principles  .......................     157 

print  ............................ 

printed  ......................... 

printing  ..........  .  ............. 

prior  ............................ 

prison  ..........................    ro2 

private  .......................... 

privilege  ........................ 

probable  ........................     187 

probably  ........................     187 

probate  (the)  ................... 

problems  ........................ 

process  ..........................     66 

procession  ......................     116 

produced  ....................... 

product  ......................... 

professionally  ................... 

profit  ............................ 

profitable  ....................... 

profitably  .......................      44 

progress  ........................ 

prominent  ......................     130 

promise  ......................... 

promised  ........................ 

promises  ....................... 

promissory  ...................... 

prompt  ......................... 

promptly  ........................ 

promulgation  ...................    120 

proof  ............................    174 

proper  ..........................      99 

properly  ........................      98 

property  ........................      44 

proponent  (for  the)  ............. 

proportion  ......................      95 

propounded  ..................... 

prosecutor  ...................... 

prosper  ........................ 

prosperous  ..................... 

protected  (are  fully)  ............ 

protection  ....................... 

protest  ......................... 

protested  ........................ 

prove  ...........................    *74 

proved  a  ........................ 

provided  ........................ 

providence  ...................... 

prc'i  dential  .................... 

providing  ....................... 

provision  (a)  ................... 

Prussia....,  ....................      48 


LINE.  PAGE. 
2  239 
12  72 

12  72 

7   177 
4   241 

20  '243 

19  243 

7  123 

6  119 

i  195 

9  114 

I4S 
157 
223 
125 
203 
241 

193 
213 

112 

145 
279 

'8 

81 
81 
86 
177 
157 
177 
191 
129 
239 
277 


i') 
3 
i/ 

13 

4 

2 
24 

24 
I 

17 

9 


191 
245 
131 
123 
251 
241 
191 
255 
239 

121 

245 
127 
209 
279 
209 
213 
149 
157 

121 
133 
123 
123 
133 
191 
123 
191 
IS? 
245 
245 

155 
155 

207 

215 

X33 


81 
225 

255 

12", 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE 

pry, 15  2  53 

psalm in  14  IIQ 

public 189  5  96 

publication 191  5  96 

publish 189  5  96 

publisher 190  5  96 

publishing u  177 

puff 5  i  60 

puff-s 17  2  60 

putty   ii  I  60 

pullet 46  4  64 

pulmonary 100  13  129 

pulse 5  !57 

punctual 2  277 

punctuation 20  225 

punish 15  81 

punished 38  5  127 

punishment 15  81 

punster 89  8  60 

punsters 28  4  133 

purchase 10  149 

purchases 14  isi 

pure 194  25  135 

purity 74  10  123 

purpose 194  2;  123 

pursuit 16  245 

push 16  159 

pushing 13  255 

pussy 23  3  119 

put 57  6  94 

putative 58  8  119 

putting 19  195 

putty 162  21  135 

put  you 57  6  94 

pyramid 150  19  127 

Q  (the  initial) , 105 

quadrant 26  2  94 

quaff 119  15  129 

quaint 19  2  94 

quake ; 23  2  94 

qualify 27  3  94 

quality 28  3  94 

quantities 3  151 

quantity 29  3  94 

quarrel 160  20  135 

quart 20  2  94 

quarter 83  112 

quarto 22  2  94 

quartz 21  2  94 

queer 17  2  94 

quell 43  6  133 

query is  2  94 

quest  jon 9  81 

questionable 14  247 

questions 17  179 

question  (the) IQ  199 

quick 24  2  94 

quicken 25  2  94 

quiet 31  3  94 

quinine 3°  3  94 

quit-e  4  98 

quitea 313  18  114 

quota 33  3  94 

quotations  7  151 

quote 32  3  94 

quote  you 9  153 

R 33 

R  (theinitial) 105 

race 25  4  38 

races 44  6  38 

raciest 126  16  133 

racings 199  5  iu 

racy , 26  4  '-8 

radient 52  7 

raffle 190  24  ij5 

rail.... , 49  5  53 

railroad 196  25  i>i 

rain  (the) 82  10  '/z 


245 
275 
535 
535 
J37 
53 


125 
121 

60 
125 
125 
131 

38 

127 

273 
155 


SIGN.   LINE.  PAGE. 

rajse  (I) 18       237 

raised 106         14        127 

raised  from  the  dead 59          8       131 

ramrod 15        i;i 

rank i 

ranks i 

rapid 131          17 

rapidly 78         10 

rapturous i;6         20 

rare ii           2 

rarer 33          3 

rate 3          i 

rates 

rather 138         18 

rather  than 88         11 

ration 25           3 

rational 13=;         17 

rationally 136         17 

ravel 71          9 

ray 2          i 

reach 190         24 

reaching 17 

reach  you 6 

reactive 186         24 

read  (pronounced  reed) 101          7 

read  (pronounced  red) 102           7 

reader 44           6 

reading 164         19 

readit 132         n 

ready 183         23 

rea: 3           i 

really 20 

reason  (of  the) 13 

reason  which  1 20 

reassert 18 

rebate 9 

rebuked 9 

rebuttal 9 

recalled 4 

receipt  of  which 

receive 42          3 

received 43           3 

received  at 16 

received  back 9 

received  such 5 

received  the  impression 20 

receive  them 8 

receive  there 14 

receiving 3 

receiving  any n 

recent 7 

reception 140         is 

reclaim 130         17 

reclining 13 

recognise ; 137 

recognised  (1) 5 

recognition 138 

recollect 151         19 

recollection 152         19 

recommend 139 

recommendation 140 

reconciliation 167         21 

record 10 

recorded 16 

reco  ver-y 15 

re-cross  examination 17 

redeeming 9 

redemption 136         17 

redirect  examination 14 

refer 91         12 

reference 126         n 

referred  (and) 13 

refined 46           6 

reflective 160         2J 

reform : iq 

refuse i, 

refused j^ 

regard 178           3 


94 
129 
131 
22; 

47 
181 

M7 
255 
275 
219 

22I 
I« 

64 
64 
i;i 
211 
247 
193 
213 
149 
209 
209 
151 
127 
137 
199 

112 

203 

112 

121 
121 
112 
112 
129 
149 
153 
221 
211 

277 

121 
211 
119 

94 

145 

133 
i-ii 
tt 
159 
213 
114 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


309 


SIGN. 

regret 179 

regular 108 

regular  salary  of 

regulate  the 

reign 

reject 

relating 

relatively 106 

relays 

religion 

Rem 

remain 2 

remained 82 

remaining 

remains 14 

remark 

remarkable 

remarkably 

remarked 

remember 

remember  that 157 

remembrance 114 

remind    you 

remit 

remittance 

remittances 

remitted 

rendered 170 

render  his  report  at  that 

render  such  a  ^nd) 

render  unto • 84 

renewal 

renew  an 38 

renewed n  t 

renew  it 127 

renowned 26 

repeatedly 

replying  to  your  favor  of  recent 

date 

replying  to  your  letter 

reply  to  yours 

report 

reports 

represent.. .,  — 

representation 214 

representative  215 

representative  body 

represented 216 

reproved 86 

Republican 192 

republish 193 

request 38 

require 37 

required 122 

equiring  the 

eside 

esidence 

esolution  (a) 

esolved 

respect-ful-ly 

respectfully  yours 

respective 

respectively 

responds 

rest 

rests 

resumed 194 

retail 8 

retain  them 158 

return-ed 

returning 

return  the  check 

revelation 

Reverend 

review  (and) 164 

revives 24 

revolution 

revolutionized 


LINE.  PAGE. 

3  114 

9  64 

17  187 

10  237 

1 6  279 

16  157 

12  223 

14  129 

3  an 

5  81 


72 
203 
60 
81 
81 
81 
81 
81 


245 

153 
147 
149 
157 
123 
239 
225 

131 
187 
125 
131 
123 
131 
213 


149 
149 
149 


1 

96 
94. 
94 
129 

245 
ir.i 

I9S 
237 
241 
88 
M5 
157 
223 


211 
133 
131 

86 
145 
149 
149 
81 
J-7 
86 
60 
81 
275 


rib  

SIGN. 

54 

LINE. 
4 

PAGE. 

ribbed  

55 

4 

64 

ribbon  

no 

14 

137 

Rich  

2 

right  
right  hand  
rightly  
rights  (the)  
right  to  the  last  

236 

18 
ii 

20 

7 
9 

145 
179 
213 
225 
Hi 

ripe  

53 

7 

46 

rise  (a)  

16 

153 

rising  

6 

2<59 

rivalry  

18 

247 

river  

i3 

2C1 

roast  

67 

60 

robe  

124 

16 

127 

Robert  

93 

112 

rock  

52 

4 

64 

rocked  

53 

4 

64 

Rockland  

14 

roller  

23 

3 

53 

rollers  

4 

M7 

Roman  

75 

10 

120 

Roman  Catholic  

i73 

4 

06 

Rome  

in 

14 

137 

roof  

i 

I 

60 

roofs  

13 

2 

60 

room  

17 

193 

rooms  

I 

235 

root  

:        103 

13 

131 

Roote  

10 

2 

38 

ropes  

41 

5 

46 

rosy  

163 

21 

129 

routine  

19 

251 

row  

6 

rubber  

122 

16 

12, 

rue  

3 

i 

38 

ruin  

119 

15 

125 

ruined  

i=8 

20 

"5 

rule  

12 

2 

53 

rule   a  

Cl 

4 

72 

ruled  

83 

1  1 

72 

rules  

15 

157 

rule  the  

78 

10 

131 

runs  

20 

159 

rural  

24 

3 

53 

rush  

9* 

13 

127 

rye  

1 

i 

38 

s  

33 

S  (the  initial)  

105 

sable  

c6 

6 

53 

sabler  

67 

/ 

53 

sack  

23 

3 

38 

Saco  

5 

149 

sacred  

36 

3 

*   64 

sadler  

10 

137 

safe  

40 

5 

38 

safely  

9 

249 

safer  :   

61 

6 

53 

sage  

3i 

4 

38 

saggle  
said  

60 
106 

6 

8 

Ii 

said  plaintiff  (the)  
said  to  have  

112 

16 

14 

223 
123 

saints  

8 

277 

saith  

105 

8 

86 

salary  

12 

187 

sale  

.'....      34 

5 

46 

sales  

16 

177 

sales  (and)  

14 

153 

salesman  (a)  

15 

217 

sales  slip  (the)  

II 

149 

saloons  

II 

245 

Salt  Lake  City  

13 

153 

salvation  

6 

salvation  of  the  soul  

rtf 

9 

96 

3io 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN.   LINE.  PAGE. 

same 37          5  38 

same  as  (the) 10  155 

same  cases 164         21  131 

same  month n  217 

sample 8  147 

samples 20  145 

Samuel 5  149 

San  Francisco 12  159 

sang .' 72          6  72 

Sarah 193         25  no 

sash 35           4  46 

satchel 92         12  131 

satisfaction 220           9  96 

satisfactory ,-..  228           9  96 

satisfied 12  88 

satisfy 12  88 

satisfy  you 7  223 

Saturday 7  147 

Savannah •  19  145 

save  38          5  38 

saved 3  277 

saves  us 186         24  131 

save  trouble  (to) 6  149 

save  us 170         22  no 

saving 271         20  96 

sayings 9  145 

savior 174           4  96 

savor 63          6  ^3 

saw 75          7  72 

saw  it 10  191 

saw  that 19  205 

saw  the 75          7  72 

say 27           4  27 

saying 147         19  137 

says  55          7  135 

say  that  a 10  239 

say  that  we  would 9  153 

say  they 12  78 

scales 6  149 

scarcely 16  249 

scarcity  (a) 84         n  72 

scarlet 76         10  131 

schedule  (a) 13  241 

scholar 58           8  129 

school 71           9  123 

schooled 190         24  133 

scientists 81          10  72 

score  55           7  131 

Scotch 4  245 

scrawl 39           5  121 

screw 135         17  127 

scriptural 231           9  96 

scripture 13  88 

scrub 147         19  127 

scull 5  195 

season 266         15  96 

secession 2  88 

seclude 46          6  137 

secluded 47        -6  137 

seclusion 48          6  137 

second 6          i  112 

second  day 4  183 

seconded 8  235 

second  handed 156         15  86 

second  the  motion  (I) 7  235 

secret 71           9  Tig 

secretary  (the) 4  235 

secretion 108         14  133 

secretive 107         14  133 

sections :. 86         u  135 

secular 71           7  =3 

secure 102         13  127 

secured 265          15  96 

secure  it 7  153 

see  a  few 13  203 

seed 143         18  129 

seeing 198          5  114 

seeks 15  221 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

seemed 78           8  72 

seemly 43           5  125 

seems  .  68 

seen  in  the o  199 

sees  a  brother 162         18 

seethal :3  i;? 

see  that  they  are 10  14- 

seethe 3  197 

seized 315         is  "4 

seizure 66           9  I3s 

seldom 13  78 

select(and) 15  237 

selected n  2^7 

selection 74           7  72 

self 51           7  127 

self  esteem 152  '12 

self  evident I'-i  112 

selfish 153  1I2 

selling  (the) 14  i;9 

sells i79         23  135 

sellus ii  157 

send 40           3  "4 

send  a  copy 

send  an 55           4 

send  them 4  !;9 

send  this 13  149 

send  us 81 

send  us  the  slip n  M9 

send  with  them 5  M7 

send  you  a n  189 

sense 74 

sensitiveness i5  2~9 

sensitive  to  the  last 90         12  125 

sensitive  to  the  touch 237          9  114 

sent 39          3  64 

sentiment 48           4 

sentimental 103         13  125 

sentiments 17  249 

sent  me 

sent  the 18  i?~ 

sent  us 80           5 

sent  you 14  145 

separate 163         21  123 

separated 14  277 

separately 16  223 

separation 164         21  123 

September nS         15  127 

series 12  225 

serious 19  243 

sermon 92         12  125 

sermons 17  259 

servant n  245 

service 118         15  119 

services 162         21  131 

session 266         15  96 

set 16  22; 

setforth 61           4 

set  off 60           4 

set  of  furniture  (a) 15  i1"1 

set  of  your  circulars 3  157 

settle 57          6  53 

settled 12  157 

settlement 16  u7 

settlements 17  M7 

settler 69           7  53 

seven 99 

seven-eighths 86  112 

seven  hundred 

seven  million 

seventeen 99 

seventeen  hundred 49          4  112 

seventeenth    4^           4  I'2 

seventh 45           4  "2 

seven  thousand 99 

seventieth So           4  112 

seventy 99 

seventy-five 45           4  112 

seventy  thousand Si           4  112 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY, 


several 175 

severe  

shade 

shadow 15 

Shah rg 

shall 

shallbe 42 

shallbe  met 

shal  1  be  pleased 

shall  be  very  glad 

shall  1 27 

shall  I  further  prove  it 

shallit 28 

shall  there 172 

shape  (the) 

share 42 

sharing 

sharp 

shave 163 

shave  it 133 

Shaw 29 

shawl , 43 

she 154 

sheet 

sheeting 

she  had 154 

she  is 163 

Shekinah  (the) 318 

shel  lac 54 

shelling 60 

shilling 52 

shines 50 

ship 

shipment 

shipped 28 

Shirley 101 

shoe 27 

short 71 

short-a 

short-ah 

short-e 

shortened  (shorthand) 72 

short-i 

short-o 

short-oo 

short-u 

should 67 

should  a 47 

shouldan 49 

should  be 

shoul  d  be  done 

should  do  so  (I) 

shouldered 

should  have 20 

shouldhe       46 

should  1 48 

should  the 50 

should  you  go 77 

show 116 

showed 74 

showing  book 

shown 49 

shown  us • 

shows 36 

shy i. ..      21 

sick . 

sickly no 

side 

side  of 

sidereal 7o 

sieger 58 

sigh 19 

signature 

signatures 268 

signed 22 

signer 100 

significance 233 


SIGN.    LINE.    PAGE. 
4    '         96 

4   245 
4   147 


74 
137 
243 
147 
241 
137 
177 
135 
131 
197 

53 
245 
247 
131 
94 
46 
53 
135 
153 
153 
135 
137 
114 
53 
137 
53 
60 
153 
157 
137 
112 
27 
137 
33 
33 
33 
131 
33 
33 
33 
33 
72 
72 
72 
225 
193 
197 
199 
133 
72 
72 
72 
72 
135 
72 
217 
60 
14; 
46 
27 

193 

64 

'79 

205 

53 
27 

96 
121 

137 

96 


191 
193 
iSi 
217 
191 

72 
191 

53 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

significancy 234         10        96 

significant 235          10         96 

signification 236         10         96 

significative 237         10        96 

signified 15 

signify 15 

signing 15 

signing  of  this  codicil n 

signing  the  contract i 

signing  this  note  for 19 

sign  in  your  presence 14 

sign  the 61           4 

sign  this  document • 13 

silk 88          8 

similarity  239         10 

similar  kind  (a) 7 

similar-ly 238         10 

simple 240         10 

simplify-ed 240         10 

simply 240         10 

simply  this 15 

since .• 18 

since  (and) 16 

since  the 6 

since  then  (  and) 19 

single  106           9 

singularity 242         10 

singular-ly 241         10 

sinner 65          6 

sip 7           i 

sir 9 

sire 30           4 

Sir  Robert  Beale 93 

sisterly 77           7 

sisters 10 

situated 195         25 

situation 196         25 

six 

six  hundred 

six  million 

sixteen 

sixteenth 42          4 

sixteen  thousand 43           4 

sixth 41           3 

six  thousand 

sixtieth 44           4 

sixty 

size 75          10 

sizes 12          2 

skipped 34 

slander 131          n 

slaughtered. 96         12 

sleep 269         18 

slender  enough 83         n 

slight 41           3 

slip ii 

sloped i 

slovenly  (a) 80           9 

slow....:   115         15 

slowly 19           3 

sluggish  (and) 20 

slur 64           6 

small 66           6 

smaller 3 

small  one 17 

smell 118         15 

smoother 94         12 

snow 183         23 

snowy 19           2 

Snyder < 43          6 

so 10 

soaker 59           6 

so  as i 

sob 32           4 

sober J9 

social 18 

socially 

soever .. —  187         24 


96 

92 
96 

273 
177 
i53 
159 
181 
60 
96 
96 
53 
137 
195 
35 

112 

53 
279 
135 
i35 
99 
99 
99 
99 
112 
112 
1:2 
99 

112 

99 
J33 
133 
131 

64 

'3 

121 
64 
149 

205 
72 

131 
131 

279 

53 

53 

151 

257 

137 

121 

"9 

46 
135 
147 

53 
241 
127 

273 
247 

201 

137 


312 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN.   LINE.  PAGE. 

so  far 17  159 

so  far  as  this i  223 

softer  than 22     2  86 

sold 174    22  127 

soldier  (as  a) 19  245 

soldiers..  82    10  72 

sole 82         ii  133 

Solomon 83         10  72 

solution 22           3  123 

some 72          6  72 

somebody 13  88 

somehow 20  193 

somehow  or  other 271         12  114 

someone 25          2  86 

someone  else ii  221 

someone  or  other 270         12  114 

some  other  one 67           o  129 

something 60           8  127 

something  else 107         14  121 

something  less 108         14  121 

sometime 256         12  96 

somewhat 257         12  06 

son : 16  189 

song ii           2  129 

SonofGod 244          9  114 

soon 131         17  119 

so  ordered 9  235 

Sophia 107  112 

sore 91         12  91 

sort 33          3  64 

sort  of 2  211 

so  that  it 18  193 

sought i  247 

souls 5  279 

sound 34           3  64 

sounded 18          3  129 

sounders  (and) 3  211 

source 6  155 

sources 154         20  121 

south 167         21  127 

South  American 14  249 

South  Carolina 8  157 

southeast 163         21  127 

southern 162         21  127 

southwest 164         21  127 

so  well 7  203 

space 131         17  131 

spaces 34          5  125 

spacious 188         24  137 

speak i  88 

speaker ii  251 

speaking 19  253 

special 2  88 

specially 2  88 

specify ii  197 

spectacles 85         12  72 

speech  (see  speak) i  88 

speeches 16  259 

speed 164         19  86 

spinal  column 248         n  96 

spine 98    13  137 

spinsters 92    8  60 

spirit 27     4  131 

spiritual-ly 3  88 

spiritualism 2$o         n  96 

spiritualist 251         n  96 

spirituality 252         ii  Q& 

splashed 114         15  137 

splendid  (a) 4  275 

spoil 148         19  131 

spoke 246         n  06 

spoken 247         ii  96 

sport 24           3  137 

sprain 12           2  129 

sprawl  68           7  ^3 

spread 54           7  127 

spreadings 204           5  114 

«pree 55          6  53 


spng;-. 

sprinkle 

sprite 

spry 168 

square 

stable 190 

stack 96 

staffs 19 

stag 7° 

staid 66 

standard  (to  the) 

standing 

standpoint 

stands 18 

starving 130 

started 

starting 

state 

stated 103 

stated  that  he 

stated  them 

state  legislatures 

statement 

state  name 

state  of 269 

state  of  New  Jersey 

state  respecting 

States  Attorney 

statesman 

states  that 

state  that 

stating  that 

stationary 33 

stations 32 

steadily 82 

steal 195 

steel 79 

stenographer 254 

stenographic 255 

stenography 

step 78 

stepped 18 

stick 69 

stickler 87 

stiff 80 

still  80 

stimulate 

sting 199 

stir 

St.  Joe 

St.  Joseph's 

St.  Louis 

stock 95 

stockholders 

stomach 

stone-work  (the) 314 

stood 2 

stop 82 

stopper 83 

store 23 

stories 

storm 68 

stout 102 

stove 119 

stoves 54 

Stowe 109 

St.  Paul 

straggle 85 

straggler 86 

strain 146 

strained 37 

strainer /6 

strange 

strangest 

strangle -. 99 

streak 71 

stream 72 

street  

strength 


SIGN.  LINE.   PAGE. 
27 


'I9 
64 

137 
207 


60 
60 
60 
M7 
225 
245 

123 

131 

217 

247 

123 

189 

225 

249 
149 

'$ 

.'85 

203 

245 
151 
M7 
149 
60 
60 
72 

'S. 

60 


72 

H9 
60 


72 
247 

i 

145 


159 
197 
114 

127 

60 
5o 
123 

2£ 
60 

123 
123 

i35 

112 

149 

53 

53 

121 
64 

% 

2H 
60 
60 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


313 


SIGN. 

strew 36 

Strict 54 

strictly 

stride 76 

strife 96 

strike  from  the  record 

string 98 

stripped , 

strive 97 

stroke 

strong 175 

strong  hands 

strop 84 

stropper 85 

structure 180 

stuck 

student 50 

study 80 

stung 87 

style 127 

styles 

subdue  166 

subdues 86 

subject 

subjected 115 

subjection 154 

subjective 155 

subscribe 132 

subsequent 

subserve  the 

substantial  identity 258 

substantially 

subtle 138 

succeed 264 

success 68 

such 119 

such  a  note 

such  a  one 136 

such  are 158 

such  are  to  have 79 

such  as 

such  had 140 

such  had  not 15 

such  has  been 20 

such  has  been  taken 78 

such  have 148 

such  have  had 4 

such  it 130 

such  ought 150 

such  ought  not 16 

suchought  to  have. 5° 

such  will 135 

such  will  have 52 

such  will  have  had 152 

such  will  have  it 38 

such  will  not 16 

such  would 14° 

such  would  have  had 4 

such  would  not 151 

suction 198 

Sue 18 

suffer 47 

suggest 

suit  (the) 

Sunday 

sunshine 

superintendent's  (the) 

supplement 208 

supplies 

supply 

support 162 

suppose 126 

suppressed 187 

suppression 20 

Supreme  Being 259 

sure 

surely 79 

surmount 74 

surpasses 106 


LINE.  PAGE.                                                                                   SIGN. 

5  135  surprise 82 

7  119  surprised 83 

3  149  surpriseus 

7  60  sur-rebuttal 

8  60  surrender  their  homes 98 

10  189  surrogate 

8  60  surrogate's 

12  203  surround 38 

8  60  survey 107 

14  193  suspend 46 

22  137  suspended 43 

16  153  suspense 42 

7  j6o  suspension 44 

7  60  suspicion 47 

23  119  sustain 114 

11  237  sustained 

7  137  sustains 22 

10  131  swagger 198 

11  137  swayed 199 

16  133  sways 107 

16  259  swears 

21  137  sweeter 87 

13  72  swine 124 

8  88  switch 91 

15  133  swivel 75 

2  96  swooned ' no 

2  96  swore 167 

17  121  sworn 

13  98  sworn  in  his  own  behalf 

4  253  sympathy 

12  96  synonym 194 

18  159  synonymous 32 

18  123  system  


LINE. 

8 


PAGE. 

94 
94 

153 

221 
64 
191 

191 


T'" 


5  72  T  (the  initial) 

15  127  taciturn 180 

17  223  take 

17  127  take  a 178 

20  123  take  it 135 

10  119  taken 39 

20  243  taken  up 40 

18  125  takes  place 

2  121  takes  us 5° 

3  135  take  them 

5  86  take  you 50 

19  121  talent 

1  131  talk 82 

17  135  talkers 

2  96  talking  about 

2  121  tapers 

7  127  task 83 

17  137  taste 156 

7  121  tattler 166 

2  96  taught  102 

5  119  Taylor 

2  137  Tchay 

18  125 

1  131  technical 177 

2  96  telegraph 115 

25  131  telegraphic:   

3  27  telephone 167 

6  121  tell 

11  239  teller 174 

i  223  tell  it 90 

15  195  tellofit 166 

5  277  tells  us 86 

13  149  tell  that 

6  114  tell  the  difference 142 

11  255  tell  us 106 

7  149  tell  you 

21  123  tell  you  the 

16  127  temperance  society 260 

24  121  temperance  (the) 

3  121  temperate 199 

12  96  temptation 120 

6  81  ten 

10  137  tenant 19° 

10  127  tenderness 

9  60  tenses —   53 


125 

125 

125 
125 
125 
129 

187 
125 

133 

125 

123 
223 
64 
123 
121 
127 

"9 
123 
179 
177 
251 
129 


33 
105 
137 

74 

121 

<$ 

7§ 

78 
153 
133 
213 

94. 


249 
199 
159 

86 

121 

133 
119 
179 
33 

96 
135 
207 


123 

121 

119 

125 


125 
159 


273 
133 
119 

99 
129 

279 
60 


314 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY 


SIGN. 

tension 42 

tenth 65 

Teresa 105 

terminated 

terminate  the 

terminating 

terms  (and) 

terms  upon  which  you  (the) 

territorial 180 

territory 179 

Terry 47 

test 73 

testament 128 

testamentary 28 

testator 

testified 

testifies  as  follows 

testify 92 

testimonial 

testimony 316 

testimony  for  plaintiff 

testimony  for  the  defence 

tests 

testy....: 135 

Texas 

than 

than  is  necessary 

thank 

than  ourselves 

that 5 

thata 57 

that  fact 

that  is 103 

that  is  just 

that  is  not 

thatit 

that  may  be 

that  no  more  time 

that  note 

that  there 96 

that  they  are 

that  this  resolution 

that  we  may 

that  you 107 

that  you  cannot 

that  you  may , 

the  (written  upward) 

the  agent 317 

the  audience 265 

the  author lib 

the  beauty , 309 

the  best  and  worst 279 

the  bill  of  lading 

the  brush 

the  charges 114 

the  cipher 

the  city 269 

the  conditions 163 

the  conquerors 318 

the  court 

Thee  (the  letter) 

thee  (the  pronoun) 19 

the  enclosed 

the  eye 31 

the  farm 75 

the  first 13 

the  first  and  last 281 

the  first  and  least 282 

the  first  and  second 280 

the  first  position 285 

the  first  subject 284 

the  first  thing 283 

the  form 115 

the  full 

the  game 67 

the  human  race 161 

the  hundred 316 

the  importance 


LINE. 

PACK 

6 

135 

5 

112 

112 

ID 

187 

4 

189 

4 

189 

13 

145 

II 

J57 

23 

i3i 

23 

131 

6 

119 

7 

60 

16 

133 

4 

119 

7 

I2I 

•  4 

181 

5 

187 

12 

135 

18 

i5i 

19 

114 

5 

187 

2 

213 

17 

159 

17 

129 

i 

157 

18 

81 

12 

179 

12 

74 

2O 

149 

I 

64 

4 

72 

18 

179 

7 

78 

8 

179 

16 

157 

ii 

I5i 

16 

179 

12 

179 

16 

207 

12 

133 

12 

157 

16 

241 

20 

237 

14 

135 

IQ 

i53 

SIGN. 

their  '(there) no 

theirs  to  deserve 86 

the  keepers 318 

the  king 79 

the  lamp 70 

the  lash 155 

them 

the  man 50 

the  manager 268 

the  manner., 150 

the  morrow 118 

the  most 60 

themselves 217 

the  muscles 76 

then 

tha  name 66 

the  name  is  rr.:ne 47 

thence 122 

thenceforth 60 

t  henceforward 172 

then  the 

then  the  amount 

the  organ 146 

the  other 156 

the  owners 

the  package 

the  patent no 

the  people 3To 

the  plaintiff 3'6 

the  rain 82 

there 119 

there  are  a 

thereby  (and) 

there  can  no 102 

therefor-e 186 

there  had  not 52 

there  has  not  been  an  hour 

there  have  been 

there  is  a 

there  is  enough 

there  is  no 

there  is  no  occasion 

there  is  no  question  now 

the  remarkaole 161 

there  may  be 39 

there  may  be  little 36 

there  may  be  some 58 

thereof 115 

thereon 140 

there  ought 116 

there  they  are 

thereto 170 

thereunto 36 

there  were 

there  would  not 52 

these 

the  second i< 

the  Shekinah 318 

the  stock 

the  stone 314 

the  thing 117 

the  third 18 

the  truth 143 

the  universe : 263 

the  value 117 

the  very 151 

the  work 163 

the  world 310 

they 27 

they  are  i 

they  are  returned  to  us 

they  have  

they  may  be  likely 4 

they  were 

they  were  once 318 

they  will 184 

they  will  be  likely 


LINE. 

PAGE. 

II 

78 

11 

127 

20 

114 

8 

72 

6 

72 

15 

86 

ii 

74 

4 

72 

17 

§6 

17 

86 

10 

94 

4 

72 

7 

114 

7 

72 

17 

81 

5 

72 

6 

133 

16 

137 

8 

125 

22 

J35 

7 

185 

18 

223 

12 

86 

20 

135 

10 

M5 

T4 

145 

8 

78 

17 

114 

19 

114 

10 

72 

it 

78 

i 

255 

ii 

157 

24 

121 

4 

114 

7 

123 

6 

159 

i 

223 

14 

153 

ll 

235 

17 

243 

20 

235 

15 

9 

22 

5 

17 
7 

5 

i 

20 


127 

125 

J35 
i37 
133 
i3i 
217 
135 
137 
i57 
123 
145 

112 

114 

145 
H4 
78 

112 

86 


86 
86 
114 

27 

86 
151 

i47 
86 
7S 
114 
135 
199 


HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


315 


SIGN. 

they  would 10 

thick 159 

thine 23 

thing 

things 157 

think 

thinking 

think  it 62 

thinks 56 

thinks  his  the 54 

think  you  can 

thinner 90 

third 10 

third  instant 

thirsty 60 

thirteen 

thirteenth 23 

thirteen  thousand 24 

thirtieth n 

thirty 

thirty-fifth 20 

thirty-first 12 

thirty-fourth 19 

thr  ty  hundred 22 

thirty-second 14 

thirty-third 17 

thirty  thousand 21 

thirty-three 16 

this 

this  being  understood 

this  city 

•this  codicil 

this  company 

this  fact 

this  has  not  taken 67 

this  is 42 

this  is  a-n 

this  is  done 

this  note 

this  paper 

this  question 

this  subject 

thither .".      Si 

thorough 12 

thoroughly  (each  one) 164 

those 

those  are 

thou 9 

though 

thought 

thoughtlessness 222 

thought  that  amount  (I) 

thousand-th  (the  word) 117 

thousand-th  (the  numeral) 

three 

three-fourths 85 

three  hundredth 

three  million 

three  quarters  (see  three  fourths) 

three  thousand 

thrice 83 

throb 107 

throne  of  grace 243 

through 106 

through  one 191 

through  our  books 

throughout 

Thursday 

thus 86 

tny 20 

thyself 108 

tickle 178 

tie 13 

till 

till  you 145 

till  you  can 55 

time 

timed 


LINE. 

PAGE. 

2 

135 

20 

133 

3 

129 

4 
16 

8764 

10 

74 

3 

157 

8 

137 

4 

78 

7 

121 

13 

199 

12 

129 

I 

112 

2 

147 

8 

135 

99 

2 

112 

2 

112 

I 

112 

99 

2 

I  2 

I 

I  2 

2 

I  2 

2 

I  2 

I 

1  2 

2 

1  2 

2 

112 

2 

112 

18 

88 

19 

179 

7 

179 

5 

193 

12 

159 

16 

147 

96 

127 

14 

221 

H 

149 

13 

147 

12 

193 

18 

237 

6 

237 

6 

64 

2 

i  "55 

19 

86 

19 

88 

II 

183 

I 

46 

12 

74 

7 

.  98 

7 

114 

i 

219 

10 

78 

99 

99 

112 

99 

99 

137 
129 

'H 

00 

123 

I4Q 
98 
145 

72 

27 

129 
119 
27 
81 
86 
94 
74 
273 


time  of  the  day 

tinker , 102 

tinner ^ 

tippler 74 

tirade 13 

tired 8, 

tided 62 

to 

to  a 8 

to  all 12 

to  all  of 

to  all  the 

to  an 9 

toast 74 

toaster 75 

to  be 

to  be  able 128 

to  be  able  to 131 

to  be  held 

to  be  somebody 267 

to  be  sure 32 

to  be  there 16 

to  be  transacted 

to  date 

today 

today's 42 

to  do 

to  do  this 

together 

to  go 16 

to  have 73 

to  have  been 76 

told 19 

tolerable 112 

tomorrow 119 

ton 

tonight 

tons 132 

too 

took 

took  you 58 

tooth 31 

to  our 84 

to  our  own 34 

to  ours 33 

to  ourselves 219 

tore 8S 

toss 35 

tosses 146 

total 

to  the 10 

to  the  owners 

Tott 100 

touch 67 

tough 7 

toward "317 

toward  you 317 

to  whom 67 

town 

towns 32 

township 88 

to  you 

track 

trade 

traders  (and) 

trading 

train 104 

trainer 30 

traitor 126 

trample 182 

transacting 

transaction 84 

transactions 

transcription  (the) 

transition 

transitions 

transitorial 80 

translation SO 


LINE. 

5 

9 

17 

7 

2 

II 


64 
121 

53 

(21 
T2f 


245 

1  49 
72 

60 
60 

74 

127 


78 
119 
179 
145 

7i 
78 
74 
243 
74 


64 
137 
94 
153 
9* 
133 
65 
74 
94 
119 
121 
86 
86 
114 
53 
127 
119 
273 


112 

131 
(-0 
114 
114 
72 
145 
133 
137 
M7 
157 
157 


125 
121 
137 
135 


181 


60 
60 


3i6 


HAVEN'S   PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


SIGN. 

transmit 128 

trans  instantiation 28 

vreacle 75 

treasure 82 

treated 122 

tremenduous 151 

Trenton 

trial 30 

trial  of  this  case 

tried 47 

trifle 

trim 56 

Trinitarianism 72 

trip 113 

trips 

trouble  (save) 

trounces 56 

true 07 

truly  yours 27 

trust 65 

truth 

truthful 193 

truthfully 193 

try 17 

try  a 

Tuesday 

tuition 31 

tunnel 73 

turn 4 

twain 155 

twelfth 67 

twelve 

twenty-ieth 

twenty-eight 

twenty-first 4 

twenty-four 

twenty-one 3 

twenty-second 8 

twenty-two 7 

twice 151 

twig 35 

twin 34 

twin 134 

two 

two  hundred 

two  million 

two  thousand 

type 


ultimate 155         15 

ultimo 18 

unacccompanied 125 

unanimous  consent 17 

unawares 86         13 

unclaimed 15 

uncommon 158         20 

unconscious 5 

under 

underhand 268         12 

understand 172           2 

understand  the  matter 9 

understood 173          2 

undertaken 152         19 

under  the  circumstances 2          i 

under  the  house 314         18 

undivided 129         n 

undoubted 188         24 

undoubtedly  received  them  —  3 

unfinished  business 16 

unfortunate n 

unimportant 20 

union 24 

Union  League I 

United  States 18 

U.  S.  District  Court i 

Universalism 166           3 

uniyerse-al-ity. 17 

University  of  Pa 165          3 


LINE. 

PAGE. 

16 

137 

4 

127 

7 

53 

II 

121 

16 

135 

19 

129 

2 

177 

1 

53 
225 

6 

123 

17 

159 

7 

127 

9 

"9 

1 

78 
273 

6 

149 

7 

121 

ii 

129 

a 

121 
60 

12 

81 

4 

114 

4 

114 

2 

53 

10 

147 

6 

145 

3 

60 

7 

'  53 

I 

127 

23 

"9 

5 

112 

99 

99 

4 

145 

I 

112 

7 

M5 

I 

112 

X 

112 

I 

112 

I? 

131 

3 

94 

3 

94 

17 

125 

99 

99 

99 

99 

20 

225 

149 
112 
243 
72 
145 


114 
114 
255 
114 
123 
137 
114 
64 
133 
147 
235 
151 

221 

81 


18 


unkind(and)  

SIGN. 

LINE. 
9 

PAGE. 
279 

unless  

59 

8 

125 

unless  he  can  prove  

20 

223 

unless  he  was  

9 

189 

unpaid  —  

2 

145 

unprofitable  , 

12 

unquestionably  

I" 

197 

unsaid  

9 

275 

unsatisfactory  (  and)  

6 

239 

unscored  ,  

X38 

18 

135 

unscrew  

166 

2 

114 

unseasoned  

12 

2 

123 

unseemly  

163 

I 

114 

unselfish  

I64 

I 

114 

unstability  

183 

3 

114 

unstrung  

165 

2 

114 

until  

II 

81 

until  the  day  of  

9 

191 

until  you  

.....      158 

16 

86 

unto  

96 

8 

94 

up  

I 

74 

uphold  

7 

upon  

14 

§l 

upon  another  occasion  

19 

209 

upon  it  

....    118 

I; 

133 

upon  the  — 

4 

149 

upon  the  plaintiff  
upon  this  plaintiff  
upright  judge  (the)  

7 

12 

223 
223 
259 

up  the  

—      42 

(5 

121 

up  to  date  

2 

up  to  the  standard  

19 

147 

upward  (and)  

l8 

245 

urge  

14 

241 

Uriah  

21 

46 

us  

d 

"4 

use  (  pronounced  use)  
use  (pronounced  uze)  

18 
19 

74 

74 

used  

....      269 

17 

96 

used  some  

....      61 

6 

94 

useful  

....    194 

4 

114 

usefulness  

....   195 

5 

114 

useless  

20 

157 

....     41 

4 

53 

users  

II 

155 

usual  

16 

74 

usually  

16 

74 

usury  

....   179 

23 

121 

Utah  

13 

i;3 

utilize  

17 

88 

utilized  , 

....    294 

15 

114 

utilizes  

—    270 

IQ 

96 

utmost  

12 

255 

Utopia  

14 

245 

utter  

...     131 

17 

i37 

uttered  

19 

225 

utterly  

...      76 

10 

i33 

utterly  wretched  

7 

279 

V 

33 

V  (theinitial)  

105 

vacation  

...      79 

10 

120 

vagrancy  —   

...      110 

8 

86 

vague  

...     159 

20 

135 

van  

...      26 

4 

120 

vain  

6 

i 

vale  

...      37 

4 

55 

validity  (the)  

9 

223 

vallev  

2 

I 

131 

valuable  

20 

179 

valuation  (the)  

17 

value  

9 

74 

valued  

6 

values  

n 

IJ3 

vanished  

...      16-J 

17 

*6 

variation  

17 

223 

variety  . 

10 

153 

varnish  (and)  

i 

235 

veer  ,.,. 

...        36 

4 

53 

HAVEN  S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


317 


SIGN. 

vegetable  kingdom 36 

veil 26 

vein 

venerable 

ventilate 104 

verbally 

verbal  one „. 

verbatim  (a) 

verdict 

verdure 80 

verify 78 

Vermont 

versatile 160 

versification 71 

versificative 72 

versify 70 

versus  (vs. ) 

vertical 

very 

very  little 

very  much 

very  respectfully 

very  truly 

very  truly  yours 

very  well 

vest 32 

vice 39 

vice-president 

vicious 42 

victi  ms 

vie 16 

view 17 

viewed 191 

views 81 

vine 37 

violated  

viper 81 

Virginia 

virtually 

virtue 88 

visible 176 

vision 106 

visit 103 

vital  importance 

vocation 78 

vocatives 146 

voice 

void 67 

volatile 174 

volunteered 

vote 4 

voted 233 

vs.... 

vulgar 48 

W(the  initial) 

wag 5 

waif 195 

wail  (well) 

wait 

walk 

walked 

Wallace 

Walter 28 

Walters 

wampum 23 

wan 195 

wants 83 

want  you  to  make 

ward 21 

warm 6 

was 

was  a-n 86 

was  as 73 

was  as  the 98 

was  found 

wash n5 

was  he 92 

Washington 


LINE. 

PAGE. 

5 

131 

4 

129 

19 

159 

14 

255 

J3 

119 

6 

221 

15 

235 

3 

273 

8 

225 

6 

64 

10 

127 

ii 

159 

20 

125 

9 

121 

9 

121 

9 

121 

i 

177 

20 

159 

3 

81 

9 

203 

12 

147 

4 

151 

20 

147 

IO 

145 

13 

247 

4 

131 

5 

38 

i§ 

251 

6 

"9 

20 

273 

3 

27 

3 

27 

24 

121 

IO 

72 

4 

60 

JO 

225 

8 

53 

4 

153 

16 

259 

ii 

4 

3 

M 

135 

13 

133 

5 

257 

IO 

129 

19 

131 

18 

225 

9 

119 

22 

131 

15 

193 

I 

64 

8 

114 

i 

177 

6 

135 

105 

I 

53 

25 

129 

8 

81 

5 

159 

19 

275 

2 
14 

205 
183 

4 

123 

3 

179 

3 

127 

25 

119 

ii 

72 

19 

149 

2 

64 

I 

53 

20 

n 

6 

78 

6 

78 

19 

201 

i5 

125 

6 

7§ 

9 

245 

LINE.  PAGE. 
14  187 
23  74 


SIGN. 

was  his 

was  it 

was  it  as 80 

was  it  not 12 

was  not 62           6 

wasp 63           8 

was  that I4 

was  the  89          6 

was  there 76           5 

was  the  same 20 

watch 63           8 

watched  the 12 

watchfulness 192         24 

water 88           7 

wave 3           i 

Waverly. . . 

Way 

ways 108         14 

we 6           i 

we  admit ii 

weak 17 

weakens 86         13 

weaker 14 

wealthy 106         14 

we  are no         14 

we  are  always 12 

we  are  compelled  to  pay  (and).  ii- 

we  are  in  receipt  of  notice 14 

we  are  not 5°           3 

we  are  not  quite  clear i 

we  are  obliged  to  you 17 

we  are  of 63           4 

we  are  off 16          2 

we  are  paying 9 

we  are  very  much 19 

wearisome 163         19 

weather 89           7 

we  beg  to  reassert  that 18 

we  beg  to  say  that 3 

we  bought  3 

we  can 3 

we  can  manage 10 

we  cannot 5 

we  cannot  use  them  (and) 19 

we  do 5i           6 

wedge 87         ii 

we  did 20 

we  did  not  think 24           3 

Wednesday ii 

we  do 20 

we  do  not 19 

we  do  not  know 10 

we  do  not  know  whose 6 

week 4          i 

week  ago ii 

weekly 6 

we  enclose 9 

we  enclose  letter 12 

weep 67          9 

weepest    142       .18 

we  find '  12 

we  had 16 

we  have 13 

we  have  abandoned  it  (and)....  12 

we  have  also  made 17 

we  have  been  doing 16 

we  have  had 14 

\ve  have  looked 9 

we  have  made 20 

we  have  no 15 

we  have  no  objection. 9 

we  have  not 2 

we  have  received 7 

we  have  received  your  letter.. .  15 

we  have  returned 20 

we  have  sold 10 

we  have  the  enclosed 8 


203 

94 
119 

I82 
78 

78 
183 
123 
251 


53 
M7 

33 
137 
137 
177 
191 

72 

153 
123 
135 
151 
151 


153 

147 

86 
129 

M7 
145 
86 
64 
M7 
149 

149 
241 

159 
M7 
147 
46 
127 


145 
145 
147 
145 

149 

53 
235 
157 
157 
145 

121 
133 
157 
147 

145 

151 
159 
159 

M9 
149 


145 
147 


153 
157 


HAVEN'S  PRACTICAL  PHONOGRAPHY. 


weigh , 


SIGN.  LINK.  PAGE. 
•4  I  31 


•weighers 

weighing  the 

weight  of  an 

•weight  of  evidence 

weights  

•we  know  you  can 

welcome 62 

welfaie  58 

we  live 

well 

we  may 159 

we  may  be ". 3 

we  may  be  able 31 

we  may  not 56 

we  may  not  be 32 

we  may  not  do 48 

we  may  not  know 100 

we  may  not  know  them 8 

we  mean 54 

we  meant 55 

we  meant  not , 57 

we  met 39 

we  might  not 58 

we  might  not  have 26 

we  might  not  have  been $6 

we  must 

we  need  every  thing  ordered. ... 

we  need  the 

were 

we  receive  the 

we  regret 

we  regret  this 

we  remain 

we  remitted 

were  not 

we  respectfully  caution 

were  there 

were they 

we  return 

we  send 

we  sent  the 

we  shall  be  pleased  (and) 

we  shall  expect 

west 162 

we  stand '• 

westerly 178 

western 179 

West  Virginia :    

we  therefore 

we  think  you  are 

we  want 

we  wanted  the 

we  want  the  goods 

we  were 66 

we  \\erenot 100 

we  will 118 

we  will  have 

we  will  have  them 

we  will  not 49 

we  \villnotbe 87 

we  will  not  be  responsible 

we  will  not  have 54 

we  will  not  have  been 2 

we  will  not  remit 

we  will  now 

we  yet 

whale 9 

what 

what  action 

what  are  your  best 

whatever 184 

what  is 

what  is  the  next 

what  is  your  age 

what  is  your  business 

what  is  your  name 


149 


5   J49 
16   18 


5 

2?3 

259 
123 

121 

245 

81 

121 

86 
129 

86 
123 
127 
133 


137 
119 
151 
153 
147 
/4 

201 

i?7 
M7 
145 
155 
147 
135 

J97 

185 
157 
159 
147 
147 
147 
137 
259 
137 
137 
153 

149 
157 
157 
157 
147 
119 
137 
78 
237 
147 

86 
125 
149 
129 
123 
155 
199 
153 
53 
74 
239 
MS 
114 
225 
185 
219 
187 
179 


SIGN.   LINE    PAGE 

what  is  your  name  in  full §  181 

whatother 18  185 

what  public 6  177 

whatreason 6  189 

whatsideof  the  road 11  179 

whattodo 20  147 

what  will  you 5  235 

what  you 19  153 

what  you  may  have  to  say 17  151 

Whay  (hway) 33 

wheat 93          6  86 

wheels 12  249 

when 11  74 

when  I  was iS  193 

whensoever 226           8  114 

where 10  74 

whereas 63           4  7^ 

whereat •..  186         24  119 

whereby 174         22  119 

where  do  you  reside 7  179 

wherefore 187           4  114 

where  has  he  gone ,  175         22  13; 

wherein 170         22  131 

where  is  your  place  of  "business  10  181 

where  it  is 13  185 

whereof 166         21  131 

whereon 167         21  131 

wheresoever 225           7  114 

•where  the 126         16  131 

whereto 127          16  131 

whereunto 128         16  131 

whereupon 168         21  131 

wherever 166         21  131 

whether 90           7  64 

whether  1 17  1  =  1 

whether  it 18  r-- 

whether  or  not i? 

whether  there 91           7  64 

whether  there  have 107           7  78 

whether  there  have  been 83         n  135 

whew 5           i  31 

whey 7           i  31 

which 12 

which  are 39           3 

which  are  not 26           4  135 

which  are  of 64           4  86 

which  caused 7  177 

whichever n           2  133 

which  had ". 60           8  133 

which  had  not n           2  125 

which  has  just 8  1*3 

which  have 69           5  86 

which  have  it 196         25  123 

which! ii  197 

which  is 163         18  86 

which  is  best 265          14  96 

which  is  worth 8  159 

whichit 147           i  96 

which  must 271         20  96 

which  not 

which  of  them 2  223 

which  ought 146           i  96 

which  ought  not 44           6  13? 

which  ought  to  have 10           2  119 

which  shall  be 14  241 

which  should  be  shown 271          19  96 

which  the  defendant  says 9  223 

which  were 128         16  121 

which  will 7           i  86 

which  will  it 149           2  96 

which  will  not 87         n  123 

which  will  place 13  241 

which  would 60           x  133 

which  would  have 148           2  96 

which  would  not n           2  12; 

which  you 14  197 

which  you  gave 3  213 

which  you  nave 2  145 


HAVEN'S    PRACTICAL    PHONOGRAPHY. 


319 


SIGN.  LINE,  FACE. 

SIGN. 

«.Mich  you  read  

261  . 

13 

96 

win  

I 

which  you  refer  (to)  

10 

149 

while  

«4 

II 

72 

windy  

8 

while  its  

269 

18 

'•& 

wine  

while  living  

H 

197 

wing  

2 

while  your  price  

9 

147 

winter  

...      79 

whilst  

51 

7 

121 

wintry  

.  ..      31 

whip  

12 

2 

125 

wire  

7 

whistle  

10 

I 

53 

Wisconsin  

...      61 

wisdom  

white  

94 

6 

86 

wish  

who  

65 

wish  a  

who  a  

32 

2 

72 

wished  w  

who  an  

33 

2 

72 

wisher  

•  ••      53 

who  are  now  engaged  

16 

273 

wishes  

who  can  

6 

247 

wish  their  

...      54 

whoever  

185 

4 

114 

with  

whoever  they  are(there)  

56 

7 

135 

with  a  

who  have  

7i 

5 

86 

withal  

whole  

194 

25 

137 

withholding  it  

wholesale  

3 

201 

within  

wholesale  dealer  

6 

207 

within  the  

wholesome  

53 

7 

46 

with  it  , 

...    164 

whom  

65 

with  other  

whom  a  

35 

3 

72 

without  

whom  an  

37 

3 

72 

with  reference-to  

...    125 

who  may  not  

271 

20 

96 

with  such  

whom  I  

36 

3 

72 

with  their  

...    108 

whom  the  

3 

72 

with  them  

whom  you  will  ,  

63 

6 

94 

with  the  others  

whose  

tji 

4 

72 

with  the  plaintiff  

whose  names  are  thereunto  

191 

with  these  

whosesoever  

228 

g 

114 

with  this  

whosoever  

227 

8 

114 

with  those  

who  the  

34 

2 

72 

with  us  

who  will  

16 

I 

86 

with  you  

why  

6 

I 

31 

with  your  

why  did  he  

8 

207 

witness  

why  did  you  

3 

219 

witnessed  both  

why  did  you  not  get  receipts... 
why  did   you  not  give  such  

2 

19 

217 
177 

witnesses  
witness  for  the  plaintiff  (a).  . 

...    316 

why    not  

5 

213 

woman  

ii 

why  there  can  be  

74 

10 

133 

womanly....^  

...      82 

why  there  have  

1  06 

7 

7» 

women  

3 

why  there  have  been  

56 

137 

wonderful-ly  

...   76 

wide  

18 

159 

wonders  

.  .  .  270 

width  

9 

199 

wonder  who  can  

...   40 

widths  

7 

won't  

...   24 

wield  

59 

8 

135 

wood  

200 

wife  

18 

275 

wooed  

...  42 

wilderness  

86 

7 

64 

word  

Wiley  

5 

Word  of  God  

...  245 

will  

20 

74 

words  

171 

Willard  

4 

207 

wore  

will  be  

309 

16 

114 

work  

will  be  excused  

4 

237 

worked  

...    ns 

will  be  less  

163 

19 

86 

workingman  

.  ..    196 

will  be  re  ached  

17 

153 

workingmen  

...    197 

will  be  taken  

4 

241 

workman  

will  forward  them  to  you  (and), 
will  have  

52 

6 
7 

147 
137 

workmen  
Works  of  God  

.  .  .   246 

William  

12 

149 

world  

willing  :   

270 

18 

96 

worn  

...     107 

willingly..  .  '.  

7 

255 

worth  (which  is)  

will  it  

i7 

237 

worthy  

...       5° 

will  just  

18 

185 

would  

will  oblige  

2 

153 

would  a  

12 

will  please  come  to  order  
will  please  read  them  
will  please  say  
will  please  signify  the  same  
will  save  you  

4 
4 
17 

8 

235 
235 
243 
235 
155 

would  be  
would  not  
would  not  now  (and  I)  
would  you  
wound  

108 

...   .  55 

will  take  place  

17 

237 

wrathfulness  

...    124 

will  you  

195 

25 

137 

Wren  

...      14 

will  you  be  

120 

15 

wretched  

will  you  give  the  

183 

Wright  

4 

will  you  take  

12 

237 

write  

2 

Wilson  

2 

145 

write  it  

...       132 

LINE.  PAGE. 


17 


21? 

53 

2OI 

53 

121 
125 

60 
279 

74 

'« 
7& 

245 
7& 
74 

XP 

81 

*8i 
'g 

'8 

94 
125 

157 
223 
M7 
193 

157 


177 
217 
114 
219 
123 
125 

127 


64 


114 
119 
197 

SI 
127 

96 


81 
114 

98 
127 
159 
135 

74 
119 
193 
213 
207 
127 


17   137 


HAVENS    PRACTICAL   PHONOGRAPH V. 


SIGN.  LINE.  PAGE. 

writer 183         23  121 

writers(the) 12  159 

write  them 18  225 

writing 182         23  131 

writing  letters 36          5  133 

written 142         18  135 

wrong 17  219 

X  (the  initial) 105 

Y(the  initial) 105 

Yay 33 

year 12  74 

yearly 67  .       5  7» 

years 66          5  78 

years  ago i  249 

yell ii          2  119 

yes 16  74 

yes  sir 17  74 

yesterday 5  88 

yesterday's 266         15  96 

yet 15  71 

yet  the 12  78 

yield 23          2  64 

yielded 31           4  121 

yielding 7  275 

yoke 34          5  121 

yon 98         13  131 

yonder 59          8  137 

yore 124         16  119 

you 13  74 

you  admit  that 15  209 

youareat 18  151 

you  are  in  a 6  157 

you  are  positive  that  you ii  209 

you  are  reading 5  185 

you  are  the  plaintiff  in  this  suit  5  177 

you  asked  him 16  213 

you  can 94         12  133 

youcanbe 112         14  121 

you  can  have 31           4  137 

you  do 95         12  121 

you  did  not  notice 13  203 

you  gave 20  147 

you  had  the  money 18  155 

you  have  been 43          6  123 

you  have  had 4  237 

you  have  said 5  221 

you  knew 2  197 

you  know  the 12  177 

.  you  may 174         22  129 

you  may  as  well  have 56           7  133 

you  may  be  certain 5           i  °6 

youmayhave in          14  125 

you  may  have  it 3  157 

you  misunderstood  the  question  6  199 

you  must 78          7  94 

•vou  must  be 79          7  94 


SIGN.   LINE.  PAGE. 

you  must  have 80          8  94 

you  must  have  been 59           8  119 

youmustnot 164         21  119 

you  must  not  be 90         12  135 

you  must  not  have 23           3  137 

youmustnot  talk 19  243 

young 6  74 

your  17  74 

yourbusmess 7  iSi 

you  read 261         12  96 

your  early  attention 2  is? 

you  refer 8  217 

your  favor 4  147 

your   favor   of   recent  date  re- 
ceived   62          8  119 

your  invoice 6  149 

yom  judgments 5  22^ 

your  letter 2  147 

your  letter  bearing  date  of  the 

15  inst.  athand. 8           i  137 

your  next  lesson 164         19  86 

your  own 12  15; 

yours 20          2  78 

yourself 214          6  114 

yourselves 216           7  114 

your  signature 12  191 

yours  of  the  gth  inst.  athand.. .  20           3  123 

yours  of  today's  mail  received..  7           i  129 

yours  truly 13  145 

your  terms 3  149 

your  territory n  153 

your  testimony 4  205 

you  saw  him 7  193 

you  say 17  213 

you  send  out 7  155 

you  sent 5  153 

you  shall 100         13  127 

you  shall  have 70           9  123 

youth 34           5  31 

you  think 172         22  129 

you  took 16  165 

you  will 154         20  119 

you  will  also 5  153 

you  will  be 184         23  127 

you  will  do 7           i  135 

you  will  have  been 43           6  129 

you  will  observe .  9  157 

you  will  take  this  case 8  225 

you  will  understand 19  157 

Z 33 

Z  (theinitial) 105 

Zabrisky 10  151 

zeal i  275 

Zhee  (the  letter) 33 

zither 82           6  64 

& 33 


THE    END. 


JHauer/s 


Practical  Phonography 
Actual  Bookkeeping 


$2.00 
1.50 
1.00 


C0/T\plete       \  Modern  Journalism 

( Including  Typewriting,  ) 

~r        L  PV         ,        /  Business  Correspondences  penmanship,  spemng,[  .50 

I    ^Yt"     I^O^LfR   I  Punctuation,  etc. 

J  t&A*.  LJUUryo  \  Shorthand  &  Typewriting  Speed  Readers, each,  .10 

Sent  promptly  on  receipt  of  price.     Never  sent  C.  O.  D.  nor  for  examination. 

Remit  to  CURTIS  HAVEN,  P.  O.  Box  1162,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


•'r'  W 

#-      1ft  «<# 


Form  L9-10m-3,'48(A7920)444 


UNIVERSITY  of  CAUFOKWu 

A'1 
LOS  A" 


i££ASSS!SS8*  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A     000  571  380     5 


